Technical Manual PDF
Uploaded by
Manuel AlipTechnical Manual PDF
Uploaded by
Manuel AlipHAMANN AG
Bei der Lehmkuhle 4
D-21279 Hollenstedt
Tel: +49-(0)4165-2211-0
E-Mail: [email protected]
www.HamannAG.com
Technical Manual
for installation, operation and maintenance of
Sewage Treatment Plant
HL-Cont PLUS 025
Serial No.: 10884
Date of issue: 12.06.2017
Content
I. INTRODUCTION
Plant components list
P&ID (Piping and Instrumentation Diagram)
Additional important Information
• Basic rules and regulations about storage, installation and commissioning of
sewage treatment plants and their components.
• Important Information about International Convention for the Prevention of Pollu-
tion from Ships (MARPOL)
II. INSTALLATION-, OPERATING- AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
Complete information about installing the plant on board, functional description of the
plant and important safety, operating and maintenance instructions
III. OPERATION OF TOUCH PANEL
Information about functions and messages of touch sensitive screen.
IV. COMPONENTS
1. Macerator (A-1-Z-080)
2. Feeding pump (A-1-P-050)
3. Clear phase pump (A-1-P-150)
4. Dosing pump, flocculant (A-1-P-350)
5. Level sensor, flocculant (A-1-CL-360)
6. Sludge pump (A-1-P-250)
7. Pressure sensor, saturator (A-1-CP-062)
8. Level sensor, flotation tank (A-1-CP-160)
9. Pressure release valve (A-1-H-004)
Positioner (A-1-H-004)
10884_Content_HL-Cont_PLUS_025_e3.fm / 12.6.17
Distance transmitter (A-1-H-004)
10. Ball valve, outlet sludge (A-1-B-202)
Ball valve, manual drain (A-1-B-203)
Ball valve, inlet sludge pump (A-1-B-204)
11. 3-way valve overboard/circulation (A-1-V-100)
3-way valve, sludge (A-1-V-201)
12. Swivel drive, pneumatic single acting for:
Ball valve, outlet sludge (A-1-B-202)
3-way valve, overboard/circulation (A-1-V-100)
3-way valve, sludge (A-1-V-201)
Content
13. End position switch for:
Ball valve, outlet sludge (A-1-B-202)
3-way valve overboard/circulation (A-1-V-100)
3-way valve, sludge (A-1-V-201)
14. UV-disinfection plant (A-1-C-180)
15. Air distribution unit (A-1-A-580)
16. Control valve, dry running protection (A-1-V-401)
Control valve, cleaning flotation tank (A-1-V-402)
17. Control valve, outlet sludge (A-1-V-403)
Control valve, sludge (A-1-V-404)
Control valve, overboard/circulation (A-1-V-405)
18. Pneumatic valve, dry running protection (A-1-B-401)
Pneumatic valve, cleaning flotation tank (A-1-B-402)
19. Level sensor, saturator (A-1-CL-060)
20. Level sensor, sludge flotation tank (A-1-CL-260)
21. Swing check valve, circulation line (A-1-R-101)
22. Non return valve, saturator sewage (A-1-R-003)
23. Safety valve (A-1-S-005)
24. Sample cock (A-1-B-102)
25. Non return valve, saturator (A-1-R-502)
26. Discharge pump (A-1-P-251)
27. Level sensor, holding tank (A-1-CL-063)
Level sensor, sludge tank (A-1-CL-261)
V. ELECTRICAL PLANS
10884_Content_HL-Cont_PLUS_025_e3.fm / 12.6.17
Plant components list (from order parts list) HAMANN AG
Description: Sewage Treatment Plant (set) Date: 12.06.2017
HL-CONT Plus 025 Order: NS-67008214-0010
This list includes the main plant components with their part number and reference code.
Part No. Description Reference code
014407 Dosing station A-1-P-350/A-380/CL-360
25 L / 0-2 l/h
014145 Control system, Sewage Treatment Plant -
HL-Cont Plus 025/05/10
001363 Process pressure transmitter A-1-CL-063/261
BAR 17 (0...0,25 bar)
000124 Macerator A-1-Z-080
ABM 2 S
014807 Eccentric screw pump A-1-P-050
NX600-025/60
008336 2/2-way valve, direct acting A-1-B-401
DG2D3 G3/4" DN20
013917 3-Way solenoid valve A-1-V-401
VT307K-5D1-01F-Q
010348 Rotary Lobe Pump A-1-P-251
AL 25 (4 m³ DN 40)
Plant components List (from Standard Parts List) HAMANN AG
Description: Dosing station Date: 12.06.2017
25 L / 0-2 l/h
Part No.: 014407 Standard Parts List index: 031
This list includes the main assembly group components with their part number and reference code.
Part No. Description Reference code
014409 VG DS25 Holder Canister A-1-A-380/CL-360
008338 Canister, plastic A-1-B-330
EST 25
015499 Suction set with level switch A-1-A-380/CL-360
PPE 6 x 4 / 580 mm / d=50 mm
013882 Dosing peristaltic pump A-1-P-350
Kronos 50; 230 V
Pre-assembled assembly group from order LA-40002186; Part No. 014576
Part No. Description Reference code
014659 Flotation tank A-1-B-031
HL-CONT Plus 025
014620 Saturator Type 8 A-1-B-030
011096 UV set (w/o sensor muffle, without el. Ballast) A-1-C-180
2500 230E 90W M + 1/2"
013822 Eccentric screw pump with mounted frequency inverter A-1-P-150
NX600-025/FU
014554 Screw Pump, self priming A-1-P-250
MVI 20 230/400V 50Hz
015346 Membrane/Diaphragm valve A-1-H-004
695 DN20 (PP)
013600 Ball valve, 2-way with pneumatic actuator A-1-B-202
BV25 EE(HE)620702
010460 Ball valve, 2-way A-1-B-204
ZK311004 DN 25
008039 Ball valve, 2-way A-1-B-203
ZK311003 DN 20
003595 Swing check valve A-1-R-101
RSK 920-DN032 PP/EPDM/1.4571
014175 Ball valve, 3-way with pneumatic actuator (clockwise) A-1-V-100/V-201
ZD311504 + EE(HE)620852(T-configuration in pos. 3)
005230 End position switch A-1-V-100/V-201/B-202
PE080303
005271 Dosing valve A-1-V-300
8x5 PPE
007947 Back flow protection A-1-R-003
RV508 DN25 1" PN10
014510 Safety valve A-1-S-005
06011; Za G1/2_Mu Rc3/8 7,5bar
001783 Ball valve with sealed elbow A-1-B-102
ZG311023-PROBE
015122 Non return valve A-1-R-502
INA-14-47-02
014562 Pressure sensor A-1-CP-062
PT5404 (0...10 bar)
005232 Manometer, Bourdon tube A-1-CP-061
0 ...10 bar; radial 1/4"
010536 Level sensor A-1-CL-260
LMT100
015316 Process pressure transmitter A-1-CP-160
BAR 14 (X1SA1G2N; 0...0,1 bar)
014709 3/2 Way solenoid valve A-1-V-403/V-404/V-405
VFN212N-5YO-02F-Q
015274 3-Way solenoid valve A-1-V-402
VT307K-5DO1-01F-Q
008336 2/2-way valve, direct acting A-1-B-402
DG2D3 G3/4" DN20
014711 Silencer A-1-V-403/V-404/V-405
AN15-02
015088 Compressed air distribution unit A-1-A-580/CP-560/R-501
KCFXZS.11 G HA3
014732 Manifold 6- fold A-1-A-580
IQSLV6 146
015627 Level sensor A-1-CL-060
LMT102
005250 Distance transmitter A-1-H-004
Weg4232
008896 Positioner A-1-H-004
1434
HAMANN AG
Bei der Lehmkuhle 4, D-21279 Hollenstedt, Tel: +49-(0)4165-2211-0, Fax: +49-(0)4165-2211-25
eMail: [email protected]
IMPORTANT INFORMATION
about storage, installation and commissioning of sewage treatment plants and their components.
Non-observance can lead to damages and malfunctioning as well as the loss of warranty.
STORAGE:
Each component of the sewage treatment plant has certain requirements regarding their storage, handling and
inspection. The following instructions are to be observed:
Storage requirements before and after installation:
• Protected or enclosed dry areas or rooms, 5 ... 25°C, optimal temperature is +15°C, not in close proximity to
heat emitting or ozone generating sources or substances.
• No ultraviolet light, no pollution materials such as dust or small particles coming from welding, sand blasting or
etc. No moisture or condensation on the elastomer is permitted.
• No storage in close proximity to solvents, petrol, lubricants, acids, disinfectants or other chemicals.
• The plants and their tanks must be stored completely empty, up until final commissioning.
Elastomer products and plastics:
(Stator, joint sleeves, splash rings, shaft seals, o-rings, hoses and adapters, mechanical seals, etc.)
• Properly stored elastomer products in enclosed or protected areas will maintain their original quality over
extended periods of time. The original quality can be effected through oxygen, ozone, heat, light, moisture, sol-
vents or storage under pressure, stress or strain.
• All elastomer products are not covered through warranty because of aging or extended storage periods.
Pump's stator
For plants, which are to be in storage for long extended periods of time between delivery and final commissioning,
the stator should be disassembled from the pumps and be stored in a dry place. The regulations and instructions
in accordance with the corresponding component's maintenance and operating instructions for disassembly and
re-assembly of the pump's stator must be observed. Stators, which are to be in storage for more than 3 years must
be properly inspected and controlled before use (because of possible material fissure).
INSTALLATION:
The instructions and regulations contained in HAMANN AG's „Technical Manual for Installation, Operation and
Maintenance“ must be observed. Specific „Installation Instructions“ are contained in the above mentioned Tech-
nical Manual. These Installation Instructions can be provided separately.
During the installation of separately delivered components such as Transfer Pumps, Sludge Pumps or Dry Run-
ning Protection Pumps, the correct execution of the connection piping in accordance with the corresponding com-
ponent's maintenance and operating instructions must be observed. HAMANN AG should be consulted for
specialised installations.
Avoidable mistakes by the installation:
• On the tanks and the piping of the plant systems, extra welding is not permitted and may not be undertaken,
otherwise the inner coating of the tank will be damaged.
• For ships having CuNiFe piping, the piping of the sewage treatment system must be suitably isolated.
• The construction of the sewage treatment systems may not be modified or changed without prior consultation.
• Without consultation, no extra component that was not delivered through HAMANN AG may be connected to
the sewage treatment system.
• The power supply of the electrical power grid may not deviate from the contract specifications of the sewage
treatment system.
• The pumping characteristics of the pumps (i.e. self-priming or not self-priming) must be observed when install-
ing the piping system. Corresponding free flow is be assured.
Info_Storage+Installation_e9.fm / 11.5.17
COMMISSIONING:
Prior to commissioning HAMANN AG must be consulted. The regulations and instructions in the Technical Manual
must be observed. It is recommended that the commissioning be completed by a service technician from
HAMANN AG. The safety regulations and instructions (Safety Data Sheets) are to be observed. For on board op-
eration the required consumables (such as flocculant) must be available.
Avoidable mistakes by the commissioning:
• The power supply (also those connected to land based power grids) grid may not deviate from the contract
specifications of the sewage treatment system.
• Pumps which are not self-priming may not be allowed to run dry. Free flow in the piping system is to be
assured. Dry running protection equipment must be de-aerated.
HAMANN AG
Bei der Lehmkuhle 4, D-21279 Hollenstedt
Tel.:+49-(04165)-2211-0, E-Mail: [email protected]
All Information listed below is to be regarded exclusively as general
and non binding information by HAMANN with no claim of its correct-
ness and integrity and no responsibility is taken for it.
IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT
INTERNATIONAL CONVENTION FOR THE
PREVENTION OF POLLUTION FROM SHIPS
(MARPOL)
Adoption: 1973 (Convention), 1978 (1978 Protocol), 1997 (Protocol - Annex VI);
Entry into force: 2 October 1983 (Annexes I and II).
The International Convention for the Prevention of Pollution from Ships (MARPOL) is the main international con-
vention covering prevention of pollution of the marine environment by ships from operational or accidental causes.
The MARPOL Convention was adopted on 2 November 1973 at IMO. The Protocol of 1978 was adopted in re-
sponse to a spate of tanker accidents in 1976-1977. As the 1973 MARPOL Convention had not yet entered into
force, the 1978 MARPOL Protocol absorbed the parent Convention. The combined instrument entered into force
on 2 October 1983. In 1997, a Protocol was adopted to amend the Convention and a new Annex VI was added
which entered into force on 19 May 2005. MARPOL has been updated by amendments through the years.
The Convention includes regulations aimed at preventing and minimizing pollution from ships - both accidental
pollution and that from routine operations - and currently includes six technical Annexes. Special Areas with strict
controls on operational discharges are included in most Annexes.
ANNEX I REGULATIONS FOR THE PREVENTION OF POLLUTION BY OIL (ENTERED INTO
FORCE 2 OCTOBER 1983)
Covers prevention of pollution by oil from operational measures as well as from accidental discharges; the 1992
amendments to Annex I made it mandatory for new oil tankers to have double hulls and brought in a phase-in
schedule for existing tankers to fit double hulls, which was subsequently revised in 2001 and 2003.
ANNEX II REGULATIONS FOR THE CONTROL OF POLLUTION BY NOXIOUS LIQUID
SUBSTANCES IN BULK (ENTERED INTO FORCE 2 OCTOBER 1983)
Details the discharge criteria and measures for the control of pollution by noxious liquid substances carried in bulk;
some 250 substances were evaluated and included in the list appended to the Convention; the discharge of their
residues is allowed only to reception facilities until certain concentrations and conditions (which vary with the cat-
egory of substances) are complied with.
In any case, no discharge of residues containing noxious substances is permitted within 12 miles of the nearest
land.
ANNEX III PREVENTION OF POLLUTION BY HARMFUL SUBSTANCES CARRIED BY SEA
IN PACKAGED FORM (ENTERED INTO FORCE 1 JULY 1992)
Contains general requirements for the issuing of detailed standards on packing, marking, labeling, documentation,
stowage, quantity limitations, exceptions and notifications.
For the purpose of this Annex, „harmful substances“ are those substances which are identified as marine pollut-
ants in the International Maritime Dangerous Goods Code (IMDG Code) or which meet the criteria in the Appendix
of Annex III.
ANNEX IV PREVENTION OF POLLUTION BY SEWAGE FROM SHIPS (ENTERED INTO
FORCE 27 SEPTEMBER 2003)
Contains requirements to control pollution of the sea by sewage; the discharge of sewage into the sea is prohib-
Info_MEPC_e1.fm / 11.5.17
ited, except when the ship has in operation an approved sewage treatment plant or when the ship is discharging
comminuted and disinfected sewage using an approved system at a distance of more than three nautical miles
from the nearest land; sewage which is not comminuted or disinfected has to be discharged at a distance of more
than 12 nautical miles from the nearest land.
HAMANN AG
Bei der Lehmkuhle 4, D-21279 Hollenstedt
Tel.:+49-(04165)-2211-0, E-Mail: [email protected]
ANNEX V PREVENTION OF POLLUTION BY GARBAGE FROM SHIPS (ENTERED INTO
FORCE 31 DECEMBER 1988)
Deals with different types of garbage and specifies the distances from land and the manner in which they may be
disposed of; the most important feature of the Annex is the complete ban imposed on the disposal into the sea of
all forms of plastics.
The revised Annex V has been adopted by resolution MEPC.200(62) on the 15.07.2011.
ANNEX VI PREVENTION OF AIR POLLUTION FROM SHIPS (ENTERED INTO FORCE 19
MAY 2005)
Sets limits on sulphur oxide and nitrogen oxide emissions from ship exhausts and prohibits deliberate emissions
of ozone depleting substances; designated emission control areas set more stringent standards for SOx, NOx and
particulate matter. A chapter adopted in 2011 covers mandatory technical and operational energy efficiency mea-
sures aimed at reducing greenhouse gas emissions from ships.
Source:
http://www.imo.org/en/About/Conventions/ListOfConventions/Pages/International-Convention-for-the-
Prevention-of-Pollution-from-Ships-%28MARPOL%29.aspx
A complete list of MARPOL regulations can be found here
http://www.imo.org/en/KnowledgeCentre/IndexofIMOResolutions/Marine-Environment-Protection-Committee-
%28MEPC%29/Marine-nvironment-rotection-ommittee-MEPC%29-974-65-013/Pages/default.aspx
Following regulations are related to Annex IV, sewage.
MEPC.2(VI)
Recommendation on international effluent standards and guidelines for performance tests for sewage treatment
plants
http://www.imo.org/blast/blastDataHelper.asp?data_id=15319&filename=2%286%29.pdf
MEPC 2 was superseded by MEPC 159
MEPC.159(55)
Revised guidelines on implementation of effluent standards and performance tests for sewage treatment plants
http://www.imo.org/blast/blastDataHelper.asp?data_id=16317&filename=159%2855%29.pdf
MEPC 159 was superseded by MEPC 227
MEPC.227(64)
2012 Guidelines on implementation of effluent standards and performance tests for sewage treatment plants
http://www.imo.org/en/KnowledgeCentre/IndexofIMOResolutions/Documents/MEPC%20-
%20Marine%20Environment%20Protection/227%2864%29.pdf
MEPC 2,159 and 227 are regulations which are defining the test standards for sewage treatment plants and have
impact for the installation on board.
One special part is chapter 4.2, passenger ships operating in special areas. During MEPC 68 it was decided to
shift the decision (Status 04-2016)
Following corresponding dates for new builds (keel laying date) and retrofits (contractual agreed delivery date at
the yard needs to be considered:
MEPC 2 ' Installation possible up to 01-01-2010
MEPC 159 ' Installation possible up to 01-01-2016
For all installation from 01-01-2016 on a plant certified according to MEPC 227 must be installed.
MEPC 227 contains a chapter 4.2.
Existing installations are „grand fathered“, that means that if the installed plants certificate has been superseded
it can still be operated.
The discharge of treated sewage is mentioned in MEPC 115 (51)
Info_MEPC_e1.fm / 11.5.17
HAMANN AG
Bei der Lehmkuhle 4, D-21279 Hollenstedt
Tel.:+49-(04165)-2211-0, E-Mail: [email protected]
MEPC.115(51)
Amendments to the annex of the Protocol of 1978 relating to the International Convention for the Prevention of
Pollution from Ships, 1973
http://www.imo.org/blast/blastDataHelper.asp?data_id=15718&filename=115%2851%29.pdf
The basic meaning is:
• Regulation 9. All HAMANN systems comply to 9.1.1, so we have approved sewage treatment systems
• Regulation 11 discharge is prohibited, except when:
• 1.1 Discharge between 3-12 sm if they have a comminuting and disinfection system. THIS IS NOT US
• 1.2 Approved sewage treatment system, That is what we have.
So: Discharge without system only outside 12 sm, with comminuting and disinfection system discharge from 3 sm
on and with an approved plant from shore. But this is according to IMO, every local harbor can override this reg-
ulations and declare in its area any discharge as forbidden, like Monaco Harbor for example.
The discharge of untreated sewage is regulated in MEPC 157 (55).
MEPC.157(55)
Recommendation on standards for the rate of discharge of untreated sewage from ships
http://www.imo.org/blast/blastDataHelper.asp?data_id=16315&filename=157%2855%29.pdf
A recommendation about operation, inspection and maintenance of sewage systems on board can be found in
MEPC 53-16. This document gives recommendations handling of sewage on board and about the generation of
toxic gases in anaerobic conditions.
53rd session, Agenda Item 16
Guidelines for the operation, inspection and maintenance of ships sewage systems
OTHER IMO LINKS:
Prevention of Pollution by Sewage from Ships
http://www.imo.org/en/OurWork/Environment/PollutionPrevention/Sewage/Pages/Default.aspx
Special Areas under MARPOL
http://www.imo.org/en/OurWork/Environment/SpecialAreasUnderMARPOL/Pages/Default.aspx
Particularly Sensitive Sea Areas
http://www.imo.org/en/OurWork/Environment/PSSAs/Pages/Default.aspx
Guidelines for the operation, inspection and maintenance of ships sewage systems
https://docs.imo.org/Documents/Detail.aspx?did=30533
(registration required)
Info_MEPC_e1.fm / 11.5.17
Bei der Lehmkuhle 4
D-21279 Hollenstedt - Germany
Tel: +49-(0)4165 / 2211-0
E-Mail: [email protected]
www.HamannAG.com
Sewage treatment plant
Type: HL-Cont PLUS 025
Part No. 014576
Operating- and Maintenance Instruction
This instruction includes important safety information and instructions for commission-
ing, operation and maintenance of the sewage treatment plant. It is essential therefore, that
the responsible specialist refers to it before starting any work at the plant as well as prior
to commissioning. Furthermore, this instruction must always be available on site.
With reservation of technical modification
BG 0009 e 1 (40)
CONTENT
GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT THIS DOCUMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
ASSIGNMENT OF INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
INTENDED USE AND OPERATORS RESPONSIBILITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
VERSION OF THIS DOCUMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
DEPOSITORY OF OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
LABELLING OF ADVICE AND SAFETY ADVICE IN THIS DOCUMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
ACCENTUATION AND NOTATION OF SPECIFIC TEXT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
REFERENCE CODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
SAFETY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
LABELLING OF SAFETY ADVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
PERSONNEL QUALIFICATIONS AND TRAINING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
DANGERS RESULTING FROM FAILURE TO OBSERVE SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
SAFETY-CONSCIOUS WORKING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE USER/MACHINE OPERATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE, INSPECTION AND ASSEMBLY WORK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
UNAUTHORIZED MODIFICATIONS, MANUFACTURING OF REPLACEMENT PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
IMPERMISSIBLE MODES OF OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
FLOCCULANT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
OVERVIEW SEWAGE TREATMENT PLANT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
ASSEMBLY GROUP SEWAGE TREATMENT PLANT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
ASSEMBLY GROUP DOSING STATION, FLOCCULANT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
SEPARATE MOUNTED COMPONENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
STANDARD SCOPE OF SUPPLY: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
OPTIONAL SCOPE OF SUPPLY: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
FLOWCHART OF HL-CONT PLUS 025 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
STANDARD PIPING AND INSTRUMENTATION DIAGRAM (P&ID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
LEGEND FOR PIPING AND INSTRUMENTATION DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
PROCESS DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
TREATMENT PROCESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
UV-DISINFECTION PLANT (A-1-C-180). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
INACTIVITY/SWITCH OFF THE HL-CONT PLUS 025 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
OPTIONAL DISCHARGE PUMP (A-1-P-251) AND 3-WAY VALVE, DISCHARGE (A-1-V-204) . . . 19
OPTIONAL 3-WAY VALVE SLUDGE CIRCULATION (A-1-V-205) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
OPTIONAL MACERATOR (A-1-Z-080). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
TECHNICAL DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
TYPE PLATE (AT SWITCH CABINET). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
ELECTRICAL DATA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
WEIGHTS AND DIMENSIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
CONSUMPTION FLOCCULANT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
AMBIENT CONDITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
PLANT CAPACITY/DESIGN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
TRANSPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
MOUNTING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
PIPING AND HOSE CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
INLET BLACK AND GREY WATER (A-1-R-001) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
CONNECTION, CIRCULATION LINE (A-1-R-100) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
OUTLET CLEAR PHASE (A-1-R-105) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
BALL VALVE, OUTLET SLUDGE (A-1-B-202) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
FLUSHING WATER CONNECTION (A-1-R-400). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
OUTLET DRY RUNNING PROTECTION (A-1-R-401) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
DOSING VALVE, FLOCCULANT (A-1-V-300) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
DOSING PUMP, FLOCCULANT (A-1-P-350) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Sewage treatment plant HL-Cont PLUS 025 Part No. 014576 3 (40)
VENT, FLOTATION TANK (A-1-R-600) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
CONNECTION WORKING AIR (A-1-R-500) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
CONNECTION WORKING AIR FOR CONTROL VALVE (A-1-R-504) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
OPTIONAL 3-WAY VALVE, DISCHARGE (A-1-V-204) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
OPTIONAL 3-WAY VALVE SLUDGE CIRCULATION (A-1-V-205) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
DIMENSIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
ASSEMBLY GROUP SEWAGE TREATMENT PLANT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
ASSEMBLY GROUP DOSING STATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
OPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
DRY RUNNING PROTECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
LEVEL SENSOR, HOLDING TANK (A-1-CL-063) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
MACERATOR (A-1-Z-080) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
LEVEL SENSOR, SLUDGE TANK (A-1-CL-261) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
3-WAY VALVE SLUDGE CIRCULATION (A-1-V-205) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
DISCHARGE STATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
GREASE SEPARATOR (A-1-B-650) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
SEWAGE TANK AERATION SYSTEM FOR SHIPS HOLDING TANK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
COMMON ALARMS AND WARNINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
INITIAL COMMISSIONING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
OPERATING/CONTROL ELEMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
DRAINING THE PLANT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
CLEANING AT DOWN TIME LONGER THAN TWO WEEKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
WINTER HOLDING TIME. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
COMPONENTS LIST AND CONSUMABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
COMPONENTS LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
CONSUMABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
APPENDIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
4 (40) Sewage treatment plant HL-Cont PLUS 025 Part No. 014576
General information about this document
1. GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT THIS DOCUMENT
1.1 ASSIGNMENT OF INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT
This document contains information for installation personnel, operator/maintainer
and for service personnel.
In addition to this document the appended documents for all components of the Sew-
age Treatment Plant have to be observed!
Personnel charged with installation, operation, maintenance, inspection and assem-
bly must be in possession of the appropriate qualifications. Please also refer also to
section 2.2 on page 7.
1.2 INTENDED USE AND OPERATORS RESPONSIBILITY
The Sewage Treatment Plant may only be operated on vessels for treatment of sew-
age within range of performance that is described in this document. See section
"Plant capacity/design" on page 22 and "System description" on page 9.
The Sewage Treatment Plant may only be used together with auxiliary equipment
that is recommended and admitted by HAMANN AG.
For security reasons the Sewage Treatment Plant may not be reconstructed or mod-
ified. If any modification of the system is required, HAMANN AG is to be consulted.
The operator/operating company is bound to report all changes that will effect the
good condition and safety of the system immediately. This applies in particular re-
garding an asserting of warranty and warranty claims.
The Sewage Treatment Plant is manufactured state-of-the-art and is safe to operate.
It may be installed, taken into operation and function properly when it is ensured that
all information and recommendations in this document are taken into consideration.
1.3 VERSION OF THIS DOCUMENT
• File name with version information:
General_Information_HL-Cont plus_025_014576_e6.fm
General_Information_HL-Cont plus_025_014576_e6.fm / 22.2.2017
• Release date: 22.2.2017
File name with version and release date are given at the inner side of each page of
this document.
1.4 DEPOSITORY OF OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
The Operating and Maintenance Instruction is delivered as paper hardcopy by indi-
vidual shipment. It must always be available on site.
This document is also available as PDF file by E-mail. If you may need it, please con-
tact HAMANN AG.
A paper hardcopy of the electrical diagrams can be found inside of the switch cabinet.
1.5 SAFETY INFORMATION
Section 2. "Safety" on page 7 and all other safety advise given in this document must
be observed.
Sewage treatment plant HL-Cont PLUS 025 Part No. 014576 5 (40)
General information about this document
1.6 LABELLING OF ADVICE AND SAFETY ADVICE IN THIS DOCUMENT
Important safety advice. Non-observance of safety instructions could lead to danger
of life or limb:
Warnings regarding electric power equipment. Non-observance of safety instruc-
tions could lead to danger of life or limb:
Safety instructions whose non-observance could jeopardize the system/machine
and its functions:
Important additional information to ensure optimal function and maximum perfor-
mance:
1.7 ACCENTUATION AND NOTATION OF SPECIFIC TEXT
• Designations out of the electrical diagram in square brackets.
Example: [7K1]
• Switches/switch positions and signal lamps on and inside of switch cabinets in
capital letters.
Example: M AI N S W I T C H O F F
General_Information_HL-Cont plus_025_014576_e6.fm / 22.2.2017
• Reference code out of the Piping and Instrumentation Diagram (P&ID) in brack-
ets.
Example: Feeding pump (A-1-P-050)
1.8 REFERENCE CODE
The reference code (e.g. A-1-C-180) is an unique identification code for all main
components and piping connections of the HL-Cont PLUS 025 plant.
Please also refer to sections:
• "Standard Piping and Instrumentation diagram (P&ID)" on page 15
• "legend for piping and instrumentation diagram" on page 16
• "Piping and hose connections" on page 25
6 (40) Sewage treatment plant HL-Cont PLUS 025 Part No. 014576
Safety
2. SAFETY
This document provides basic information about operation and maintenance of the
plant and its components, and must be read by the mechanical fitter and by the tech-
nical personnel/operator, responsible for the plant prior to assembly and commis-
sioning. It should be kept at the operating site of the device or near the plant at all
times.
Compliance is required not only with the General Safety Instructions given in this
section but also with the detailed instructions given under appendix and all other
chapters/sections.
2.1 LABELLING OF SAFETY ADVICE
See section "Labelling of advice and safety advice in this document" on page 6.
2.2 PERSONNEL QUALIFICATIONS AND TRAINING
Personnel charged with operation, maintenance, inspection and assembly must be
in possession of the appropriate qualifications. The company operating the machine
must define exact areas of responsibility, accountabilities and personnel supervision
schemes.
Personnel lacking the required skills and knowledge must receive training and in-
struction. If necessary, the operating company may commission the manufacturer or
supplier to conduct training courses.
Furthermore, the operating company must ensure that the personnel fully under-
stand the contents of the operating instructions.
2.3 DANGERS RESULTING FROM FAILURE TO OBSERVE SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Failure to comply with safety Instructions may lead to danger of life or limb as well as
environmental hazards or system/device malfunctions. Non-observance of Safety In-
structions may invalidate the right of claim to damages. Some examples of danger
resulting from failure to comply are as follows:
General_Information_HL-Cont plus_025_014576_e6.fm / 22.2.2017
• Failure of important machine/plant functions
• Failure to follow prescribed methods of service and maintenance
• Danger to life and limb due to electrical, mechanical or chemical influences
• Danger to the environment due to leakage of hazardous substances
2.4 SAFETY-CONSCIOUS WORKING
Always comply with the safety instructions listed in this document, the existing na-
tional accident prevention regulations and any operating and safety rules relative to
a ship's internal work.
2.5 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE USER/MACHINE OPERATOR
• Any potentially hazardous hot or cold machine parts must be provided with pro-
tection against accidental contact.
• Protective guards for moving parts (e.g. coupling) must never be removed while
the system is in operation.
Sewage treatment plant HL-Cont PLUS 025 Part No. 014576 7 (40)
Safety
• Leakage's (e.g. in the shaft seal) of hazardous conveying liquids (e.g. toxic)
must be drained in such a way that no danger arises for persons or the environ-
ment. Always observe the relevant statutory requirements.
• The risk of exposure to electrical power must be eliminated. For details see the
electrical installation regulations of your classification society and/or national
regulations.
• When handling or storing materials labelled as hazardous, always follow appro-
priate precautionary methods, handling techniques and regulatory information,
and use appropriate protective clothing such as gloves or safety glasses.
• In cases of emergency, such as for first aid measures, medical help, exposure
control, accidental release or fire consult the Material Safety Data Sheets of
used substances delivered by the manufacturer.
2.6 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE, INSPECTION AND ASSEMBLY WORK
The operator must ensure that all tasks relative to maintenance, inspection and as-
sembly are carried out by authorized and qualified personnel who have studied the
operating instructions closely and become sufficiently familiar with the machine.
As a basic rule, the machine must be brought to a standstill before work is carried
out; and the risk of exposure to electrical power must be eliminated. Always comply
with the de-commissioning procedures described in this document.
Any pumps or assemblies conveying media that are detrimental to health must be
decontaminated.
Immediately following completion of work, all safety and protective devices must be
replaced to their proper position and, where applicable, re-activated.
2.7 UNAUTHORIZED MODIFICATIONS, MANUFACTURING OF REPLACEMENT PARTS
Conversions or modifications of or for the machine are permissible only after consul-
tation with HAMANN AG. Original manufacturer replacement parts and manufactur-
er-approved accessories enhance the operational safety of the machine.
Using unauthorized parts may lead to the nullification of the manufacturer's li-
ability of any resultant damages.
General_Information_HL-Cont plus_025_014576_e6.fm / 22.2.2017
2.8 IMPERMISSIBLE MODES OF OPERATION
The operational safety of system and its devices are under warranty only when being
operated as defined in the operating instruction. Never allow the specified threshold
values to be exceeded. See section "Technical data" on page 20.
2.9 FLOCCULANT
Always observe the Material Safety Data Sheet from the manufacturer that
comes along with the used chemical product!
8 (40) Sewage treatment plant HL-Cont PLUS 025 Part No. 014576
System description
3. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
3.1 OVERVIEW SEWAGE TREATMENT PLANT
3.1.1 ASSEMBLY GROUP SEWAGE TREATMENT PLANT
Vent, flotation tank UV-disinfection
(A-1-R-600) plant (A-1-C-180)
Level sensor, sludge
flotation tank (A-1-CL- Terminal box
260)
Flushing water con-
nection (A-1-R-400)
General_Information_HL-Cont plus_025_014576_e6.fm / 22.2.2017
Air distribution unit
(A-1-A-580)
Dosing valve, floc-
Outlet, culant (A-1-V-300)
Sludge
Pressure release
valve (A-1-H-004)
Sludge pump Outlet clear phase
(A-1-P-250) (A-1-R-105)
Level sensor, saturator
Outlet service draining (A-1-CL-060)
(A-1-R-103)
Figure above: Front view (drawing 01-025-00006-0-01000)
Sewage treatment plant HL-Cont PLUS 025 Part No. 014576 9 (40)
System description
Clear phase pump
(A-1-P-150)
Outlet clear phase
(A-1-R-105)
3-way valve, sludge
(A-1-V-201)
3-way valve
overboard/cir-
culation (A-1-V-
100)
Ball valve, outlet
sludge (A-1-B-
202)
Ball valve, inlet sludge pump
(A-1-B-204)
Outlet service draining General_Information_HL-Cont plus_025_014576_e6.fm / 22.2.2017
(A-1-R-104)
Level sensor, flotation
tank (A-1-CP-160)
Figure above: Rear view 1 (drawing 01-025-00006-0-01000)
10 (40) Sewage treatment plant HL-Cont PLUS 025 Part No. 014576
System description
3-way valve, sludge (A-
1-V-201)
Non return valve, sat-
urator sewage (A-1-
R-003)
Level sensor, flotation
tank (A-1-CP-160)
General_Information_HL-Cont plus_025_014576_e6.fm / 22.2.2017
Flushing water connec- Inlet black and grey
tion (A-1-R-400) water (A-1-R-001)
Connection, Circulation Ball valve, outlet sludge
line (A-1-R-100) (A-1-B-202)
Ball valve, inlet sludge pump
(A-1-B-204)
Figure above: Rear view 2 (drawing 01-025-00006-0-01000)
Sewage treatment plant HL-Cont PLUS 025 Part No. 014576 11 (40)
System description
Non return valve saturator,
pneumatic (A-1-R-501) Safety valve (A-1-S-005)
Pressure gauge, sat-
urator (A-1-CP-061)
Pressure sensor, sat-
urator (A-1-CP-062)
Level sensor,
saturator (A-1-
CL-060)
General_Information_HL-Cont plus_025_014576_e6.fm / 22.2.2017
Figure above: Detail view saturator (drawing 01-025-00006-0-01000)
12 (40) Sewage treatment plant HL-Cont PLUS 025 Part No. 014576
System description
3.1.2 ASSEMBLY GROUP DOSING STATION, FLOCCULANT
Container, flocculant (A-1-
B-330)
Dosing pump, flocculant
(A-1-P-350)
Suction set flocculant
(A-1-A-380)
Level sensor, flocculant
(A-1-CL-360)
Figure above: Drawing 01-000-00066-0-01000
3.1.3 SEPARATE MOUNTED COMPONENTS
Delivered as loose items to be installed and connected according to Piping- and In-
strumentation Diagram (see 3.3 on page 15). For documentation please refer to
General_Information_HL-Cont plus_025_014576_e6.fm / 22.2.2017
chapter "Components".
STANDARD SCOPE OF SUPPLY:
• Feeding pump (A-1-P-050)
OPTIONAL SCOPE OF SUPPLY:
• Macerator (A-1-Z-080)
• Assembly group Discharge Station, consisting off
– Discharge pump (A-1-P-251)
– 3-way valve, discharge (A-1-V-204)
• 3-way valve sludge circulation (A-1-V-205)
• Grease Separator (A-1-B-650)
Sewage treatment plant HL-Cont PLUS 025 Part No. 014576 13 (40)
System description
3.2 FLOWCHART OF HL-CONT PLUS 025
Wastewater
Macerator (option)
Water
Feeding pump
time controlled circulation at start of plant
Working air Saturator
Pressure release
valve
Flocculant
Working air
Flotation tank
Water
General_Information_HL-Cont plus_025_014576_e6.fm / 22.2.2017
Sludge holding Clear phase
tank pump
3-way valve
Sludge pump
UV disinfection
plant
to ships sludge tank Treated water
Figure 1: Process description of wastewater in HL-Cont PLUS 025
14 (40) Sewage treatment plant HL-Cont PLUS 025 Part No. 014576
System description
3.3 STANDARD PIPING AND INSTRUMENTATION DIAGRAM (P&ID)
Order-specific P&ID see introduction of the order-specific Technical Manual.
General_Information_HL-Cont plus_025_014576_e6.fm / 22.2.2017
Sewage treatment plant HL-Cont PLUS 025 Part No. 014576 15 (40)
System description
3.4 LEGEND FOR PIPING AND INSTRUMENTATION DIAGRAM
Reference code Designation Option
A-1-A-380 Suction set flocculant (A-1-A-380)
A-1-A-480 Cleaning injector/nozzle, flotation tank (A-1-A-480)
A-1-A-580 Air distribution unit (A-1-A-580)
A-1-B-002 Ball valve, inlet sewage (A-1-B-002)
A-1-B-030 Saturator (A-1-B-030)
A-1-B-031 Flotation tank (A-1-B-031)
A-1-B-102 Sample cock (A-1-B-102)
A-1-B-202 Ball valve, outlet sludge (A-1-B-202)
A-1-B-203 Ball valve, manual drain (A-1-B-203)
A-1-B-204 Ball valve, inlet sludge pump (A-1-B-204)
A-1-B-330 Container, flocculant (A-1-B-330)
A-1-B-401 Pneumatic valve, dry running protection (A-1-B-401)
A-1-B-402 Pneumatic valve, cleaning flotation tank (A-1-B-402)
A-1-B-650 Grease Separator (A-1-B-650) x
A-1-C-180 UV-disinfection plant (A-1-C-180)
A-1-CL-060 Level sensor, saturator (A-1-CL-060)
A-1-CL-063 Level sensor, holding tank (A-1-CL-063) x
A-1-CL-260 Level sensor, sludge flotation tank (A-1-CL-260)
A-1-CL-261 Level sensor, sludge tank (A-1-CL-261) x
A-1-CL-360 Level sensor, flocculant (A-1-CL-360)
A-1-CP-061 Pressure gauge, saturator (A-1-CP-061)
A-1-CP-062 Pressure sensor, saturator (A-1-CP-062)
A-1-CP-160 Level sensor, flotation tank (A-1-CP-160)
General_Information_HL-Cont plus_025_014576_e6.fm / 22.2.2017
A-1-CP-560 Pressure switch, air supply (A-1-CP-560)
A-1-F-480 Strainer, seawater (A-1-F-480) x
A-1-H-004 Pressure release valve (A-1-H-004)
A-1-P-050 Feeding pump (A-1-P-050)
A-1-P-150 Clear phase pump (A-1-P-150)
A-1-P-250 Sludge pump (A-1-P-250)
A-1-P-251 Discharge pump (A-1-P-251) x
A-1-P-350 Dosing pump, flocculant (A-1-P-350)
A-1-P-450 Dry running protection & cleaning pump (A-1-P-450) x
A-1-R-001 Inlet black and grey water (A-1-R-001)
A-1-R-003 Non return valve, saturator sewage (A-1-R-003)
A-1-R-101 Swing check valve, circulation line (A-1-R-101)
A-1-R-103 Outlet service draining (A-1-R-103)
A-1-R-104 Outlet service draining (A-1-R-104)
16 (40) Sewage treatment plant HL-Cont PLUS 025 Part No. 014576
System description
(continued)
Reference code Designation Option
A-1-R-105 Outlet clear phase (A-1-R-105)
A-1-R-400 Flushing water connection (A-1-R-400)
A-1-R-500 Connection working air (A-1-R-500)
A-1-R-501 Ball valve saturator, pneumatic (A-1-R-501)
A-1-R-502 Non return valve, fixed bed cleaning (A-1-R-503)
A-1-R-600 Vent, flotation tank (A-1-R-600)
A-1-S-005 Safety valve (A-1-S-005)
A-1-V-100 3-way valve overboard/circulation (A-1-V-100)
A-1-V-201 3-way valve, sludge (A-1-V-201)
A-1-V-204 3-way valve, discharge (A-1-V-204) x
A-1-V-205 3-way valve sludge circulation (A-1-V-205) x
A-1-V-300 Dosing valve, flocculant (A-1-V-300)
A-1-V-401 Electro-pneumatic control valve for
Pneumatic valve, dry running protection (A-1-B-401)
A-1-V-402 Electro-pneumatic control valve for
Pneumatic valve, cleaning flotation tank (A-1-B-402)
A-1-V-403 Electro-pneumatic control valve for
Ball valve, outlet sludge (A-1-B-202)
A-1-V-404 Electro-pneumatic control valve for
3-way valve, sludge (A-1-V-201)
A-1-V-405 Electro-pneumatic control valve for
3-way valve overboard/circulation (A-1-V-100)
A-1-V-406 Electro-pneumatic control valve for x
3-way valve, discharge (A-1-V-204)
A-1-V-407 Electro-pneumatic control valve for x
3-way valve sludge circulation (A-1-V-205)
General_Information_HL-Cont plus_025_014576_e6.fm / 22.2.2017
A-1-Z-080 Macerator (A-1-Z-080) x
This piping and instrumentation diagram includes the complete
HL-Cont PLUS 025 plant including optional equipment.
The Piping and Instrumentation Diagram (PID) and a Plant Components List
with the order-specific configuration is available in the introduction of order-
specific Technical Manual.
Sewage treatment plant HL-Cont PLUS 025 Part No. 014576 17 (40)
System description
3.5 PROCESS DESCRIPTION
Black and grey waste water should be collected in a holding tank. When a certain
volume has been collected or a specific level has been reached, the sewage treat-
ment system will start automatically.
HL-Cont PLUS 025 operation begins with circulation. Treatment begins after a cer-
tain pre-set time has elapsed. The reason behind the holding time is to ensure the
build up of air bubbles in the Flotation tank (A-1-B-031) to reach its working intensity.
The Feeding pump (A-1-P-050) conveys the sewage water from the holding tank to
the Saturator (A-1-B-030). Furthermore, the Feeding pump (A-1-P-050) generates
the necessary working pressure of 5 bar in the Saturator (A-1-B-030). With additional
assistance through the Pressure release valve (A-1-H-004), the pre-adjusted pres-
sure will be held.
The pressure in the Saturator (A-1-B-030) is measured through the Pressure sensor,
saturator (A-1-CP-062). If the measured pressure is higher than the pre-adjusted or
set pressure, the Pressure release valve (A-1-H-004) will open a little. If the mea-
sured pressure is lower than the set pressure, the Pressure release valve (A-1-H-
004) will slightly close.
The Saturator (A-1-B-030) also prepares the sewage water for delivery to the Flota-
tion tank (A-1-B-031) by adding compressed air. With a pressure of 5 bar air is bond-
ed in water.
Beyond the Pressure release valve (A-1-H-004), the sewage water is relieved of
pressure and the excess air forms bubbles. With the addition of flocculant, the sep-
arate particles coalesce into larger flakes. The flakes combine together and with the
air bubbles, reducing the total density, thus allowing the flakes, particles and impuri-
ties to be lifted out through buoyancy.
TREATMENT PROCESS
At the top of the Flotation tank (A-1-B-031), sludge arises and is cleaned away peri-
odically.
The cycle time of the Clear phase pump (A-1-P-150) is set at 8 minutes.
After 8 minutes the Clear phase pump (A-1-P-150) is stopped until the start level is
reached. The start level is set so that only the foam in the Flotation tank (A-1-B-031)
General_Information_HL-Cont plus_025_014576_e6.fm / 22.2.2017
overflows.
Once the start level is reached, the Clear phase pump (A-1-P-150) will start.
The sludge in the sludge compartment tank will, upon reaching a certain level hold-
ing, be pumped with a Sludge pump (A-1-P-250) into a ship's sludge tank.
The pumping cycle is automatically controlled. After the Sludge pump (A-1-P-250)
has emptied the sludge compartment tank 20 times, and at the next transfer stop, the
3/2-way valve (A-1-V-201) will be opened to the Flotation tank (A-1-B-031) and the
collected particles will be discharged out to the sump of the Flotation tank (A-1-B-
031) into the ship's sludge tank. This routine last approx. 8 seconds.
By the stop level the Clear phase pump (A-1-P-150) will be protected from dry run-
ning.
UV-DISINFECTION PLANT (A-1-C-180)
The clear phase will be pumped from the lower area of the Flotation tank (A-1-B-031)
through the Clear phase pump (A-1-P-150) into the UV-disinfection plant (A-1-C-
180), which will deactivate the bacteria.
18 (40) Sewage treatment plant HL-Cont PLUS 025 Part No. 014576
System description
INACTIVITY/SWITCH OFF THE HL-CONT PLUS 025
The Flotation tank (A-1-B-031) and the sludge compartment tank will be cleaned.
• Time: 2 sec.
The Flotation tank (A-1-B-031) will be cleaned with Cleaning injector/nozzle, flotation
tank (A-1-A-480) in the upper area after the Feeding pump (A-1-P-050) has been
stopped. The water flows per gravity into the sludge compartment tank and provides
for cleaning. The Sludge pump (A-1-P-250) starts and transfers the particles into the
ship's sludge tank.
OPTIONAL DISCHARGE PUMP (A-1-P-251) AND 3-WAY VALVE, DISCHARGE (A-1-
V-204)
An optional Discharge pump (A-1-P-251) allows discharge of the sewage from the
holding tank and sludge from a ship's sludge tank overboard.
In a suitable area the plant can be switched from TREATMENT MODE into DIS-
CHARGE MODE.
OPTIONAL 3-WAY VALVE SLUDGE CIRCULATION (A-1-V-205)
An optional 3-way valve sludge circulation (A-1-V-205) allows a controlled circulation
of sludge that is collected inside of ships sludge tank. Hereby is ensured that the
sludge will not settle and harden.
OPTIONAL MACERATOR (A-1-Z-080)
Through the Macerator (A-1-Z-080) in the suction line, the solids in the waste water
will be reduced to 1 mm pieces. This conditioning is for safety reasons, serving to re-
duce clogging throughout the system.
Required if non-macerating toilets are installed on board.
General_Information_HL-Cont plus_025_014576_e6.fm / 22.2.2017
Sewage treatment plant HL-Cont PLUS 025 Part No. 014576 19 (40)
System description
3.6 TECHNICAL DATA
TYPE PLATE (AT SWITCH CABINET)
%HLGHU/HKPNXKOH' +ROOHQVWHGW*HUPDQ\
7KLVXQLWLV,02FHUWLILHG DFFRUGLQJWR0(3& ,VVXHGRQ
E\%HUXIVJHQRVVHQVFKDIWIU7UDQVSRUWXQG9HUNHKUVZLUWVFKDIW
6HULDOQR
0RGHO +/±&2173OXV &DSDFLW\ *3'
'HVLJQHGK\GUDXOLF 9ROWDJH 9
/RDGLQJ P G
*UH\DQGEODFNZDWHU 3RZHU FRQVXPSWLRQ .:
'HVLJQHGRUJDQLF
ORDGLQJ NJG %2' 'DWH RI PDQXIDFWXUH
,020('0RGXOH%
0('0RGXOH' ++
ELECTRICAL DATA
Operation-/supply voltage 400 V / 50 Hz *
Electrical power requirement 4,8 kW (depending on options)
Electrical fuse 25 A
Protection class IP55
* For special voltages refer to the order-specific electrical diagram.
General_Information_HL-Cont plus_025_014576_e6.fm / 22.2.2017
20 (40) Sewage treatment plant HL-Cont PLUS 025 Part No. 014576
System description
WEIGHTS AND DIMENSIONS
Sewage Treatment Plant (assembly group)
Drawing 01-025-00006-0-01000
Empty weight ~ 315 kg
Dimensions (W x D x H): ~ 880 x 850 x 1120 mm
For details see 4.4 on page 27
D W
Dosing Station (assembly group)
Drawing 01-000-00066-0-01000
Empty weight ~ 12 kg
Dimensions (W x D x H): ~ 410 x 300 x 585 mm
For details see drawing 01-000-00066-0-01000
H
General_Information_HL-Cont plus_025_014576_e6.fm / 22.2.2017
W D
Sewage treatment plant HL-Cont PLUS 025 Part No. 014576 21 (40)
System description
Separate switch cabinet
Empty weight ~ 47 kg
Dimensions (W x Dx H): ~ 600 x 210 x 760mm
For details see electrical diagram
CONSUMPTION FLOCCULANT
The consumption of flocculant amounts to ~ 120 ml/h at nominal load.
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
The plant is designed for operation
• in shipping routes with seawater, freshwater and brackish water
• at a max. ambient temperature of 55° C (+131° F) and 90% relative humidity
• Roll- and pitch angle up to 22.5°
The HL-Cont PLUS 025 plant may not be used in flammable and explosive at-
mosphere and areas!
PLANT CAPACITY/DESIGN
The sewage treatment plant is intended to treat 6000 Liters of grey and black water
per day. The treatment plant can handle up to 25 persons, considering 240 liters of
wastewater (black and grey water) per person per day.
General_Information_HL-Cont plus_025_014576_e6.fm / 22.2.2017
22 (40) Sewage treatment plant HL-Cont PLUS 025 Part No. 014576
Installation
4. INSTALLATION
The installation instructions in this document refers to sewage treatment plant of type
HL-Cont PLUS 025 according to drawings:
• Piping and Instrumentation Diagram (P&ID): 01-025-00000-2-00000-0
• Dimensional Drawing Sewage Treatment Plant: 01-025-00006-0-01000
• Dimensional Drawing Dosing Station: 01-000-00066-0-01000
4.1 TRANSPORT
Transport has to be done with appropriate carrying straps. Take care that the at-
tached components will not get damaged by mechanical stress of the straps!
General_Information_HL-Cont plus_025_014576_e6.fm / 22.2.2017
Where necessary a traverse must be used to ensure that the carrying straps
remain vertical under load and will not damage any of the components.
Sewage treatment plant HL-Cont PLUS 025 Part No. 014576 23 (40)
Installation
4.2 MOUNTING
The HL-Cont PLUS 025 has to be mounted upright onto appropriate horizontally
frames/panels or baseplates. Spacing for fastening holes see 4.4 "Dimensions" on
page 27.
Any kind of welding at tanks/container/vessels of the sewage treatment plant
will cause damage to the coating inside of the tank!
If the ship's piping is made of CuNiFe, the sewage treatment plant's piping will
have to be properly isolated.
In order to permit ready access to all parts requiring service, it is recommended to
consider the following spaces.
min. 200 mm
min. 300 mm
min. 400 mm
min. 800 mm
General_Information_HL-Cont plus_025_014576_e6.fm / 22.2.2017
• The Dosing Station has to be mounted directly at the plant assembly group and
must not be mounted at a higher level as the plant assembly group.
• The separate delivered Feeding pump (A-1-P-050) has to be mounted in a way
that suction height is not more than 2,5 m. Please refer to order-specific compo-
nents documentation in the appendix.
• The separate delivered optional Macerator (A-1-Z-080) has to be mounted verti-
cally with drive upwards or horizontally with outlet positioned upwards. Please
refer to order-specific components documentation in the appendix.
24 (40) Sewage treatment plant HL-Cont PLUS 025 Part No. 014576
Installation
4.3 PIPING AND HOSE CONNECTIONS
The reference codes in brackets (…) refer to section 3.3 "Standard Piping and
Instrumentation diagram (P&ID)" on page 15.
INLET BLACK AND GREY WATER (A-1-R-001)
• Loose flange DIN 2642, aluminum, DN 25, PN 10
• Inlet sewage via optional Macerator (A-1-Z-080) respectively Feeding pump (A-
1-P-050)
CONNECTION, CIRCULATION LINE (A-1-R-100)
• Loose flange DIN 2642, aluminum, DN 25, PN 10
The Connection, Circulation line (A-1-R-100) has to be connected to the intake line
of optional separate mounted Macerator (A-1-Z-080) respectively Feeding pump (A-
1-P-050).
OUTLET CLEAR PHASE (A-1-R-105)
• Loose flange DIN 2642, aluminum, DN 25, PN 10
BALL VALVE, OUTLET SLUDGE (A-1-B-202)
• Flange EN 1092-1, 1.4408, DN 25, PN 40
FLUSHING WATER CONNECTION (A-1-R-400)
• Loose flange DIN 2642, aluminum, DN 20, PN 10
The Flushing water connection (A-1-R-400) has to be connected to the on-board
seawater or fresh water supply.
At FLUSHING WATER CONNECTION (A-1-R-400) a pressure between 2 bar and 3.5
bar is required.
A minimum flow of 8 Liter per minute must be ensured.
Optional the sewage treatment plant can be delivered with a Dry running protection
& cleaning pump (A-1-P-450) and Strainer, seawater (A-1-F-480), if not or no suffi-
General_Information_HL-Cont plus_025_014576_e6.fm / 22.2.2017
cient on-board seawater supply is possible.
OUTLET DRY RUNNING PROTECTION (A-1-R-401)
• G 3/4"
The Outlet dry running protection (A-1-R-401) has to be connected to the intake line
of separate mounted Feeding pump (A-1-P-050).
DOSING VALVE, FLOCCULANT (A-1-V-300)
• R 1/2“ (8x5 mm hose connector) DIN 2999
DOSING PUMP, FLOCCULANT (A-1-P-350)
• 8x5 mm hose connector
The outlet of Dosing pump, flocculant (A-1-P-350) has to be connected to the Dosing
valve, flocculant (A-1-V-300).
Sewage treatment plant HL-Cont PLUS 025 Part No. 014576 25 (40)
Installation
VENT, FLOTATION TANK (A-1-R-600)
• R 1/2“ i (inside thread) DIN 2999
This aeration connection can keep open or be connected to the on-board ventilation
system.
CONNECTION WORKING AIR (A-1-R-500)
• R 1/2" i (inside thread) DIN 2999
A minimum pressure of 6 bar compressed air, quality min. acc. to DIN ISO
8573-1 class 4, is required.
CONNECTION WORKING AIR FOR CONTROL VALVE (A-1-R-504)
• G 1/4" (Flexible hose)
OPTIONAL 3-WAY VALVE, DISCHARGE (A-1-V-204)
• 2 x Flange DN 25, PN 16
• Flexible hose Ø6 mm outside for working air
When the optional Discharge pump (A-1-P-251) is fitted, a non return valve on
outlet of Discharge pump (A-1-P-251) and on the Outlet clear phase (A-1-R-105)
each is required.
OPTIONAL 3-WAY VALVE SLUDGE CIRCULATION (A-1-V-205)
• 2 x Flange DN 25, PN 16
• Flexible hose Ø6 mm outside for working air
General_Information_HL-Cont plus_025_014576_e6.fm / 22.2.2017
26 (40) Sewage treatment plant HL-Cont PLUS 025 Part No. 014576
Installation
4.4 DIMENSIONS
4.4.1 ASSEMBLY GROUP SEWAGE TREATMENT PLANT
Designation and reference code of piping connections also see 3.1 "Overview sew-
age treatment plant" on page 9.
Flushing water con- Vent, flotation tank Connection, Circulation
nection (A-1-R-400) (A-1-R-600) line (A-1-R-100)
Ball valve, outlet sludge
(A-1-B-202)
Outlet clear phase
(A-1-R-105)
Inlet black and
grey water (A-1-
R-001)
General_Information_HL-Cont plus_025_014576_e6.fm / 22.2.2017
Figure above: Drawing 01-025-00006-0-01000
Sewage treatment plant HL-Cont PLUS 025 Part No. 014576 27 (40)
Installation
Figure above: Drawing 01-025-00006-0-01000
General_Information_HL-Cont plus_025_014576_e6.fm / 22.2.2017
28 (40) Sewage treatment plant HL-Cont PLUS 025 Part No. 014576
Installation
HZ
JZ
$ $
6&+1,77$$
JZ
HZ
[
JZ
HZ
General_Information_HL-Cont plus_025_014576_e6.fm / 22.2.2017
Figure above: Drawing 01-025-00006-0-01000
Sewage treatment plant HL-Cont PLUS 025 Part No. 014576 29 (40)
Installation
4.4.2 ASSEMBLY GROUP DOSING STATION
General_Information_HL-Cont plus_025_014576_e6.fm / 22.2.2017
[
Figure above: Drawing 01-000-00066-0-01000
30 (40) Sewage treatment plant HL-Cont PLUS 025 Part No. 014576
Installation
4.5 OPTIONS
Following options may be part of the Sewage Treatment Plant if ordered.
Please refer to order specific Plant Components List and P&ID at introduction of the
Technical Manual.
DRY RUNNING PROTECTION
• Dry running protection & cleaning pump (A-1-P-450)
• Strainer, seawater (A-1-F-480)
A A-1-P-450
A-1-F-480
2 - 3,5 bar A-1-R-400
G 1 1/2" o DN 20
1 1/4" i PP PN10
DIN 2642
LEVEL SENSOR, HOLDING TANK (A-1-CL-063)
Grease
inlet vent inlet
Galley wa
B
LH
A-1-CL-063
LS ships
holding
tank
- 0,2 bar DN32
LL
General_Information_HL-Cont plus_025_014576_e6.fm / 22.2.2017
MACERATOR (A-1-Z-080)
DN32/
DN32 R3"o
DN40/
A-1-B-002 DN32
A-1-P-0
A-1-Z-080
Sewage treatment plant HL-Cont PLUS 025 Part No. 014576 31 (40)
Installation
LEVEL SENSOR, SLUDGE TANK (A-1-CL-261)
- 0 2 bar
vent inlet inlet
B ships C
- 0,2 bar
sludge
tank
LH A-1
A-1-CL-261
LS
LL
3-WAY VALVE SLUDGE CIRCULATION (A-1-V-205)
circulation at start
D
2,0 bar
A-1-V-205 D
o
DISCHARGE STATION
• Discharge pump (A-1-P-251)
• 3-way valve, discharge (A-1-V-204)
- 0,2 bar
C 2,0 bar General_Information_HL-Cont plus_025_014576_e6.fm / 22.2.2017
0,2 bar
A-1-P-251
A-1-V-204
GREASE SEPARATOR (A-1-B-650)
E A-1-B-650
Grease separator
Galley waste, fat, oil
32 (40) Sewage treatment plant HL-Cont PLUS 025 Part No. 014576
Installation
SEWAGE TANK AERATION SYSTEM FOR SHIPS HOLDING TANK
-0
LL
F
Detail:
A-0-P-350
A-0-A-380
A-0-CL-360
A-0-R-054
CL
A-0-V-580 *
3 A-0-B-330 compressed air quality min. acc.
G "o 8 to DIN EN 779 Filter grade F7
Inlet Vent A-0-R-067 **
holding tank
FIT
A-0-CF-810 *
General_Information_HL-Cont plus_025_014576_e6.fm / 22.2.2017
A-0-A-841***
G 34 " i
• Suction set, antifoam agent (A-0-A-380)
• Aeration unit, Sewage tank (A-0-A-841)
• Container, antifoam agent (A-0-B-330)
• Air flow control (A-0-CF-810)
• Level sensor, antifoam agent (A-0-CL-360)
• Dosing pump, anti-foam (A-0-P-350)
• Compressor (A-0-V-580)
Sewage treatment plant HL-Cont PLUS 025 Part No. 014576 33 (40)
Installation
4.6 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
The power supply must correspond with voltage and frequency given in the or-
der confirmation and the technical data. Otherwise the correct function of the
plant is not guaranteed and/or serious damages can occur.
All power supply lines for switch cabinet and separate components must be designed
sufficiently regarding fuses and wire cross section.
All electrical connections must be in accordance with the electrical diagrams and in
accordance with national rules/regulations.
Main power supply for HL-Cont PLUS 025 has to be connected to the separate
switch cabinet.
See also 3.6 "Technical data" on page 20.
From separate mounted switch cabinet the terminal box at Sewage Treatment Plant
and optional components have to be connected
• Discharge pump (A-1-P-251)
• Macerator (A-1-Z-080)
• Dry running protection & cleaning pump (A-1-P-450)
• Level sensor, holding tank (A-1-CL-063)
• Level sensor, sludge tank (A-1-CL-261)
• 3-way valve, discharge (A-1-V-204)
• 3-way valve sludge circulation (A-1-V-205)
Switch Cabinet
Connection to Terminal Box
Terminal Box
General_Information_HL-Cont plus_025_014576_e6.fm / 22.2.2017
Main Power Supply
Optional components (order-specific)
COMMON ALARMS AND WARNINGS
Common alarms and common warnings for external use are to be tapped according
to the order-specific electrical diagram in the appendix.
34 (40) Sewage treatment plant HL-Cont PLUS 025 Part No. 014576
Initial commissioning
5. INITIAL COMMISSIONING
After all installation work of all components has been completed check tank
and piping for foreign objects (bolts, nuts, etc.).
1. Please read the operating and maintenance instruction carefully.
2. Check the serial number on type plate of the Sewage Treatment Plant with that
one given in the plant certificate. They must be the same.
3. Check the following points:
– all piping connections to the sewage treatment plant are correct.
– correct the direction of rotation of the pumps.
– lubricate with water the mechanical seal of Feeding pump (A-1-P-050) and
Clear phase pump (A-1-P-150) before switching on.
– that Ball valve, manual drain (A-1-B-203) and Ball valve, inlet sewage (A-1-B-
002) are closed and Ball valve, inlet sludge pump (A-1-B-204) is open.
Ensure that all electrical connections are carried out according to the relevant
safety regulations. The electrical power supply must correspond with voltage
and frequency specified in the order confirmation and Technical Data.
4. Switch on mains supply voltage by main switch on switch cabinet.
5. Replenish the plant with process water using the cleaning program of and wait
until the program stops automatically.
6. Open the Ball valve, inlet sewage (A-1-B-002).
7. Check the filling level in Container, flocculant (A-1-B-330), replenish if neces-
sary.
8. Check dosing adjustment of the Dosing pump, flocculant (A-1-P-350) for the fol-
lowing values:
– Delivery rate: 125 ml/h
These values are applicable for initial commissioning and have to be adjusted
during operation of the plant when required.
General_Information_HL-Cont plus_025_014576_e6.fm / 22.2.2017
After this procedure the sewage treatment plant is ready for use an can be started in
AUTOMATIC MODE.
Sewage treatment plant HL-Cont PLUS 025 Part No. 014576 35 (40)
Operating/control elements
6. OPERATING/CONTROL ELEMENTS
Operation via Touch Panel is described in separate document/chapter called "Oper-
ation of Touch Panel".
Bei der Lehmkuhle 4
D-21279 Hollenstedt - Germany
Tel: +49-(0)4165 / 2211-0
E-Mail: [email protected]
Sewage treatment plant
Type: HL-CONT PLUS 025... 80
Operation of Touch Panel
This instruction includes important safety information and instructions for commission-
ing, operation and maintenance of the sewage treatment plant. It is essential therefore, that
General_Information_HL-Cont plus_025_014576_e6.fm / 22.2.2017
the responsible specialist refers to it before starting any work at the plant as well as prior
to commissioning. Furthermore, this instruction must always be available on site.
With reservation of technical modification
1 (30)
36 (40) Sewage treatment plant HL-Cont PLUS 025 Part No. 014576
Maintenance
7. MAINTENANCE
7.1 SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
Besides a daily visual check no additional activities at the HL-Cont PLUS 025 are re-
quired, because flushing procedure are carried out automatically.
Check the following during visual inspection:
• Leakages
• Abnormal noises
• Sufficient level of flocculant in its container
Maintenance activities to be performed for the components of the plant
(pumps, valves, ...), are described in the respective documentation, which can
be found in the appendix of this manual.
The nuts of the cover from saturator are to be tighten with 13 Nm when to be
unscrewed.
7.2 DRAINING THE PLANT
Please refer to document/chapter "Operation of Touch Panel".
For draining the plant completely, the following steps are to be performed.
• The plant has to be in MANUAL MODE.
• Pressure release valve (A-1-H-004) has to be opened.
The default setting for opening rate of valve is 20%.
• Increase the opening rate of the valve step by step until saturator pressure is 0
bar.
• When the saturator pressure at the Pressure gauge, saturator (A-1-CP-061) indi-
cates 0 bar, the Ball valve, manual drain (A-1-B-203) can be opened.
Keep the Pressure release valve (A-1-H-004) open.
• Open the 3-way valve, sludge (A-1-V-201).
• Check that Ball valve, outlet sludge (A-1-B-202) is open.
General_Information_HL-Cont plus_025_014576_e6.fm / 22.2.2017
• Open bleeding valve below Pressure gauge, saturator (A-1-CP-061).
• Start the Sludge pump (A-1-P-250).
The draining time requires approx. 20 minutes.
• After complete draining the Sludge pump (A-1-P-250) must be stopped.
• Open Service cock (A-1-B-103) for emptying/discarding of residues.
• Enter the value 20% for Pressure release valve (A-1-H-004).
• Leave MANUAL MODE.
The 3-way valve, sludge (A-1-V-201) moves automatically back to its primary
position.
• Close Ball valve, manual drain (A-1-B-203), Service cock (A-1-B-103) and bleed-
ing valve below Pressure gauge, saturator (A-1-CP-061).
7.3 CLEANING AT DOWN TIME LONGER THAN TWO WEEKS
All pipings after macerator, saturator, flotation tank, sludge compartment tank and
sludge pump are to be cleaned.
Sewage treatment plant HL-Cont PLUS 025 Part No. 014576 37 (40)
Maintenance
The cleaning cycle has to be activated. Obey the instruction on the display.
• Time: approx. 30 minutes
Prior to this the Ball valve, inlet sewage (A-1-B-002) must be closed.
The 3 opens.
The plant operates in normal overboard mode without flocculant but with UV-treat-
ment. At this the Cleaning injector/nozzle, flotation tank (A-1-A-480) opens every 5
minutes.
WINTER HOLDING TIME
Cleaning program
• Time: approx. 30minutes with subsequent manual draining
After completed cleaning procedure the plant has to be drained manually (see
"Draining the plant" on page 37).
General_Information_HL-Cont plus_025_014576_e6.fm / 22.2.2017
38 (40) Sewage treatment plant HL-Cont PLUS 025 Part No. 014576
Components list and consumable
8. COMPONENTS LIST AND CONSUMABLE
8.1 COMPONENTS LIST
• Please refer to introduction of the order-specific Technical Manual for order-spe-
cific Plant Components List with part numbers and reference code.
Plant components list HAMANN AG
'HVFULSWLRQ 6HZDJH7UHDWPHQW3ODQW VHW 'DWH
+/&2173OXV 2UGHU 16
7KLVOLVWLQFOXGHVWKHPDLQSODQWFRPSRQHQWVZLWKWKHLUSDUWQXPEHUDQGUHIHUHQFHFRGH
Part No. Description Reference code
)ORWDWLRQWDQN $%
+/&2173OXV
6DWXUDWRU7\SH $%
89VHW ZRVHQVRUPXIIOHZLWKRXWHO%DOODVW $&
( :0
(FFHQWULFVFUHZSXPSZLWKPRXQWHGIUHTXHQF\LQYHUWHU $3
1;)8
6FUHZ3XPSVHOISULPLQJ $3
09,9+]
0HPEUDQH'LDSKUDJPYDOYH $+
'1
%DOO YDOYH ZD\ $ %
Figure above: Example for order specific Plant Components List
Detailed spare part lists for individual components of the plant (spare parts for
pumps, valves, etc.) please refer to the components documentation in the an-
nex of the Technical Manual.
8.2 CONSUMABLES
Quantity Designation Type Part-No.
1 Canister = 30 kg Flocculant with poly- EKOFLOC APH; 30 013517
mer kg in canister
1 Canister = 30 kg Flocculant AQUATOP LC-2115 005383
General_Information_HL-Cont plus_025_014576_e6.fm / 22.2.2017
HAMANN AG recommends above flocculant for an optimal cleaning process.
9. APPENDIX
On the following pages are:
• Documentation "Operation of Touch Panel"
• Documentation of plant components
• Electrical circuit diagram
Sewage treatment plant HL-Cont PLUS 025 Part No. 014576 39 (40)
Appendix
General_Information_HL-Cont plus_025_014576_e6.fm / 22.2.2017
40 (40) Sewage treatment plant HL-Cont PLUS 025 Part No. 014576
Bei der Lehmkuhle 4
D-21279 Hollenstedt - Germany
Tel: +49-(0)4165 / 2211-0
E-Mail: [email protected]
www.HamannAG.com
Sewage treatment plant
Type: HL-CONT PLUS 025... 80;
Software version V1.6.x
Operation of Touch Panel
This instruction includes important safety information and instructions for commission-
ing, operation and maintenance of the sewage treatment plant. It is essential therefore, that
the responsible specialist refers to it before starting any work at the plant as well as prior
to commissioning. Furthermore, this instruction must always be available on site.
With reservation of technical modification
1 (30)
CONTENT
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
MAIN SWITCH CABINET AND TOUCH PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
INFO LEVEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
AUTOMATIC MODE (TREATMENT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
START . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
STATE OF THE PLANT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
STATE OF SINGLE COMPONENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
OPERATING MODES IN AUTOMATIC MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
STOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
CLEANING MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
PASSWORD ENTRY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
ENTRY OF NUMERICAL VALUES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
MANUAL OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
PAGE STRUCTURE PARAMETER LEVEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
PROGRAM UPDATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
PAGE STRUCTURE DISCHARGE (OPTION). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
DISCHARGE FROM SHIPS HOLDING TANK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
DISCHARGE FROM SHIPS SLUDGE TANK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
SLUDGE CIRCULATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
REMOTE (OPTION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
FAULT AND WARNING INDICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
FAULT INDICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
WARNING INDICATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Sewage treatment plant HL-CONT PLUS 025... 80; Software version V1.6.x 3 (30)
Sewage treatment plant HL-CONT PLUS 025... 80; Software version V1.6.x 4 (30)
Operation
1. OPERATION
This description is valid for software version V1.6.x
Figures may show different plant types from type range:
• HL-CONT Plus 025
• HL-CONT Plus 05
• HL-CONT Plus 10
• HL-CONT Plus 20
• HL-CONT Plus 40
• HL-CONT Plus 80
1.1 MAIN SWITCH CABINET AND TOUCH PANEL
Operation and monitoring of HL-CONT PLUS 025... 80 is done via touch panel posi-
tioned at the front side of the main switch cabinet.
The main switch cabinet covers the control panel with CPU unit and switching relays.
Further switch cabinets and terminal boxes of the Sewage Treatment Plant may cov-
er further switching relays and control units and are connected via SmartWire® sig-
nal bus.
• All power supply lines for switch cabinet and separate components must be
designed sufficiently regarding fuses and wire cross section.
• All electrical connections must be in accordance with the electrical diagrams and
in accordance with national rules/regulations.
Steuerung_HL-CONT_Plus_025-80_V1.6.x_e1.fm / 3.5.2017
Sewage treatment plant HL-CONT PLUS 025... 80; Software version V1.6.x 5 (30)
Operation
Operation, monitoring, and adjustments for HL-CONT PLUS 025... 80 are to be per-
formed by the touch panel as follows:
Software version Status display for plant in general
grey: OFF; green: ON
Value display Function keys Status display for single
components
Figure above: Basic page (with possible options)
• Start of sewage treatment.
• Stop of sewage treatment.
Steuerung_HL-CONT_Plus_025-80_V1.6.x_e1.fm / 3.5.2017
• Start of cleaning procedure.
• Manual operating of single components of the plant.
• Step to the next screen.
• Leaving the current screen.
6 (30) Sewage treatment plant HL-CONT PLUS 025... 80; Software version V1.6.x
Operation
• Selection of fault indication and warnings.
Green: No fault indication and warnings; Red: Fault indication and warnings
present.
• Selection of parameter of the plant by using different password lev-
els.
• OPTION: Selection of discharge procedure.
• OPTION: Selection of Remote Control.
Once the plant is switched on, at first the operating system of Touch Panel will boot.
It is not allowed to change the IP-address, because operating of the plant will
be no longer possible.
After boot procedure the basic page appears on the display.
TREATMENT, CLEANING or DISCHARGE can be selected. (DISCHARGE is only
available as an option)
Individual symbols and function keys are shown or faded out according to actual op-
eration mode and plant configuration.
Steuerung_HL-CONT_Plus_025-80_V1.6.x_e1.fm / 3.5.2017
Sewage treatment plant HL-CONT PLUS 025... 80; Software version V1.6.x 7 (30)
Operation
1.2 INFO LEVEL
By pressing on a component (see arrow above for example) the following detailed
page appears:
By pressing on a component again (see arrow above for example), the local alloca-
tion of this component appears including its reference code: Steuerung_HL-CONT_Plus_025-80_V1.6.x_e1.fm / 3.5.2017
Example
HL-CONT Plus 10
8 (30) Sewage treatment plant HL-CONT PLUS 025... 80; Software version V1.6.x
Operation
Example
HL-CONT Plus 025
By pressing again onto the illustration it will be closed.
Steuerung_HL-CONT_Plus_025-80_V1.6.x_e1.fm / 3.5.2017
Sewage treatment plant HL-CONT PLUS 025... 80; Software version V1.6.x 9 (30)
Operation
1.3 AUTOMATIC MODE (TREATMENT)
1.3.1 START
To get into automatic mode press TREATMENT MODE.
State of plant (grey=AUTOMATIC OFF)
State of plant (green=AUTOMATIC ON)
press
TREATMENT
Steuerung_HL-CONT_Plus_025-80_V1.6.x_e1.fm / 3.5.2017
State of single compo-
nents.
Green: in operation
Grey: not in operation
STATE OF THE PLANT
• Grey: Automatic mode OFF
• Green: Automatic mode ON
10 (30) Sewage treatment plant HL-CONT PLUS 025... 80; Software version V1.6.x
Operation
STATE OF SINGLE COMPONENTS
• Green: Component in operation
• Grey: Component not in operation
• Red flashing
– Warning, automatic mode is continued
– Fault, automatic mode is stopped
• Red steady light
– Warning is receipted, automatic mode is stopped
– Fault is receipted, automatic mode keeps stopped
OPERATING MODES IN AUTOMATIC MODE
• State display of the plant and the respective components are green:
– Plant transfers sewage and is in treatment process
• State display of the plant is green and components are grey:
– Plant is waiting for sewage
• Circulation
– Plant is starting, UV-disinfection plant is warming up, 3-way valve overboard/
circulation (A-1-V-100) is in circulation position
• Over board
– Plant transfers treated water over board, 3-way valve overboard/circulation
(A-1-V-100) is in discharge position
Steuerung_HL-CONT_Plus_025-80_V1.6.x_e1.fm / 3.5.2017
Sewage treatment plant HL-CONT PLUS 025... 80; Software version V1.6.x 11 (30)
Operation
1.3.2 STOP
To stop AUTOMATIC mode, press STOP.
State of plant (grey=AUTOMATIC OFF)
Press
STOP
Steuerung_HL-CONT_Plus_025-80_V1.6.x_e1.fm / 3.5.2017
12 (30) Sewage treatment plant HL-CONT PLUS 025... 80; Software version V1.6.x
Operation
1.4 CLEANING MODE
By pressing on SHOW the lo-
cal allocation of this compo-
nent appears including its
reference code.
Before starting the manual cleaning procedure the Ball valve, inlet sewage (A-
1-B-002) must be closed manually.
After cleaning the Ball valve, inlet sewage (A-1-B-002) must be opened manu-
ally.
This process is automatic at plant type HL-CONT Plus 80.
• Button START starts the cleaning program. The cleaning program runs automat-
Steuerung_HL-CONT_Plus_025-80_V1.6.x_e1.fm / 3.5.2017
ically for ca. 30 minutes.
• Button STOP interrupts the cleaning program.
• Button : Selection of existing fault indication and warnings
(red) and history (green).
• Button : Back to the basic page
When the cleaning program is stopped before maturity a warning in the basic
page appears, that the Ball valve, inlet sewage (A-1-B-002) has to be opened
again!
This process is automated at plant type HL-CONT Plus 80.
Sewage treatment plant HL-CONT PLUS 025... 80; Software version V1.6.x 13 (30)
Operation
1.5 PASSWORD ENTRY
Password entry is required to change parameter and also to operate individual com-
ponents of the plant manually.
Manual operation
(Operator rights required)
Enter password via on-
or screen keyboard and
Parameter settings confirm with
(Chief rights required)
Required user rights will
be displayed („Opera-
tor“ or „Chief“)
Steuerung_HL-CONT_Plus_025-80_V1.6.x_e1.fm / 3.5.2017
or
Select password entry with
Access according to
or abort with user and password
14 (30) Sewage treatment plant HL-CONT PLUS 025... 80; Software version V1.6.x
Operation
1.6 ENTRY OF NUMERICAL VALUES
Particular values from the parameter list and in MANUAL MODE can changed man-
ually. By pressing onto these input fields a on-screen keyboard opens.
Example: Changing the opening rate of Pressure release valve (A-1-H-004)
Press onto the desired input field to open the
on-screen keyboard
Enter desired value with on-screen keyboard
Steuerung_HL-CONT_Plus_025-80_V1.6.x_e1.fm / 3.5.2017
Press
Value is changed now
Sewage treatment plant HL-CONT PLUS 025... 80; Software version V1.6.x 15 (30)
Operation
1.7 MANUAL OPERATION
In manual mode the operation displays are indicated and components can controlled
manually.
In MANUAL operation mode it is also possible to enter the info level. See 1.2
"INFO LEVEL" on page 8
Input password 2211
(see "Password entry" on page 14)
Steuerung_HL-CONT_Plus_025-80_V1.6.x_e1.fm / 3.5.2017
The following operating displays are indicated:
• Level in holding tank
• Pressure in saturator
• Operating hours of Feeding pump (A-1-P-050)
• Opening level of the Pressure release valve (A-1-H-004) at manual adjustment
By pressing on the respective component a manual control is possible.
The following components can be controlled:
• Feeding pump (A-1-P-050)
• Macerator (A-1-Z-080)
• Pressure release valve (A-1-H-004)
• Pneumatic valve, dry running protection (A-1-B-401)
• Optional Dry running protection & cleaning pump (A-1-P-450)
16 (30) Sewage treatment plant HL-CONT PLUS 025... 80; Software version V1.6.x
Operation
By pressing the key it will be switched over to . By pressing on
a component, the local allocation of this component appears including its reference
code.
By leaving the page with the screen returns back to the basic page and all
active components are deactivated.
By pressing the key the following page appears:
The following operating displays are indicated:
• Operating hours of Clear phase pump (A-1-P-150)
• Level in Flotation tank (A-1-B-031)
By pressing on the respective component a manual control is possible.
The following components can be controlled:
• Clear phase pump (A-1-P-150)
• 3-way valve overboard/circulation (A-1-V-100)
• Pneumatic valve, cleaning flotation tank (A-1-B-402)
• Dosing pump, flocculant (A-1-P-350)
By pressing the key it will be switched over to . By pressing on
Steuerung_HL-CONT_Plus_025-80_V1.6.x_e1.fm / 3.5.2017
a component, the local allocation of this component appears including its reference
code.
By leaving the page with the screen returns back to the basic page and all
active components are deactivated.
Sewage treatment plant HL-CONT PLUS 025... 80; Software version V1.6.x 17 (30)
Operation
By pressing the key the following page appears:
A-1-B-403 not
installed at
HL-CONT Plus 025
The following operating displays are indicated:
• Level in ships sludge tank (mm) if a corresponding signal is present. See 1.8
"Page structure PARAMETER LEVEL" on page 19.
• Level in Flotation tank (A-1-B-031) (mm)
By pressing on the respective component a manual control is possible.
The following components can be controlled:
• Pneumatic valve, cleaning sludge sensor (A-1-B-403)
not at HL-CONT Plus 025
• 3-way valve, sludge (A-1-V-201)
• Sludge pump (A-1-P-250)
• Ball valve, outlet sludge (A-1-B-202)
By pressing the key it will be switched over to . By pressing on
a component, the local allocation of this component appears including its reference
code.
By leaving the page with the screen returns back to the basic page and all
active components are deactivated.
Steuerung_HL-CONT_Plus_025-80_V1.6.x_e1.fm / 3.5.2017
18 (30) Sewage treatment plant HL-CONT PLUS 025... 80; Software version V1.6.x
Operation
1.8 PAGE STRUCTURE PARAMETER LEVEL
Entry password 1207
(see "Password entry" on page 14)
Example values
When an analog signal from the on-board holding tank is processed, the measuring
range and high-level alarm can be entered or changed.
If measuring range "0" is entered, the control unit requires fixed switch con-
Steuerung_HL-CONT_Plus_025-80_V1.6.x_e1.fm / 3.5.2017
tacts at the respective inputs.
Each level switching point
can be set with an individ-
ual delay time.
Sewage treatment plant HL-CONT PLUS 025... 80; Software version V1.6.x 19 (30)
Operation
Filling level at basic mask is then visualized in different colors instead of
showing numerical value:
grey = START filling level not reached
green = START filling level reached
grey = below STOP filling level
green = above STOP filling level
grey = STOP filling level reached
green = STOP filling level not reached
Switching points for STOP level of ships holding and sludge tank must be ad-
justed in a way that suction lines do not fall dry (min. 100 mm above suction
line level).
This does not mean the Transfer Release STOP level!
Furthermore the start level for sewage treatment and discharging the ships holding
tank as well as optional Transfer Release and the stop level of on-board holding tank
and on-board sludge tank as well as optional Transfer Release are to be adjusted
here.
Transfer release function is used to control a external ships Transfer Pump that
drains into the ships sewage holding tank.
For dry running protection (DRP-module) a running time can be adjusted. The mini-
mum value of 10 s has to be increased if suction line between ships holding tank and
feeding pump is long and feeding pump may run dry.
If that value will be extended for example to 15 s, however Feeding pump (A-1-P-
050) and Macerator (A-1-Z-080) will start after 10 s and Dry Running Protection mod-
ule (Valve or Pump) is extended for 5 s.
Because discharging of the sludge tank is done manually, the automatic start-
level is not applicable and therefore a pre-warning level for high-level has to
be adjusted. Steuerung_HL-CONT_Plus_025-80_V1.6.x_e1.fm / 3.5.2017
By pressing the key the PARAMETER LEVEL 1 is left and screen returns
back to the basic page.
20 (30) Sewage treatment plant HL-CONT PLUS 025... 80; Software version V1.6.x
Operation
By pressing the key the PARAMETER LEVEL 2 is obtained.
In section UV module the following can be adjusted:
• The elapsed operating hours can be read and, if 10000 operating hours are
achieved, the counter can be reset
• The cleaning frequency of the UV-lamps and the plant can be changed (default:
500 hours)
– UV lamps have to be dismounted and cleaned.
– The plant has to be cleaned with the cleaning program.
• The run time of the cleaning nozzle can be manually adjusted if required.
In general the cleaning process via Cleaning injector/nozzle, flotation tank (A-
1-A-480) should be adjusted as short as possible so that the Sludge Tank will
not be filled unnecessarily with flushing-/cleaning water.
In section Sludge circulation module the following can be adjusted:
• Start level for sludge circulation in ships sludge tank (mm)
• Runtime of sludge circulation (min.)
• Interval between 2 sludge circulation cycles (h) (option)
By pressing the key the PARAMETER LEVEL 2 is left and screen returns
back to the basic page.
Steuerung_HL-CONT_Plus_025-80_V1.6.x_e1.fm / 3.5.2017
Sewage treatment plant HL-CONT PLUS 025... 80; Software version V1.6.x 21 (30)
Operation
1.8.1 PROGRAM UPDATE
The program can be updated to another software version. This update will be deliv-
ered by HAMANN AG on a SD memory card.
To preserve current operating data an parameter settings the following procedure is
required before the update:
1. At screen shown above press SAVE.
Current operating data and internal service parameter settings will be saved/
buffered at internal memory of Touch Panel.
All user parameter settings (see 1.8 "Page structure PARAMETER LEVEL" on
page 19) will not be saved/buffered and have to be entered again after the up-
date!
2. Switch off the switch cabinet at main switch.
3. Remove old memory card out of the slot positioned at the side of the Touch
Panel.
SD memory card
Steuerung_HL-CONT_Plus_025-80_V1.6.x_e1.fm / 3.5.2017
4. Plug in the new memory card.
5. Switch on the switch cabinet at main switch.
6. Open/select PARAMETER LEVEL according to section "Page structure
22 (30) Sewage treatment plant HL-CONT PLUS 025... 80; Software version V1.6.x
Operation
PARAMETER LEVEL" on page 19 and then open at first parameter page 7:
7. At screen shown above press READ.
Program update is complete.
1.9 PAGE STRUCTURE DISCHARGE (OPTION)
By pressing the key (option) in basic page the discharge mode appears.
No treatment of sewage occurs.
Steuerung_HL-CONT_Plus_025-80_V1.6.x_e1.fm / 3.5.2017
This page covers all possible options regarding discharge and circulation.
Differences are possible depending of the ordered configuration of the plant.
DISCHARGE FROM SHIPS HOLDING TANK
By pressing the key sewage can be pumped over board via 3-way valve,
discharge (A-1-V-204) and Discharge pump (A-1-P-251).
Sewage treatment plant HL-CONT PLUS 025... 80; Software version V1.6.x 23 (30)
Operation
After emptying the ships holding tank the key indicates .
By pressing key the manual mode appears.
It is necessary to enter the password 2211 at user > operator (see "Password entry"
on page 14).
After repeated pressing key the manuel mode is switched on.
By pressing and holding the key the holding tank can now be totally emptied
manually. The STOP parameter of holding tank has no influence!
DISCHARGE FROM SHIPS SLUDGE TANK
By pressing key the manual mode appears.
It is necessary to enter the password 2211 at user > operator (see "Password entry"
on page 14).
After repeated pressing key the manuel mode is switched on.
By pressing the symbol of 3-way valve, discharge (A-1-V-204) this valve has to be
activated. (Passage sludge tank - discharge pump.)
By pressing the symbol of the discharge pump the sludge discharge starts and runs
until the adjusted STOP parameter of the sludge tank is reached. Sludge discharge
can also be stopped manually by pressing the symbol of the discharge pump.
By pressing and holding the key the sludge tank can be totally emptied man-
ually. The STOP parameter of sludge tank has no influence!
SLUDGE CIRCULATION
By pressing key the sludge-circulation mode appears (option).
Steuerung_HL-CONT_Plus_025-80_V1.6.x_e1.fm / 3.5.2017
By pressing key the sludge circulation starts with its adjusted parameters
and has to be stopped with key
If sludge circulation is available, the 3-way valve, discharge (A-1-V-204), the 3-way
valve sludge circulation (A-1-V-205) opens and Discharge pump (A-1-P-251) starts.
During the interval of sludge circulation the key indicates .
1.10 REMOTE (OPTION)
It is possible to start and to stop Automatic Mode via external contacts.
24 (30) Sewage treatment plant HL-CONT PLUS 025... 80; Software version V1.6.x
Operation
• If the plant shall be local operated, the display must be as following:
• If the plant should be operated via external contacts, the has to be
pressed and after this the display must be as following:
Steuerung_HL-CONT_Plus_025-80_V1.6.x_e1.fm / 3.5.2017
Sewage treatment plant HL-CONT PLUS 025... 80; Software version V1.6.x 25 (30)
Fault and warning indication
2. FAULT AND WARNING INDICATION
2.1 FAULT INDICATION
At serious faults the key appears in red and the AUTOMATIC MODE is inter-
rupted.
Symbols of faulty plant components flash red.
By pressing on a symbol of a component, the local allocation of this compo-
nent can be shown including its reference code. By clicking in the shown page
it will be closed.
Only after elimination of fault the plant can continue operation.
If multiple faults occur they are displayed in a list.
Steuerung_HL-CONT_Plus_025-80_V1.6.x_e1.fm / 3.5.2017
26 (30) Sewage treatment plant HL-CONT PLUS 025... 80; Software version V1.6.x
Fault and warning indication
By pressing the key the fault list is displayed.
After confirmation by key ACK flashing is stopped.
Above fault description following numeric codes are shown:
1 = Fault is present and is not receipted
X = Fault is receipted by pressing the ACK key
0= Fault no longer existing, but not receipted yet
• By pressing the ACK key a fault will be receipted.
• By pressing the key a history of faults is displayed:
Steuerung_HL-CONT_Plus_025-80_V1.6.x_e1.fm / 3.5.2017
By pressing the key the screen returns back to fault list.
• By pressing the key all completed fault are deleted.
Sewage treatment plant HL-CONT PLUS 025... 80; Software version V1.6.x 27 (30)
Fault and warning indication
• By pressing the key an info appears about cause and tip of elimination
of fault.
Steuerung_HL-CONT_Plus_025-80_V1.6.x_e1.fm / 3.5.2017
28 (30) Sewage treatment plant HL-CONT PLUS 025... 80; Software version V1.6.x
Fault and warning indication
2.2 WARNING INDICATION
At warning indication the key lights red.
The AUTOMATIC MODE is not interrupted and the status bar lights green.
The plant works continuously at existing warnings. Anyway the corresponding
reason should be eliminated immediately.
By pressing the key the warning list is displayed.
Steuerung_HL-CONT_Plus_025-80_V1.6.x_e1.fm / 3.5.2017
Sewage treatment plant HL-CONT PLUS 025... 80; Software version V1.6.x 29 (30)
Fault and warning indication
Steuerung_HL-CONT_Plus_025-80_V1.6.x_e1.fm / 3.5.2017
30 (30) Sewage treatment plant HL-CONT PLUS 025... 80; Software version V1.6.x
Bei der Lehmkuhle 4
D-21279 Hollenstedt - Germany
Tel: +49-(0)4165 / 2211-0
E-Mail: [email protected]
www.HamannAG.com
Macerator
Type: ABM 2 S
Part No.: 000124
009196 ... (3~ 208V 60 Hz)
012468 ... AK+PTC
Operating- and Maintenance Instruction
This instruction includes important safety information and instructions for commission-
ing, operation and maintenance of the HAMANN components. It is essential therefore, that
the responsible specialist refers to it before starting any work on the machinery as well as
prior to commissioning. Furthermore, this instruction must always be available on site.
With reservation of technical modification.
BA 0001 e 1 (24)
CONTENT
GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
APPLICATION AND OPERATING RANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
PERFORMANCE DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
WARRANTY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
TESTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
SAFETY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
GENERAL SAFETY INFORMATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
LABELLING OF ADVICE IN THE OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
PERSONNEL QUALIFICATION AND PERSONNEL TRAINING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
DANGERS IN CASE OF NON-COMPLIANCE WITH THE SAFETY HINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
RESPONSIBLE WORKING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
SAFETY HINTS FOR THE USER/OPERATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
SAFETY HINTS FOR MAINTENANCE, INSPECTION AND MOUNTING OPERATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
INDEPENDENT RECONSTRUCTION AND SPARE PARTS PRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
INADMISSIBLE MODES OF OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
TRANSPORTATION AND INTERMEDIATE STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
PACKING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
TRANSPORTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
PRESERVING MACERATORS AND PLACING THEM INTO STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
DESIGN FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
UNIT ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
INSTALLATION/MOUNTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
FOUNDATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
FASTENING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
SPACE REQUIREMENTS FOR MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
INSTALLATION OF PIPEWORK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
COMMISSIONING/DECOMMISSIONING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
COMMISSIONING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
DECOMMISSIONING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
MAINTENANCE/SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
GENERAL MONITORING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
SERVICING (DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
SPARE PARTS & DRAWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
SECTIONAL DRAWING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
SPARE PARTS LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
DIMENSIONAL DRAWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
DRIVE SK 80 L 0,55/0,66 KW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
ABM2S_e8.fm / 5.4.17
Macerator ABM 2 S 3 (24)
General
1. GENERAL
1.1 APPLICATION AND OPERATING RANGE
Macerators serve to crush solids contained in sewage, making them suitable for
pumping and the sewage treatment process. After minimizing, the solids have a par-
ticle size of approximately 3.5 mm and fibres measure approximately 1.5 cm².
As metal parts and stones would destroy the cutting tools, they should be collected
before the macerator.
The macerator is designed for crushing solid parts only which are normal con-
tent of the sewage.
1.2 PERFORMANCE DATA
Part No. 000124 012468 009196
Type ABM 2 S ABM 2 S ABM 2 S
AK+PTC (3~ 208V/60Hz)
Housing GG 25 / St
Shaft 1.4034
Impeller 1.4308
Inlet PN10, DN R3
Outlet PN10 DN, Rp 1 1/2
Flowrate max. 2 m3/h
Drive SK 80 L 0,55/0,66 kW
Nominal data, electrical 3~ 230/400V 50Hz 3~ 208V 60Hz
3~ 254/440V 60Hz
Nominal speed 1410/1690 1/min (50/60 Hz) 1690 1/min
Rated Current 1,5/2,6 A 2,6 A
Rated Output (PN) 0.55/0.66 kW (50/60 Hz) 0,66 kW
cos phi 0,78
Isolation Class F
Protection IP 55
Anti-condensation heating (AK) and no yes no
Thermistor temperature sensor (PTC)
Weight ~ 19,5 kg
*) If the equipment is ordered with special voltage you have to read the correct
data on the data plate.
1.3 WARRANTY
Our liability for shortcomings in the supply is stated in our terms of delivery. No lia-
ABM2S_e8.fm / 5.4.17
bility will be accepted for damages arising from non-compliance with the operating
instructions and operating conditions. If, at any later date, the operating conditions
are changed (e.g. different liquid pumped, speed, viscosity, temperature or pressure
conditions), it must be checked and, if necessary, confirmed by us, i n individual cas-
es, whether the macerator is suitable for this purpose. Unless any special agree-
4 (24) Macerator ABM 2 S
Safety
ments have been made, during the warranty period, macerators supplied by us may
only be opened or modified by us or one of our authorized service centres. Other-
wise, our liability for any defects will be invalidated.
1.4 TESTING
Prior to leaving our factory, all macerators are subjected to a leak and performance
test. Only perfectly operating macerators, which achieve the guaranteed perfor-
mance, leave the factory. Compliance with the following operating instructions will
thus ensure trouble-free operation.
2. SAFETY
These operating instructions contain directions that are to be used for the installation,
operation and maintenance of the Macerators, installed on HAMANN AG sewage
treatment plants.
Therefore, prior to final installation and commissioning, these operating instructions
must be read by the installation engineer, as well as by the supervising personnel/
operator, and must always be available at the place of installation of the machine/
plant.
Not only is the general safety information listed under the main heading of „Safety“
to be observed, but also the special safety hints provided under other main headings.
2.1 GENERAL SAFETY INFORMATIONS
For more safety information, please refer to the General Information of the HAMANN
AG Technical Manual.
2.2 LABELLING OF ADVICE IN THE OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
Non-observance of these instructions could lead to danger of life or limb. Therefore,
important safety advice in these instructions are marked with the following general
hazard symbol:
Warnings regarding electric power are labelled with:
Safety instructions whose non-observance could jeopardize the machine and its
functions are labelled with
ABM2S_e8.fm / 5.4.17
Important additional informations are labelled with
Macerator ABM 2 S 5 (24)
Safety
Always comply with instructions mounted directly on the machine, e.g.
• rotational direction arrow
• fluid connection indicators
and ensure that the information remains legible.
2.3 PERSONNEL QUALIFICATION AND PERSONNEL TRAINING
The personnel for operation, maintenance, inspection and mounting must have the
corresponding qualification for these operations. Range of liability, competence and
the supervision of the personnel must be exactly regulated by the operator. If the per-
sonnel do not have the required knowledge, same must be trained and instructed. If
required, this may be effected by the manufacturer/supplier on behalf of the machine
operator. In addition, it must be ensured by the operator that the contents of the op-
erating instructions are fully understood by the personnel.
2.4 DANGERS IN CASE OF NON-COMPLIANCE WITH THE SAFETY HINTS
Non-compliance with the safety hints may result in both, danger to persons as well
as environment and machine. Non-compliance with the safety hints may lead to the
loss of any claims for damages.
In detail, non-compliance may, for example, entail the following dangers:
• Failure of important functions of the machine/plant
• Failure of specified methods for maintenance and servicing
• Danger to persons by electrical, mechanical and chemical influences
• Danger to the environment by leakage of dangerous substances
2.5 RESPONSIBLE WORKING
The safety hints mentioned in these operating instructions, the current national rules
for the prevention of accidents as well as any internal working, operating and safety
regulations of the operator are to be observed.
2.6 SAFETY HINTS FOR THE USER/OPERATOR
• If hot or cold machine parts lead to dangers, these parts must be protected
against accidental contact at the site.
• Protection against accidental contact for moving parts must not be removed
when the machine is in operation.
• Leakages (e.g. of the shaft seal) of dangerous materials to be handled (e.g.
explosive, toxic, hot) must be discharged so as not to result in danger to persons
and the environment. Legal stipulations are to be observed.
• Dangers by electrical energy are to be excluded (please refer e.g. to the regula-
tions of the VDE and the local energy supply associations).
2.7 SAFETY HINTS FOR MAINTENANCE, INSPECTION AND MOUNTING OPERATIONS
The operator shall see to it that all maintenance, inspection and mounting operations
ABM2S_e8.fm / 5.4.17
will be performed by authorized and qualified expert personnel who have sufficiently
informed themselves by thoroughly studying the operating instructions.
Basically, operations at the machine are to be performed during standstill only. The
mode of operation for stopping the machine described in the operating instructions
must be absolutely observed.
6 (24) Macerator ABM 2 S
Transportation and intermediate storage
Immediately upon termination of the operations, all safety and protective devices
must be mounted again and/or made operational.
Prior to restarting, the items listed in "Commissioning/decommissioning" on page 10
are to be observed.
2.8 INDEPENDENT RECONSTRUCTION AND SPARE PARTS PRODUCTION
Reconstruction of or changes to the machine are only admissible after consultation
with the manufacturer. Original spare parts and accessories authorized by the man-
ufacturer serve safety purposes. The use of other parts may cancel the liability for
the consequences resulting therefrom.
2.9 INADMISSIBLE MODES OF OPERATION
The operating safety of the machine supplied is only ensured with due application ac-
cording to operating instructions. The limit values given in the data sheet must by no
means be exceeded.
3. TRANSPORTATION AND INTERMEDIATE STORAGE
3.1 PACKING
The graphic symbols on the packaging must be observed. During transport and stor-
age, the suction and discharge and the auxiliary connections of the pump must be
plugged. The plugs must be removed when the pump unit is installed.
3.2 TRANSPORTATION
Due to their weight, lifting equipment must be used to transfer macerators to their fi-
nal location. When transporting macerators by crane, the sling ropes must be secure-
ly positioned around the motor, ensuring that the unit is perfectly balanced.
Crane installations and the sling ropes must be able to hold the macerators
weight. The sling ropes must not be fixed to the lifting eyes of the motor.
3.3 PRESERVING MACERATORS AND PLACING THEM INTO STORAGE
Please contact HAMANN AG
ABM2S_e8.fm / 5.4.17
Macerator ABM 2 S 7 (24)
Description
4. DESCRIPTION
4.1 DESIGN FEATURES
Wet crusher for crushing, homogenizing and dispersing flowable liquid/solid encrus-
tation's. The crushing elements consist of the rotating impeller and the stationary cut-
ting ring. The drive torque is transmitted onto the impeller via the shaft.
BEARINGS AND LUBRICATION
The bearing of the ABM series shaft is provided by the reinforced drive bearings. The
bearings are splash-proof.
SHAFT SEAL
Maintenance-free, non-balanced, single-acting mechanical seal.
DIMENSIONS/CONNECTIONS/FLANGES
The dimensions of the macerator and/or the macerator aggregate, the positions of
the connection pieces and the flange dimensions are given in section 8.3 "Dimen-
sional Drawing" on page 17.
4.2 OPERATION
The solids suspended in the delivery medium are seized by the rotating impeller and
are flung against the cutting ring. The solids are uniformly crushed between the cut-
ting edges of the impeller and the cutting edges of the cutting ring. The crushed sol-
ids and the carrier liquid enter the macerator housing through narrow slits in the
impeller and through the gap between the cutting tools and are then transported fur-
ther by a downstream pump.
4.3 UNIT ASSEMBLY
DRIVE
The macerator can be driven by explosion proof or non-explosion proof electric mo-
tors. (See 9. "Drive SK 80 L 0,55/0,66 kW" on page 18)
ABM2S_e8.fm / 5.4.17
8 (24) Macerator ABM 2 S
Installation/mounting
5. INSTALLATION/MOUNTING
5.1 INSTALLATION
The macerators may be installed horizontally with the outlet connection pointing up-
wards or vertically with drive pointing upwards.
5.2 FOUNDATION
The design of the foundation depends on the mounting conditions on site. Dimen-
sional details of the macerators can be taken from section 8.3 "Dimensional Drawing"
on page 17.
The foundation can be executed in concrete or as a stable frame, e.g. in fabricated
steel structure. For all types of foundation, it is essential that the foundation is de-
signed to accept the macerator over the entire surface.
5.3 FASTENING
The macerator must be fixed stress-free to the foundations.
5.4 SPACE REQUIREMENTS FOR MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
The macerator must be accessible from all sides to allow the required visual
inspections to be carried out.
Sufficient space must be provided for maintenance and servicing, in particular for the
replacement of the cutting tools. The space required for replacing parts is listed on
the dimensional drawings. In addition, it must be ensured that all piping can be re-
moved and replaced without obstruction.
5.5 INSTALLATION OF PIPEWORK
NOMINAL DIAMETERS
The nominal diameters of the supply and discharge pipes should be designed ac-
cording to the nominal macerator connection piece diameters. In the event of severe
deviations, the factory must be consulted.
CONNECTIONS
The pipes must be connected stress-free and must be leak-proof. Any thermal
stresses on the pipework must not be passed on to the macerators. Appropriate
measures such as the installation of compensators must be employed.
CLEANING THE PIPEWORK BEFORE CONNECTION
The supply-sided pipework, slides and valves must be flushed and/or cleaned before
installation of the macerator. Items left over from installation, such as screws, nuts,
ABM2S_e8.fm / 5.4.17
large stones, sections of steel, etc. will damage the cutting tools of the macerator.
PROTECTING THE CUTTING TOOLS
In order to protect the cutting tool s against metal particles and stones, a suitable col-
lection tank must be installed in front of the macerator inlet.
Macerator ABM 2 S 9 (24)
Commissioning/decommissioning
5.6 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
The connection of the power supply cable for the drive motor must be performed by
a qualified electrician, in accordance with the motor manufacturer's wiring diagram.
The current VDE regulations and the regulations of the local electricity board
must also be observed. Danger due to electricity must be prevented.
6. COMMISSIONING/DECOMMISSIONING
6.1 COMMISSIONING
• The macerator can rotate anticlockwise or clockwise.
• Prior to start-up, all shut-off devices installed in the suction and discharge pipes
must be open. The supply line must be filled with liquid.
• Switch motor on.
• The motor may not be overloaded. The power consumption can be checked with
the aid of an ammeter.
Pumps installed upstream or downstream of the macerator may only be oper-
ated after the macerator has been switched on.
6.2 DECOMMISSIONING
• Switch the motor off.
MEASURES FOR PROLONGED SHUT-DOWN PERIODS
If a longer shut-down is planned and exposure to frost is likely, any remaining fluid
must be drained from the macerator. The macerator must then be protected (contact
HAMANN AG for further details).
ABM2S_e8.fm / 5.4.17
10 (24) Macerator ABM 2 S
Maintenance/service
7. MAINTENANCE/SERVICE
The information given in section 2 2. "Safety" on page 5 is to be observed during
maintenance and service operations. Regular monitoring and servicing will prolong
the service life.
7.1 GENERAL MONITORING
1. The drive motor may not be overloaded.
2. Check the supply and discharge lines for tightness.
3. The mechanical seal may not show any sign of leakage.
DRIVE:
Refer to the manufacturer's operating and maintenance instructions in section 9.
"Drive SK 80 L 0,55/0,66 kW" on page 18.
7.2 SERVICING (DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS)
Trained service engineers will be available for installations and repairs on request.
When repairs are performed by the user's own personnel or by our service en-
gineers, it is essential that the macerator is completely drained and cleaned.
This applies particularly to macerators that are returned for repair to our facto-
ry or to one of our authorized service centres.
• In order to protect our staff and for the sake of environmental protection, repairs
on pumps filled with pumping liquid will be refused. Otherwise, we will have to
charge the customer/user for the costs of ecological waste disposal.
• If repairs are required on macerators that have handled hazardous materials
and/or pumping media that are harmful to the environment, the customer/user
must voluntarily inform his own or our installation personnel of this on site. This
also applies if such a macerator is returned to the factory or to one of our autho-
rized service centres.
• For all work executed on site, the user's own personnel and/or our service engi-
neers must be alerted to dangers that may arise in connection with repairs.
The given numbers in the following instructions are in accordance to the num-
bers in section 8.1 "Sectional Drawing" on page 15.
• Protective gloves must be worn for all work executed around the cutting tools
(403, 409).
• The most important disassembly and assembly operations are described in
these instructions. The assembly steps described in the individual sections must
be consistently followed.
DISASSEMBLY OF THE MACERATOR
Before commencing disassembly, the following operations must be performed:
ABM2S_e8.fm / 5.4.17
• Disconnect the power supply cable to the motor. It must not be possible to start
the motor.
• Close all shut-off devices in the suction and discharge lines.
• Remove pipes on discharge side from sealing cover (210).
• Loosen and remove bolts fixing the macerator to the foundation.
Macerator ABM 2 S 11 (24)
Maintenance/service
DISASSEMBLY OF THE IMPELLER
• Remove union (603).
• Lift drive with sealing cover (210) of macerator housing (502).
• Bend up the edges of the locking plate (402) and unscrew the shaft nut (401) by
locking the shaft with the impeller (403).
• Remove locking plate (402)
• Using a removal tool, pull impeller (403) off the shaft.
DISASSEMBLY OF THE CUTTING RING
The cutting ring is disassembled after the impeller (403) has been removed. (see
above)
• Remove upper O-ring (410) and pull cutting ring (409) out of the macerator cas-
ing (502).
• Remove lower O-ring (410).
DISASSEMBLY OF THE MECHANICAL SEAL
The mechanical seal is disassembled after the impeller (403) has been removed.
(see above)
• Remove key (118).
• Undo unions (301, 302). Withdraw sealing cover (210) and mechanical seal
(208) from the shaft end of the motor, ensuring that sealing cover (210) is not
damaged. Remove mechanical seal (208) from the sealing cover (210).
DISASSEMBLY OF THE MOTOR
The motor is disassembled after the mechanical seal (208) has been removed. (see
above)
• Pull splash ring (106) from motor shaft.
ASSEMBLY OF THE MACERATOR
After careful cleaning, the particular macerator parts are assembled accordingly in
reverse order.
INSTALLATION OF THE MECHANICAL SEAL
Mechanical seals are high quality, precision-machined parts. The mechanical seal
manufacturer's assembly instructions must be observed. Careful handling and ex-
treme cleanliness during installation are essential for proper functioning. To facilitate
assembly, surfaces over which O-rings slide can be lubricated with a suitable lubri-
cant, for example, silicon oil, Polydiol or soft soap.
Do not use ordinary oil.
Mechanical seals with elastomer bellows are mounted on the shaft with normal or
low-surface-tension water (with cleansing agent). Ensure sealing seat and shaft are
adequately wetted.
ABM2S_e8.fm / 5.4.17
Do not use oil or grease. The static sealing element (bearing ring) must only
be used with water or alcohol.
12 (24) Macerator ABM 2 S
Maintenance/service
Parts gliding on top of one another must be re-placed in pairs. Never apply lu-
bricant to sliding surfaces but mount in completely dry, dust-free and clean
condition.
• Concentrically press stationary seal ring of the mechanical seal (208) and the
bearing ring into the cleaned sealing cover (210). Ensure uniform pressure is
applied.
• Push splash ring (106) onto the motor shaft.
• Push sealing cover (210) over the motor shaft, ensuring that sealing cover is not
damaged.
• Fix sealing cover (210) with unions (301, 302) to the motor.
• Using the impeller (403) push the rotating parts of the mechanical seal (208)
onto the motor shaft.
ASSEMBLY OF THE CUTTING RING
• Place O-ring (410) on the cutting ring (409) and press assembly into the cleaned
seat of the macerator housing (502).
INSTALLATION OF THE IMPELLER
• Insert key (118).
• Slightly oil shaft and then press impeller onto the shaft.
• Position locking plate (402) and tighten impeller with shaft nut (401).
Secure shaft nut (401) against loosening by bending up the edges of the lock-
ing plate (402).
• Place O-ring (410) onto the cutting ring.
• Place sealing cover (210) and al l assembled parts onto the macerator housing
(502).
Ensure that the impeller (403) is guided concentrically into the cutting ring
(409).
• Attach sealing cover (210) with union (603) to macerator housing (502).
ABM2S_e8.fm / 5.4.17
Macerator ABM 2 S 13 (24)
Spare parts & Drawing
8. SPARE PARTS & DRAWING
For safety reasons, only genuine spare parts supplied by us should be stocked
and used.
The abbreviated type coding of the macerator is stamped on the name plate.
When ordering spare parts/reserve parts, please indicate the following:
• Quantity
• Designation
• Part Number
ABM2S_e8.fm / 5.4.17
14 (24) Macerator ABM 2 S
Spare parts & Drawing
8.1 SECTIONAL DRAWING
8.2 SPARE PARTS LIST
Pos. * Qty. Designation Part No.
- 1 Macerator, complete 000124
3~ 230/400V 50Hz + 3~ 254/440V 60Hz
- 1 Macerator, complete 012468
3~ 230/400V 50Hz + 3~ 254/440V 60Hz with
ACH+PTC
- 1 Macerator, complete 009196
3~ 208V 60Hz
- - 1 Spare part set for macerator ABM 2 S 013480
* included positions marked with „S“
304 1 Drive 3~ 230/400V 50Hz + 3~ 254/440V 60Hz 000814
304 1 Drive 3~ 208V 60Hz 009480
- 1 Support foot for macerator (option) 010428
106 S 1 Gamma ring 000131
ABM2S_e8.fm / 5.4.17
118 S 1 Key/Fitting key 000801
208 S, W 1 Mechanical seal 000568
210 1 Sealing cover 000802
301 4 Hexagonal nut 000803
Macerator ABM 2 S 15 (24)
Spare parts & Drawing
Pos. * Qty. Designation Part No.
302 4 Locking washer 000804
303 4 Stud bolt 000805
401 S, W 1 Lock nut 000807
402 S, W 1 Locking plate 000808
403 S, W 1 Cutter/Cutting wheel 000809
409 S, W 1 Cutter ring 000810
410 S, W 2 O-ring 000569
502 1 Housing 000812
603 4 Hexagon socket head cap screw 000813
* S = included in spare part set, W = Wearing part
ACH = Anti-condensation heating
PTC = Thermistor temperature sensor
ABM2S_e8.fm / 5.4.17
16 (24) Macerator ABM 2 S
Spare parts & Drawing
8.3 DIMENSIONAL DRAWING
Without support foot
With support foot (option)
ABM2S_e8.fm / 5.4.17
Macerator ABM 2 S 17 (24)
Drive SK 80 L 0,55/0,66 kW
9. DRIVE SK 80 L 0,55/0,66 KW
B1091: Three-phase Asynchronous Motors – Standard Design
1. Information
1. General information
These Operating Instructions must be read before you transport, assemble, commission,
maintain or repair NORD motors. All persons who are involved with such tasks must observe
these Operating Instructions. All safety instructions provided in these Operating Instructions
must be strictly observed for reasons of personal protection and protection of property.
Information and instructions provided in the manual supplied, safety and commissioning
information and all other manuals must be observed.
This is absolutely essential in order to avoid hazards and damage!
Any applicable national, local and system-specific regulations and requirements must also be
observed!
Custom designs and design variants may differ on technical details. If any points are
not clear, it is urgently recommended that you consult the manufacturer stating the
type designation and motor number or have the maintenance work performed by
NORD.
Qualified staff are persons who, owing to their training, experience, instruction received, and
their knowledge of relevant standards, accident prevention regulations and the appropriate
operating conditions, are entitled to perform the activities necessary in order to put the motor
into operation.
That also calls for knowledge of First Aid and local rescue facilities. It is assumed that the
work for transport, assembly, installation, commissioning, maintenance and repair will be
performed by qualified staff.
The following points in particular must be observed:
x Specifications and information about permissible use, assembly, connection, ambient
and operating conditions, which are included in the catalogue, the order
documentation and any other product documentation
x The local, system-specific regulations and requirements
x Expert use of tools, hoisting equipment and transport equipment
x Use of personal safety equipment
For reasons of simplicity the Operating Instructions cannot contain all detailed information
about possible design variants so they cannot take into consideration every imaginable case
of installation, operation or maintenance.
For this reason these Operating Instructions essentially only contain such instructions as are
required for normal use by qualified staff. To prevent malfunctions it is necessary that the
specified maintenance and inspection work be performed by appropriately trained staff.
x The engineering guideline 605 2101 must be included with the operating instructions
when operated with the inverter.
x The additional operating instructions must be taken into account if an external fan is
present.
x The brake operating instructions must also be taken into account with braking motors.
If, for any reason, the operating instructions or the engineering guidelines are lost, new
documentation must be obtained from Getriebebau NORD.
ABM2S_e8.fm / 5.4.17
www.nord.com B1091-GB-3212 -3-
18 (24) Macerator ABM 2 S
Drive SK 80 L 0,55/0,66 kW
2. Description
3. Information
2.1 Range of application
Use of the motors:
The motors may only be used for their intended purpose.
The motors are designed with at least IP 55 protection (for degree of protection see name
plate). They can be installed in a dusty or moist environment.
The necessary degree of protection and any additional precautions required always depend
on the operating and environmental conditions. For outdoor installation and vertical designs,
e.g. V1 or V5 with shaft pointing down, NORD recommends using the option of the double fan
hood [RDD].The motors must be protected against intense sunlight, e.g. by means of a
protective roof. The insulation is tropic-proof.
Installation height: d 1000 m
Ambient temperature: -20°C...+40°C. With standard motors, a greater ambient temperature
range is permitted from -20°C...+60°C. The rated power must however be reduced to 82% of
the catalogue value. If the maximum value of the ambient temperature is between +40°C and
+60°C, the value of the power consumption can be inversely interpolated linearly between
100% and 82%.
The motor connection cables and the cable inlet glands must be suitable for temperatures
t 90°C.
3. Information on the designated use of electric motors
Work may only be performed if the system is disconnected from the mains supply.
3.1 Transport, storage
x For transport use all the hoisting lugs fitted to the motor!
x The hoisting lugs are designed for the weight of the motor; do not attach any
additional loads!
x To transport machine sets (e.g. gear unit attachments) only use the hoisting lugs and
pins provided!
x Machine sets must not be hoisted by attaching to individual machines!
To prevent damage to the motor, the motor must always be lifted with suitable hoisting
equipment. The antifriction bearings should be replaced if the time between delivery and
motor commissioning under favourable conditions (storage in dry, dust-free and vibration-free
rooms) is more than 4 years. Under unfavourable conditions that time is reduced
considerably. It may be necessary to treat unprotected, machine surfaces (flanging surface,
shaft end; ...) with corrosion inhibitor. If necessary, check the insulation resistance of the
winding, see section 3.6.
Changes in normal operation (higher power consumption, higher temperatures or higher
vibrations, unusual noises or smells, response from the monitoring system, etc.) indicate that
operation is impaired. To avoid personal injury and damage to property, the maintenance staff
responsible must be informed about the change immediately.
In case of doubt switch off the motor without delay, as soon as the status of the system
permits.
ABM2S_e8.fm / 5.4.17
-4- B1091-GB-3212 www.nord.com
Macerator ABM 2 S 19 (24)
Drive SK 80 L 0,55/0,66 kW
3. Information
3.2 Installation
x Screwed-in lifting eyes must either be screwed in fully or removed after erection!
x Running smoothness: Precise alignment of the coupling and a well-balanced drive
element (coupling, belt pulleys, fans, etc.) are prerequisites for quiet, low vibration
operation.
x Complete balancing of the motor with the drive elements may be necessary.
x The upper section of the terminal box and the terminal box position can be rotated by
4 x 90 degrees.
x IEC-B14 motors:
All four fixing screws, even if not required, must be screwed into the flanged bearing
plate! The fixing screw threads must be inserted with a sealant, e.g. Loctite 242. The
maximum screw-in depth in the bearing plate is 2 x d.
x The motor must be inspected for damage before installation and commissioning. A
damaged motor must not be commissioned.
3.3 Balancing, output components
Fitting and removing output assemblies (coupling, pulleys, gear, ...) must be performed
with a suitable device. The rotors are balanced with half key balancing as standard.
When fitting output assemblies to the motor shaft observe the appropriate type of
balancing! The output assemblies have to be balanced in accordance with
DIN ISO 1940!
Take the general precautions necessary for providing the output assemblies with shock
protection. If a motor is put into operation without an output assembly, prevent the key from
being flung out. This also applies if a second shaft end is fitted. Alternatively, remove the key.
3.4 Alignment
Especially if there is a direct coupling, align the shafts of the motor and the driven machine
with one another axially and radially. Any inaccurate alignment can lead to bearing damage,
excessive vibrations and shaft breakage.
3.5 Electrical connection
Feed the connecting leads into the terminal box with cable glands. The terminal box must be
sealed so that it is dust-tight and water-tight. The mains voltage and mains frequency must
agree with the figures on the name plate. ± 5% voltage deviations or ± 2% frequency
deviations are permissible without any reduction in performance. The connections and
arrangement of the terminal board jumpers must conform to the circuit diagram provided in
the terminal box. Connect the protective earth lead to that protective earth terminal.
Provide the ends of the connecting leads with cable lugs or curved ring eyes and connect
them to the terminal board. That also applies to the protective earth connection and the
external bonding lead.
For tightening torques at the screw connections of electric terminals and the terminal board
connections (apart from terminal strips) refer to the table below:
Tightening torques for terminal board connections
Thread diameter M4 M5 M6 M8
Tightening torque (Nm) 0.6 – 1.2 1.8 – 2.5 2.7 – 4.0 5.5 – 8.0
If the machine has an auxiliary heater, it must not be switched on during operation.
ABM2S_e8.fm / 5.4.17
www.nord.com B1091-GB-3212 -5-
20 (24) Macerator ABM 2 S
Drive SK 80 L 0,55/0,66 kW
3. Information
3.6 Checking insulation resistance
Before putting the motor into operation for the first time, after a lengthy period of storage or
standstill (approx. 6 months), the insulation resistance of the winding has to be determined.
During and directly after measurement the terminals carry hazardous voltages in some cases
and must not be touched.
Insulation resistance
The insulation resistance of new, cleaned, repaired windings against the housing and against
one another is >200 M Ohm.
Measurement
In the case of windings up to an operating voltage of 400 V the insulation resistance against
the housing must be measured with a DC voltage of 500 V. At operating voltages up to 725 V
measure with a DC voltage of 1000 V. When doing this the temperature of the windings
should be 25°C ± 15°C.
Checking
If, in the case of a new, cleaned winding or a repaired motor which has been stored or shut
down for any lengthy period, the insulation resistance of the winding against the housing is
less than 50 MOhm, the cause may be moisture. The windings will then have to be dried.
After any lengthy period of operation the insulation resistance may drop. As long as the
measured value does not fall below the critical insulation resistance of < 50 MOhm, the motor
may continue to be operated. If the value falls below the critical level, the cause must be
established and if necessary, the windings or winding sections must be repaired, cleaned or
dried.
3.7 Commissioning
Note: Electromagnetic compatibility
Emitted interference: If torques are not equal (e.g. drive of a piston compressor) a non-
sinusoidal motor current is bound to develop, the harmonics of which may cause
impermissible mains influence and hence impermissible emitted interference.
If power is fed via an inverter, different levels of emitted interference will occur, depending on
the design of inverter (type, suppression, manufacturer). It is absolutely essential that the
EMC information provided by the inverter manufacturer be observed. If the manufacturer
recommends a screened motor supply lead, screening will be most effective if it is electrically
connected to a large area of the metal terminal box of the motor (with EMC cable gland made
of metal). In the case of motors with built-in sensors (e.g. PTC thermistors) interference
voltages can occur on the sensor line, caused by the inverter.
Interference immunity: In the case of motors with built-in sensors (e.g. PTC thermistors) the
user himself must ensure adequate interference immunity by making a suitable selection of
sensor signal line (possibly with screening, interfacing as with motor supply lead) and the
analysing instrument. Prior to commissioning always observe the information and instructions
in the operating manuals for inverters as well as all other sets of instructions. After attaching
the motors, check them to make sure they are operating properly! In the case of brake motors
also check that the brake operates properly.
ABM2S_e8.fm / 5.4.17
-6- B1091-GB-3212 www.nord.com
Macerator ABM 2 S 21 (24)
Drive SK 80 L 0,55/0,66 kW
4. Maintenance
Servicing
Safety precautions
Before commencing any work on the motor or device, but especially before opening covers in
front of live components, always isolate the motor electrically according to the regulations.
Apart from the main circuits also isolate any additional or auxiliary circuits.
The standard "5 safety rules", e.g. according to DIN VDE 0105, are:
x Isolate electrically
x Prevent equipment from being switched on again
x Check that there is no voltage
x Earth and short-circuit
x Cover any adjacent live components or prevent access with barriers
The above precautions may only be withdrawn when the maintenance work has been
completed and the motor is fully assembled.
Inspect the motors properly at regular intervals. In particular look out for any physical damage,
ensure that cooling passages are free, listen for any unusual noises, and ensure that electrical
connections are performed in a proper manner.
With the exception of standardised, commercial or equivalent parts the only spare parts which
may be used are genuine spare parts!
NOTE: Inasmuch as motors are provided with enclosed condensation ports, they must be
opened from time to time so that any accumulated condensation can drain off. Condensation
ports are always positioned at the lowest point of the motor. When installing the motor ensure
that the condensation holes are at the bottom.
Bearing changes, grease filling
The period for changing bearings in operating hours [h] on IEC motors with coupling drive is
as follows, under normal operating conditions and with the motor installed horizontally,
depending on coolant temperature and motor speed:
25°C 40°C
up to 1800 min-1 approx. 40000 h approx. 20000 h
up to 3600 min-1 approx. 20000 h approx. 10000 h
In the case of direct gearbox attachment or under special operating conditions, e.g. vertical
motor, substantial vibrations or shock loads, frequent reversing, etc. the above-mentioned
operating hours will be reduced considerably.
The motor must be subjected to a general overhaul every 5 years!
General overhaul
For this purpose the motor must be dismantled. Perform the following work:
x Clean all parts of the motor
x Inspect all parts of the motor for damage
x Replace all damaged parts
x Replace all antifriction bearings
x Replace all gaskets and shaft seals
The general overhaul must be performed in a specialised workshop with appropriate
ABM2S_e8.fm / 5.4.17
equipment and by qualified staff. We urgently recommend having the general overhaul
performed by NORD Service.
www.nord.com B1091-GB-3212 -7-
22 (24) Macerator ABM 2 S
Drive SK 80 L 0,55/0,66 kW
9. Spare parts drawing and
spare parts list
Item No. Description Item No. Description
900 Rotor with shaft 918 Key
902 End shield at drive end 924 Screw-on foot (BG 100-132)
902.1 Cheese-head screw 924.1 Hexagon bolt
902.2 Hexagon nut 924.2 Spring lock washer
904 Shaft seal 924.3 Hexagon nut
905 Bearing at drive end 929 Bearing at ventilation end
906 Ball bearing shim 932 End shield at ventilation end
907 Terminal box frame 932.1 Cheese-head screw
907.1 Chassis connection terminal wire clamp 932.2 Hexagon nut
907.2 Oval-head screw 933 Shaft seal
908 Terminal box lid 939 Fan
908.1 Cheese-head screw 940 Fan hood
909 Terminal box frame gasket 940.1 Oval-head screw
910 Terminal box lid gasket 940.2 Countersink screw B3
911 Terminal board 941 Key
911.1 Cheese-head screw 942 947 Circlip
911.5 Spring lock washer 948 Circlip
912 Mini-terminal 952 Clamping bush
912.1 Oval-head screw 953 Cable gland
913 Spacer 955 Blind plug
913.1 Cheese-head screw 956 Blind plug
913.2 Spring lock washer 980 Protective roof
916 Stator with winding 988 Ring seal
916.1 Equipotential bonding terminal 989 Name plate
ABM2S_e8.fm / 5.4.17
916.2 Spring pin 989.1 Oval-head screw
www.nord.com B1091-GB-3212 -19-
Macerator ABM 2 S 23 (24)
Drive SK 80 L 0,55/0,66 kW
ABM2S_e8.fm / 5.4.17
24 (24) Macerator ABM 2 S
Bei der Lehmkuhle 4
D-21279 Hollenstedt - Germany
Tel: +49-(0)4165 / 2211-0
E-Mail: [email protected]
www.HamannAG.com
Eccentric screw pump
Type: NX600-025; NX600-025/60
Part No.: 013022 (NX600-25)
014807 (NX600-25/60)
Operating- and Maintenance Instruction
This instruction includes important safety information and instructions for commission-
ing, operation and maintenance of the HAMANN components. It is essential therefore, that
the responsible specialist refers to it before starting any work on the machinery as well as
prior to commissioning. Furthermore, this instruction must always be available on site.
With reservation of technical modification.
BA 0069 e 1 (48)
CONTENT
DESCRIPTION AND GENERAL DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
AREAS OF APPLICATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
TECHNICAL DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
CHARACTERISTIC CURVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
NOISE EMISSIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
SAFETY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
LABELLING OF ADVICE IN THE OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
PERSONNEL QUALIFICATIONS AND TRAINING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
TRANSPORTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
MOUNTING A DRIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
START UP, OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
REPAIR WORK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
DANGERS ARISING FROM NON- OBSERVANCE OF THE SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
SAFETY-CONSCIOUS WORKING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE USER / OPERATOR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE, INSPECTION AND INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
UNAUTHORIZED MODIFICATIONS, MANUFACTURING OF SPARES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
IMPROPER APPLICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
SPECIFIC POINTS FOR THE USE OF THIS PUMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
NOTES ON INSPECTION AND REPAIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
PACKAGING, TRANSPORT, STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
PACKAGING AND TRANSPORTATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
STATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
ROTOR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
SHAFT SEALING BY PACKING GLAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
PUMP PARTS IN STAINLESS STEEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
OTHER, NON-COATED PUMP PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
DRIVES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
MOUNTING AND INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
DIRECTION OF ROTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
PRESSURE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
PIPING SYSTEM (FOR PUMPS DELIVERED SEPARATELY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
SHAFT SEALING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
ELECTRICAL CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
START UP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
TEMPORARY SHUTDOWN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
STATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
ROTOR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
STAND BY-PUMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
PUMPS IN GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
LUBRICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
PUMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
DRIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
LUBRICATING THE PIN JOINTS WITH SM-PIN JOINT SEALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
LUBRICATING OIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
SHAFT SEALING THROUGH STUFFING BOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
SHAFT SEALING THROUGH SINGLE MECHANICAL SEAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
QUENCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Eccentric screw pump NX600-025; NX600-025/60 3 (48)
VERTICAL SHAFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
TROUBLESHOOTING AND REMEDYING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
TROUBLE CHART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
HOW DO YOU TRACE THE KIND OF PROBLEM TO FIND THE POSSIBLE CAUSE?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
DISMANTLING AND ASSEMBLY OF THE PUMP HOUSING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
REMOVAL AND FITTING OF END CONNECTION, STATOR AND PUMP HOUSING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
PRESSURE REDUCED EXECUTION: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
-. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
DISMANTLING AND ASSEMBLY OF THE ROTATING PARTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
WITH PIN JOINTS WITH SM-PIN JOINT SEAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
BASIC JOINT SIZE NM021 - NM105: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
JOINTS AT BOTH SIDES: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
BASIC JOINT SIZE NM021 - NM105: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
BASIC JOINT SIZE NM021 - NM125: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
-. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
-. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
-. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
-. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
REMOVAL AND FITTING OF THE CONNECTING SHAFT WITH SHAFT SEAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
FITTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
REMOVAL AND FITTING OF THE SINGLE MECHANICAL SEAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
SPARE PARTS AND DRAWINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
SPARE PARTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
SECTIONAL DRAWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
SECTIONAL DRAWING MECHANICAL SEAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
DRIVE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
OPERATING AND ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS FOR GEAR UNITS AND GEARED MOTORS B1000 . . . . . 47
OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS THREE-PHASE ASYNCHRONOUS MOTORS
– STANDARD DESIGN B1091. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
NX600-025_e5.fm / 22.3.17
4 (48) Eccentric screw pump NX600-025; NX600-025/60
Description And General Data
1. DESCRIPTION AND GENERAL DATA
1.1 AREAS OF APPLICATION
The eccentric screw pump type NX600-025; NX600-025/60 is used with HAMANN
Sewage Treatment plants for example as Feeding pump (A-1-P-050).
1.2 DESCRIPTION
An eccentric screw pump is a progressing cavity pump.
The main components which determine the system, discovered by Professor René
Moineau, are a rotating part, called the rotor and a static part, called the stator.
The rotor is a helical screw with an extremely large pitch, large thread depth and
small centre diameter with round cross-section for 1/2-geometry. The stator has a
two start or respectively three start thread and is double or respectively 1.5 the pitch
length of the rotor. This provides space for the medium between the rotor and stator.
When the rotor turns round inside the stator the medium moves continuously from
the inlet to the outlet.
The universal pump system unifies many positive characteristics of other pump
types:
• Like centrifugal pumps, eccentric screw pumps have no suction or pressure
valves, but do have a stable flow rate in proportion to the number of revolutions.
• Like membrane and peristaltic pumps the eccentric screw pump can transport
every type of in homogeneous, gaseous and abrasive media, as well as those
that are not of a liquid consistency or contain solids and/or fibrous material.
• Like gear pumps and screw pumps the eccentric screw pumps is capable of cop-
ing with high medium viscosity.
• Like piston, membrane, gear or screw pumps the eccentric screw pumps can
perform dosing operations.
NX600-025_e5.fm / 22.3.17
Eccentric screw pump NX600-025; NX600-025/60 5 (48)
Description And General Data
Length and cross-sections through the rotor and stator with 1/2-geometry during a
rotation.
NX600-025_e5.fm / 22.3.17
6 (48) Eccentric screw pump NX600-025; NX600-025/60
Description And General Data
Length and cross-sections through a rotor and stator with reduced thickness and
1/2-geometry during a rotation.
1.3 TECHNICAL DATA
Type NX600-025 NX600-025/60
Part No. 013022 014807
Mounting Vertical, drive upwards
Mounting position on bord, below deck
Pump housing Cr-Ni-Mo 17-12-2 (1.4571)
House sealing NBR
Shaft sealing Mechanical seal MG1-G060; Q1Q1VGG
Rotating parts CrNiMo17-12-2 (1.4571)
Nuckle lubrication Mineral oil
Rotor Cr-Ni-Mo-Steel (1.4571)
Stator NEMOLAST® S65L
Medium grey/black water
Ambient temperature ~ 20°C
Flow rate ~ 0,25 m³/h
Pressure at pressure stud ~ 5 bar
Pressure at suction stud 0,1 bar
Connections 1 1/4" BSP
Helical Gear Drive Type Nord SK01-71L/4-F(AL) TF Typ Nord SK01-71L/4-F(AL) TF
Mounting form V1 (vertical position)
Operating voltage 3~ 220-240/380-420 V 3~ 254-277/440-480 V
Power consumption 0,37 kW (50Hz) 0,43 kW (60 Hz)
Rated current 1,1 A (refer to type plate) 1,05 (refer to type plate)
Frequency 50 Hz 60 Hz
Rated speed (50 Hz) ~ 1360 min-1 ~ 1680 min-1
Gear side ~ 250 min-1
Isolation class F
Protection IP55
Thermal protection 3 PTC
NX600-025_e5.fm / 22.3.17
Weight ~ 25 kg
Eccentric screw pump NX600-025; NX600-025/60 7 (48)
Description And General Data
1.4 CHARACTERISTIC CURVE
Q [m³/h]
2 bar
4 bar
3,5 6 bar
2,5
1,5
0,5
0 n [1/min]
0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500
0 1 2 3
vgm [m/s]
P [kW]
4
6 bar
2
0,9
0,7
1
0,8 4
2 bar
bar
0,6
0,7
0,8 2 bar
0,5
0,6
0,6
0,5
0,4
0,4
0,3
0,4
0,3
0,2
0,2
0,2
0,1
0,1
0 n [1/min]
0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500
NX600-025_e5.fm / 22.3.17
Losbrechmoment / starting torque T(L) = 4 Nm Druck / pressure T
2 bar 2,46 Nm
4 bar 3,16 Nm
6 bar 3,96 Nm
8 (48) Eccentric screw pump NX600-025; NX600-025/60
Description And General Data
1.5 NOISE EMISSIONS
The maximum permitted noise emission level at a work place is 70 dB (A).
The noise level was measured in accordance with DIN Standard 45635-24-01-KL2
to assure that the pump does not exceed 70 dB (A).
Noises generated by the drive and pipes are not included in the above emission val-
ue.
A prerequisite for the noise emission level of <70 dB (A) is that the pump is operated
in a cavity free regime and is bolted to a concrete base.
NX600-025_e5.fm / 22.3.17
Eccentric screw pump NX600-025; NX600-025/60 9 (48)
Safety
2. SAFETY
This operating and maintenance instruction includes important safety information
and instructions for installation, commissioning, operation and maintenance of ec-
centric pumps. It is essential therefore, that the responsible specialist refers to it be-
fore starting any work on the machinery as well as prior to commissioning.
Furthermore, this instruction must always be available on site.
In addition to the general safety instructions listed in this main section on safety, it is
necessary to observe the special rules included in other sections of the manual.
Please also refer to chapter "General Information" of the Technical Manual of
HAMANN AG Sewage Treatment Plant.
2.1 LABELLING OF ADVICE IN THE OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
Non-observance of these instructions could lead to danger of life or limb. Therefore,
important safety advice in these instructions are marked with the following general
hazard symbol:
Warnings regarding electric power are labelled with:
Safety instructions whose non-observance could jeopardize the machine and its
functions are labelled with
Important additional informations are labelled with
Always comply with instructions mounted directly on the machine, e.g.
• rotational direction arrow
• fluid connection indicators
NX600-025_e5.fm / 22.3.17
10 (48) Eccentric screw pump NX600-025; NX600-025/60
Safety
2.2 PERSONNEL QUALIFICATIONS AND TRAINING
Operating, maintenance, inspection and installation staff must possess the correct
qualifications for their work. Areas of responsibility, scope of authority and staff su-
pervision must be exactly defined by the user.
If personnel do not have the necessary knowledge they must receive due training
and instruction. If necessary, the user of the machine / equipment can arrange for
such training and instruction to be provided by the manufacturer / supplier.
The user must also make sure that the content of the manual is fully understood by
the staff concerned.
TRANSPORTATION
The responsible person must be familiar with the accident prevention regulations for
any hoisting gear and lifting accessories to be used.
Personal should be given appropriate instruction prior to undertaking transportation,
hoisting and lifting.
MOUNTING A DRIVE
The responsible person must be trained and qualified as an industrial mechanic/tech-
nician.
INSTALLATION
The responsible person must be trained and qualified as an industrial mechanic /
technician.
START UP, OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
The responsible person must be familiar with the design and functioning of the plant
in which the machine is being installed.
They must understand the operating principle of the machine and have read the
manual and the safety instructions before commencing work on the machine. The
operators have to be trained for the operation of the machine.
REPAIR WORK
The responsible person must be trained and qualified as an industrial mechanic /
technician.
They must have knowledge of and be aware of the specific details of the machine as
detailed in this manual. Unskilled personnel must be trained and any repair work un-
dertaken must be checked by the responsible person.
2.3 DANGERS ARISING FROM NON- OBSERVANCE OF THE SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Non-observance of the safety instructions can result in danger to personnel as well
as to the environment and the machine. Non-observance of the safety instructions
NX600-025_e5.fm / 22.3.17
can result in the loss of claims for compensation.
Non-observance of the safety instructions can have, for example, the following con-
sequences:
• Failure of essential functions of the machine / equipment
• Failure of mandatory maintenance and servicing methods
• Danger to personnel from electricity, machinery and chemicals
Eccentric screw pump NX600-025; NX600-025/60 11 (48)
Safety
• Danger to the environment from leakage of hazardous substances.
2.4 SAFETY-CONSCIOUS WORKING
In addition to the safety instructions listed in the manual, it is essential to observe the
national accident prevention directives currently in force and any of the users own
internal regulations concerning work and safety.
2.5 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE USER / OPERATOR
• If there is a risk of danger from any hot or cold machine component, the user
must fit protective guards to prevent such components from being touched
(according to Standard EN 563).
• Protective guards fitted to prevent contact with moving parts (eg. couplings)
must be in position when the machine / equipment is in use.
• Leakages (eg. from a shaft seal) of hazardous materials (eg. explosive, toxic, hot
material) must be discharged in such a way that neither personnel nor the envi-
ronment are placed at risk. Legal directives must be observed.
• All possible danger from electricity must be eliminated (for details see eg. the
regulations of your local power supply company).
2.6 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE, INSPECTION AND INSTALLATION
The user must ensure that all maintenance, inspection and installation work is car-
ried out by authorized and qualified personnel who understand the operating instruc-
tions and are adequately trained.
Work on a pump / equipment must only be carried out with the machine stopped and
electrical power supply turned off. The pump/ equipment must not be under any pres-
sure and must have cooled off. All procedures detailed in these operating instruc-
tions on the stoppage of the machine must always be adhered to.
Pumps / equipment which convey harmful media must be decontaminated.
Immediately after the maintenance work is finished all safety devices and guards
must be re-installed and the safety trips must be tested.
Before putting the machine back into operation the points detailed in section "Start-
up" should be observed.
2.7 UNAUTHORIZED MODIFICATIONS, MANUFACTURING OF SPARES
Modifications or changes to machines / equipment are only permissible with the
manufacturer's agreement. Original spare parts and accessories authorized by the
manufacturer ensure safety. The use of other components revokes any liability for
consequences which may result.
2.8 IMPROPER APPLICATION
NX600-025_e5.fm / 22.3.17
Delivered machinery / equipment is only guaranteed safe for the use specified. This
machine / equipment was designed in accordance with the prescribed conditions of
use. The limits of use are laid down in the conditions of use and should in no way be
exceeded. See 1.3 "Technical Data" on page 7.
12 (48) Eccentric screw pump NX600-025; NX600-025/60
Safety
2.9 SPECIFIC POINTS FOR THE USE OF THIS PUMP
the pump must be used for the purpose only for which it was sold.
If you change or wish to change the process medium, you must check with either the
supplier or manufacturer that the pump is suitable for the new medium. This is espe-
cially important with aggressive, poisonous or otherwise hazardous substances.
Pump criteria include:
1. Compatibility with the pumped media
2. Suitability for seal design I material, especially the shaft seal
3. Resistance to pressure and temperature of the media
The pump is a positive displacement pump and as such is able to generate
pressures that exceed the pumps design limit.
A blockage or the chance closure of a valve in the discharge line can cause a
pressure rise manifold as high as can be tolerated by the installation. This can
result in the bursting of pipes, which must be avoided especially in the case of
dangerous media.
Corresponding safety equipment must therefore be installed, for example an emer-
gency stop button, a pressure relief valve with return pipe or a bursting disc. During
maintenance and repair work on the pump please note the following:
1. Ensure that the pump drive can not be turned on without authorization
2. When opening the pump follow the instructions for handling the medium (eg. pro-
tective clothing, no smoking etc)
3. Before putting the pump back into operation ensure that all guards and other
safety devices (eg. drive-belt protection, coupling protection) are properly rein-
stalled
2.10 NOTES ON INSPECTION AND REPAIR
The legal regulations for safety at work, such as regulations for the workplace, regu-
lations governing dangerous materials, accident prevention, environmental protec-
tion eg. regulations on disposal and water balance obligate all commercial business
to protect their employees and / or people and the environment from adverse effects
caused by contact with dangerous materials.
When a pump is sent back to our workshop it has to be in a dry and clean con-
dition!
NX600-025_e5.fm / 22.3.17
Eccentric screw pump NX600-025; NX600-025/60 13 (48)
Packaging, transport, storage
3. PACKAGING, TRANSPORT, STORAGE
3.1 PACKAGING AND TRANSPORTATION
Pumps are shipped in railroad containers or crates unless the customer specifies
otherwise. The packings are labeled and symbols give the handling instructions in
accordance with DIN 55402.
On receipt check for any transport damages. Transport damages should be reported
to the transporter immediately. The pumps should be transported as closely as pos-
sible to the location of installation and only there should they be uncrated.
Uncrated horizontal pumps should be lifted by using a shackle which can be attached
to the baseplate. The bolt holes of the frame or the lifting lugs attached to the base-
plate could be used as show on the installation drawing.
Vertical pumps should be lifted by using the bolt down holes, lifting lugs or shackles
attached to the baseplate. This is shown on the installation drawing. For most appli-
cations, the drive is mounted on top of the pump.
Be careful when lifting top heavy pumps. The centre of gravity may be above
the points where the lifting gear is attached to. If the case, secure additionally
against tipping over!
Vertical pumps should not be deposited unless they are secured vertically. Hazards
of tipping! Deposit only in horizontal position!
lt is essential to avoid that the total pump unit be suspended with eye bolts of the mo-
tor or gear box. These eye bolts should be used for lifting the motor and/or the gear
box only.
The Accident Prevention Rules, Section 18.4 relating to lifting accessories for
the lifting of loads (VBG 9a) must be strictly adhered to.
Because of the variety of possible pump designs and applications, only general in-
structions can be given here. These should be good enough for experienced assem-
blymen or transportation experts. When in doubt, please ask for detailed information
on the pump unit concerned.
When moving the pump or unit on wheels strictly attend to the following:
• Pad lock the motor drive and secure against unintended starting up.
• Move the pump unit carefully and slowly, especially where the ground is uneven.
Hazards of tipping!
• Ensure a stable position of the pump or unit at the operating/storage place and
secure it by actuating all clamping devices on all the wheels or rollers against
voluntary moving away.
• Where fitted loosely, carefully watch the pipe bends when pumping. Power of
repulsion!
• Where necessary, secure the pump unit additionally with support blocks.
NX600-025_e5.fm / 22.3.17
3.2 STORAGE
The pumps are preserved for transport unless specified otherwise. ln cases of longer
storage the pumps should be handled as follows until installation:
14 (48) Eccentric screw pump NX600-025; NX600-025/60
Packaging, transport, storage
STATOR
If the pump is not to be used immediately, then the elastomer along the contact line
between rotor and stator may become permanently distorted (compression-set). This
will increase the break away torque. Therefore, the stator should be removed and
kept separately in a clean, cool and dry environment.
Standard DIN 7716 summarizes detailed information on the storage of rubber prod-
ucts, some of which is gathered here, and the following notice applies to a storage
for a period of up to six months.
General:
Most of the rubber products may change their physical properties under unfavorable
conditions or if treated improperly, which will result in a shorter lifetime.
Or they may become useless through excessive hardening, aging, regenerating or
permanent deformation, also because of blistering, cracking or other damages ap-
pearing on the surfaces. The changes may occur under the influence of oxygen,
ozone, heat, light, humidity, solvents or because of storing the products under ten-
sion.
If stored and treated properly, the rubber products will keep their properties, even
over a long period of time (some years), almost unchanged.
This does, however, not apply to uncured rubber compounds.
Store room:
The environment in which rubber products are being kept must be cool, dry, free of
dust and rather airy, and they must not be stored in the open, not even in a weather
sheltered space.
Rubber products should be kept in surroundings not having less than minus 10°C
and not more than plus 15°C.
Store rooms should not be damp, and it must be ensured that there will be no con-
densation.
Most favorable is an environment offering a relative humidity under 65%.
Rubber products must be protected against light, particularly direct sunlight or artifi-
cial light when having a high UV portion.
They should furthermore be kept away from ventilation, especially draught, by wrap-
ping them up.
As ozone is very aggressive and harmful there should be no store room used which
houses equipment likely to produce ozone, e.g. electric motors or other equipment
which might bring about sparks or other electrical discharges.
There must be no solvents, oil, grease, lubricants or any chemicals kept in a store
room.
ROTOR
Please support with wooden blocks and cover up against harm from mechanical im-
pact.
For rotors of RCC (material number 1.2436): coat the surfaces with protective grease
to avoid rusting.
SHAFT SEALING BY PACKING GLAND
NX600-025_e5.fm / 22.3.17
Remove the gland and coat the exposed shaft surface with grease.
PUMP PARTS IN STAINLESS STEEL
No grease coating necessary.
Eccentric screw pump NX600-025; NX600-025/60 15 (48)
Packaging, transport, storage
OTHER, NON-COATED PUMP PARTS
Protect with grease.
DRIVES
Please observe the drive supplier's instructions.
NX600-025_e5.fm / 22.3.17
16 (48) Eccentric screw pump NX600-025; NX600-025/60
Mounting and installation
4. MOUNTING AND INSTALLATION
If the pump was stored and the rotor grease protected:
• Remove the grease before installing the stator. Clean the rotor thoroughly in
order to avoid unsuitability of the grease with the stator material and the pumping
medium.
• Screw the pump at all fixing points (bearing housing / drive stool, end stud, sup-
port feet) using all fixing bores securely down to the sub-structure (ground plate,
machine frame, foundation etc.).
4.1 DIRECTION OF ROTATION
The direction of rotation of the pump is given on the model plate. The direction of de-
livery of the pump is a function of the direction of rotation.
Changes must be agreed upon and confirmed by the supplier.
4.2 PRESSURE
If not explicitly confirmed otherwise in the order confirmation, the maximum permis-
sible pressure (e.g. when turning clockwise) inside the pump housing (A) is:
• for models with welded pump housing: 6 bar.
• for models with welded pump housing: 10 bar
The maximum permissible pressures inside the end flange (B) is a function of the de-
sign applied for connections:
• with flange: maximum nominal pressure (e.g. PN 16)
• with threaded internal socket: maximum 25 bar
4.3 PIPING SYSTEM (FOR PUMPS DELIVERED SEPARATELY)
Arrange suction and pressure pipes so that when the pump is not running, the medi-
um is still present before and after the pump. Sufficient media should remain inside
in order to lubricate the pump during restart.
The installation of a removable distance piece between the end flange (B) and the
pipe work is recommended in order to make the dismantling of the stator easy. The
distance piece (see sketch) needs to have a minimum "ABL" disassembly length.
NX600-025_e5.fm / 22.3.17
Figure 1: Disassembly length ABL for pump: 230 mm
Eccentric screw pump NX600-025; NX600-025/60 17 (48)
Mounting and installation
• Clean the pipe work and rinse thoroughly before installing the pump.
• Connect the pipe work ensuring that no external stress attacks the pump body.
The installation of compensators between the pump and the pipework is recom-
mended:
– No risk of damage to the pump housing from pipelines "resting" on the pump.
– No risk of damage to the pump housing through vibrating pipelines.
• The twisting loads (Fx, Fy, Fz) and bending loads (Mx, My, Mz) permitted to be
put on the suction/discharge flange comply with the requirements of API 676 and
exceed the requirements of EN ISO 14847.
Standard Nominal diameter DN 32 (G 1 1/4“)
Fx, Fy, Fz (N) 416
Mx, My, Mz (Nm) 224
Screwed joints must not be charged with loads which may result in tightening
or loosening these joints.
4.4 SHAFT SEALING
Where applicable, ensure that adequate supply lines for the buffer, flushing or
quenching fluid for the shaft seals are connected before the pump is put into opera-
tion. For more details see section 13. "Spare parts and drawings" on page 43.
4.5 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION
NX600-025_e5.fm / 22.3.17
All work relating to electricity shall only be made by authorized and qualified
personnel and it should be in compliance with the requirements of the relevant
national regulations!
18 (48) Eccentric screw pump NX600-025; NX600-025/60
Start Up
5. START UP
The pump design requires strict attention to the following:
Never run the pump dry! A few rotations in dry condition will damage the sta-
tor!
Before starting up for the first time, fill the pump with medium.
In the case of high viscosity media fill with a liquid.
Pump priming is vital to ensure lubrication of the rubber stator.
Fill the piping on the pump suction side.
In anti-clockwise rotation only: Fill the pump housing.
The pump is a progressing cavity pump which can produce pressures that may
cause the bursting of vessels or pipes.
The power transmission train (shaft, coupling rod, joints, rotor) of the pump
may be overloaded thus resulting in damage or breakage.
Also the pump housing parts with their connections may be overloaded and
break.
Never run the pump against a closed inlet or outlet valve!
• Open valves and vents before starting the pump!
• Check the direction of rotation by briefly switching on the pump motor.
NX600-025_e5.fm / 22.3.17
Eccentric screw pump NX600-025; NX600-025/60 19 (48)
Temporary shutdown
6. TEMPORARY SHUTDOWN
After stopping the pump, first empty it, and then if necessary, rinse it if:
• the medium might freeze due to the temperature surrounding the pump. Espe-
cially where there is a danger of frost if the pump is installed outside a building
• the medium tends to solidify or harden
• the medium tends to glue up the shaft seal.
STATOR
When stored for a long period (see 3.2 "Storage" on page 14), the elastomer along
the contact line between the rotor and stator may become permanently distorted
(compression-set).
This will increase the break away torque. For this reason, the stator should be re-
moved (please observe section 13. "Spare parts and drawings" on page 43), and
stored in a cool, dry place in an air-tight package to give protection against light and
air.
ROTOR
Support rotor on wooden block and cover to protect it from mechanical damage after
the stator has been removed.
Remove the grease before re-installing the stator and clean the rotor thoroughly in
order to avoid unsuitability of the grease with the pumping medium or the stator ma-
terial.
STAND BY-PUMP
A stand-by pump is sometimes used as a back-up for the main pump and, when
standing idle for longer periods, should be operated from time to time. The pump may
otherwise become seized when being started up. This is due to compression set i.e.
distortion of the stator against the surface of the rotor, see section 3.2 "Storage" on
page 14.
NX600-025_e5.fm / 22.3.17
20 (48) Eccentric screw pump NX600-025; NX600-025/60
Maintenance
7. MAINTENANCE
7.1 PUMPS IN GENERAL
Separately mounted screw pumps should be regularly rinsed or cleaned if deposits
of medium are likely to build up (sedimentation).
If the pump needs to be opened to do this, ensure that the pump and motor are
switched off and cannot be turned on accidentally (e.g. by removing the fuse).
Periodical standstill to allow for cleaning during operation depends on the medium
and type of operation.
The pump can be cleaned:
• through the cleaning ports provided in the pump housing
• manually by dismantling the pump
7.2 LUBRICATION
PUMP
The eccentric pump does not require any frequent lubrication.
DRIVE
Maintenance of the drive should be carried out according to the drive manufacturers
instructions. See see “Drive” on page 47 and following.
Special lubricants are often specified for mechanically controlled variable
speed drives. lt is therefore important to follow the drive manufacturers main-
tenance instructions.
7.3 LUBRICATING THE PIN JOINTS WITH SM-PIN JOINT SEALS
lt is however advisable to change the oil and check the seals of the gear joints:
• when renewing worn joint parts
• when opening the pump for any reason.
The quantity of oil added per pin joint is a function of the joint external diameter D:
Joint external diameter D: 30 mm
Quantity of oil per joint: 2 cm3
NX600-025_e5.fm / 22.3.17
Eccentric screw pump NX600-025; NX600-025/60 21 (48)
Maintenance
LUBRICATING OIL
Seal material Permitted Product
FPM „SHELL“
NBR Omala 460
EPDM „KLÜBER“
KLÜBERSYNTH UH1 6-460
At a sudden break in a joint up to 470 ml of lubricating oil together with metal rubbings
may enter the pumping medium. It is therefore of essential importance to regularly
check the state of the joint seals and renew in time, if necessary.
If the pin joints operate without lubricating oil or seals, there will be no risk of contam-
inating the medium with oil. This operation, however, results in a higher amount of
rubbed off metal parts through wear on the joints. These metal rubbings will inevita-
bly and continuously come into contact with the pumping medium.
7.4 SHAFT SEALING THROUGH STUFFING BOX
No content because not applicable for pump type NX600-025; NX600-025/60.
7.5 SHAFT SEALING THROUGH SINGLE MECHANICAL SEAL
• Type: see “Technical Data” on page 7
• Pumps fitted with direction dependent seals should never be run in the opposite
direction of the rotation arrow.
If excessive leakage occurs, the spring tension and the seal surfaces should be
checked, and the seal should be replaced, if necessary.
QUENCH
Quench is the designation commonly used in sealing engineering for an arrange-
ment that applies a non pressurized external fluid to the atmospheric side of a me-
chanical seal. The quench is used when
• a single mechanical seal will not work or only to a limited extent without auxiliary
measures or
• a double mechanical seal with pressurized buffer fluid is not necessary.
Recommended for the following applications:
• Low temperature (danger of freezing)
• Operation in a vacuum (dry running)
• Media which must be isolated from the atmosphere (eg. due to build up of solid
deposits or because of less severe damage to the environment, like smell).
Leakages will be transported away by the quenching liquid.
NX600-025_e5.fm / 22.3.17
22 (48) Eccentric screw pump NX600-025; NX600-025/60
Maintenance
ln vacuum operation dry running of the seals is avoided.
No pressure higher than that of the pumped medium in front of the mechanical seal
is allowed to build up in the quenching area (1) behind the mechanical seal. Other-
wise the counter ring will be pushed out of the housing. Free discharge from (2) is
necessary!
Closing off the quenching area from the atmosphere can be done in three ways:
1. ln the case that high emission levels can be tolerated: Through a throttle bush
(4). Cooling liquid not permanently used, only released from time to time.
2. ln the case that medium emission levels can be tolerated: By a radial shaft seal
ring (3). Permanent radial shaft seal lubrication through quenching liquid is nec-
essary.
VERTICAL SHAFT
For vertically installed eccentric screw pumps:
On initial start-up the mechanical seal has not come in contact with the medium. It
runs therefore dry for a short period of time until the air is displaced from the pump
housing.
• On first start-up and if stood idle for longer periods lubricate the mechanical seal
before switching on the pump.
• Apply water, glycerine or oil depending on their compatibility with the pumping
medium and the elastomer of the mechanical seal.
• Fill the quench cup of the mechanical seal housing.
NX600-025_e5.fm / 22.3.17
Eccentric screw pump NX600-025; NX600-025/60 23 (48)
Troubleshooting and remedying
8. TROUBLESHOOTING AND REMEDYING
8.1 TROUBLE CHART
The chart overleaf lists possible problems as
• the type
• the likely reason / cause
• the remedy.
• A problem may have various causes:
– several boxes in the vertical column are marked with a cross
• .A reason I cause may result in various problems:
– several boxes in the horizontal column are marked with a cross
8.2 HOW DO YOU TRACE THE KIND OF PROBLEM TO FIND THE POSSIBLE CAUSE?
• the column describing a possible problem shows one or several boxes marked
with a cross
• on the corresponding lines you will find the possible reasons I cause and some
hints how to handle the problem
(Thus the actual cause of the problem can be narrowed down and eventually
detected.)
• if you find further cross-marked boxes on one of the lines and should there
appear corresponding problems as well, then the likely cause of the problem has
been detected
The table help in finding the root of the problem by providing a remedy, if it is straight
forward.
NX600-025_e5.fm / 22.3.17
24 (48) Eccentric screw pump NX600-025; NX600-025/60
Troubleshooting and remedying
For more complicated problems HAMANN AG has to be consulted.
NX600-025_e5.fm / 22.3.17
Eccentric screw pump NX600-025; NX600-025/60 25 (48)
Troubleshooting and remedying
NX600-025_e5.fm / 22.3.17
26 (48) Eccentric screw pump NX600-025; NX600-025/60
Dismantling and Assembly of the pump housing
9. DISMANTLING AND ASSEMBLY OF THE PUMP HOUSING
9.1 REMOVAL AND FITTING OF END CONNECTION, STATOR AND PUMP HOUSING
The pump with attached pipework should be empty and must have cooled off!
Disconnect the pipework on the suction side and pressure side of the pump.
9.1.1 DISMANTLING
• Remove securing screws (S) from support feet (2035) to baseplate (G).
• Unscrew hex nuts (3020) and remove with spring washers (3015).
• Withdraw end connection (2005) and first support foot (2035/1) with washers
(3070).
NX600-025_e5.fm / 22.3.17
• Support pump housing (201 0) and stator (3005) with wooden blocks.
• Loosen hex nuts (3020), where fitted, and remove thru bolts (301 0).
Eccentric screw pump NX600-025; NX600-025/60 27 (48)
Dismantling and Assembly of the pump housing
• Where fitted, remove second support foot (2035/2) and washers (3070).
Caution for pumps with tubular rotors:
Where the walls of tubular rotors are worn in the wear zones, pumping medium may
occur inside the rotor and may come out when pulling off the stator. Ensure that pro-
tective measures have been taken when pumping dangerous medial
• Pull the stator (3005) out forward.
(A stator extractor can be supplied as special accessory.)
• Remove the hex nuts (2030) with spring washers (2025).
NX600-025_e5.fm / 22.3.17
28 (48) Eccentric screw pump NX600-025; NX600-025/60
Dismantling and Assembly of the pump housing
• PulI the pump housing (201 0) off forward.
PRESSURE REDUCED EXECUTION:
• Remove screws (2164) and spring washers (2167).
• Pull the pump housing (201 0) completely forward, off the mechanical seal hous-
ing of the shaft sealing (W).
NX600-025_e5.fm / 22.3.17
Eccentric screw pump NX600-025; NX600-025/60 29 (48)
Dismantling and Assembly of the pump housing
9.1.2 ASSEMBLY
• Refit in reverse order.
When refitting the stator (3005) check direction of stator (3005) is correct! The
funnel-shaped inflow side (E) of the stator (3005) must show to
– the pump housing (201 0) when rotation is anti clockwise
– the end connection (2005) when rotation is clockwise
when viewed on pump shaft end.
• Elastomer stators (A) have integrated front side sealing profiles (D). They don't
need additional gaskets for sealing off the end connection (2005) and the pump
housing (201 0).
• Solid stators (B) have no integrated front side sealing profiles. Therefore addi-
tional gaskets (8005) should be installed to seal oft the end connection (2005) as
well as the pump housing (201 0).
NX600-025_e5.fm / 22.3.17
Be careful when engaging the stator (3005) and rotor (1999). Do not trap your
fingers. Do not reach inside the stator.
• Push stator (3005) with a rotating movement on to rotor (1999).
30 (48) Eccentric screw pump NX600-025; NX600-025/60
Dismantling and Assembly of the pump housing
• Apply an assembly device and some glycerine to ease engaging stator (3005)
and rotor (1999).
When tightening the hex nuts (2030), a gap remains between the lantern (0085)
and the pump housing (201 0) or the mechanical seal housing of the shaft seal-
ing (W).
Do not try to close this gap by over-tightening the hex nuts (2030)! Lantern
(0085) can break!
Torque values for hex nuts (2030):
Size M6 M8 M10 M12 M16 M20 M24 M30
Required torque 8 15 30 45 75 80 100 120
NX600-025_e5.fm / 22.3.17
[Nm]
Fastening the end connection (2005):
• Screw hex nuts (3020/C) down into thru bolts (301 0) as far as possible.
• Slip on the first washers (3070), the support foot (2035/1), the second washers
(3070), the end stud (2005) and tighten with spring washers (3015) and hex nuts
(3020/A).
Eccentric screw pump NX600-025; NX600-025/60 31 (48)
Dismantling and Assembly of the pump housing
• Fasten support foot (2035/1) from behind with hex nuts (3020/C).
Ensure during refitting that the 0-ring (8015) or, where a heating jacket (3025) is in-
stalled, the 0-rings (8030) are in perfect condition and will sit correctly.
Ensure that the drain plug (2015) is not screwed too tightly into the pump housing
(2010), since otherwise its conical thread may break the pump housing (2010).
The torque should be about 40 - 50 Nm.
9.2 -
No content because not applicable for pump type NX600-025; NX600-025/60.
NX600-025_e5.fm / 22.3.17
32 (48) Eccentric screw pump NX600-025; NX600-025/60
Dismantling and assembly of the rotating parts
10. DISMANTLING AND ASSEMBLY OF THE ROTATING PARTS
10.1 WITH PIN JOINTS WITH SM-PIN JOINT SEAL
10.1.1 REMOVAL OF ROTOR AND COUPLING ROD
For removal of the rotor (1999) and coupling rod (1998) the pin joints should be dis-
mantled as follows:
• Place the dismantled unit consisting of lantern (0085) with drive (A) and connect-
ing shaft (1 050), coupling rod (1998) and rotor (1999) on the workbench with a
wooden block supporting the rotor (1999).
BASIC JOINT SIZE NM021 - NM105:
(Pump type NX600-025; NX600-025/60: Size NM021.)
• Push the circlip (506515066) out of its groove and slip oft the head of rotor
(1999) connecting shaft (1050).
NX600-025_e5.fm / 22.3.17
Eccentric screw pump NX600-025; NX600-025/60 33 (48)
Dismantling and assembly of the rotating parts
• If necessary hit the edge of screw securing/sleeve (5115/5116) at an angle with
the help of a wooden block and a plastic hammer. Taking care not to damage the
O-rings (8060/8061)!
JOINTS AT BOTH SIDES:
• Press the pin (5075/5076) out of the head of rotor I connecting shaft and drain
the oil into a receptacle.
• Please dispose of this oil in the proper manner.
Using a screwdriver, carefully lever the SM-pin joint seal (8235/8236) out of the head
of rotor (1999) connecting shaft (1050).
NX600-025_e5.fm / 22.3.17
34 (48) Eccentric screw pump NX600-025; NX600-025/60
Dismantling and assembly of the rotating parts
Taking care not to damage the SM-pin joint seal {8235/8236).
• Pull apart coupling rod (1998) and rotor (1999) / connecting shaft (1050).
• Remove the 0-rings (8060/8061) at rotor (1999) / connecting shaft (1050).
• Push the SM-pin joint seal (8235/8236) towards the head of coupling rod (1998).
ln the narrow coupling rod section press the clamp ring (5425/5426) out of the
groove of the seal.
NX600-025_e5.fm / 22.3.17
Eccentric screw pump NX600-025; NX600-025/60 35 (48)
Dismantling and assembly of the rotating parts
• Slip the SM-pin joint seal (8235/8236) and clamp ring (5425/5426) off over the
head of the coupling rod (1998).
10.1.2 FITTING THE ROTOR AND COUPLING ROD
For fitting the rotor (1999) with coupling rod (1998), the two pin joints should be as-
sembled as follows:
• Slip the clamp ring (5425/5426) over the head of coupling rod (1998).
• Push the SM-pin joint seal (8235/8236) over the head of coupling rod (1998)
towards its narrow section, there squeezing the clamp ring (5425/5426) into the
groove of the SM-pin joint seal (8235/8236).
• Push the SM-pin joint seal (8235/8236) with the correctly placed clamp ring
(5425/5426) up to the shoulder of coupling rod (1998).
NX600-025_e5.fm / 22.3.17
BASIC JOINT SIZE NM021 - NM105:
(Pump type NX600-025; NX600-025/60: Size NM021.)
• Slip the circlip (5065 / 5066) on to the coupling rod (1998).
36 (48) Eccentric screw pump NX600-025; NX600-025/60
Dismantling and assembly of the rotating parts
• Slide the sleeve (5115 / 5116) on to coupling rod (1998) so the inside diameter of
chamfering (A) is being placed towards the coupling rod (1998) extension.
Chamfering (A) will later on ease the installation over the 0-rings (8060 / 8061).
• Orient the head of coupling rod (1998) until it is in vertical position for the bore
(B) for the pin (5075 / 5076)
• Slide the coupling rod (1998) with SM-pin joint seal (8235 / 8236) into the bore of
rotor (1999) / connecting shaft (1050) and insert the joint bolt (5075 / 5076) from
below and push up to the upper edge of coupling rod (1998).
• Support the joint bolt (5075 / 5076) against dropping out.
• Slide the SM-pin joint seal (8235 / 8236) into the rotor (1999) / connecting shaft
(1050) only from below, and in a slightly slanted position.
Lead the tip of a pump bottle with a suitable oil (see 7.3 "Lubricating the pin joints
with SM-Pin joint seals" on page 21) to the upper opening of the rotor (1999) / con-
NX600-025_e5.fm / 22.3.17
necting shaft (1050).
• Slowly fill with lubricating oil up to the filling port.
• Lead the tip of the pump bottle through the small gap on the topside of SM-pin
joint seal (8235 / 8236).
Eccentric screw pump NX600-025; NX600-025/60 37 (48)
Dismantling and assembly of the rotating parts
• Slowly fill with lubricating oil up to the filling port.
• Push the joint bolt (5075 / 5076) entirely into the bare of head of rotor (1999)
/connecting shaft (1050) and retain in place.
• Only now, press the SM-pin joint seal (8235 / 8236) into the bare of head of rotor
(1999) / connecting shaft (1050) and push up to the shoulder. ln doing so the
SM-pin joint seal (8235 / 8236) should be slightly bulbous around the outer sur-
face.
• Wipe oft overflow oil. Use this oil for lubricating the O-rings (8060 / 8061).
NX600-025_e5.fm / 22.3.17
38 (48) Eccentric screw pump NX600-025; NX600-025/60
Dismantling and assembly of the rotating parts
• Slip the sleeve (5115 / 5116), with its chamfering (A) forward, on to the head of
rotor (1999) / connecting shaft (1050) and push up to the shoulder.
• Place the circlip (5065 / 5066) into its groove on the rotor head (1999) / connect-
ing shaft (1050) and carefully snap in place all around.
BASIC JOINT SIZE NM021 - NM125:
(Pump type NX600-025; NX600-025/60: Size NM021.)
Connecting shaft (1 050), coupling rod (1998) and rotor (1999) are now joined by the
two pin joints.
NX600-025_e5.fm / 22.3.17
Eccentric screw pump NX600-025; NX600-025/60 39 (48)
Dismantling and assembly of the rotating parts
Housing, stator and end connection may now be fitted.
10.2 -
No content because not applicable for pump type NX600-025; NX600-025/60.
10.3 -
No content because not applicable for pump type NX600-025; NX600-025/60.
10.4 -
No content because not applicable for pump type NX600-025; NX600-025/60.
10.5 -
No content because not applicable for pump type NX600-025; NX600-025/60.
NX600-025_e5.fm / 22.3.17
40 (48) Eccentric screw pump NX600-025; NX600-025/60
Removal and Fitting of the Connecting Shaft with Shaft Seal
11. REMOVAL AND FITTING OF THE CONNECTING SHAFT WITH SHAFT SEAL
11.1 REMOVAL
• Push the circlip (1035) in the direction to the mechanical seal.
• Remove pin (1030).
• Remove the shaft seal housing (7005) and mechanical seal (7010) together with
connecting shaft (1050) and set ring (1035) from drive stool (0085) and the drive
shaft.
The thread of cylindrical head screw (1040) can be used as forcing screw.
• If a mechanical seal is installed, see 12. "Removal and fitting of the single
mechanical seal" on page 42.
11.2 FITTING
• Apply grease into the bore of the connecting shaft (1050) to avoid rust (e.g. TCE-
Metallic 600).
• Assemble the shaft seal housing (7005) and mechanical seal (7010) together
with connecting shaft (1050) and set ring (1035) with drive stool (0085) and push
connecting shaft (1050) on to the drive shaft.
At this please observe the installation direction of set ring (1035) (please see
mark).
• If a mechanical seal is installed, see 12. "Removal and fitting of the single
mechanical seal" on page 42.
• Connect the connecting shaft (1050) and the drive shaft by pin (1030).
• Push set ring (1035) on pin (1030).
NX600-025_e5.fm / 22.3.17
Eccentric screw pump NX600-025; NX600-025/60 41 (48)
Removal and fitting of the single mechanical seal
12. REMOVAL AND FITTING OF THE SINGLE MECHANICAL SEAL
• Carefully slide out mechanical seal housing (7005) together with the parts of the
mechanical seal contained in it from connecting shaft (1050).
• Carefully push mechanical seal (7010) stationary seat out of mechanical seal
housing (7005).
• Refitting is a simple reversal of the above procedure.
• To reduce frictional forces during seal assembly, apply some glycerine to the
shaft and the seal housing in the area of the gaskets.
• Special care must be taken when fitting double PTFE-coated gaskets: the joint of
the outer coating must point away from the seal assembly direction, otherwise
the coating may open or be pulled off!
Ensure that the distribution of pressure is uniform when inserting the pressure
sensitive counter rings. When inserting larger rings, use a suitable mandrel.
Do not allow any foreign bodies to get between the sliding surfaces.
• Exactly keep to the seal installation dimensions and ensure that the sealing
faces are correctly pressed together (see table on sectional drawing W ... ).
• Insert mechanical seal (7010) stationary seat into mechanical seal housing
(7005).
• Insert mechanical seal housing (7005) together with the stationary seat into the
drive stool without the installed connecting shaft (1050).
• If necessary take the installation dimension from the table and add the thickness
S of the set ring (7086) when existing.
• Mark this installation dimension on the connecting shaft (1050).
• Fix the rotating unit of the mechanical seal (7010) on the connecting shaft (1050)
depending on the installation dimension so that the rotating unit of the mechani-
cal seal (7010) or the set ring (7086) is at the mark.
• Insert connecting shaft (1050) with the rotating unit of the mechanical seal
(7010) into drive stool (0085) and install lip seal (7091, if existing.
Push the set ring (1035) on to connecting shaft (1050) and observe at this the
installation direction (see mark).
Push connecting shaft (1050) on to the drive shaft and connect with pin (1030).
Push the set ring (1035) on pin (1030).
NX600-025_e5.fm / 22.3.17
42 (48) Eccentric screw pump NX600-025; NX600-025/60
Spare parts and drawings
13. SPARE PARTS AND DRAWINGS
13.1 SPARE PARTS
Position * Quantity Designation Part No.
- 1 Eccentric screw pump NX600-025 com- 013022
plete (for 50 Hz operation)
- 1 Eccentric screw pump NX600-025/60 014807
complete (for 60 Hz operation)
0085 1 Lantern 001608
0120 4 Spring Washer 000044
0125 4 Hexagonal screw 001609
0140 4 Hexagonal nut 000045
1030 R/S 1 Pin 001610
1035 R/S 1 Splash ring (Thrower) 001611
1050 R/S 1 Connection shaft 001612
1998 R/S 1 Coupling rod 008311
1999 R/S 1 Rotor 008312
2005 1 End stud 001615
2010 1 Housing 008313
2015 1 Screw 000042
2016 1 Screw 000042
2020 R/S 4 Bolt 001617
2025 4 Spring Washer 001035
2030 4 Hexagonal nut 001036
2035 1 Support 005350
3005 R/S 1 Stator 008314
3010 R/S 4 Thru bolt 008315
3015 4 Spring Washer 001035
3020 6 Hexagonal nut 001036
3070 4 Disk (washer) 001094
5065 R/S 2 Circlip 001621
5075 R/S 2 Joint bolt 001622
5115 R/S 1 Sleeve 001623
5425 R/S 2 Clamping ring 001624
7005 1 Mechanical seal housing 001625
7010 R/S 1 Mechanical seal 001626
NX600-025_e5.fm / 22.3.17
8010 R/S 1 Gasket/Sealing 000058
Eccentric screw pump NX600-025; NX600-025/60 43 (48)
Spare parts and drawings
8012 R/S 1 Gasket/Sealing 000058
8015 R/S 1 O-ring 001607
8060 R/S 4 O-ring 001627
8235 R/S 2 SM-pin joint seal 001628
Helical gear drive for NX600-025 014797
9500 1
(for 50 Hz operation)
Helical gear drive for NX600-025/60
9500 1
(for 60 Hz operation)
- 1 Spare part and wearing part set 015996
* R = Recommended spare part / S = included in the set
To avoid mistakes in delivery, please identify the parts by their position num-
ber shown in the spare part list or on the sectional drawing.
For placing a spare parts order, it is absolutely necessary to give the quantity, des-
ignation and part number.
Technical Support [email protected]
Spare Parts [email protected]
NX600-025_e5.fm / 22.3.17
44 (48) Eccentric screw pump NX600-025; NX600-025/60
NX600-025_e5.fm / 22.3.17
1050
1030
1998
1999
Spare parts and drawings
13.2 SECTIONAL DRAWING
G
W
9500
0140
0120
0125
3020
0560 (Option)
8210 2030
Eccentric screw pump NX600-025; NX600-025/60
2115 2025
0085
1035
8015
2115 2020
8210
2016 2010
3070
8012
3020
2035
8010
3005
2015
3010
3020
3070
2005 3020 3015 2035
45 (48)
Spare parts and drawings
13.3 SECTIONAL DRAWING MECHANICAL SEAL
NX600-025_e5.fm / 22.3.17
46 (48) Eccentric screw pump NX600-025; NX600-025/60
Drive
14. DRIVE
14.1 OPERATING AND ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS FOR GEAR UNITS AND GEARED MOTORS B1000
14.2 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS THREE-PHASE ASYNCHRONOUS MOTORS –
STANDARD DESIGN B1091
NX600-025_e5.fm / 22.3.17
Eccentric screw pump NX600-025; NX600-025/60 47 (48)
Drive
NX600-025_e5.fm / 22.3.17
48 (48) Eccentric screw pump NX600-025; NX600-025/60
Intelligent Drivesystems, Worldwide Services
GB
B1000
Operating and Assembly Instructions for
Gear Units and Geared Motors DRIVESYSTEMS
Contents
1. Notes ................................................................................................................................. 4
1.1 General information ........................................................................................................ 4
1.2 Safety and information symbols ...................................................................................... 4
1.3 Correct use...................................................................................................................... 4
1.4 Safety information ........................................................................................................... 5
1.5 Other documents............................................................................................................. 6
1.6 Disposal .......................................................................................................................... 6
2. Description of gear units ................................................................................................ 7
2.1 Type designations and gear unit types ........................................................................... 7
2.2 Name plate ...................................................................................................................... 8
3. Assembly instructions, storage, preparation, installation .......................................... 9
3.1 Storing the gear unit ........................................................................................................ 9
3.2 Long-term storage ........................................................................................................... 9
3.3 Transporting the gear unit ............................................................................................. 10
3.4 Preparing for installation ............................................................................................... 10
3.5 Installing the gear unit ................................................................................................... 11
3.6 Fitting hubs on the gear shafts...................................................................................... 12
3.7 Fitting push-on gear units ............................................................................................. 13
3.8 Fitting shrink discs ........................................................................................................ 15
3.9 Fitting the covers ........................................................................................................... 16
3.10 Fitting a standard motor .............................................................................................. 17
3.11 Retrospective paintwork.............................................................................................. 18
3.12 Fitting the cooling coil to the cooling system .............................................................. 19
4. Commissioning .............................................................................................................. 20
4.1 Checking the oil level .................................................................................................... 20
4.2 Activating the automatic lubricant dispenser ................................................................ 20
4.3 Operation with lubricant cooling .................................................................................... 21
4.4 Running-in time for the worm gear unit ......................................................................... 21
4.5 Checklist........................................................................................................................ 21
5. Service and maintenance.............................................................................................. 22
5.1 Service and maintenance intervals ............................................................................... 22
5.2 Service and maintenance work ..................................................................................... 22
6. Appendix......................................................................................................................... 26
6.1 Versions and maintenance ........................................................................................... 26
6.2 Torque values ............................................................................................................... 38
6.3 Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................ 38
6.4 Lubricants...................................................................................................................... 39
6.5 Lubricant quantities ....................................................................................................... 41
www.nord.com B1000-GB-0713 -3-
1. Notes
1. Notes
1.1 General information
Read the Operating Manual carefully prior to performing any work on or putting the gear unit into
operation. Strict compliance with the instructions in this Operating Manual is essential.
Getriebebau NORD accepts no liability for damage to persons, materials or assets as a result of
the non-observance of this Operating Manual, operating errors or incorrect use. General wearing
parts, e.g. radial seals are excluded from the warranty.
If additional components are attached to or installed in the gear unit (e.g. motor, cooling
system, pressure sensor etc.) or components (e.g. cooling system) are supplied with the
order, the operating instructions for these components must be observed.
If geared motors are used, compliance with the Motor Operating Manual is also necessary.
If you do not understand the contents of this Operating Manual or additional operating
instructions, please consult Getriebebau NORD!
1.2 Safety and information symbols
Please always observe the following safety and information symbols!
Danger!
Risk of fatalities and injury
Attention!
Machine may be damaged
Note!
Useful information
1.3 Correct use
These gear units generate a rotational movement and are intended for use in commercial
systems. The gear unit must only be used according to the information in the technical
documentation from Getriebebau NORD.
Danger!
Use in explosion hazard areas is prohibited.
Strict compliance with the technical data on the rating plate is essential.
The documentation must be observed.
Appropriate safety measures must be taken for applications where failure of a gear unit or
geared motor may result in injury.
-4- B1000-GB-0713 www.nord.com
1. Notes
1.4 Safety information
All work including transportation, storage, installation, electrical connection, commissioning,
servicing, maintenance and repair must be performed only by qualified specialist personnel.
It is recommended that repairs to NORD Products are carried out by the NORD Service
department.
Danger!
Installation and maintenance work must only be performed when gear units are at a standstill
and have cooled down. The drive must be isolated and secured to prevent accidental start-up.
CAUTION! Depending on the operating conditions, the temperature of the gear unit may
exceed 60°C. Danger of burns! Protection against accidental contact may need to be
installed.
Tighten the drive elements or secure the parallel key before switching on.
Danger!
Only use the eyebolts attached to the gear unit for transport. No additional loads may be
attached. Transportation aids and lifting gear must have an adequate load-bearing capacity.
If geared motors have an additional eyebolt attached to the motor, this must also be used. Avoid
pulling the eyebolts at an angle. The thread of the eyebolt must be fully screwed in.
Observe all safety information, including that provided in the individual sections of this
Operating Manual. All national and other regulations on safety and accident prevention must
also be observed.
Danger!
Serious physical and property damage may result from inappropriate installation, non-
designated use, incorrect operation, non-compliance with safety information, unauthorised
removal of housing components or safety covers and structural modifications to the gear unit.
www.nord.com B1000-GB-0713 -5-
1. Notes
1.5 Other documents
Further information may be obtained from the following documents:
- Gear unit catalogues (G1000, G2000, G1011, G1012, G1034, G1035)
- Operating and maintenance instructions for the electric motor
- if applicable, operating instructions for attached or supplied options
1.6 Disposal
Observe the current local regulations. In particular, lubricants must be collected and disposed of
correctly.
Gear unit components: Material:
Toothed wheels, shafts, rolling bearings, parallel keys, Steel
locking rings, …
Gear unit housing, housing components, … Grey cast iron
Light alloy gear unit housing, light alloy gear unit Aluminium
housing components, …
Worm gears, bushes, ... Bronze
Radial seals, sealing caps, rubber components,… Elastomers with steel
Coupling components Plastic with steel
Flat seals Asbestos-free sealing material
Gear oil Additive mineral oil
Synthetic gear oil (rating plate code: CLP PG) Polyglycol-based lubricants
Cooling spiral, embedding material of the cooling spiral, Copper, epoxy, yellow brass
screw fittings
-6- B1000-GB-0713 www.nord.com
2. Description of Gear Units
2. Description of gear units
2.1 Type designations and gear unit types
Versions / Options
Helical gear units
SK 11E, SK 21E, SK 31E,SK 41E, SK 51E (single-stage) - Foot mounting with solid shaft
SK 02, SK 12, SK 22, SK 32, SK 42, SK 52, SK 62N A Hollow shaft version
(2-stage)
SK 03, SK 13, SK 23, SK 33N, SK 43, SK 53 (3-stage) V Solid shaft version
SK 62, SK 72, SK 82, SK 92, SK 102 (2-stage) L Solid shaft both sides
SK 63, SK 73, SK 83, SK 93, SK 103 (3-stage) Z Drive flange B14
NORDBLOC helical gear units F Output flange B5
SK 320, SK 172, SK 272, SK 372, SK 472, SK 572, SK 672, X Foot mounting
SK 772, SK 872, SK 972 (2-stage)
XZ Base and output flange B14
SK 273, SK 373, SK 473, SK 573, SK 673, SK 773, SK 873,
SK 973 (3-stage) XF Base and output flange B5
SK 072.1, SK 172.1, SK 372.1, SK 572.1, SK 672.1, SK 772.1 AL Reinforced axial drive bearings
SK 872.1, SK 972.1 (2-stage) 5 Reinforced output shaft
SK 373.1, SK 573.1, SK 673.1, SK 773.1, SK 873.1, (Standard helical gear unit)
SK 973.1 (3-stage)
V Reinforced drive shaft
Standard helical gear units (Standard helical gear unit)
SK 0, SK 01, SK 20, SK 25, SK 30, SK 33 (2-stage) D Torque support
SK 010, SK 200, SK 250, SK 300, SK 330 (3-stage)
K Torque console
Parallel shaft gear units S Shrink disc
SK 0182NB, SK 0282NB, SK 1282, SK 2282, SK 3282,
SK 4282, SK 5282, SK 6282, SK 7282, SK 8282, SK 9282, VS Reinforced shrink disc
SK 10282, SK 11282 (2-stage) EA Hollow shaft with internal spline
SK 1382NB, SK 2382, SK 3382, SK 4382, SK 5382, G Rubber buffer
SK 6382, SK 7382, SK 8382, SK 9382, SK 10382,
VG Reinforced rubber buffer
SK 11382, SK 12382 (3-stage)
R Back stop
Bevel gear units
B Fixing element
SK 92072, SK 92172, SK 92372, SK 92672, SK 92772
SK 92072.1, SK 92172.1, SK92372.1, SK 92672.1, SK 92772.1, H Covering cap as contact guard
SK 93072.1, SK 93172.1, SK 93372.1, SK93672.1, SK 93772.1 H66 Covering cap IP66
(2-stage) VL Reinforced bearings
SK 9012.1, SK 9016.1, SK 9022.1, SK 9032.1,
SK 9042.1, SK 9052.1, SK 9062.1, SK 9072.1, VL2 Agitator design
SK 9082.1, SK 9086.1, SK 9092.1, SK 9096.1 (3-stage) VL3 Drywell agitator design
SK 9013.1, SK 9017.1, SK 9023.1, SK 9033.1, SK 9043.1, IEC Standard motor mounting
SK 9053.1 (4-stage)
NEMA Standard motor mounting
Contrate worm gear unit W With free drive shaft
SK 02040, SK 02050, SK 12063, SK 12080,
VI Viton radial seals
SK 32100,SK 42125 (2-stage)
SK 13050, SK 13063, SK 13080, SK 33100, SK 43125 OA Oil expansion vessel
(3-stage) OT Oil level tank
MINIBLOC worm gear units SO1 Synthetic oil ISO VG 220
SK1 S32, SK1 S40, SK 1S50, SK 1S63, SK 1SU... CC Casing cover with cooling spiral
SK 1SM31, SK 1SM40, SK 1SM50, SK 1SM63 (single-stage) DR Spring Loaded Breather
SK 2S32NB, SK 2S40NB, SK 2S50NB, SK 2S63NB,
SK 2SU…, H10 Modular contrate pre-stage
SK 2SM40, SK 2SM50, SK 2SM63 (2-stage) /31 Worm pre-stage
UNIVERSAL worm gear units /40 Worm pre-stage
SK 1SI31, SK 1SI40, SK 1SI50, SK 1SI63, SK 1SI75,
SK 1SIS31,…, SK 1SIS75,
SK 1SID31,…, SK 1SID63,
SK 1SMI31,…, SK 1SMI75,
SK 1SMID31,…, SK 1SMID63,
SK 1SIS-D31,…, SK 1SIS-D63 (single-stage),
SK 2SMID40, SK2SMID50, SK2SMID63,
SK 2SID40,…, SK 2SID63 (2-stage)
www.nord.com B1000-GB-0713 -7-
2. Description of Gear Units
Double gear units consist of two single gear units. They are to be treated as per the instructions in
this Manual, i.e. as two individual gear units. Type designation of double gear units: e.g. SK 73/22
(consisting of single gears SK 73 and SK 22)
2.2 Name plate
Figure 2-1: Name plate (example)
Explanation of the Name Plate
1 Matrix – Barcode
2 NORD gear unit type
3 Operating mode
4 Year of manufacture
5 Serial number
6 Rated torque of gear unit output shaft
7 Drive power
8 Weight according to ordered version
9 Overall gear unit ratio
10 Installation orientation
11 Rated speed of gear unit output shaft
12 Lubricant type, viscosity and quantity
13 Customer’s part number
14 Operating factor
-8- B1000-GB-0713 www.nord.com
3. Assembly instructions, storage,
preparation, installation
3. Assembly instructions, storage, preparation, installation
Please observe all of the general safety information in Section 1.4, 1.3 and in the individual
sections.
3.1 Storing the gear unit
For short-term storage before commissioning, please observe the following:
x Store in the fitting position (see Section 6.1) and secure gear units against falling
x Lightly grease bare metal housing surfaces and shafts
x Store in dry rooms
x Temperature must not fluctuate beyond the range of –5 oC to +50 oC
x Relative humidity less than 60%
x No direct exposure to sunlight or UV light
x No aggressive, corrosive substances (contaminated air, ozone, gases, solvents, acids,
alkalis, salts, radioactivity etc.) in the immediate vicinity
x No vibration or oscillation
3.2 Long-term storage
Note!
For storage or standstill periods in excess of 9 months, Getriebebau NORD recommends the
long-term storage option. With the long-term storage option and the use of the measures
listed below, storage for up to 2 years is possible. As the actual influences on the unit greatly
depend on the local conditions, these times should only be regarded as guide values.
Conditions of the gear unit and storage area for long-term storage prior to
commissioning:
x Store in the fitting position (see Section 6.1) and secure gear units against falling
x Transportation damage to the external paint must be repaired. Check that a suitable rust
inhibitor is applied to the flange bearing surfaces. If necessary apply a suitable rust inhibitor
to the surfaces.
x Gear units with the long-term storage option are completely filled with lubricant or have VCI
corrosion protection agents added to the gear oil. (See label on gear unit)
x The sealing band in the vent plug must not be removed during storage. The gear unit must
remain sealed tight.
x Store in a dry place.
x In tropical regions, the drive unit must be protected against damage by insects
x Temperature must not fluctuate beyond the range of –5 oC to +40 oC
x Relative humidity less than 60%
x No direct exposure to sunlight or UV light
x No aggressive, corrosive substances (contaminated air, ozone, gases, solvents, acids,
alkalis, salts, radioactivity etc.) in the immediate vicinity
x No vibration or oscillation
Measures during storage or standstill periods
x If the relative humidity is <50% the gear unit can be stored for up to 3 years.
Measures before commissioning
x If the storage or standstill period exceeds 2 years or the temperature during short-term
storage greatly deviates from the standard range, the lubricant in the gear unit must be
replaced before commissioning.
x If the gear unit is completely filled, the oil level must be reduced before commissioning.
www.nord.com B1000-GB-0713 -9-
3. Assembly instructions, storage,
preparation, installation
3.3 Transporting the gear unit
Danger!
To prevent injury, the danger area must be generously cordoned off. Standing under the
gear unit during transport is extremely dangerous.
Attention!
Avoid damage to the gear unit. Impacts to the free ends of the shafts may cause internal
damage to the gear unit.
Use adequately dimensioned and suitable means of transportation. Lifting tackle must be
designed for the weight of the gear unit. The weight of the gear unit can be obtained from the
dispatch documents.
3.4 Preparing for installation
The drive unit must be inspected and may only be installed if no transportation damage or leaks
are visible. In particular the radial seals and the sealing caps must be inspected for damage.
All bare metal surfaces and shafts of the gear unit are protected against corrosion with oil,
grease or corrosion protection agents before shipping.
Thoroughly remove all oil, grease or corrosion protection agents and any dirt from the shafts and
flange surfaces before assembly.
In applications where an incorrect rotational direction may result in damage or potential risk, the
correct rotational direction of the drive shaft is to be established by test running the drive when
uncoupled and guaranteeing such for subsequent operation.
Gears with integrated return stops are marked with arrows on the driven/driving sides. The
arrows point in the rotation direction of the gear unit. It must be ensured, when connecting the
motor and during motor control, that the gear unit can only operate in the rotation direction, e.g.
by means of a rotary field test. (For further details, please refer to Catalogue G1000 and
WN 0-000 40)
Attention!
With gear units with an integrated back stop, switching the drive motor to the blocked rotation
direction, i.e. incorrect rotation direction, can lead to gear damage.
Ensure that no aggressive or corrosive substances are present in the area surrounding the
installation site or are subsequently expected during operation, which attack metal, lubricants or
elastomers. In case of doubt, please contact Getriebebau NORD and take the recommended
action.
Oil expansion tanks (Option OA) must be fitted in accordance with works standard WN 0-530 04.
For gear units with an M10x1 vent plug, works standard WN 0-52135 must be observed.
Oil expansion tanks (Option OT) must be fitted in accordance with works standard WN 0-521 30.
If venting of the gear unit is provided, the vent or the pressure vent must be activated before
commissioning. To activate, remove the transport securing devices (sealing cord). Position of the
vent plug: see Section 6.1.
-10- B1000-GB-0713 www.nord.com
3. Assembly instructions, storage,
preparation, installation
Figure 3-1: Activating the vent plug
Special pressure vents are supplied as loose parts. Before commissioning, the vent plug must
be replace with the pressure vent which is supplied as a loose part. This is achieved by screwing
out the vent fitting and replacing it with the pressure vent and seal (refer to Section 6.2 for torque
values). Double gear units consist of two single units and are equipped with 2 oil chambers and
2 pressure vents.
Figure 3-2: Removing vent plug and fitting the pressure vent
3.5 Installing the gear unit
The eyebolts screwed into the gear units must be used during installation. The safety notes in
Section 1.4 must be observed.
The base and/or flange to which the gear unit is fitted should be vibration-free, torsionally strong
and flat. The smoothness of the mating surface on the base or flange must be according to
tolerance clad K of DIN ISO 2768-2. All contamination to the bolting surfaces of gear unit and
base and/or flange must be thoroughly removed.
The gear unit must be precisely aligned with the drive shaft of the machine in order to prevent
additional forces from being imposed on the gear unit due to tension.
Welding of the gear unit is prohibited. The gear unit must not be used as the earth connection for
welding work, as this may cause damage to the bearings and gear wheels.
The gear unit must be installed in the correct configuration (see Section 6.1) (UNIVERSAL
gear unit types SI and SMI are independent of the configuration). Changes to the installation
position after delivery require adjustment of the quantity of oil, and often other measures such as
e.g. the installation of encapsulated roller bearings. Damage may result if the stated
installation position is not observed.
All gear unit feet and/or all flange bolts on each side must be used. Bolts must have a minimum
quality of 8.8. The bolts must be tightened to the correct torques (refer to Section 6.2 for torque
values). Tension-free bolting must be ensured, particularly for gear units with a foot and flange.
www.nord.com B1000-GB-0713 -11-
3. Assembly instructions, storage,
preparation, installation
Danger!
To ensure that the gearbox does not get too warm and to avoid injury to persons,
observe the following during installation:
x The surfaces of gear units or geared motors may become hot during or shortly after
operation. Attention: danger of burns!! Protection against accidental contact may need to
be installed.
x With geared motors, the cooling air of the motor fan must be able to flow unobstructed
onto the gear unit.
3.6 Fitting hubs on the gear shafts
Attention!
Do not subject the gear unit to harmful axial forces when fitting the hubs.
Drive and driven elements, e.g. coupling and chain-wheel hubs must be mounted onto the drive
and driven shaft of the gear unit using suitable pullers that will not apply damaging axial forces
onto the gear unit. In particular, do not hit the hubs with a hammer.
Use the end thread of the shafts for pulling. Fitting can be aided by coating the hub with lubricant
or heating it up to approx. 100oC beforehand.
Figure 3-3: Example of a simple pulling device
Danger!
Drive and driven elements, such as belt drives, chain drives and couplings must be fitted
with contact protection.
Driven elements may only subject the drive units to the maximum radial force FR and axial
force FA as specified in the catalogue. Observe the correct tension, particularly on belts and
chains. Additional loads due to unbalanced hubs are not permitted. The radial force must be
applied to the gear unit as closely as possible.
-12- B1000-GB-0713 www.nord.com
3. Assembly instructions, storage,
preparation, installation
3.7 Fitting push-on gear units
Attention!
The bearings, gear wheels, shafts and housing may be damaged by incorrect fitting.
The push-on gear unit must be fitted onto the shaft using a suitable puller, which will not exert
damaging axial forces on the gear unit. In particular, do not hit the gear unit with a hammer.
Assembly and subsequent dismantling is aided by applying an anti-corrosive lubricant to the
shaft before fitting (e.g. Nord Anti-Corrosion Art.No. 089 00099). Excess grease or anti-corrosion
agent may escape after assembly and may drip off. Clean these points on the output shaft after
a running-in time of approx. 24 hours. This escape of grease is not due to a leak in the gear unit.
Figure 3-4: Applying lubricant to the shaft and the hub
Note!
The gear unit can be fitted to shafts with and without a shoulder using the fastening element
(Option B). Tighten the bolt of the fastening element to the correct torque. (See Chapter 6.2 for
torque values) For gear units with option H66, the factory-fitted closing cap must be removed
before assembly.
For shaft mounted gear units with option H66 and fastening element (Option B) the pressed-in
closing cap must be pushed out before fitting the gear unit. The pressed-in closing cap may be
destroyed during dismantling. As standard a second closing cap is supplied as a loose spare part.
After fitting the gear unit, fit the new / new condition closing cap as described in Section 3.11.
Figure 3-5: Removing the factory-fitted closing cap
www.nord.com B1000-GB-0713 -13-
3. Assembly instructions, storage,
preparation, installation
Figure 3-6: Gear unit mounted to shaft with a shoulder using the fastening element
Figure 3-7: Gear unit mounted to shaft without a shoulder using the fastening element
A gear unit can be dismantled from a shaft with shoulder using the following device, for example.
Figure 3-8: Dismantling using dismantling device
When mounting push-on gears with torque supports, the support must not be distorted. Tension-
free mounting is aided by the rubber buffer (Option G and/or VG).
Figure 3-9: Mounting the rubber buffer (Option G and/or VG) on parallel shaft gear units
To fit the rubber buffer, tighten the screw fastening until there is no play between the contact
surfaces when there is no load. Then turn the fastening nut (only applies for screw fastenings
with adjusting threads) half a turn in order to pre-tension the rubber buffer. Greater pre-tension is
not permissible. Secure the screw fastening from coming loose, e.g. with Loctite 242 or a second
nut.
-14- B1000-GB-0713 www.nord.com
3. Assembly instructions, storage,
preparation, installation
Always support torque support on both sides!
Figure 3-10: Attaching the torque support on bevel gear and worm gear units
Tighten the bolts on the torque support to the correct torque (see Section 6.2 for torque values)
and secure to prevent loosening (e.g. Loctite 242, Loxeal 54-03).
3.8 Fitting shrink discs
Shrink disc type, Mat. No.
Tensioning flanges Solid shaft of machine
and torque details for tensioning screws
Shaft and and hollow shaft bore
GREASE FREE!
Tensioning screws DIN 931 (933) -10.9
The shrink discs are suplied by the Hollow shaft of gear unit
manufacturer ready for fitting. They must not
be dismantled prior to fitting.
Double half-slotted inner ring
Figure 3-11: Hollow shaft with shrink disc
Attention!
Do not tighten bolts if the solid shaft is not inserted!
Assembly sequence:
1. Remove any transport securing devices.
2. Loosen but do not remove tightening bolt and tighten gently by hand until there is no play
between the flanges and the inner ring.
www.nord.com B1000-GB-0713 -15-
3. Assembly instructions, storage,
preparation, installation
3. Slide the shrink disc onto the hollow shaft until the outer clamping flange is flush with the
hollow shaft. The shrink disc is easier to slide on if the bore of the inner ring is lightly
greased.
4. Prior to mounting, grease the solid shaft only in the area which will later come into contact
with the bronze bush in the hollow shaft of the gear unit. Do not grease the bronze bush, in
order to prevent grease penetrating the area around the shrink connection.
5. The hollow shaft of the gear unit must be completely de-greased and c o m p l e t e l y
free of grease.
6. In the area of the shrink connection the solid shaft of the machine must be degreased and
completely free of grease.
7. Insert the solid shaft of the machine into the hollow shaft so as to completely fill the area
around the shrink connection.
8. Position the clamping flange by gently tightening the bolts.
9. Tighten the bolts successively in a clockwise direction by several turns – not crosswise –
with approx. ¼ rotation per turn. Tighten the bolts with a torque wrench to the torque
indicated on the shrink disc.
10. When the tensioning bolts have been tightened, there must be an even gap between the
clamping flanges. If this is not the case, the gear unit must be dismantled and the shrink disc
connection checked for correct fit.
Danger!
Risk of injury from incorrect mounting and dismantling of the shrink disc.
Dismantling sequence:
1. Loosen the bolts successively in a clockwise direction by several turns with approx. ¼
rotation per turn. Do not remove the bolts from their thread.
2. Loosen the clamping flanges from the cone of the inner ring.
3. Remove the gear unit from the solid shaft of the machine.
3.9 Fitting the covers
Danger!
Shrink discs and exposed rotating shaft ends require contact guards in order to prevent
injuries. A cover (Option H and Option H66) can be used as a guard. If this does not achieve
sufficient protection against contact according to the required protection type, the machinery
and plant constructor must ensure this be means of special attached components.
All fixing screws must be used and tightened to the correct torque. (See Section 6.2 for torque
values) For covers with option H66, press in the new / new condition closing cap by tapping it
lightly with a hammer.
-16- B1000-GB-0713 www.nord.com
3. Assembly instructions, storage,
preparation, installation
Figure 3-12: Fitting the covers, Option SH, Option H, and Option H66
3.10 Fitting a standard motor
The maximum permitted motor weights indicated in the table below must not be exceeded when
attaching the motor to an IEC- / NEMA adapter
Maximum permitted motor weights
IEC motor size 63 71 80 90 100 112 132 160 180 200 225 250 280 315
NEMA Motor size 56C 143T 145T 182T 184T 210T 250T 280T 324T 326T 365T
Max. motor weight [kg] 25 30 40 50 60 80 100 200 250 350 500 700 1000 1500
Assembly procedure to attach a standard motor to the IEC adapter (Option IEC)/NEMA adapter
1. Clean motor shaft and flange surfaces of motor and IEC /NEMA adapter and check for
damage. Mounting dimensions and tolerances of the motor must conform to DIN EN
50347/NEMA MG1 Part 4.
2. Push the coupling sleeve onto the motor shaft so that the motor parallel key engages into
the groove in the sleeve on tightening.
3. Tighten the coupling sleeve on the motor shaft in accordance with the motor manufacturer’s
instructions until it touches the collar. With motor sizes 90, 160, 180 and 225, any spacer
bushes must be positioned between the coupling sleeve and the collar. With standard helical
gear units, dimension B between the coupling sleeve and the collar must be observed (see
Figure 3-13). Certain NEMA adapters require the adjustment of the coupling in accordance
with the specifications indicated on the adhesive plate.
4. If the coupling half contains a threaded pin, the coupling must be secured axially on the
shaft. The threaded pin must be coated prior to use with a securing lubricant e.g. Loctite
242, Loxeal 54-03 and tightened to the correct torque. (See Chapter 6.2 for torque values)
5. Sealing of the flange surfaces of the motor and the IEC /NEMA adapter is recommended if
the motor is installed outdoors or in a humid environment. The flange surfaces of motor and
adapter must be completely coated with surface sealant Loctite 574 or Loxeal 58-14 prior to
mounting so that the flange seals after mounting.
6. Mount the motor to the IEC /NEMA adapter, do not forget to fit the gear rim or the sleeve. (See
Figure 3-13)
7. Tighten the IEC /NEMA adapter bolts to the correct torque. (See Chapter 6.2 for torque
values)
www.nord.com B1000-GB-0713 -17-
3. Assembly instructions, storage,
preparation, installation
Figure 3-13: Fitting the coupling onto the motor shaft - various types of coupling
I Gear coupling, one-part
II Gear coupling, two-part
III Gear coupling, two-part with spacer bush
IV Claw coupling, two-part
V Claw coupling, two-part, observe dimension B:
Standard helical gear unit: SK0, SK01, SK20, SK25, SK30, SK33 (2-stage)
SK010, SK200, SK250, SK300, SK330 (3-stage)
IEC size 63 IEC size 71
Dimension B (Fig. 3-13V) B = 4.5mm B = 11.5 mm
VI Claw coupling, two-part with spacer bush
3.11 Retrospective paintwork
Attention!
For retrospective painting of the gear unit, the radial seals, rubber elements, pressure venting
valves, hoses, type plates, adhesive labels and motor coupling components must not come
into contact with paints, lacquers or solvents, as otherwise components may be damaged or
made illegible.
-18- B1000-GB-0713 www.nord.com
3. Assembly instructions, storage,
preparation, installation
3.12 Fitting the cooling coil to the cooling system
Cutting ring screw threads (see Item 1, Figs. 3-14) are located at the casing cover for the
connection of a pipe with an external diameter of 10 mm according to DIN 2353. Remove the
drain plug from the screw neck prior to assembly to avoid any contamination of the
cooling system. The screw necks should be connected with the coolant circuit, which must be
provided by the operator. The flow direction of the coolant is irrelevant.
Make sure not to twist the screw necks during or after assembly as the cooling coil may be
damaged (see Item 3, Fig. 3-14). You must ensure that no external forces act on the cooling coil.
1 3
Figure 3-14: Cooling cover
Danger!
The pressure released from the cooling circuit before carrying out any work on the gear
unit.
www.nord.com B1000-GB-0713 -19-
4. Commissioning
4. Commissioning
4.1 Checking the oil level
The oil level must be checked prior to commissioning. See Section 5.2.
4.2 Activating the automatic lubricant dispenser
Some gear unit types with standard motor (Option IEC/NEMA) have an automatic lubricant
dispenser for the rolling bearings. This dispenser must be activated prior to commissioning. The
cartridge case cover has a red information sign for the activation of the lubricant dispenser.
Activating the Automatic Lubricant Dispenser:
1. Loosen and remove cylinder bolts M8x16 (1)
2. Lift off cartridge case cover (2)
3. Insert activation screw (3) into the lubricant dispenser (5) until the lug (4) breaks off at
the defined fracture point
4. Refit cartridge case cover (2) and fasten using cylinder bolt (1). (See Chapter 6.2 for
torque values)
5. Mark activation date on the adhesive plate (6) indicating month/year
Attention!
Screw in the activation screw until the lug breaks off
before commissioning the gear unit.
Dispensing time: 12 Months
Month Activation date Year
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 06 07 08 09 10
11 12 13 14 15
Figure 4-1: Activating the automatic lubricant dispenser with standard motor mounting
-20- B1000-GB-0713 www.nord.com
4. Commissioning
4.3 Operation with lubricant cooling
Water cooling
Caution!
The drive may only be commissioned after the cooling spiral has been connected to the
cooling circuit, and the cooling circuit has been put into operation.
The coolant must have a similar thermal capacity as water (specific thermal capacity at 20° C
c=4.18 kJ/kgK). Industrial water without any air bubbles or sediments is recommended as a
coolant. The water hardness must be between 1° dH and 15° d H, and the pH value must be
between pH 7.4 and pH 9.5. No aggressive liquids should be added to the coolant!
The coolant pressure must not exceed 8 bar. The required quantity of coolant is 10
litres/minute, and the coolant inlet temperature should not exceed 40° C; we recommend
10° C.
We also recommend fitting a pressure reducer at the coolant inlet to avoid any damage due to
excessive pressure.
If there is a danger of frost the operator should add a suitable anti-freeze solution to the cooling
water.
The temperature of the cooling water and the cooling water flow rate must be supervised
and ensured by the operator.
Air/Oil cooler
This version and all important data concerning the air/oil cooler can be obtained from Catalogue
G1000, or contact the manufacturer of the cooling unit.
4.4 Running-in time for the worm gear unit
Note!
In order to achieve maximum efficiency of the worm gear unit, the gear unit must be subjected
to a running-in period of approx. 25 h – 48 h under maximum load.
There may be a reduction in efficiency before the running-in period is complete.
4.5 Checklist
Checklist
Information –
Object of the check Checked on: see Section
Is the vent plug activated or the pressure vent screwed in? Sec. 3.4
Does the required configuration conform with the actual installation? Sec. 6.1
Are the external gear shaft forces within permitted limits (chain tension)? Sec. 3.6
Is the torque support correctly fitted? Sec. 3.7
Are contact guards fitted to rotating components? Sec. 3.9
Is the automatic lubricant dispenser activated? Sec. 4.2
Is the cooling cover connected to the cooling circuit? Sec. 3.12/4.3
www.nord.com B1000-GB-0713 -21-
5. Service and Maintenance
5. Service and maintenance
5.1 Service and maintenance intervals
Information –
Service and Maintenance Intervals Service and Maintenance Work see Section
At least every six months - Visual inspection 5.2
- Check for running noises 5.2
- Check oil level 5.2
- Re-grease 5.2
(applicable only to free drive shaft / Option W
and on agitator bearings / Option VL2 / VL3)
- Replace automatic lubricator (for operating 5.2
times < 8 h/day: a replacement interval for the
lubricant dispenser of 1 year is permissible)
(only with IEC/NEMA standard motors)
For operating temperatures up to 80° C - Change the oil 5.2
Every 10000 operating hours - Clean or replace the vent plug. 5.2
at least every 2 years
(The interval is double this if the unit is
filled with synthetic products)
For higher temperatures or extreme
operating conditions (high humidity,
aggressive environments and large
temperature fluctuations) the oil change
intervals must be halved.
Every 25000 operating hours, - Replace shaft sealing rings if worn 5.2
at least every 5 years - Re-lubrication of the bearings in the gear unit 5.2
At least every 10 years - General overhaul 5.2
5.2 Service and maintenance work
Servicing and maintenance work must only be performed by qualified specialist
personnel.
Installation and maintenance work must only be performed when gear units are at a
standstill. The drive must be isolated and secured to prevent accidental start-up.
Visual inspection
The gear unit must be checked for leaks. In addition, the gear unit must be inspected for external
damage and cracks in the hoses, hose connections and rubber buffers. Have the gear unit
repaired in case of leaks, e.g. dripping gear oil or cooling water, damage or cracks. Please contact
the NORD service department.
Note!
Shaft sealing rings are rubbing seals and have sealing lips made from an elastomer
material. These sealing lips are lubricated with a special grease at the factory. This
reduces the wear due to their function and ensures a long service life. An oil film in the
region of the rubbing sealing lip is therefore normal and is not due to leakage.
-22- B1000-GB-0713 www.nord.com
5. Service and Maintenance
Check for running noises
If the gear unit produces unusual running noises and/or vibrations, this could indicate damage to
the gear unit In this case the gear should be shut down and a general overhaul carried out.
Check the oil level
Section 6.1 describes the versions and the corresponding oil level screws. With double gear
units, the oil level must be checked on both units. The pressure vent must be at the position
marked in Section 6.1.
The oil level does not need to be checked on gear units without oil level screw (see Section 6.1).
Gear unit types that are not supplied full of oil must be filled before the oil level is checked. (see
“Changing the oil”)
Checking the oil level:
1. The oil level may only be checked when the gear unit is at a standstill and has cooled
down. The gear unit must be secured to prevent accidental switch-on.
2. The oil level screw corresponding to the version must be screwed out. (See Section 6.1)
Note!
At the first oil level check a small amount of oil may escape, as the oil level may be below the
lower edge of the oil level hole.
3. Gear units with oil level screw: The maximum oil level is the lower edge of the oil level hole.
The minimum oil level is 4 mm below the oil level hole. If the oil level is too low, this must be
corrected using the correct type of oil. An oil level glass is available instead of the oil level
screw
4. Gear units with an oil level vessel: The oil level must be checked in the oil level vessel with
the aid of the dipstick plug (thread G1 1/4). The oil level must be between the upper and
lower mark when the dipstick is completely screwed in (see Fig. 5-2). The oil level must be
corrected with the correct type of oil if necessary. These gearboxes may only be operated in
the configuration stated in Section 6.1.
5. The oil level screw or the cap screw with dipstick and all other loosened screws must be
correctly re-tightened.
Figure 5-2: Check the oil level with a dipstick
www.nord.com B1000-GB-0713 -23-
5. Service and Maintenance
Regreasing
Some gear unit designs (free drive shaft, Option W, agitator designs VL2 and VL3) are equipped
with a regreasing device.
For agitator versions VL2 and VL3, the vent screw located opposite to the grease nipple must be
unscrewed before regreasing. Grease should be injected until a quantity of 20-25g escapes from
the vent hole. After this, the vent plug must be reinserted and tightened.
For Option W and some IEC adapters, the outer roller bearing must be regreased with approx.
20-25g of grease via the grease nipple provided
Recommended grease: Petamo GHY 133N (see Section 6.4: Klüber Lubrication).
Replacing the automatic lubricant dispenser
Screw-off the cartridge case cover (2), (see Fig. 4-1). The lubrication dispenser (5) is screwed
out and replaced with a new component (Part No. 283 0100). Then activate (see Chapter 4.2)!
Changing the oil
The figures in Section 6.1 show the oil drain screw, the oil level screw and the pressure vent
screw for various designs.
Sequence:
1. Place the drip tray below the oil drain screw or the oil drain cock
2. Completely remove oil level screw, screwed sealing plug with dipstick if an oil level tank
is being used and oil drain screw.
Danger!
Warning: Hot oil!
3. Drain all the oil from the gear unit.
4. If the screw lock coating of the oil drain screw or oil level screw is damaged in the
thread, a new oil level screw must be used or the thread cleaned and coated with
securing lubricant, e.g. Loctite 242, Loxeal 54-03 prior to inserting. Check the sealing
ring for damage. Replace with a new sealing ring in case of damage.
5. Support the seal ring, insert the oil drain screw into the hole and tighten to the correct
torque! (See Section 6.2 for torque values)
6. Using a suitable filling device, refill with oil of the same type through the oil level hole
until oil emerges from the oil level hole. (The oil can also be filled through the pressure
vent screw or a sealing plug located higher than the oil level). If an oil level vessel is
used, fill the oil through the upper inlet (thread G1¼) until the oil level is set as described
in Section 5.2.
7. Wait at least 15 minutes, or at least 30 minutes if an oil level tank is used, and then
check the oil level. Proceed as described in Section 5.2.
Note!
The oil does not need to be changed on gear units without oil level screw (see Section 6.1).
These gear units are lubricated for life.
Standard helical gear units have no oil level screw. Here, the oil is topped up through the
pressure vent bolt using the quantities listed in the table in Section 6.5.
-24- B1000-GB-0713 www.nord.com
5. Service and Maintenance
Cleaning or replacing the vent plug
Unscrew the vent screw and thoroughly clean it (e.g. with compressed air) and fit the vent screw
in the same place, If necessary, use a new vent screw with a new sealing ring.
Replacing the shaft sealing ring
Shaft sealing rings are rubbing seals made from an elastomer material and according to their
principle are subject to natural wear. The wearing life of shaft sealing rings depends on many
factors and cannot be calculated in advance. Once the shaft sealing ring has reached the end of
its service life, the oil film in the region of the sealing lip increases and a measurable leakage
with dripping oil occurs. The shaft sealing ring must then be replaced. To reduce the risk of
leaks due to worn shaft sealing rings we recommend that as a precaution, the shaft sealing rings
are replaced after every 25,000 operating hours or every 5 years. The space between the
sealing lip and the protective lip must be filled approximately 50% with grease on fitting
(recommended grease: PETAMO GHY 133N). Take care that after fitting, the new shaft sealing
ring does not run in the old wear track.
Re-lubricating bearings
For bearings which are not oil-lubricated and whose holes are completely above the oil level,
replace the roller bearing grease (recommended grease: PETAMO GHY 133N). Please contact
the NORD service department.
General overhaul
The gear units must be completely dismantled The following work must be carried out:
x Clean all gear unit components
x Examine all gear unit components for damage
x All damaged components must be replaced
x All roller bearings must be replaced
x Replace back stops if fitted
x Replace all seals, radial seals and Nilos rings
x Replace plastic and elastomer components of the motor coupling
The general overhaul must be carried out by qualified personnel in a specialist workshop with
appropriate equipment in observance of national regulations and laws. We recommend that the
general overhaul is carried out by the NORD service department.
www.nord.com B1000-GB-0713 -25-
6. Appendix
6. Appendix
6.1 Versions and maintenance
Explanation of symbols for the following version illustrations:
Vent
Oil level
Oil drain
Note!
SK 320, SK 172, SK 272, SK 372K, SK 273 and SK373 as well as SK 01282 NB, SK 0282
NB, SK 1382 NB and UNIVERSAL / Minibloc gear units are lubricated for life. These gear
units do not have an oil filler screw.
UNIVERSAL / MiniBloc worm gear units
NORD UNIVERSAL / MiniBloc worm gear units are suitable for all installation positions. They
have an oil filler which is independent of the the version.
As an option, types SI and SMI can be equipped with a vent screw. Gear units with vents must
be installed in the stated position (see section 6.5)
Types SI, SMI, S, SM and SU as 2-stage gear unit types and types SI, SMI as worm gear units
for direct motor mounting have an oil filler which depends on the version and must be installed in
the stated position.
-26- B1000-GB-0713 www.nord.com
6. Appendix
Parallel shaft gear units with oil level vessel
The following applies for SK 9282, SK 9382, SK 10282, SK 10382, SK 11282, SK 11382 parallel
gear units and SK 12382 in the M4 configuration with oil level vessels:
Figure 6-1: Oil level check with oil level tank
www.nord.com B1000-GB-0713 -27-
M1
M1
B3+B5
B3+B5
M2 M2
V6+V3 M6 V6+V3
M6
B7+B5III
B7+B5III
SK 11E SK 02
SK 21E SK 12
SK 31E SK 22
SK 41E SK 32
SK 51E SK 42
SK 52
SK 62N
M5 M5
B6+B5II B6+B5II
M4 M4
V5+V1 V5+V1
M3
M3
B8+B5I
B8+B5I
M1
M1 B3+B5
B3+B5 *
M6 M2
B7+B5III V6+V3
M6 M2
B7+B5III V6+V3
SK 03 SK 62
SK 13 SK 72
SK 23 SK 82
SK 33N SK 92
SK 43 SK 102
SK 53 SK 63*
SK 73*
SK 83*
SK 93* *
SK 103*
M5
M5
M4 B6+B5II
B6+B5II M4
V5+V1
V5+V1
M3 M3
B8+B5I B8+B5I
-28- B1000-0713 www.nord.com
M1
B3+B5 M1
*
M2
M6 V3+V6
B7+B5III M6 M2
SK 472 SK 372.1
SK 572 SK 572.1
SK 672 SK 672.1
SK 772 SK 373.1
SK 872 SK 573.1
SK 972 SK 673.1
SK 473
SK 573
SK 673
SK 773
SK 873*
SK 973*
M4
M4 M5
M5
V1+V5 B6+B5II
M3
M3
B8+B5I
M1
M1
*
M6
M2
M2
*
SK 372.1F SK 772.1
SK 572.1F SK 872.1
SK 672.1F SK 972.1
SK 373.1F SK 773.1*
SK 573.1F M6 SK 873.1*
SK 673.1F SK 973.1*
M4 M5
*
M5
M4
M3 M3
www.nord.com B1000-0713 -29-
M1
*
M2
*
SK 772.1F
SK 872.1F
SK 972.1F
SK 773.1F*
M6 SK 873.1F*
SK 973.1F*
M4 M5
M3
M1 M1
M2
M6 M6
M2
SK 072.1 SK 072.1 F
SK 172.1 SK 172.1 F
M4
M4
M5 M5
M3
M4 M3
Ö 43
-30- B1000-0713 www.nord.com
M1
B3+B5
M2
V6+V3
SK 0
SK 01
SK 20
SK 25
M6 SK 30
B7+B5III SK 33
M4 M5
V1+V5 B6+B5II
M3
B8+B5I
M1
B3+B5
M2
V6+V3
SK 010
SK 200
SK 250
SK 300
M6 SK 330
B7+B5III
M5
M4 B6+B5II
V1+V5
M3
B8+B5I
Ö 44
www.nord.com B1000-0713 -31-
M1 M1
H1 H1
M6 M2 M6 M2
H3 H6 H3 H6
SK 1282 SK 2382
SK 2282 SK 3382
SK 3282 SK 4382
SK 4282 SK 5382
SK 5282
SK 0182NB
SK 0282NB
SK 1382NB*
* Ö 27
M5
M4 M5 M4 H4
H5 H4 H5
M3
M3 H2
H2
M1
H1
M2
M6 H6
H3
SK 6282*
SK 7282*
SK 8282*
SK 9282*
SK 10282*
SK 11282*
SK 6382
SK 7382
SK 8382 *
SK 9382
SK 10382
SK 11382
SK 12382
M5
M4 H4
H5
M3
H2
-32- B1000-0713 www.nord.com
M1 M1
B3 B3
M6 M2
M2
V6 B6
B6 M6
V6
SK 92172
SK 92372 SK 92072
SK 92672
SK 92772
M4
M4
B3I
B3I
M5 M5
V5 V5
M3
B8
M3
B8
M1
B3
M1
B3
M6
M2
V6
B6 M2
M6 B6
V6
SK 9012.1
SK 9016.1 SK 9013.1
SK 9022.1 SK 9017.1
M4 SK 9032.1 SK 9023.1
SK 9042.1 SK 9033.1
B3I
SK 9052.1 SK 9043.1
M4 SK 9053.1
SK 9062.1 B3I
SK 9072.1
SK 9082.1
SK 9086.1
SK 9092.1
SK 9096.1
M5
V5 M5
V5
M3
M3
B8
B8
www.nord.com B1000-0713 -33-
M1
M1
H1+B5I
H1+B5I
M6 M2 M2
H6+V3 H4+B5 M6
H4+B5
H6+V3
SK 92172
SK 92372 SK 92072
SK 92672
SK 92772
M4 M5 M4 M5
H5+V1 H3+B5II H5+V1
H3+B5II
M3 M3
H2+B5III H2+B5III
M1
M1
M6 M6
SK 92072.1
SK 92172.1 SK 93072.1
SK 92372.1 SK 93172.1
M2 M2
SK 92672.1 SK 93372.1
SK 92772.1 SK 93672.1
SK 93772.1
M4 M5 M4 M5
M3 M3
-34- B1000-0713 www.nord.com
M1
H1+B5I
M1
H1+B5I
M6
M2 M2
H6+V3 M6
H4+B5 H4+B5
H6+V3
SK 9012.1
SK 9016.1 SK 9013.1
SK 9022.1 SK 9017.1
SK 9032.1 SK 9023.1
SK 9042.1 SK 9033.1
SK 9052.1 SK 9043.1
SK 9062.1 SK 9053.1
SK 9072.1
SK 9082.1
SK 9086.1
SK 9092.1
SK 9096.1
M4 M4
M5 M5
H3+B5II H3+B5II
H5+V1 H5+V1
M3 M3
H2+B5III H2+B5III
M1 M1
B3 B3
M2
M2 B6
B6
M6 M6
V6 V6
SK 02050
SK 13050
SK 12063
SK 12080 SK 13063
SK 13080
SK 32100
SK 33100
SK 42125
SK 43125
M4 M4
B3I B3I
M5 M5
V5 V5
M3 M3
B8 B8
www.nord.com B1000-0713 -35-
M1
M1 H1+B5I
H1+B5I
M2 M6 M2
M6 H6+V3 H4+B5
H4+B5
H6+V3
SK 02050 SK 13050
SK 12063 SK 13063
SK 12080 SK 13080
SK 32100 SK 33100
SK 42125 SK 43125
M5
H5+V1 M4
M4 H3+B5II M5
H3+B5II H5+V1
M3
H2+B5III M3
H2+B5III
M1 M1
B3 H1+B5I
M2
B6
M6 M6
V6 H6+V3
SK 02040 SK 02040
M2
H4+B5
M4 M4
B3I H3+B5II
M5 M5
V5 H5+V1
M3
M3 H2+B5III
B8
-36- B1000-0713 www.nord.com
SK 1S32 – SK 1S63
SK 1SU32 – SK 1SU63
SK 1SM31 – SK 1SM63
SK 1SI31 – SK 1SI75
SK 1SIS31 – SK 1SIS75
SK 1SMI31 – SK 1SMI75
SK 1SID31 – SK 1SID75
SK 1SIS-D31 – SK 1SIS-D63
SK 1SMID31 – SK 1SMID75
SK 2S32NB – SK 2S63NB
SK 2SU32NB- SK 2SU63NB
SK 2SM40 – SK 2SM63
SK 2SIS-D40 – SK 2SIS-D63
SK 2SID40 – SK 2SID63
SK 2SMID40 – SK 2SMID63
M1
M6 M2
M5
M4
M3
Ö 26
www.nord.com B1000-0713 -37-
6. Appendix
6.2 Torque values
Bolt Torques [Nm]
Screw connections in the strength classes Screw
Threaded
Sealing connections on
Size 8.8 10.9 12.9 pin on
screws protective
coupling
covers
M4 3.2 5 6 - -
M5 6.4 9 11 - 2
M6 11 16 19 - - 6.4
M8 27 39 46 11 10 11
M10 53 78 91 11 17 27
M12 92 135 155 27 40 53
M16 230 335 390 - - 92
M20 460 660 770 - - 230
M24 790 1150 1300 80 - 460
M30 1600 2250 2650 170 -
M36 2780 3910 4710 - -
M42 4470 6290 7540 - -
G1¼ - - - 20 -
6.3 Troubleshooting
Gear unit malfunctions
Fault Possible cause Remedy
Oil too low or
Unusual running noises,
bearing damage or Consult NORD Service
vibrations
toothed wheel damage
Oil escaping from gear unit or
Defective seal Consult NORD Service
motor
Incorrect oil level or incorrect, Oil change
Oil escaping from
contaminated oil or unfavourable Use oil expansion tank (Option
pressure vent
operating conditions OA)
Unfavourable installation
Gear unit becomes too hot Consult NORD Service
conditions or gear unit damage
Replace elastomer gear rim,
Defective motor coupling or
Shock when switched on, tighten motor and gear unit
loose gear unit mounting or
vibrations fastening bolts, replace rubber
defective rubber element
element
Fracture in gear unit or
Drive shaft does not rotate
defective motor coupling or Consult NORD Service
although motor is running
shrink disc slippage
Attention!
Warning: shut down the gear unit immediately should any of the above faults occur!
-38- B1000-GB-0713 www.nord.com
6. Appendix
6.4 Lubricants
With the exception of type SK 11282, SK 11382, SK 12382 and SK 9096.1 gear units, all gear
units are filled with lubricant ready for operation in the required installation position when
delivered. This initial filling corresponds to a lubricant from the column for the ambient
temperatures (normal version) in the lubricant table.
Roller bearing greases
This table shows comparable roller bearing greases from various manufacturers. The
manufacturer can be changed for a given grease type. Getriebebau NORD must be contacted in
case of change of grease type or ambient temperature range, as otherwise no warranty for the
functionality of our gear units can be accepted.
Lubricant type Ambient
temperature
Mineral oil-based -30 … 60°C Energrease Longtime PD 2 RENOLIT - Mobilux EP 2 Gadus S2
grease LS 2 GP 2 V100 2
Energrease RENOLIT
LS-EP 2 LZR 2 H
-50 … 40°C - Optitemp LG 2 RENOLIT - - -
JP 1619
Synthetic grease -25 … 80°C Energrease Tribol 4747 RENOLIT PETAMO Mobiltemp Cassida
SY 2202 HLT 2 GHY 133 N SHC 32 EPS2
RENOLIT Klüberplex
LST 2 BEM 41-132
Biodegradable -25 … 40°C Biogrease - PLANTOGEL 2 Klüberbio Mobil SHC Naturelle
grease EP 2 S M 72-82 Grease 102 Grease EP2
EAL
Foodstuff- -25 … 40°C - Obeen UF 2 RENOLIT Klübersynth Mobilgrease Cassida RLS2
compatible G 7 FG 1 UH1 14-151 FM 222
grease
www.nord.com B1000-GB-0713 -39-
6. Appendix
Lubricant table
This table shows comparable lubricants from various manufacturers. The manufacturer can be
changed within a particular viscosity or lubricant type. Getriebebau NORD must be contacted in
case of change of viscosity or lubricant type, as otherwise no warranty for the functionality of our
gearboxes can be accepted.
Lubricant type Details on DIN (ISO) /
type plate Ambient
temperature
Mineral oil Energol Alpha EP 680 RENOLIN CLP Klüberoil Mobilgear Omala S2
GR-XP 680 Alpha SP 680 680 GEM 1-680 N 600 XP 680 G 680
ISO VG 680 Optigear BM RENOLIN CLP
CLP 680
0...40°C 680 680 Plus
Tribol 1100/680
Energol Alpha EP 220 RENOLIN CLP Klüberoil Mobilgear Omala S2
ISO VG 220 GR-XP 220 Alpha SP 220 220 GEM 1-220 N 600 XP 220 G 220
CLP 220 -10…40°C Optigear BM RENOLIN CLP
220 220 Plus
Tribol 1100/220
Energol Alpha EP 100 RENOLIN CLP Klüberoil Mobilgear Omala S2
GR-XP 100 Alpha SP 100 100 GEM 1-100 N 600 XP 100 G 100
ISO VG 100 Optigear BM RENOLIN CLP
CLP 100
-15…25°C 100 100 Plus
Tribol 1100/100
Synthetic oil - Alphasyn GS RENOLIN PG Klübersynth Mobil Omala S4
ISO VG 680
(Polyglycol) CLP PG 680 680 680 GH 6-680 Glygoyle 680 WE 680
-20...40°C
Tribol 800/680
Enersyn Alphasyn GS RENOLIN PG Klübersynth Mobil Omala S4
SG-XP 220 220 220 GH 6-220 Glygoyle 220 WE 220
ISO VG 220 Alphasyn PG
CLP PG 220
-25…80°C 220
Tribol 800/220
Synthetic oil - Alphasyn EP RENOLIN Klübersynth Mobil Omala S4
(hydrocarbon) 460 Unisyn GEM 4-460 N SHC 634 GX 460
ISO VG 460
CLP HC 460 Tribol 1510/460 CLP 460
-30…80°C
Optigear
Synthetic X 460
- Alphasyn EP RENOLIN Klübersynth Mobil Omala S4
220 Unisyn GEM 4-220 N SHC 630 GX 220
ISO VG 220
CLP HC 220 Tribol 1510/220 CLP 220
-40…80°C
Optigear
Synthetic X 220
Bio-degradable ISO VG 680 - - PLANTOGEAR - - -
oil CLP E 680 680 S
-5…40°C
- Tribol BioTop PLANTOGEAR Klübersynth - Naturelle
ISO VG 220 1418/220 220 S GEM 2-220 Gear
CLP E 220
-5…40°C Fluid EP
220
Food grade oil - Tribol - Klübersynth Mobil Cassida
CLP PG H1 ISO VG 680
FoodProof UH1 6-680 Glygoyle 680 Fluid WG
680 -5…40°C
1800/680 680
- Tribol - Klübersynth Mobil Cassida
CLP PG H1 ISO VG 220
FoodProof UH1 6-220 Glygoyle 220 Fluid WG
220 -25…40°C
1800/220 220
- Optileb GT 680 GERALYN SF Klüberoil - Cassida
CLP HC H1 ISO VG 680
680 4 UH1-680 N Fluid GL
680 -5…40°C
680
- Optileb GT 220 GERALYN SF Klüberoil Mobil Cassida
CLP HC H1 ISO VG 220
220 4 UH1-220 N SHC Cibus Fluid GL
220 -25…40°C
220 220
Gear unit liquid Energrease Longtime PD 00 RENOLIT MICROLUBE Mobil Alvania
grease LS-EP 00 Tribol DURAPLEX GB 00 Chassis EP(LF)2
3020/1000-00 EP 00 Grease LBZ
-25 … 60°C
RENOLIT LST Klübersynth Mobil -
00 GE 46-1200 Glygoyle
Grease 00
-40- B1000-GB-0713 www.nord.com
6. Appendix
6.5 Lubricant quantities
Note!
After changing the lubricant, and in particular after the initial filling, the oil level may change
during the first few hours of operation, as the oil galleries and hollow spaces only fill gradually
during operation. The oil level is still within the permissible tolerance.
If at the express request of the customer, an oil inspection glass is installed at an additional
charge, we recommend that the customer corrects the oil level after an operating period of
approx. 2 hours, so that when the gear unit is at a standstill and has cooled down, the oil level
is visible in the inspection glass. Only then, is it possible to check the oil level by means of the
inspection glass.
The filling quantities stated in the following tables are for guidance only. The precise quantities
vary depending on the exact gear ratio. When filling, always observe the oil level screw hole
as an indicator of the precise quantity of oil.
* Type SK11282, SK11382, SK12382 and SK 9096.1 gear units are normally supplied without oil.
www.nord.com B1000-GB-0713 -41-
[L]
Ö 6.1 M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6
Ö 6.1 B3 V6 B8 V5 B6 B7 B5 V3 B5I V1 B5II B5III
SK11E 0,25 0,50 0,55 0,40 0,35 0,35 0,30 0,35 0,50 0,30 0,40 0,40
SK21E 0,60 1,20 1,20 1,00 1,00 1,00 0,50 1,40 1,10 0,70 0,90 0,90
SK31E 1,10 2,70 2,20 2,30 1,70 1,70 0,80 1,30 1,65 1,10 2,00 2,00
SK41E 1,70 2,60 3,30 2,50 2,60 2,60 1,00 2,60 2,80 1,60 3,30 3,30
SK51E 2,20 4,40 4,70 4,00 3,40 3,40 1,80 3,50 4,10 3,00 3,80 3,80
[L]
SK02 0,15 0,60 0,70 0,60 0,40 0,40 0,25 0,60 0,60 0,60 0,50 0,50
SK12 0,25 0,75 0,85 0,75 0,50 0,50 0,35 0,85 0,90 0,90 0,60 0,60
SK22 0,50 1,80 1,80 1,80 1,35 1,35 0,70 2,00 2,00 1,80 1,55 1,55
SK32 0,90 2,50 2,50 2,90 2,00 2,00 1,30 2,90 3,30 3,10 2,40 2,40
SK42 1,30 4,50 4,50 4,30 3,20 3,20 1,80 4,40 4,50 4,00 3,70 3,70
SK52 2,50 7,00 6,80 6,80 5,10 5,10 3,00 6,80 6,20 7,40 5,60 5,60
[L]
SK62 6,50 15,00 13,00 16,00 15,00 15,00 7,00 15,00 14,00 18,50 16,00 16,00
SK72 10,00 23,00 18,00 26,00 23,00 23,00 10,00 23,00 18,50 28,00 23,00 23,00
SK82 14,00 35,00 27,00 44,00 32,00 32,00 15,00 37,00 29,00 45,00 34,50 34,50
SK92 25,00 73,00 47,00 76,00 52,00 52,00 26,00 73,00 47,00 78,00 52,00 52,00
SK102 36,00 79,00 66,00 102,00 71,00 71,00 40,00 81,00 66,00 104,00 72,00 72,00
[L]
SK03 0,30 1,00 0,80 0,90 0,60 0,60 0,50 0,80 0,90 1,10 0,80 0,80
SK13 0,60 1,25 1,10 1,20 0,70 0,70 0,85 1,20 1,20 1,20 0,95 0,95
SK23 1,30 2,40 2,30 2,35 1,60 1,60 1,50 2,60 2,50 2,80 2,80 2,80
SK33N 1,60 2,90 3,20 3,70 2,30 2,30 2,50 3,40 3,50 4,40 2,60 2,60
SK43 3,00 5,60 5,20 6,60 3,60 3,60 3,50 5,70 5,00 6,10 4,10 4,10
SK53 4,50 8,70 7,70 8,70 6,00 6,00 5,20 8,40 7,00 8,90 6,70 6,70
[L]
SK63 13,00 14,50 14,50 16,00 13,00 13,00 13,50 14,00 15,50 18,00 14,00 14,00
SK73 20,50 20,00 22,50 27,00 20,00 20,00 22,00 22,50 23,00 27,50 20,00 20,00
SK83 30,00 31,00 34,00 37,00 33,00 33,00 31,00 34,00 35,00 40,00 34,00 34,00
SK93 53,00 70,00 59,00 72,00 49,00 49,00 53,00 70,00 59,00 74,00 49,00 49,00
SK103 74,00 71,00 74,00 97,00 67,00 67,00 69,00 78,00 78,00 99,00 67,00 67,00
-42- B1000-0713 www.nord.com
[L] [L]
Ö 6.1 M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 Ö 6.1 M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6
SK072.1 0,16 0,32 0,21 0,23 0,18 0,20 SK072.1 F 0,16 0,32 0,21 0,23 0,18 0,20
SK172.1 0,27 0,59 0,42 0,45 0,32 0,39 SK172.1 F 0,27 0,59 0,42 0,45 0,32 0,39
SK372.1 0,45 1,05 0,75 1,00 0,60 0,65 SK372.1 F 0,45 1,05 0,75 1,00 0,60 0,65
SK572.1 0,75 1,90 1,50 2,00 1,10 1,15 SK572.1 F 0,75 1,90 1,50 2,00 1,10 1,15
SK672.1 1,10 2,60 2,15 2,70 1,55 1,65 SK672.1 F 1,10 2,60 2,15 2,70 1,55 1,65
SK772.1 1,35 3,65 2,25 3,15 1,35 2,15 SK772.1 F 1,35 3,65 2,25 3,15 1,35 2,15
SK872.1 3,20 8,00 5,30 7,00 2,80 4,60 SK872.1 F 3,20 8,00 5,30 7,00 2,80 4,60
SK972.1 4,50 12,90 8,10 12,70 4,60 7,80 SK972.1 F 4,50 12,90 8,10 12,70 4,60 7,80
SK772.1VL 2,00 3,65 2,25 3,15 1,35 2,15 SK772.1VL F 2,00 3,65 2,25 3,15 1,35 2,15
SK872.1VL 5,00 8,00 5,30 7,00 2,80 4,60 SK872.1VL F 5,00 8,00 5,30 7,00 2,80 4,60
SK972.1VL 8,50 12,90 8,10 12,70 4,60 7,80 SK972.1VL F 8,50 12,90 8,10 12,70 4,60 7,80
[L] [L]
Ö 6.1 M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 Ö 6.1 M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6
SK373.1 0,45 1,05 0,75 1,00 0,60 0,65 SK373.1 F 0,45 1,05 0,75 1,00 0,60 0,65
SK573.1 0,75 1,90 1,50 2,00 1,10 1,15 SK573.1 F 0,75 1,90 1,50 2,00 1,10 1,15
SK673.1 1,10 2,60 2,15 2,70 1,55 1,65 SK673.1 F 1,10 2,60 2,15 2,70 1,55 1,65
SK773.1 1,95 3,50 3,20 2,90 2,25 2,95 SK773.1 F 1,95 3,50 3,20 2,90 2,25 2,95
SK873.1 4,05 7,60 6,85 6,55 5,00 6,55 SK873.1 F 4,05 7,60 6,85 6,55 5,00 6,55
SK973.1 7,40 12,20 11,10 11,60 8,00 10,90 SK973.1 F 7,40 12,20 11,10 11,60 8,00 10,90
SK773.1VL 1,95 3,50 3,20 2,90 2,25 2,95 SK773.1VL F 1,95 3,50 3,20 2,90 2,25 2,95
SK873.1VL 4,05 7,60 6,85 6,55 5,00 6,55 SK873.1VL F 4,05 7,60 6,85 6,55 5,00 6,55
SK973.1VL 7,40 12,20 11,10 11,60 8,00 10,90 SK973.1VL F 7,40 12,20 11,10 11,60 8,00 10,90
www.nord.com B1000-0713 -43-
[L]
Ö 6.1 M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6
Ö 6.1 B3 V6 B8 V5 B6 B7 B5 V3 B5I V1 B5II B5III
SK172 0,35 0,50 0,50 0,50 0,50 0,50 0,35 0,50 0,50 0,50 0,50 0,50
SK272 0,60 1,00 1,00 1,00 1,00 1,00 0,60 1,00 1,00 1,00 1,00 1,00
SK372 0,60 1,00 1,00 1,00 1,00 1,00 0,60 1,00 1,00 1,00 1,00 1,00
SK472 1,00 1,90 1,90 2,00 1,80 1,80 1,00 1,90 1,90 1,90 1,90 1,50
SK572 1,00 1,90 1,90 2,00 1,80 1,80 1,00 1,90 1,90 1,90 1,90 1,50
SK672 1,40 3,40 3,10 3,15 1,45 3,15 1,15 3,40 2,70 2,80 1,25 2,70
SK772 2,00 3,30 3,50 4,20 2,70 3,30 1,60 3,30 3,50 3,30 3,10 3,10
SK872 3,70 9,60 9,10 7,30 4,70 8,00 3,50 9,00 7,90 7,70 3,90 7,20
SK972 6,50 16,00 15,70 14,70 8,50 14,00 6,50 15,00 13,00 13,50 6,50 12,00
[L]
SK273 0,62 1,10 1,10 1,10 1,10 1,10 0,62 1,10 1,10 1,10 1,10 1,10
SK373 0,55 1,10 1,10 1,10 1,10 1,10 0,55 1,10 1,10 1,10 1,10 1,10
SK473 1,30 2,50 2,10 2,40 2,10 2,10 1,25 2,40 2,10 2,50 2,10 2,10
SK573 1,30 2,50 2,10 2,40 2,10 2,10 1,25 2,40 2,10 2,50 2,10 2,10
SK673 1,80 3,80 3,20 3,40 2,90 3,00 1,70 3,80 3,00 3,20 3,00 3,00
SK773 2,50 4,50 3,70 4,60 3,30 3,30 2,30 5,00 3,60 4,50 3,90 3,90
SK873 6,20 8,40 7,50 9,10 7,50 7,50 5,00 8,80 7,60 8,00 8,00 8,00
SK973 11,00 15,80 13,00 16,00 13,30 13,00 10,30 16,50 13,00 16,00 14,00 14,00
[L] [L]
Ö 6.1 M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 Ö 6.1 M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6
SK20 0,55 1,00 0,55 1,00 0,55 0,55 SK20 F 0,35 0,60 0,35 0,60 0,35 0,35
SK0 0,13 0,22 0,13 0,22 0,13 0,13 SK0 F 0,13 0,22 0,13 0,22 0,13 0,13
SK01 0,22 0,38 0,22 0,38 0,22 0,22 SK01 F 0,22 0,38 0,22 0,38 0,22 0,22
SK25 0,50 0,90 0,50 0,90 0,50 0,50 SK25 F 0,50 0,90 0,50 0,90 0,50 0,50
SK33 0,80 1,60 1,00 1,60 0,80 1,00 SK33 F 1,00 1,60 1,00 1,60 0,80 1,00
SK30 0,80 1,40 0,70 1,40 0,70 0,70 SK30 F 0,80 1,40 0,70 1,10 0,70 0,70
SK300 1,40 1,50 1,40 1,50 1,40 1,40 SK300 F 1,40 1,50 1,40 1,50 1,40 1,40
SK330 1,50 1,58 1,50 1,58 1,50 1,50 SK330 F 2,00 1,58 1,50 2,80 1,50 1,50
SK200 0,80 1,30 0,80 1,30 0,80 0,80 SK200 F 0,60 1,04 0,60 1,04 0,60 0,60
SK010 0,38 0,60 0,38 0,60 0,38 0,38 SK010 F 0,38 0,60 0,38 0,60 0,38 0,38
SK250 1,20 1,50 1,40 1,50 1,40 1,40 SK250 F 1,40 1,50 1,40 1,50 1,40 1,40
SK000 0,24 0,41 0,24 0,41 0,24 0,24 SK000 F 0,24 0,41 0,24 0,41 0,24 0,24
-44- B1000-0713 www.nord.com
[L] [L]
Ö 6.1 M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 Ö 6.1 M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6
Ö 6.1 H1 H6 H2 H5 H4 H3 Ö 6.1 H1 H6 H2 H5 H4 H3
SK0182NB A 0,40 0,55 0,60 0,55 0,35 0,35
SK0282NB A 0,70 1,00 0,80 1,10 0,90 0,90
SK1382NB A 1,30 2,30 1,40 2,10 2,00 1,90
[L] [L]
SK1282 A 0,90 1,30 0,90 1,20 0,95 0,95 SK2382 A 2,30 2,60 1,90 3,10 1,50 1,50
SK2282 A 1,65 2,40 1,90 2,00 1,80 1,80 SK3382 A 4,10 4,90 3,30 5,60 3,30 3,30
SK3282 A 3,15 4,10 3,25 4,10 3,15 3,15 SK4382 A 5,90 6,80 4,90 8,30 4,90 4,90
SK4282 A 4,70 6,10 4,75 5,40 4,70 4,70 SK5382 A 12,50 12,00 6,70 13,50 8,30 8,30
SK5282 A 7,50 8,80 7,50 8,80 7,20 7,20 SK1382 A 1,45 1,60 1,15 1,70 1,10 1,10
[L] [L]
SK6282 A 17,00 14,00 12,00 17,50 10,00 14,00 SK6382 A 16,50 13,00 9,60 18,00 14,00 12,50
SK7282 A 25,00 21,00 20,00 27,00 16,00 21,00 SK7382 A 22,00 20,00 16,00 25,00 23,00 22,00
SK8282 A 37,00 33,00 30,00 41,00 31,00 31,00 SK8382 A 34,00 32,00 25,00 38,00 35,00 30,00
SK9282 A 74,00 70,00 55,00 80,00 65,00 59,00 SK9382 A 73,00 70,00 45,00 74,00 65,00 60,00
[L] [L]
SK10282 A 90 90 40 90 60 82 SK10382 A 85 100 73 100 80 80
SK11282 A 165 160 145 195 100 140 SK11382 A 160 155 140 210 155 135
SK12382 A 160 155 140 210 155 135
* Ö 38
www.nord.com B1000-0713 -45-
[L]
Ö 6.1 M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6
Ö 6.1 B3 B6 B8 B3I V5 V6 B5I B5 B5III B5II V1 V3
H1 H4 H2 H3 H5 H6
SK92072 0,40 0,60 0,50 0,50 0,40 0,40 0,40 0,60 0,50 0,50 0,40 0,40
SK92172 0,55 0,90 0,95 1,10 0,75 0,62 0,50 0,92 0,87 1,05 0,75 0,65
SK92372 0,90 1,30 1,45 1,60 1,20 1,20 1,15 1,50 1,20 1,75 1,15 1,15
SK92672 1,80 3,50 3,20 3,40 2,60 2,60 1,55 2,80 2,50 3,30 2,40 2,40
SK92772 2,30 4,50 4,60 5,30 4,10 4,10 2,75 4,40 4,50 5,85 3,50 3,50
[L]
SK9x072.1 0,39 0,93 0,79 1,02 0,49 0,62 0,39 0,93 0,79 1,02 0,49 0,62
SK9x172.1 0,60 1,17 0,94 1,37 0,65 0,85 0,60 1,17 0,94 1,37 0,65 0,85
SK9x372.1 1,00 1,97 1,65 2,14 1,12 1,34 1,00 1,97 1,65 2,14 1,12 1,34
SK9x672.1 1,80 3,23 2,71 4,20 2,02 2,45 1,80 3,23 2,71 4,20 2,02 2,45
SK9x772.1 2,72 4,63 3,70 5,40 2,93 3,25 2,72 4,63 3,70 5,40 2,93 3,25
[L]
SK9012.1 0,70 1,60 1,90 2,40 1,20 1,70 0,70 1,90 1,90 2,20 1,20 1,70
SK9016.1 0,70 1,60 1,90 2,40 1,20 1,70 0,70 1,90 1,90 2,10 1,20 1,70
SK9022.1 1,30 2,60 3,50 4,20 2,00 2,80 1,30 2,60 3,50 4,20 2,00 2,80
SK9032.1 1,70 4,80 6,40 6,70 4,10 5,10 1,90 5,20 6,40 7,30 3,30 5,10
SK9042.1 4,40 8,70 10,00 9,80 6,80 7,50 3,60 9,70 11,40 11,50 6,50 8,20
SK9052.1 6,50 16,00 19,00 21,50 11,00 15,50 7,50 16,50 20,00 23,50 11,50 18,00
SK9062.1 10,00 27,50 32,00 36,00 18,00 24,00 12,00 27,50 33,00 38,50 19,00 26,00
SK9072.1 10,00 27,50 32,00 36,00 18,00 24,00 12,00 27,50 33,00 38,50 19,00 26,00
SK9082.1 17,00 52,00 63,00 72,00 33,00 47,00 21,00 54,00 66,00 80,00 38,00 52,00
SK9086.1 29,00 73,00 85,00 102,00 48,00 62,00 36,00 78,00 91,00 107,00 53,00 76,00
SK9092.1 41,00 157,00 170,00 172,00 80,00 90,00 40,00 130,00 154,00 175,00 82,00 91,00
SK9096.1 70,00 187,00 194,00 254,00 109,00 152,00 80,00 187,00 193,00 257,00 113,00 156,00
[L]
SK9013.1 1,20 2,00 2,20 3,00 1,40 1,90 1,20 2,30 2,20 3,00 1,40 1,90
SK9017.1 1,20 2,00 2,20 3,00 1,40 1,90 1,20 2,30 2,20 3,00 1,40 1,90
SK9023.1 2,40 3,00 3,80 5,30 2,20 3,10 2,40 3,00 3,80 5,30 2,20 3,10
SK9033.1 3,30 6,60 7,00 7,80 4,30 5,10 3,80 5,70 6,90 8,50 3,60 5,60
SK9043.1 4,60 10,20 10,70 12,80 5,20 6,70 5,70 10,20 14,70 14,70 6,60 9,60
SK9053.1 10,00 17,00 20,00 24,20 11,50 16,50 12,50 18,00 21,50 26,50 13,00 17,00
-46- B1000-0713 www.nord.com
[L] [L]
Ö 6.1 M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6
Ö 6.1 B3 B6 B8 B3I V5 V6 B5I B5 B5III B5II V1 V3
Ö 6.1 H1 H4 H2 H3 H5 H6
SK02040 0,45 0,60 0,60 0,60 0,50 0,50 SK02040 A 0,40 0,80 0,65 0,60 0,50 0,50
SK02050 0,40 1,20 0,70 1,15 0,70 0,70 SK02050 A 0,45 1,10 0,90 1,10 0,80 0,80
SK12063 0,60 1,70 1,20 1,55 1,00 1,00 SK12063 A 0,50 1,45 1,20 1,40 1,10 1,10
SK12080 0,80 2,60 1,70 2,70 1,70 1,70 SK12080 A 0,90 3,10 3,00 3,00 2,20 2,20
SK32100 1,60 5,50 3,40 5,40 3,20 3,20 SK32100 A 1,50 5,20 3,80 5,30 3,80 3,80
SK42125 2,80 11,00 6,20 10,30 5,80 5,80 SK42125 A 3,20 12,90 6,10 10,50 6,30 6,30
[L] [L]
SK13050 0,95 1,55 1,10 1,45 0,95 0,95 SK13050 A 0,85 1,75 1,25 1,35 1,15 1,15
SK13063 1,30 2,30 1,60 2,00 1,25 1,25 SK13063 A 1,05 2,10 1,55 2,10 1,45 1,45
SK13080 1,70 3,20 2,10 3,30 1,95 1,95 SK13080 A 1,70 3,45 3,60 3,60 2,55 2,55
SK33100 2,10 7,60 4,00 6,50 3,70 3,70 SK33100 A 2,10 6,10 4,80 6,50 4,20 4,20
SK43125 7,80 14,00 7,20 13,50 6,70 6,70 SK43125 A 4,80 13,50 7,40 14,50 8,00 8,00
[L] [L]
SK02040 F 0,50 0,80 0,75 0,60 0,50 0,50
SK02050 F 0,45 1,40 0,90 1,25 1,00 1,00 SK13050 F 0,90 1,80 1,15 1,75 1,25 1,25
SK12063 F 0,50 1,60 1,40 1,80 1,50 1,50 SK13063 F 0,95 2,10 1,65 2,15 1,75 1,75
SK12080 F 0,95 3,20 3,10 3,30 2,50 2,50 SK13080 F 1,40 4,20 3,35 3,80 2,75 2,75
SK32100 F 1,50 7,10 4,90 7,10 4,40 4,40 SK33100 F 2,30 7,60 5,50 7,80 4,85 4,85
SK42125 F 3,30 11,20 6,10 11,00 6,80 6,80 SK43125 F 4,30 14,50 7,10 12,10 7,70 7,70
www.nord.com B1000-0713 -47-
NORD DRIVESYSTEMS GROUP
www.nord.com/locator
Headquarters:
Getriebebau NORD GmbH & Co. KG
Rudolf-Diesel-Straße 1
Mat.-Nr. 6052802/0713
22941 Bargteheide, Germany
Fon +49 (0) 4532 / 289 - 0
Fax +49 (0) 4532 / 289 - 2253
[email protected], www.nord.com
Member of the NORD DRIVESYSTEMS GROUP DRIVESYSTEMS
Intelligent Drivesystems, Worldwide Services
GB
B1091
Operating and Maintenance Instructions
Three-phase Asynchronous Motors – Standard Design
Explosion-proof Motors with Type of Protection „e“
Dust Explosion-proof Motors (Zone 21+ Zone 22)
Contents
1. General information ........................................................................................................... 3
2. Description ............................................................................................................................4
2.1 Range of application ...............................................................................................................4
3. Information on the designated use of electric motors ....................................................4
3.1 Transport, storage ..................................................................................................................4
3.2 Installation...............................................................................................................................5
3.3 Balancing, output components ...............................................................................................5
3.4 Alignment ................................................................................................................................5
3.5 Electrical connection ...............................................................................................................5
3.6 Checking insulation resistance ...............................................................................................6
3.7 Commissioning .......................................................................................................................6
4. Maintenance/servicing .........................................................................................................7
5. Motors with type of protection Increased Safety Exe .......................................................8
6. Motors for use in Zone 21 and Zone 22 ............................................................................10
6.1 General .................................................................................................................................10
6.2 Safety instructions ................................................................................................................10
6.3 Commissioning instructions/range of application .................................................................10
6.4 Design and method of operation ..........................................................................................11
6.5 Minimum cross-sections of protective earth wires................................................................11
6.6 Maintenance .........................................................................................................................12
7. IE2-ATEX Motors for use in Zone 21 and Zone 22 ..........................................................13
7.1 General information ..............................................................................................................13
7.1.2 Impact test ............................................................................................................................13
7.2 Safety information .................................................................................................................13
7.3 Commissioning information / Field of application / Extended ambient temperature range ...........13
7.3.1 Electrical connection .............................................................................................................14
7.3.2 Cable and wiring glands .......................................................................................................15
7.3.3 Permissible ambient temperature range ..............................................................................16
7.3.4 Painting .................................................................................................................................16
7.3.5 IEC-B14 Motors ....................................................................................................................16
7.4 Structure and method of use ................................................................................................17
7.5 Minimum cross section of bonding conductors ....................................................................17
7.6 Maintenance .........................................................................................................................17
8. Options for motors for use in Zone 22 .............................................................................18
8.1 Option inverter operation ......................................................................................................18
8.2 Option external fan ...............................................................................................................18
8.3 Option return stop .................................................................................................................18
8.4 Option brake .........................................................................................................................18
9. Spare parts drawing and spare parts list .........................................................................19
10. Conformity declarations ....................................................................................................20
Safety and information signs
Please comply with the following safety and information signs!
Danger! Attention!
Danger to life and risk of Damage to the machine possible
injury for humans
Danger! Information!
Important information
for explosion protection
-2- B1091-GB-3212 www.nord.com
1. Information
1. General information
These Operating Instructions must be read before you transport, assemble, commission,
maintain or repair NORD motors. All persons who are involved with such tasks must observe
these Operating Instructions. All safety instructions provided in these Operating Instructions
must be strictly observed for reasons of personal protection and protection of property.
Information and instructions provided in the manual supplied, safety and commissioning
information and all other manuals must be observed.
This is absolutely essential in order to avoid hazards and damage!
Any applicable national, local and system-specific regulations and requirements must also be
observed!
Custom designs and design variants may differ on technical details. If any points are
not clear, it is urgently recommended that you consult the manufacturer stating the
type designation and motor number or have the maintenance work performed by
NORD.
Qualified staff are persons who, owing to their training, experience, instruction received, and
their knowledge of relevant standards, accident prevention regulations and the appropriate
operating conditions, are entitled to perform the activities necessary in order to put the motor
into operation.
That also calls for knowledge of First Aid and local rescue facilities. It is assumed that the
work for transport, assembly, installation, commissioning, maintenance and repair will be
performed by qualified staff.
The following points in particular must be observed:
Specifications and information about permissible use, assembly, connection, ambient
and operating conditions, which are included in the catalogue, the order
documentation and any other product documentation
The local, system-specific regulations and requirements
Expert use of tools, hoisting equipment and transport equipment
Use of personal safety equipment
For reasons of simplicity the Operating Instructions cannot contain all detailed information
about possible design variants so they cannot take into consideration every imaginable case
of installation, operation or maintenance.
For this reason these Operating Instructions essentially only contain such instructions as are
required for normal use by qualified staff. To prevent malfunctions it is necessary that the
specified maintenance and inspection work be performed by appropriately trained staff.
The engineering guideline 605 2101 must be included with the operating instructions
when operated with the inverter.
The additional operating instructions must be taken into account if an external fan is
present.
The brake operating instructions must also be taken into account with braking motors.
If, for any reason, the operating instructions or the engineering guidelines are lost, new
documentation must be obtained from Getriebebau NORD.
www.nord.com B1091-GB-3212 -3-
2. Description
3. Information
2.1 Range of application
Use of the motors:
The motors may only be used for their intended purpose.
The motors are designed with at least IP 55 protection (for degree of protection see name
plate). They can be installed in a dusty or moist environment.
The necessary degree of protection and any additional precautions required always depend
on the operating and environmental conditions. For outdoor installation and vertical designs,
e.g. V1 or V5 with shaft pointing down, NORD recommends using the option of the double fan
hood [RDD].The motors must be protected against intense sunlight, e.g. by means of a
protective roof. The insulation is tropic-proof.
Installation height: 1000 m
Ambient temperature: -20°C...+40°C. With standard motors, a greater ambient temperature
range is permitted from -20°C...+60°C. The rated power must however be reduced to 82% of
the catalogue value. If the maximum value of the ambient temperature is between +40°C and
+60°C, the value of the power consumption can be inversely interpolated linearly between
100% and 82%.
The motor connection cables and the cable inlet glands must be suitable for temperatures
90°C.
3. Information on the designated use of electric motors
Work may only be performed if the system is disconnected from the mains supply.
3.1 Transport, storage
For transport use all the hoisting lugs fitted to the motor!
The hoisting lugs are designed for the weight of the motor; do not attach any
additional loads!
To transport machine sets (e.g. gear unit attachments) only use the hoisting lugs and
pins provided!
Machine sets must not be hoisted by attaching to individual machines!
To prevent damage to the motor, the motor must always be lifted with suitable hoisting
equipment. The antifriction bearings should be replaced if the time between delivery and
motor commissioning under favourable conditions (storage in dry, dust-free and vibration-free
rooms) is more than 4 years. Under unfavourable conditions that time is reduced
considerably. It may be necessary to treat unprotected, machine surfaces (flanging surface,
shaft end; ...) with corrosion inhibitor. If necessary, check the insulation resistance of the
winding, see section 3.6.
Changes in normal operation (higher power consumption, higher temperatures or higher
vibrations, unusual noises or smells, response from the monitoring system, etc.) indicate that
operation is impaired. To avoid personal injury and damage to property, the maintenance staff
responsible must be informed about the change immediately.
In case of doubt switch off the motor without delay, as soon as the status of the system
permits.
-4- B1091-GB-3212 www.nord.com
3. Information
3.2 Installation
Screwed-in lifting eyes must either be screwed in fully or removed after erection!
Running smoothness: Precise alignment of the coupling and a well-balanced drive
element (coupling, belt pulleys, fans, etc.) are prerequisites for quiet, low vibration
operation.
Complete balancing of the motor with the drive elements may be necessary.
The upper section of the terminal box and the terminal box position can be rotated by
4 x 90 degrees.
IEC-B14 motors:
All four fixing screws, even if not required, must be screwed into the flanged bearing
plate! The fixing screw threads must be inserted with a sealant, e.g. Loctite 242. The
maximum screw-in depth in the bearing plate is 2 x d.
The motor must be inspected for damage before installation and commissioning. A
damaged motor must not be commissioned.
3.3 Balancing, output components
Fitting and removing output assemblies (coupling, pulleys, gear, ...) must be performed
with a suitable device. The rotors are balanced with half key balancing as standard.
When fitting output assemblies to the motor shaft observe the appropriate type of
balancing! The output assemblies have to be balanced in accordance with
DIN ISO 1940!
Take the general precautions necessary for providing the output assemblies with shock
protection. If a motor is put into operation without an output assembly, prevent the key from
being flung out. This also applies if a second shaft end is fitted. Alternatively, remove the key.
3.4 Alignment
Especially if there is a direct coupling, align the shafts of the motor and the driven machine
with one another axially and radially. Any inaccurate alignment can lead to bearing damage,
excessive vibrations and shaft breakage.
3.5 Electrical connection
Feed the connecting leads into the terminal box with cable glands. The terminal box must be
sealed so that it is dust-tight and water-tight. The mains voltage and mains frequency must
agree with the figures on the name plate. ± 5% voltage deviations or ± 2% frequency
deviations are permissible without any reduction in performance. The connections and
arrangement of the terminal board jumpers must conform to the circuit diagram provided in
the terminal box. Connect the protective earth lead to that protective earth terminal.
Provide the ends of the connecting leads with cable lugs or curved ring eyes and connect
them to the terminal board. That also applies to the protective earth connection and the
external bonding lead.
For tightening torques at the screw connections of electric terminals and the terminal board
connections (apart from terminal strips) refer to the table below:
Tightening torques for terminal board connections
Thread diameter M4 M5 M6 M8
Tightening torque (Nm) 0.6 – 1.2 1.8 – 2.5 2.7 – 4.0 5.5 – 8.0
If the machine has an auxiliary heater, it must not be switched on during operation.
www.nord.com B1091-GB-3212 -5-
3. Information
3.6 Checking insulation resistance
Before putting the motor into operation for the first time, after a lengthy period of storage or
standstill (approx. 6 months), the insulation resistance of the winding has to be determined.
During and directly after measurement the terminals carry hazardous voltages in some cases
and must not be touched.
Insulation resistance
The insulation resistance of new, cleaned, repaired windings against the housing and against
one another is >200 M Ohm.
Measurement
In the case of windings up to an operating voltage of 400 V the insulation resistance against
the housing must be measured with a DC voltage of 500 V. At operating voltages up to 725 V
measure with a DC voltage of 1000 V. When doing this the temperature of the windings
should be 25°C ± 15°C.
Checking
If, in the case of a new, cleaned winding or a repaired motor which has been stored or shut
down for any lengthy period, the insulation resistance of the winding against the housing is
less than 50 MOhm, the cause may be moisture. The windings will then have to be dried.
After any lengthy period of operation the insulation resistance may drop. As long as the
measured value does not fall below the critical insulation resistance of < 50 MOhm, the motor
may continue to be operated. If the value falls below the critical level, the cause must be
established and if necessary, the windings or winding sections must be repaired, cleaned or
dried.
3.7 Commissioning
Note: Electromagnetic compatibility
Emitted interference: If torques are not equal (e.g. drive of a piston compressor) a non-
sinusoidal motor current is bound to develop, the harmonics of which may cause
impermissible mains influence and hence impermissible emitted interference.
If power is fed via an inverter, different levels of emitted interference will occur, depending on
the design of inverter (type, suppression, manufacturer). It is absolutely essential that the
EMC information provided by the inverter manufacturer be observed. If the manufacturer
recommends a screened motor supply lead, screening will be most effective if it is electrically
connected to a large area of the metal terminal box of the motor (with EMC cable gland made
of metal). In the case of motors with built-in sensors (e.g. PTC thermistors) interference
voltages can occur on the sensor line, caused by the inverter.
Interference immunity: In the case of motors with built-in sensors (e.g. PTC thermistors) the
user himself must ensure adequate interference immunity by making a suitable selection of
sensor signal line (possibly with screening, interfacing as with motor supply lead) and the
analysing instrument. Prior to commissioning always observe the information and instructions
in the operating manuals for inverters as well as all other sets of instructions. After attaching
the motors, check them to make sure they are operating properly! In the case of brake motors
also check that the brake operates properly.
-6- B1091-GB-3212 www.nord.com
4. Maintenance
Servicing
Safety precautions
Before commencing any work on the motor or device, but especially before opening covers in
front of live components, always isolate the motor electrically according to the regulations.
Apart from the main circuits also isolate any additional or auxiliary circuits.
The standard "5 safety rules", e.g. according to DIN VDE 0105, are:
Isolate electrically
Prevent equipment from being switched on again
Check that there is no voltage
Earth and short-circuit
Cover any adjacent live components or prevent access with barriers
The above precautions may only be withdrawn when the maintenance work has been
completed and the motor is fully assembled.
Inspect the motors properly at regular intervals. In particular look out for any physical damage,
ensure that cooling passages are free, listen for any unusual noises, and ensure that electrical
connections are performed in a proper manner.
With the exception of standardised, commercial or equivalent parts the only spare parts which
may be used are genuine spare parts!
NOTE: Inasmuch as motors are provided with enclosed condensation ports, they must be
opened from time to time so that any accumulated condensation can drain off. Condensation
ports are always positioned at the lowest point of the motor. When installing the motor ensure
that the condensation holes are at the bottom.
Bearing changes, grease filling
The period for changing bearings in operating hours [h] on IEC motors with coupling drive is
as follows, under normal operating conditions and with the motor installed horizontally,
depending on coolant temperature and motor speed:
25°C 40°C
up to 1800 min-1 approx. 40000 h approx. 20000 h
up to 3600 min-1 approx. 20000 h approx. 10000 h
In the case of direct gearbox attachment or under special operating conditions, e.g. vertical
motor, substantial vibrations or shock loads, frequent reversing, etc. the above-mentioned
operating hours will be reduced considerably.
The motor must be subjected to a general overhaul every 5 years!
General overhaul
For this purpose the motor must be dismantled. Perform the following work:
Clean all parts of the motor
Inspect all parts of the motor for damage
Replace all damaged parts
Replace all antifriction bearings
Replace all gaskets and shaft seals
The general overhaul must be performed in a specialised workshop with appropriate
equipment and by qualified staff. We urgently recommend having the general overhaul
performed by NORD Service.
www.nord.com B1091-GB-3212 -7-
5. Motors with protection type
Increased Safety Exe
These motors are subject to the following supplementary or specific information.
The motors are suitable for use in Zone 1 and conform to equipment group II, category 2G, and can be used
for an ambient temperature between -20°C and +40°C.
Type addition: 2G e.g.: 80 L/4 2G TF
The marking is 0102 II 2G Ex e II along with the temperature class
If the motor is connected to a gearbox, the Ex marking of the gearbox must also be observed.
Explosive gas mixtures or concentrations of dust in conjunction with hot, live and moving parts on electrical
machinery can cause serious or lethal injuries.
The increased hazard in explosive areas calls for particularly careful compliance with the general safety and
commissioning instructions. The staff responsible must be trained regarding correct use of motors in
explosive areas.
Explosion-proof electrical machines comply with the standards in series EN 60034 (VDE 0530) as well as
EN 60079-0 and 60079-7. It is the degree of explosion risk which determines zone classification.
DIN EN 60079, Part 10, provides information on this. It is the user who is responsible for zone classification.
If motors are not certified for explosive areas, it is prohibited to use them in explosive areas.
Cable entries must be approved for explosive atmospheres. Ports which are not used must be closed off with
approved blind plugs.
When connecting up the installation lines to the motor terminals and the protective earth lead must be laid
with U-shaped lines under the respective terminals so that the wire clamps and the terminal studs are
subjected to uniform loading and are not deformed under any circumstances. Alternatively, the connections
can be made with a cable lug. The use of aluminium connecting cables is not permissible.
The motor is supplied with a certified cable gland. The clamping nuts of the cable gland must be tightened to
the torque specified in the following table.
Cable gland Clamping nut tightening
torque [Nm]
M20x1.5 6
M25x1.5 8
M32x1.5 12
M40x1.5 16
When connecting up always ensure that the permissible clearance distances of 10 mm and the permissible
creepage distances of 12 mm between live components and housing potential and between individual live
components are observed.
Before the terminal box is closed, make sure that all the nuts on the terminals and the screw on the
protective earth terminal are tight. The terminal box gaskets and the seals on the cable gland must be fitted
properly and must not be damaged in any way.
If the shaft end is at the top, e.g. designs IMV3 or IMV6, and the motor has Exe protection, the user/installer
must fit a cover which prevents foreign bodies from falling into the motor fan hood (see DIN EN 60079-0). It
must not impair cooling of the motor by its fan. A handwheel at the second shaft end is not permitted. If the
shaft end is at the bottom, e.g. designs IMV1 or IMV5, the motors are generally provided with a protective
roof on the fan hood. The motors are designed for continuous duty and normal, non-recurring start-ups in
which no substantial start-up heat develops.
Area A in EN 60034-1 (VDE 0530 Part 1) - voltage ± 5%, frequency ± 2%, characteristic, mains symmetry -
must be observed so that the development of heat remains within the limits permitted. Any major deviations
from the ratings can caused an impermissible increase in the development of heat in the electric machine.
The motor temperature class stated on the name plate must at least conform to the temperature class of any
combustible gas that may be emitted.
-8- B1091-GB-3212 www.nord.com
5. Motors with protection type
Increased Safety Exe
Each machine must be protected against impermissible development of heat by a current-dependent
delayed protective switch tested for operation by an appointed body, with phase-failure protection in
compliance with VDE 0660 or an equivalent system in all phases. The protective system must be set to the
rated current. If windings are connected in a delta circuit the trips must be connected in series with the
winding phases and set to 0.58 times the rated current. If such a configuration is not possible, additional
precautions will be necessary (e.g. thermal machine protection).
If the rotor jams, the protective system must shut down within the tE-time specified for the respective
temperature class.
Electric machines for heavy starting (ramp time > 1.7 x tE-time) must be protected by a start-up monitoring
system in accordance with the provisions of the EC type test certificate.
Thermal machine protection by means of direct thermal monitoring of the winding with PTC thermistor
temperature sensor is permissible if it is certified and stated on the name plate.
Do not connect any voltage higher than 30V to the PTC thermistor temperature sensor!
If the only protection is a PTC thermistor temperature sensor, a performance-tested, certified PTC tripping
unit from an appointed body must be used. The PTC tripping unit must be provided with the following marks
concerning the degree of protection:
II (2) G
In Germany reference is made to DIN 57165/VDE 0165 and ElexV for setting up electrical installations
in explosive areas! In other countries the appropriate national regulations must be observed!
Operation in conjunction with an inverter must be explicitly certified. It is absolutely essential that the
separate manufacturer's instructions be observed. For Exe protection the motor, inverter and protective
systems must be identified as belonging together and the permissible operating data must be defined on the
joint EC type test certificate. The levels of voltage peaks generated by the inverter may be subjected to
unfavourable influences by the connecting cable installed between the inverter and the electric machine. In
the system comprising inverter-cable-electric machine the maximum figure for voltage peaks at the
connecting terminals on the machine must not be less than the figure specified in the separate
manufacturer's instructions. In addition, the EMC Directive must also be observed.
Any repairs must be performed by NORD or accepted by an officially recognised independent expert. The
work must be identified by means of an additional repair plate. With the exception of standardised,
commercial and equivalent parts, the only spare parts which may be used are genuine spare parts (see
spare parts list): this particularly applies to seals and connecting parts.
In the case of motors with closed condensation holes the threads of the plugs must be recoated with
Loctite 242 or Loxeal 82-21 after condensation has been drained off. As soon as that has been done the
plugs must be reinserted. Checking of electrical connections must be performed at regular intervals.
The connection terminals, protective earth terminal and equipotential bonding terminal must be inspected to
make sure they are firm. When doing so, check to make sure that the cable entry, cable gland and terminal
box gaskets are in good condition.
All work on electric machines must be performed with the machine vertical and with all terminals
disconnected from the mains.
If installation resistance is being measured the motor must be removed. Measurement must not be
performed in the explosive area. As soon as measurement has been completed discharge the connecting
terminals again by shorting them in order to prevent any spark discharges occurring in the explosive area.
www.nord.com B1091-GB-3212 -9-
6. Motors for use in Zone 21
and Zone 22
6.1 General information
The following information applies additionally or especially to motors in categories 2D and 3D!
The motors are suitable for use in Zone 21 (category 2D) or Zone 22 – non-conductive dusts (category 3D)
according to their designation.
Type addition: Zone 21: 2D e.g.: 80 L/4 2D TF
Zone 22: 3D e.g.: 80 L/4 3D TF
The designation is as follows: 0102 II 2 D T 125°C for category 2 (Zone 21)*
Certification number: BVS 04 ATEX E 037
II 3 D T 125°C for category 3 (Zone 22 non-conductive dust)*
* the details of the surface temperature may deviate from 125°C and may be obtained from the name plate
If the motor is connected to a gear, the Ex designation of the gear must also be taken into account!
6.2 Safety information
The increased danger in areas with combustible dust requires that the general safety and commissioning
instructions are strictly complied with. Explosive dust concentrations can cause explosions if ignited by hot or
sparking objects and this can cause severe or even lethal injuries to persons and significant damage to
property.
It is absolutely essential that the persons authorised to use these motors in hazardous areas are trained in
their correct use.
6.3 Commissioning instructions / application area
The motors are suitable for use in Zone 21 (category 2D) or Zone 22 – non-conductive dusts (category 3D)
according to their designation. If the motors are intended for inverter operation, this must be specified when
ordering. The motors must be protected against overheating with suitable monitoring equipment! The dust
levels must not exceed 5 mm! The motors are designed for the voltage and frequency range A as in
EN 60034 Part 1.
Motors for use in Zone 21 and Zone 22, with labelling TF may be thermally monitored via the built-in PTC in
combination with a suitable triggering device as the sole protection. Electrical equipment for use in areas with
combustible dust complies with the standards EN 50281-1-1, EN 60034 and EN 50014. The level of
explosion hazard is determined by the zone separation. The operator/employer is responsible for zone
separation (guideline 1999/92/EC).
If the designation is supplemented by an X, special documentation in the EC type examination certificate
must be complied with. It is forbidden to use standard motors in hazardous areas that are not authorised for
use in hazardous areas. In Zone 21, the cable entries must be authorised for Ex areas (protection class
minimum IP 66) and must be secured against accidental loosening. Unused apertures must be sealed with
authorised plugs (minimum protection class IP 66).
For Zone 22, the cable glands must as a minimum correspond to the protection type specified on the name
plate. Unused openings must be closed with plugs, which as a minimum correspond to the protection class
of the motor.
The motor must not be opened under hazardous atmospheres to connect the electrical cables or for any
other work. The voltage must always be switched off and secured against being switched on again before
opening the motor!
-10- B1091-GB-3212 www.nord.com
6. Motors for use in Zone 21
and Zone 22
If the motor is supplied with a certified cable gland, the clamping nuts of the cable gland must be tightened to
the torque specified in the following table.
Cable gland Clamping nut tightening
torque [Nm]
M20x1.5 6
M25x1.5 8
M32x1.5 12
M40x1.5 16
The permissible ambient temperature range for all motors is -20°C...+40°C. A greater ambient temperature
range of -20°C...+60°C is permissible with motors for operation in Zones 21 and 22. This does not however
apply with the option brake and external fans! The rated power must then be reduced to 72% of the
catalogue value. If the maximum value of the ambient temperature is between +40°C and +60°C, the value
of the power consumption can be inversely interpolated linearly between 100% and 72%. Thermal motor
protection with a PTC temperature sensor is essential here. The motor connection cables and the cable
glands must be suitable for temperatures 90°C.
IEC-B14 motors
The B14 flanged bearing plate must be covered with a protective foil which must be removed before the
motor is fastened in place. All four fixing screws, even if not required, must be screwed into the flanged
bearing plate! The fixing screw threads must be inserted with a sealant, e.g. Loctite 242. The maximum
screw-in depth in the bearing plate is 2 x d.
If the shaft end faces upwards, e.g. models IMV3, IMV6, a cover must be positioned on the motor by the
operator/installer to prevent foreign bodies from falling into the motor ventilation cover (see
DIN EN 50 280-1-1). It must not hinder the motor from being cooled by the fans. Where shaft ends face
down, e.g. models IMV1, IMV5, the motors for Zone 21 are generally equipped with a protective roof on the
ventilation cover. A handwheel on the second shaft end is not permitted.
Unless otherwise specified for operating modes and tolerances in the test certificate or name plate, electrical
machinery is designed for continuous operation and normal infrequent start-ups where insignificant start-up
heating occurs. The motors may only be used for the operating mode specified on the name plate.
The installation regulations must be complied with!
6.4 Structure and operating mode
The motors are self-cooling. Rotary shaft seals are fitted both on the drive side (DS) and on the ventilation
side (VS).
Motors for Zone 21 and Zone 22 have metal fans. The motors are designed for protection class IP 55
(Zone 22 – non-conductive dust) or IP 66 (Zone 21). Under normal operating conditions the surface
temperature does not exceed that stated on the name plate.
6.5 Minimum cross-sections of ground leads
Cross-section of phase conductor Minimum cross-section of the associated
in installation S in mm2 ground lead SP in mm2
S ≤ 16 S
16 < S ≤ 35 16
S > 35 0.5 S
When connecting a lead to the external ground, the minimum cross-section must be 4 mm2.
www.nord.com B1091-GB-3212 -11-
6. Motors for use in Zone 21
and Zone 22
6.6 Maintenance
The voltage must always be switched off and secured against being switched on again!
Attention! Higher temperatures than the maximum permitted surface temperature of the housing may
be present inside the motor. The motor must therefore never be opened in hazardous dust
atmospheres!
The motors must be checked and tested regularly for functional safety! The applicable national
standards and regulations must be complied with!
Unpermitted high dust deposits > 5 mm may not be allowed to build up! If functional safety cannot be
ensured, the motor may not be operated!
When the ball bearings are replaced, the rotary shaft seals must also be replaced. FKM rotary shaft seals as
specified by Getriebebau NORD must be used. Ensure that they are fitted correctly!
The rotary shaft seals must be lubricated on the external rings and on the seal lips. If an explosion protected
gear is flanged dust-tight to the motor, an NBR rotary shaft seal can be used on the drive side of the motor if
the gear oil temperature does not exceed 85°C.
Only original parts may be used as spare parts with the exception of standardised, commercially available
and equivalent parts. This also applies in particular to seals and connection components. Parts for terminal
boxes or spare parts for external grounding must be ordered as per the spare parts list in the operating
instructions.
The functionality of seals, rotary shaft seals and cable glands must be regularly checked!
Maintaining dust protection for the motors is of paramount importance for explosion protection.
Maintenance must be implemented by qualified personnel in a specialist workshop with suitable equipment.
We urgently recommend that general overhauls are implemented by NORD Service.
-12- B1091-GB-3212 www.nord.com
7. IE2-ATEX Motors for use in
Zone 21 and Zone 22
ATTENTION!
Section 7 of these operating instructions applies as a supplement for IE2-ATEX motors for Zone 21
and Zone 22 as per EN 60079-0 and DIN EN 60079-31. Please disregard Section 6 for these motors.
7.1 General information
The following information applies additionally or especially to motors in categories 2D and 3D!
The motors are suitable for use in Zone 21 (category 2D) or Zone 22 – non-conductive dusts (category 3D)
according to their designation.
Type addition: Zone 21: 2D e.g.: 80 L/4 2D TF
Zone 22: 3D e.g: 80 L/4 3D TF
The designation is as follows: 0102 II 2 D Ex tb IIIC T125°C Db for Category 2
(Zone 21)*
II 3 D Ex tc IIIB T125°C Dc for Category 3
(Zone 22, non-conducting dust)*
* the details of the surface temperature may deviate from 125°C and may be obtained from the name plate
If the motor is attached to a gear unit, the EX labelling of the gear unit must also be observed!
7.1.2 Impact test
As per 26.4.2 of EN 60079-0 (2009 version), motors for Category 3D are subjected to an impact test with 4J.
7.2 Safety information
The increased danger in areas with inflammable dust demands the strict observation of the general safety
and commissioning information. Explosive concentrations of dust may cause explosions if ignited by hot or
sparking objects. Such explosions may cause serious or fatal injuries to persons or severe material damage.
It is absolutely essential that the persons responsible for the use these motors and frequency inverters in
explosion hazard areas are trained in their correct use.
7.3 Commissioning information / Field of application
If the motors are required for use with frequency inverters, this must be stated in the order. The motors must
be protected against overheating with suitable monitoring equipment! The thickness of dust deposits must
not exceed 5 mm! The motors are designed for the voltage and frequency range B of EN 60034 Part 1.
Motors for use in Zone 21 and Zone 22, with labelling TF may be thermally monitored via the built-in PTC in
combination with a suitable triggering device as the sole protection.
Electrical equipment for use in areas with combustible dust comply with the standards DIN EN 60079-0,
EN 60079-31 and DIN EN 60034. The valid version of the standard can be seen from the EEC Declaration of
Conformity. The degree of explosion hazard determines the zone categorisation. The operator / employer is
responsible for the assignment of zones (RL 1999/92/EEC)
If the certification is supplemented with an "X" the special conditions in the EEC prototype certification and/or
the relevant documentation must be observed. The use of standard motors which are not certified for
explosion hazard areas in explosion hazard areas is prohibited.
The terminal box cover is covered on one side with a very thin film of grease. This grease film prevents the
seal from adhering to the frame of the terminal box and must not be removed. This grease film must also be
applied using a suitable grease, if the seal is replaced.
www.nord.com B1091-GB-3212 -13-
7. IE2-ATEX Motors for use in
Zone 21 and Zone 22
The terminal box seal is glued into the cover of the terminal box cover. Please only use an original seal when
replacing the seal.
If the terminal box is opened during installation, maintenance, repair, troubleshooting or overhaul, the
terminal box cover must be re-fitted after the work is complete. There must be no dirt on the surface of the
seal or the sealing surface of the terminal box frame.
The screws for the terminal box cover must be tightened with a torque according to the following table.
Tightening torques for terminal box cover screws
Thread Tightening torque [Nm]
M4 0.8 to 1.2
M5 1.2 to 1.8
M6 1.5 to 2.5
M8 3.0 to 5.0
7.3.1 Electrical Connection
The electrical connections of the terminal board are protected against twisting. The voltage supply to the
terminal board must be made by means of suitable ring terminals. The ring terminals are installed between
the two brass washers below the lock washer. The nuts must be tightened with a torque according to the
table below. The contact pressure is permanently maintained by means of the specified torque and the lock
washer. In addition, twisting of the ring terminals of the voltage supply is prevented. The connection
elements are corrosion-proof.
Torques for Electrical
Rated thread diameter Tightening torque [Nm]
M1.6 0.09-0.12
M3 0.35-0.5
M4 0.8-1.2
M5 1.8-2.5
M6 2.7-4.0
M8 5.5-8.0
M10 9.0-13.0
M12 16.0-20.0
M16 36.0-40.0
Electrical connection:
r
Brass nut
Lock washer
Brass washer
Brass washer
Brass nut
A Brass washer
Ring terminal
Brass washer
Brass thread with collar
Mechanical protection against twisting
-14- B1091-GB-3212 www.nord.com
7. IE2-ATEX Motors for use in
Zone 21 and Zone 22
7.3.2 Cable and wiring glands
In Zone 21, the cable entries must be authorised for Ex areas (protection class minimum IP 66) and must be
secured against accidental loosening. Unused apertures must be sealed with authorised plugs (minimum
protection class IP 66). As delivered, the motors are equipped with a blank screw cap and a plastic cap. The
plastic cap must be replaced with a certified cable gland.
For Zone 22, the cable glands must as a minimum correspond to the protection type specified on the name
plate. Unused openings must be closed with plugs, which as a minimum correspond to the protection class
of the motor and the requirements of EN 60079-0. The cable glands and blank plugs must be suitable for a
temperature of at least 100°C.
The motor must not be opened under hazardous atmospheres to connect the electrical cables or for any
other work. The voltage must always be switched off and secured against being switched on again before
opening the motor!
The motors are equipped with cable glands according to the following overview.
Assignment of Cable Glands to Motor Size
Cable glands for standard motors Cable glands for brake motors
Type Number Thread Number Thread Number Thread Type Number Thread Number Thread Number Thread
63 2 M20x1.5 63 4 M20x1.5 2 M12x1.5
71 2 M20x1.5 71 4 M20x1.5 2 M12x1.5
80 2 M25x1.5 80 4 M25x1.5 2 M12x1.5
90 2 M25x1.5 90 4 M25x1.5 2 M12x1.5
100 2 M32x1.5 100 4 M32x1.5 2 M12x1.5
112 2 M32x1.5 112 4 M32x1.5 2 M12x1.5
132 2 M32x1.5 132 4 M32x1.5 2 M12x1.5 2 M16x1.5
160/ 160/
180/..X 2 M40x1.5 2 M12x1.5 2 M16x1.5 180/..X 2 M40x1.5 2 M12x1.5 2 M16x1.5
180/ 180/
200/..X 2 M40x1.5 2 M12x1.5 2 M16x1.5 200/..X 2 M40x1.5 2 M12x1.5 2 M16x1.5
200 2 M40x1.5 2 M12x1.5 2 M16x1.5 200 2 M40x1.5 2 M12x1.5 2 M16x1.5
If the motor is supplied with a certified cable gland, the clamping nuts of the cable gland must be tightened to
the torque specified in the following table.
Cable gland Clamping nut tightening
torque [Nm]
M20x1.5 6
M25x1.5 8
M32x1.5 12
M40x1.5 16
www.nord.com B1091-GB-3212 -15-
7. IE2-ATEX Motors for use in
Zone 21 and Zone 22
7.3.3 Permissible Ambient Temperature Range
The permissible ambient temperature range for all motors is -20°C...+40°C. A greater ambient temperature
range of -20°C...+60°C is permissible with motors for operation in Zones 21 and 22. This does not however
apply with the option brake and external fans! In this case, the rated power must be reduced to 72% of the
value stated in the catalogue. If the maximum ambient temperature is between +40°C and +60°C, the power
output should be inversely linearly interpolated between 100% and 72%. In this case thermal protection of
the motor by means of a thermistor sensor is essential. The motor connection cables and the cable glands
must be suitable for temperatures of at least 100°C.
7.3.4 Painting
Motors for Zone 21 and Zone 22 are provided with suitable painting ex-works.
Subsequent painting may only be carried out after consultation with Getriebebau NORD or a workshop which
is approved for the repair of explosion protected motors. Compliance with the valid standards and regulations
is mandatory.
7.3.5 IEC-B14 Motors
The B14 flanged bearing plate must be covered with a protective foil which must be removed before the mo-
tor is fastened in place. All four fixing screws, even if not required, must be screwed into the flanged bearing
plate! The fixing screw threads must be inserted with a sealant, e.g. Loctite 242. The maximum screw-in
depth in the bearing plate is 2 x d.
If the end of the shaft faces upwards, e.g. version IMV3, IMV6, a cover must be provided by the operator /
installer, which prevents foreign bodies from falling into the fan cover of the motor (see DIN EN 60079-017,
item 17). This must not obstruct the fan from cooling the motor. If the end of the shaft faces downwards, e.g.
versions IMV1, IMV5, motors for Zone 21 and Zone 22 are provided with a protective cover on the fan cover.
A hand wheel on the second end of the shaft is not permitted for versions with the "shaft end downwards".
Unless otherwise specified for operating modes and tolerances in the test certificate or name plate, electrical
machinery is designed for continuous operation and normal infrequent start-ups where insignificant start-up
heating occurs. The motors may only be used for the type of operation stated on the name plate.
The installation instructions must be strictly observed.
-16- B1091-GB-3212 www.nord.com
7. IE2-ATEX Motors for use in
Zone 21 and Zone 22
7.4 Structure and method of use
The motors are self-cooling. Rotary shaft seals are fitted both on the drive side (DS) and on the ventilation
side (VS). Motors for Zone 21 and Zone 22 have metal fans. Motors with brakes for Zone 22 (Category 3D,
non-conducting dust) have a special plastic fan. The motors are produced as protection class IP55,
optionally protection class IP 66, (Zone 22 – non-conducting dust) or IP66 (Zone 21). Under normal
operating conditions, the surface temperature does not exceed the surface temperature stated on the name
plate.
7.5 Minimum cross section of bonding conductors
Cross-section of phase conductor in in- Minimum cross-section of the associated
stallation S in mm2 ground lead SP in mm2
S ≤ 16 S
16 < S ≤ 35 16
S > 35 0.5 S
When connecting a lead to the external ground, the minimum cross-section must be 4 mm2.
7.6 Maintenance
The voltage must always be switched off and secured against being switched on again before open-
ing the motor!
Attention! Higher temperatures than the maximum permitted surface temperature of the housing may
be present inside the motor. The motor must therefore never be opened in hazardous dust atmos-
pheres! The motors must be checked and tested regularly for functional safety! The applicable na-
tional standards and regulations must be complied with!
Unpermitted high dust deposits > 5 mm may not be allowed to build up! If functional safety cannot be en-
sured, the motor may not be operated! When the ball bearings are replaced, the rotary shaft seals must also
be replaced. FKM rotary shaft seals as specified by Getriebebau NORD must be used. Ensure that they are
fitted correctly! The rotary shaft seals must be lubricated on the external rings and on the seal lips. If an ex-
plosion protected gear is flanged dust-tight to the motor, an NBR rotary shaft seal can be used on the drive
side of the motor if the gear oil temperature does not exceed 85°C. Only original parts may be used as spare
parts with the exception of standardised, commercially available and equivalent parts. This also applies in
particular to seals and connection components. Parts for terminal boxes or spare parts for external grounding
must be ordered as per the spare parts list in the operating instructions.
The functionality of seals, rotary shaft seals and cable glands must be regularly checked!
Maintaining dust protection for the motors is of paramount importance for explosion protection.
Maintenance must be implemented by qualified personnel in a specialist workshop with suitable equipment.
We urgently recommend that the general overhaul is carried out by NORD Service.
www.nord.com B1091-GB-3212 -17-
8. Options for motors used in
Zone 22
8.1 Option inverter operation
ATEX NORD motors for Zone 22 are suitable for inverter operation due to their insulation system design.
Because of the variable rpm range, temperature monitoring with PTC resistors or temperature monitors is
necessary. For safe engineering and application, comply with the engineering guideline "Operation of ATEX
motors with frequency inverters", No. 605 2101. The engineering guideline provides information about the
necessary requirements for inverter operation and about the permitted rpm ranges.
8.2 Option external fan
Motors with the additional designation F (e.g. 80S/4 3D F) are equipped with an external fan and must be
monitored via the integrated temperature sensor.
Attention!
The motor may only be operated together with the external fan! A failure of the external fan can lead to the
motor overheating and therefore endanger property/persons.
Comply with the operating instructions for the external fan!
The power supply for the external fan is provided independently via the external fan terminal box. The
external fan power supply must be identical to the voltage rating given on the name plate. The external fans
must be protected against overheating with suitable monitoring equipment! The IP protection classes of the
external fan and motor may be different. The lower IP protection class applies to the drive unit. The cable
glands must as a minimum correspond to the protection type specified on the name plate. Unused openings
must be closed with plugs, which as a minimum correspond to the protection class of the motor.
External fans and motors for use in hazardous areas have an Ex designation as per guideline 94/9 EC. This
designation must be present on the external fan and on the motor. If the designations of the external fan and
the motor differ, the lowest designated explosion protection applies to the entire drive. The maximum
specified temperature given in the surface temperature data for the individual components applies for the
entire drive unit In this case, it may be necessary to take into account any gears that may be present.
Contact Getriebebau NORD if there are any doubts.
If any component in the entire drive does not have an Ex designation, then the entire drive may not be
operated in an Ex area.
8.3 Option return stop
Motors with the additional designation RLS (e.g. 80S/4 3D RLS) are equipped with a return stop.
Motors with return stops have an arrow marking the direction of rotation on the ventilation cover. The arrow
points in the rotation direction of the motor. It must be ensured, when connecting the motor and during motor
control, that the motor can only operate in the rotation direction, e.g. by means of a rotary field test.
Switching the motor to the blocked rotation direction, i.e. incorrect rotation direction, can lead to damage.
Return stops operate without wear from a speed of ca. 800 1/min.. Return stops must not be operated at
speeds under 800 l/min to prevent unpermitted heating and rapid wear of the return stop. This must be taken
into account for motors with a frequency of 50 Hz and poles ≥ 8, and for motors with frequency inverters.
8.4 Option brake
Motors with the additional designation BRE (e.g. 80S/4 3D BRE 10) are equipped with a brake and must be
monitored via the integrated temperature sensor. If the temperature sensor of one of the components (motor
or brake) is triggered, the entire drive must be securely shutdown. The motor and brake PTC's must be
switched in series.
Attention!
The brake DC voltage supply must be implemented via a rectifier located in the motor terminal box or via a
directly supplied voltage. The brake voltage shown on the name plate must be complied with.
The power supply lines must not be laid in a cable together with the temperature sensor circuit. The brake
functionality must be checked before start-up. There should be no grinding noises, as this could lead to
unpermitted excessive heating.
-18- B1091-GB-3212 www.nord.com
9. Spare parts drawing and
spare parts list
Item No. Description Item No. Description
900 Rotor with shaft 918 Key
902 End shield at drive end 924 Screw-on foot (BG 100-132)
902.1 Cheese-head screw 924.1 Hexagon bolt
902.2 Hexagon nut 924.2 Spring lock washer
904 Shaft seal 924.3 Hexagon nut
905 Bearing at drive end 929 Bearing at ventilation end
906 Ball bearing shim 932 End shield at ventilation end
907 Terminal box frame 932.1 Cheese-head screw
907.1 Chassis connection terminal wire clamp 932.2 Hexagon nut
907.2 Oval-head screw 933 Shaft seal
908 Terminal box lid 939 Fan
908.1 Cheese-head screw 940 Fan hood
909 Terminal box frame gasket 940.1 Oval-head screw
910 Terminal box lid gasket 940.2 Countersink screw B3
911 Terminal board 941 Key
911.1 Cheese-head screw 942 947 Circlip
911.5 Spring lock washer 948 Circlip
912 Mini-terminal 952 Clamping bush
912.1 Oval-head screw 953 Cable gland
913 Spacer 955 Blind plug
913.1 Cheese-head screw 956 Blind plug
913.2 Spring lock washer 980 Protective roof
916 Stator with winding 988 Ring seal
916.1 Equipotential bonding terminal 989 Name plate
916.2 Spring pin 989.1 Oval-head screw
www.nord.com B1091-GB-3212 -19-
10. Conformity declaration
-20- B1091-GB-3212 www.nord.com
10. Conformity declaration
www.nord.com B1091-GB-3212 -21-
10. Conformity declaration
-22- B1091-GB-3212 www.nord.com
10. Conformity declaration
Getriebebau NORD GmbH & Co. KG
Rudolf-Diesel-Str. 1, D-22941 Bargteheide, Germany
Telephone: +49 (0) 4532-401-0 Fax: +49 (0) 4532-401-555 http://www.nord.com
EC Declaration of Conformity
According to Directive 94/9/ EEC Annex VII
We, Getriebebau Nord GmbH & Co. KG hereby declare
that the surface-cooled three-phase asynchronous motors with squirrel cage rotor
Type: SK 80*H/4 3D, SK 90*H/4 3D, SK 100*H/4 3D,
SK 112*H/4 3D, SK 132*H/4 3D, SK 160*H/4 3D,
SK 180*H/4 3D, SK 200XH/4 3D
* Power code (e.g. S, M, L, A)
comply with the following regulations:
94/9/EG
Directive for the harmonisation of statutory regulations of member states for devices and protective
systems for proper use in explosion hazard areas
Applied harmonised standards:
EN 60079-0: 2009
EN 60079-31: 2009
Initial labelling was carried out in 2011.
Bargteheide, 19.08.2011
U. Küchenmeister: i.V. F. Wiedemann
Manager Head of Motors Division
www.nord.com B1091-GB-3212 -23-
NORD DRIVESYSTEMS GROUP
www.nord.com/locator
Headquarters:
Getriebebau NORD GmbH & Co. KG
Rudolf-Diesel-Straße 1
22941 Bargteheide, Germany
Fon +49 (0) 4532 / 289 - 0
Fax +49 (0) 4532 / 289 - 2253
Mat.-Nr. 6051302/3212
[email protected], www.nord.com
Member of the NORD DRIVESYSTEMS GROUP DRIVESYSTEMS
Bei der Lehmkuhle 4
D-21279 Hollenstedt - Germany
Tel: +49-(0)4165 / 2211-0
E-Mail: [email protected]
www.HamannAG.com
Clear phase pump (A-1-P-150)
Eccentric screw pump with mounted frequency
inverter
Type: NX600-025/FU
Part No.: 013822
015236
Picture shows
part no. 013822
Operating- and Maintenance Instruction
This instruction includes important safety information and instructions for commission-
ing, operation and maintenance of the HAMANN components. It is essential therefore, that
the responsible specialist refers to it before starting any work on the machinery as well as
prior to commissioning. Furthermore, this instruction must always be available on site.
With reservation of technical modification.
BA 0079 e 1 (40)
CONTENT
DESCRIPTION AND GENERAL DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
AREAS OF APPLICATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
TECHNICAL DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
CHARACTERISTIC CURVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
NOISE EMISSIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
SAFETY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
SPECIFIC POINTS FOR THE USE OF A ECCENTRIC SCREW PUMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
LABELLING OF ADVICE IN THE OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
PERSONNEL QUALIFICATIONS AND TRAINING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
DANGERS RESULTING FROM FAILURE TO OBSERVE SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
SAFETY-CONSCIOUS WORKING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE USER/MACHINE OPERATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE, INSPECTION AND ASSEMBLY WORK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
UNAUTHORIZED MODIFICATIONS, MANUFACTURING OF REPLACEMENT PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
IMPERMISSIBLE MODES OF OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
TRANSPORT AND STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
PACKAGING AND TRANSPORTATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
STATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
GENERAL: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
STORE ROOM: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
ROTOR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
PUMP PARTS IN STAINLESS STEEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
OTHER, NON-COATED PUMP PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
DRIVES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
MECHANICAL SEAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
SET UP AND INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
DIRECTION OF ROTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
PRESSURE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
PIPING SYSTEM (FOR PUMPS DELIVERED SEPARATELY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
SHAFT SEALING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
ELECTRICAL CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
NOTE FOR FREQUENCY CONVERTER OPERATION:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
START UP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
TEMPORARY SHUTDOWN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
STATOR: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
ROTOR: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
STAND BY PUMP: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
PUMPS IN GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
LUBRICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
PUMP MODEL WITH “MECHANICAL SEALS” (SECTIONAL DRAWING W251.000). . . . . . . . . . . . 19
LUBRICATING THE PIN JOINTS WITH SM-PIN JOINT SEALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
LUBRICATING OIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
SHAFT SEALING THROUGH SINGLE MECHANICAL SEAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
VERTICALLY INSTALLED PUMPS WITH OVERHEAD DRIVE: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
TROUBLESHOOTING AND REMEDYING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
DISMANTLING AND ASSEMBLY OF THE PUMP HOUSING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Eccentric screw pump with mounted frequency inverter NX600-025/FU 3 (40)
REMOVAL AND FITTING OF END STUD, STATOR AND PUMP HOUSING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
DISMANTLING: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
ASSEMBLY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
TORQUE VALUES FOR HEX NUTS (2030): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
DISMANTLING AND ASSEMBLY OF THE ROTATING PARTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
REMOVAL OF ROTOR AND COUPLING ROD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
FITTING THE ROTOR AND COUPLING ROD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
REMOVAL AND FITTING OF THE CONNECTING SHAFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
REMOVAL: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
FITTING: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
REMOVAL AND FITTING OF THE MECHANICAL SEAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
SPARE PARTS AND DRAWINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
SPARE PARTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
SECTIONAL DRAWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
SECTIONAL DRAWING MECHANICAL SEAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
APPENDIX: DRIVE AND FREQUENCY INVERTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
OPERATING AND ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS FOR GEAR UNITS AND GEARED MOTORS (B1000) . . . . 39
OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS THREE-PHASE ASYNCHRONOUS MOTORS (B1091) . 39
FREQUENCY INVERTER MANUAL SK 200E (BU 0200) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
NX600-025-FU_e3.fm / 7.2.17
4 (40) Eccentric screw pump with mounted frequency inverter NX600-025/FU
Description And General Data
1. DESCRIPTION AND GENERAL DATA
1.1 AREAS OF APPLICATION
The eccentric screw pump type NX600-025/FU is equipped with a frequency convert-
er and will be used with HAMANN Sewage Treatment plants for example as Clear
phase pump (A-1-P-150).
1.2 DESCRIPTION
An eccentric screw pump is a progressing cavity pump.
The main components which determine the system, discovered by Professor René
Moineau, are a rotating part, called the rotor and a static part, called the stator.
The rotor is a helical screw with an extremely large pitch, large thread depth and
small centre diameter with round cross-section for 1/2-geometry. The stator has a
two start or respectively three start thread and is double or respectively 1.5 the pitch
length of the rotor. This provides space for the medium between the rotor and stator.
When the rotor turns round inside the stator the medium moves continuously from
the inlet to the outlet.
The universal pump system unifies many positive characteristics of other pump
types:
• Like centrifugal pumps, eccentric screw pumps have no suction or pressure
valves, but do have a stable flow rate in proportion to the number of revolutions.
• Like membrane and peristaltic pumps the eccentric screw pump can transport
every type of in homogeneous, gaseous and abrasive media, as well as those
that are not of a liquid consistency or contain solids and/or fibrous material.
• Like gear pumps and screw pumps the eccentric screw pumps is capable of cop-
ing with high medium viscosity.
• Like piston, membrane, gear or screw pumps the eccentric screw pumps can
perform dosing operations.
NX600-025-FU_e3.fm / 7.2.17
Eccentric screw pump with mounted frequency inverter NX600-025/FU 5 (40)
Description And General Data
Length and cross-sections through the rotor and stator with 1/2-geometry during a
rotation.
NX600-025-FU_e3.fm / 7.2.17
6 (40) Eccentric screw pump with mounted frequency inverter NX600-025/FU
Description And General Data
Length and cross-sections through a rotor and stator with reduced thickness and
1/2-geometry during a rotation.
1.3 TECHNICAL DATA
Part No. 013822 015236
Type NX600-025/FU
Inlet stud position Inlet stud and connec- Inlet stud and connec-
tion box in same mount- tion box in opposite
ing direction mounting direction
Mounting Vertical, drive upwards
Mounting position on bord, below deck
Pump housing Cr-Ni-Mo 17-12-2 (1.4571)
House sealing NBR
Shaft sealing Mechanical seal MG1-G060; Q1Q1VGG
Rotating parts CrNiMo17-12-2 (1.4571)
Nuckle lubrication Mineral oil
Rotor Cr-Ni-Mo-Steel (1.4571)
Stator NEMOLAST® S65L
Medium grey/black water
Ambient temperature ~ 20°C
Flow rate max. 0,25 m³/h
Pressure at pressure stud ~ 5 bar
Pressure at suction stud 0,1 bar
Connections 1 1/4" BSP
Helical Gear Drive Type Nord SK01-71L/4-F(AL) TF
Mounting form V1 (vertical position)
Operating voltage 3~ 220-240/380-420 V
Power consumption 0,37 kW (50Hz)
Rated current 1,1 A (refer to type plate)
Frequency 50 Hz
Rated speed (50 Hz) ~ 1360 min-1
Gear side ~ 251min-1
Isolation class F
NX600-025-FU_e3.fm / 7.2.17
Protection IP55
Thermal protection 3 PTC
Frequency Converter Type SK200E-550-340A
Voltage range 3AC 380-500V, -20%/+10%
Interface RS485/RS232
Weight ~ 27,5 kg
Eccentric screw pump with mounted frequency inverter NX600-025/FU 7 (40)
Description And General Data
1.4 CHARACTERISTIC CURVE
Q [m³/h]
2 bar
4 bar
3,5 6 bar
2,5
1,5
0,5
0 n [1/min]
0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500
0 1 2 3
vgm [m/s]
P [kW]
4
6 bar
2
0,9
0,7
1
0,8 4
2 bar
bar
0,6
0,7
0,8 2 bar
0,5
0,6
0,6
0,5
0,4
0,4
0,3
0,4
0,3
0,2
0,2
0,2
0,1
0,1
0 n [1/min]
0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500
NX600-025-FU_e3.fm / 7.2.17
Losbrechmoment / starting torque T(L) = 4 Nm Druck / pressure T
2 bar 2,46 Nm
4 bar 3,16 Nm
6 bar 3,96 Nm
8 (40) Eccentric screw pump with mounted frequency inverter NX600-025/FU
Description And General Data
1.5 NOISE EMISSIONS
The maximum permitted noise emission level at a work place is 70 dB (A).
The noise level was measured in accordance with DIN Standard 45635-24-01-KL2
to assure that the pump does not exceed 70 dB (A).
Noises generated by the drive and pipes are not included in the above emission val-
ue.
A prerequisite for the noise emission level of <70 dB (A) is that the pump is operated
in a cavity free regime and is bolted to a concrete base.
NX600-025-FU_e3.fm / 7.2.17
Eccentric screw pump with mounted frequency inverter NX600-025/FU 9 (40)
Safety
2. SAFETY
This operating and maintenance instruction includes important safety information
and instructions for installation, commissioning, operation and maintenance of ec-
centric pumps. It is essential therefore, that the responsible specialist refers to it be-
fore starting any work on the machinery as well as prior to commissioning.
Furthermore, this instruction must always be available on site.
2.1 SPECIFIC POINTS FOR THE USE OF A ECCENTRIC SCREW PUMP
An eccentric screw pump must be used for the purpose only for which it was deliv-
ered.
Please note that eccentric screw pumps are progressing cavity pumps and as
such can generate very high pressure.
A blockage or the chance closure of a valve in the discharge line can cause a pres-
sure rise manifold as high as can be tolerated by the installation. This can result in
the bursting of pipes, which must be avoided especially in the case of dangerous me-
dia.
Corresponding safety equipment must therefore be installed, for example an emer-
gency stop button, a pressure relief valve with return pipe or a bursting disc.
During maintenance and repair work on the pump please note the following:
• Ensure that the pump drive can not be turned on without authorization.
• When opening the pump follow the instructions for handling the medium (e.g.
protective clothing etc.).
• Before putting the pump back into operation ensure that all guards and other
safety devices (e.g. Drive belt protection, coupling protection) are properly re-
installed.
2.2 LABELLING OF ADVICE IN THE OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
Non-observance of these instructions could lead to danger of life or limb. Therefore,
important safety advice in these instructions are marked with the following general
hazard symbol:
Warnings regarding electric power are labelled with:
NX600-025-FU_e3.fm / 7.2.17
Safety instructions whose non-observance could jeopardize the machine and its
functions are labelled with
10 (40) Eccentric screw pump with mounted frequency inverter NX600-025/FU
Safety
Important additional informations are labelled with
Always comply with instructions mounted directly on the machine, e.g.
• rotational direction arrow
• fluid connection indicators
and ensure that the information remains legible.
2.3 PERSONNEL QUALIFICATIONS AND TRAINING
Personnel charged with operation, maintenance, inspection and assembly must be
in possession of the appropriate qualifications. The company operating the machine
must define exact areas of responsibility, accountabilities and personnel supervision
schemes.
Personnel lacking the required skills and knowledge must receive training and in-
struction. If necessary, the operating company may commission the manufacturer or
supplier to conduct training courses.
Furthermore, the operating company must ensure that the personnel fully under-
stand the contents of the operating instructions.
2.4 DANGERS RESULTING FROM FAILURE TO OBSERVE SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Failure to comply with safety instructions may lead to danger of life or limb as well as
environmental hazards or system/device malfunctions. Non-observance of Safety In-
structions may invalidate the right of claim to damages. Some examples of danger
resulting from failure to comply are as follows:
• Failure of important machine/plant functions.
• Failure to follow prescribed methods of service and maintenance.
• Danger to life and limb due to electrical, mechanical or chemical influences.
• Danger to the environment due to leakage of hazardous substances.
2.5 SAFETY-CONSCIOUS WORKING
Always comply with the safety instructions listed in this document, the existing na-
tional accident prevention regulations and any operating and safety rules relative to
a ship's internal work.
2.6 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE USER/MACHINE OPERATOR
• Any potentially hazardous hot or cold machine parts must be provided with pro-
NX600-025-FU_e3.fm / 7.2.17
tection against accidental contact.
• Protective guards for moving parts (e.g. coupling) must never be removed while
the system is in operation.
• Leakage's (e.g. in the shaft seal) of hazardous conveying liquids (e.g. toxic) must
be drained in such a way that no danger arises for persons or the environment.
Always observe the relevant statutory requirements.
Eccentric screw pump with mounted frequency inverter NX600-025/FU 11 (40)
Safety
• The risk of exposure to electrical power must be eliminated. For details see the
electrical installation regulations of your classification society (e.g. GL) and/or
national regulations (e.g. the VDE).
• When handling or storing materials labelled as hazardous or otherwise requiring
special attention (ex. Sodium Hypochloride Solution), always follow appropriate
precautionary methods, handling techniques and regulatory information, and
use appropriate protective clothing such as gloves or safety glasses.
• In cases of emergency, such as for first aid measures, medical help, exposure
control, accidental release or fire consult the Material Safety Data Sheets
located in the following chapters of this manual.
2.7 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE, INSPECTION AND ASSEMBLY WORK
• The operator must ensure that all tasks relative to maintenance, inspection and
assembly are carried out by authorized and qualified personnel who have stud-
ied the operating instructions closely and become sufficiently familiar with the
machine.
• As a basic rule, the machine must be brought to a standstill before work is car-
ried out; and the risk of exposure to electrical power must be eliminated.
• Always comply with the de-commissioning procedures described in this docu-
ment.
• Any pumps or assemblies conveying media that are detrimental to health must
be decontaminated.
• Immediately following completion of work, all safety and protective devices must
be replaced to their proper position and, where applicable, re-activated.
• Before re-starting the machine, observe the points listed under section "Start up"
on page 17.
2.8 UNAUTHORIZED MODIFICATIONS, MANUFACTURING OF REPLACEMENT PARTS
Conversions or modifications of or for the machine are permissible only after consul-
tation with the manufacturers. Original manufacturer replacement parts and manu-
facturer-approved accessories enhance the operational safety of the machine. Using
unauthorized parts may lead to the nullification of the manufacturer's liability of any
resultant damages.
2.9 IMPERMISSIBLE MODES OF OPERATION
The operational safety of the treatment system and its devices are under warranty
only when being operated as defined in the operating instruction. Never allow the
threshold values specified in the "Technical Data" on page 7 to be exceeded.
NX600-025-FU_e3.fm / 7.2.17
12 (40) Eccentric screw pump with mounted frequency inverter NX600-025/FU
Transport and storage
3. TRANSPORT AND STORAGE
3.1 PACKAGING AND TRANSPORTATION
On receipt of delivery check for any transport damages. Transport damages should
be reported immediately.
Pumps should be transported as closely as possible to the location of installation and
only there should they be unpacked.
Vertical pumps should be lifted by using the bolt down holes, lifting lugs or shackles
attached to the base plate. This is shown on the installation drawing. For most appli-
cations, the drive is mounted on top of the pump.
Be careful when lifting top heavy pumps. The centre of gravity may be above
the points where the lifting gear is attached to. If the case, secure additionally
against tipping over!
Vertical pumps should not be deposited unless they are secured vertically.
Hazards of tipping! Deposit only in horizontal position!
It is essential to avoid that the total pump unit be suspended eye bolts of the
motor or gear box. These eye bolts should be used for lifting the motor and/or
the gear box only.
Only general instructions can be given here. These should be good enough for ex-
perienced assemblymen or transportation experts. When in doubt, please ask for de-
tailed information on the pump unit concerned.
3.2 STORAGE
In cases of longer storage the eccentric screw pumps should be handled as follows
until installation:
STATOR
If the pump is not to be used immediately, then the elastomer along the contact line
between rotor and stator may become permanently distorted (compression-set). This
will increase the break away torque. Therefore, the stator should be removed and
kept separately in a clean, cool and dry environment.
Standard DIN 7716 summarizes detailed information on the storage of rubber prod-
ucts, some of which is gathered here, and the following notice applies to a storage
for a period of up to six months.
GENERAL:
Most of the rubber products may change their physical properties under unfavorable
conditions or if treated improperly, which will result in a shorter lifetime. Or they may
become useless through excessive hardening, ageing, regenerating or permanent
NX600-025-FU_e3.fm / 7.2.17
deformation, also because of blistering, cracking or other damages appearing on the
surfaces. The changes may occur under the influence of oxygen, ozone, heat, light,
humidity, solvents or because of storing the products under tension. If stored and
treated properly, the rubber products will keep their properties, even over a long pe-
riod of time (some years), almost unchanged.
This does, however, not apply to uncured rubber compounds.
Eccentric screw pump with mounted frequency inverter NX600-025/FU 13 (40)
Transport and storage
STORE ROOM:
The environment in which rubber products are being kept must be cool, dry, free of
dust and rather airy, and they must not be stored in the open, not even in a weather
sheltered space.
Rubber products should be kept in surroundings not having less than minus 10 °C
and not more than plus 15 °C. Store rooms should not be damp, and it must be en-
sured that there will be no condensation.
Most favorable is an environment offering a relative humidity under 65%.
Rubber products must be protected against light, particularly direct sunlight or artifi-
cial light when having a high UV portion. They should furthermore be kept away from
ventilation, especially draught, by wrapping them up.
As ozone is very aggressive and harmful there should be no store room used which
houses equipment likely to produce ozone, e.g. electric motors or other equipment
which might bring about sparks or other electrical discharges.
There must be no solvents, oil, grease, lubricants or any chemicals kept in a store
room.
ROTOR
Please support with wooden blocks and cover up against harm from mechanical im-
pact.
PUMP PARTS IN STAINLESS STEEL
No grease coating necessary.
OTHER, NON-COATED PUMP PARTS
Protect with grease.
DRIVES
Please observe the drive supplier's instructions.
MECHANICAL SEAL
The mechanical seals do not require any special preservation. However, the general
requirements related to rubber products described above under "Stator" should be
observed. Mechanical seals that have been packaged and are not needed until they
are mounted should remain in their packaging.
NX600-025-FU_e3.fm / 7.2.17
14 (40) Eccentric screw pump with mounted frequency inverter NX600-025/FU
Set up and installation
4. SET UP AND INSTALLATION
If the eccentric pump was stored and the rotor grease protected:
• Remove the grease before installing the stator. Clean the rotor thoroughly in
order to avoid unsuitability of the grease with the stator material and the pumping
medium.
• Screw the pump at all fixing points (bearing housing / drive stool, end stud, sup-
port feet) using all fixing bores securely down to the sub-structure (ground plate,
machine frame, foundation etc.).
4.1 DIRECTION OF ROTATION
The direction of rotation of the pump is given on the model plate. The direction of de-
livery of the pump is a function of the direction of rotation.
4.2 PRESSURE
If not explicitly confirmed otherwise in the data sheet, the maximum permissible pres-
sure (e.g. when turning clockwise) inside the pump housing (A) is:
• models with stainless steel 1.4571 pump housing: 10 bar.
The maximum permissible pressures inside the end flange (B) is a function of the de-
sign applied for connections with flange: maximum nominal pressure (e.g. PN 16)
4.3 PIPING SYSTEM (FOR PUMPS DELIVERED SEPARATELY)
Arrange suction and pressure pipes so that when the pump is not running, the medi-
um is still present before and after the pump. Sufficient media should remain inside
in order to lubricate the pump during restart.
Figure 1: Disassembly length “ABL” in mm: 230 mm
The "Sectional drawing" on page 37 also provides the disassembly length or “ABL”
NX600-025-FU_e3.fm / 7.2.17
(german for „Ausbaulänge).
Always be sure that the pumps are mounted without any tension-forces.
• The distance piece (see sketch) needs to have a minimum "ABL" disassembly
length.
• Clean the pipe work and rinse thoroughly before installing the pump.
• Connect the pipe work ensuring that no external stress attacks the pump body.
Eccentric screw pump with mounted frequency inverter NX600-025/FU 15 (40)
Set up and installation
• The twisting loads (Fx, Fy, Fz) and bending loads (Mx, My, Mz) permitted to be
put on the suction/discharge flange comply with the requirements of API 676 and
exceed the requirements of EN ISO 14847. They are shown below.
Standard nominal diameter DN 32 G 1 1/4"
Fx, Fy, Fz (N) 416
Mx, My, Mz (Nm) 224
Screwed joints must not be charged with loads which may result in tightening
or loosening these joints!
4.4 SHAFT SEALING
Where applicable, ensure that adequate supply lines for the buffer, flushing or
quenching fluid for the shaft seals are connected before the pump is put into opera-
tion. For more details see section "Shaft sealing through single mechanical seal" on
page 21.
4.5 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION
All work relating to electricity shall only be made by authorized and qualified
personnel and it should be in compliance with the requirements of the relevant
NX600-025-FU_e3.fm / 7.2.17
national regulations!
NOTE FOR FREQUENCY CONVERTER OPERATION:
It is absolutely necessary to connect the PTC-resistors of the drive in case of fre-
quency converter operation to protect the drive against overheating.
16 (40) Eccentric screw pump with mounted frequency inverter NX600-025/FU
Start up
5. START UP
The eccentric pump design requires strict attention to the following:
Never run the pump dry! A few rotations in dry condition will damage the sta-
tor!
Vertical pumps only:
At first startup the quench has to be filled up with oil. Check oil after longer stand still
periods (see section "Shaft sealing through single mechanical seal" on page 21).
Before starting up for the first time, fill the pump with medium.
In the case of high viscosity media fill with a liquid.
Pump priming is vital to ensure lubrication of the rubber stator.
Fill the piping on the pump suction side.
In anti–clockwise rotation only: Fill the pump housing.
The pump is a progressing cavity pump which can produce pressures that may
cause the bursting of vessels or pipes. The power transmission train (shaft,
coupling rod, joints, rotor) of the pump may be overloaded thus resulting in
damage or breakage.
Also the pump housing parts with their connections may be overloaded and
break. There is a table in Section 4 of these Maintenance and Operating In-
structions showing the pressure resistance of the pump housing parts.
Never run the pump against a closed inlet or outlet valve!
• Open valves and vents before starting the pump!
• Check the direction of rotation by briefly switching on the pump motor.
NX600-025-FU_e3.fm / 7.2.17
Eccentric screw pump with mounted frequency inverter NX600-025/FU 17 (40)
Temporary shutdown
6. TEMPORARY SHUTDOWN
After stopping the pump, first empty it, and then if necessary, rinse it.
STATOR:
When stored for a long period (see "Storage" on page 13), the elastomer along the
contact line between the rotor and stator may become permanently distorted (com-
pression-set).
This will increase the break away torque. For this reason, the stator should be re-
moved (please observe section "Dismantling and assembly of the pump housing" on
page 25), and stored in a cool, dry place in an air-tight package to give protection
against light and air.
ROTOR:
Support rotors on wooden blocks and cover to protect them from mechanical dam-
age, after the stator has been removed.
Remove the grease before re–installing the stator and clean the rotor thoroughly in
order to avoid unsuitability of the grease with the pumping medium or the stator ma-
terial.
STAND BY PUMP:
A stand-by pump is sometimes used as a back-up for the main pump and, when
standing idle for longer periods, should be operated from time to time.
The pump may otherwise become seized when being started up. This is due to com-
pression set i.e. distortion of the stator against the surface of the rotor, see section
"Storage" on page 13.
NX600-025-FU_e3.fm / 7.2.17
18 (40) Eccentric screw pump with mounted frequency inverter NX600-025/FU
Maintenance
7. MAINTENANCE
7.1 PUMPS IN GENERAL
Separately mounted screw pumps should be regularly rinsed or cleaned if deposits
of medium are likely to build up (sedimentation).
If the pump needs to be opened to do this, ensure that the pump and motor are
switched off and cannot be turned on accidentally (e.g. by removing the fuse).
7.2 LUBRICATION
The pump does not require frequent lubrication.
Maintenance of the drive should be carried out according to the drive manufacturers
instructions (see Appendix).
Special lubricants are often specified for mechanically controlled variable
speed drives. It is therefore important to follow the drive manufacturers main-
tenance instructions.
PUMP MODEL WITH “MECHANICAL SEALS” (SECTIONAL DRAWING W251.000)
The lubricating should be done:
• when putting into operation
• after every 350 hours of operation
• before and after operation interruptions of 6 - 8 weeks.
7.3 LUBRICATING THE PIN JOINTS WITH SM-PIN JOINT SEALS
It is advisable to change the oil and check the seals of the pin joints:
• when renewing worn joint parts
• when opening the pump for any reason.
The quantity of oil added per pin joint is a function of the joint external diameter D:
NX600-025-FU_e3.fm / 7.2.17
Joint external diameter D: 30 mm
Quantity of oil per joint: 2 cm3
Eccentric screw pump with mounted frequency inverter NX600-025/FU 19 (40)
Maintenance
LUBRICATING OIL
Designation
Seal
Industrial application according to Permitted Product
material
DIN 51502
CLP HC
“KLÜBER”
Food and Beverage FPM
460 KLÜBERSYNTH UH1 6-460 *)
Industry only EPDM
authorized under USDA H1
Authorized for use
in foodstuffs
FPM CLP “SHELL”
NBR 460 Omala 460
General Industry
CLP HC “KLÜBER”
EPDM
460 KLÜBERSYNTH UH1 6-460 *)
*) It is not quite harmless if swallowed in more than minor quantities.
At a sudden break in a joint up to 450 ml of lubricating oil together with metal
rubbings may enter the pumping medium. It is therefore of essential impor-
tance to regularly check the state of the joint seals and renew in time, if neces-
sary.
If the pin joints operate without lubricating oil or seals, there will be no risk of
contaminating the medium with oil. This operation, however, results in a high-
er amount of rubbed off metal parts through wear on the joints. These metal
rubbings will inevitably and continuously come into contact with the pumping
medium. NX600-025-FU_e3.fm / 7.2.17
20 (40) Eccentric screw pump with mounted frequency inverter NX600-025/FU
Shaft sealing through single mechanical seal
8. SHAFT SEALING THROUGH SINGLE MECHANICAL SEAL
If excessive leakage occurs, the spring tension and the seal surfaces should be
checked, and the seal should be replaced, if necessary.
VERTICALLY INSTALLED PUMPS WITH OVERHEAD DRIVE:
On initial start-up the mechanical seal has not come in contact with the medium. It
runs therefore dry for a short period of time until the air is displaced from the pump
housing.
• On first start-up and if stood idle for longer periods lubricate the mechanical seal
before switching on the pump.
• Apply water, glycerine or oil depending on their compatibility with the pumping
medium and the elastomer of the mechanical seal.
• Fill the quench cup (1) of the mechanical seal housing.
NX600-025-FU_e3.fm / 7.2.17
Eccentric screw pump with mounted frequency inverter NX600-025/FU 21 (40)
Troubleshooting and remedying
9. TROUBLESHOOTING AND REMEDYING
The first column in the first table describes a possible problem.
Listed on the corresponding lines are some hints on how to handle the problem
through the numbered possible reasons / causes, which are then listed in the second
table.
The second table helps in finding the root of the problem by providing a remedy, if it
is straight forward. For more complicated problems HAMANN AG service has to be
consulted.
Possible Problems Possible Cause No.
The pump is no longer starting 1, 2, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8
The pump is no longer sucking 10, 11, 13, 16, 17, 18, 26
The pumped medium is too little 2, 3, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18
The pressure is too low 2, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18
The pumped medium is unstable 9, 10, 11, 14
The pump is running loudly 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 22, 23
The pump is stuck 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 15
The drive is overloaded 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 15, 22, 23, 24, 25
The stator life time is too short 3, 5, 6, 7, 8, 14, 15, 17, 18
The rotor life time is too short 3, 5, 8, 14, 17
The shaft seal is leaking 8, 21, 25, 26, 27
NX600-025-FU_e3.fm / 7.2.17
22 (40) Eccentric screw pump with mounted frequency inverter NX600-025/FU
Troubleshooting and remedying
No Possible causes Remedy
1 In new pumps or stators: the static friction is Fill the pump up, then pump through manually
too great. using a suitable appliance; if necessary use
glycerine as lubricant in the stator.
2 The pump electrical equipment is not com- Check order information. Examine electrical
patible with the electrical supply. installation (possibly 2 phase operation).
3 The pressure is too high. Measure the pressure with a manometer and
check against order details. Reduce the pres-
sure or change the drive.
4 There are foreign bodies in the pump. Remove foreign bodies and eliminate possible
damage.
5 The temperature of the liquid medium is too If the liquid medium temperature cannot be
high, the stator is too ductile. lowered, use a reduced diameter rotor.
6 The stator has swollen, the elastomer is not Check whether the liquid medium agrees with
compatible with the medium. the order requirements. Possibly change stator
material.
7 The solids content of the medium is too high Increase the liquid part of the medium.
and leads to blockages.
8 The liquid medium sediments or hardens Clean the pump and rinse through after each
when left to stand. run.
9 if pump is mounted separately: There is air Increase the suction liquid level, prevent turbu-
in the suction pipe. lence and air bubbles at the inlet.
10 The suction pipe is leaking. Check seals and tighten pipe connections.
11 The shaft seal is leaking. Renew seals, eliminate solid deposits.
12 The rotation is too low. In the case of adjustable drives: increase the
rpm. If necessary change the drive.
13 With reduced diameter rotors: operating Warm up the pump (stator) to operating tem-
temperature has not been reached. perature first of all.
14 The suction is too great or pressure too low Decrease suction resistance, lower the temper-
(cavitation). ature of the liquid medium, install the pump at a
lower location.
15 The pump is running dry. Fill up the pump, provide for dry running pro-
tection, move the pipes.
16 The stator is worn out. Replace with a new stator or ensure correct liq-
uid temperature.
17 The stator material is brittle. Fit a new stator. Check the liquid medium
agrees with order details; if necessary change
the stator material.
18 The rotor is worn out. Change rotor, establish the cause. Wear and
tear, corrosion, cavitation; if necessary change
to a different material or coating.
19 The joints are worn out. Replace relevant parts, carefully reseal and
lubricate.
20 The pump and drive are not axially aligned. Re-align the unit.
NX600-025-FU_e3.fm / 7.2.17
21 The roller bearings are destroyed. Replace roller bearings, lubricate, reseal. At
higher temperatures observe the lubricant and
the bearings.
22 The rpm is too high. In the case of adjustable drives: lower the rpm.
23 The viscosity is too high. Measure the viscosity and compare with order
details. If necessary adjust viscosity or change
the drive.
Eccentric screw pump with mounted frequency inverter NX600-025/FU 23 (40)
Troubleshooting and remedying
No Possible causes Remedy
24 The specific weight of the medium is too Measure specific weight and compare with
high. order details. If necessary adjust specific
weight or change the drive.
25 Mechanical seal: rotation is incorrect. Change electrical connection.
26 Mechanical seal: mechanical seal and mat- Replace relevant rings with new ones.
ing ring have failed.
27 Mechanical seal: elastomers damaged, Replace elastomers. Check whether the liquid
swollen or brittle. medium agrees with order details, if necessary
change material.
NX600-025-FU_e3.fm / 7.2.17
24 (40) Eccentric screw pump with mounted frequency inverter NX600-025/FU
Dismantling and assembly of the pump housing
10. DISMANTLING AND ASSEMBLY OF THE PUMP HOUSING
10.1 REMOVAL AND FITTING OF END STUD, STATOR AND PUMP HOUSING
The pump with attached pipework should be empty and must have cooled off!
Disconnect the pipework on the suction side and pressure side of the pump.
DISMANTLING:
• · Remove the securing screws (S) from support feet (2035) to
base plate (G).
• Unscrew the hex nuts A (3020) and remove with spring wash-
ers (3015), then withdraw the end stud (2005) and first support
foot (2035/1) with washers (3070).
• Support pump housing (2010) and stator (3005) with wooden
blocks.
NX600-025-FU_e3.fm / 7.2.17
Eccentric screw pump with mounted frequency inverter NX600-025/FU 25 (40)
Dismantling and assembly of the pump housing
• Loosen the hex nuts B (3020), where fitted, and remove the
through bolts (3010).
Where fitted, remove the second support foot (2035/2) and the
washers (3070).
• Pull the stator (3005) out forward.
• Remove the hex nuts (2030) with spring washers (2025).
• Pull the pump housing (2010) off forward
ASSEMBLY
• Refitting is a simple reversal of this procedure.
When refitting the stator (3005) check if its direction is correct!
The funnel-shaped inflow side (E) of the stator (3005) must
show to:
- the pump housing (2010) when rotation is anti-clockwise
NX600-025-FU_e3.fm / 7.2.17
when viewed on pump shaft end.
- the end stud (2005) when rotation is clockwise when viewed
on pump shaft end.
26 (40) Eccentric screw pump with mounted frequency inverter NX600-025/FU
Dismantling and assembly of the pump housing
Be careful when engaging the stator (3005) and rotor (1999). Do not trap your
fingers! Do not reach inside the stator!
• Push the stator (3005) with a rotating movement on to rotor
(1999).
Apply an assembly device and some glycerine to ease engag-
ing the stator (3005) and rotor (1999).
When tightening hex nuts (2030) a gap will remain between
drive stool (0085) and pump housing (2010).
Please do not try to close this gap by over tightening the nuts! Drive stool
(0085) may break!
TORQUE VALUES FOR HEX NUTS (2030):
Size M6 M8 M10 M12 M16 M20 M24 M30
Required 8 15 30 45 75 80 100 120
Torque [Nm]
• Fastening the end stud (2005):
Screw the hex nuts C (3020) down into the through bolts (3010)
as far as possible. Slip on the first washers (3070), the support
foot (2035), the second washers (3070), the end stud. (2005)
and tighten with spring washers (3015) and hex nuts A (3020).
Finally, fasten the support foot (2035) from behind with the two
hex nuts C (3020).
• Ensure during refitting that the O-ring (8015) is in perfect con-
dition and will sit correctly.
Ensure that the drain plug (2015) is not screwed too tightly into the pump hous-
ing (2010), since otherwise its conical thread may break the pump housing
(2010). The torque should be about 40- 50 Nm.
NX600-025-FU_e3.fm / 7.2.17
Eccentric screw pump with mounted frequency inverter NX600-025/FU 27 (40)
Dismantling and assembly of the rotating parts
11. DISMANTLING AND ASSEMBLY OF THE ROTATING PARTS
11.1 REMOVAL OF ROTOR AND COUPLING ROD
For removal of the rotor (1999) and coupling rod (1998) the pin joints should be dis-
mantled as follows:
• Place the dismantled unit - consisting of drive stool
(0085) with drive (A) and connecting shaft (1050), cou-
pling rod (1998) and rotor (1999) on the workbench with
a wooden block supporting the rotor (1999).
• Push circlip (5065) out of its groove and slip off over the head
of rotor (1999), connecting shaft (1050).
• Pumps fitted with a metallic rotor (1999):
If necessary hit the edge of sleeve (5115) at an angle with the
help of a wooden block and a plastic hammer. Taking care not
to damage the O-rings (8060)!
• Press the pin (5075) out of the head of rotor (1999), connect-
ing shaft (1050).
• Drain the oil into a receptacle.
Please dispose of this oil in the proper manner.
NX600-025-FU_e3.fm / 7.2.17
28 (40) Eccentric screw pump with mounted frequency inverter NX600-025/FU
Dismantling and assembly of the rotating parts
• Using a screwdriver, carefully lever the SM-pin joint seal
(8235) out of the head of rotor (1999) connecting shaft (1050).
Take care not to damage the SM-pin joint seal (8235)!
• Pull apart the rotor (1999), coupling rod (1998), connecting
shaft (1050). Remove the O-rings (8060).
• Push the SM-pin joint seal (8235) towards the head of cou-
pling rod (1998). In the narrow coupling rod section press the
clamp ring (5425) out of the groove of the seal.
• Then slip the SM-pin joint seal (8235) and clamp ring (5425)
off over the head of the coupling rod (1998).
11.2 FITTING THE ROTOR AND COUPLING ROD
For fitting the rotor (1999) with coupling rod (1998), the two pin joints should be as-
sembled as follows:
• Slip the clamp ring (5425) over the head of coupling rod
(1998).
NX600-025-FU_e3.fm / 7.2.17
Eccentric screw pump with mounted frequency inverter NX600-025/FU 29 (40)
Dismantling and assembly of the rotating parts
• Push the SM-pin joint seal (8235) over the head of coupling
rod (1998) towards its narrow section, there squeezing the
clamp ring (5425) into the groove of the SM-pin joint seal
(8235).
• Push the SM-pin joint seal (8235) with the correctly placed
clamp ring (5425) up to the shoulder of coupling rod (1998).
• Slip the circlip (5065) on to the coupling rod (1998).
• Slide the sleeve (5115) on to coupling rod (1998) so the inside
diameter of chamfering (A) is being placed towards the coupling
rod (1998) extension.
• Chamfering (A) will later on ease the installation over the O-
rings (8060). Orient the head of coupling rod (1998) until it is in
vertical position for the bore (B) for the pin (5075).
• Slide the coupling rod (1998) with SM-pin joint seal (8235) into
the bore of rotor (1999), connecting shaft (1050) and insert the
pin (5075) from below and push up to the upper edge of cou-
pling rod (1998). Support the pin (5075) against dropping out.
Slide the SM-pin joint seal (8235) into the rotor (1999), connect-
ing shaft (1050) only from below, and in a slightly slanted posi-
tion
NX600-025-FU_e3.fm / 7.2.17
30 (40) Eccentric screw pump with mounted frequency inverter NX600-025/FU
Dismantling and assembly of the rotating parts
• For lubrication, use an oil can which should be fitted with a thin
plastic hose having an outside diameter of not more than 4 mm.
Insert this hose into the upper oil port opening in the rotor
(1999), connecting shaft (1050).
• Then slide the hose end past the coupling rod (1998) all the
way down to the bottom section of the rotor head (1999) or con-
necting shaft (1050).
Slowly fill with lubricating oil up to the filling port.
• Pull the hose out. Then insert the hose end through the small
gap on the topside of SM-pin joint seal (8235) and guide it down
to the bottom of the hollow space between coupling rod (1998)
and SM-pin joint seal (8235).
Slowly fill with lubricating oil up to the gap.
• Pull the hose out.
• Push the pin (5075) entirely into the bore of head of rotor
(1999) or connecting shaft (1050) and retain in place.
Only now, press the SM-pin joint seal (8235) into the bore of
head of rotor (1999) or connecting shaft (1050) and push up to
the shoulder. In doing so the SM-pin joint seal (8235) should be
slightly bulbous around the outer surface. Wipe off overflow oil.
Use this oil for lubricating the O-rings (8060).
• Wipe away overcrowded oil and put oil on the o-ring (8060).
• Slip the sleeve (5115), with its chamfering (A) forward, on to
the head of rotor (1999), connecting shaft (1050) or adapter
(5055) and push up to the shoulder.
NX600-025-FU_e3.fm / 7.2.17
Eccentric screw pump with mounted frequency inverter NX600-025/FU 31 (40)
Dismantling and assembly of the rotating parts
• Place the circlip (5065) into its groove on the rotor head
(1999), connecting shaft (1050) and carefully snap in place all
around.
• Drive connecting shaft (1050), coupling rod (1998) and rotor
(1999) are now joined by means of the two pin joints.
Pump housing (2010), stator (3005) and end stud (2005) may
now be fitted.
NX600-025-FU_e3.fm / 7.2.17
32 (40) Eccentric screw pump with mounted frequency inverter NX600-025/FU
Removal and fitting of the connecting shaft
12. REMOVAL AND FITTING OF THE CONNECTING SHAFT
REMOVAL:
• Push the circlip (1035) in the direction to the mechanical seal.
• Remove dowel pin (1030).
• Remove mechanical seal housing (7005)and mechanical seal (7010) together
with connection shaft (1050) and splash ring (1035) from lantern (0085) and
drive shaft. The thread of cylindrical head screw (1040) can be used as forcing
screw.
Removal of mechanical seal see description "Removal and Fitting of Mechanical
Seal" in section "Removal and fitting of the mechanical seal" on page 34.
FITTING:
• Apply grease into the bore of the connecting shaft (1050) to avoid fretting corro-
sion.
• Assemble the shaft seal housing (7005) and mechanical seal (7010) together
with connecting shaft (1050) and set ring (1035) with drive stool (0085) and push
connecting shaft (1050) on to the drive shaft.
At this please observe the installation direction of set ring (1035) (please see
mark).
See description "Removal and Fitting of Mechanical Seal" in section "Removal and
fitting of the mechanical seal" on page 34.
• Connect the connecting shaft (1050) and the drive shaft by pin (1030).
Push set ring (1035) on pin (1030).
NX600-025-FU_e3.fm / 7.2.17
Eccentric screw pump with mounted frequency inverter NX600-025/FU 33 (40)
Removal and fitting of the mechanical seal
13. REMOVAL AND FITTING OF THE MECHANICAL SEAL
• Carefully slide out mechanical seal housing (7005) together with the parts of the
mechanical seal contained in it from connecting shaft (1050). (See section "Sec-
tional Drawing mechanical Seal" on page 38)
• Carefully push mechanical seal (7010) stationary seat out of mechanical seal
housing (7005).
Refitting is a simple reversal of the above procedure.
To reduce frictional forces during seal assembly, apply some glycerine to the shaft
and the seal housing in the area of the gaskets.
Ensure that the distribution of pressure is uniform when inserting the pressure
sensitive counter rings. When inserting larger rings, use a suitable mandrel.
Do not allow any foreign bodies to get between the sliding surfaces
• Exactly keep to the seal installation dimensions and ensure that the sealing
faces are correctly pressed together.
• Insert mechanical seal (7010) stationary seat into mechanical seal housing
(7005).
• Insert mechanical seal housing (7005) together with the stationary seat into the
drive stool without the installed connecting shaft (1050).
• If necessary take the installation dimension from the table and add the thickness
S of the set ring (7086) when existing.
• Mark this installation dimension on the connecting shaft (1050).
• Fix the rotating unit of the mechanical seal (7010) on the connecting shaft (1050)
depending on the installation dimension so that the rotating unit of the mechani-
cal seal (7010) or the set ring (7086) is at the mark.
• Insert connecting shaft (1050) with the rotating unit of the mechanical seal
(7010) into drive stool (0085) and install lip seal (7091, if existing.
Push the set ring (1035) on to connecting shaft (1050) and observe at this the
installation direction (see mark).
Push connecting shaft (1050) on to the drive shaft and connect with pin (1030).
Push the set ring (1035) on pin (1030).
NX600-025-FU_e3.fm / 7.2.17
34 (40) Eccentric screw pump with mounted frequency inverter NX600-025/FU
Spare parts and drawings
14. SPARE PARTS AND DRAWINGS
14.1 SPARE PARTS
Position * Quantity Designation Part No.
- 1 Eccentric screw pump NX600-025/FU 013822
Inlet stud and connection box in same
mounting direction
- 1 Eccentric screw pump NX600-025/FU 015236
Inlet stud and connection box in opposite
mounting direction
0085 1 Lantern 001608
0120 4 Spring Washer 000044
0125 4 Hexagonal screw 001609
0140 4 Hexagonal nut 000045
1030 R/S 1 Pin 001610
1035 R/S 1 Splash ring (Thrower) 001611
1050 R/S 1 Connection shaft 001612
1998 R/S 1 Coupling rod 008311
1999 R/S 1 Rotor 008312
2005 1 End stud 001615
2010 1 Housing 008313
2015 1 Screw 000042
2016 1 Screw 000042
2020 R/S 4 Bolt 001617
2025 4 Spring Washer 001035
2030 4 Hexagonal nut 001036
2035 1 Support 005350
3005 R/S 1 Stator 008314
3010 R/S 4 Thru bolt 008315
3015 4 Spring Washer 001035
3020 6 Hexagonal nut 001036
3070 4 Disk (washer) 001094
5065 R/S 2 Circlip 001621
5075 R/S 2 Joint bolt 001622
5115 R/S 1 Sleeve 001623
5425 R/S 2 Clamping ring 001624
7005 1 Mechanical seal housing 001625
NX600-025-FU_e3.fm / 7.2.17
7010 R/S 1 Mechanical seal 001626
Eccentric screw pump with mounted frequency inverter NX600-025/FU 35 (40)
Spare parts and drawings
8010 R/S 1 Gasket/Sealing 000058
8012 R/S 1 Gasket/Sealing 000058
8015 R/S 1 O-ring 001607
8060 R/S 4 O-ring 001627
8235 R/S 2 SM-pin joint seal 001628
Helical gear drive with mounted fre- 014305
9500 1
quency inverter
- 1 Spare part and wearing part set 015997
* R = Recommended spare part / S = included in the set
To avoid mistakes in delivery, please identify the parts by their position num-
ber shown in the spare part list or on the sectional drawing.
For placing a spare parts order, it is absolutely necessary to give the quantity, des-
ignation and part number.
Technical Support [email protected]
Spare Parts [email protected]
NX600-025-FU_e3.fm / 7.2.17
36 (40) Eccentric screw pump with mounted frequency inverter NX600-025/FU
NX600-025-FU_e3.fm / 7.2.17
1050
1030
1998
1999
Spare parts and drawings
14.2 SECTIONAL DRAWING
G
W
9500
0140
0120
0125
3020
0560 (Option)
8210 2030
2115 2025
0085
1035
8015
2115 2020
8210
2016 2010
3070
Eccentric screw pump with mounted frequency inverter NX600-025/FU
8012
3020
2035
8010
3005
2015
3010
3020
3070
2005 3020 3015 2035
37 (40)
Spare parts and drawings
14.3 SECTIONAL DRAWING MECHANICAL SEAL
NX600-025-FU_e3.fm / 7.2.17
38 (40) Eccentric screw pump with mounted frequency inverter NX600-025/FU
Appendix: Drive and Frequency Inverter
15. APPENDIX: DRIVE AND FREQUENCY INVERTER
15.1 OPERATING AND ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS FOR GEAR UNITS AND GEARED MOTORS (B1000)
15.2 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS THREE-PHASE ASYNCHRONOUS MOTORS
(B1091)
15.3 FREQUENCY INVERTER MANUAL SK 200E (BU 0200)
NX600-025-FU_e3.fm / 7.2.17
Eccentric screw pump with mounted frequency inverter NX600-025/FU 39 (40)
Appendix: Drive and Frequency Inverter
NX600-025-FU_e3.fm / 7.2.17
40 (40) Eccentric screw pump with mounted frequency inverter NX600-025/FU
Intelligent Drivesystems, Worldwide Services
GB
B1000
Operating and Assembly Instructions for
Gear Units and Geared Motors DRIVESYSTEMS
145
146
Contents
1. Notes ................................................................................................................................. 4
1.1 General information ........................................................................................................ 4
1.2 Safety and information symbols ...................................................................................... 4
1.3 Correct use...................................................................................................................... 4
1.4 Safety information ........................................................................................................... 5
1.5 Other documents............................................................................................................. 6
1.6 Disposal .......................................................................................................................... 6
2. Description of gear units ................................................................................................ 7
2.1 Type designations and gear unit types ........................................................................... 7
2.2 Name plate ...................................................................................................................... 8
3. Assembly instructions, storage, preparation, installation .......................................... 9
3.1 Storing the gear unit ........................................................................................................ 9
3.2 Long-term storage ........................................................................................................... 9
3.3 Transporting the gear unit ............................................................................................. 10
3.4 Preparing for installation ............................................................................................... 10
3.5 Installing the gear unit ................................................................................................... 11
3.6 Fitting hubs on the gear shafts...................................................................................... 12
3.7 Fitting push-on gear units ............................................................................................. 13
3.8 Fitting shrink discs ........................................................................................................ 15
3.9 Fitting the covers ........................................................................................................... 16
3.10 Fitting a standard motor .............................................................................................. 17
3.11 Retrospective paintwork.............................................................................................. 18
3.12 Fitting the cooling coil to the cooling system .............................................................. 19
4. Commissioning .............................................................................................................. 20
4.1 Checking the oil level .................................................................................................... 20
4.2 Activating the automatic lubricant dispenser ................................................................ 20
4.3 Operation with lubricant cooling .................................................................................... 21
4.4 Running-in time for the worm gear unit ......................................................................... 21
4.5 Checklist........................................................................................................................ 21
5. Service and maintenance.............................................................................................. 22
5.1 Service and maintenance intervals ............................................................................... 22
5.2 Service and maintenance work ..................................................................................... 22
6. Appendix......................................................................................................................... 26
6.1 Versions and maintenance ........................................................................................... 26
6.2 Torque values ............................................................................................................... 38
6.3 Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................ 38
6.4 Lubricants...................................................................................................................... 39
6.5 Lubricant quantities ....................................................................................................... 41
www.nord.com B1000-GB-0713 -3-
147
1. Notes
1. Notes
1.1 General information
Read the Operating Manual carefully prior to performing any work on or putting the gear unit into
operation. Strict compliance with the instructions in this Operating Manual is essential.
Getriebebau NORD accepts no liability for damage to persons, materials or assets as a result of
the non-observance of this Operating Manual, operating errors or incorrect use. General wearing
parts, e.g. radial seals are excluded from the warranty.
If additional components are attached to or installed in the gear unit (e.g. motor, cooling
system, pressure sensor etc.) or components (e.g. cooling system) are supplied with the
order, the operating instructions for these components must be observed.
If geared motors are used, compliance with the Motor Operating Manual is also necessary.
If you do not understand the contents of this Operating Manual or additional operating
instructions, please consult Getriebebau NORD!
1.2 Safety and information symbols
Please always observe the following safety and information symbols!
Danger!
Risk of fatalities and injury
Attention!
Machine may be damaged
Note!
Useful information
1.3 Correct use
These gear units generate a rotational movement and are intended for use in commercial
systems. The gear unit must only be used according to the information in the technical
documentation from Getriebebau NORD.
Danger!
Use in explosion hazard areas is prohibited.
Strict compliance with the technical data on the rating plate is essential.
The documentation must be observed.
Appropriate safety measures must be taken for applications where failure of a gear unit or
geared motor may result in injury.
-4- B1000-GB-0713 www.nord.com
148
1. Notes
1.4 Safety information
All work including transportation, storage, installation, electrical connection, commissioning,
servicing, maintenance and repair must be performed only by qualified specialist personnel.
It is recommended that repairs to NORD Products are carried out by the NORD Service
department.
Danger!
Installation and maintenance work must only be performed when gear units are at a standstill
and have cooled down. The drive must be isolated and secured to prevent accidental start-up.
CAUTION! Depending on the operating conditions, the temperature of the gear unit may
exceed 60°C. Danger of burns! Protection against accidental contact may need to be
installed.
Tighten the drive elements or secure the parallel key before switching on.
Danger!
Only use the eyebolts attached to the gear unit for transport. No additional loads may be
attached. Transportation aids and lifting gear must have an adequate load-bearing capacity.
If geared motors have an additional eyebolt attached to the motor, this must also be used. Avoid
pulling the eyebolts at an angle. The thread of the eyebolt must be fully screwed in.
Observe all safety information, including that provided in the individual sections of this
Operating Manual. All national and other regulations on safety and accident prevention must
also be observed.
Danger!
Serious physical and property damage may result from inappropriate installation, non-
designated use, incorrect operation, non-compliance with safety information, unauthorised
removal of housing components or safety covers and structural modifications to the gear unit.
www.nord.com B1000-GB-0713 -5-
149
1. Notes
1.5 Other documents
Further information may be obtained from the following documents:
- Gear unit catalogues (G1000, G2000, G1011, G1012, G1034, G1035)
- Operating and maintenance instructions for the electric motor
- if applicable, operating instructions for attached or supplied options
1.6 Disposal
Observe the current local regulations. In particular, lubricants must be collected and disposed of
correctly.
Gear unit components: Material:
Toothed wheels, shafts, rolling bearings, parallel keys, Steel
locking rings, …
Gear unit housing, housing components, … Grey cast iron
Light alloy gear unit housing, light alloy gear unit Aluminium
housing components, …
Worm gears, bushes, ... Bronze
Radial seals, sealing caps, rubber components,… Elastomers with steel
Coupling components Plastic with steel
Flat seals Asbestos-free sealing material
Gear oil Additive mineral oil
Synthetic gear oil (rating plate code: CLP PG) Polyglycol-based lubricants
Cooling spiral, embedding material of the cooling spiral, Copper, epoxy, yellow brass
screw fittings
-6- B1000-GB-0713 www.nord.com
150
2. Description of Gear Units
2. Description of gear units
2.1 Type designations and gear unit types
Versions / Options
Helical gear units
SK 11E, SK 21E, SK 31E,SK 41E, SK 51E (single-stage) - Foot mounting with solid shaft
SK 02, SK 12, SK 22, SK 32, SK 42, SK 52, SK 62N A Hollow shaft version
(2-stage)
SK 03, SK 13, SK 23, SK 33N, SK 43, SK 53 (3-stage) V Solid shaft version
SK 62, SK 72, SK 82, SK 92, SK 102 (2-stage) L Solid shaft both sides
SK 63, SK 73, SK 83, SK 93, SK 103 (3-stage) Z Drive flange B14
NORDBLOC helical gear units F Output flange B5
SK 320, SK 172, SK 272, SK 372, SK 472, SK 572, SK 672, X Foot mounting
SK 772, SK 872, SK 972 (2-stage)
XZ Base and output flange B14
SK 273, SK 373, SK 473, SK 573, SK 673, SK 773, SK 873,
SK 973 (3-stage) XF Base and output flange B5
SK 072.1, SK 172.1, SK 372.1, SK 572.1, SK 672.1, SK 772.1 AL Reinforced axial drive bearings
SK 872.1, SK 972.1 (2-stage) 5 Reinforced output shaft
SK 373.1, SK 573.1, SK 673.1, SK 773.1, SK 873.1, (Standard helical gear unit)
SK 973.1 (3-stage)
V Reinforced drive shaft
Standard helical gear units (Standard helical gear unit)
SK 0, SK 01, SK 20, SK 25, SK 30, SK 33 (2-stage) D Torque support
SK 010, SK 200, SK 250, SK 300, SK 330 (3-stage)
K Torque console
Parallel shaft gear units S Shrink disc
SK 0182NB, SK 0282NB, SK 1282, SK 2282, SK 3282,
SK 4282, SK 5282, SK 6282, SK 7282, SK 8282, SK 9282, VS Reinforced shrink disc
SK 10282, SK 11282 (2-stage) EA Hollow shaft with internal spline
SK 1382NB, SK 2382, SK 3382, SK 4382, SK 5382, G Rubber buffer
SK 6382, SK 7382, SK 8382, SK 9382, SK 10382,
VG Reinforced rubber buffer
SK 11382, SK 12382 (3-stage)
R Back stop
Bevel gear units
B Fixing element
SK 92072, SK 92172, SK 92372, SK 92672, SK 92772
SK 92072.1, SK 92172.1, SK92372.1, SK 92672.1, SK 92772.1, H Covering cap as contact guard
SK 93072.1, SK 93172.1, SK 93372.1, SK93672.1, SK 93772.1 H66 Covering cap IP66
(2-stage) VL Reinforced bearings
SK 9012.1, SK 9016.1, SK 9022.1, SK 9032.1,
SK 9042.1, SK 9052.1, SK 9062.1, SK 9072.1, VL2 Agitator design
SK 9082.1, SK 9086.1, SK 9092.1, SK 9096.1 (3-stage) VL3 Drywell agitator design
SK 9013.1, SK 9017.1, SK 9023.1, SK 9033.1, SK 9043.1, IEC Standard motor mounting
SK 9053.1 (4-stage)
NEMA Standard motor mounting
Contrate worm gear unit W With free drive shaft
SK 02040, SK 02050, SK 12063, SK 12080,
VI Viton radial seals
SK 32100,SK 42125 (2-stage)
SK 13050, SK 13063, SK 13080, SK 33100, SK 43125 OA Oil expansion vessel
(3-stage) OT Oil level tank
MINIBLOC worm gear units SO1 Synthetic oil ISO VG 220
SK1 S32, SK1 S40, SK 1S50, SK 1S63, SK 1SU... CC Casing cover with cooling spiral
SK 1SM31, SK 1SM40, SK 1SM50, SK 1SM63 (single-stage) DR Spring Loaded Breather
SK 2S32NB, SK 2S40NB, SK 2S50NB, SK 2S63NB,
SK 2SU…, H10 Modular contrate pre-stage
SK 2SM40, SK 2SM50, SK 2SM63 (2-stage) /31 Worm pre-stage
UNIVERSAL worm gear units /40 Worm pre-stage
SK 1SI31, SK 1SI40, SK 1SI50, SK 1SI63, SK 1SI75,
SK 1SIS31,…, SK 1SIS75,
SK 1SID31,…, SK 1SID63,
SK 1SMI31,…, SK 1SMI75,
SK 1SMID31,…, SK 1SMID63,
SK 1SIS-D31,…, SK 1SIS-D63 (single-stage),
SK 2SMID40, SK2SMID50, SK2SMID63,
SK 2SID40,…, SK 2SID63 (2-stage)
www.nord.com B1000-GB-0713 -7-
151
2. Description of Gear Units
Double gear units consist of two single gear units. They are to be treated as per the instructions in
this Manual, i.e. as two individual gear units. Type designation of double gear units: e.g. SK 73/22
(consisting of single gears SK 73 and SK 22)
2.2 Name plate
Figure 2-1: Name plate (example)
Explanation of the Name Plate
1 Matrix – Barcode
2 NORD gear unit type
3 Operating mode
4 Year of manufacture
5 Serial number
6 Rated torque of gear unit output shaft
7 Drive power
8 Weight according to ordered version
9 Overall gear unit ratio
10 Installation orientation
11 Rated speed of gear unit output shaft
12 Lubricant type, viscosity and quantity
13 Customer’s part number
14 Operating factor
-8- B1000-GB-0713 www.nord.com
152
3. Assembly instructions, storage,
preparation, installation
3. Assembly instructions, storage, preparation, installation
Please observe all of the general safety information in Section 1.4, 1.3 and in the individual
sections.
3.1 Storing the gear unit
For short-term storage before commissioning, please observe the following:
x Store in the fitting position (see Section 6.1) and secure gear units against falling
x Lightly grease bare metal housing surfaces and shafts
x Store in dry rooms
x Temperature must not fluctuate beyond the range of –5 oC to +50 oC
x Relative humidity less than 60%
x No direct exposure to sunlight or UV light
x No aggressive, corrosive substances (contaminated air, ozone, gases, solvents, acids,
alkalis, salts, radioactivity etc.) in the immediate vicinity
x No vibration or oscillation
3.2 Long-term storage
Note!
For storage or standstill periods in excess of 9 months, Getriebebau NORD recommends the
long-term storage option. With the long-term storage option and the use of the measures
listed below, storage for up to 2 years is possible. As the actual influences on the unit greatly
depend on the local conditions, these times should only be regarded as guide values.
Conditions of the gear unit and storage area for long-term storage prior to
commissioning:
x Store in the fitting position (see Section 6.1) and secure gear units against falling
x Transportation damage to the external paint must be repaired. Check that a suitable rust
inhibitor is applied to the flange bearing surfaces. If necessary apply a suitable rust inhibitor
to the surfaces.
x Gear units with the long-term storage option are completely filled with lubricant or have VCI
corrosion protection agents added to the gear oil. (See label on gear unit)
x The sealing band in the vent plug must not be removed during storage. The gear unit must
remain sealed tight.
x Store in a dry place.
x In tropical regions, the drive unit must be protected against damage by insects
x Temperature must not fluctuate beyond the range of –5 oC to +40 oC
x Relative humidity less than 60%
x No direct exposure to sunlight or UV light
x No aggressive, corrosive substances (contaminated air, ozone, gases, solvents, acids,
alkalis, salts, radioactivity etc.) in the immediate vicinity
x No vibration or oscillation
Measures during storage or standstill periods
x If the relative humidity is <50% the gear unit can be stored for up to 3 years.
Measures before commissioning
x If the storage or standstill period exceeds 2 years or the temperature during short-term
storage greatly deviates from the standard range, the lubricant in the gear unit must be
replaced before commissioning.
x If the gear unit is completely filled, the oil level must be reduced before commissioning.
www.nord.com B1000-GB-0713 -9-
153
3. Assembly instructions, storage,
preparation, installation
3.3 Transporting the gear unit
Danger!
To prevent injury, the danger area must be generously cordoned off. Standing under the
gear unit during transport is extremely dangerous.
Attention!
Avoid damage to the gear unit. Impacts to the free ends of the shafts may cause internal
damage to the gear unit.
Use adequately dimensioned and suitable means of transportation. Lifting tackle must be
designed for the weight of the gear unit. The weight of the gear unit can be obtained from the
dispatch documents.
3.4 Preparing for installation
The drive unit must be inspected and may only be installed if no transportation damage or leaks
are visible. In particular the radial seals and the sealing caps must be inspected for damage.
All bare metal surfaces and shafts of the gear unit are protected against corrosion with oil,
grease or corrosion protection agents before shipping.
Thoroughly remove all oil, grease or corrosion protection agents and any dirt from the shafts and
flange surfaces before assembly.
In applications where an incorrect rotational direction may result in damage or potential risk, the
correct rotational direction of the drive shaft is to be established by test running the drive when
uncoupled and guaranteeing such for subsequent operation.
Gears with integrated return stops are marked with arrows on the driven/driving sides. The
arrows point in the rotation direction of the gear unit. It must be ensured, when connecting the
motor and during motor control, that the gear unit can only operate in the rotation direction, e.g.
by means of a rotary field test. (For further details, please refer to Catalogue G1000 and
WN 0-000 40)
Attention!
With gear units with an integrated back stop, switching the drive motor to the blocked rotation
direction, i.e. incorrect rotation direction, can lead to gear damage.
Ensure that no aggressive or corrosive substances are present in the area surrounding the
installation site or are subsequently expected during operation, which attack metal, lubricants or
elastomers. In case of doubt, please contact Getriebebau NORD and take the recommended
action.
Oil expansion tanks (Option OA) must be fitted in accordance with works standard WN 0-530 04.
For gear units with an M10x1 vent plug, works standard WN 0-52135 must be observed.
Oil expansion tanks (Option OT) must be fitted in accordance with works standard WN 0-521 30.
If venting of the gear unit is provided, the vent or the pressure vent must be activated before
commissioning. To activate, remove the transport securing devices (sealing cord). Position of the
vent plug: see Section 6.1.
-10- B1000-GB-0713 www.nord.com
154
3. Assembly instructions, storage,
preparation, installation
Figure 3-1: Activating the vent plug
Special pressure vents are supplied as loose parts. Before commissioning, the vent plug must
be replace with the pressure vent which is supplied as a loose part. This is achieved by screwing
out the vent fitting and replacing it with the pressure vent and seal (refer to Section 6.2 for torque
values). Double gear units consist of two single units and are equipped with 2 oil chambers and
2 pressure vents.
Figure 3-2: Removing vent plug and fitting the pressure vent
3.5 Installing the gear unit
The eyebolts screwed into the gear units must be used during installation. The safety notes in
Section 1.4 must be observed.
The base and/or flange to which the gear unit is fitted should be vibration-free, torsionally strong
and flat. The smoothness of the mating surface on the base or flange must be according to
tolerance clad K of DIN ISO 2768-2. All contamination to the bolting surfaces of gear unit and
base and/or flange must be thoroughly removed.
The gear unit must be precisely aligned with the drive shaft of the machine in order to prevent
additional forces from being imposed on the gear unit due to tension.
Welding of the gear unit is prohibited. The gear unit must not be used as the earth connection for
welding work, as this may cause damage to the bearings and gear wheels.
The gear unit must be installed in the correct configuration (see Section 6.1) (UNIVERSAL
gear unit types SI and SMI are independent of the configuration). Changes to the installation
position after delivery require adjustment of the quantity of oil, and often other measures such as
e.g. the installation of encapsulated roller bearings. Damage may result if the stated
installation position is not observed.
All gear unit feet and/or all flange bolts on each side must be used. Bolts must have a minimum
quality of 8.8. The bolts must be tightened to the correct torques (refer to Section 6.2 for torque
values). Tension-free bolting must be ensured, particularly for gear units with a foot and flange.
www.nord.com B1000-GB-0713 -11-
155
3. Assembly instructions, storage,
preparation, installation
Danger!
To ensure that the gearbox does not get too warm and to avoid injury to persons,
observe the following during installation:
x The surfaces of gear units or geared motors may become hot during or shortly after
operation. Attention: danger of burns!! Protection against accidental contact may need to
be installed.
x With geared motors, the cooling air of the motor fan must be able to flow unobstructed
onto the gear unit.
3.6 Fitting hubs on the gear shafts
Attention!
Do not subject the gear unit to harmful axial forces when fitting the hubs.
Drive and driven elements, e.g. coupling and chain-wheel hubs must be mounted onto the drive
and driven shaft of the gear unit using suitable pullers that will not apply damaging axial forces
onto the gear unit. In particular, do not hit the hubs with a hammer.
Use the end thread of the shafts for pulling. Fitting can be aided by coating the hub with lubricant
or heating it up to approx. 100oC beforehand.
Figure 3-3: Example of a simple pulling device
Danger!
Drive and driven elements, such as belt drives, chain drives and couplings must be fitted
with contact protection.
Driven elements may only subject the drive units to the maximum radial force FR and axial
force FA as specified in the catalogue. Observe the correct tension, particularly on belts and
chains. Additional loads due to unbalanced hubs are not permitted. The radial force must be
applied to the gear unit as closely as possible.
-12- B1000-GB-0713 www.nord.com
156
3. Assembly instructions, storage,
preparation, installation
3.7 Fitting push-on gear units
Attention!
The bearings, gear wheels, shafts and housing may be damaged by incorrect fitting.
The push-on gear unit must be fitted onto the shaft using a suitable puller, which will not exert
damaging axial forces on the gear unit. In particular, do not hit the gear unit with a hammer.
Assembly and subsequent dismantling is aided by applying an anti-corrosive lubricant to the
shaft before fitting (e.g. Nord Anti-Corrosion Art.No. 089 00099). Excess grease or anti-corrosion
agent may escape after assembly and may drip off. Clean these points on the output shaft after
a running-in time of approx. 24 hours. This escape of grease is not due to a leak in the gear unit.
Figure 3-4: Applying lubricant to the shaft and the hub
Note!
The gear unit can be fitted to shafts with and without a shoulder using the fastening element
(Option B). Tighten the bolt of the fastening element to the correct torque. (See Chapter 6.2 for
torque values) For gear units with option H66, the factory-fitted closing cap must be removed
before assembly.
For shaft mounted gear units with option H66 and fastening element (Option B) the pressed-in
closing cap must be pushed out before fitting the gear unit. The pressed-in closing cap may be
destroyed during dismantling. As standard a second closing cap is supplied as a loose spare part.
After fitting the gear unit, fit the new / new condition closing cap as described in Section 3.11.
Figure 3-5: Removing the factory-fitted closing cap
www.nord.com B1000-GB-0713 -13-
157
3. Assembly instructions, storage,
preparation, installation
Figure 3-6: Gear unit mounted to shaft with a shoulder using the fastening element
Figure 3-7: Gear unit mounted to shaft without a shoulder using the fastening element
A gear unit can be dismantled from a shaft with shoulder using the following device, for example.
Figure 3-8: Dismantling using dismantling device
When mounting push-on gears with torque supports, the support must not be distorted. Tension-
free mounting is aided by the rubber buffer (Option G and/or VG).
Figure 3-9: Mounting the rubber buffer (Option G and/or VG) on parallel shaft gear units
To fit the rubber buffer, tighten the screw fastening until there is no play between the contact
surfaces when there is no load. Then turn the fastening nut (only applies for screw fastenings
with adjusting threads) half a turn in order to pre-tension the rubber buffer. Greater pre-tension is
not permissible. Secure the screw fastening from coming loose, e.g. with Loctite 242 or a second
nut.
-14- B1000-GB-0713 www.nord.com
158
3. Assembly instructions, storage,
preparation, installation
Always support torque support on both sides!
Figure 3-10: Attaching the torque support on bevel gear and worm gear units
Tighten the bolts on the torque support to the correct torque (see Section 6.2 for torque values)
and secure to prevent loosening (e.g. Loctite 242, Loxeal 54-03).
3.8 Fitting shrink discs
Shrink disc type, Mat. No.
Tensioning flanges Solid shaft of machine
and torque details for tensioning screws
Shaft and and hollow shaft bore
GREASE FREE!
Tensioning screws DIN 931 (933) -10.9
The shrink discs are suplied by the Hollow shaft of gear unit
manufacturer ready for fitting. They must not
be dismantled prior to fitting.
Double half-slotted inner ring
Figure 3-11: Hollow shaft with shrink disc
Attention!
Do not tighten bolts if the solid shaft is not inserted!
Assembly sequence:
1. Remove any transport securing devices.
2. Loosen but do not remove tightening bolt and tighten gently by hand until there is no play
between the flanges and the inner ring.
www.nord.com B1000-GB-0713 -15-
159
3. Assembly instructions, storage,
preparation, installation
3. Slide the shrink disc onto the hollow shaft until the outer clamping flange is flush with the
hollow shaft. The shrink disc is easier to slide on if the bore of the inner ring is lightly
greased.
4. Prior to mounting, grease the solid shaft only in the area which will later come into contact
with the bronze bush in the hollow shaft of the gear unit. Do not grease the bronze bush, in
order to prevent grease penetrating the area around the shrink connection.
5. The hollow shaft of the gear unit must be completely de-greased and c o m p l e t e l y
free of grease.
6. In the area of the shrink connection the solid shaft of the machine must be degreased and
completely free of grease.
7. Insert the solid shaft of the machine into the hollow shaft so as to completely fill the area
around the shrink connection.
8. Position the clamping flange by gently tightening the bolts.
9. Tighten the bolts successively in a clockwise direction by several turns – not crosswise –
with approx. ¼ rotation per turn. Tighten the bolts with a torque wrench to the torque
indicated on the shrink disc.
10. When the tensioning bolts have been tightened, there must be an even gap between the
clamping flanges. If this is not the case, the gear unit must be dismantled and the shrink disc
connection checked for correct fit.
Danger!
Risk of injury from incorrect mounting and dismantling of the shrink disc.
Dismantling sequence:
1. Loosen the bolts successively in a clockwise direction by several turns with approx. ¼
rotation per turn. Do not remove the bolts from their thread.
2. Loosen the clamping flanges from the cone of the inner ring.
3. Remove the gear unit from the solid shaft of the machine.
3.9 Fitting the covers
Danger!
Shrink discs and exposed rotating shaft ends require contact guards in order to prevent
injuries. A cover (Option H and Option H66) can be used as a guard. If this does not achieve
sufficient protection against contact according to the required protection type, the machinery
and plant constructor must ensure this be means of special attached components.
All fixing screws must be used and tightened to the correct torque. (See Section 6.2 for torque
values) For covers with option H66, press in the new / new condition closing cap by tapping it
lightly with a hammer.
-16- B1000-GB-0713 www.nord.com
160
3. Assembly instructions, storage,
preparation, installation
Figure 3-12: Fitting the covers, Option SH, Option H, and Option H66
3.10 Fitting a standard motor
The maximum permitted motor weights indicated in the table below must not be exceeded when
attaching the motor to an IEC- / NEMA adapter
Maximum permitted motor weights
IEC motor size 63 71 80 90 100 112 132 160 180 200 225 250 280 315
NEMA Motor size 56C 143T 145T 182T 184T 210T 250T 280T 324T 326T 365T
Max. motor weight [kg] 25 30 40 50 60 80 100 200 250 350 500 700 1000 1500
Assembly procedure to attach a standard motor to the IEC adapter (Option IEC)/NEMA adapter
1. Clean motor shaft and flange surfaces of motor and IEC /NEMA adapter and check for
damage. Mounting dimensions and tolerances of the motor must conform to DIN EN
50347/NEMA MG1 Part 4.
2. Push the coupling sleeve onto the motor shaft so that the motor parallel key engages into
the groove in the sleeve on tightening.
3. Tighten the coupling sleeve on the motor shaft in accordance with the motor manufacturer’s
instructions until it touches the collar. With motor sizes 90, 160, 180 and 225, any spacer
bushes must be positioned between the coupling sleeve and the collar. With standard helical
gear units, dimension B between the coupling sleeve and the collar must be observed (see
Figure 3-13). Certain NEMA adapters require the adjustment of the coupling in accordance
with the specifications indicated on the adhesive plate.
4. If the coupling half contains a threaded pin, the coupling must be secured axially on the
shaft. The threaded pin must be coated prior to use with a securing lubricant e.g. Loctite
242, Loxeal 54-03 and tightened to the correct torque. (See Chapter 6.2 for torque values)
5. Sealing of the flange surfaces of the motor and the IEC /NEMA adapter is recommended if
the motor is installed outdoors or in a humid environment. The flange surfaces of motor and
adapter must be completely coated with surface sealant Loctite 574 or Loxeal 58-14 prior to
mounting so that the flange seals after mounting.
6. Mount the motor to the IEC /NEMA adapter, do not forget to fit the gear rim or the sleeve. (See
Figure 3-13)
7. Tighten the IEC /NEMA adapter bolts to the correct torque. (See Chapter 6.2 for torque
values)
www.nord.com B1000-GB-0713 -17-
161
3. Assembly instructions, storage,
preparation, installation
Figure 3-13: Fitting the coupling onto the motor shaft - various types of coupling
I Gear coupling, one-part
II Gear coupling, two-part
III Gear coupling, two-part with spacer bush
IV Claw coupling, two-part
V Claw coupling, two-part, observe dimension B:
Standard helical gear unit: SK0, SK01, SK20, SK25, SK30, SK33 (2-stage)
SK010, SK200, SK250, SK300, SK330 (3-stage)
IEC size 63 IEC size 71
Dimension B (Fig. 3-13V) B = 4.5mm B = 11.5 mm
VI Claw coupling, two-part with spacer bush
3.11 Retrospective paintwork
Attention!
For retrospective painting of the gear unit, the radial seals, rubber elements, pressure venting
valves, hoses, type plates, adhesive labels and motor coupling components must not come
into contact with paints, lacquers or solvents, as otherwise components may be damaged or
made illegible.
-18- B1000-GB-0713 www.nord.com
162
3. Assembly instructions, storage,
preparation, installation
3.12 Fitting the cooling coil to the cooling system
Cutting ring screw threads (see Item 1, Figs. 3-14) are located at the casing cover for the
connection of a pipe with an external diameter of 10 mm according to DIN 2353. Remove the
drain plug from the screw neck prior to assembly to avoid any contamination of the
cooling system. The screw necks should be connected with the coolant circuit, which must be
provided by the operator. The flow direction of the coolant is irrelevant.
Make sure not to twist the screw necks during or after assembly as the cooling coil may be
damaged (see Item 3, Fig. 3-14). You must ensure that no external forces act on the cooling coil.
1 3
Figure 3-14: Cooling cover
Danger!
The pressure released from the cooling circuit before carrying out any work on the gear
unit.
www.nord.com B1000-GB-0713 -19-
163
4. Commissioning
4. Commissioning
4.1 Checking the oil level
The oil level must be checked prior to commissioning. See Section 5.2.
4.2 Activating the automatic lubricant dispenser
Some gear unit types with standard motor (Option IEC/NEMA) have an automatic lubricant
dispenser for the rolling bearings. This dispenser must be activated prior to commissioning. The
cartridge case cover has a red information sign for the activation of the lubricant dispenser.
Activating the Automatic Lubricant Dispenser:
1. Loosen and remove cylinder bolts M8x16 (1)
2. Lift off cartridge case cover (2)
3. Insert activation screw (3) into the lubricant dispenser (5) until the lug (4) breaks off at
the defined fracture point
4. Refit cartridge case cover (2) and fasten using cylinder bolt (1). (See Chapter 6.2 for
torque values)
5. Mark activation date on the adhesive plate (6) indicating month/year
Attention!
Screw in the activation screw until the lug breaks off
before commissioning the gear unit.
Dispensing time: 12 Months
Month Activation date Year
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 06 07 08 09 10
11 12 13 14 15
Figure 4-1: Activating the automatic lubricant dispenser with standard motor mounting
-20- B1000-GB-0713 www.nord.com
164
4. Commissioning
4.3 Operation with lubricant cooling
Water cooling
Caution!
The drive may only be commissioned after the cooling spiral has been connected to the
cooling circuit, and the cooling circuit has been put into operation.
The coolant must have a similar thermal capacity as water (specific thermal capacity at 20° C
c=4.18 kJ/kgK). Industrial water without any air bubbles or sediments is recommended as a
coolant. The water hardness must be between 1° dH and 15° d H, and the pH value must be
between pH 7.4 and pH 9.5. No aggressive liquids should be added to the coolant!
The coolant pressure must not exceed 8 bar. The required quantity of coolant is 10
litres/minute, and the coolant inlet temperature should not exceed 40° C; we recommend
10° C.
We also recommend fitting a pressure reducer at the coolant inlet to avoid any damage due to
excessive pressure.
If there is a danger of frost the operator should add a suitable anti-freeze solution to the cooling
water.
The temperature of the cooling water and the cooling water flow rate must be supervised
and ensured by the operator.
Air/Oil cooler
This version and all important data concerning the air/oil cooler can be obtained from Catalogue
G1000, or contact the manufacturer of the cooling unit.
4.4 Running-in time for the worm gear unit
Note!
In order to achieve maximum efficiency of the worm gear unit, the gear unit must be subjected
to a running-in period of approx. 25 h – 48 h under maximum load.
There may be a reduction in efficiency before the running-in period is complete.
4.5 Checklist
Checklist
Information –
Object of the check Checked on: see Section
Is the vent plug activated or the pressure vent screwed in? Sec. 3.4
Does the required configuration conform with the actual installation? Sec. 6.1
Are the external gear shaft forces within permitted limits (chain tension)? Sec. 3.6
Is the torque support correctly fitted? Sec. 3.7
Are contact guards fitted to rotating components? Sec. 3.9
Is the automatic lubricant dispenser activated? Sec. 4.2
Is the cooling cover connected to the cooling circuit? Sec. 3.12/4.3
www.nord.com B1000-GB-0713 -21-
165
5. Service and Maintenance
5. Service and maintenance
5.1 Service and maintenance intervals
Information –
Service and Maintenance Intervals Service and Maintenance Work see Section
At least every six months - Visual inspection 5.2
- Check for running noises 5.2
- Check oil level 5.2
- Re-grease 5.2
(applicable only to free drive shaft / Option W
and on agitator bearings / Option VL2 / VL3)
- Replace automatic lubricator (for operating 5.2
times < 8 h/day: a replacement interval for the
lubricant dispenser of 1 year is permissible)
(only with IEC/NEMA standard motors)
For operating temperatures up to 80° C - Change the oil 5.2
Every 10000 operating hours - Clean or replace the vent plug. 5.2
at least every 2 years
(The interval is double this if the unit is
filled with synthetic products)
For higher temperatures or extreme
operating conditions (high humidity,
aggressive environments and large
temperature fluctuations) the oil change
intervals must be halved.
Every 25000 operating hours, - Replace shaft sealing rings if worn 5.2
at least every 5 years - Re-lubrication of the bearings in the gear unit 5.2
At least every 10 years - General overhaul 5.2
5.2 Service and maintenance work
Servicing and maintenance work must only be performed by qualified specialist
personnel.
Installation and maintenance work must only be performed when gear units are at a
standstill. The drive must be isolated and secured to prevent accidental start-up.
Visual inspection
The gear unit must be checked for leaks. In addition, the gear unit must be inspected for external
damage and cracks in the hoses, hose connections and rubber buffers. Have the gear unit
repaired in case of leaks, e.g. dripping gear oil or cooling water, damage or cracks. Please contact
the NORD service department.
Note!
Shaft sealing rings are rubbing seals and have sealing lips made from an elastomer
material. These sealing lips are lubricated with a special grease at the factory. This
reduces the wear due to their function and ensures a long service life. An oil film in the
region of the rubbing sealing lip is therefore normal and is not due to leakage.
-22- B1000-GB-0713 www.nord.com
166
5. Service and Maintenance
Check for running noises
If the gear unit produces unusual running noises and/or vibrations, this could indicate damage to
the gear unit In this case the gear should be shut down and a general overhaul carried out.
Check the oil level
Section 6.1 describes the versions and the corresponding oil level screws. With double gear
units, the oil level must be checked on both units. The pressure vent must be at the position
marked in Section 6.1.
The oil level does not need to be checked on gear units without oil level screw (see Section 6.1).
Gear unit types that are not supplied full of oil must be filled before the oil level is checked. (see
“Changing the oil”)
Checking the oil level:
1. The oil level may only be checked when the gear unit is at a standstill and has cooled
down. The gear unit must be secured to prevent accidental switch-on.
2. The oil level screw corresponding to the version must be screwed out. (See Section 6.1)
Note!
At the first oil level check a small amount of oil may escape, as the oil level may be below the
lower edge of the oil level hole.
3. Gear units with oil level screw: The maximum oil level is the lower edge of the oil level hole.
The minimum oil level is 4 mm below the oil level hole. If the oil level is too low, this must be
corrected using the correct type of oil. An oil level glass is available instead of the oil level
screw
4. Gear units with an oil level vessel: The oil level must be checked in the oil level vessel with
the aid of the dipstick plug (thread G1 1/4). The oil level must be between the upper and
lower mark when the dipstick is completely screwed in (see Fig. 5-2). The oil level must be
corrected with the correct type of oil if necessary. These gearboxes may only be operated in
the configuration stated in Section 6.1.
5. The oil level screw or the cap screw with dipstick and all other loosened screws must be
correctly re-tightened.
Figure 5-2: Check the oil level with a dipstick
www.nord.com B1000-GB-0713 -23-
167
5. Service and Maintenance
Regreasing
Some gear unit designs (free drive shaft, Option W, agitator designs VL2 and VL3) are equipped
with a regreasing device.
For agitator versions VL2 and VL3, the vent screw located opposite to the grease nipple must be
unscrewed before regreasing. Grease should be injected until a quantity of 20-25g escapes from
the vent hole. After this, the vent plug must be reinserted and tightened.
For Option W and some IEC adapters, the outer roller bearing must be regreased with approx.
20-25g of grease via the grease nipple provided
Recommended grease: Petamo GHY 133N (see Section 6.4: Klüber Lubrication).
Replacing the automatic lubricant dispenser
Screw-off the cartridge case cover (2), (see Fig. 4-1). The lubrication dispenser (5) is screwed
out and replaced with a new component (Part No. 283 0100). Then activate (see Chapter 4.2)!
Changing the oil
The figures in Section 6.1 show the oil drain screw, the oil level screw and the pressure vent
screw for various designs.
Sequence:
1. Place the drip tray below the oil drain screw or the oil drain cock
2. Completely remove oil level screw, screwed sealing plug with dipstick if an oil level tank
is being used and oil drain screw.
Danger!
Warning: Hot oil!
3. Drain all the oil from the gear unit.
4. If the screw lock coating of the oil drain screw or oil level screw is damaged in the
thread, a new oil level screw must be used or the thread cleaned and coated with
securing lubricant, e.g. Loctite 242, Loxeal 54-03 prior to inserting. Check the sealing
ring for damage. Replace with a new sealing ring in case of damage.
5. Support the seal ring, insert the oil drain screw into the hole and tighten to the correct
torque! (See Section 6.2 for torque values)
6. Using a suitable filling device, refill with oil of the same type through the oil level hole
until oil emerges from the oil level hole. (The oil can also be filled through the pressure
vent screw or a sealing plug located higher than the oil level). If an oil level vessel is
used, fill the oil through the upper inlet (thread G1¼) until the oil level is set as described
in Section 5.2.
7. Wait at least 15 minutes, or at least 30 minutes if an oil level tank is used, and then
check the oil level. Proceed as described in Section 5.2.
Note!
The oil does not need to be changed on gear units without oil level screw (see Section 6.1).
These gear units are lubricated for life.
Standard helical gear units have no oil level screw. Here, the oil is topped up through the
pressure vent bolt using the quantities listed in the table in Section 6.5.
-24- B1000-GB-0713 www.nord.com
168
5. Service and Maintenance
Cleaning or replacing the vent plug
Unscrew the vent screw and thoroughly clean it (e.g. with compressed air) and fit the vent screw
in the same place, If necessary, use a new vent screw with a new sealing ring.
Replacing the shaft sealing ring
Shaft sealing rings are rubbing seals made from an elastomer material and according to their
principle are subject to natural wear. The wearing life of shaft sealing rings depends on many
factors and cannot be calculated in advance. Once the shaft sealing ring has reached the end of
its service life, the oil film in the region of the sealing lip increases and a measurable leakage
with dripping oil occurs. The shaft sealing ring must then be replaced. To reduce the risk of
leaks due to worn shaft sealing rings we recommend that as a precaution, the shaft sealing rings
are replaced after every 25,000 operating hours or every 5 years. The space between the
sealing lip and the protective lip must be filled approximately 50% with grease on fitting
(recommended grease: PETAMO GHY 133N). Take care that after fitting, the new shaft sealing
ring does not run in the old wear track.
Re-lubricating bearings
For bearings which are not oil-lubricated and whose holes are completely above the oil level,
replace the roller bearing grease (recommended grease: PETAMO GHY 133N). Please contact
the NORD service department.
General overhaul
The gear units must be completely dismantled The following work must be carried out:
x Clean all gear unit components
x Examine all gear unit components for damage
x All damaged components must be replaced
x All roller bearings must be replaced
x Replace back stops if fitted
x Replace all seals, radial seals and Nilos rings
x Replace plastic and elastomer components of the motor coupling
The general overhaul must be carried out by qualified personnel in a specialist workshop with
appropriate equipment in observance of national regulations and laws. We recommend that the
general overhaul is carried out by the NORD service department.
www.nord.com B1000-GB-0713 -25-
169
6. Appendix
6. Appendix
6.1 Versions and maintenance
Explanation of symbols for the following version illustrations:
Vent
Oil level
Oil drain
Note!
SK 320, SK 172, SK 272, SK 372K, SK 273 and SK373 as well as SK 01282 NB, SK 0282
NB, SK 1382 NB and UNIVERSAL / Minibloc gear units are lubricated for life. These gear
units do not have an oil filler screw.
UNIVERSAL / MiniBloc worm gear units
NORD UNIVERSAL / MiniBloc worm gear units are suitable for all installation positions. They
have an oil filler which is independent of the the version.
As an option, types SI and SMI can be equipped with a vent screw. Gear units with vents must
be installed in the stated position (see section 6.5)
Types SI, SMI, S, SM and SU as 2-stage gear unit types and types SI, SMI as worm gear units
for direct motor mounting have an oil filler which depends on the version and must be installed in
the stated position.
-26- B1000-GB-0713 www.nord.com
170
6. Appendix
Parallel shaft gear units with oil level vessel
The following applies for SK 9282, SK 9382, SK 10282, SK 10382, SK 11282, SK 11382 parallel
gear units and SK 12382 in the M4 configuration with oil level vessels:
Figure 6-1: Oil level check with oil level tank
www.nord.com B1000-GB-0713 -27-
171
M1
M1
B3+B5
B3+B5
M2 M2
V6+V3 M6 V6+V3
M6
B7+B5III
B7+B5III
SK 11E SK 02
SK 21E SK 12
SK 31E SK 22
SK 41E SK 32
SK 51E SK 42
SK 52
SK 62N
M5 M5
B6+B5II B6+B5II
M4 M4
V5+V1 V5+V1
M3
M3
B8+B5I
B8+B5I
M1
M1 B3+B5
B3+B5 *
M6 M2
B7+B5III V6+V3
M6 M2
B7+B5III V6+V3
SK 03 SK 62
SK 13 SK 72
SK 23 SK 82
SK 33N SK 92
SK 43 SK 102
SK 53 SK 63*
SK 73*
SK 83*
SK 93* *
SK 103*
M5
M5
M4 B6+B5II
B6+B5II M4
V5+V1
V5+V1
M3 M3
B8+B5I B8+B5I
-28- B1000-0713 www.nord.com
172
M1
B3+B5 M1
*
M2
M6 V3+V6
B7+B5III M6 M2
SK 472 SK 372.1
SK 572 SK 572.1
SK 672 SK 672.1
SK 772 SK 373.1
SK 872 SK 573.1
SK 972 SK 673.1
SK 473
SK 573
SK 673
SK 773
SK 873*
SK 973*
M4
M4 M5
M5
V1+V5 B6+B5II
M3
M3
B8+B5I
M1
M1
*
M6
M2
M2
*
SK 372.1F SK 772.1
SK 572.1F SK 872.1
SK 672.1F SK 972.1
SK 373.1F SK 773.1*
SK 573.1F M6 SK 873.1*
SK 673.1F SK 973.1*
M4 M5
*
M5
M4
M3 M3
www.nord.com B1000-0713 -29-
173
M1
*
M2
*
SK 772.1F
SK 872.1F
SK 972.1F
SK 773.1F*
M6 SK 873.1F*
SK 973.1F*
M4 M5
M3
M1 M1
M2
M6 M6
M2
SK 072.1 SK 072.1 F
SK 172.1 SK 172.1 F
M4
M4
M5 M5
M3
M4 M3
Ö 43
-30- B1000-0713 www.nord.com
174
M1
B3+B5
M2
V6+V3
SK 0
SK 01
SK 20
SK 25
M6 SK 30
B7+B5III SK 33
M4 M5
V1+V5 B6+B5II
M3
B8+B5I
M1
B3+B5
M2
V6+V3
SK 010
SK 200
SK 250
SK 300
M6 SK 330
B7+B5III
M5
M4 B6+B5II
V1+V5
M3
B8+B5I
Ö 44
www.nord.com B1000-0713 -31-
175
M1 M1
H1 H1
M6 M2 M6 M2
H3 H6 H3 H6
SK 1282 SK 2382
SK 2282 SK 3382
SK 3282 SK 4382
SK 4282 SK 5382
SK 5282
SK 0182NB
SK 0282NB
SK 1382NB*
* Ö 27
M5
M4 M5 M4 H4
H5 H4 H5
M3
M3 H2
H2
M1
H1
M2
M6 H6
H3
SK 6282*
SK 7282*
SK 8282*
SK 9282*
SK 10282*
SK 11282*
SK 6382
SK 7382
SK 8382 *
SK 9382
SK 10382
SK 11382
SK 12382
M5
M4 H4
H5
M3
H2
-32- B1000-0713 www.nord.com
176
M1 M1
B3 B3
M6 M2
M2
V6 B6
B6 M6
V6
SK 92172
SK 92372 SK 92072
SK 92672
SK 92772
M4
M4
B3I
B3I
M5 M5
V5 V5
M3
B8
M3
B8
M1
B3
M1
B3
M6
M2
V6
B6 M2
M6 B6
V6
SK 9012.1
SK 9016.1 SK 9013.1
SK 9022.1 SK 9017.1
M4 SK 9032.1 SK 9023.1
SK 9042.1 SK 9033.1
B3I
SK 9052.1 SK 9043.1
M4 SK 9053.1
SK 9062.1 B3I
SK 9072.1
SK 9082.1
SK 9086.1
SK 9092.1
SK 9096.1
M5
V5 M5
V5
M3
M3
B8
B8
www.nord.com B1000-0713 -33-
177
M1
M1
H1+B5I
H1+B5I
M6 M2 M2
H6+V3 H4+B5 M6
H4+B5
H6+V3
SK 92172
SK 92372 SK 92072
SK 92672
SK 92772
M4 M5 M4 M5
H5+V1 H3+B5II H5+V1
H3+B5II
M3 M3
H2+B5III H2+B5III
M1
M1
M6 M6
SK 92072.1
SK 92172.1 SK 93072.1
SK 92372.1 SK 93172.1
M2 M2
SK 92672.1 SK 93372.1
SK 92772.1 SK 93672.1
SK 93772.1
M4 M5 M4 M5
M3 M3
-34- B1000-0713 www.nord.com
178
M1
H1+B5I
M1
H1+B5I
M6
M2 M2
H6+V3 M6
H4+B5 H4+B5
H6+V3
SK 9012.1
SK 9016.1 SK 9013.1
SK 9022.1 SK 9017.1
SK 9032.1 SK 9023.1
SK 9042.1 SK 9033.1
SK 9052.1 SK 9043.1
SK 9062.1 SK 9053.1
SK 9072.1
SK 9082.1
SK 9086.1
SK 9092.1
SK 9096.1
M4 M4
M5 M5
H3+B5II H3+B5II
H5+V1 H5+V1
M3 M3
H2+B5III H2+B5III
M1 M1
B3 B3
M2
M2 B6
B6
M6 M6
V6 V6
SK 02050
SK 13050
SK 12063
SK 12080 SK 13063
SK 13080
SK 32100
SK 33100
SK 42125
SK 43125
M4 M4
B3I B3I
M5 M5
V5 V5
M3 M3
B8 B8
www.nord.com B1000-0713 -35-
179
M1
M1 H1+B5I
H1+B5I
M2 M6 M2
M6 H6+V3 H4+B5
H4+B5
H6+V3
SK 02050 SK 13050
SK 12063 SK 13063
SK 12080 SK 13080
SK 32100 SK 33100
SK 42125 SK 43125
M5
H5+V1 M4
M4 H3+B5II M5
H3+B5II H5+V1
M3
H2+B5III M3
H2+B5III
M1 M1
B3 H1+B5I
M2
B6
M6 M6
V6 H6+V3
SK 02040 SK 02040
M2
H4+B5
M4 M4
B3I H3+B5II
M5 M5
V5 H5+V1
M3
M3 H2+B5III
B8
-36- B1000-0713 www.nord.com
180
SK 1S32 – SK 1S63
SK 1SU32 – SK 1SU63
SK 1SM31 – SK 1SM63
SK 1SI31 – SK 1SI75
SK 1SIS31 – SK 1SIS75
SK 1SMI31 – SK 1SMI75
SK 1SID31 – SK 1SID75
SK 1SIS-D31 – SK 1SIS-D63
SK 1SMID31 – SK 1SMID75
SK 2S32NB – SK 2S63NB
SK 2SU32NB- SK 2SU63NB
SK 2SM40 – SK 2SM63
SK 2SIS-D40 – SK 2SIS-D63
SK 2SID40 – SK 2SID63
SK 2SMID40 – SK 2SMID63
M1
M6 M2
M5
M4
M3
Ö 26
www.nord.com B1000-0713 -37-
181
6. Appendix
6.2 Torque values
Bolt Torques [Nm]
Screw connections in the strength classes Screw
Threaded
Sealing connections on
Size 8.8 10.9 12.9 pin on
screws protective
coupling
covers
M4 3.2 5 6 - -
M5 6.4 9 11 - 2
M6 11 16 19 - - 6.4
M8 27 39 46 11 10 11
M10 53 78 91 11 17 27
M12 92 135 155 27 40 53
M16 230 335 390 - - 92
M20 460 660 770 - - 230
M24 790 1150 1300 80 - 460
M30 1600 2250 2650 170 -
M36 2780 3910 4710 - -
M42 4470 6290 7540 - -
G1¼ - - - 20 -
6.3 Troubleshooting
Gear unit malfunctions
Fault Possible cause Remedy
Oil too low or
Unusual running noises,
bearing damage or Consult NORD Service
vibrations
toothed wheel damage
Oil escaping from gear unit or
Defective seal Consult NORD Service
motor
Incorrect oil level or incorrect, Oil change
Oil escaping from
contaminated oil or unfavourable Use oil expansion tank (Option
pressure vent
operating conditions OA)
Unfavourable installation
Gear unit becomes too hot Consult NORD Service
conditions or gear unit damage
Replace elastomer gear rim,
Defective motor coupling or
Shock when switched on, tighten motor and gear unit
loose gear unit mounting or
vibrations fastening bolts, replace rubber
defective rubber element
element
Fracture in gear unit or
Drive shaft does not rotate
defective motor coupling or Consult NORD Service
although motor is running
shrink disc slippage
Attention!
Warning: shut down the gear unit immediately should any of the above faults occur!
-38- B1000-GB-0713 www.nord.com
182
6. Appendix
6.4 Lubricants
With the exception of type SK 11282, SK 11382, SK 12382 and SK 9096.1 gear units, all gear
units are filled with lubricant ready for operation in the required installation position when
delivered. This initial filling corresponds to a lubricant from the column for the ambient
temperatures (normal version) in the lubricant table.
Roller bearing greases
This table shows comparable roller bearing greases from various manufacturers. The
manufacturer can be changed for a given grease type. Getriebebau NORD must be contacted in
case of change of grease type or ambient temperature range, as otherwise no warranty for the
functionality of our gear units can be accepted.
Lubricant type Ambient
temperature
Mineral oil-based -30 … 60°C Energrease Longtime PD 2 RENOLIT - Mobilux EP 2 Gadus S2
grease LS 2 GP 2 V100 2
Energrease RENOLIT
LS-EP 2 LZR 2 H
-50 … 40°C - Optitemp LG 2 RENOLIT - - -
JP 1619
Synthetic grease -25 … 80°C Energrease Tribol 4747 RENOLIT PETAMO Mobiltemp Cassida
SY 2202 HLT 2 GHY 133 N SHC 32 EPS2
RENOLIT Klüberplex
LST 2 BEM 41-132
Biodegradable -25 … 40°C Biogrease - PLANTOGEL 2 Klüberbio Mobil SHC Naturelle
grease EP 2 S M 72-82 Grease 102 Grease EP2
EAL
Foodstuff- -25 … 40°C - Obeen UF 2 RENOLIT Klübersynth Mobilgrease Cassida RLS2
compatible G 7 FG 1 UH1 14-151 FM 222
grease
www.nord.com B1000-GB-0713 -39-
183
6. Appendix
Lubricant table
This table shows comparable lubricants from various manufacturers. The manufacturer can be
changed within a particular viscosity or lubricant type. Getriebebau NORD must be contacted in
case of change of viscosity or lubricant type, as otherwise no warranty for the functionality of our
gearboxes can be accepted.
Lubricant type Details on DIN (ISO) /
type plate Ambient
temperature
Mineral oil Energol Alpha EP 680 RENOLIN CLP Klüberoil Mobilgear Omala S2
GR-XP 680 Alpha SP 680 680 GEM 1-680 N 600 XP 680 G 680
ISO VG 680 Optigear BM RENOLIN CLP
CLP 680
0...40°C 680 680 Plus
Tribol 1100/680
Energol Alpha EP 220 RENOLIN CLP Klüberoil Mobilgear Omala S2
ISO VG 220 GR-XP 220 Alpha SP 220 220 GEM 1-220 N 600 XP 220 G 220
CLP 220 -10…40°C Optigear BM RENOLIN CLP
220 220 Plus
Tribol 1100/220
Energol Alpha EP 100 RENOLIN CLP Klüberoil Mobilgear Omala S2
GR-XP 100 Alpha SP 100 100 GEM 1-100 N 600 XP 100 G 100
ISO VG 100 Optigear BM RENOLIN CLP
CLP 100
-15…25°C 100 100 Plus
Tribol 1100/100
Synthetic oil - Alphasyn GS RENOLIN PG Klübersynth Mobil Omala S4
ISO VG 680
(Polyglycol) CLP PG 680 680 680 GH 6-680 Glygoyle 680 WE 680
-20...40°C
Tribol 800/680
Enersyn Alphasyn GS RENOLIN PG Klübersynth Mobil Omala S4
SG-XP 220 220 220 GH 6-220 Glygoyle 220 WE 220
ISO VG 220 Alphasyn PG
CLP PG 220
-25…80°C 220
Tribol 800/220
Synthetic oil - Alphasyn EP RENOLIN Klübersynth Mobil Omala S4
(hydrocarbon) 460 Unisyn GEM 4-460 N SHC 634 GX 460
ISO VG 460
CLP HC 460 Tribol 1510/460 CLP 460
-30…80°C
Optigear
Synthetic X 460
- Alphasyn EP RENOLIN Klübersynth Mobil Omala S4
220 Unisyn GEM 4-220 N SHC 630 GX 220
ISO VG 220
CLP HC 220 Tribol 1510/220 CLP 220
-40…80°C
Optigear
Synthetic X 220
Bio-degradable ISO VG 680 - - PLANTOGEAR - - -
oil CLP E 680 680 S
-5…40°C
- Tribol BioTop PLANTOGEAR Klübersynth - Naturelle
ISO VG 220 1418/220 220 S GEM 2-220 Gear
CLP E 220
-5…40°C Fluid EP
220
Food grade oil - Tribol - Klübersynth Mobil Cassida
CLP PG H1 ISO VG 680
FoodProof UH1 6-680 Glygoyle 680 Fluid WG
680 -5…40°C
1800/680 680
- Tribol - Klübersynth Mobil Cassida
CLP PG H1 ISO VG 220
FoodProof UH1 6-220 Glygoyle 220 Fluid WG
220 -25…40°C
1800/220 220
- Optileb GT 680 GERALYN SF Klüberoil - Cassida
CLP HC H1 ISO VG 680
680 4 UH1-680 N Fluid GL
680 -5…40°C
680
- Optileb GT 220 GERALYN SF Klüberoil Mobil Cassida
CLP HC H1 ISO VG 220
220 4 UH1-220 N SHC Cibus Fluid GL
220 -25…40°C
220 220
Gear unit liquid Energrease Longtime PD 00 RENOLIT MICROLUBE Mobil Alvania
grease LS-EP 00 Tribol DURAPLEX GB 00 Chassis EP(LF)2
3020/1000-00 EP 00 Grease LBZ
-25 … 60°C
RENOLIT LST Klübersynth Mobil -
00 GE 46-1200 Glygoyle
Grease 00
-40- B1000-GB-0713 www.nord.com
184
6. Appendix
6.5 Lubricant quantities
Note!
After changing the lubricant, and in particular after the initial filling, the oil level may change
during the first few hours of operation, as the oil galleries and hollow spaces only fill gradually
during operation. The oil level is still within the permissible tolerance.
If at the express request of the customer, an oil inspection glass is installed at an additional
charge, we recommend that the customer corrects the oil level after an operating period of
approx. 2 hours, so that when the gear unit is at a standstill and has cooled down, the oil level
is visible in the inspection glass. Only then, is it possible to check the oil level by means of the
inspection glass.
The filling quantities stated in the following tables are for guidance only. The precise quantities
vary depending on the exact gear ratio. When filling, always observe the oil level screw hole
as an indicator of the precise quantity of oil.
* Type SK11282, SK11382, SK12382 and SK 9096.1 gear units are normally supplied without oil.
www.nord.com B1000-GB-0713 -41-
185
[L]
Ö 6.1 M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6
Ö 6.1 B3 V6 B8 V5 B6 B7 B5 V3 B5I V1 B5II B5III
SK11E 0,25 0,50 0,55 0,40 0,35 0,35 0,30 0,35 0,50 0,30 0,40 0,40
SK21E 0,60 1,20 1,20 1,00 1,00 1,00 0,50 1,40 1,10 0,70 0,90 0,90
SK31E 1,10 2,70 2,20 2,30 1,70 1,70 0,80 1,30 1,65 1,10 2,00 2,00
SK41E 1,70 2,60 3,30 2,50 2,60 2,60 1,00 2,60 2,80 1,60 3,30 3,30
SK51E 2,20 4,40 4,70 4,00 3,40 3,40 1,80 3,50 4,10 3,00 3,80 3,80
[L]
SK02 0,15 0,60 0,70 0,60 0,40 0,40 0,25 0,60 0,60 0,60 0,50 0,50
SK12 0,25 0,75 0,85 0,75 0,50 0,50 0,35 0,85 0,90 0,90 0,60 0,60
SK22 0,50 1,80 1,80 1,80 1,35 1,35 0,70 2,00 2,00 1,80 1,55 1,55
SK32 0,90 2,50 2,50 2,90 2,00 2,00 1,30 2,90 3,30 3,10 2,40 2,40
SK42 1,30 4,50 4,50 4,30 3,20 3,20 1,80 4,40 4,50 4,00 3,70 3,70
SK52 2,50 7,00 6,80 6,80 5,10 5,10 3,00 6,80 6,20 7,40 5,60 5,60
[L]
SK62 6,50 15,00 13,00 16,00 15,00 15,00 7,00 15,00 14,00 18,50 16,00 16,00
SK72 10,00 23,00 18,00 26,00 23,00 23,00 10,00 23,00 18,50 28,00 23,00 23,00
SK82 14,00 35,00 27,00 44,00 32,00 32,00 15,00 37,00 29,00 45,00 34,50 34,50
SK92 25,00 73,00 47,00 76,00 52,00 52,00 26,00 73,00 47,00 78,00 52,00 52,00
SK102 36,00 79,00 66,00 102,00 71,00 71,00 40,00 81,00 66,00 104,00 72,00 72,00
[L]
SK03 0,30 1,00 0,80 0,90 0,60 0,60 0,50 0,80 0,90 1,10 0,80 0,80
SK13 0,60 1,25 1,10 1,20 0,70 0,70 0,85 1,20 1,20 1,20 0,95 0,95
SK23 1,30 2,40 2,30 2,35 1,60 1,60 1,50 2,60 2,50 2,80 2,80 2,80
SK33N 1,60 2,90 3,20 3,70 2,30 2,30 2,50 3,40 3,50 4,40 2,60 2,60
SK43 3,00 5,60 5,20 6,60 3,60 3,60 3,50 5,70 5,00 6,10 4,10 4,10
SK53 4,50 8,70 7,70 8,70 6,00 6,00 5,20 8,40 7,00 8,90 6,70 6,70
[L]
SK63 13,00 14,50 14,50 16,00 13,00 13,00 13,50 14,00 15,50 18,00 14,00 14,00
SK73 20,50 20,00 22,50 27,00 20,00 20,00 22,00 22,50 23,00 27,50 20,00 20,00
SK83 30,00 31,00 34,00 37,00 33,00 33,00 31,00 34,00 35,00 40,00 34,00 34,00
SK93 53,00 70,00 59,00 72,00 49,00 49,00 53,00 70,00 59,00 74,00 49,00 49,00
SK103 74,00 71,00 74,00 97,00 67,00 67,00 69,00 78,00 78,00 99,00 67,00 67,00
-42- B1000-0713 www.nord.com
186
[L] [L]
Ö 6.1 M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 Ö 6.1 M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6
SK072.1 0,16 0,32 0,21 0,23 0,18 0,20 SK072.1 F 0,16 0,32 0,21 0,23 0,18 0,20
SK172.1 0,27 0,59 0,42 0,45 0,32 0,39 SK172.1 F 0,27 0,59 0,42 0,45 0,32 0,39
SK372.1 0,45 1,05 0,75 1,00 0,60 0,65 SK372.1 F 0,45 1,05 0,75 1,00 0,60 0,65
SK572.1 0,75 1,90 1,50 2,00 1,10 1,15 SK572.1 F 0,75 1,90 1,50 2,00 1,10 1,15
SK672.1 1,10 2,60 2,15 2,70 1,55 1,65 SK672.1 F 1,10 2,60 2,15 2,70 1,55 1,65
SK772.1 1,35 3,65 2,25 3,15 1,35 2,15 SK772.1 F 1,35 3,65 2,25 3,15 1,35 2,15
SK872.1 3,20 8,00 5,30 7,00 2,80 4,60 SK872.1 F 3,20 8,00 5,30 7,00 2,80 4,60
SK972.1 4,50 12,90 8,10 12,70 4,60 7,80 SK972.1 F 4,50 12,90 8,10 12,70 4,60 7,80
SK772.1VL 2,00 3,65 2,25 3,15 1,35 2,15 SK772.1VL F 2,00 3,65 2,25 3,15 1,35 2,15
SK872.1VL 5,00 8,00 5,30 7,00 2,80 4,60 SK872.1VL F 5,00 8,00 5,30 7,00 2,80 4,60
SK972.1VL 8,50 12,90 8,10 12,70 4,60 7,80 SK972.1VL F 8,50 12,90 8,10 12,70 4,60 7,80
[L] [L]
Ö 6.1 M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 Ö 6.1 M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6
SK373.1 0,45 1,05 0,75 1,00 0,60 0,65 SK373.1 F 0,45 1,05 0,75 1,00 0,60 0,65
SK573.1 0,75 1,90 1,50 2,00 1,10 1,15 SK573.1 F 0,75 1,90 1,50 2,00 1,10 1,15
SK673.1 1,10 2,60 2,15 2,70 1,55 1,65 SK673.1 F 1,10 2,60 2,15 2,70 1,55 1,65
SK773.1 1,95 3,50 3,20 2,90 2,25 2,95 SK773.1 F 1,95 3,50 3,20 2,90 2,25 2,95
SK873.1 4,05 7,60 6,85 6,55 5,00 6,55 SK873.1 F 4,05 7,60 6,85 6,55 5,00 6,55
SK973.1 7,40 12,20 11,10 11,60 8,00 10,90 SK973.1 F 7,40 12,20 11,10 11,60 8,00 10,90
SK773.1VL 1,95 3,50 3,20 2,90 2,25 2,95 SK773.1VL F 1,95 3,50 3,20 2,90 2,25 2,95
SK873.1VL 4,05 7,60 6,85 6,55 5,00 6,55 SK873.1VL F 4,05 7,60 6,85 6,55 5,00 6,55
SK973.1VL 7,40 12,20 11,10 11,60 8,00 10,90 SK973.1VL F 7,40 12,20 11,10 11,60 8,00 10,90
www.nord.com B1000-0713 -43-
187
[L]
Ö 6.1 M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6
Ö 6.1 B3 V6 B8 V5 B6 B7 B5 V3 B5I V1 B5II B5III
SK172 0,35 0,50 0,50 0,50 0,50 0,50 0,35 0,50 0,50 0,50 0,50 0,50
SK272 0,60 1,00 1,00 1,00 1,00 1,00 0,60 1,00 1,00 1,00 1,00 1,00
SK372 0,60 1,00 1,00 1,00 1,00 1,00 0,60 1,00 1,00 1,00 1,00 1,00
SK472 1,00 1,90 1,90 2,00 1,80 1,80 1,00 1,90 1,90 1,90 1,90 1,50
SK572 1,00 1,90 1,90 2,00 1,80 1,80 1,00 1,90 1,90 1,90 1,90 1,50
SK672 1,40 3,40 3,10 3,15 1,45 3,15 1,15 3,40 2,70 2,80 1,25 2,70
SK772 2,00 3,30 3,50 4,20 2,70 3,30 1,60 3,30 3,50 3,30 3,10 3,10
SK872 3,70 9,60 9,10 7,30 4,70 8,00 3,50 9,00 7,90 7,70 3,90 7,20
SK972 6,50 16,00 15,70 14,70 8,50 14,00 6,50 15,00 13,00 13,50 6,50 12,00
[L]
SK273 0,62 1,10 1,10 1,10 1,10 1,10 0,62 1,10 1,10 1,10 1,10 1,10
SK373 0,55 1,10 1,10 1,10 1,10 1,10 0,55 1,10 1,10 1,10 1,10 1,10
SK473 1,30 2,50 2,10 2,40 2,10 2,10 1,25 2,40 2,10 2,50 2,10 2,10
SK573 1,30 2,50 2,10 2,40 2,10 2,10 1,25 2,40 2,10 2,50 2,10 2,10
SK673 1,80 3,80 3,20 3,40 2,90 3,00 1,70 3,80 3,00 3,20 3,00 3,00
SK773 2,50 4,50 3,70 4,60 3,30 3,30 2,30 5,00 3,60 4,50 3,90 3,90
SK873 6,20 8,40 7,50 9,10 7,50 7,50 5,00 8,80 7,60 8,00 8,00 8,00
SK973 11,00 15,80 13,00 16,00 13,30 13,00 10,30 16,50 13,00 16,00 14,00 14,00
[L] [L]
Ö 6.1 M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 Ö 6.1 M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6
SK20 0,55 1,00 0,55 1,00 0,55 0,55 SK20 F 0,35 0,60 0,35 0,60 0,35 0,35
SK0 0,13 0,22 0,13 0,22 0,13 0,13 SK0 F 0,13 0,22 0,13 0,22 0,13 0,13
SK01 0,22 0,38 0,22 0,38 0,22 0,22 SK01 F 0,22 0,38 0,22 0,38 0,22 0,22
SK25 0,50 0,90 0,50 0,90 0,50 0,50 SK25 F 0,50 0,90 0,50 0,90 0,50 0,50
SK33 0,80 1,60 1,00 1,60 0,80 1,00 SK33 F 1,00 1,60 1,00 1,60 0,80 1,00
SK30 0,80 1,40 0,70 1,40 0,70 0,70 SK30 F 0,80 1,40 0,70 1,10 0,70 0,70
SK300 1,40 1,50 1,40 1,50 1,40 1,40 SK300 F 1,40 1,50 1,40 1,50 1,40 1,40
SK330 1,50 1,58 1,50 1,58 1,50 1,50 SK330 F 2,00 1,58 1,50 2,80 1,50 1,50
SK200 0,80 1,30 0,80 1,30 0,80 0,80 SK200 F 0,60 1,04 0,60 1,04 0,60 0,60
SK010 0,38 0,60 0,38 0,60 0,38 0,38 SK010 F 0,38 0,60 0,38 0,60 0,38 0,38
SK250 1,20 1,50 1,40 1,50 1,40 1,40 SK250 F 1,40 1,50 1,40 1,50 1,40 1,40
SK000 0,24 0,41 0,24 0,41 0,24 0,24 SK000 F 0,24 0,41 0,24 0,41 0,24 0,24
-44- B1000-0713 www.nord.com
188
[L] [L]
Ö 6.1 M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 Ö 6.1 M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6
Ö 6.1 H1 H6 H2 H5 H4 H3 Ö 6.1 H1 H6 H2 H5 H4 H3
SK0182NB A 0,40 0,55 0,60 0,55 0,35 0,35
SK0282NB A 0,70 1,00 0,80 1,10 0,90 0,90
SK1382NB A 1,30 2,30 1,40 2,10 2,00 1,90
[L] [L]
SK1282 A 0,90 1,30 0,90 1,20 0,95 0,95 SK2382 A 2,30 2,60 1,90 3,10 1,50 1,50
SK2282 A 1,65 2,40 1,90 2,00 1,80 1,80 SK3382 A 4,10 4,90 3,30 5,60 3,30 3,30
SK3282 A 3,15 4,10 3,25 4,10 3,15 3,15 SK4382 A 5,90 6,80 4,90 8,30 4,90 4,90
SK4282 A 4,70 6,10 4,75 5,40 4,70 4,70 SK5382 A 12,50 12,00 6,70 13,50 8,30 8,30
SK5282 A 7,50 8,80 7,50 8,80 7,20 7,20 SK1382 A 1,45 1,60 1,15 1,70 1,10 1,10
[L] [L]
SK6282 A 17,00 14,00 12,00 17,50 10,00 14,00 SK6382 A 16,50 13,00 9,60 18,00 14,00 12,50
SK7282 A 25,00 21,00 20,00 27,00 16,00 21,00 SK7382 A 22,00 20,00 16,00 25,00 23,00 22,00
SK8282 A 37,00 33,00 30,00 41,00 31,00 31,00 SK8382 A 34,00 32,00 25,00 38,00 35,00 30,00
SK9282 A 74,00 70,00 55,00 80,00 65,00 59,00 SK9382 A 73,00 70,00 45,00 74,00 65,00 60,00
[L] [L]
SK10282 A 90 90 40 90 60 82 SK10382 A 85 100 73 100 80 80
SK11282 A 165 160 145 195 100 140 SK11382 A 160 155 140 210 155 135
SK12382 A 160 155 140 210 155 135
* Ö 38
www.nord.com B1000-0713 -45-
189
[L]
Ö 6.1 M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6
Ö 6.1 B3 B6 B8 B3I V5 V6 B5I B5 B5III B5II V1 V3
H1 H4 H2 H3 H5 H6
SK92072 0,40 0,60 0,50 0,50 0,40 0,40 0,40 0,60 0,50 0,50 0,40 0,40
SK92172 0,55 0,90 0,95 1,10 0,75 0,62 0,50 0,92 0,87 1,05 0,75 0,65
SK92372 0,90 1,30 1,45 1,60 1,20 1,20 1,15 1,50 1,20 1,75 1,15 1,15
SK92672 1,80 3,50 3,20 3,40 2,60 2,60 1,55 2,80 2,50 3,30 2,40 2,40
SK92772 2,30 4,50 4,60 5,30 4,10 4,10 2,75 4,40 4,50 5,85 3,50 3,50
[L]
SK9x072.1 0,39 0,93 0,79 1,02 0,49 0,62 0,39 0,93 0,79 1,02 0,49 0,62
SK9x172.1 0,60 1,17 0,94 1,37 0,65 0,85 0,60 1,17 0,94 1,37 0,65 0,85
SK9x372.1 1,00 1,97 1,65 2,14 1,12 1,34 1,00 1,97 1,65 2,14 1,12 1,34
SK9x672.1 1,80 3,23 2,71 4,20 2,02 2,45 1,80 3,23 2,71 4,20 2,02 2,45
SK9x772.1 2,72 4,63 3,70 5,40 2,93 3,25 2,72 4,63 3,70 5,40 2,93 3,25
[L]
SK9012.1 0,70 1,60 1,90 2,40 1,20 1,70 0,70 1,90 1,90 2,20 1,20 1,70
SK9016.1 0,70 1,60 1,90 2,40 1,20 1,70 0,70 1,90 1,90 2,10 1,20 1,70
SK9022.1 1,30 2,60 3,50 4,20 2,00 2,80 1,30 2,60 3,50 4,20 2,00 2,80
SK9032.1 1,70 4,80 6,40 6,70 4,10 5,10 1,90 5,20 6,40 7,30 3,30 5,10
SK9042.1 4,40 8,70 10,00 9,80 6,80 7,50 3,60 9,70 11,40 11,50 6,50 8,20
SK9052.1 6,50 16,00 19,00 21,50 11,00 15,50 7,50 16,50 20,00 23,50 11,50 18,00
SK9062.1 10,00 27,50 32,00 36,00 18,00 24,00 12,00 27,50 33,00 38,50 19,00 26,00
SK9072.1 10,00 27,50 32,00 36,00 18,00 24,00 12,00 27,50 33,00 38,50 19,00 26,00
SK9082.1 17,00 52,00 63,00 72,00 33,00 47,00 21,00 54,00 66,00 80,00 38,00 52,00
SK9086.1 29,00 73,00 85,00 102,00 48,00 62,00 36,00 78,00 91,00 107,00 53,00 76,00
SK9092.1 41,00 157,00 170,00 172,00 80,00 90,00 40,00 130,00 154,00 175,00 82,00 91,00
SK9096.1 70,00 187,00 194,00 254,00 109,00 152,00 80,00 187,00 193,00 257,00 113,00 156,00
[L]
SK9013.1 1,20 2,00 2,20 3,00 1,40 1,90 1,20 2,30 2,20 3,00 1,40 1,90
SK9017.1 1,20 2,00 2,20 3,00 1,40 1,90 1,20 2,30 2,20 3,00 1,40 1,90
SK9023.1 2,40 3,00 3,80 5,30 2,20 3,10 2,40 3,00 3,80 5,30 2,20 3,10
SK9033.1 3,30 6,60 7,00 7,80 4,30 5,10 3,80 5,70 6,90 8,50 3,60 5,60
SK9043.1 4,60 10,20 10,70 12,80 5,20 6,70 5,70 10,20 14,70 14,70 6,60 9,60
SK9053.1 10,00 17,00 20,00 24,20 11,50 16,50 12,50 18,00 21,50 26,50 13,00 17,00
-46- B1000-0713 www.nord.com
190
[L] [L]
Ö 6.1 M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6
Ö 6.1 B3 B6 B8 B3I V5 V6 B5I B5 B5III B5II V1 V3
Ö 6.1 H1 H4 H2 H3 H5 H6
SK02040 0,45 0,60 0,60 0,60 0,50 0,50 SK02040 A 0,40 0,80 0,65 0,60 0,50 0,50
SK02050 0,40 1,20 0,70 1,15 0,70 0,70 SK02050 A 0,45 1,10 0,90 1,10 0,80 0,80
SK12063 0,60 1,70 1,20 1,55 1,00 1,00 SK12063 A 0,50 1,45 1,20 1,40 1,10 1,10
SK12080 0,80 2,60 1,70 2,70 1,70 1,70 SK12080 A 0,90 3,10 3,00 3,00 2,20 2,20
SK32100 1,60 5,50 3,40 5,40 3,20 3,20 SK32100 A 1,50 5,20 3,80 5,30 3,80 3,80
SK42125 2,80 11,00 6,20 10,30 5,80 5,80 SK42125 A 3,20 12,90 6,10 10,50 6,30 6,30
[L] [L]
SK13050 0,95 1,55 1,10 1,45 0,95 0,95 SK13050 A 0,85 1,75 1,25 1,35 1,15 1,15
SK13063 1,30 2,30 1,60 2,00 1,25 1,25 SK13063 A 1,05 2,10 1,55 2,10 1,45 1,45
SK13080 1,70 3,20 2,10 3,30 1,95 1,95 SK13080 A 1,70 3,45 3,60 3,60 2,55 2,55
SK33100 2,10 7,60 4,00 6,50 3,70 3,70 SK33100 A 2,10 6,10 4,80 6,50 4,20 4,20
SK43125 7,80 14,00 7,20 13,50 6,70 6,70 SK43125 A 4,80 13,50 7,40 14,50 8,00 8,00
[L] [L]
SK02040 F 0,50 0,80 0,75 0,60 0,50 0,50
SK02050 F 0,45 1,40 0,90 1,25 1,00 1,00 SK13050 F 0,90 1,80 1,15 1,75 1,25 1,25
SK12063 F 0,50 1,60 1,40 1,80 1,50 1,50 SK13063 F 0,95 2,10 1,65 2,15 1,75 1,75
SK12080 F 0,95 3,20 3,10 3,30 2,50 2,50 SK13080 F 1,40 4,20 3,35 3,80 2,75 2,75
SK32100 F 1,50 7,10 4,90 7,10 4,40 4,40 SK33100 F 2,30 7,60 5,50 7,80 4,85 4,85
SK42125 F 3,30 11,20 6,10 11,00 6,80 6,80 SK43125 F 4,30 14,50 7,10 12,10 7,70 7,70
www.nord.com B1000-0713 -47-
191
NORD DRIVESYSTEMS GROUP
www.nord.com/locator
Headquarters:
Getriebebau NORD GmbH & Co. KG
Rudolf-Diesel-Straße 1
Mat.-Nr. 6052802/0713
22941 Bargteheide, Germany
Fon +49 (0) 4532 / 289 - 0
Fax +49 (0) 4532 / 289 - 2253
[email protected], www.nord.com
Member of the NORD DRIVESYSTEMS GROUP DRIVESYSTEMS
192
Intelligent Drivesystems, Worldwide Services
GB
B1091
Operating and Maintenance Instructions
Three-phase Asynchronous Motors – Standard Design
Explosion-proof Motors with Type of Protection „e“
Dust Explosion-proof Motors (Zone 21+ Zone 22)
193
Contents
1. General information .............................................................................................................. 3
2. Description .............................................................................................................................. 4
2.1 Range of application ................................................................................................................. 4
3. Information on the designated use of electric motors ...................................................... 4
3.1 Transport, storage .................................................................................................................... 4
3.2 Installation................................................................................................................................. 5
3.3 Balancing, output components ................................................................................................. 5
3.4 Alignment .................................................................................................................................. 5
3.5 Electrical connection ................................................................................................................. 5
3.6 Checking insulation resistance ................................................................................................. 6
3.7 Commissioning ......................................................................................................................... 6
4. Maintenance and servicing.................................................................................................... 7
5. Motors with ignition protection "increased safety Exe" .................................................... 8
6. Motors for use in Zone 21 and Zone 22 .............................................................................. 11
6.1 General ................................................................................................................................... 11
6.2 Safety information ................................................................................................................... 11
6.3 Commissioning information / Field of application / Extended ambient temperature range ............. 11
6.4 Structure and method of operation ......................................................................................... 12
6.5 Minimum cross section of bonding conductors ...................................................................... 12
6.6 Maintenance ........................................................................................................................... 13
7. Motors for use in Zone 21 and Zone 22 according to EN 60079-0 and IEC 60079 ........ 14
7.1 General ................................................................................................................................... 14
7.1.2 Impact test .............................................................................................................................. 14
7.2 Safety information ................................................................................................................... 14
7.3 Commissioning information / Field of application / Extended ambient temperature range ............. 15
7.3.1 Electrical Connection .............................................................................................................. 16
7.3.2 Cable and wiring glands ......................................................................................................... 16
7.3.3 Permissible ambient temperature range ................................................................................ 17
7.3.4 Painting ................................................................................................................................... 17
7.3.5 IEC-B14 Motors ...................................................................................................................... 17
7.4 Structure and method of operation ......................................................................................... 18
7.5 Minimum cross section of bonding conductors ...................................................................... 18
7.6 Maintenance ........................................................................................................................... 18
8. Options for motors for use in Zone 22 ............................................................................... 19
8.1 Inverter operation option......................................................................................................... 19
8.2 External fan option .................................................................................................................. 19
8.3 Return stop option .................................................................................................................. 19
8.4 Brake option............................................................................................................................ 20
9. Spare parts drawing and spare parts list ........................................................................... 21
10. Conformity declarations ...................................................................................................... 22
Safety and information symbols
Please always observe the following safety and information symbols!
Danger! Notice!
Risk of fatalities and Machine may be damaged
injury
Danger! Note!
Important information
regarding explosion
protection
-2- B1091-GB-4613 www.nord.com
194
1. Information
1. General information
These Operating Instructions must be read before you transport, assemble, commission,
maintain or repair NORD motors. All persons who are involved with such tasks must observe
these Operating Instructions. All safety instructions provided in these Operating Instructions
must be strictly observed for reasons of personal protection and protection of property.
Information and instructions provided in the manual supplied, safety and commissioning
information and all other manuals must be observed.
This is absolutely essential in order to avoid hazards and damage!
Any applicable national, local and system-specific regulations and requirements must also be
observed!
Special designs and design variants may differ with regard to technical details. If any
points are not clear, it is urgently recommended that you consult the manufacturer
stating the type designation and motor number or have the maintenance work
performed by NORD.
Qualified staff are persons who, owing to their training, experience, instruction received, and
their knowledge of relevant standards, accident prevention regulations and the appropriate
operating conditions, are entitled to perform the activities necessary in order to put the motor
into operation.
This also includes knowledge of first aid measures and the local emergency services.
It is assumed that the work for transport, assembly, installation, commissioning, maintenance
and repair will be performed by qualified staff.
In particular, the following points must be observed:
x Specifications and information about permissible use, assembly, connection, ambient
and operating conditions, which are included in the catalogue, the order
documentation and any other product documentation
x The local, system-specific regulations and requirements
x Proper use of tools, hoisting equipment and transport equipment
x Use of personal safety equipment
For reasons of clarity the Operating Instructions cannot contain all detailed information about
possible design variants so that they cannot take into consideration every conceivable case of
installation, operation or maintenance.
For this reason these Operating Instructions essentially only contain such instructions as are
required for normal use by qualified staff.
To prevent malfunctions it is necessary that the specified maintenance and inspection work is
performed by appropriately trained staff.
x The planning guide B1091-1 must be included with the operating instructions when
operated with the inverter.
x The additional operating instructions must be taken into account if an external fan is
present.
x The brake operating instructions must also be taken into account with braking motors.
If, for any reason, the operating instructions or the planning guide are lost, new documentation
must be obtained from Getriebebau NORD.
www.nord.com B1091-GB-4613 -3-
195
2. Description
3. Information
2.1 Field of Application
Use of the motors:
The motors may only be used for their intended purpose.
The motors are designed with at least IP 55 protection (for degree of protection see name
plate). They may be installed in dusty or damp environments.
The necessary degree of protection and any additional precautions required always depend
on the operating and environmental conditions. For outdoor installation and vertical designs,
e.g. V1 or V5 with the shaft pointing downward, NORD recommends the use of the double fan
hood option [RDD].
The motors must be protected against intense sunlight, e.g. by means of a protective shield.
The insulation is tropicalised.
Installation altitude: d 1,000 m
Ambient temperature: -20°C...+ 40°C. With standard motors, a greater ambient temperature
range is permitted from -20°C...+ 60°C. The rated power must however be reduced to 82% of
the catalogue value. If the maximum value of the ambient temperature is between +40°C and
+60°C, the p ower consumption can be inversely interpolated linearly between 100% and 82%.
The motor connection cables and the cable inlet glands must be suitable for temperatures t 90°C .
3. Information on the correct handling of electric motors
All work must only be carried out with the power to the system switched off.
3.1 Transport, storage
x For transport, use all the hoisting lugs fitted to the motor!
x The hoisting lugs are designed for the weight of the motor; do not attach any
additional loads!
x Only use the hoisting lugs and pins provided when transporting machine sets (e.g.
gear unit attachments) !
x Machine sets must not be hoisted by attaching to individual machines!
To prevent damage to the motor, the motor must always be lifted with suitable hoisting
equipment. Under favourable conditions the roller bearings should be replaced if the time
between delivery and motor commissioning (storage in dry, dust-free and vibration-free
rooms) is more than 4 years. Under unfavourable conditions this time is reduced considerably.
It may be necessary to treat unprotected, machine surfaces (flanging surface, shaft end, etc.)
with corrosion inhibitor. If necessary, check the insulation resistance of the winding, see
section 3.6.
Changes in normal operation (higher power consumption, higher temperatures or higher
vibrations, unusual noises or smells, response from the monitoring system, etc.) indicate that
operation is impaired. To avoid personal injury and damage to property, the maintenance staff
responsible must be informed about the change immediately.
In case of doubt switch off the motor without delay, as soon as the status of the system
permits.
-4- B1091-GB-4613 www.nord.com
196
3. Information
3.2 Installation
x After installation, screwed-on lifting lugs must be tightened or removed.
x Smooth running: Precise alignment of the coupling and a well-balanced drive element
(coupling, belt pulleys, fans, etc.) are prerequisites for quiet, low vibration operation.
x Complete balancing of the motor with the drive elements may be necessary.
x The upper section of the terminal box and the terminal box position can be rotated by
4 x 90 degrees.
x IEC-B14 motors:
All four fixing screws must be screwed into the flanged bearing cover, even if they are
not required! The fixing screw threads must be inserted with a sealant, e.g. Loctite 242.
The maximum depth for screwing into in the bearing cover is 2 x d.
x The motor must be inspected for damage before installation and commissioning.
A damaged motor must not be commissioned.
x Rotating shafts and unused shaft ends must be safely protected against contact.
Unused parallel keys must be secured against being thrown out.
3.3 Balancing, drive elements
Fitting and removal of output assemblies (coupling, pulleys, gears, etc.) must be performed
with a suitable device. As standard, the rotors are balanced with half key balancing. When
fitting output elements to the motor shaft observe the appropriate type of balancing!
The output elements must be balanced in accordance with DIN ISO 1940!
Take the general precautions necessary for providing the output elements with touch guards.
If a motor is put into operation without an output element, secure the parallel key to prevent it
from being thrown out. This also applies if a second shaft end is fitted. Alternatively, remove
the parallel key.
3.4 Alignment
Especially in case of direct coupling, align the shafts of the motor and the driven machine both
axially and radially. Inaccurate alignment can lead to bearing damage, excessive vibrations
and shaft breakage.
3.5 Electrical connection
Feed the connecting leads into the terminal box with cable glands. The terminal box must be
sealed so that it is dust-tight and water-tight. The mains voltage and frequency must conform
to the data on the rating plate. ± 5% voltage deviations or ± 2% frequency deviations are
permissible without any reduction in performance. The connections and arrangement of the
terminal board jumpers must conform to the circuit diagram provided in the terminal box.
Connect the protective earth lead to the protective earth terminal.
Provide the ends of the connecting leads with cable lugs or curved ring eyes and connect
them to the terminal board. This also applies to the protective earth connection and the
external bonding lead.
www.nord.com B1091-GB-4613 -5-
197
3. Information
Refer to the table below for the tightening torques of the screw connections of electric
terminals and the terminal board connections (apart from terminal strips):
Tightening torques for terminal board connections
Thread diameter M4 M5 M6 M8
Tightening torque (Nm) 0.6 – 1.2 1.8 – 2.5 2.7 – 4.0 5.5 – 8.0
If the machine has an standstill heater, it must not be switched on during operation.
3.6 Checking the insulation resistance
Before putting the motor into operation for the first time, after a lengthy period of storage or
standstill (approx. 6 months), the insulation resistance of the winding must be determined.
During and immediately after the measurements, the terminals carry dangerous voltages and
must not be touched.
Insulation resistance
The insulation resistance of new, cleaned, repaired windings against the housing and against
one another is >200 M.
Measurement
In the case of windings up to an operating voltage of 400 V the insulation resistance against
the housing must be measured with a DC voltage of 500 V. At operating voltages up to 725 V
measure with a DC voltage of 1000 V. For this the temperature of the windings should be
25° C ± 15°C.
Checking
In the case of a new, cleaned winding or a repaired motor which has been stored or shut
down for any lengthy period, if the insulation resistance of the winding against the housing is
less than 50 M, the cause may be moisture. The windings must then be dried.
After a lengthy period of operation the insulation resistance may reduce. As long as the
measured value does not fall below the critical insulation resistance of < 50 M, the motor
may continue to be operated. If the value falls below the critical level, the cause must be
established and if necessary, the windings or winding sections must be repaired, cleaned or
dried.
3.7 Commissioning
Note: Electromagnetic compatibility
Production of interference: In case of large torque differences (e.g. when driving a piston
compressor) a non-sine wave motor current is induced, whose harmonics can cause an
impermissible effect on the mains and therefore impermissible production of interference.
With supply by frequency inverters, various strengths of interference are produced according
to the design of the frequency inverter (type, interference suppression, manufacturer).
The EMC information of the inverter manufacturer must be observed. If the manufacturer
recommends the use of a screened motor supply lead, screening will be most effective if it is
electrically connected to a large area of the metal terminal box of the motor (with EMC cable
gland made of metal). In the case of motors with built-in sensors (e.g. PTC thermistors)
interference voltages due to the inverter can occur in the sensor line.
Interference immunity: In the case of motors with built-in sensors (e.g. PTC thermistors) the
user must ensure adequate interference immunity by selecting a suitable sensor signal cable
(possibly with screening and connection as with the motor supply cable) and the evaluation
device. Prior to commissioning always observe the information and instructions in the
operating manuals for inverters as well as all other instructions. After installing the motors,
check them to make sure that they are operating correctly! In the case of brake motors also
check that the brake operates correctly.
-6- B1091-GB-4613 www.nord.com
198
4. Maintenance, Servicing
Safety measures
Always isolate the motor electrically according to the regulations before commencing any
work on the motor or device, especially before opening covers of live components. In addition
to the main power circuits, any additional or auxiliary circuits must be taken into account.
The standard "5 safety rules", e.g. according to DIN VDE 0105, are:
x Disconnect
x Prevent the equipment from being switched on again
x Check that there is no voltage present
x Earth and short-circuit
x Cover any adjacent live components or prevent access with barriers
These measures may only be removed when the maintenance work is complete and the
motor has been completely assembled.
Inspect the motors properly at regular intervals. The valid national standards and regulations
must be observed. In particular look for any physical damage, ensure that cooling passages
are free, listen for any unusual noises, and ensure that electrical connections are made in a
proper manner.
With the exception of standardised, commercial or equivalent parts, only genuine spare parts
may be used!
NOTE: If motors are provided with closed condensation ports, they must be opened from time
to time so that any accumulated condensation can drain off. Condensation ports are always
positioned at the lowest point of the motor. When installing the motor ensure that the
condensation holes are at the bottom.
Changing bearings, grease packing
Under normal operating conditions and with the motor installed horizontally, depending on
coolant temperature and motor speed the period for changing bearings in operating hours [h]
on IEC motors with coupling drive is as follows:
25° C 40° C
up to 1800 rpm approx. 40000 h approx. 20000 h
up to 3,600 rpm approx. 20000 h approx. 10000 h
In the case of direct gearbox attachment or under special operating conditions, e.g. vertical
motor, substantial vibrations or shock loads, frequent reversing, etc. the operating hours
stated above will be reduced considerably.
The motor must be subjected to a general overhaul every 5 years!
General overhaul
For this the motor must be dismantled. The following work must be carried out:
x All components of the motor must be cleaned
x All components of the motor must be examined for damage
x All damaged components must be replaced
x All roller bearings must be replaced
x All seals and shaft sealing rings must be replaced
The general overhaul must be performed in a specialised workshop with appropriate
equipment and by qualified staff. We urgently recommend that the general overhaul is carried
out by NORD Service.
www.nord.com B1091-GB-4613 -7-
199
5. Motors with ignition protection
class "increased safety Exe"
The following supplementary or the following specific information applies for these motors.
The motors are suitable for use in Zone 1 and conform to equipment group II, category 2G, and may be used
at an ambient temperature between -20°C and +40°C.
Type supplement: 2G e.g.: 80 L/4 2G TF
The marking is 0102 II 2G Ex e IIC T3 Gb with details of the temperature class.
If the motor is attached to a gear unit, the EX labelling of the gear unit must also be observed!
Explosive gas mixtures or concentrations of dust in conjunction with hot, live and moving parts on electrical
machinery can cause severe or fatal injuries.
The increased hazard in explosive areas calls for particularly careful compliance with the general safety and
commissioning instructions. The staff responsible must be trained regarding correct use of motors in
explosive areas.
Explosion-protected electrical machines comply with the standards in series EN 60034 (VDE 0530) as well
as EN 60079-0:2009 and EN 60079-7:2007. The degree of explosion risk determines the zone classification.
DIN EN 60079, Part 10, provides information on this. The user is responsible for the zone classification. It is
prohibited to use motors which are not certified for explosive areas in explosive areas.
Cable glands must be approved for explosive atmospheres. Openings which are not used must be closed off
with approved blind plugs. When connecting installation lines, the connections to the motor terminals and the
earth lead must be bent into a U-shape under the respective terminals so that the terminal clamps and studs
are subjected to uniform loading and are not deformed under any circumstances. Alternatively, the
connections can be made with a cable lug.
The use of aluminium connecting cables is not permissible.
All motors with the protection class Ex e are supplied with certified cable glands.
Cables with a circular cross-section must be used with the cable glands which are supplied. The clamping
nuts of the cable gland must be tightened to the torque specified in the following table.
Clamping nut
Cable gland
tightening torque [Nm]
M20x1.5 6
M25x1.5 8
M32x1.5 12
M40x1.5 16
When connecting, always ensure that the permissible clearance distances of 10 mm and the permissible
creepage distances of 12 mm between live components and components with the housing potential or
between individual live components are observed.
Before the terminal box is closed, ensure that all the nuts on the terminals and the screw on the protective
earth terminal are tight. The terminal box seals and the seals on the cable gland must be fitted properly and
must not be damaged in any way.
If the shaft end is at the top, e.g. versions IMV3 or IMV6, and the motor has Exe protection, the user/installer
must fit a cover which prevents foreign bodies from falling into the motor fan cover (see DIN EN 60079-0).
This must not obstruct the fan from cooling the motor. If the shaft end is at the bottom, e.g. versions IMV1 or
IMV5, the motors are generally provided with a protective shield on the fan cover. A handwheel at the
second shaft end is not permitted.
The motors are designed for continuous operation and normal, non-recurring start-ups in which no
substantial start-up heat develops.
Section A in EN 60034-1 (VDE 0530 Part 1) - voltage ± 5%, frequency ± 2%, characteristic, mains
symmetry - must be complied with, so that the development of heat remains within the limits permitted.
Any major deviations from the rated values can cause an impermissible increase in the development of
heat in the motor.
The motor temperature class stated on the type plate must at least conform to the temperature class of any
combustible gas that may occur.
-8- B1091-GB-4613 www.nord.com
200
5. Motors with ignition protection
class "increased safety Exe"
Each machine must be protected against impermissible development of heat by means of a current-
dependent delayed protection switch tested for operation by an approved facility, with phase-failure
protection compliant with VDE 0660 or an equivalent system in all phases. The protective system must be
set to the rated current. If windings are connected in a delta circuit the trips must be connected in series with
the winding phases and set to 0.58 times the rated current. If such a configuration is not possible, additional
precautions are necessary (e.g. thermal machine protection).
If the rotor jams, the protective system must shut down within the tE-time specified for the respective
temperature class.
Electric machines for heavy-duty starting (ramp time > 1.7 x tE-time) must be protected by a start-up
monitoring system in accordance with the provisions of the EC prototype test certificate.
Thermal machine protection by means of direct thermal monitoring of the winding with PTC thermistor
temperature sensor is permissible if this is documented and stated on the name plate.
Do not connect any voltage higher than 30V to the PTC thermistor temperature sensor!
If the only protection is a PTC thermistor temperature sensor, a performance-tested, PTC tripping device
certified by a designated body must be used. The PTC tripping device must be provided with the following
marks with regard to the degree of protection:
II (2) G
The following standards and regulations must be observed for the installation of electrical systems
in explosion hazard areas: DIN EN 60079-14 (VDE 0165-1), the Technical Regulations for Operational
Safety (TRBS), the industrial safety regulations and the explosion protection regulations (Ex-RL).
Other regulations must also be observed, if applicable. For all countries the appropriate national
regulations must be observed.
Operation in conjunction with an inverter must be explicitly certified. The separate manufacturer's information
must be observed. For Exe protection the motor, inverter and protective systems must be identified as
belonging together and the permissible operating data must be defined on the joint EC prototype test
certificate. The levels of voltage peaks generated by the inverter may be unfavourably influenced by the
connecting cable installed between the inverter and the electric machine. In the system comprising the
inverter, the cable and the electric motor, the maximum value for voltage peaks at the connecting terminals
on the machine must not exceed the figure specified in the separate manufacturer's instructions. In addition,
the EMC Directive must also be observed.
Repairs must be performed by NORD or accepted by an officially recognised expert. The work must be
identified by means of an additional repair plate. With the exception of standardised, commercial and
equivalent parts, only genuine spare parts must be used (see spare parts list): this particularly applies to
seals and connecting parts.
In the case of motors with closed condensation holes the threads of the plugs must be recoated with Loctite
242 or Loxeal 82-21 after condensation has been drained off. After this, the plugs must be reinserted
immediately. The electrical connections must be checked at regular intervals.
The connection terminals, protective earth terminal and equipotential bonding terminal must be inspected to
make sure they are firm. When doing so, check to make sure that the cable entry, cable gland and terminal
box seals are in good condition.
All work on electric machines must be performed with the machine vertical and with all terminals
disconnected from the mains.
The motor must be removed for measurement of the installation resistance. The measurement must not be
performed in the explosion hazard area. As soon as measurement has been completed, discharge the
connecting terminals again by shorting them in order to prevent any spark discharges occurring in the
explosive area.
www.nord.com B1091-GB-4613 -9-
201
5. Motors with ignition protection
class "increased safety Exe"
Painting: The motors are supplied with a maximum paint thickness of 0.2 mm in order to prevent electrostatic
charging. In case of repainting, the total thickness of the paint layer, including the original painting, must not
exceed 0.2 mm.
Type plate for NORD Exe motors according to EN 60079
Explanation of the standard details on the type plate
EN 60034 (H), (A)/ EN 60079
Standard series used for explosion protection
(Please note the Declaration of Conformity)
Voltage range A according to EN 60034-1
Half key balancing according to EN 60034-14
Product standard
1 Data Matrix Code 9 Operating mode 17 Explosion protection labelling
2 Code number of the designated 10 Details of standards 18 Start-up current/nominal current
body
3 Number of phases 11 Nominal frequency 19 tE- time
4 Type designation 12 Nominal voltage 20 Note: TMS with statement of the tA time only
with PTC tripping device according to
DIN 44082
5 Order number / motor number 13 Permissible voltage range 21 Notice ! Observe operating instruction
B1091.
6 Year of manufacture: 14 Data sheet number 22 Nominal power
7 Temperature class 15 Power factor 23 Nominal current
8 Housing protection type 16 Speed 24 Individual serial number
-10- B1091-GB-4613 www.nord.com
202
6. Motors for use in
Zone 21 and Zone 22
6.1 General information
The following information applies additionally or particularly for category 2D and 3D motors!
According to their labelling, the motors are suitable for use in Zone 21 (category 2D) or Zone 22 – non-conduc-
tive dusts (category 3D) .
Type suffix: Zone 21: 2D e.g.: 80 L/4 2D TF
Zone 22: 3D e.g.: 80 L/4 3D TF
The labelling is as follows: 0102 II 2 D T 125°C for catego ry 2 (Zone 21)*
Certification number: BVS 04 ATEX E 037
II 3 D T 125°C for catego ry 3 (Zone 22 non-conductive dust)*
* the details of the surface temperature may deviate from 125° C and may be obtained from the type plate
If the motor is attached to a gear unit, the EX labelling of the gear unit must also be observed!
6.2 Safety information
The increased danger in areas with combustible dust requires that the general safety and commissioning
instructions are strictly complied with. Explosive concentrations of dust may cause explosions if ignited by
hot or sparking objects. Such explosions may cause serious or fatal injuries to persons or severe material
damage.
It is absolutely essential that the persons responsible for the use these motors and frequency inverters in
explosion hazard areas are trained in their correct use.
6.3 Commissioning information / Field of application
If the motors are intended for inverter operation, this must be specified when ordering. The motors must be
protected against overheating with suitable monitoring equipment! Dust deposits must not exceed 5 mm! The
motors are designed for the voltage and frequency range A in EN 60034 Part 1.
Motors for use in Zone 21 and Zone 22, with labelling TF may be thermally monitored via the built-in PTC
thermistor temperature sensor in combination with a suitable triggering device as the sole protection.
Electrical equipment for use in areas with combustible dust complies with the standards EN 50281-1-1,
EN 60034 and EN 50014. The level of the explosion hazard is determined by the categorisation of the zone.
The operator/employer is responsible for categorisation of the zones (Directive 1999/92/EC).
If the certification is supplemented by an X, the special conditions in the EC type examination certificate must
be complied with. The use of standard motors which are not certified for explosion hazard areas in explosion
hazard areas is prohibited. In Zone 21, the cable glands must be authorised for Ex areas (protection class
minimum IP 66) and must be secured against accidental loosening. Unused apertures must be sealed with
approved plugs (minimum protection class IP 66).
For Zone 22, the cable glands must at least correspond to the protection type specified on the type plate.
Unused openings must be closed with plugs, which at least correspond to the protection class of the motor.
The motor must not be opened in hazardous atmospheres for connection of the electrical cables or for any
other work. The voltage must always be switched off and secured against being switched on again before
opening the motor!
www.nord.com B1091-GB-4613 -11-
203
6. Motors for use in
Zone 21 and Zone 22
If the motor is supplied with a certified cable gland, the clamping nuts of the cable gland must be tightened to
the torque specified in the following table.
Cable Clamping nut
gland tightening torque [Nm]
M20x1.5 6
M25x1.5 8
M32x1.5 12
M40x1.5 16
The permissible ambient temperature range for all motors is -20°C...+40°C. An ext ended ambient
temperature range of -20°C...+ 60°C is permissible with motors for operation in Zones 21 and 22. However,
this does not apply with the option brake and external fan! The rated power must be reduced to 72% of the
catalogue value. If the maximum value of the ambient temperature is between +40°C and +60°C, the value
of the power consumption can be inversely interpolated linearly between 100% and 72%. In this case
thermal protection of the motor by means of a thermistor sensor is mandatory. The motor connection cables
and the cable glands must be suitable for temperatures t 90°C.
IEC-B14 Motors
The B14 flanged bearing cover must be covered with a protective foil which must be removed before the
motor is fastened in place. Even if they are not required, all four fixing screws must be screwed into the
flanged bearing cover! The fixing screw threads must be inserted with a sealant, e.g. Loctite 242.
The maximum depth for screwing into the bearing cover is 2 x d.
If the shaft end faces upwards, e.g. versions IMV3, IMV6, a cover must be positioned on the motor by the
operator/installer to prevent foreign bodies from falling into the motor fan cover (see DIN EN 50 280-1-1).
This must not obstruct the fan from cooling the motor. If the shaft ends face down, e.g. versions IMV1, IMV5,
motors for Zone 21 are generally equipped with a protective shield on the fan cover. A handwheel at the
second shaft end is not permitted.
Unless other operating modes and tolerances are specified in the test certificate or type plate, electrical
machinery is designed for continuous operation and normal infrequent start-ups where no significant start-up
heating occurs. The motors may only be used for the operating mode specified on the type plate.
The installation instructions must be strictly observed.
6.4 Structure and method of use
The motors are self-cooling. Rotary shaft seals are fitted both on the drive side (DS) and on the ventilation
side (VS). Motors for Zone 21 and Zone 22 have metal fans. The motors are produced with protection class
IP55, optionally protection class IP 66, (Zone 22 – non-conducting dust) or IP66 (Zone 21). Under normal
operating conditions, the surface temperature does not exceed the surface temperature stated on the type
plate.
6.5 Minimum cross section of bonding conductors
Cross-section of the phase conductor in Minimum cross-section of the associated
installation S in mm2 earth lead S P in mm2
S 16 S
16 < S 35 16
S > 35 0.5 S
When connecting a lead to the external earth, the minimum cross-section must be 4 mm2.
-12- B1091-GB-4613 www.nord.com
204
6. Motors for use in
Zone 21 and Zone 22
6.6 Maintenance
The voltage must always be switched off and secured against being switched on again before
opening the motor!
Notice ! Higher temperatures than the maximum permitted surface temperature of the housing may
be present inside the motor. The motor must therefore never be opened in dust explosion hazard
atmospheres! The motors must be regularly checked and tested for functional safety! The applicable
national standards and regulations must be complied with!
Impermissibly thick dust deposits > 5 mm must not be allowed to build up! If functional safety cannot be
ensured, the motor may not be operated! When the ball bearings are replaced, the rotary shaft seals must
also be replaced. FKM rotary shaft seals as specified by Getriebebau NORD must be used. Ensure that they
are fitted correctly! The rotary shaft seals must be lubricated on the external rings and on the seal lips. If an
explosion protected gear is flanged dust-tight to the motor, an NBR rotary shaft seal may be used on the
drive side of the motor if the gear oil temperature does not exceed 85° C. Only original parts may be used as
spare parts with the exception of standardised, commercially available and equivalent parts. This also
applies in particular to seals and connection components. Parts for terminal boxes or spare parts for external
earthing must be ordered according to the spare parts list in the operating instructions.
The functionality of seals, rotary shaft seals and cable glands must be regularly checked!
Maintenance of dust protection for the motors is of paramount importance for explosion protection..
Maintenance must be performed by qualified personnel in a specialist workshop with suitable equipment.
We urgently recommend that the general overhaul is carried out by NORD Service.
www.nord.com B1091-GB-4613 -13-
205
7. Motors for use in Zone 21 and Zone 22
according to EN 60079-0 and IEC 60079
NOTICE!
Section 7 of these operating instructions applies as a supplement for explosion protected electric
motors for Zone 21 and Zone 22 according to EN 60079 and IEC 60079. Please disregard Section 6 for
these motors.
7.1 General information
The following information applies additionally or especially to motors for Zone 21 and Zone 22!
Motors which comply with EN 60079 and IEC 60079 are suitable according to their labelling for use in Zone
21 or Zone 22 - non-conductive dust.
Type suffix according to Zone 21: 2D e.g.:……….. ........................... 80 L/4 2D TF
EN 60079 : Zone 22: 3D e.g: ......................................... 80 L/4 3D TF
Type suffix according to Zone 21: EPL Db e.g:……………………….80 L/4 IDB TF
IEC 60079: Zone 22: EPL Dc e.g.:………………………80L/4 IDC TF
Labelling according
to 0102 II 2 D Ex tb IIIC T125°C Db for Category 2
EN 60079 and (Zone 21)*
94/9 EC
II 3 D Ex tc IIIB T125°C Dc for Category 3
(Zone 22, non-conducting dust)*
Labelling according Ex tb IIIC T125° C Db for Category 2 *
to
IEC 60079
Ex tc IIIB T125°C Dc for Category 3
(non-conducting dust)*
* the details of the surface temperature may deviate from 125° C and can be obtained from the type plate
If the motor is attached to a gear unit, the EX labelling of the gear unit must also be observed!
7.1.2 Impact test
According to 26.4.2 of EN 60079-0:2009 and IEC 60079-0:2007 motors for Category 2D and 3D are
subjected to an impact test with 4J.
7.2 Safety information
The increased danger in areas with combustible dust requires that the general safety and commissioning
instructions are strictly complied with. Explosive concentrations of dust may cause explosions if ignited by
hot or sparking objects. Such explosions may cause serious or fatal injuries to persons or severe material
damage.
It is absolutely essential that the persons responsible for the use these motors and frequency inverters in
explosion hazard areas are trained in their correct use.
-14- B1091-GB-4613 www.nord.com
206
7. Motors for use in Zone 21 and Zone 22
according to EN 60079-0 and IEC 60079
7.3 Commissioning information / Field of application
If the motors are intended for inverter operation, this must be specified when ordering. The motors must be
protected against overheating with suitable monitoring equipment! The thickness of dust deposits must not
exceed 5 mm! The motors are designed for the voltage and frequency range B of EN 60034 Part 1.
Exception: Size 132MA/4 2D, 132MA/4 3D, 132LH/4 2D and 132LH/4 3D motors comply with voltage and
frequency range A.
Motors for use in Zone 21 and Zone 22, with labelling TF may be thermally monitored via the built-in PTC
thermistor temperature sensor in combination with a suitable triggering device as the sole protection.
Electrical equipment for use in areas with inflammable dust comply with the standards DIN EN 60079-0, IEC
60079-0, EN 60079-31, IEC 60079-31, as well as DIN EN 60034 and IEC 60034.
The valid version of the standard can be obtained from the EC Declaration of Conformity or the IECEx CoC.
The degree of explosion hazard determines the zone categorisation. The operator / employer is responsible
for the assignment of zones (in Europe: RL 1999/92/EC)
If the certification is supplemented with an "X" the special conditions in the EC prototype certification, the
IECEX CoC and/or the relevant documentation must be observed. The use of standard motors which are not
certified for explosion hazard areas in explosion hazard areas is prohibited.
The terminal box cover seal must be captively fastened to the terminal box cover. Please only use an original
seal when replacing the seal.
If the terminal box is opened during installation, maintenance, repair, troubleshooting or overhaul, the
terminal box cover must be re-fitted after the work is complete. There must be no dirt on the surface of the
seal or the sealing surface of the terminal box frame.
The screws for the terminal box cover must be tightened with a torque according to the following table.
Tightening torques for terminal box cover screws
Thread Tightening torque [Nm]
M4 0.8 to 1.2
M5 1.2 to 1.8
M6 1.5 to 2.5
M8 3.0 to 5.0
www.nord.com B1091-GB-4613 -15-
207
7. Motors for use in Zone 21 and Zone 22
according to EN 60079-0 and IEC 60079
7.3.1 Electrical Connection
The electrical connections of the terminal board are protected against twisting. The voltage supply to the
terminal board must be made by means of suitable ring terminals. The ring terminals are installed between
the two brass washers below the lock washer. The nuts must be tightened with a torque according to the
table below. The contact pressure is permanently maintained by means of the specified torque and the lock
washer. In addition, twisting of the ring terminals of the voltage supply is prevented. The connection
elements are corrosion-proof.
Torques for electrical terminal board connections
Nominal thread diameter Tightening torque [Nm]
M1.6 0.09-0.12
M3 0.35-0.5
M4 0.8-1.2
M5 1.8-2.5
M6 2.7-4.0
M8 5.5-8,0
M10 9.0-13.0
M12 16.0-20.0
M16 36.0-40.0
Electrical connection:
Brass nut
r
Lock washer
Brass washer
Brass washer
Brass nut
A Brass washer
Ring terminal
Brass washer
Brass thread with collar
Mechanical protection against twisting
7.3.2 Cable and wiring glands
In Zone 21, the cable glands must be approved for Ex areas (protection class minimum IP 66) and must be
secured against accidental loosening. Unused apertures must be sealed with approved plugs (minimum
protection class IP 66).
For Zone 22, the cable glands must at least correspond to the protection type specified on the name plate.
Unused openings must be closed with plugs, which as a minimum correspond to the protection class of the
motor and the requirements of EN 60079-0 and IEC 60079-0. The cable glands and blank plugs must be
suitable for a temperature of at least 80° C.
The motor must not be opened under hazardous atmospheres for connection of the electrical cables or for
any other work. The voltage must always be switched off and secured against being switched on again
before opening the motor!
The motors are equipped with cable glands according to the following overview.
-16- B1091-GB-4613 www.nord.com
208
7. Motors for use in Zone 21 and Zone 22
according to EN 60079-0 and IEC 60079
Assignment of Cable Glands to Motor Size
Cable glands for standard motors Cable glands for brake motors
Type Number Thread Number Thread Number Thread Type Number Thread Number Thread Number Thread
63 2 M20x1.5 63 4 M20x1.5 2 M12x1.5
71 2 M20x1.5 71 4 M20x1.5 2 M12x1.5
80 2 M25x1.5 80 4 M25x1.5 2 M12x1.5
90 2 M25x1.5 90 4 M25x1.5 2 M12x1.5
100 2 M32x1.5 100 4 M32x1.5 2 M12x1.5
112 2 M32x1.5 112 4 M32x1.5 2 M12x1.5
132 2 M32x1.5 132 4 M32x1.5 2 M12x1.5 2 M16x1.5
160/ 160/
180/..X 2 M40x1.5 2 M12x1.5 2 M16x1.5 180/..X 2 M40x1.5 2 M12x1.5 2 M16x1.5
180/ 180/
200/..X 2 M40x1.5 2 M12x1.5 2 M16x1.5 200/..X 2 M40x1.5 2 M12x1.5 2 M16x1.5
200 2 M40x1.5 2 M12x1.5 2 M16x1.5 200 2 M40x1.5 2 M12x1.5 2 M16x1.5
If the motor is supplied with a certified cable gland, the clamping nuts of the cable gland must be tightened to
the torque specified in the following table.
Clamping nut
Cable gland
tightening torque [Nm]
M20x1.5 6
M25x1.5 8
M32x1.5 12
Cable gland
M40x1.5 16
7.3.3 Permissible Ambient Temperature Range
The permissible ambient temperature range for all motors is -20°C...+40 °C. A greater am bient temperature
range of -20°C...+ 60°C is permissible with motors for operation in Zones 21 and 22. However, this does not
apply for the option brake and external fan! The rated power must however be reduced to 72% of the
catalogue value.
If the maximum ambient temperature is between +40° C and +60°C, the po wer output should be inversely
linearly interpolated between 100% and 72%. In this case thermal protection of the motor by means of a
thermistor sensor is mandatory. The motor connection cables and the cable glands must be suitable for
temperatures of at least 80°C.
7.3.4 Painting
Motors for Zone 21 and Zone 22 are provided with suitable painting ex-works.
Subsequent painting may only be carried out after consultation with Getriebebau NORD or with a workshop
which is approved for the repair of explosion protected motors. Compliance with the valid standards and
regulations is mandatory.
7.3.5 IEC-B14 Motors
The B14 flanged bearing cover must be covered with a protective foil which must be removed before the
motor is fastened in place. Even if they are not required, All four fixing screws must be screwed into the
flanged bearing cover! The fixing screw threads must be inserted with a sealant, e.g. Loctite 242.
The maximum depth for screwing into the bearing cover is 2 x d.
www.nord.com B1091-GB-4613 -17-
209
7. Motors for use in Zone 21 and Zone 22
according to EN 60079-0 and IEC 60079
If the end of the shaft faces upwards, e.g. version IMV3, IMV6, a cover must be provided by the operator /
installer, which prevents foreign bodies from falling into the fan cover of the motor (see DIN EN 60079-0,
Item 17, or IEC 60079). This must not obstruct the fan from cooling the motor. If the end of the shaft faces
downwards, e.g. versions IMV1, IMV5, motors for Zone 21 and Zone 22 are provided with a protective cover
on the fan cover. A handwheel on the second end of the shaft is not permitted for versions with the "shaft
end downwards".
Unless otherwise specified for operating modes and tolerances in the test certificate, the power rating plate
or in IECEx CoC, electrical machinery is designed for continuous operation and normal infrequent start-ups
where insignificant start-up heating occurs. The motors may only be used for the operating mode specified
on the type plate.
The installation instructions must be strictly observed.
7.4 Structure and method of use
The motors are self-cooling. Rotary shaft seals are fitted both on the drive side (DS) and on the ventilation
side (VS). Motors for Zone 21 and Zone 22 have metal fans. Motors with brakes for Zone 22 (Category 3D,
non-conducting dust) have a special plastic fan. The motors are produced with protection class IP55,
optionally protection class IP 66, (Zone 22 - non-conductive dust, EPL Dc) or IP66 (Zone 21, EPL Db). Under
normal operating conditions, the surface temperature does not exceed the surface temperature stated on the
type plate.
7.5 Minimum cross section of bonding conductors
Cross-section of phase conductor Minimum cross-section of the associated
of the installation S in mm2 earth lead S P in mm2
S 16 S
16 < S 35 16
S > 35 0.5 S
When connecting a lead to the external earth, the minimum cross-section must be 4 mm2.
7.6 Maintenance
The voltage must always be switched off and secured against being switched on again before
opening the motor!
Notice ! Higher temperatures than the maximum permitted surface temperature of the housing may
be present inside the motor. The motor must therefore never be opened in hazardous dust
atmospheres! The motors must be checked and tested regularly for functional safety! The applicable
national standards and regulations must be complied with!
Impermissibly thick dust deposits > 5 mm must not be allowed to accumulate! If functional safety cannot be
ensured, the motor may not be operated! When the ball bearings are replaced, the rotary shaft seals must
also be replaced. FKM rotary shaft seals as specified by Getriebebau NORD must be used. Ensure that they
are fitted correctly! The rotary shaft seals must be lubricated on the external rings and on the seal lips. If an
explosion protected gear unit is flanged dust-tight to the motor, an NBR rotary shaft seal can be used on the
drive side of the motor if the gear oil temperature does not exceed 85° C. Only original parts may be used as
spare parts with the exception of standardised, commercially available and equivalent parts. This also
applies in particular to seals and connection components. Parts for terminal boxes or spare parts for external
earthing must be ordered according to the spare parts list in the operating instructions.
The functionality of seals, rotary shaft seals and cable glands must be regularly checked!
Maintenance of the dust protection is of paramount importance for explosion protection. Maintenance
must only be performed in a specialist workshop by qualified personnel. We urgently recommend that the
general overhaul is carried out by NORD Service.
-18- B1091-GB-4613 www.nord.com
210
8. Options for motors for
use in Zone 22
8.1 Inverter operation option
ATEX NORD motors for Zone 22 are suitable for inverter operation due to the design of their insulation
system. Because of the variable speed range, temperature monitoring with PTC resistors or temperature
monitors is necessary. For safe planning and use, the engineering guideline for the operating and assembly
instruction B1091-1 must be observed. The engineering guideline provides information about the necessary
requirements for inverter operation and about the permitted speed ranges.
8.2 External fan option
Motors with the additional labelling F (e.g. 80S/4 3D F) are equipped with an external fan and must be
monitored via the integrated temperature sensor.
Notice!
The motor may only be operated together with the external fan! A failure of the external fan can lead
to the motor overheating and therefore endanger property and/or persons. Observe the operating
instructions for the external fan!
The power supply for the external fan is provided independently via the external fan terminal box. The
external fan power supply must be identical to the voltage rating given on the type plate. The external fan
must be protected against overheating with suitable monitoring equipment! The IP protection classes of the
external fan and motor may be different. The lower IP protection class applies to the drive unit. The cable
glands must at least correspond to the protection type specified on the type plate. Unused openings must be
closed with plugs, which at least correspond to the protection class of the motor.
External fans and motors for use in explosion hazard areas have Ex labelling according to Directive 94/9 EC.
This labelling must be present on the external fan and on the motor. If the labelling of the external fan and
the motor differ, the lowest designated explosion protection applies to the entire drive. The maximum
specified temperature stated in the surface temperature data for the individual components applies for the
entire drive unit. In this context, it may be necessary to take into account any gear units that may be present.
Contact Getriebebau NORD if there are any doubts. If any component in the entire drive does not have an
Ex designation, then the entire drive may not be operated in an Ex area.
8.3 Return stop option
Motors with the additional labelling RLS (e.g. 80S/4 3D RLS) are equipped with a return stop. Motors with
return stops have an arrow marking the direction of rotation on the fan cover. The arrow points in the
direction of rotation of the motor. When connecting the motor and during motor control, it must be ensured
that the motor can only operate in the correct direction of rotation, e.g. by means of a rotary field test.
Switching the motor to the blocked rotation direction, i.e. incorrect rotation direction, can lead to damage.
Return stops operate without wear from a speed of approx. 800 rpm Return stops must not be operated at
speeds under 800 rpm to prevent impermissible heating and rapid wear of the return stop. This must be
taken into account for motors with a frequency of 50 Hz and poles 8, and for motors with frequency
inverters.
www.nord.com B1091-GB-4613 -19-
211
8. Options for motors for
use in Zone 22
8.4 Brake option
Motors with the additional labelling BRE (e.g. 80S/4 3D BRE 10) are equipped with a brake and must be
monitored via the integrated temperature sensor. If the temperature sensor of one of the components (motor
or brake) is triggered, the entire drive must be safely shut down. The motor and brake PTC's must be
connected in series.
The brake may be used as a holding brake with up to 4 activations per hour.
An optional manual release (with a lockable manual release lever) may only be used if no explosive
atmosphere is present.
Notice!
Observe the operating instructions for the brake!
The DC voltage supply for the brake must be implemented via a rectifier located in the motor terminal box or
via a directly supplied voltage. The brake voltage shown on the type plate must be complied with.
The power supply lines must not be laid in the same cable together with the temperature sensor circuit.
The brake functionality must be checked before start-up. There should be no rubbing noises, as this could
lead to impermissible excessive heating.
-20- B1091-GB-4613 www.nord.com
212
9. Spare parts drawing and
spare parts list
Item No. Description Item No. Description
00 Rotor with shaft 918 Parallel key
902 A bearing cover 924 Screw-on foot (Size 100-132)
902.1 Bolt 924.1 Hexagon head bolt
902.2 Hexagonal nut 924.2 Spring lock washer
904 Radial packing ring 924.3 Hexagonal nut
905 A bearing 929 B bearing
906 Ball bearing shim 932 B-bearing cover
907 Terminal box frame 932.1 Cylindrical bolt
907.1 Chassis connection terminal wire clamp 932.2 Hexagonal nut
907.2 Cheese head screw 933 Radial packing ring
908 Terminal box cover 939 Fan
908.1 Cylindrical bolt 940 Fan cover
909 Terminal box frame seal 940.1 Cheese head screw
910 Terminal box cover seal 940.2 Countersink screw B3
911 Terminal board 941 Parallel key
911.1 Cylindrical bolt 942 947 Circlip
911.5 Spring lock washer 948 Circlip
912 Mini-terminal 952 Clamping bush
912.1 Cheese head screw 953 Cable gland
913 Spacer 955 Blind plug
913.1 Cylindrical bolt 956 Blind plug
913.2 Spring lock washer 980 Protective shield
916 Stator with winding 988 Sealing ring
916.1 Equipotential bonding terminal 989 Type plate
916.2 Hollow dowel pin 989.1 Cheese head screw
www.nord.com B1091-GB-4613 -21-
213
10. Conformity Declaration
-22- B1091-GB-4613 www.nord.com
214
10. Conformity Declaration
www.nord.com B1091-GB-4613 -23-
215
10. Conformity Declaration
-24- B1091-GB-4613 www.nord.com
216
217
218
Commissioning
from page 148
GB
BU 0200
SK 200E
Frequency inverter manual
219
SK 200E Manual for frequency inverters Safety information
2 BU 0200 GB-4411
220
221
SK 200E Manual for frequency inverters Concerning this document
Documentation
Designation: BU0200 GB
Part No.: 607 20 02
Device series: SK 200E, SK 210E, SK 220E, SK 230E, SK 205E, SK 215E, SK 225E, SK 235E
Device types: SK 2xxE-250-112-O ... SK 2xxE-750-112-O,
0.25 - 0.75kW, 1~ 100-120V, Output 230V
SK 2xxE-250-123-A ... SK 2xxE-111-123-A, 0.25 - 1.1kW, 1~ 220-240V
1
SK 2xxE-250-323-A ... SK 2xxE-112-323-A, 0.25 - 11.0kW, 3~ 220-240V
2
SK 2xxE-550-340-A ... SK 2xxE-222-340-A, 0.55 - 22.0kW, 3~ 380-500V
Version list
Designation of Software Comments
previous versions Version
BU 0200 GB, March 2009 V 1.1 R1 First version based on BU 0500 DGB / 2008
Part No. 607 2002 / 1009
Further revisions:
March, December 2010, May 2011
For an overview of the changes in the above versions: see version May 2011 ( Part No.: 6072001/2011)
BU 0200 GB, October 2011 V 1.3 R1 Implementation of SK 2x0E, Size 4 (up to 22kW)
CoUUHFWLRQRIWHFKQLFDOGDWD6«
Part No. 607 2002 / 4411 Adaptation of parameter names
Illustration of jumper for integrated mains filter of the mains
unit SK CU4-9«
Publisher
Getriebebau NORD GmbH & Co. KG
Rudolf-Diesel-Str. 1 x D-22941 Bargteheide, Germany x http://www.nord.com/
Tel.: +49 (0) 45 32 / 401-0 x Fax +49 (0) 45 32 / 401-555
1
Size 4 (5.5 ± 11.0 KW) only in the versions SK 2x0E
2
Size 4 (11.0 ± 22.0 KW) only in the versions SK 2x0E
4 BU 0200 GB-4411
222
SK 200E Manual for frequency inverters Concerning this document
Intended use of the frequency inverter
Compliance with the operating instructions is necessary for fault-free operation and the
acceptance of possible warranty claims. These operating instructions must be read before
working with the device!
These operating instructions contain important information about servicing. They must
therefore be kept close to the device.
SK 2xxE frequency inverters are devices for industrial and commercial plants for operating
three-phase asynchronous motors with squirrel-cage rotors. These motors must be suitable
for operation with frequency inverters. Other loads must not be connected to the devices.
SK 2xxE frequency inverters are devices for fixed installation on motors or in systems in the
vicinity of the motors to be operated. All details regarding technical data and
permissible conditions at the installation site must be complied with.
Commissioning (commencement of the intended use) is not permitted until it has been ensured
that the machine complies with the EMC Directive 2004/108/EEC and that the conformity of
the end product meets the Machinery Directive 2006/42/EEC (observe EN 60204).
¤ Getriebebau NORD GmbH & Co. KG, 2011
BU 0200 GB-4411 5
223
SK 200E Manual for frequency inverters
1 GENERAL INFORMATION .................................................................................................... 10
1.1 Overview ............................................................................................................ 11
1.2 Delivery .............................................................................................................. 12
1.3 Scope of supply ................................................................................................. 12
1.4 Safety and installation information .................................................................... 13
1.5 Certifications ...................................................................................................... 15
1.5.1 European EMC Directive ........................................................................................ 15
1.5.2 Approval for UL and cUL ........................................................................................ 15
1.5.3 C-Tick labelling ....................................................................................................... 16
1.5.4 RoHS compliance ................................................................................................... 16
1.6 Nomenclature / type codes ................................................................................ 17
1.6.1 Type codes / Frequency inverter - basic device...................................................... 18
1.6.2 Type codes / Adapter unit - frequency inverter ....................................................... 18
1.6.3 Type codes / Adapter unit - Technology Unit .......................................................... 19
1.6.4 Type codes / Optional modules .............................................................................. 20
1.7 Version with protection class IP55 / IP66 .......................................................... 21
2 ASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION ....................................................................................... 22
2.1 Installation and assembly .................................................................................. 22
2.1.1 Mounting the adapter unit ....................................................................................... 23
2.1.2 Adapters for Different Motors .................................................................................. 24
2.1.3 Installing the SK 2xxE ............................................................................................. 25
2.1.4 Optional locations for the "SK TI4-«DGDSWHUXQLW ................................................. 26
2.2 SK 2xxE dimensions .......................................................................................... 28
2.2.1 Power rating / Motor size ........................................................................................ 28
2.2.2 SK 2xxE mounted on motor .................................................................................... 29
2.2.3 Wall mounting of the SK 2xxE ................................................................................ 30
2.3 Brake resistor (BR) ............................................................................................ 33
2.3.1 Internal brake resistor SK BRI4-«.......................................................................... 33
2.3.2 External brake resistor SK BRE4-« ....................................................................... 34
2.3.3 External brake resistor dimensions ......................................................................... 34
2.3.4 Brake resistor, electrical data.................................................................................. 35
2.4 Overvoltage filter SK CIF ................................................................................... 36
2.5 Wiring guidelines ............................................................................................... 37
2.6 Electrical Connection ......................................................................................... 38
2.7 Electrical connection of the power unit .............................................................. 40
2.7.1 Mains connections (L1, L2, L3, EARTH)................................................................. 41
2.7.2 Motor cable (U, V, W, earth) ................................................................................... 42
2.7.3 Brake resistor connection (-B, +B) .......................................................................... 42
2.7.4 Electromechanical brake (only SK 2x5E) ................................................................ 43
2.7.5 Mains supply jumpers ............................................................................................. 44
2.8 Electrical connection of SK 2xxE control unit .................................................... 45
2.8.1 SK 2xxE control terminal versions .......................................................................... 46
2.8.2 Details of the SK 2x0E control connections ............................................................ 48
2.8.3 Details of the SK 2x5E control connections ............................................................ 51
2.8.4 Control connections for SK 2xxE communication ................................................... 53
2.8.5 Colour and contact assignments for incremental encoders (HTL) .......................... 54
2.9 Plug connectors ................................................................................................. 55
2.9.1 Plug connectors for power connections .................................................................. 55
2.9.2 Plug connectors for control connection ................................................................... 57
2.10 ATEX Zone 22 for SK 2xxE ............................................................................. 59
2.10.1 Modified SK 2xxE for compliance with Category 3D ............................................. 60
2.10.2 Options for ATEX Zone 22 3D .............................................................................. 60
2.10.3 Maximum output voltage and torque reduction ..................................................... 63
2.10.4 Commissioning information................................................................................... 64
2.10.5 EC declaration of conformity ................................................................................. 65
2.11 Outdoor installation .......................................................................................... 66
6 BU 0200 GB-4411
224
Table of Contents
3 OPTIONS ................................................................................................................................67
3.1 Overview of optional modules ............................................................................68
3.1.1 Overview of internal customer units SK CU4-« ..................................................... 68
3.1.2 Overview of external technology units SK TU4-« .................................................. 70
3.2 Installation of optional modules ..........................................................................73
3.2.1 Installation of internal customer units SK CU4-« ................................................... 73
3.2.2 Installation of external technology units SK TU4-« ................................................ 74
3.3 Control connections and configuration ...............................................................76
3.4 Details of internal Customer Units SK CU4-« ...................................................77
3.4.1 Mains Unit, SK CU4-24V-« .................................................................................... 77
3.4.2 Potentiometer Adapter, SK CU4-POT ..................................................................... 80
3.4.3 SK CU4-IOE-, I/O extension ................................................................................... 82
3.4.4 PROFIBUS DP, SK CU4-PBR ................................................................................ 88
3.4.5 CANopen, SK CU4-CAO......................................................................................... 90
3.4.6 DeviceNet, SK CU4-DEV ........................................................................................ 92
3.4.7 Electronic brake rectifier, SK CU4-MBR.................................................................. 94
3.4.8 Setpoint converter, SK CU4-REL ............................................................................ 96
3.4.9 Direction selection switch and potentiometer SK TIE4-SWT and SK TIE4-POT ..... 98
3.5 Details of external Technology Units SK TU4-« ...............................................99
3.5.1 Connection unit SK TI4-TU-BUS /-NET / -MSW ..................................................... 99
3.5.2 Mains unit, SK TU4-24V-«(only SK 2x5E) .......................................................... 103
3.5.3 PotentiometerBox SK TU4-POT-« ....................................................................... 104
3.5.4 I/O Extension, SK TU4-IOE, ...-M12...................................................................... 105
3.5.5 PROFIBUS DP, SK TU4-PBR, ...-M12.................................................................. 110
3.5.6 CANopen, SK TU4-CAO, ...-M12 .......................................................................... 114
3.5.7 DeviceNet, SK TU4-DEV, ...-M12 ......................................................................... 118
3.5.8 EtherCAT, SK TU4-ECT(-C) ................................................................................. 122
3.5.9 Maintenance switch, SK TU4-MSW-« ................................................................. 126
4 DISPLAYS AND CONTROL OF THE SK 2XXE ..................................................................127
4.1 Diagnostic LEDs on the Frequency Inverter ....................................................127
'LDJQRVWLF/('VRQ6.[( 6« ............................................................... 128
4.1.2 Diagnostic LEDs on the SK 2x0E (S 4) and SK 2x5E ........................................... 129
4.2 Overview of external control devices................................................................131
4.2.1 SimpleBox, SK CSX-3H ........................................................................................ 132
4.2.2 ParameterBox SK PAR-3H ................................................................................... 137
4.2.3 ParameterBox parameters .................................................................................... 143
4.2.4 ParameterBox error messages ............................................................................. 145
5 COMMISSIONING.................................................................................................................148
5.1 Factory settings ................................................................................................148
5.2 Commissioning of the frequency inverter .........................................................149
5.2.1 Connection ............................................................................................................ 149
5.2.2 Configuration......................................................................................................... 150
5.2.3 Commissioning examples ..................................................................................... 155
5.3 KTY84-130 connection .....................................................................................158
5.4 AS Interface ......................................................................................................160
5.4.1 The bus system ..................................................................................................... 160
5.4.2 Features ................................................................................................................ 161
5.4.3 Bus structure and technology................................................................................ 162
5.4.4 Commissioning of the AS Interface ....................................................................... 163
5.4.5 Technical data for AS interface ............................................................................. 166
5.4.6 Certificate .............................................................................................................. 167
BU 0200 GB-4411 7
225
SK 200E Manual for frequency inverters
6 PARAMETERISATION ........................................................................................................ 168
6.1 Parameterisation of frequency inverter SK 2xxE............................................. 170
6.1.1 Operating displays ................................................................................................ 173
6.1.2 Basic parameters (Frequency inverter) ................................................................. 175
6.1.3 Motor data / characteristic curve parameters ........................................................ 182
6.1.4 Speed control........................................................................................................ 188
6.1.5 Control clamps ...................................................................................................... 192
6.1.6 Extra functions ...................................................................................................... 211
6.1.7 Positioning ............................................................................................................ 228
6.1.8 Information (Frequency inverter)........................................................................... 229
6.2 Parameterisation of I/O - extension SK xU4-IOE-« ....................................... 238
6.2.1 Basic parameters (I/O - extension) ....................................................................... 238
6.2.2 Information (I/O - extension) ................................................................................. 240
6.3 Parameter overview, User settings ................................................................. 242
6.3.1 Overview of frequency inverter parameters .......................................................... 242
6.3.2 Parameter overview, I/O extension ....................................................................... 255
6.4 Parameterisation adapter SK EPG-3H ............................................................ 256
6.4.1 Parameterisation adapter requirements................................................................ 256
6.4.2 Using the parameterisation adapter ...................................................................... 256
6.4.3 Parameterisation adapter LEDs ............................................................................ 258
6.4.4 Parameterisation adapter FAQs ........................................................................... 258
7 OPERATING STATUS MESSAGES ................................................................................... 259
7.1 SimpleBox display ........................................................................................... 260
7.2 Table of possible error messages ................................................................... 260
7.2.1 Table of possible frequency inverter error messages ........................................... 260
7.2.2 Table of possible error messages in the I/O extension module ............................ 266
7.3 Table of possible warning messages .............................................................. 267
7.4 Table of possible reasons for the operating status "Switch-on block"............. 269
8 TECHNICAL DATA .............................................................................................................. 270
8.1 General data for frequency inverter series SK 2xxE ....................................... 270
8.2 General data for mains/setpoint modules ........................................................ 271
8.3 Electrical data for frequency inverter ............................................................... 272
8.3.1 Electrical data 1~115V .......................................................................................... 273
8.3.2 Electrical data 1~230V .......................................................................................... 274
8.3.3 Electrical data 3~230V .......................................................................................... 275
8.3.4 Electrical data 3~400V .......................................................................................... 278
8 BU 0200 GB-4411
226
Table of Contents
9 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ..............................................................................................281
9.1 Setpoint processing in the SK 2xxE .................................................................281
9.2 Process controller .............................................................................................282
9.2.1 Process controller application example ................................................................. 282
9.2.2 Process controller parameter settings ................................................................... 283
9.3 Electromagnetic compatibility ...........................................................................284
9.4 EMC limit value classes ...................................................................................285
9.5 Reduced output power .....................................................................................286
9.5.1 Increased heat dissipation due to pulse frequency ............................................... 286
9.5.2 Reduced overcurrent due to time .......................................................................... 287
9.5.3 Reduced overcurrent due to output frequency ...................................................... 288
9.5.4 Reduced output current due to mains voltage....................................................... 289
9.5.5 Reduced output current due to the heat sink temperature .................................... 289
9.6 Operation with FI circuit breakers.....................................................................290
9.7 System bus .......................................................................................................290
9.8 Energy efficiency ..............................................................................................292
9.9 Motor data - characteristic curves ....................................................................293
9.9.1 50Hz characteristic curve ...................................................................................... 293
9.9.2 87Hz characteristic curve (only 400V devices) ..................................................... 295
9.9.3 100Hz characteristic curve (only 400V devices) ................................................... 296
9.10 Standardisation of setpoint/actual values .......................................................297
9.11 Definition of setpoint and actual value processing (frequencies) ...................298
9.12 Maintenance and servicing information ..........................................................299
9.12.1 Maintenance Instructions .................................................................................... 299
9.12.2 Repair information ............................................................................................... 300
9.13 Abbreviations in this manual ..........................................................................301
10 KEYWORD INDEX ..............................................................................................................302
BU 0200 GB-4411 9
227
228
1 General information
1.1 Overview
This manual describes two very similar basic versions of the SK 200E product family.
Wherever the SK 2xxE is referred to, this concerns information which applies to all devices in this family.
If the information exclusively applies to the versions SK 205E / SK215E / SK225E / SK235E, this is apparent
from the designation SK 2x5E.
If the information only refers to the versions equipped with an integrated mains unit and integrated analog
inputs (SK 200E, SK210E, SK220E, SK230E), this is apparent from the designation SK 2x0E.
Functionalities
All models of the SK 2xxE series have the following functionalities:
Basic features of the SK 2xxE:
x High starting torque and precise motor speed control setting with sensorless current vector control
x Can be installed directly on, or near to the motor.
x Permissible ambient temperature -25°C t o 50°C (p lease refer to the technical data)
x Integrated EMC mains filter for limit curve A Category C2 or C3 (not for 115V devices)
x Automatic measurement of the stator resistance for precise determination of motor data
x Programmable direct current braking
x Integrated brake chopper for 4 quadrant operation, optional brake resistors (internal/external)
x Temperature sensor input (TF+/TF-)
x Evaluation of an incremental encoder possible via digital inputs
x NORD System bus for connection of additional modules
x Four separate online switchable parameter sets
x 8x DIP switches for minimal configuration
x Diagnostic LEDs (SK 2x5E incl. signal statuses of DIs / DOs)
x RS232/RS485 interface via RJ12 plug
x Plug-in EEPROM data storage
x Integrated PosiCon positioning control (Manual BU 0210)
x CANopen absolute value encoder via the NORD System bus
Differences between the individual versions (SK 200E / SK ( « 6. 235E) are summarised in the
following table and will be described in this manual.
Additional features Size 1 «3
Feature 200E 205E 210E 215E 220E 225E 230E 235E
Integrated 24V power supply x x x x
Optionally available 24V mains unit x x x x
Number of digital inputs (DIN) 4 4 3 3 4 4 3 3
Number of digital outputs (DO) 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1
Number of analogue inputs (AIN) 2 2 1 1
Additional 2 potentiometers for minimal configuration x x x x
Electromechanical brake control x x x x
Safe pulse block (STO / SS1) (see BU 0230) x x x x
AS interface (4I / 4O) x x x x
BU 0200 GB-4411 Subject to technical alterations 11
229
SK 200E Manual for frequency inverters
Additional features, Size 4
Feature 200E 210E 220E 230E
Integrated 24V power supply x x x x
Number of digital inputs (DIN) 4 3 4 3
Number of digital outputs (DO) 2 2 2 2
Number of analog inputs (AIN) 2 2 1 1
Additional 2 potentiometers for minimal configuration x x x x
Electromechanical brake control x x x x
Safe pulse block (STO / SS1) (see BU 0230) x x
AS interface (4I / 4O) x x
1.2 Delivery
Check the equipment immediately after delivery/unpacking for transport damage such as deformation or
loose parts.
If there is any damage, contact the carrier immediately and carry out a thorough assessment.
Important! This also applies even if the packaging is undamaged.
1.3 Scope of supply
Standard version: IP55 (Size 1 to Size 3 optionally, IP66)
Integrated brake chopper
Integrated EMC mains filter for limit curve A Category C2 or C3
(not for 115V devices)
Operating instructions as PDF file on CD ROM
incl. NORD CON, (PC-based parameterisation software)
Available accessories: Braking resistor, required for energy feedback Section 2.3
(Selection) Matching RJ12 to SUB-D9 adapter cable to connection to a PC
SK CSX-3H, SimpleBox, 4-digit 7-segment LED display
SK PAR-3H, ParameterBox, plain text LCD display
Expansion module:
internal SK CU4-IOE, internal I/O extension
SK CU4-PBR, internal Profibus module
SK CU4-CAO, internal CANopen module
SK CU4-DEV, internal DeviceNet module
SK CU4-24V-123-B, internal 24V mains unit 1~ 230V
SK CU4-24V-140-B, internal 24V mains unit 1~ 400V
SK CU4-POT, potentiometer adapter: internal potentiometer/switch module
SK CU4-REL, internal setpoint converter for bipolar analog signals, incl. 2 relays
SK CU4-MBR, internal brake rectifier for controlling electromechanical brakes
SK TIE4-POT, potentiometer module
SK TIE4-SWT, direction selector switch module
12 Subject to technical alterations BU 0200 GB-4411
230
231
232
233
SK 200E Manual for frequency inverters
Ä7KHWRUTXHYDOXHIRUWKHILeld wiring terminals for mains circuit terminals, motor terminals, break terminals and breaking
UHVLVWRUWHUPLQDOVPXVWEH«OE-LQ «1P 7KHWRUTXHYDOXHIRUWKHILHOGZLULQJWHUPLQDOVIRUFRQWUROFLUFXLW
WHUPLQDOVPXVWEH«OE-in (0«1P ´
The tightening torque value for the terminals the mains and motor cables, the brake and the brake resistor
PXVW EH EHWZHHQ « OE-LQ « 1P &RQWURO WHUPLQDOV PXVW EH WLJKWHQHG ZLWK « OE-in
«1P
cUL Approval - File No. E171342
³cUL only in combination with SK CIF-340-30 or SK CIF-340-60 for 380-500V models
and SK CIF-323-20 or SK CIF-323-40 for 3 phase 200-9 UDWHG PRGHOV´ 7KH
recognized transient surge suppression filter board has to be connected between supply
and the input of the drive according to the instruction manual.
Remarks:
x cUL approval for 110-120V models provided without filter board´
cUL compliant, only in combination with SK CIF-340-30 orr SK CIF-340-60 for 380-500V types and
SK CIF-323-20 or SK CIF-323-40 for 200-240V types. The appropriate voltage limitation filter
(SK CIF xxx xx) must be connected between the power input and the frequency inverter (input) according to
the instructions for use.
Remarks:
x cUL conformity applies for 100-120V types without voltage limitation filter
³6XLWDEOH)RU8VH2Q$&LUFXLW&DSDEOH2I'HOLYHULQJ1RW0RUH7KDQUPV6\PPHWULFDO$PSHUHV Volts maxi-
mum (SK 2xxE-xxx-112), 240 Volts maximum (SK 2xxE-xxx-323) or 500 Volts maximum (SK 2xxE-xxx-340) and when
protected by RK5 class or faster fuses according to instruction manual chapter 8.3´
Suitable for use with mains with a maximum short circuit current of 5,000A rms (symmetrical), 120V
maximum (SK 2xxE-xxx112), 240V maximum (SK 2xxE-xxx323), or 500V maximum (SK 2xxE-xxx340), and
with protection with a Class RK5 or faster fuse as described in Section 8.3.
³Suitable For Use On A Circuit Capable Of Delivering Not More Than 5000 rms Symmetrical Amperes, 120 Volts
maximum (SK 2xxE-xxx-112), 240 Volts maximum (SK 2xxE-xxx-323) or 500 Volts maximum (SK 2xxE-xxx-340) and
when protected by Circuit Breaker (inverse time trip type) in accordance with UL ´ FXUUHQW DQG voltage ratings
according to instruction manual.´
Suitable for use with mains with a maximum short circuit current of 5,000A (symmetrical), 120V maximum
(SK 2xxE-xxx112), 240V maximum (SK 2xxE-xxx323), or 500V maximum (SK 2xxE-xxx340) and with
protection via a UL Category DIVQ circuit breaker (thermal and electromagnetic trigger) in accordance with
UL 489. For current and voltage ratings, please refer to Section 8.3.
SK 2xxE frequency inverters include a motor overload protection. Further technical details can be found in
Section 8.3.
1.5.3 C-Tick labelling
NORD SK 2xxE series frequency inverters fulfil all the relevant regulations in
Australia in New Zealand.
N 23134
1.5.4 RoHS compliance
SK 2xxE series frequency inverters are designed to be RoHS compliant
according to Directive 2002/95/EU.
16 Subject to technical alterations BU 0200 GB-4411
234
1 General information
1.6 Nomenclature / type codes
Unique type codes have been defined for the individual modules and devices. These provide individual
details of the device type and its electrical data, protection class, fixing version and special versions. A
differentiation is made according to the following groups:
Group Example of type code
Frequency inverter - basic device SK 205E-550-323-A (-C)
Adapter unit - frequency inverter SK TI4-1-205-1 (-C-WMK-1)
Connection unit - Technology Unit SK TI4-TU-BUS (-C-WMK-TU)
Optional modules SK TU4-CAO (-C-M12)
Extension modules SK TIE4-M12-CAO
Frequency inverter
Connection unit
The type designation resulting from this type code can be obtained from the name plate which is attached to
or printed on the relevant module.
Example: Frequency inverter name plate
BU 0200 GB-4411 Subject to technical alterations 17
235
SK 200E Manual for frequency inverters
1.6.1 Type codes / Frequency inverter - basic device
SK 205E-370-323-A (-C)
IP protection class: Standard = IP55, C = ³FRDWHG³,3 (Size 1 to Size 3 = IP66)
Radio interference filter: O = without, A = Class A1, B = Class B1
Mains voltage: x12 = 115V, x23 = 230V, x40 = 400V
Number of mains phases: 1xx = single phase, 3xx = 3-phase
Digits before decimal point for power: 0 = 0.xx, 1 = 0x.x0, 2 = 0xx.0
Device nominal power: 250 = 0.25kW, 370 = 0.37kW, ... 222 = 22.0kW
Device series: SK 200E, SK 205E, SK 210E, SK 215E,
SK 220E, SK 225E, SK 230E, SK 235E
(...) Options, only implemented if required.
1.6.2 Type codes / Adapter unit - frequency inverter
SK TI4-1-205-1 (-C-WMK-1)
Wall mounting kit: -1 = Size 1 + 2, -2 = Size 3
IP protection class: Standard = IP55, C = ³coated³IP66 (Size 1 to Size 3 = IP66)
Mains connection: 1 = 1~ 115/230V*, 3 = 3~ 230/400V*
Suitable device types: 200 = SK 200E, 205 = SK 205E, 210 = SK 210E,
215 = SK 215E, 220 = SK 220E, 225 = SK 225E,
230 = SK 230E, 235 = SK 235E
Size: 1 = Size 1, 2 = Size 2, 3 = Size 3, 4 = Size 4
Device series: SK TI4 = Adapter unit SK TI4
*) The voltage depends on the frequency inverter used;
please also refer to the technical data.
(...) Options, only implemented if required.
18 Subject to technical alterations BU 0200 GB-4411
236
1 General information
1.6.3 Type codes / Adapter unit - Technology Unit
SK TI4-TU-BUS (-C-WMK-TU)
Wall mounting kit: -1 = Size 1 + 2, -2 = Size 3, -3 = Size 4
IP protection class: Standard = IP55, C = ³coated³IP66
Suitable device types: NET = optional net module (e.g. TU4-24V-« )
BUS = optional bus module (e.g. CANopen: TU4-CAO)
Group: TU = Technology unit
Device series: SK TI4 = Adapter unit SK TI4
(...) Options, only implemented if required.
Adapter unit
SK TI4-TU-xxx (-«
Electrical connections
Internal
(Control)
Optional module
SK TU4-xxx (-«
BU 0200 GB-4411 Subject to technical alterations 19
237
SK 200E Manual for frequency inverters
1.6.4 Type codes / Optional modules
For bus module or I/O extension
SK TU4-CAO (-C-M12)
M12 system connector: only TU4, alternative to terminals
IP protection class: Standard = IP55, C = ³coated³IP66
Option type: CAO = CANopen, PBR = Profibus, ECT = EtherCAT®
DEV = DeviceNet, IOE = I/O-Erweiterung
Option series: TU4 = external Technology Unit
CU4 = internal Customer Unit
(...) Options, only implemented if required.
For mains unit or potentiometer modules "PotentiometerBox"
SK TU4-24V-123-B (-C)
IP protection class: Standard = IP55, C = ³coated³IP66
Radio interference filter: B = Class B1
Mains connection: 123 = 1~ 230V*, 140 = 1~ 400V*
Option type: 24V = 24V mains unit, POT = potentiometer/switch module
Option series: TU4 = external Technology Unit,
CU4 = internal Customer Unit
*) The voltage depends on the frequency inverter used;
please also refer to the technical data.
(...) Options, only implemented if required.
Optional external
Technology Unit, SK TU4-«
Optional internal
Customer Unit, SK CU4-«
20 Subject to technical alterations BU 0200 GB-4411
238
239
240
241
242
2 Assembly and installation
2.1.3 Installing the SK 2xxE
In order to make the electrical connections to the SK 2xxE it may first be necessary to remove it from the
connection unit. To do this, remove the 4 fastening screws, so that the frequency inverter can be lifted off
vertically.
After the electrical connection of the power cables has been made, the frequency inverter can be replaced.
This must be carried out in a vertical direction relative to the connection unit without tilting. The PE cinch
plug can be used in order to ensure correct guidance.
In order to achieve the maximum protection class
IP55/IP66, care must be taken that all frequency
inverter fixing screws are gradually tightened
diametrically oppositely, with the torques stated in
the table below.
For the cable gland of the connecting cable,
appropriate screwed connections for cable cross-
section must be used.
Up to size 3 dissipation of the frequency inverter
Cinch plug
heat loss is by convection. This is assisted by the
airflow of the motor. Because of this, a reduction in
power for unventilated motors or wall-mounted
devices must be taken into account (for further
details see Section 8, Technical Data).
Heat dissipation must not be hindered by severe
contamination.
Size 4 frequency inverters dissipate their heat loss
via an integrated fan.
Frequency inverter size Screw size Tightening torque
Size 1 M5 x 45 3.5Nm ± 20%
Size 2 M5 x 45 3.5Nm ± 20%
Size 3 M5 x 45 3.5Nm ± 20%
Size 4 M8 x 20 5,0Nm ± 20%
BU 0200 GB-4411 Subject to technical alterations 25
243
SK 200E Manual for frequency inverters
2.1.4 Optional locations for the "SK TI4-«DGDSWHUXQLW
View from left Size 1 to 3
3L
4L
3AL 3BL
5L
6L 7L 8L
1 2
3R
4R
3BR 3AR
5R
8R 7R 6R
Top view View from right Size 1 to 3
3R 3L
3BR 3AR 9R 4R 4L 9L 3AL 3BL
5R 5L
8R 7R 6R 6L 7L 8L
View from right, Size 4 View from left, Size 4
The above drawings indicate the different installation locations for optional modules. Option location 1 is
used for implementation of an internal bus module or an internal power supply (not SK 2x0E). An internal
brake resistor can be implemented at option location 2. External bus modules, 24 V power supplies (not
SK 2x0E) or potentiometer modules can be fitted at option location 3L or 3R. The same applies for external
braking resistors. Option locations 4 and 5 are for the mounting of M12 sockets or plugs. Locations 6, 7 and
8 for sizes 1 to 3 require an additional extension from M12 to M16 so that M12 sockets and connectors
(Section 2.8.4) can be fitted. For size 4 devices, the option locations 6 - 8 are also in M16. Only one option
per option location is possible. The preferred installation location for M12 sockets or connectors should be
4L or 4R. An additional M32 hole (option location 9) is provided for the mains connection of size 4.
26 Subject to technical alterations BU 0200 GB-4411
244
2 Assembly and installation
Option Position Meaning Size Size
location Size 1 - 3 Size 4
1 Internal Mounting location for customer units
SK CU4-«
2 Internal Mounting location for
x internal brake resistor SK BRI4-«
3* on side Mounting location for
x external brake resistor SK BRE4-«
x external technology units SK TU4-«
x Control options, e.g. SK CU4-POT
x HARTING plug connectors
3 A/B* on side Cable gland M25 M25 Not available if location
3 is occupied or
SK TU4-«LVILWWHG
4 *, on side Cable gland M16 M16 Not available if
5* SK TU4-«LVILtted.
6 *, on side Cable gland M12 M16 Not available if location
7 *, 3 is occupied by
SK BRE4 or
8* SK TU4-«LVILtted
9* on side Cable gland -- M32 Preferably used for
mains cable
* R and L (right and left side)
BU 0200 GB-4411 Subject to technical alterations 27
245
SK 200E Manual for frequency inverters
2.2 SK 2xxE dimensions
2.2.1 Power rating / Motor size
Mains/power matching: SK 2xxE
Size
3 4
1~ 110-120V 1~ 200-240V 3~ 200-240V 3~ 380-500V
Size 1 0.25 ... 0.37kW 0.25 ... 0.55kW 0.37 ... 1.1kW 0.55 ... 2.2kW
Size 2 0.55 ... 0.75kW 0.75 ... 1.1kW 1.5 ... 2.2kW 3.0 ... 4.0kW
Size 3 - - 3.0 ... 4.0kW 5.5 ... 7.5kW
Size 4 - - 5.5 ... 7.5kW «N:
3
only available as SK 2x5E model
4
SK2x0E model only available in size 1
28 Subject to technical alterations BU 0200 GB-4411
246
2 Assembly and installation
2.2.2 SK 2xxE mounted on motor
Size Housing dimensions SK 2xxE / Motor Weight of SK 2xxE
without motor
FI Motor g g1 n o p
Approx. [kg]
Size 71 * 145 201 214
Size 80 165 195 236
Size 1 236 156 3.0
Size 90 S / L 183 200 251 / 276
Size 100 201 209 306
Size 80 165 202 236
Size 90 S / L 183 207 251 / 276
Size 2 266 176 4.1
Size 100 201 218 306
Size 112 228 228 326
Size 100 201 251 306
Size 3 Size 112 228 261 330 326 218 6.9
Size 132 S / M 266 262 373 / 411
Size 132 266 313 411
Size 4 Size 160 320 318 480 492 305 17.0
Size 180 358 335 614
All dimensions in [mm]
*) including additional adapter and seal (11015410, 13097000)
n
p
g1
g
BU 0200 GB-4411 Subject to technical alterations 29
247
248
249
SK 200E Manual for frequency inverters
2.2.3.3 Frequency inverter installation positions with wall-mounting kit
Installation of the frequency inverter close to the motor is permissible in the following installation
orientations.
0 1 2 3
0 1 2 3
Frequency inverter vertical vertical horizontal horizontal
Installation
Position of cooling fins ( / fan) bottom top on side on side
orientation
Wall mounting kit vertical vertical vertical horizontal
SK TIE4-WMK-1 (or -2) - ¥ ¥ ¥
Type
SK TIE4-WMK-3 ¥ - ¥ ¥
Wall mounting kit
SK TIE4-WMK-L-1 (or -2) - ¥ - ¥
32 Subject to technical alterations BU 0200 GB-4411
250
251
SK 200E Manual for frequency inverters
2.3.2 External brake resistor SK BRE4-«
The external brake resistor (available for SK [[(6«6 LVLQWHQGHGIRUHQHUJ\IHHGEDFNHJLQSXOVH
drives or lifting gear. Here, it may be necessary to plan for the exact brake resistor required.
For installation, an M20 screw connection with an adapter for M25 are supplied. The connecting wires for
the brake resistor are fed through this into the connection unit.
The brake resistor is attached to the side of the connection unit using 4 suitable M4 x 10 screws. Installation
of an SK BRE4-«LVQRWSRVVLEOHLQFRPELQDWLRQZLWKWKHZDOO-mounting kit SK TIE4-WMK(-L).
2.3.3 External brake resistor dimensions
Fixing dimensions
Resistor type Size A B C
d e
SK BRE4-1-100-100
SK BRE4-1-200-100 Size 1 150 178 61 83 32 4.3
SK BRE4-1-400-100
SK BRE4-2-100-200
Size 2 255 178 61 83 32 4.3
SK BRE4-2-200-200
All dimensions in mm
d
e
C
34 Subject to technical alterations BU 0200 GB-4411
252
2 Assembly and installation
2.3.4 Brake resistor, electrical data
Internal
Brake Max. continuous Energy Connecting
Inverter type Resistor type
resistor Resistance output / limit** consumption* cable or
SK 2xxE-« (IP54)
size (Pn) (Pmax) terminals
«-112-O SK BRI4-1-100-100
«-123-A 100 : 100 W / 25% 1.0 kWs
Part No. 275272005
Silicon flex
«-323-A SK BRI4-1-200-100 2
Size 1 200 : 100 W / 25% 1.0 kWs 2x 0.75mm
Part No. 275272008
approx. 275mm
«-340-A SK BRI4-1-400-100
400 : 100 W / 25% 1.0 kWs
Part No. 275272012
BW intern (DIP 8 = on)
«-323-A SK BRI4-2-100-200
100 : 200 W / 25% 2.0 kWs Silicon flex
Part No. 275272105
2
Size 2 2x 1.0mm
«-340-A SK BRI4-2-200-200
200 : 200 W / 25% 2.0 kWs approx. 275mm
Part No. 275272108
«-323-A SK BRI4-3-047-300 Silicone
47 : 300 W / 25% 3.0 kWs conductor
Part. No. 275272201
2
«-340-A SK BRI4-3-100-300 2x 1.5mm
100 : 300 W / 25% 3.0 kWs
Part. No. 275272205 approx. 275mm
Size 3
«-323-A SK BRI4-3-023-600 23 : 600 W / 25% 6.0 kWs Silicone
Part No. 275272800*** (2 x 47:) (2 x 300W) (2 x 3kWs) conductor
«-340-A SK BRI4-3-050-600 47 : 2x 2x 1.5mm
2
600 W / 25% 6.0 kWs
(2 x
Part No. 275272801*** (2 x 300W) (2 x 3kWs) approx. 275mm
100:)
*) Maximum once within 10s**
**) In order to prevent impermissible heating of the connection unit, the
continuous power is limited to 1/4 of the rated power of the brake resistor.
This also has a limiting effect on the power consumption.
***) Set consisting of 2 resistors to be connected in parallel
External
Max. continuous Energy Connecting
Inverter type Brake Resistor type
Resistance output / limit** consumption* cable or
SK 2xxE-« resistor size (IP67)
(Pn) (Pmax) terminals
«-112-O SK BRE4-1-100-100
«-123-A 100 : 100 W 2.2 kWs
Part No. 275273005 FEP flex
External brake resistor
2
«-323-A SK BRE4-1-200-100 2x 1.9mm
Size 1 200 : 100 W 2.2 kWs
Part No. 275273008 AWG 14/19
«-340-A SK BRE4-1-400-100 approx. 350mm
400 : 100 W 2.2 kWs
Part No. 275273012
«-323-A SK BRE4-2-100-200 FEP flex
100 : 200 W 4.4 kWs
Part No. 275273105 2
2x 1.9mm
Size 2
«-340-A SK BRE4-2-200-200 AWG 14/19
200 : 200 W 4.4 kWs
Part No. 275273108 approx. 500mm
*) Maximum once within 120s
BU 0200 GB-4411 Subject to technical alterations 35
253
254
255
256
2 Assembly and installation
Size 4: Handle or handle recess
To replace the FI, proceed in the opposite sequence:
5. For sizes S 1 to 3 special attention must be paid to the correct contacting of the PE pins. These are
located diagonally in 2 corners of the FI and the connection unit.
6. The FI can only be placed on the SK T14 in one orientation.
7. Evenly tighten the Allen screws in a cross-wise direction.
BU 0200 GB-4411 Subject to technical alterations 39
257
258
259
260
261
SK 200E Manual for frequency inverters
2.7.5 Mains supply jumpers
These jumpers are used to adapt the SK 2xxE to various types of network (e.g. IT network). As delivered,
the jumpers are plugged in the "normal position" (CY=ON) and are to be used in a network which is earthed
at the star point, with a neutral conductor for single phase devices!
To adapt the SK 2xxE to an IT network, the capacitors Cy must be disconnected from the PE. This is carried
out by changing a jumper position as shown in the diagram.
Here it must be noted that the specified degree of radio interference suppression changes. Further details
can be found in Section 9.3 EMC.
6L]H«
Size 4
44 Subject to technical alterations BU 0200 GB-4411
262
263
SK 200E Manual for frequency inverters
2.8.1 SK 2xxE control terminal versions
LABELLING, FUNCTION
SH: 6DIHVWRSIXQFWLRQµ DOUT: 'LJLWDORXWSXWµ
ASI: Integrated AS interface 24V SH: 6DIHVWRSLQSXWµ
24V: 24V power supply GND SH: 6DIHVWRSUHIHUHQFHSRWHQWLDOµ
AGND: Reference potential for analogue SYS+/-: System bus
signals MB+/-: Electromagnetic brake control
GND: Reference potential for digital (105V, 180V, 205V)
signals TF+/-: Motor PTC connection
DIN: Digital input,
CONNECTIONS AND FUNCTIONS FOR SK 2XXE VERSIONS
DEPENDING ON CONFIGURATION LEVEL
6L]H«
SK 200E SK 210E SK 220E SK 230E FI type SK 205E SK 215E SK 225E SK 235E
(SH) (ASI) (SH+ASI) Labelling (SH) (ASI) (SH+ASI)
Pin
24V (internal, output max. 200mA) 43 1 44 24V, external 24V FI supply*
24V, external 24V FI
Analog input 1 ASI+, AS interface 14/84 2 44/84 ASI+, AS interface
supply
Analog input 2 16 3 40 GND, Reference potential for digital signals
AGND, Reference
potential for analog ASI-, AS interface 12/85 4 40/85 GND ASI-, AS interface
signals
DIN1 / digital input 1 21 5 21 DIN1 / digital input 1
DIN2 / digital input 2 22 6 22 DIN2 / digital input 2
DIN3, digital input 3 23 7 23 DIN3, digital input 3
DIN4, 24V SH, DIN4, 24V SH, DIN4, 24V SH, DIN4, 24V SH,
digital ³6DIH digital ³6DIH 24/89 8 24/89 digital ³6DIH digital ³6DIH
input 4 VWRS´µ input 4 VWRS´µ input 4 VWRS´µ input 4 stoS´µ
GND GND SH GND GND SH 40/88 9 40/88 GND GND SH GND GND SH
DOUT1, digital output 1 1 10 1 DOUT1, digital output 1
GND 40 11 40 GND
SYS H, system bus + 77 12 77 SYS H, system bus +
SYS L, system bus - 78 13 78 SYS L, system bus -
10V Reference voltage 11 14 - ---
DOUT2, digital output 2 3 15 79 MB+, electromagnetic brake control
GND 40 16 80 MB-, electromagnetic brake control
TF+, motor PTC connection 38 17 38 TF+, motor PTC connection
TF-, motor PTC connection 39 18 39 TF-, motor PTC connection
*With the use of the AS interface, terminal 44 provides an output voltage (24V, max. 60mA). In this case, no voltage sources may be connected to this
terminal!
Detailed information regarding functional safety (Safe Stop) can be found in supplementary manual
BU0230.
- www.nord.com ±
46 Subject to technical alterations BU 0200 GB-4411
264
2 Assembly and installation
Size 4
SK 200E SK 210E SK 220E SK 230E
FI type
(SH) (ASI) (SH+ASI)
Pin Labelling
1 43 24V (internal, output max. 200mA)
2 43 24V (internal, output max. 200mA)
3 40 GND, reference potential for digital signals
4 40 GND, reference potential for digital signals
5 -/84 / ASI+, AS interface
6 -/85 / ASI-, AS interface
7 11 10V Reference voltage
8 14 Analog input 1
9 16 Analog input 2
10 12 AGND, Reference potential for analog signals
11 44 24V, external 24V FI supply
12 44 24V, external 24V FI supply
13 40 GND, reference potential for digital signals
14 40 GND, reference potential for digital signals
15 21 DIN1 / digital input 1
16 22 DIN2 / digital input 2
17 23 DIN3, digital input 3
DIN4, DIN4,
24V SH, 24V SH,
18 24/89 digital input digital input
³6DIHVWRS´µ ³6DIHVWRS´µ
4 4
19 40/88 GND GND SH GND GND SH
20 40 GND, reference potential for digital signals
21 1 DOUT1, digital output 1
22 40 GND
23 3 DOUT2, digital output 2
24 40 GND
25 77 SYS H, system bus +
26 78 SYS L, system bus -
27 38 TF+, motor PTC connection
28 39 TF-, motor PTC connection
Separate terminal block (2-pole):
1 79 MB+, electromagnetic brake control
2 80 MB-, electromagnetic brake control
BU 0200 GB-4411 Subject to technical alterations 47
265
SK 200E Manual for frequency inverters
2.8.2 Details of the SK 2x0E control connections
The frequency inverter generates its own control voltage and provides this to Terminal 43.
With size 4 the connection terminals for an electro-mechanical brake are located on a 2-pole terminal block
which is separate from the control terminal strip (Terminal 79/80, see Section 2.7.4).
Terminal/ Function Data Description / wiring suggestion Parameter
Name {Factory setting}
SK 200E, SK 210E, SK 220E, SK 230E
43 VO/24V 24V supply
Output -
Supply voltage provided by the
24VDC ±25% frequency inverter for connection to
40 GND/0V Reference potential max. 200mA (output) the digital inputs or the supply of a
for digital signals 10-30V encoder.
-
21 DIN1 Digital input 1 Digital input as per
{ON right} EN 61131-2 Type 1 P420 [01]
Low: 0-5V (~ 9.5k)
22 DIN2 Digital input 2 High: 15-30V
(~ 2.5-3.5k) P420 [02]
{ON left} 24V
43
GND / 0V
40
23 DIN3 Digital input 3 Input capacitance:
21
Input 1 + 4 = 10 nF
{fixed frequency 1, 22 P420 [03]
Input 2 + 3 = 1.2 nF
(P465[-01])} 23
Scan time: 1ms 24
24 DIN4 Digital input 4
Reaction time: 4ms
(only SK200/220E) {fixed frequency 2, Inputs 1 + 4 react slowly
(P465 [-02])} Inputs 2 + 3 react quickly
HTL encoder connection
only to DIN2 and DIN3 P420 [04]
possible
Frequency limits:
max. 205 kHz
min. 250 Hz
1 DOUT1 Output 1
Digital output P434 [01]
{Fault}
24VDC, max. 20mA For evaluation in a control system.
3 DOUT2 Output 2
max. 100k: load P434 [02]
{Fault}
14 AIN1+ Analog input 1 8 «95i N
(only SK200/210E) {Setpoint frequency} Resolution 12Bit P400 [01]
11
, «P$%XUGHQ
resistor (250 ) via DIP 12
16 AIN2+ Analog input 2 R=10k
switch AIN1/2 (Diagnostic 14 P400 [02]
{No function} 16
opening D2, Section 4.1)
12 AGND / 0V Reference potential 0V analog
for analogue signals only if SK 200E/SK 210E
present Matching of the analog signals is
Use Terminal 40 for performed via P402 and P403.
SK 220E/SK 230E
11 10V REF + 10V Reference
voltage +10V, 5mA
48 Subject to technical alterations BU 0200 GB-4411
266
2 Assembly and installation
Terminal/ Function Data Description / wiring suggestion Parameter
Name {Factory setting}
38 TF+ PTC resistor input
For monitoring motor temperature
with PTC
- A shielded cable must be used for -
39 TF- PTC resistor input
separate mounting of the motor
and the FI (note cable length).
77 SYS H System bus+
Internal FI system bus for
Up to four SK 2xxE can be
communication with optional
operated on one single P509/510
modules and other frequency
78 SYS L System bus- system bus. P514/515
inverters.
Address = 32 / 34 / 36 / 38
For further details see Section 9.7.
Additionally for SK 210E and SK 230E
89 VI / 24V input for
«9'&
24V SH 'Safe Stop' functLRQµ
at least 120-150mA Fail-safe input
88 VI / Reference potential -
(For details, see supplementary
0V SH for 0V digital
manual BU0230)
6DIH6WRS
IXQFWLRQµ Reference potential
Additionally for SK 220E and SK 230E
84 ASI+
For control of the SK 2xxE via the
Simple setting is
simple field bus level.
performed via DIP switch
Actuator/Sensor S1:4 and 5 on the In this case, only the yellow AS P480
85 ASI- Interface SK 2xxE. interface cable can be used. ... P483
Additional supply via he black
26.5 ± 31.6V, max. 25mA
cable is not possible.
Terminal/ Function Data Description / wiring suggestion Parameter
Name {Factory setting}
BU 0200 GB-4411 Subject to technical alterations 49
267
SK 200E Manual for frequency inverters
Terminal/ Function Data Description / wiring suggestion Parameter
Name {Factory setting}
Additionally for size 4
44 24V 24V supply Supply voltage connection for the
Input FI control unit and the output
9'&«9'& DOUT1/2
200mA (FU without The frequency inverter (S IV) is
accessories) ... 800mA equipped with its own mains unit,
according to load on the which if supplied with mains
inputs and outputs or voltage (L1/N or L1/L2/L3) via -
equipment with options terminal 43, provides a 24V DC
control voltage. However, an
24VDC, max 60mA output external control voltage can be
voltage with use of the AS supplied via terminal 44. The
interface frequency inverter automatically
switches over from the internal to
the external voltage supply.
Separate terminal block (2-pole) (see Section 2.7.4)
79 MB+ Brake control
The frequency inverter generates
Voltage: an output voltage on Terminals
Mains Brake MB+/MB- for control of an electro-
mechanical brake. This depends
230V 105V= on the supply voltage of the SK P107,
400V~ 180V= 2x0E. P114,
80 MB- Brake control The assignment of the correct P505
460/480V~ 205V=
brake coil voltage must be taken
into account in the selection.
Current: max. 0.5A (NOTE: this function is identical to
P434=1)
50 Subject to technical alterations BU 0200 GB-4411
268
2 Assembly and installation
2.8.3 Details of the SK 2x5E control connections
Control voltage 24V external! Terminal 44. If the frequency inverter is not equipped with an optional mains
unit it must be supplied with an external 24V voltage.
For devices where the AS interface is used (SK 225E and SK 235E), the control voltage supply must be
provided via the yellow AS interface cable. In this case however, the frequency inverter must not have an
additional supply via Terminal 44 in order to prevent damage to the mains unit or the AS interface bus.
Terminal/ Function Data Description / wiring suggestion Parameter
Name {Factory setting}
SK 205E, SK 215E, SK 225E, SK 235E
44 24V 24V supply 24VDC ± 25%
Input 200mA (FI without Supply voltage connection for the -
accessories) ... 800mA FI control unit and the output
according to load on the DOUT1
40 GND / 0V Reference potential
inputs and outputs or With SK 225/235E and use of the
for digital signals equipment with options AS interface (yellow cable) the
24VDC, max 60mA inverter is supplied by the AS -
Output voltage with use of interface.
the AS interface
21 DIN1 Digital input 1 Digital input as per
{ON right} EN 61131-2 Type 1 P420 [01]
Low: 0-5V (~ 9.5k)
22 DIN2 Digital input 2 High: 15-30V
(~ 2.5-3.5k) P420 [02]
{ON left}
18 «30V
44
GND / 0V
40
23 DIN3 Digital input 3 Input capacitance: 21
Input 1 + 4 = 10 nF 22
{fixed frequency 1, P420 [03]
Input 2 + 3 = 1.2 nF 23
(P465[-01])} 24
Scan time: 1ms
24 DIN4 Digital input 4
Reaction time: 4ms Inputs 1 + 4 react slowly
(only SK205/225E) {fixed frequency 2,
(P465 [-02])} Inputs 2 + 3 react quickly
HTL encoder connection
only to DIN2 and DIN3 P420 [04]
possible
Frequency limits:
max. 205 kHz
min. 250 Hz
1 DOUT1 Output 1
{Fault} Digital output For evaluation in a control system.
18-30V, each to VI 24V With SK 225/235E and use of the P434 [01]
max. 200mA AS interface (yellow cable),
max. 100k: load DOUT1 must not be under load.
38 TF+ PTC resistor input
For monitoring motor temperature
with PTC
- A shielded cable must be used for -
39 TF- PTC resistor input
separate mounting of the motor
and the FI (note cable length).
BU 0200 GB-4411 Subject to technical alterations 51
269
SK 200E Manual for frequency inverters
Terminal/ Function Data Description / wiring suggestion Parameter
Name {Factory setting}
77 SYS H System bus +
Internal FI system bus for
Up to four SK 2xxE can be
communication with optional
operated on a single P509/510
modules and other frequency
78 SYS L System bus - system bus. P514/515
inverters.
Address = 32 / 34 / 36 / 38
For further details see Section 9.7.
79 MB+ Brake control
The frequency inverter generates
Voltage: an output voltage on Terminals
Mains brake MB+/MB- for control of an
electromagnetic brake. This
115/230V 105V= depends on the supply voltage of P107,
400V~ 180V= the SK 2x5E. P114,
80 MB- Brake control The assignment of the correct P505
460/480V~ 205V=
brake coil voltage must be taken
into account in the selection.
Current: max. 0.5A (NOTE: this function is identical to
P434=1)
Additionally for SK 215E and SK 235E
89 VI / 24V input for
«9'&
24V SH
6DIH6WRS
IXQFWLRQµ
at least 120-150mA Fail-safe input
88 VI / Reference potential -
(For details, see supplementary
0V SH for 0V digital
manual BU0230)
6DIH6WRS
IXQFWLRQµ Reference potential
Additionally for SK 225E and SK 235E
84 ASI+
The simple setting is For control of the SK 2xxE via the
made via DIP switch S1: 4 simple field bus level.
Actuator/Sensor and 5 on the In this case, only the yellow AS P480
85 ASI- interface SK 2xxE. interface cable can be used. ... P483
26.5 ± 31.6V, Additional supply via the black
max. 290mA cable is not possible.
52 Subject to technical alterations BU 0200 GB-4411
270
2 Assembly and installation
2.8.4 Control connections for SK 2xxE communication
Terminal/ Function Data Description / wiring suggestion Parameter
Designation {Factory setting}
all SK 2xxE, plug connector block RJ12, RS485/RS232
1 RS485 A +
Baud rate
«%DXG
Data cable RS485
2 RS485 B - Termination resistor
R=120: is fixed.
3 GND Reference potential
for Bus signals 0V digital
RS4 8 5 _A
RS4 8 5 _B
P502
+24V
GN D
+ 5V
RX D
TX D
4 232 TXD ...P513
5- 3LQ1R«
Baud rate
Data cable RS232
5 232 RXD «%DXG
1: RS485_A
2: RS485_B
3: GND
4: RS232_TxD
6 +24V 24V voltage supply
5: RS232_RxD
from FI 24V r 20% 6: +24V
S2 Termination resistor Size 1«3 Size 4
System bus
{OFF}
All SK 2xxE, cable accessories
optional Adapter cablel
RJ12 to SUB-D9 n.c.
n.c.
... for direct GND
connection to a PC TxD
with NORD CON RxT
+24V
software
Length 3m Pin2: RS232_TxD
Note: For Assignment RS 232 Pin3: RS232_RxD
connection to a USB (RxD, TxD, GND) Pin5: GND
port on the PC, a
normal interface Part. No. 278910240 RxD
converter (RS232 GND TxD
(SUB-D9) / USB 2.0) is
required. 5 1
9 6
BU 0200 GB-4411 Subject to technical alterations 53
271
272
273
SK 200E Manual for frequency inverters
Assembly
Mounting of the plug connector to the connection unit off the frequency inverter (SK TI4-« LVXVXDOO\RQO\
possible with a connection adapter (connection extension SK TIE4-HAN10E).
Plug connector* Mat. No. Technical data plus
SK TIE4-HAN10E
(275274100)
HAN 10E LA 2BUE 275135010 Add-on housing with 2-clamp lock, socket insert 10-pin. X
+ PE, spring terminals, PE: Screw connection,
(Power output) electrical data: 16A 500V
HAN 10E LE 1BUE 275135070 Add-on housing with 1-clamp lock, pin insert 10-pin. X
+ PE, spring terminals, PE: Screw connection,
(Power input) electrical data: 16A 500V
HAN 10E LE 2BUE 275135000 Add-on housing with 2-clamp lock, pin insert 10-pin. X
+ PE, spring terminals, PE: Screw connection,
(Power input) electrical data: 16A 500V
HAN 10E MA 2BUE 275135020 Add-on housing with 2-clamp lock, socket insert 10-pin. X
+ PE, spring terminals, PE: Screw connection,
(Motor output) electrical data: 16A 500V
HQ8 LA 275135040 Add-on housing, socket insert 8-pin. + PE, crimp X
(Power output) connection,
electrical data: 16A 500V
HQ8 LE 275135030 Add-on housing, pin insert 8-pin. + PE, crimp connection, X
(Power input) electrical data: 16A 500V
HQ8 MA 275135050 Add-on housing, socket insert 8-pin. + PE, crimp X
(Motor output) connection,
electrical data: 16A 500V
Connection extension 275274110 2 x add-on housing on a connector frame, each with one Not required!
HAN Q5 5-pin pin insert + PE and a 5-pin socket insert + PE,
(Power input + motor crimp connection, PE: Screw connection,
or power output) electrical data: 16A, 230V/400V
* Further types available on request
The connection extension SK TIE4-HAN10E contains all the additional elements required for the HAN 10E
and HAN Q8 versions listed above. Installation is recommended as follows. Steps 2 and 3 are not required
for plug version HAN Q5.
Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5
Disassembly of the Put on seal Put on adapter plate Install the add-on Make the electrical
2 x M25 blank plug plug housing with connections
screws and contact
washers
56 Subject to technical alterations BU 0200 GB-4411
274
2 Assembly and installation
2.9.2 Plug connectors for control connection
Various M12 round plug connectors are available as flanged plugs or flanged sockets. The plug connectors
are intended for installation in the connection units (SK TI4-« IURPWKHIUHTXHQF\LQYHUWHU 6. 2xxE-« RU
technology units (SK TU4-« DQG FDQ EH RULHQWDWHG DV UHTXLUHG 7KH SURWHFWLRQ FODVV ,3 RI WKH SOXJ
connector only applies in the screwed state. The cover caps correspond to the colour version as does the
plastic body of the plug connector.
System components Description Data
System bus
A-coded, 5-pin
PIN 1 n. c.
SK TIE4-M12-SYSS PIN 2 +24V (brown)
PIN 3 GND (blue)
Part. No. 275274506 PIN 4 Sys-H (black)
PIN 5 Sys-L (gray)
M12 flanged plug
to connect theincoming system bus cable Plastic body in light blue
A-coded, 5-pin
PIN 1 n. c.
SK TIE4-M12-SYSM PIN 2 +24V (brown)
PIN 3 GND (blue)
Part. No. 275274505 PIN 4 Sys-H (black)
PIN 5 Sys-L (gray)
M12 flanged plug
Plastic body in light blue
to connect theoutgoing system bus cable
External voltage supply
A-coded, 4-pin
PIN 1 +24V (brown)
SK TIE4-M12-POW PIN 2 n. c.
PIN 3 GND (blue)
Part. No. 275274507 PIN 4 n. c.
PIN 5 n. c.
M12 flanged plug
to connect a 24V- supply Plastic body in black
Sensors and actuators
A-coded, 4-pin
PIN 1 +24V (brown)
SK TIE4-M12-INI PIN 2 DI or DO (white)
PIN 3 GND (blue)
Part. No. 275274503 PIN 4 DI or DO (black)
PIN 5 n. c.
M12 flanged plug
to connect sensors and actuators Plastic body in black
Analog signal
A-coded, 5-pin
PIN 1 +24V (brown)
SK TIE4-M12-ANA PIN 2 AIN+ (/AUOT) (white)
PIN 3 GND (blue)
Part. No. 275274508 PIN 4 AIN- (black)
PIN 5 10V - REF (red)
M12 flanged plug
to connect analog signal encoders Plastic body in white
HTL encoder
B-coded, 5-pin
PIN 1 +24V (brown)
SK TIE4-M12-HTL PIN 2 Track B (white)
PIN 3 GND (blue)
Part. No. 275274512 PIN 4 Track A (black)
PIN 5 n. c.
M12 flanged plug
to connect an HTL encoder Plastic body in black
BU 0200 GB-4411 Subject to technical alterations 57
275
SK 200E Manual for frequency inverters
System components Description Data
Safe stop
A-coded, 5-pin
PIN 1 n. c.
SK TIE4-M12-SH PIN 2 n. c.
PIN 3 GND SH (blue)
Part. No. 275274509 PIN 4 +24V SH (black)
PIN 5 n. c.
M12 flanged plug
to connect a safety switching device Plastic body in yellow
AS Interface
A-coded, 5-pin
PIN 1 ASi+ (/+24V) (brown)
SK TIE4-M12-ASI PIN 2 n. c.
PIN 3 ASi- (/GND) (blue)
Part. No. 275274502 PIN 4 n. c.
PIN 5 n. c.
M12 flanged plug
Plastic body in yellow
to connect an AS interface cable
A-coded, 5-pin
PIN 1 ASi+ (brown)
SK TIE4-M12-ASI-AUX PIN 2 GND (white)
PIN 3 ASi- (blue)
Part. No. 275274513 PIN 4 +24V (black)
M12 flange plug PIN 5 n. c.
for connection of an AS interface cable with additional 24V Plastic body in yellow
supply ("Auxiliary Power")
PROFIBUS DP
B-coded, 5-pin
PIN 1 +5V* (brown)
PIN 2 PBR-A (green)
SK TIE4-M12-PBR PIN 3 GND * (blue)
Part. No. 275274500 M12 flanged plug PIN 4 PBR-B (red)
to connect theincoming PROFIBUS DP cable PIN 5 n. c.
Plastic body and screw cap in
Kit consisting of M12 violet
flanged plug and
flanged socket
*PIN 1 and PIN 3 areonly
assigned in the M12 flanged
socket
M12 flanged plug
to connect theoutgoing PROFIBUS DP cable
CANopen
A-coded, 5-pin
PIN 1 PE (shield) (white)
SK TIE4-M12-CAO PIN 2 +24V (brown)
PIN 3 GND (blue)
Part. No. 275274501 PIN 4 CAN-H (black)
PIN 5 CAN-L (gray)
M12 flanged plug
to connect the CANopen or DeviceNet cable Plastic body in gray
Pin designation of M12 plug
The pin designations of the
M12 socket are the
corresponding mirror image.
58 Subject to technical alterations BU 0200 GB-4411
276
277
SK 200E Manual for frequency inverters
2.10.1 Modified SK 2xxE for compliance with Category 3D
For the operation of an SK 2xxE in ATEX Zone 22 only a modified frequency inverter is permissible. This
adaptation is only made at the NORD factory. In order to use frequency inverters in ATEX Zone 22, among
other things, the diagnostic caps are replaced with aluminium / glass versions.
II 3D Ex tD A22 IP55 T125 °C X
Categorisation:
Protection with "housing"
Procedure "A" Zone "22" Category 3D
Protection class IP55 / IP66 (according to the device)
Maximum surface temperature 125°C
Ambient temperature -20°C t o +40°C
Series SK 2xxE frequency inverters and the associated options are only designed for a
degree of mechanical hazard corresponding to a low impact energy of 4J.
The frequency inverter must not be exposed to direct sunlight.
The necessary adaptations are contained in the ATEX outdoor installation kits.
Device Kit designation Part Number
SK [[(6L]H,«,,, SK 200E-ATEX Size I 275274200
SK TU4-xxx SK 200E-ATEX-TU4 275274206
2.10.2 Options for ATEX Zone 22 3D
In order to ensure an ATEX-compliant NORDAC SK 2xxE frequency inverter, the approval of optional
modules for explosion hazard areas must be observed. The following lists the various options with regard to
their approval for use in ATEX Zone 22 3D.
2.10.2.1 Technology Units for ATEX Zone 22 3D
Approved for Not approved for
Name Part Number
ATEX Zone 22 3D ATEX Zone 22 3D
SK TI4-TU-BUS(-C) 275280000 / (275280500) x
SK TI4-TU-NET(-C) 275280100 / (275280600) x
SK TU4-PBR(-C) 275281100 / (275281150) x
SK TU4-CAO(-C) 275281101 / (275281151) x
SK TU4-DEV(-C) 275281102 / (275281152) x
SK TU4-IOE(-C) 275281106 / (275281156) x
SK TU4-24V-123-B(-C)* 275281108 / (275281158) x
SK TU4-24V-140-B(-C)* 275281109 / (275281159) x
60 Subject to technical alterations BU 0200 GB-4411
278
2 Assembly and installation
Approved for Not approved for
Name Part Number
ATEX Zone 22 3D ATEX Zone 22 3D
SK TU4-POT-123-B(-C) 275281110 / (275281160) x
SK TU4-POT-140-B(-C) 275281111 / (275281161) x
SK TU4-PBR-M12(-C) 275281200 / (275281250) x
SK TU4-CAO-M12(-C) 275281201 / (275281251) x
SK TU4-DEV-M12(-C) 275281202 / (275281252) x
SK TU4-IOE-M12(-C) 275281206 / (275281206) x
*Only SK 2x5E
2.10.2.2 Customer Units for ATEX Zone 22 3D
Approved for Not approved for
Name Part Number
ATEX Zone 22 3D ATEX Zone 22 3D
SK CU4-PBR 275271000 x
SK CU4-CAO 275271001 x
SK CU4-DEV 275271002 x
SK CU4-IOE 275271006 x
SK CU4-POT 275271207 x
SK CU4-24V-123-B* 275271108 x
SK CU4-24V-140-B* 275271109 x
SK ATX-POT 275142000 x
*Only SK 2x5E
The SK 2xxE for Category 3D can be equipped with an ATEX-compliant potentiometer, which can be used
to adjust a setpoint (e.g. speed) on the device. The potentiometer is used with an M20-M25 extension in one
of the M25 cable glands. The selected setpoint can be adjusted with a screwdriver. Due to the removable
screw closing cap, this component complies with
ATEX requirements. Permanent operation may only
be carried out with the cap closed.
Frequency setpoint setting
with a screwdriver
Resistance of the potentiometer 10 kOhm
Wire colours on the
Name Terminal SK CU4-24V* Terminal SK CU4-IOE Terminal SK 2x0E
potentiometer
Red +10V reference [11] [11] [11]
Black AGND / 0V [12] [12] [12] / [40]
Green Analog input [14] [14] / [16] [14] / [16]
*Only SK 2x5E
NOTE: For use of a potentiometer with frequency inverter SK 2x5E a CU4-24V-xxx-B or CU4-IOE
customer unit is required! With the SK 2x0E, this can be connected directly to an integrated
analog input.
BU 0200 GB-4411 Subject to technical alterations 61
279
280
281
SK 200E Manual for frequency inverters
2.10.4 Commissioning information
For Zone 22 the cable glands must at least comply with protection class IP 55. Unused openings must be
closed with blank screw caps suitable for ATEX Zone 22 3D (minimum protection class IP 55).
The motors are protected against overheating by means of the frequency inverter. This is carried out by the
evaluation of the motor PTC by the frequency inverter. In order to ensure this function, the PTC must be
connected to the intended input (Terminal 38/39 control terminal plug connector). In addition, care must be
taken that a NORD motor from the motor list (P200) is set. If a standard 4-pole NORD motor or a motor from
a different manufacturer is not used, the data for the motor parameters ((P201) to (P208)) must be adjusted
to those on the motor name plate. In addition, the frequency inverter must be parameterised so that the
1
motor can be operated with a maximum speed of 3000 / min . For a four-pole motor, the "maximum
P
P
B B
frequeQF\PXVWEHVHW WR DYDOXH ZKLFKLVVPDOOHU RUHTXDOWR +] 3 +HUHWKHPD[LPXP
permissible output speed of the gear unit must be observed. In addition, the monitoring "I²t-Motor"
(Parameter (P535) / (P533)) must be switched on and the pulse frequency set to between 4 kHz and 6 kHz.
Overview of the necessary parameter settings:
Parameter Setting value Factory setting Description
P105 This value relates to a 4-pole motor. On principle,
Maximum +] [50] the value must only be so large that a motor
frequency speed of 3000 rpm is not exceeded.
P200 Select the appropriate If a 4-pole NORD motor is used, the preset motor
[0]
Motor list motor power data can be called up.
P201 ± P208 Data according to name If a 4-pole NORD motor is not used, the motor
[xxx]
Motor data plate data on the name plate must be entered here.
P218
Degree of [100] Determines the maximum possible output voltage
modulation
P504 For pulse frequencies above 6kHz a reduction of
N+]«N+] [6]
Pulse frequency the maximum torque is necessary.
P533 A reduction in torque can be taken into account
< 100% [100]
Factor I2t motor with values less than 100 in the I²t monitoring.
The I²t- monitoring of the motor must be switched
P535 According to motor and on. The set values depend on the type of
[0]
I²t motor ventilation ventilation and the motor used. See
Planning Guideline No.: 605 2101
64 Subject to technical alterations BU 0200 GB-4411
282
2 Assembly and installation
2.10.5 EC declaration of conformity
BU 0200 GB-4411 Subject to technical alterations 65
283
284
285
SK 200E Manual for frequency inverters
3.1 Overview of optional modules
3.1.1 Overview of internal customer units SK CU4-«
Internal customer interfaces enable the expansion of the range of functions of SK 2xxE frequency inverters
without changing the physical size. Either a field bus module, a mains unit or an I/O extension can be
selected. The frequency inverter provides one slot for the fitting of an appropriate option. External options
(technology units) are available for additionally required optional modules (Section 3.2.2).
The bus modules require an external 24V supply, and are therefore also ready for operation if the frequency
inverter is not connected to the mains supply.
Module Description Data
Baud rate: 12 MBaud
Profibus module Protocol: DP-V1
This option enables connection of up to four
SK CU4-PBR 2x digital inputs
SK 2xxE to the Profibus.
Part No. 275271000 Low: 0-5V, High: 11-30V
System bus
Baud rate: up to 1 MBit/s
CANopen module This option enables connection of up to four Protocol: DS301 / DSP402
SK CU4-CAO SK 2xxE to the CANbus with the CANopen 2x digital inputs
Part No. 275271001 protocol. Low: 0-5V, High: 11-30V
System bus
Baud rate: 500 KBit/s
DeviceNet module Protocol: AC-Drive
This option enables connection of up to four
SK CU4-DEV 2x digital inputs
SK 2xxE to DeviceNet.
Part No. 275271002 Low: 0-5V, High: 11-30V
System bus
2x digital inputs
Low: 0-5V, High: 11-30V
I/O extension The internal IO extension provides further digital 2x analog inputs
and analog inputs and outputs. These are in 0-10V, -10-10V, 0-20mA, 4-20mA
SK CU4-IOE
addition to the digital inputs provided by the
Part No. 275271006 SK 2xxE (Section 3.4.3). 1x analog output
0-10V, -10-10V, 0-20mA, 4-20mA
System bus
Potentiometer/Switch Internal potentiometer/switch
ON R / OFF / ON L
SK CU4-POT * Can only be used in combination with a 24V
«VHWSRLQWSRWHQWLRPeter
mains unit (SK CU4-24V, SK TU4-24V) or IO
Part No. 275271207 N
extension (SK CU4-IOE, SK TU4-IOE).
Int. 24V mains unit 1~ 230V Internal 24V mains unit for supply of the 24V=, ±10%, 420mA
SK CU4-24V-123-B SK 2x5E, with a mains voltage of 10V ref., ±0.2V, 5mA
Part No. 275271108 1~ 100-240V, ±10%. Analog input 0-10V
68 Subject to technical alterations BU 0200 GB-4411
286
3 Options
Int. 24V mains unit 1~ 400V Internal 24V mains unit for supply of the EXUGHQUHVLVWRUIRU
SK CU4-24V-140-B SK 2x5E, with a mains voltage of evaluation of 0/4-20mA
Part No. 275271109 1~ 380-500V, -20/+10%.
Electronic brake rectifier Supply:
This option enables the direct control of an 24V=, ±20% and
SK CU4-MBR
electromechanical holding brake by an SK 2x0E. «9aRU
Part. No. 275271010 «9a
Supply:
Setpoint converter This option enables bipolar signals (±10VDC) to 24V=, ±25%
be converted into XQLSRODUVLJQDOV «9'& ,Q
SK CU4-REL 2 x AIN (±10VDC)
addition, two relays can be controlled by means
Part. No. 275271011 of digital signals. 2 x AOUT «9'&
2 x DIN, 2x relays ( 30VDC)
2
For all modules except SK CU4-POT: screw terminals, 16x 2.5mm , AWG 26-14
* As an alternative to SK CU4-POT the connection extensions SK TIE4-SWT (direction selection switch,
Part No.: 275274701) and SK TIE4-POT (potentiometer, Part No.: 275274701) are also available.
BU 0200 GB-4411 Subject to technical alterations 69
287
SK 200E Manual for frequency inverters
3.1.2 Overview of external technology units SK TU4-«
External technology units enable the modular extension of the scope of SK 2xxE frequency inverter
functions.
Users have access to both communication modules and an internal mains unit or an I/O expansion and
other modules.
Bus modules with connection terminals or M12 system connectors are available as options.
Modules with protection class IP55 or optionally IP66 can be ordered according to the installation location.
These can be mounted directly on the SK 2xxE or separate from the SK 2xxE by means of a suitable wall-
mounting kit.
Each SK TU4-« 7HFKQRORJ\ 8QLW UHTXLUHV D 6. 7I4-TU-« &RQQHFWLRQ 8QLW 7KH 6. 7I4-TU-BUS is
available for bus modules or the I/O extension. The mains unit or potentiometer modules require an
SK TI4-TU-NET Connection Unit. The SK TI4-TU-MSW must be used for the maintenance switch.
For the bus modules or I/O extension with integrated system bus an RJ12 socket (behind a transparent
screw-on cover) is also available. This enables communication with other modules or frequency inverters.
With this linkage, all devices can be parameterised by means of a ParameterBox SK PAR-3H or with a PC
and the NORD CON software.
The bus modules require an external 24V supply, and are therefore also ready for operation if the frequency
inverter is not connected to the mains supply.
Bus modules
Bus Module Description Data
Profibus module* Protocol: DP-V1
Baud rate: 12 MBaud
SK TU4-PBR This option enables connection of up to four 4x digital inputs
Part No. 275281100 (IP55) SK 2xxE to the Profibus. Low: 0-5V, High: 11-30V
2x digital outputs, 0/24V
Part No. 275281150 (IP66) system bus
Profibus module with M12*
SK TU4-PBR-M12 This option enables connection of up to four As SK TU4-PBR, but with
Part No. 275281200 (IP55) SK 2xxE to the Profibus. 6x M12 sockets
Part No. 275281250 (IP66)
70 Subject to technical alterations BU 0200 GB-4411
288
3 Options
EtherCAT module* Supported profiles: CoE
Baud rate: up to 100 MBaud
SK TU4-ECT This option enables connection of up to four 8x digital inputs
Part No. 275281117 (IP55) SK 2xxE via EtherCAT®. Low: 0-5V, High: 11-30V
2x digital outputs, 0/24V
Part No. 275281167 (IP66) System bus
CANopen module* Protocol: DS301 / DS402
Baud rate: up to 1 MBit/s
SK TU4-CAO This option enables connection of up to four
4x digital inputs
SK 2xxE to the CANbus with the CANopen
Part No. 275281101 (IP55) Low: 0-5V, High: 11-30V
protocol.
2x digital outputs, 0/24V
Part No. 275281151 (IP66) system bus
CANopen module with M12*
SK TU4-CAO-M12 This option enables connection of up to four As SK TU4-CAO, but with
SK 2xxE to the CANbus with the CANopen
Part No. 275281201 (IP55) protocol. 6x M12 sockets
Part No. 275281251 (IP66)
DeviceNet module* Protocol: AC-Drive
Baud rate: 500 KBit/s
SK TU4-DEV This option enables connection of up to four SK 4x digital inputs
Part No. 275281102 (IP55) 2xxE via DeviceNet. Low: 0-5V, High: 11-30V
2x digital outputs, 0/24V
Part No. 275281152 (IP66) system bus
DeviceNet module with M12*
SK TU4-DEV-M12 This option enables connection of up to four SK As SK TU4-DEV, but with
Part No. 275281202 (IP55) 2xxE via DeviceNet. 6x M12 sockets
Part No. 275281252 (IP66)
4x digital inputs
I/O extension* Low: 0-5V, High: 11-30V
2x analog inputs
SK TU4-IOE This option extends the SK 2xxE with additional 0-10V, -10-10V, 0-20mA, 4-20mA
Part No. 275281106 (IP55) digital and analog inputs and outputs. 1x analog output
0-10V, -10-10V, 0-20mA, 4-20mA
Part No. 275281156 (IP66) 2x digital outputs, 0/24V
system bus
I/O extension with M12*
SK TU4-IOE-M12 This option extends the SK 2xxE with additional As SK TU4-IOE, but with
Part No. 275281206 (IP55) digital and analog inputs and outputs. 6x M12 sockets
Part No. 275281256 (IP66)
Connection Unit TU4 2
The connection unit is always required in order to 36x 2.5mm
SK TI4-TU-BUS use an external technology unit. This implements
AWG 24-14
Part No. 275280000 (IP55) the connection of the TU4 to the SK 2xxE or the
wall-mounting kit. Spring-loaded terminals
Part No. 275280500 (IP66)
TU4 Wall-mounting kit
With the wall mounting kit, a technology unit can be
SK TIE4-WMK-TU
used/installed separately from the SK 2xxE.
Part No. 275274002
*) In order to use the TU4 modules, a suitable
SK T14-TU-BUS Connection Unit must always be available.
BU 0200 GB-4411 Subject to technical alterations 71
289
SK 200E Manual for frequency inverters
Mains Unit modules
Mains Unit Module Description Data
External 24V mains unit
1~ 230V **
SK TU4-24V-123-B External 24V mains unit to supply the SK 2xxE, using a
24V, ±10%, 420mA
mains voltage of 230V
Part No. 275281108 (IP55) 10V ref., ±0.2V, 5mA
Part No. 275281158 (IP66) Analog input 0-10V
External 24V mains unit EXUGHQUHVLVWRUIRU
1~ 400V ** evaluation of 0/4-20mA
SK TU4-24V-140-B External 24V mains unit to supply the SK 2xxE, using a
Supply: 230 or 400V
mains voltage of 400V
Part No. 275281109 (IP55)
Part No. 275281159 (IP66)
External 24V 1~ 230V, The Potentiometer Box is used for the direct control of
potentiometer / switch ** the frequency inverter, without the use of external
SK TU4-POT-123-B components.
Part No. 275281110 (IP55) The 24V mains unit supplies the SK 2xxE, using a 24V, ±10%, 420mA
Part No. 275281160 (IP66) mains voltage of 230V. ON R / OFF, ON L
External 24V 1~ 400V, The Potentiometer Box is used for the direct control of «6HWSRLQW
potentiometer / switch ** the frequency inverter, without the use of external Supply: 230 or 400V
SK TU4-POT-140-B components.
Part No. 275281111 (IP55) The 24V mains unit supplies the SK 2xxE, using a
Part No. 275281161 (IP66) mains voltage of 400V.
Connection Unit TU4 2
The Connection Unit is always required in order to use 18x 2.5mm
SK TI4-TU-NET an external Technology Unit. It implements the
AWG 26-14
Part No. 275280100 (IP55) mechanical and electrical connection of the TU4 to the
SK 2xxE or the wall mounting kit. Spring-loaded terminals
Part No. 275280600 (IP66)
TU4 Wall-mounting kit
Using the wall mounting kit, a Technology Unit can be
SK TIE4-WMK-TU
used/installed separately from the SK 2xxE.
Part No. 275274002
**) In order to use the TU4 modules, a suitable
SK T14-TU-NET Connection Unit must always be available.
Maintenance switch module
MSW module Description Data
Maintenance switch***
3-phase maintenance switch
SK TU4-MSW The maintenance switch is looped into the mains
for isolating single and
supply of the frequency inverter and can be used for
Part No. 275281123 (IP55) 3-phase networks up to 500V,
single phase and three-phase networks.
16A rms
Part No. 275281173 (IP66)
Connection unit TU4 2
The connection unit is always required in order to use 18x 2.5mm
SK TI4-TU-MSW an external technology unit. This implements the
AWG 26-14
Part No. 275280200 (IP55) connection of the TU4 to the SK 2xxE or the wall-
mounting kit. Spring terminals
Part No. 275280600 (IP66)
TU4 Wall-mounting kit
With the wall mounting kit, a technology unit can be
SK TIE4-WMK-TU
used/installed separately from the SK 2xxE.
Part. No. 275274002
***) In order to use the TU4 modules, a suitable
SK TI4-TU-MSW connection unit must always be available!
72 Subject to technical alterations BU 0200 GB-4411
290
291
292
3 Options
3.2.2.3 Installing the SK TI4-TU-BUS on the SK 2xxE
The screw connectors and seals required for installation are enclosed with the modules or are fitted to the
intended locations.
Installation of the technology unit on the SK 2xxE
is to be carried out as follows:
1. Switch off the mains.
2. Remove the two M25 blank caps from the
required side of the frequency inverter (right /
left)
3. Removal of the PCB (with terminal bar) from
the BUS adapter unit.
4. Fit the enclosed seal to the SK TI4-TU-«
Adapter Unit and mount the unit on the
SK 2xxE with the four enclosed bolts.
Installation of the external Technology Unit on the SK 200E
5. Screw in both of the reductions from M25 to
M12 from the inner side of the Adapter Unit of
the frequency inverter. (Purpose: to avoid damage to the internal wiring in the region of the transition from the SK TI4-TU-...
(Adapter Unit of the external optional module) to the SK TI4-« IUHTXHQF\LQYHUWHU$GDSWHU8QLW
6. Reinstall the PCB (See Item 3) and make the electrical connection.
7. Fit and screw on the SK TU4 module.
Technology Unit SK TU4-« -M12) BUS Adapter Unit SK TI4-TU-«
Wall-mounting kit SK TIE4-WMK-TU
3.2.2.4 Wall-mounting of the SK TI4-TU-«
The screw connectors and seals required for
installation (except anchor screws) are enclosed with
the modules or are fitted to the intended locations.
The connecting cable between the technology unit
and the SK 2xxE should not be longer than 30m.
1. Install the Adapter Unit SK TI4-TU-« ZLWK WKH
enclosed seal on the wall-mounting kit. To do this:
insert the 2 flat head screws (enclosed with the
wall-mounting kit) from the outside into the
(countersunk) holes and screw the two
components (BUS / NET adapter unit) tightly
together with the two bolts (enclosed with the wall-
mounting kit). Wall-mounting kit SK TIE4-WMK-TU with field bus Technology Unit
2. Make a suitable connection between the Technology Unit and the frequency inverter. Take care that
there is appropriate screw fitting and sealing of the modules. The cable sets included with the BUS /
NET Adapter Unit are not used.
3. Fit and screw on the SK TU4 module.
BU 0200 GB-4411 Subject to technical alterations 75
293
294
3 Options
3.4 Details of internal Customer Units SK CU4-«
3.4.1 Mains Unit, SK CU4-24V-«
The mains unit (only permissible for SK 2x5E version) is used to produce the 24V control voltage for the FI
from the available mains voltage (115V/230V/380V/500V). With this, a separate external 24V control voltage
is not required. With SK 2x0E models, a mains unit is integrated at the factory, so that no optional
SK CU4-24V-«PDLQVXQLWRUQRH[WHUQDO9VXSSO\LVUHTXLUHG
An analog input is also available for the connection of the potentiometer adapter SK CU4-POT
Mains unit for 100-240V, SK CU4-24V-123-B
Mains unit for 380-500V, SK CU4-24V-140-B
+24V- output voltage
1x analog input (e.g. Potentiometer Adapter)
1x pulse output
Status LED = 24V
Max. permissible continuous current: 420mA
The terminal block of the Customer Unit SK CU4-24V-«LVGLYLGHGLQWRWZRSRWHQWLDOOHYHOV
SK CU4- SK 2x5E-
24V
40 B1 12 14 11 40 44 40 44
40 44
GND / 0V Connection of the 24V supply from
the SK 2x5E
«
«
10V REF
«
AIN1+
«
AGND /0V
23 «
DOUT Pulse output, connection to the
SK 2x5E
Potential level: 24V DC
«
Potential level: ~ Netz
L1
L1
Mains voltage
(L1 with integrated fuse element T-5A)
L2
Jumper-integrated mains filter:
PE PE
Illustration: mains filter active
Connection to the terminal bar
of the SK CU4-24V-«
Compliance with the degree of interference suppression as per Section 8.2 can only be ensures with an ac-
tive mains filter (jumper plugged as shown in the illustration).
7R SURFHVV FXUUHQW VHWSRLQW YDOXHV WKH HQFORVHG EDJ FRQWDLQV D
UHVLVWRU IRU connection between
terminals 12 and 14. Matching of the relevant input of the frequency inverter is made via parameter (P420).
Setpoint Parameter [Array] Setting
«P$ P420 [-02] or [-03] {26}
«P$ P420 [-02] or [-03] {27}
BU 0200 GB-4411 Subject to technical alterations 77
295
SK 200E Manual for frequency inverters
Details of the control connections
Terminal/ Function Data Description / wiring suggestion Parameter
Name
44 24V 24V supply
-
Supply voltage (output) to supply
an SK 2x5E or other module with
40 GND/0V GND 24VDC ±10% 24V.
Reference potential -
max. 420mA (total)
integrated Can also be used as an input (in
44 24V 24V supply short-circuit monitoring, this case, do not connect L1 and
limited overtemperature L2), if the module is only to be -
and overload monitoring used as a voltage or frequency
converter (for the connection of a
40 GND/0V GND potentiometer).
Reference potential -
11 10V REF +10V 10V ± 0.2V
reference voltage Max. -
load 5mA
For connection of potentiometer
14 AIN1+ Analog input 1 «9 5 - N
positive Resolution: 8Bit A EXUGHQUHVLVWRUIRUWKH -
Accuracy: 0,2V evaluation of 0/4 - 20mA signals is
contained in the enclosed bag.
12 AGND/0V Analog Ground
Reference potential for
-
analog signals
B1 DOUT FOUT SPS compatible in
Frequency output compliance with Impulses for evaluation via the
EN61131-2 digital input function P420 [02]/[03] P420
Low: 0V, High: 24V = 26/27 and the analog meaning in P400
Pulse frequency: P400 [-06]/[-07].
~ 1 - 32kHz
40 GND/0V GND
Reference potential -
Potential separation
L1 Mains connection
1. Phase -
Mains connection, 100 - 240V or
380 - 500V, depending on the
L2 Mains connection
module
2. Phase -
PE PE, Earth
-
As required, does not need to be
PE PE, Earth connected.
-
78 Subject to technical alterations BU 0200 GB-4411
296
3 Options
Connection plan and parameterisation of SK xU4-24V-«H[DPSOH
1/3~ 115/230/400V + PE
L1 - L2/N - L3 L1 - L2/N
115/230/400V 115/230/400V
Frequency inverter 24V mains unit
SK 205E-.../SK 215E-... SK TU4-24V-... (+ SK TI4-TU-NET)*
or
SK CU4-24V-...
24V=
44 Control terminal bar
GND
40 44* 40 44* ... 11 14 12 B1
.
Control terminal bar
AGND
.
R
21 0-10V
L
22 10V=
0-100%
23
24
.
.
. Switch Potentiometer 10kOhm
Analog setpoint: 0(2) - 10V Control terminal bar
44* 40 44* ... 11 14 12 B1
AGND
0(2)-10V
Analog setpoint: 0 (4) - 20mA Control terminal bar
44* 40 44* ... 11 14 12 B1
AGND
500
* with SK TU4-24V-« Terminal designation 43 instead of 44 0(4)-20mA
=
DIP switch settings: DIP3 = off, DIP4 = on, DIP5 = off (Section 5.2.2.2)
or
recommended
parameter setting, DIP1-8 = off: P400 [07] = 1 P420 [02] = 2
P420 [01] = 1 P420 [03] = 26 (for 0-10V / 0-20mA signals)
= 27 (for 2-10V / 4-20mA signals)
BU 0200 GB-4411 Subject to technical alterations 79
297
SK 200E Manual for frequency inverters
3.4.2 Potentiometer Adapter, SK CU4-POT
The digital signals R and L can be directly applied to the corresponding digital inputs 1 and 2 of the
SK 2xxE.
The potentiometer (0-10) can be evaluated via a 24V module or I/O extension and converted to proportional
impulses (frequency). In addition, with the inverter versions SK 2x5E, an optional 24V module
(SK xU4-24V-...) provides the possibility of converting analog setpoint values into proportional pulses
(frequencies). These impulses can then be evaluated via the digital input 2 or 3 (P420 [02]/[03] = 26/27) of
the SK 2xxE in the form of a setpoint value (P400 [-06]/[-07]).
Module SK CU4-POT Connection: Terminal No. Function
SK 2x0E SK 2x5E
Pin Colour FI FI Mains unit
1 Brown 24V supply voltage 43 44
Rotary switch
2 Black Enable R (e.g. DIN 1) 21 21
L - OFF - R
3 White Enable L (e.g. DIN2) 22 22
4 White Access to AIN1+ 14 14
Potentiometer
5 Brown 10V reference voltage 11 11
N
6 Blue Analog Ground AGND 12 12
Connection diagram SK CU4-POT, example SK 2x0E
1/3~ 230/400V + PE
L1 - L2/N - L3
230/400V
(A)GND (bl)
Frequency inverter 12(40)
SK 2x0E-... 0-10V (wh)
14
10V= (br)
11
Control terminal bar
.
. 24V= (br) (br)
43
.
. R (bk)
21 L (wh) R/0/L Potentio-
22 Switch meter
0-10
.
SK CU4-POT
80 Subject to technical alterations BU 0200 GB-4411
298
3 Options
Connection diagram and parameterisation of SK CU4-POT, example SK 2x5E
1/3~ 115/230/400V + PE
L1 - L2/N - L3 L1 - L2/N
115/230/400V 115/230/400V
Frequency inverter 24V mains unit
SK 2x5E-... SK CU4-24V-...
24V= (br)
44 Control terminal bar
GND (bl)
40 44 40 44 ... 11 14 12 B1
.
AGND
.
R
Control terminal bar
21 0-10V
L
22 10V=
0-100%
23
(br) (br) (wh) (bl)
24
(bk)
.
. (wh)
.
R/0/L Potentio-
Switch meter
0-10
SK CU4-POT
DIP switch settings (S1:): DIP3 = off, DIP4 = on, DIP5 = off (Section 5.2.2.2)
or
recommended
parameter setting, S1: DIP1-8 = off: P400 [07] = 1 P420 [02] = 2
P420 [01] = 1 P420 [03] = 26
BU 0200 GB-4411 Subject to technical alterations 81
299
300
3 Options
3.4.3.1 Details of the control connections
Terminal/ Function Data Description / wiring suggestion Parameter
Name
44 24V 24V supply 24VDC ±20%
(Module) §P$ -
protected against reverse Connection for module supply
polarity voltage and 24V source for the
40 GND/0V Reference potential digital inputs (DIN1 and DIN2)
for digital signals -
Max. permissible current
load: 2A
C1 DIN1 Digital input 1 Low 0V ... 5V The functions must be assigned in
parameter P480. The settings for P480
(I/O IO extension DIN1) High 15V ... 30V
the first IOE are made in the arrays P174
Ri = 8.1k: [-05 / -06] and for the second IOE
C2 DIN2 Digital input 2 Input capacitance 10nF in the arrays [-01, -02].
(I/O IO extension DIN2)
P480
Scan rate 1ms, Inputs compliant with P174
Reaction time 1ms EN 61131-2, Type 1
77 Sys+ System bus
data cable + -
System bus
78 Sys- System bus interface
data cable - -
40 GND Reference potential
for digital signals -
Potential separation
11 +10V +10V reference
voltage 10V ± 0.1V
Potentiometer supply voltage -
Max. load 20mA
14 AIN1+ Analog input 1
P400
positive Version as differential Functions: P176
input 0V « 10V / -10V « +10V /
13 AIN1- Analog input 1 Resolution: 12Bit 0mA « 20mA / 4mA « 20mA
Accuracy: 0,1V (selection via DIP switch)
negative -
12 AGND/0V Analog Ground
Reference potential for analog
-
signals
17 AOUT1 Analog Out Resolution: 10Bit
Accuracy: 0.25V Functions:
Load capacity with signal: 0V « 10V / 2V « 10V / P418
«9 10mA 0mA « 20mA / 4mA « 20mA P176
«P$ 20mA* (selection via DIP switch)
* (with 5V)
11 10V REF +10V reference
10V ± 0.1V
voltage Potentiometer supply voltage -
Max. load 20mA
16 AIN2+ Analog input 2
P400
positive Version as differential Functions: P176
input 0V « 10V / -10V « +10V /
15 AIN2- Analog input 2 Resolution: 12Bit 0mA « 20mA / 4mA « 20mA
Accuracy: 0.1V (selection via DIP switch)
negative -
12 AGND/0V Analog Ground
Reference potential for analog
-
signals
BU 0200 GB-4411 Subject to technical alterations 83
301
302
303
304
3 Options
3.4.3.6 Assignment of functions
The assignment of functions for the digital and analog inputs and outputs is made in the following
parameters of the frequency inverter.
Parameter Function designation
P400 Setpoint input function
P401 External analog input mode
P402 External analog input matching 0%
P403 External analog input matching 100%
P417 Offset analog output
P418 Function analog output
P419 Standardisation, analog output
P480 Function of BUS IO In bits
P481 Function of BUS IO Out bits
P482 Standardisation of BUS IO Out bits
P483 Hysteresis of BUS IO Out bits
The parameters of the IO module are used exclusively for information and testing purposes. Exception:
x 3 :0DWFKLQJRIWKHIilter settings for the IO signals),
x 3 :7RJJOLQJEHWZHHQQRUPDODQGEURDGFDVWRSHUDWLRQ DQG
x 3 :,QYHUVLRQRIWKHDQDORJRXWSXWVLJQDO
3.4.3.7 Broadcast operation
In "broadcast mode" (parameter (P162)) it is possible to make up to two I/O - modules available in parallel
for a maximum of four frequency inverters. The prerequisite for this is that the FIs are on a common system
bus and no frequency inverter address has been assigned more than once (see Section 5.2.2.2).
Therefore the frequency inverters jointly access the I/Os and evaluate the input signals according to their
own FI parameterisation. Output signals from the frequency inverters which are sent to the common I/O
module are linked by a logical "OR" within the module. I.e. a digital output (SK TU4-IOE-« LVVHWDVVRRQ
as one of the four frequency inverters addresses it. In addition, the highest analog value is provided via the
analog output of the I/O extension.
BU 0200 GB-4411 Subject to technical alterations 87
305
306
3 Options
Details of the control connections
Terminal/ Function Data Description / wiring suggestion Parameter
Name
44 24V 24V supply 24VDC ±20%
(module, field and § P$ -
system bus level) Connection for module supply
protected against reverse
polarity voltage and 24V source for the
40 GND/0V Reference potential digital inputs (DIN1 and DIN2)
for digital signals -
Max. permissible current
load: 2A
C1 DIN1 Digital input 1 Low 0V ... 5V
(I/O PROFIBUS DP DIN1) High 15V ... 30V P174
Each digital input has a reaction
Ri = 8.1k: time of 1ms
C2 DIN2 Digital input 2 Input capacitance 10nF Inputs compliant with
(I/O PROFIBUS DP DIN2)
Scan rate 1 ms EN 61131-2, Type 1 P174
77 Sys H System bus
data cable + -
System bus
78 Sys L System bus interface
data cable - -
40 GND/0V Reference potential 24VDC ±20%
for digital signals § P$ -
Connection for module supply
protected against reverse voltage and source for the digital
polarity inputs
44 24V 24V supply
(DIN1 and DIN2)
(module, field and Max. permissible current -
system bus level)
load: 2A
Potential separation
82 PBR B Bus +
(incoming) (red wire) -
RxD/TxD-P The use of a twisted, shielded two-
RS485 transfer
wire cable / Profibus cable type A
81 PBR A Bus - technology
is strongly recommended
(incoming) (green wire) -
RxD/TxD-N
46 GND/ Data ground Bus
0V BUS -
83 RTS Ready to send
-
47 VO/ 5V bus supply
5V BUS voltage internal Profibus voltage Note: Should not be used
-
supply externally!
82 PBR B Bus
(outgoing) (red wire) -
RxD/TxD-P The use of a twisted, shielded two-
RS485 transfer
wire cable / Profibus cable type A
81 PBR A Bus technology
is strongly recommended
(outgoing) (green wire) -
RxD/TxD-N
46 GND/ Data ground Bus
0V BUS -
BU 0200 GB-4411 Subject to technical alterations 89
307
308
3 Options
Details of the control connections
Terminal/ Function Data Description / wiring suggestion Parameter
Name
44 24V 24V supply 24VDC ±20%
(module, system bus level) §P$ -
protected against reverse Connection for module supply
polarity voltage and 24V source for the
40 GND/0V Reference potential digital inputs (DIN1 and DIN2)
for digital signals -
Max. permissible current
load: 2A
C1 DIN1 Digital input 1 Low 0V ... 5V
(I/O CANopen DIN1)
High 15V ... 30V Each digital input has a reaction P174
time of 1ms
Ri = 8.1k:
C2 DIN2 Digital input 2 Inputs compliant with
Input capacitance 10nF EN 61131-2, Type 1
(I/O CANopen DIN2) P174
Scan rate 1 ms
77 Sys H System bus
data cable + -
System bus
78 Sys L System bus interface
data cable - -
40 GND/0V Reference potential
for digital signals -
Potential separation
45 VI / 24V bus supply For CANopen - Bus
24V BUS voltage 24VDC ±20%
CANopen bus supply is essential -
(Field bus) §P$SURWHFWHGDJDLQVW
reverse polarity
75 CAN H Bus +
(incoming) -
CAN H The use of a twisted, shielded two-
RS485 transfer
wire cable is strongly
76 CAN L Bus - technology
recommended
(incoming) -
CAN L
46 GND/ Data ground Bus
0V BUS BUS reference potential -
90 SHLD Bus shield
-
45 VI / 24V bus supply For CANopen - Bus
24V BUS voltage 24VDC ±20%
CANopen bus supply is essential -
§P$SURWHFWHGDJDLQVW
reverse polarity
75 CAN H Bus +
(outgoing) -
CAN H The use of a twisted, shielded two-
RS485 transfer
wire cable is strongly
76 CAN L Bus - technology
recommended
(outgoing) -
CAN L
46 GND/ Data ground Bus
0V BUS BUS reference potential -
BU 0200 GB-4411 Subject to technical alterations 91
309
310
3 Options
Details of the control connections
Terminal/ Function Data Description / wiring suggestion Parameter
Name
44 24V 24V supply
(module, system bus level) 24VDC ±20% -
Connection for module supply
§P$ voltage and 24V source for the
40 GND/0V Reference potential protected against reverse digital inputs (DIN1 and DIN2)
for digital signals polarity -
C1 DIN1 Digital input 1 Low 0V ... 5V
(I/O DeviceNet DIN1) Each digital input has a reaction P174
High 15V ... 30V
time of 1ms
Ri = 8.1k:
C2 DIN2 Digital input 2 Inputs compliant with
Input capacitance 10nF EN 61131-2, Type 1
(I/O DeviceNet DIN2) P174
Scan rate 1 ms
77 Sys H System bus
data cable + -
System bus
78 Sys L System bus interface
data cable - -
40 GND/0V Reference potential
for digital signals
-
Potential separation
45 VI / 24V bus supply For DeviceNet - Bus
24V BUS voltage 24VDC ±20%
DeviceNet bus supply is essential -
(Field bus) §P$SURWHFWHGDJDLQVW
reverse polarity
75 CAN H Bus +
(incoming) -
DeviceNet H The use of a twisted, shielded two-
RS485 transfer
wire cable is strongly
76 CAN L Bus - technology
recommended
(incoming)
-
DeviceNet L
46 GND/ Data ground
0V BUS Bus reference potential -
90 SHLD Shield
Data cable shielding -
45 VI / 24V bus supply For DeviceNet - Bus
24V BUS voltage 24VDC ±20%
DeviceNet bus supply is essential -
(Field bus) §P$SURWHFWHGDJDLQVW
reverse polarity
75 CAN H Bus +
(outgoing) -
DeviceNet H The use of a twisted, shielded two-
RS485 transfer
wire cable is strongly
76 CAN L Bus - technology
recommended
(outgoing) -
DeviceNet L
46 GND/ Data ground
0V BUS Bus reference potential -
BU 0200 GB-4411 Subject to technical alterations 93
311
SK 200E Manual for frequency inverters
3.4.7 Electronic brake rectifier, SK CU4-MBR
The electronic brake rectifier SK CU4-MBR is used to control electromechanical brakes with a coil voltage of
180V DC and 205V DC and sizes 5Nm to 150Nm via the frequency inverter (primarily SK 2x0E) or its ac-
cessories (SK xU4-IOE). Monitoring of the current in the brake coil is integrated into the SK CU4-MBR.
Mains voltage 230V~ and 400V~
+24V control voltage
1x Digital input (control)
1x Digital output (feedback)
Brake connection (DC)
Max. permissible continuous current 0.5A
Interference suppression class C2 Similar to illustration
Permissible cycle time (1 switching cycle =1xON/1xOFF):
«1PEUDNH 0.5s, 150Nm brake: ,0 s
The terminal bar of the customer unit SK CU4-PBR-«LVGLYLGHGLQWRWKUHHSRWHQWLDOOHYHOV
SK CU4- SK 2x0E-
24V Connection of the 24V power
B5 C5 40 44
40 44
supply from the SK 2x0E
GND / 0V
Digital control In the SK CU4 via
DIN DO from the SK 2x0E
1
DO Feedback of operating status of the
brake from the DO of SK CU4
«
Potential level: 24V DC
MB-
80
Potential level: = Brake
Connection of DC brake coil
MB+
79
Potential level: = Brake
L2/N L2/N L1B L1B L1E L1E
Potential level: ~ Mains
L1 «9a
Mains voltage
(Select connection according to voltage)
L1 «9a
L2 / N
Connection to the terminal bar
of the SK CU4-MBR-«
According to the mains voltage, the mains cable must be connected to L1E 9a « 9a RU /B
9a«9a DQG/17KHEUDNHFRQQHFWLRQLVPDGHWR7HUPLQDOV $VVLJQPHQWRIWKHEUDNHVLV
made according to the following table. The module must be supplied with 24VDC. Control is via Terminal C5
by means of a digital output of the frequency inverter which is parameterised to the function {1} "External
brake". Feedback of the operating status of the brake (current/no current supplied to the brake) is via
Terminal B5 of the module.
Brake coil voltage Mains voltage Contact No.
205VDC 230VAC L1B + N/L2
180VDC 400VAC L1E + N/L2
205VDC 460VAC or 480VAC L1E + N/L2
94 Subject to technical alterations BU 0200 GB-4411
312
3 Options
Control connection details
Terminal/ Function Data Description / wiring suggestion Parameter
Name
44 24V 24V supply
24VDC ±25% -
«mA (according Supply voltage connection for the
40 GND /0V GND to load on the digital module
Reference potential output) -
C5 DIN Digital input Current consumption with
30VDC: 13mA
24VDC: 10mA
15VDC: 5.5 mA Digital input for DC brake switching -
Switching thresholds
ON: > approx. 8.5V
OFF: < approx. 7.5V
B5 DOUT Digital output «9P$636-
compatible according to
EN61131-2
Reporting of current status of the
Low: 0V / <30mA -
mechanical brake
No current through brake
High: 24V / >70mA
Current through brake
Potential isolation
79 MB+ Brake control The module SK CU4-MBR
generates an output voltage on
Voltage: Terminals MB+/MB- for control of
Mains Brake an electromechanical brake. This
80 MB- Brake control depends on the supply voltage and
230V~ 205V= the connection of the supply cable P107*,
400V~ 180V= to the one-way (L1E) or bridge P114*,
rectification (L1B) of the module. P505
460/480V~ 205V=
The assignment of the correct
brake coil voltage must be taken
Current: max. 0.5A into account in the selection.
(NOTE: this function is identical to
P434=1)
Potential isolation
L1E
Supply voltage L1: -
Mains connection Mains connection for one-way
9«9± 10% AC,
L1E 1st phase rectification.
max. 10A -
L1B
Supply voltage L1: -
Mains connection Mains connection for bridge
9«9± 10% AC,
L1B 1st phase rectification.
max. 10A -
L2/N
-
Mains connection Connection of 2nd phase for mains
2nd phase connection L1E or L1B.
L2/N
-
* Recommended setting (P107/P114) for NORD brakes: BRE5, 10, 40: 0.02s / BRE 20, 60, 100, 150: 0.03s
BU 0200 GB-4411 Subject to technical alterations 95
313
SK 200E Manual for frequency inverters
3.4.8 Setpoint converter, SK CU4-REL
The analog inputs of SK 2x0 E series frequency inverters and the optional mains units SK xU4-24V can only
process unipolar setpoinW YDOXHV UHIHUHQFHG WR *1' « 9 « P$ ,I D ELSRODU VHWSRLQW
(-9 « 9 LV DYDLODEOH WKLV PXVW EH FRQYHUWHG WR D « 9 VLJQDO E\ PHDQV RI DQ 6. CU4-REL
setpoint converter.
Two coupling relays are integrated into the module. These are controlled via the digital outputs of the
frequency inverter and can be used as openers or closers according to their connection.
+24V control voltage
2x Analog inputs (-«9
2x digital inputs
[$QDORJRXWSXWV «9
2x Relay outputs (each configured as changeovers)
Max. permissible continuous relay current 100mA
(30VDC)
incl. cable set Similar to illustration
The terminal bar of the customer unit SK CU4-PBR-« LV GLYLGHG LQWR WZR SRWHQWLDO OHYHOV SRtential
separation max. 50VDC). On delivery, these are connected together with a plug-in jumper.
SK CU4- SK 2x0E-
24V Connection of the 24V power
R21 R22 R24 R11 R12 R14 40 C2 C1 118 117 116 114 111 112 44
11 12* 44
supply from the SK 2x0E
AGND / 0V
* Terminal 12 or Terminal 40
10V REF.
AIN1
Connection for bipolar analog
«
AIN2 signals
16 14 «
AOUT1 AOUT connection of the
SK CU4 to AIN of the SK 2x0E
AOUT2
Potential level: Analog
DI1
1
Potential level: Digital / Relay
DI2
Digital control IN of the SK CU4 via
3
GND / 0V DO from the SK 2x0E
40
Relay 1
R11 / R14 = NO
R11 / R12 = NC
Relay 2
R21 / R24 = NO
R21 / R22 = NC
Connection to the terminal bar
of the SK CU4-REL-«
The bipolar analog signals must be connected to input terminals 114 or 116. Via the analog outputs
(Terminal 117 or 118) the signals which are transformed to 0...10V can be accessed and transferred to the
frequency inverter for further processing. In order to ensure the function of the analog signal converter, the
10VDC reference voltage of the frequency inverter must be wired to the reference potential of the setpoint
source(s) of the SK CU4-REL
Up to 2 digital signals can be transferred to the coupling relays from the frequency inverter. Regardless of
the wiring, both relays each provide the possibility of accessing an opening (NC) or a closing (NO) signal.
The module must be supplied with 24VDC.
To separate the two potential levels, the jumper (at the start of the series terminal) must be pulled out.
96 Subject to technical alterations BU 0200 GB-4411
314
3 Options
Control connection details
Terminal/ Function Data Description / wiring suggestion Parameter
Name
44 24V 24V supply
24VDC ±25% Connection of the supply voltage
for the module and the reference
112 AGND/0V Reference potential 20mA potential of the analog signals
for analogue signals
111 10V REF +10V +10V, 5mA
Connection of reference voltage
Reference voltage
from frequency inverter
114 AIN1 Analog input 1 The conversion of the analog
signals is inverted.
Signal IN Signal OUT
U= -«95i 0
116 AIN2 Analog input 2 Resolution 10Bit Terminal Value Terminal Value
114 -10V 117 +10V
114 +10V 117 0V
116 -10V 118 +10V
117 AOUT1 Analog output 1
116 +10V 118 0V
Resolution: 10Bit
Precision: 0.25V
Load capacity with signal: Assignment of the functions of the
118 AOUT2 Analog output 2
«9 10mA analog input signals is made via
parameter P400[...] of the
frequency inverter.
Potential isolation
C1 DIN1 Digital input 1
Relay input:
Low: 0-5V (2.8kOhm) Assignment of the functions of the
High: 18-30V (1.6kOhm) analog output signals is made via
C2 DIN2 Digital input 2 parameter P434[...] of the
Reaction time max. 7ms frequency inverter.
40 GND /0V Reference potential
for digital signals
R14 R1 NO Relay 1.1
Normally closed
contact
Relay input: Relay (changeover) with function:
R12 R1 NC Relay 1.2 Low: 0-5V (2.8kOhm)
Normally opened Closer: R11 / R14
High: 18-30V (1.6kOhm)
contact Opener: R11 / R12
R11 Relay 1.3 Reaction time max. 7ms
Common contact
Mechanical
R24 R2 NO Relay 2.1 lifetime:
Normally closed 8
1x10 (1 billion) OPS
contact (Operations)
R22 R2 NC Relay 2.2 Relay (changeover) with function:
Normally opened Electrical: Closer: R21 / R24
5
contact 3x10 (3 million) OPS
Opener: R21 / R22
R21 Relay 2.3 (Operations)
Common contact
BU 0200 GB-4411 Subject to technical alterations 97
315
SK 200E Manual for frequency inverters
3.4.9 Direction selection switch and potentiometer SK TIE4-SWT and SK TIE4-POT
The R and L digital signals of the direction selection switch SK TIE4-SWT can be applied directly to the
corresponding digital inputs 1 and 2 of the SK 2xxE.
The potentiometer (0-10V) SK TIE4-POT can be evaluated via the analog inputs of the frequency inverter
(only SK 2x0E) or the I/O extension. In addition, with the inverter versions SK 2x5E, an optional 24V module
(SK xU4-24V-...) provides the possibility of converting analog setpoint values into proportional pulses
(frequencies). These pulses can in turn be evaluated via one of the digital inputs 2 or 3 (P420 [02]/[03] =
26/27) of the SK 2xxE in the form of a setpoint value (P400 [-06]/[-07]).
Each of the modules (control element) is supplied
with a pre-assembled cable. This must be plugged
into the connection plug of the relevant module.
The open ends of the cable set must be wired to
the terminal bar of the frequency inverter
according to the table.
Module SK TIE4-SWT Connection: Terminal No. Function
SK 2x0E SK 2x5E
Colour FI FI Mains unit
brown 24V supply voltage 43 44
Rotary switch
black Enable R (e.g. DIN1) 21 21
L - OFF - R
white Enable L (e.g. DIN2) 22 22
Module SK TIE4-POT
white Access to AIN+ 14 14
Potentiometer
brown Reference voltage 10V 11 11
N
blue Analog ground AGND 12 12
For examples of connections to the frequency inverter, please refer to Section 3.4.2.
98 Subject to technical alterations BU 0200 GB-4411
316
317
SK 200E Manual for frequency inverters
3.5.1.1 SK T14-TU-BUS connections
The precise connections of the 36 spring-loaded terminals depend on the Technology Unit used. Details can
be found in the relevant sections for the Technology Units
3.5.1.2 SK TI4-TU-NET Connections
The terminal block of the Adapter Unit SK TI4-TU-NET is divided into two potential levels.
SK TU4- SK 2x5E-
L2 / N
L2/N
Mains voltage
xxxx
L1 (L1 with integrated fuse element T-5A)
L1
PE
43 40 43 40 43 40 11 14 12 B1 B2 B3 40 PE
Potential level: ~ Mains
23 22 21 «
Potential level: 24V DC
Enable right
Enabling and pulse output,
Enable left
connection to the SK 2x5E
DOUT BUS
AGND / 0V
«
AIN1+ Potentiometer connection only
«
permissible with the use of an
10V REF SK TU4-24V-«PDLQVXQLW
«
«
44 40 «
GND / 0V
Connection of the 24V supply to
VO / 24V
the SK 2x5E
«
Connection to the terminal bar
«
of the SK TI4-TU-NET
100 Subject to technical alterations BU 0200 GB-4411
318
3 Options
Details of the control connections
Terminal/ Function Data Description / wiring suggestion Parameter
Name
43 VO/24V 24V supply
-
40 GND/0V Reference potential -
24VDC ±10%
43 VO/24V 24V supply
max. 420mA (total) -
Supply voltage (output) to supply
integrated an SK 2x5E or other module with
40 GND/0V Reference potential short-circuit monitoring, 24V. -
limited overtemperature
43 VO/24V 24V supply and overload monitoring
-
40 GND/0V Reference potential
-
11 10V REF +10V 10V ± 0.2V
reference voltage Only in combination with -
Max.
SK TU4-24V-«
load 5mA
For connection of potentiometer
14 AIN1+ Analog input «9
5 - N
positive Resolution: 8Bit -
Accuracy: 0.2V $ EXUGHQUHVLVWRUIRUWKH
evaluation of 0/4 - 20mA signals is
12 AGND/0V Analog Ground Reference potential for contained in the enclosed bag. -
analog signals
B1 DOUT BUS Frequency output SPS compatible in Pulses for evaluation via the digital
(FOUT) compliance with input function P420 [02]/[03] =
EN61131-2 26/27 and the analog meaning in
Low: 0V, High: 24V P400 [-06]/[-07].
Pulse frequency: ~ 1 - With the use of an SK TU4-24V-... this
P420
32kHz outputs the setpoint value of the analog P400
input.
With the use of an SK TU4-POT-... this
outputs the setpoint value of the
integrated potentiometer.
B2 ON-L Digital output, enable Only in combination with
left SK TU4-POT-« P420
Control via "Left" key
B3 ON-R Digital output, enable Only in combination with
right SK TU4-POT-« P420
Control via "Right" key
40 GND/0V Reference potential
-
Potential separation
PE PE, Earth Does not need to be connected.
Is already connected to the module -
housing.
L1 Mains connection
Mains connection, 100 - 240V or -
1.Phase
380 - 500V, depending on the
module -
L2/N Mains connection
-
2. Phase
BU 0200 GB-4411 Subject to technical alterations 101
319
320
321
322
3 Options
3.5.4 I/O Extension, SK TU4-IOE, ...-M12
The internal I/O units can record sensor and actuator signals. These can be used for a drive function or
forwarded to a host bus system (e.g. Profibus or CANopen). Up to two I/O modules (also combinations: 1 x
SK CU4-IOE and 1 x SK TU4-IOE) can be connected to an inverter (up to firmware version V1.0 R1 of the
I/O extension and firmware version V1.1 R2 of the frequency inverter, only one I/O extension is possible for
each frequency inverter.).
The I/O extension SK TU4-IOE-« UHTXLUHV DQ 6. TI4-TU-BUS
Adapter Unit. Communication with the frequency inverter(s) is via
the system bus. All connections (power supply, system bus,
sensors,...) are made via the terminal block of the BUS Adapter
Unit. The M12-versions of the I/O - extension (SK TU4-IOE-M12)
also provide M12 connections for each of the digital inputs and
outputs on the front side.
4x digital inputs
2x analog inputs
2x digital outputs
1x analog output
Status LEDs: BG status, BG fault
Additional LEDs, M12 version: Dig. In 1 - 4, Dig. Out 1 - 2
DIP switches for selection
0 - 10V, -10 - 10V, 0 - 20mA, 4 - 20mA
DIP switches for: addressing, bus termination
Control connections SK TU4-IOE(-«
The double spring terminal block of the BUS -Adapter Unit is colour coded to indicate the three different
potential levels.
A separate voltage source should be used to supply the DOs. However, it is also possible to implement the
supply of the DOs by bridging the 24V 2 and 0V 2 with one of the terminals of the system bus level (24V and
0V). However, in this case it should be noted that this produces an increased risk of errors on the bus
cables.
The sensors and actuators are connected to the terminal block. Alternatively, the SK TU4-IOE-M12 module
enables connection of the digital I/Os via the M12 round plug connectors (Socket, 5-pin, A-coded) on the
front of the module.
Double use of the inputs via the terminal block and the M12 round plug should be avoided.
Potential level: Analog I/O Potential level: System bus Potential level: DOs
Analog IOs System bus level and digital inputs Digital outputs
10V-A AIN1+ AIN1- 0V-A AOUT 24V 24V 0V 0V DIN 1 0V 24V DIN 2 0V 24V 24V 2 DO 1 0V 2
(as11) (as11) (as11)
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36
10V-A AIN2+ AIN2- 0V-A PE 24V Sys + Sys - 0V DIN 3 0V 24V DIN 4 0V 24V 0V 2 DO 2 0V 2
(as11) (as11) (as11)
Terminal block of the bus Adapter Unit
SK TI4-TU-BUS and assignment of functions
BU 0200 GB-4411 Subject to technical alterations 105
323
324
3 Options
3.5.4.1 Details of the control connections
Terminal/ Function Data Description / wiring suggestion Parameter
Name
1 +10V 10V reference 10V ± 0.1V
voltage Max. Potentiometer supply voltage -
2 load 20mA
3 AIN1+ Analog input 1
positive Version as differential
input P400
5 AIN1- Analog input 1 Resolution 12Bit P176
negative Accuracy: 0.1V Functions:
0V « 10V / -10V « +10V /
4 AIN2+ Analog input 2 0mA « 20mA / 4mA « 20mA
(selection via DIP switch)
positive Version as differential
input P400
6 AIN2- Analog input 2 Resolution: 12Bit P176
negative Accuracy: 0,1V
7 0V-A Analog Ground
Reference potential for analog
-
signals
8
9 AOUT Analog Out Resolution: 10Bit
Accuracy 0.25V Functions:
Load capacity with signal: 0V « 10V / -10V « +10V / P418
«9 10mA 0mA « 20mA / 4mA « 20mA P176
«P$ 20mA* (selection via DIP switch)
* (with 5V)
10 PE PE
-
Potential separation
11 24V external 24V supply
(module, system bus level)
12 24VDC ±20% -
§P$
13 protected against reverse Connection for module supply
polarity voltage and 24V source for the
15 0V GND digital inputs (DIN1 to DIN4)
Reference potential
for digital signals Max. permissible current
17 load: 3A -
18
14 Sys+ System bus
data cable + -
System bus
16 Sys- System bus interface
data cable - -
19 DIN1 Digital input 1 Low 0V ... 5V The functions must be assigned in
parameter P480. The settings for P480
(I/O IO extension DIN1) High 15V ... 30V P174
the first IOE are made in the arrays
Ri = 8.1k: [-05 / -07] and for the second IOE
20 DIN3 Digital input 3 Input capacitance 10nF in the arrays [-01, -03].
(I/O IO extension DIN3)
P480
Scan rate 1ms, Inputs compliant with P174
Reaction time 1ms EN 61131-2, Type 1
BU 0200 GB-4411 Subject to technical alterations 107
325
SK 200E Manual for frequency inverters
Terminal/ Function Data Description / wiring suggestion Parameter
Name
21 GND GND
Reference potential As for terminal 15 -
for digital signals Connection of supply voltage
22 for module and 24V source for
23 24V 24V supply supply of the digital inputs
(Module, system bus level) As for terminal 11 (DIN1 to DIN4) -
24
25 DIN2 Digital input 2 Low 0V ... 5V The functions must be assigned in
parameter P480. The settings for P480
(I/O IO extension DIN2) High 15V ... 30V
the first IOE are made in the arrays P174
Ri = 8.1k: [-05 / -07] and for the second IOE
26 DIN4 Digital input 4 Input capacitance 10nF in the arrays [-01, -03].
P480
(I/O IO extension DIN4) Scan rate 1ms, Inputs compliant with P174
Reaction time 1ms EN 61131-2, Type 1
27 GND GND
Reference potential As for terminal 15 -
for digital signals Connection of supply voltage
28 for module and 24V source for
29 24V 24V supply supply of the digital inputs
(Module, system bus level) As for terminal 11 (DIN1 to DIN4) -
30
Potential separation
31 24V 2 24V supply Supply voltage connection for
of digital outputs 24VDC ±20% digital outputs (DO1 and DO2)
Up to 1A, according to load If necessary, bridge to 24V terminal -
reverse polarity protected Recommendation: use an external
24V source
32 0V 2 GND 2 Ground for digital outputs (DO1 and
Reference potential DO2) -
for digital outputs
If necessary, bridge to GND terminal
33 DO1 Digital output 1 Low = 0V The functions must be assigned in
High: 24V parameter P481. The settings for P481
(I/O IO extension DO1)
Rated current: 500mA the first IOE are made in the arrays P175
each [-07 / -08] and for the second IOE
34 DO2 Digital output 2 in the arrays [-05, -06].
P481
(I/O IO extension DO2) Outputs compliant with P175
EN 61131-2
35 0V 2 GND 2 Ground for digital outputs (DO1 and
Reference potential DO2)
for digital outputs -
36 If necessary, bridge to GND
terminal
3.5.4.2 Configuration
Configuration of the external I/O extension (SK TU4-IOE-« LV FDUULHG RXW LQ WKH VDPH ZD\ DV IRU WKH
internal I/O - extension SK CU4-IOE. The relevant details are described in Section 3.4.3.2.
108 Subject to technical alterations BU 0200 GB-4411
326
327
SK 200E Manual for frequency inverters
3.5.5 PROFIBUS DP, SK TU4-PBR, ...-M12
Up to four connected frequency inverters can be managed by the external PROFIBUS DP module (control,
status messages, parameterisation and diagnosis).
Baud rate: max. 12 MBaud
Protocol: DPV 0 and DPV 1
4x digital inputs
2x digital outputs
Automatic detection: PPO type, baud rate
DIP switches for: addressing, bus termination
Status LEDs: Module status, module error, bus status, bus
error, Dig.
Additional LEDs, M12 version: Dig. In 1 - 4, Dig. Out 1 - 2
Control connections SK TU4-PBR(-«
The double spring terminal block of the BUS -Adapter Unit is colour coded to indicate the three different
potential levels .
The field bus level is supplied with 24VDC from the system bus level via a DC/DC converter. Therefore
terminals 1/2 are at the same potential as e.g terminal 11. As the DC/DC converter is in the bus module,
there is only a connection between terminals 1/2 and e.g. 11 if the bus module and the connection unit are
screwed together.
A separate voltage source should be used to supply the DOs. However, it is also possible to implement the
supply of the DOs by bridging the 24V 2 and 0V 2 with one of the terminals of the system bus level (24V and
0V). However, in this case it should be noted that this produces an increased risk of errors on the bus
cables.
The sensors and actuators are connected to the terminal block. Alternatively, the SK TU4-PBR-M12 module
enables connection of the digital I/Os via the M12 round plug connectors (Socket, 5-pin, A-coded) on the
front of the module.
Double use of the inputs via the terminal block and the M12 round plug should be avoided.
Potential level: Field bus Potential level: System bus Potential level: DOs
Field bus level System bus level and digital inputs Digital outputs
PROFIBUS DP
24V PB B PB A 0V-B RTS 24V 24V 0V 0V DIN 1 0V 24V DIN 2 0V 24V 24V 2 DO 1 0V 2
IN IN (as 1) (as 1) GND GND GND (as 1) GND (as 1)
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36
24V PB B PB A 0V-B +5V B 24V Sys + Sys - 0V DIN 3 0V 24V DIN 4 0V 24V 0V 2 DO 2 0V 2
(as 1) OUT OUT (as 8) (as 1) GND GND (as 1) GND (as 1)
Terminal block of the bus Adapter Unit
SK TI4-TU-BUS and assignment of functions
110 Subject to technical alterations BU 0200 GB-4411
328
329
SK 200E Manual for frequency inverters
Details of the control connections
Terminal/ Function Data Description / wiring suggestion Parameter
Name
1 24V 24V supply 24VDC ±20%
(module, field and system § P$
bus level)
2 protected against reverse Connection for module supply
polarity voltage and 24V source for the -
digital inputs (DIN1 to DIN4)
Max. permissible current
load: 500mA
3 PB B PBR B
(incoming) Bus + (red wire)
-
4 RxD/TxD-N
(outgoing) The use of a twisted, shielded two-
RS485 transfer
wire cable / Profibus cable type A
5 PB A PBR A technology
is strongly recommended
(incoming) Bus - (green wire)
-
6 RxD/TxD-P
(outgoing)
7 0V-B Data ground Bus Reference potential for
internal Profibus voltage -
8 supply
9 RTS Ready to send
-
10 5V B 5V bus supply
voltage internal Profibus voltage Note: Should not be used
-
supply externally!
Potential separation
11 24V 24V supply
(Module, field and system As for terminal 1
bus level)
12 However, max. -
permissible current load:
3A
13 Connection for module supply
voltage and 24V source for the
15 GND GND digital inputs (DIN1 to DIN4)
Reference potential
for digital signals
17 -
18
14 Sys+ System bus
data cable + -
System bus
16 Sys- System bus interface
data cable - -
19 DIN1 Digital input 1 Low 0V ... 5V
(I/O Profibus DIN1) High 15V ... 30V P174
Ri = 8.1k: Each digital input has a reaction
Input capacitance 10nF time of 1ms
20 DIN3 Digital input 3
Scan rate 1ms
(I/O Profibus DIN3) P174
Inputs compliant with
EN 61131-2, Type 1
112 Subject to technical alterations BU 0200 GB-4411
330
3 Options
Terminal/ Function Data Description / wiring suggestion Parameter
Name
21 0V GND
Reference potential As for terminal 15 -
for digital signals Connection of supply voltage
22
for module and 24V source for
23 24V 24V supply As for terminal 1 supply of the digital inputs
(Module, field and system However, max. (DIN1 to DIN4) -
bus level)
24 permissible current load:
3A
25 DIN2 Digital input 2 Low 0V ... 5V
(I/O Profibus DIN2) High 15V ... 30V P174
Ri = 8.1k: Each digital input has a reaction
Input capacitance 10nF time of 1ms
26 DIN4 Digital input 4
Scan rate 1ms
(I/O Profibus DIN4) P174
Inputs compliant with
EN 61131-2, Type 1
27 0V GND
Reference potential As for terminal 15 -
for digital signals Connection of supply voltage
28 for module and 24V source for
29 24V 24V supply supply of the digital inputs
(Module, field and system As for terminal 1 (DIN1 to DIN4) -
bus level)
30
Potential separation
31 24V2 24V supply 24VDC -/+20%
Supply voltage connection for
of digital outputs Up to 1A, according to digital outputs (DO1 and DO2) -
load
If necessary, bridge to 24V terminal
reverse polarity protected
32 0V2 GND 2 Ground for digital outputs (DO1
Reference potential and DO2) -
for digital outputs
If necessary, bridge to 0V terminal
33 DO1 Digital output 1 Low = 0V
(I/O Profibus DO1) High: 24V P175
Rated current: 500mA The digital outputs should be used
each with a separate 24V supply.
34 DO2 Digital output 2
(I/O Profibus DO2) P175
35 0V2 GND 2 Ground for digital outputs (DO1
Reference potential and DO2) -
for digital signals
36 If necessary, bridge to 0V terminal
Detailed information about operation via PROFIBUS DP can be found in the relevant supplementary manual
BU0220.
- www.nord.com -
BU 0200 GB-4411 Subject to technical alterations 113
331
SK 200E Manual for frequency inverters
3.5.6 CANopen, SK TU4-CAO, ...-M12
Up to four connected frequency inverters can be managed by the internal CANopen module via CANopen
(control, status messages, parameterisation and diagnosis).
Baud rate: max. 1 MBaud
Protocol: DS301 and DSP 402 1
4x digital inputs
2x digital outputs
DIP switches for: addressing, bus termination, baud rate
Status LEDs: Module status, module error, bus status,
bus error, Dig.
Additional LEDs, M12 version: Dig. In 1 - 4, Dig. Out 1 - 2
Control connections SK TU4-CAO(-«
The double spring terminal block of the BUS -Adapter Unit is colour coded to indicate the three different
potential levels .
The field bus level is electrically isolated from the system bus level and must therefore be separately sup-
plied with 24VDC.
A separate power source should be used for the supply of the DOs. However, it is also possible to
implement the supply of the DOs by bridging the 24V 2 and 0V 2 with one of the terminals of the system bus
level (24V and 0V). However, in this case it should be noted that this produces an increased risk of errors on
the bus cables.
The sensors and actuators are connected to the terminal block. Alternatively, the SK TU4-CAO-M12 module
enables connection of the digital I/Os via the M12 round plug connectors (Socket, 5-pin, A-coded) on the
front of the module.
Double use of the inputs via the terminal block and the M12 round plug should be avoided.
Potential level: Field bus Potential level: System bus Potential level: DOs
Field bus level System bus level and digital inputs Digital outputs
CANopen
24V-B CAO+ CAO- 0V-B SHLD 24V 24V 0V 0V DIN 1 0V 24V DIN 2 0V 24V 24V 2 DO 1 0V 2
IN IN (as11) (as11) (as11)
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36
24V-B CAO+ CAO- 0V-B PE 24V Sys + Sys - 0V DIN 3 0V 24V DIN 4 0V 24V 0V 2 DO 2 0V 2
OUT OUT (as11) (as11) (as11)
Terminal block of the bus Adapter Unit
SK TI4-TU-BUS and assignment of functions
114 Subject to technical alterations BU 0200 GB-4411
332
333
SK 200E Manual for frequency inverters
Details of the control connections
Terminal/ Function Data Description / wiring suggestion Parameter
Name
1 24V-B 24V bus supply 24VDC -/+20%
(field bus)
§P$
2 protected against reverse
Supply voltage for the CANopen
polarity -
controller / field bus
Max. permissible current
load: 500mA
3 CAN+ Bus +
(incoming)
-
4 CAN H
The use of a twisted, shielded two-
(outgoing) RS485 transfer
wire cable is strongly
5 CAN- Bus - technology
recommended
(incoming)
-
6 CAN L
(outgoing)
7 0V-B Data ground Bus
BUS reference potential -
8
9 SHLD Bus shield
-
10 PE PE-Bus
-
Potential separation
11 24V 24V supply
(module, system bus level)
12 24VDC -/+20% -
§P$
13 protected against reverse Connection for module supply
polarity voltage and 24V source for the
15 0V GND digital inputs (DIN1 to DIN4)
Reference potential
for digital signals Max. permissible current
17 load: 3A -
18
14 Sys+ System bus
data cable + -
System bus
16 Sys- System bus interface
data cable - -
19 DIN1 Digital input 1 Low 0V ... 5V
(I/O CANopen DIN1) High 15V ... 30V Each digital input has a reaction P174
Ri = 8.1k: time of 1ms
20 DIN3 Digital input 3 Input capacitance 10nF Inputs compliant with
(I/O CANopen DIN3)
Scan rate 1ms EN 61131-2, Type 1 P174
116 Subject to technical alterations BU 0200 GB-4411
334
3 Options
Terminal/ Function Data Description / wiring suggestion Parameter
Name
21 0V GND
Reference potential As for terminal 15 -
for digital signals Connection of supply voltage
22 for module and 24V source for
23 24V 24V supply supply of the digital inputs
(module, system bus level) As for terminal 11 (DIN1 to DIN4) -
24
25 DIN2 Digital input 2 Low 0V ... 5V
(I/O CANopen DIN2) High 15V ... 30V Each digital input has a reaction P174
Ri = 8.1k: time of 1ms
26 DIN4 Digital input 4 Input capacitance 10nF Inputs compliant with
(I/O CANopen DIN4)
Scan rate 1ms EN 61131-2, Type 1 P174
27 0V GND
Reference potential As for terminal 15 -
for digital signals Connection of supply voltage
28 for module and 24V source for
29 24V 24V supply supply of the digital inputs
(module, system bus level) As for terminal 11 (DIN1 to DIN4) -
30
Potential separation
31 24V 2 24V supply 24VDC -/+20%
Supply voltage connection for
of digital outputs Up to 1A, according to digital outputs (DO1 and DO2) -
load
If necessary, bridge to 24V terminal
reverse polarity protected
32 0V 2 GND 2 Ground for digital outputs (DO1
Reference potential and DO2) -
for digital outputs
If necessary, bridge to 0V terminal
33 DO1 Digital output 1 Low = 0V
(I/O CANopen DO1) High: 24V P175
Rated current: 500mA The digital outputs should be used
each with a separate 24V supply.
34 DO2 Digital output 2
(I/O CANopen DO2) P175
35 0V 2 GND 2 External supply voltage for digital
Reference potential outputs (DO1 and DO2)
for digital outputs -
36 If necessary, bridge to GND
terminal
Detailed information about operation via CANopen can be found in the relevant supplementary manual
BU0260.
- www.nord.com -
BU 0200 GB-4411 Subject to technical alterations 117
335
SK 200E Manual for frequency inverters
3.5.7 DeviceNet, SK TU4-DEV, ...-M12
Up to four connected frequency inverters can be managed by the internal DeviceNet module via DeviceNet
(control, status messages, parameterisation and diagnosis).
Baud rate: Max. 500 kBaud
Protocol: AC-Drive and NORD-AC
4x digital inputs
2x digital outputs
DIP switches for: addressing, baud rate
Status LEDs: Module status, module error, bus status, bus
error, Dig.
Additional LEDs, M12 version: Dig. In 1 - 4, Dig. Out 1 - 2
Control connections SK TU4-DEV(-«
The double spring terminal block of the BUS -Adapter Unit is colour coded to indicate the three different
potential levels .
The field bus level is electrically isolated from the system bus level and must therefore be separately sup-
plied with 24VDC.
A separate voltage source should be used to supply the DOs. However, it is also possible to implement the
supply of the DOs by bridging the 24V 2 and 0V 2 with one of the terminals of the system bus level (24V and
0V). However, in this case it should be noted that this produces an increased risk of errors on the bus
cables.
The sensors and actuators are connected to the terminal block. Alternatively, the SK TU4-DEV-M12 module
enables connection of the digital I/Os via the M12 round plug connectors (Socket, 5-pin, A-coded) on the
front of the module.
Double use of the inputs via the terminal block and the M12 round plug should be avoided.
Potential level: Field bus Potential level: System bus Potential level: DOs
Field bus level System bus level and digital inputs Digital outputs
DeviceNet
24V-B CAN+ CAN- 0V-B SHLD 24V 24V 0V 0V DIN 1 0V 24V DIN 2 0V 24V 24V 2 DO 1 0V 2
IN IN (as11) (as11) (as11)
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36
24V-B CAN+ CAN- 0V-B PE 24V Sys + Sys - 0V DIN 3 0V 24V DIN 4 0V 24V 0V 2 DO 2 0V 2
OUT OUT (as11) (as11) (as11)
Terminal block of the bus Adapter Unit
SK TI4-TU-BUS and assignment of functions
118 Subject to technical alterations BU 0200 GB-4411
336
337
SK 200E Manual for frequency inverters
Details of the control connections
Terminal/ Function Data Description / wiring suggestion Parameter
Name
1 24V-B 24V bus supply 24VDC -/+20%
(Field bus)
§P$
2 protected against reverse
Supply voltage for the DeviceNet
polarity -
controller / field bus
Max. permissible current
load: 3A
3 CAN+ Bus +
(incoming)
-
4 DeviceNet H
The use of a twisted, shielded two-
(outgoing) RS485 transfer
wire cable is strongly
5 CAN- Bus - technology
recommended
(incoming)
-
6 DeviceNet L
(outgoing)
7 0V-B Data ground Bus
BUS reference potential -
8
9 SHLD Bus shield
-
10 PE PE-Bus
-
Potential separation
11 24V 24V supply
(module, system bus level)
12 24VDC -/+20% -
§P$
13 protected against reverse Connection for module supply
polarity voltage and 24V source for the
15 0V GND digital inputs (DIN1 to DIN4)
Reference potential
for digital signals Max. permissible current
17 load: 3A -
18
14 Sys+ System bus
data cable + -
System bus
16 Sys- System bus interface
data cable - -
19 DIN1 Digital input 1 Low 0V ... 5V
(I/O DeviceNet DIN1) High 15V ... 30V Each digital input has a reaction P174
Ri = 8.1k: time of 1ms
20 DIN3 Digital input 3 Input capacitance 10nF Inputs compliant with
(I/O DeviceNet DIN3)
Scan rate 1ms EN 61131-2, Type 1 P174
120 Subject to technical alterations BU 0200 GB-4411
338
3 Options
Terminal/ Function Data Description / wiring suggestion Parameter
Name
21 0V GND
Reference potential As for terminal 15 -
for digital signals Connection of supply voltage
22 for module and 24V source for
23 24V 24V supply supply of the digital inputs
(module, system bus level) As for terminal 11 (DIN1 to DIN4) -
24
25 DIN2 Digital input 2 Low 0V ... 5V
(I/O DeviceNet DIN2) High 15V ... 30V Each digital input has a reaction P174
Ri = 8.1k: time of 1ms
26 DIN4 Digital input 4 Input capacitance 10nF Inputs compliant with
(I/O DeviceNet DIN4)
Scan rate 1ms EN 61131-2, Type 1 P174
27 0V GND
Reference potential As for terminal 15 -
for digital signals Connection of supply voltage
28 for module and 24V source for
29 24V 24V supply supply of the digital inputs
(module, system bus level) As for terminal 11 (DIN1 to DIN4) -
30
Potential separation
31 24V 2 24V supply 24VDC -/+20%
Supply voltage connection for
of digital outputs Up to 1A, according to digital outputs (DO1 and DO2) -
loadR
If necessary, bridge to 24V terminal
reverse polarity protected
32 0V 2 GND 2 Ground for digital outputs (DO1
Reference potential and DO2) -
for digital outputs
If necessary, bridge to 0V terminal
33 DO1 Digital output 1 Low = 0V
(I/O DeviceNet DO1) High: 24V P175
Rated current: 500mA The digital outputs should be used
each with a separate 24V supply.
34 DO2 Digital output 2
(I/O DeviceNet DO2) P175
35 0V 2 GND Ground for digital outputs (DO1
Reference potential and DO2) -
for digital signals
36 If necessary, bridge to 0V terminal
Detailed information about operation via DeviceNet can be found in the relevant supplementary manual
BU0280.
- www.nord.com -
BU 0200 GB-4411 Subject to technical alterations 121
339
SK 200E Manual for frequency inverters
3.5.8 EtherCAT, SK TU4-ECT(-C)
Up to 4 connected frequency inverters can be managed via EtherCAT® using the external EtherCAT
module (control, status report, parameterisation and diagnosis).
Baud rate: max. 100 MBaud
Profile CoE
8x digital inputs
2x digital outputs
DIP switches for: 2nd address mode
Status LEDs: Module status, module error, bus status,
bus error, 2x EtherCat physical status
Control connections of the SK TU4-ECT(-C)
Field bus
The field bus cable must only be connected to the two M12 sockets mounted on the front. Care must be
taken that the incoming bus cable is connected to the "In" socket and that the outgoing cable is connected
to the "Out" socket. If this is the last participant, the "Out" socket must be left vacant. A termination resistor
is not necessary.
NORD DRIVESYSTEMS SK TU4-ECT
Socket details
Pin numbering
EtherCAT
2
ERR 1
RUN
DE
DS
IN OUT
Signal Name M12 D-code 4-pin
TX+ Transmission Data + 1
TX- Transmission Data - 3
RX+ Receive Data + 2
RX- Receive Data - 4
M12 socket assignment
Peripherals (system bus and IOs)
The EtherCAT modules must be provided with a 24V DC (±20%, 100mA) control voltage. Wire end sleeves
must be used for flexible cables.
The double spring BUS terminal bar is divided into 2 potential levels (system bus and digital outputs).
Terminals 1/2/9/10 are connected to Terminal 11 via a DC/DC converter. As the DC/DC converter is located
in the bus module, there is only a connection to Terminals 1/2/9/10 and e.g. 11 if the bus module and the
connection unit are screwed together.
A separate power source should be used for the supply of the DOs. However, by bridging 24V 2 and 0V 2 to
one of the terminals of the system bus level (24V and 0V) it is possible to implement the supply of the DOs.
122 Subject to technical alterations BU 0200 GB-4411
340
341
SK 200E Manual for frequency inverters
Control connection details
Terminal/ Function Data Description / wiring suggestion Parameter
Name
1 24V 24V supply
(Module and system bus 24VDC ±20%
level) Connection of supply voltage for
2 §mA module and 24V source for supply
reverse polarity protected of the digital inputs (DIN1 to DIN8) -
9 via DC/DC converter to
Max. permissible current Terminal 11.
load: 500mA
10
3 DIN5 Digital input 5
(I/O EtherCAT DIN5) P174
4 DIN7 Digital input 7 Low 0V ... 5V
High 15V ... 30V
(I/O EtherCAT DIN7) P174
Ri = 10k: Each digital input has a reaction
Input capacitance 10nF time of 1ms.
5 DIN6 Digital input 6 Scan rate 1 ms
(I/O EtherCAT DIN6) P174
Inputs as per
EN 61131-2 Type 1
6 DIN8 Digital input 8
(I/O EtherCAT DIN8) P174
7 0V GND GND for system bus and digital
Reference potential As for terminal 15 inputs (DIN1 to DIN8)
for digital signals -
8 via connection ofDC/DC converter
to Terminal 15
11 24V 24V supply
(Module and system bus
level)
As for terminal 1
12 Max. permissible current -
load: 3A
13 Connection of supply voltage for
module and 24V source for supply
15 0V GND of the digital inputs (DIN1 to DIN8)
Reference potential
for digital signals
17 -
18
14 Sys+ System bus
data cable + -
System bus
16 Sys- System bus interface
data cable - -
19 DIN1 Digital input 1 Low 0V ... 5V
(I/O EtherCAT DIN1) High 15V ... 30V P174
Ri = 8.1k: Each digital input has a reaction
Input capacitance 10nF time of 1ms.
20 DIN3 Digital input 3
Scan rate 1 ms
(I/O EtherCAT DIN3) P174
Inputs as per
EN 61131-2 Type 1
124 Subject to technical alterations BU 0200 GB-4411
342
3 Options
Terminal/ Function Data Description / wiring suggestion Parameter
Name
21 0V GND
Reference potential As for terminal 15 -
for digital signals
22 Connection of supply voltage for
23 24V 24V supply As for terminal 1 module and 24V source for supply
of the digital inputs (DIN1 to DIN8)
(Module and system bus However, max.
level) -
24 permissible current load:
3A
25 DIN2 Digital input 2 Low 0V ... 5V
(I/O EtherCAT DIN2) High 15V ... 30V P174
Ri = 8.1k: Each digital input has a reaction
Input capacitance 10nF time of 1ms.
26 DIN4 Digital input 4
Scan rate 1 ms
(I/O EtherCAT DIN4) P174
Inputs as per
EN 61131-2 Type 1
27 0V GND
Reference potential As for terminal 15 -
for digital signals
28 Connection of supply voltage for
29 24V 24V supply As for terminal 1 module and 24V source for supply
of the digital inputs (DIN1 to DIN8)
(Module and system bus However, max.
level) -
30 permissible current load:
3A
Potential isolation
31 24V2 24V supply 24VDC -/+20%
Supply voltage connection for
of digital outputs Up to 1A, according to digital outputs (DO1 and DO2) -
load
If necessary, bridge to 24V terminal
reverse polarity protected
32 0V2 GND 2 Ground for digital outputs (DO1
Reference potential and DO2) -
for digital outputs
If necessary, bridge to 0V terminal
33 DO1 Digital output 1 Low = 0V
High: 24V P150
(I/O EtherCAT DO1)
The digital outputs should be used P175
Rated current: 500mA
each with a separate 24V supply
34 DO2 Digital output 2
P150
(I/O EtherCAT DO2)
P175
35 0V2 GND 2 Ground for digital outputs (DO1
Reference potential and DO2) -
for digital outputs
36 If necessary, bridge to 0V terminal
Detailed information for operation via EtherCat can be found in the relevant supplementary manual BU0270.
- www.nord.com -
BU 0200 GB-4411 Subject to technical alterations 125
343
344
345
SK 200E Manual for frequency inverters
4.1.1 Diagnostic LEDs on SK 2x0E 6«
RJ12 DIP
RS 232 Switch Diagnostic
RS 485 AIN1/2 LEDs
SK 2x0E view from above
Diagnostic LEDs
LED
Name Colour Description Signal status Meaning
BUS-S green System bus status off No process data communication
Flashing "BUS Warning"
(4 Hz)
on Process data communication active
Reception of at least 1 telegram / s
SDO transfer is not indicated
BUS-E green System bus error off No error
Flashing Monitoring error P120 or P513
(4 Hz) E10.0 / E10.9
Flashing Error in an external system bus module
(1 Hz) Bus module
ÆTimeout on the external BUS (E10.2)
System bus module has a module error
(E10.3)
on 6\VWHPEXVLQVWDWH³%86RII´
DS dual Inverter status off FI not on standby,
red/green no mains and control voltage
green on FI on standby
green flashing 0.5 Hz FI is ready for switch-on
4 Hz FI is in switch-on block
red/green 4 Hz Warning
alternating «+] Degree of overload of switched-on FI
green on + FI not on standby,
red flashing Control voltage available but no mains
voltage
red flashing (UURUIODVKLQJIUHTXHQF\:(UURUQXPEHU
128 Subject to technical alterations BU 0200 GB-4411
346
4 Display and control
4.1.2 Diagnostic LEDs on the SK 2x0E (S 4) and SK 2x5E
RJ12 P1 / P2
Diagnostic
RS 232 LED-FU
LEDs
RS 485 LED-ASi
2x0E S 4 or SK 2x5E top view
Diagnostic LEDs
LED Signal
Name Colour Description Status Meaning
DOUT 1 yellow Digital output 1 on High signal applied
DIN 1 yellow Digital input 1 on High signal applied
DIN 2 yellow Digital input 2 on High signal applied
DIN 3 yellow Digital input 3 on High signal applied
DIN 4 yellow Digital input 4 on High signal applied
TEMP yellow Motor PTC on Motor overtemperature
Chop yellow Brake chopper on %UDNHFKRSSHUDFWLYHEULJKWQHVV:GHJUHHRIORDG
(only SK 2x5E)
Brake yellow Mech. brake on Mech. brake released
DOUT 2 yellow Digital output 2 on High signal present (only SK 2x0E)
BUS-S green System bus status off No process data communication
Flashing "BUS Warning"
(4 Hz)
on Process data communication active
Reception of at least 1 telegram / s
SDO data transfer is not indicated
BUS-E red System bus error off No error
Flashing Monitoring error P120 or P513
(4 Hz)
E10.0 / E10.9
Flashing Error in an external system bus module
(1 Hz)
Bus module ÆTimeout on the external BUS (E10.2)
System bus module has a module error (E10.3)
on 6\VWHPEXVLQVWDWH³%86RII´
BU 0200 GB-4411 Subject to technical alterations 129
347
SK 200E Manual for frequency inverters
Status LEDs
LED Signal
Name Colour Description Status Meaning
DS dual Frequency off FI not on standby,
inverter
red/green
status
no mains and control voltage
green on FI on standby
green 0.5 Hz FI is ready for switch-on
flashing
4 Hz FI is in switch-on block
red/green 4 Hz Warning
alternating «+] Degree of overload of switched-on FI
green on + FI not on standby,
red flashing Control voltage available but no mains voltage
red flashing (UURUIODVKLQJIUHTXHQF\:(UURUQXPEHU
AS-I dual AS-i status off No voltage to the AS-i module (PWR)
red/green green Normal operation
red No exchange of data
Slave Address = 0 / Slave not in LPS / Slave
with incorrect IO/ID / Master in STOP mode /
Reset active
alternately Peripheral error
flashing
red / green
130 Subject to technical alterations BU 0200 GB-4411
348
4 Display and control
4.2 Overview of external control devices
All parameters can be easily accessed for reading or editing by means of an optional SimpleBox or
ParameterBox. The changed parameter data are stored in the non-volatile EEPROM memory. This provides
the possibility of transferring a dataset from one FI to another by plugging in the EEPROM.
In addition, up to 5 complete frequency inverter data sets can be saved in the ParameterBox and then
recalled.
The connection between the SimpleBox or ParameterBox is made with an RJ12-RJ12 cable.
Module Description Data
Used (exclusively) for commissioning, 4-digit, 7-segment LED display
SimpleBox parameterisation, configuration and control IP20
of the frequency inverter. Storage of the
Hand-held parameters is not possible. RJ12-RJ12 cable (for connection to FI / Option)
SK CSX-3H
Manual BU 0040 (www.nord.com) Part No. 275281013
4 digit back-lit LCD display, keyboard
Used for commissioning, parameterisation, Stores up to 5 complete FI data sets
configuration and control of the frequency
ParameterBox IP20
inverter and its options (SK xU4-« 6DYLQJ
Hand-held of parameters is possible. RJ12-RJ12 cable (for connection to FI / Option)
SK PAR-3H USB-Cable (For connection to PC)
Manual BU 0040 (www.nord.com)
Part No. 275281014
Mounting the control unit on the SK 2xxE:
Installation of the control unit is performed as
follows:
1. Remove the protective caps from the RJ12
connectors.
2. Connect the RJ12-RJ12 cable between the
control unit and the frequency inverter.
3. During normal operation after
commissioning, it is essential to replace the
protective caps and pay attention to sealing.
4. As long as one of the protective caps is
open, take care that no dirt or moisture
enters the device.
BU 0200 GB-4411 Subject to technical alterations 131
349
350
4 Display and control
Functions of the SimpleBox:
Starting the frequency inverter. The frequency inverter is now enabled with the set jog frequency
(P113). A preset minimum frequency (P104) may at least be provided. Parameter >Interface< P509
and P510 must = 0.
Stopping the frequency inverter. The output frequency is reduced to the absolute minimum
frequency (P505) and the frequency inverter shuts down.
4 permanently displayed underscores (_ _ _ _) indicate readiness for operation if there is no
setpoint. If these underscores are flashing, the frequency inverter is not ready for operation (switch-
RQORFNHJIXQFWLRQ³VDIHSXOVHEORFN´ RUWKHUHLVRUZDVDQHUURU7KLVPXVWILUVWEHUHFWLILHG
7-segment When the frequency inverter is ready for operation any initial value (P104/P113 for keyboard
LED display operation) is indicated by a flashing display. This frequency is immediately displayed on being
enabled.
4-digit
During operation, the currently set operating value (selection in P001) or an error code (Section 6) is
displayed.
During parameterisation, the parameter numbers or the parameter values are shown.
The LEDs indicate the actual operating parameter set in the operating display (P000) and the actual
LEDs parameter set being parameterised during parameterisation. In this case the display is coded in
binary form.
1
1 1 1 1
2 = P1 = P2 = P3 = P4
2 2 2 2
The motor rotation direction changes when this key is pressed. "Rotation to the left" is indicated by a
minus sign. Attention!Take care when operating pumps. screw conveyors, ventilators, etc. The key
may be locked with parameter P540.
Press key to increase the frequency. During parameterisation, the parameter number or parameter
value is increased
Press the key to reduce the frequency. During parameterisation, the parameter number or
parameter value is reduced.
3UHVVWKH³2.´NH\WRVWRUHDQDOWHUHGSDUDPHWHUYDOXHRUWRVZLWFKEHWZHHQSDUDPHWHUQXPEHUVRU
parameter values.
OK NOTE: If a changed value is not to be stored, the key can be used to exit the parameter
without storing the change.
BU 0200 GB-4411 Subject to technical alterations 133
351
SK 200E Manual for frequency inverters
Control with the SimpleBox
The frequency inverter can only be controlled via the SimpleBox, if it has not previously been enabled via
the control terminals or via a serial interface (P509 = 0 and P510 = 0).
If the START key is pressed, the frequency inverter changes to the operating display (selection P001). The
frequency inverter supplies 0Hz or a higher minimum frequency (P104) or jog frequency (P113) which has
been set.
Parameter set display
Increase frequency
START Set frequency = 0Hz
(press simultaneously)
STOP Decrease frequency
Store current frequency
Change rotation direction as jog frequency
Quick stop
(press simultaneously)
Parameter set display:
The LEDs indicate the actual operating parameter set in the operating display (P000) and the current
parameter set being parameterised (z P000). In this case the display is coded in binary form.
The parameter set can also be changed during operation via the parameter P100, if control is by means of
the SimpleBox.
Frequency setpoint:
The current frequency setpoint depends on the setting in the parameters jog frequency (P113) and minimum
frequency (P104). This value can be altered during keyboard operation with the value keys and
OK
permanently stored in P113 as the jog frequency by pressing the OK key .
Quick stop:
A quick stop can be triggered by simultaneously pressing the STOP key DQGWKH&KDQJHGLUHFWLRQNH\´
.
134 Subject to technical alterations BU 0200 GB-4411
352
4 Display and control
Parameterisation with the SimpleBox
The parameterisation of the FI can be performed in various operating states. All parameters can always
be changed online. Switching to the parameter mode occurs in different ways depending upon the operating
states and the enabling source.
1. If there is no enable (if necessary, press the STOP key ) it is possible to switch from display of
the operating values to the parameterisation mode directly from the operating value display with the
value keys or .Æ P0__ / P7__
2. If an enable is present via the control terminals or a serial interface and the frequency inverter is
producing an output frequency, it is also possible to switch to the parameterisation mode directly
from the operating value display using the value keys or .Æ P0__ / P7__
3. If the FI has been enabled via the SimpleBox (START key ), the parameterisation mode can be
OK
accessed by pressing the START and ENTER keys ( + ) simultaneously.
4. Switching back to the control mode is achieved by pressing the START key .
Parameter set display Next menu group or
parameter value
Switchover from
One level back each time
parameterisation
until the operating value
to control
display is reached
Return to Previous menu group or
operating value display parameter value
Save currently changed
Exit setting
parameter value
without saving
Switch from control to
parameterisation
Changing parameter values
To access the parameter section, one of the value keys, or must be pressed. The display changes
OK
to the menu group display P 0 _ _ ... P 7 _ _ . After pressing the OK key access to the menu group is
obtained and the required parameter can be selected with the value keys.
All parameters are arranged in order in the individual menu groups in a continuous scroll pattern. It is
therefore possible to scroll forwards and backwards within this section.
Each parameter has a parameter number Æ P x x x . The significance and description of the parameters
starts in Section 6 "Parameterisation".
NOTE: Some parameters (e.g. P502) have additional levels (Arrays), in which further settings can be
made, e.g.:
Setting:
P50 2 ENTER
P_ 0 1 ENTER
OFF Value of master function 1
VALUE
Setting:
P_ 0 2 ENTER
OFF Value of master function 2
BU 0200 GB-4411 Subject to technical alterations 135
353
SK 200E Manual for frequency inverters
Menu structure with the SimpleBox
Operating value display
(or operational)
following mains ON P7- - P6 - -
_ _ _ _
P5- -
P0 - - P4- -
P1- - P2- - P3- -
P0 0 1 P40 0
P10 0 P20 0 P30 0
P0 0 2 P40 1
P10 1 P20 1 P30 1
P0 0 3
P48 3
P114 P220 P327
OK
To change a parameter value, the OK key must be pressed when the relevant parameter number is
displayed.
OK
Changes can then be made using the VALUE keys or and must be confirmed with to save them
in the EEPROM and exit from the parameter.
As long as a changed value has not been confirmed by pressing OK, the value has not yet been stored in
the frequency inverter.
During parameter changes, the display does not flash, so that the display is more legible.
If a change is not to be saved, the "DIRECTION" key can be pressed to exit from the parameter.
Increase parameter value
Call up the default settings
for the parameter value
Return to
operating value display
Reduce parameter value
Do not save Save changed value
changed value
136 Subject to technical alterations BU 0200 GB-4411
354
355
SK 200E Manual for frequency inverters
Functions of the ParameterBox
LCD Graphic-capable, backlit LCD display for displaying operational values and parameters for the
display connected frequency inverter and ParameterBox parameters.
The menu levels and the individual menu items can be scrolled through with the SELECTION keys.
The next higher level can be accessed by pressing the keys and at the same time.
The contents of individual parameters can be altered with the VALUES keys.
Press the and keys together to load the default values of the parameter selected.
When controlling the inverter using the keyboard, the frequency setpoint is set using the VALUE keys.
Here the ramp time is limited to 0.17s/Hz, even if small values are set in P102/P103.
Press the OK key to change to the selected menu group or accept the changed menu items or
parameter values.
NOTE: If a parameter is to be exited, without a new value being stored, then one of the
OK SELECTION keys can be used for this purpose.
If the inverter is currently controlled from the keyboard (not control terminals), then the current actual
frequency can be stored under the Jog Frequency parameter P113 with the OK key and used as the
next initial setpoint frequency.
START key for switching on the frequency inverter.
NOTE:
These functions can
STOP key for switching off the frequency inverter. only be used of they
are enabled in
parameter P509 or
The direction of rotation of the motor changes when the DIRECTION key is P540.
operated. Rotation direction left is indicated by a minus sign.
Attention! Take care when operating pumps, screw conveyors, fans, etc.
LEDs The LED's indicate the actual status of the ParameterBox.
DS DS ± Device State The ParameterBox is ready for operation.
DE DE ± Device Error An error has occurred when processing data, or in the FI.
LCD display
Frequency inverter type Frequency inverter
power, voltage
205E 1.1kW / 400V 1
Current operating values Fi/Hz U/V I/A
Frequency, voltage, Frequency inverter status
current 45.0 360 2.4
ONLINE FI P1 R RUNNING
Connection to
frequency inverter Operating parameter set
138 Subject to technical alterations BU 0200 GB-4411
356
4 Display and control
Menu structure
The menu structure consists of various levels, which are each arranged in a ring structure. The OK key
moves the menu on to the next level. Pressing the SELECTION keys simultaneously moves the menu back
one level.
205E 1.1kW / 400V 1 U1 U2 U3 U4 U5
Fi/Hz U/V I/A 1 - - - -
45.0 360 2.4 OK - - - -
ONLINE FI P1 R RUNNING 90
Display 1 Options 1
Parameterisation 1 Parameter 1
management
P1001 2 P1301 2
Bus scan Language
P1101 2 P1201 2
Object selection Copy - Source
P1002 2 P1302 2
FI selection Operating mode
Operating displays 2 P1202 2
>OK< (to level 3) Copy - Target
P1003 2 P1303 2
Display mode Automatic bus scan
Basic parameters 2 P1203 2
>OK< (to level 3) Copy - Start
P1004 2 P1304 2
Values for display Contrast
Motor data 2 P1204 2
>OK< (to level 3) Load default values
P1005 2 P1305 2
Standardisation factor Set password
P1205 2
Delete memory
P0 2 P1306 2
Back Frequency inverter Box password
menu structure P0 2
Æ Section 6
Parameterisation
Back
P1307
P0 2
Reset
zurückbox parameter
P1308
P0 2
P0 2
zurück
NORDAC p-box
Back Version 4.0 R1
P0 2
Back
>Display< (P11xx), >Administer Parameters< (P12xx) and >Options< (P13xx) are purely ParameterBox-
parameters and do not have direct influence on frequency inverter parameters.
Via the menu >Parameterisation< the frequency inverter menu structure can be accessed, if necessary after
selection of the object, if frequency inverter data sets are already stored in the ParameterBox.
The description of the frequency inverter parameters is in Section 6 of this manual.
BU 0200 GB-4411 Subject to technical alterations 139
357
SK 200E Manual for frequency inverters
Select language, brief description
The following steps must be carried out to change the menu language used in the ParameterBox display.
2QVZLWFKLQJRQWKH3DUDPHWHU%R[IRUWKHILUVWWLPH³*HUPDQ´RU³(QJOLVK´ZLOOEHRIIHUHGIRUVHOection. The
selection is made by pressing the selection keys (arrow R/L) and confirming with the OK key.
,Q WKH IROORZLQJ ³(QJOLVK´ ZDV VHOHFWHG RQ VZLWFKLQJ RQ IRU WKH ILUVW WLPH $IWHU WKLV VHOHFWLRQ WKH IROORZLQJ
displays should appear (varies depending upon output and options).
205E 1.1kW / 400V 1
> NORDAC <
Initial display
Frequenzumrichter
ONLINE FU P1 ESperre
1
Optionen
Use the SELECTION key or , to >OK<
scroll to the menu options
ONLINE FU P1 ESperre
P1301 2
Sprache
OK
Then press >OK< Deutsch ...
ONLINE FU P1 ESperre
... English
... Francais
Using the Value key , ... Espanol
select the required language ... Sverige
... Nederlands
P1301 2
Language
OK
After selection confirm with >OK< English (e.g.)
ONLINE FI P1 Locked
1
Press both SELECTION keys and , Options
simultaneously >OK<
ONLINE FI P1 Locked
205E 1.1kW / 400V 1
Press both SELECTION keys and , > NORDAC <
simultaneously Frequency inverter
ONLINE FI P1 Locked
140 Subject to technical alterations BU 0200 GB-4411
358
4 Display and control
Controlling the frequency inverter with the ParameterBox
The frequency inverter can only be completely controlled via the ParameterBox if the parameter >Interface<
(P509) is set to the >Control terminal or Keyboard< function (=0) (factory setting) and the inverter is not
enabled via the control terminal.
Increase frequency
START Set frequency = 0Hz
(press simultaneously)
STOP
Decrease frequency
Change rotation direction Store current frequency
as jog frequency
Note: If the frequency inverter is enabled in this mode, then the parameter set is used, which is
selected for this frequency inverter in the Menu >Parameterisation< ... >Basic parameters< ...
under Parameters >Parameter set<.
Attention:Following the START command, the frequency inverter may start up immediately with a pre-
programmed frequency (minimum frequency P104 or jog frequency P113).
Parameterisation with the ParameterBox
The parameterising mode is entered by selecting the group >Parameterisation< in menu level 1 of the
ParameterBox and confirming this with the OK key. The parameter level of the connected frequency inverter
is now visible.
Increase menu group Increase parameter value
or parameter
Press simultaneously:
Press simultaneously:
default settings for this
one level back
parameter
Reduce menu group
or parameter Reduce parameter value
Open menu group or
save new setting
BU 0200 GB-4411 Subject to technical alterations 141
359
SK 200E Manual for frequency inverters
Screen layout during parameterisation
If the setting of a parameter is changed, then the value flashes until it is confirmed with the OK key. In order
to retain the default settings for the parameter being edited, both VALUE keys must be pressed
simultaneously. Even in this case, the setting must be confirmed with the OK key in order for the change to
be saved.
If the change is not to be saved, then pressing one of the SELECTION keys will call up the previously stored
value and pressing a SELECTION key again will exit the parameter.
Parameter to be edited (No.) Parameter set to be edited
Parameter to be
edited (text) P102 PS1 3
Menu structure level
Acceleration time
Current parameter 2.90 s
value
ONLINE FI P1 E ready Status of
control object
Current
ParameterBox
Active parameter set in
status Selected con- control object
trol medium
NOTE: The lower line in the display is used to display the current status of the box and the frequency
inverter being controlled.
NOTE: Some parameters (e.g. P502) have additional array levels, in which further settings can be
made. The required array level must first be selected (see parameterisation, Section 6) and
confirmed with OK. The required parameter setting can now be made.
P502 PS1 [01] 3
Master function value
Array level of the select-
Off ed parameter.
ONLINE FI P1 E ready e.g. [01], [02], [03]...
142 Subject to technical alterations BU 0200 GB-4411
360
4 Display and control
4.2.3 ParameterBox parameters
The following main functions are assigned to the menu groups :
Menu group No. Master function
Display (P10xx): Selection of operating values and display layout
Parameterisation (P11xx): Programming of the connected inverter and all storage media
Parameter management (P12xx): Copying and storage of complete parameter sets from storage media and
inverters
Options (P14xx): Setting the ParameterBox functions and all automatic processes
Display
Parameter Setting value / Description / Note
P1001 A bus scan is initiated with this parameter. During this process a progress indicator is
shown in the display.
Bus scan
After a bus scan, the parameter is "Off".
Depending on the result of this process, the ParameterBox goes into the "ONLINE" or
"OFFLINE" operating mode.
P1002 Selection of the current item to be parameterised/controlled.
FI selection The display and further operating actions refer to the item selected. In the inverter selection
list, only those devices detected during the bus scan are shown. The current object appears
in the status line.
Value range: FI, S1 ... S5
P1003 Selection of the operating values of the ParameterBox (Selection value(s) in (P1004))
Standard: Any 3 values next to each other
Display mode List: Any 3 values listed with units
Large display: 1 value (any) with unit
ControlBox: 1 (any) value without unit (Selection value in (P001) of the FI)
P1004 Selection of a display value for the actual value display of the ParameterBox. (See also
BU0040)
Values for display
The value selected is placed in the first position of an internal list for the display value and
is then also used in the Large Display mode.
Possible actual values for the display:
Actual frequency Voltage Current
Speed of rotation Torque current Setpoint frequency
DC link voltage Bus actual value1, non-standardised
P1005 The first value in the list displayed is scaled using the standardisation factor. If this
standardisation factor varies from a value of 1.00, then the units of the scaled value are
Standardisation factor hidden in the display.
Value range: -327.67 to +327.67; resolution 0.01
Parameterisation
Parameter Setting value / Description / Note
P1101 Selection of the object to be parameterised.
Object selection The ongoing parameterisation process relates to the object selected. Only the devices and
storage objects detected during the bus scan are displayed in the selection list. If only one
frequency inverter is connected and no storage address occupied, this parameter is not
displayed!
Value range: FI, S1 ... S5
BU 0200 GB-4411 Subject to technical alterations 143
361
SK 200E Manual for frequency inverters
Parameter management
Parameter Setting value / Description / Note
P1201 Selection of the actual source object to be copied.
Copy - Source In the selection list, only the frequency inverters and storage media detected during the bus
scan are shown.
Value range: FI, S1 ... S5
P1202 Selection of actual target object to copy.
Copy - Target In the selection list, only the frequency inverters and storage media detected during the bus
scan are shown.
Value range: FI, S1 ... S5
P1203 This parameter triggers a transfer process, whereby all the parameters selected in >Copy ±
Source< are transferred to the object specified in the >Copy ± Target< parameter.
Copy - Start
While data is being overwritten, an information window with acknowledgement appears .
The transfer starts after acknowledgement.
P1204 In this parameter, the default settings are written to the parameters of the selected item.
Load default values This function is particularly important when editing storage objects. It is only via this
parameter that a hypothetical frequency inverter can be loaded and edited with the
ParameterBox.
Value range: FI, S1 ... S5
P1205 In this parameter the data in the selected storage medium is deleted.
Delete memory Value range: S1 ... S5
Options
Parameter Setting value / Description / Note
P1301 Selection of languages for operation of the ParameterBox
Language Available languages: German English Dutch
French Spanish Swedish
6 4
Polish Italian Danish
4 4 4
Finnish Czech Russian
P1302 Selection of the operating mode for the ParameterBox
Operating mode Offline:
The ParameterBox is operated autonomously. The inverter data set is not accessed. The
storage objects of the ParameterBox can be parameterised and managed.
Online:
A frequency inverter is located at the interface of the ParameterBox. The frequency inverter
FDQEHSDUDPHWHULVHGDQGFRQWUROOHG2QVZLWFKRYHUWRWKH21/,1(³PRGHDEXVVFDQLV
automatically started. The FI parameters are not yet loaded.
PC Slave:
For connection to a PC with NORDCON software installed.
P1303 Setting the switch-on characteristics.
Automatic bus scan Off:
A bus scan is not carried out, the frequency inverters connected before the switch-off are
located after switching on.
On:
A bus scan is automatically implemented when the ParameterBox is switched on.
P1304 Contrast setting of the ParameterBox display
Contrast Value range: 0% ... 100%; Resolution 1%
6
From firmware version V4.3 or higher, (available from about the 3rd quarter of 2011), see also parameter (1308)
144 Subject to technical alterations BU 0200 GB-4411
362
4 Display and control
Parameter Setting value / Description / Note
P1305 The user can set up a password in this parameter.
Set password If a value other than 0 has been entered in this parameter (default setting), then the settings
of the ParameterBox or the parameters of the connected inverter cannot be altered.
P1306 If the >Password< function is to be reset, the password selected in the >Set Password<
parameter must be entered here. If the correct password is selected, all of the
Box password ParameterBox functions and the parameters of the connected frequency inverter can be
used again.
NOTE: With the master-SDVVZRUG µ¶ WKH FXUUHQW SDVVZRUG LV GLVSOD\HG DQG FDQ EH
confirmed with the OK key.
P1307 With this parameter the ParameterBox can be reset to the default setting. All ParameterBox
Reset Box parameter settings and the data in the storage media will be deleted.
P1308 Displays the software version of the ParameterBox. In case of service enquiries by
Software version telephone, please have this at hand.
4.2.4 ParameterBox error messages
Display Cause
Error ¾ Remedy
Communication error
200
INCORRECT PARAMETER NUMBER
201
PARAMETER VALUE CANNOT BE
CHANGED
202 These error messages are due to EMC interferences or differing software
versions of the participants.
PARAMETER OUTSIDE VALUE
RANGE ¾ Check the software version of the ParameterBox and that of the
connected frequency inverter.
203
FAULTY SUB INDEX ¾ Check the cabling of all components, regarding possible EMC
interference
204
¾ Plug-in EEPROM on the frequency inverter (memory module) not
NO ARRAY PARAMETERS
recognised (Error: 201) :Check for correct connection
205
WRONG PARAMETER TYPE
206
INCORRECT RESPONSE
RECOGNITION USS INTERFACE
207 Communication between frequency inverter and ParameterBox is faulty
(EMC), safe operation cannot be guaranteed.
USS INTERFACE
CHECKSUM ERROR (RS485) ¾ Check the connection to the frequency inverter. Use a shielded cable
between the devices. Route the BUS leads separately from the motor
cables.
208 Communication between frequency inverter and ParameterBox is faulty
(EMC), safe operation cannot be guaranteed.
FAULTY STATUS RECOGNITION
USS INTERFACE (RS485) ¾ Check the connection to the frequency inverter. Use a shielded cable
between the devices. Route the BUS leads separately from the motor
cables.
BU 0200 GB-4411 Subject to technical alterations 145
363
SK 200E Manual for frequency inverters
Display Cause
Error ¾ Remedy
209_1 The ParameterBox is waiting for a response from the connected frequency
inverter. The waiting time has elapsed without a response being received.
INVERTER DOES NOT RESPOND
¾ Check the connection to the frequency inverter. The settings of the USS
parameters for the frequency inverter have been changed during
operation.
Identification errors
220 Device ID not found. The connected inverter is not listed in the database of
the ParameterBox; no communication can be established.
UNKNOWN DEVICE
¾ ParameterBox is too old for the FI.
¾ Please contact your Getriebebau Nord Representative.
221 The software version was not found. The software of the connected
frequency inverter is not listed in the ParameterBox database, no
SOFTWARE VERSION communication can be established.
NOT RECOGNISED
¾ Please contact your Getriebebau Nord Representative.
222 An unknown component has been detected in the frequency inverter
(Customer interface).
CONFIGURATION STAGE NOT
RECOGNISED ¾ Please check the components installed in the frequency inverter
¾ If necessary, check the software version of the ParameterBox and the
frequency inverter.
223 After restoring the last Bus configuration, a device is reported that is different
from the one stored. This error can only occur if the parameter >Auto. Bus
BUS CONFIGURATION HAS Scan< is set to OFF and another device has been connected to the
CHANGED
ParameterBox.
¾ Activate the Automatic Bus Scan function.
224 The inverter type entered in the ParameterBox is not supported!
DEVICE NOT SUPPORTED ¾ The ParameterBox cannot be used with this inverter.
225 Access to a device that is not online (previously Time Out error).
THE CONNECTION TO THE
INVERTER IS BLOCKED
¾ Carry out a bus scan via the parameter >Bus Scan< (P1001).
ParameterBox operating error
226
Copying objects of different types (from / to different inverters) is not
SOURCE AND TARGET ARE possible.
DIFFERENT DEVICES
227
Copying of data from a deleted (empty) storage medium
SOURCE IS EMPTY
228
Target and source for the copying function are the same. The command
THIS COMBINATION IS NOT cannot be executed.
PERMITTED
229
Parameterisation attempt of a deleted storage medium
THE SELECTED ITEM IS EMPTY
230 Warning:
Copying objects with different software versions can cause problems when
DIFFERENT SOFTWARE VERSIONS transferring parameters.
146 Subject to technical alterations BU 0200 GB-4411
364
4 Display and control
Display Cause
Error ¾ Remedy
231 Attempt to alter a parameter without a valid Box password being entered in
INVALID PASSWORD parameter >Box Password< P 1306.
232
A bus scan (search for a connected frequency inverter) is only possible when
BUS SCAN ONLY WHEN IN MODE: in ONLINE mode.
ONLINE
Warnings
240 OVERWRITE DATA?
Æ YES NO
241 DELETE DATA?
Æ YES NO
These warnings indicate that there is a possibly significant change which
242 MOVE SOFTWARE needs additional confirmation.
VERSION?
Æ NEXT CANCEL Once the next procedure has been selected, it must be confirmed with the
"OK" key.
243 MOVE SERIES?
Æ NEXT CANCEL
244 DELETE ALL DATA?
Æ YES NO
Inverter control error
250 The required function is not enabled in the parameter >Interface< of the
frequency inverter.
THIS FUNCTION IS NOT ENABLED
¾ Change the value of the parameter >Interface< of the connected inverter
to the required function. More detailed information can be obtained from
the operating instructions for the frequency inverter.
251 The control command cannot be implemented by the frequency inverter, as a
CONTROL COMMAND WAS NOT
higher priority function, e.g. Quick stop or an OFF signal to the control
SUCCESSFUL terminals of the frequency inverter is present.
252 Call up of a control function in Offline mode.
CONTROL OFFLINE NOT POSSIBLE ¾ Change the operating mode of the ParameterBox in the parameter
>Operating Mode< P1302 to Online and repeat the action.
253
The acknowledgement of an error at the frequency inverter was not
ERROR ACKNOWLEDGEMENT NOT successful, the error message remains.
SUCCESSFUL
Error message from inverter
³(552512)520,19(57(5´
A fault with the number displayed has occurred in the inverter. The inverter
INVERTER FAULT error number and text are displayed.
"INVERTER FAULT TEXT"
BU 0200 GB-4411 Subject to technical alterations 147
365
366
367
368
369
SK 200E Manual for frequency inverters
Details of DIP switch S1: 5/4 and 3
Applies to devices SK 20xE, SK 21xE (without on board AS interface)
Functions as per the list of
DIP Functions as per the list of digital functions (P420)
analog functions (P400)
5 4 3 Dig 1 Dig 2 Dig 3 Dig 4** Poti 1*** Poti 2***
(P420 [01])* (P420 [02])* (P420 [03])* (P420 [05])* (P400 [01])* (P400 [02])*
off off off {01} "Enable R" {02} "Enable L" {04} ³Fixed freq. 1" {04} ³)L[HGIUHT {01} " F setpoint" {15} "Ramp"
=5Hz (P465[01]) =10Hz (P465[02])
off on off {01}"Enable R" {02} "Enable L" {26} "F setpoint" {12} "Quit" {05} "F max" {04} "F min"
on off off {45} "3-on" {49} "3-off" {47} "Freq. +" {48} "Freq. -" {05} "F max" {15} "Ramp"
on on off {50} Ä)$UU%LW {51} Ä)$UU%LW³ {52} Ä)$UU%LW³ {53} Ä)$UU%LW³ {05} "F max" {15} "Ramp"
=5Hz (P465[01]) =10Hz (P465[02]) =20Hz (P465[03]) =35Hz (P465[04])
The functions of the digital inputs are inactive (control via system bus), however, the
VHWWLQJVPDGHLQSDUDPHWHUV 3>«@ UHVXOWLQWKHDFWLYDWLRQRIWKH
correspondingly parameterised input, for the functions designated with ..² in the function (P400 [01]) (P400 [02])
off off on list (e.g.: {11}²= "Quick stop). {01} " F setpoint" {15} "Ramp"
(P420 [01]) (P420 [02]) (P420 [03]) (P420 [04])
no function no function {04} Fixed freq. 1" {05} Fixed freq. 2"
=5Hz (P465[01]) =10Hz (P465[02])
{14} "Remote "Encoder track "Encoder track {01} "F
off on on {01}"Enable R" {05} "F max"
control" A" B" setpoint"
{14} "Remote {66} "Release {01} "F
on off on {01}"Enable R" {10} "Block" {05} "F max"
control" brake" setpoint"
on on on
{14} "Remote {51} Ä)$UU%LW³ {52} Ä)$UU%LW³ {53} Ä)$UU%LW³ {05} "F max" {15} "Ramp"
control" =10Hz (P465[02]) =20Hz (P465[03]) =35Hz (P465[04])
Explanation: (values underlined in brackets) = (relevant parameter / source of function), e.g.: Parameter (P420[01])
{curly brackets} = {Function} e.g.: {01} "Enable Right"
(See also Section 6 :7DEOHEHKLQGSDUDPHWHU 3 3 RU 3
* Default setting
** only if available (Devices without function "Safe Stop")
*** only with SK 2x5E models, SK 2x0E models have no potentiometers P1 and P2
Applies to devices SK 22xE, SK 23xE (with on board AS interface)
DIP Functions as per the list of digital functions (P420) Functions as per the list of digital outputs (P434)
ASi ASi ASi ASi ASi ASi ASi ASi
5 4 3
In1 In2 In3 In4 Out1 Out2 Out3 Out4
(P480 [01])* (P480 [02])* (P480 [03]) (P480 [04])* (P481 [01])* (P481 [02])*
{01} "Enable {02} "Enable {04} Fixed
off off off {12} "Quit" {07} "Error" {18} "Standby" "DigIn1" "DigIn2"
R" L" freq. 1"
=5Hz (P465[01])
{04} "Fixed {05} "Fixed {06} "Fixed {07} "Fixed
off on off freq. 1" freq. 2" freq. 3" freq. 4" {07} "Error" {18} "Standby" "DigIn1" "DigIn2"
=5Hz (P465[01]) =10Hz (P465[02]) =20Hz (P465[03]) =35Hz (P465[04])
on off off {01}"Enable R" {02} "Enable L" {47} "Freq. +" {48} "Freq. -" {07} "Error" {18} "Standby" "DigIn1" "DigIn2"
on on off {51} "F Arr B1" {52} "F Arr B2" {53} "F Arr B3" {14} "Remote {07} "Error" {18} "Standby" "DigIn1" "DigIn2"
=10Hz (P465[02]) =20Hz (P465[03]) =35Hz (P465[04]) control"
The functions of the digital inputs are inactive (control via system bus),
KRZHYHUWKHVHWWLQJVPDGHLQSDUDPHWHUV 3>«@ UHVXOWLQWKH
activation of the correspondingly parameterised bits, for the functions
designated with ..² in the function list (e.g.: {11}²= "Quick stop). (P481 [01]) (P481 [02])
off off on {07} "Error" {18} "Standby" "DigIn1" "DigIn2"
(P480 [03]) (P480 [04])
(P480 [01])no (P480 [02])
function no function {04} Fixed {12} "Quit"
freq. 1"
=5Hz (P465[01])
{14} "Remote {04} "Fixed {05} "Fixed {06} "Fixed
off on on freq. 1" freq. 2" freq. 3" {07} "Error" {18} "Standby" "DigIn1" "DigIn2"
control" =5Hz (P465[01]) =10Hz (P465[02]) =20Hz (P465[03])
{14} "Remote
on off on {01}"Enable R" {47} "Freq. +" {48} "Freq. -" {07} "Error" {18} "Standby" "DigIn1" "DigIn2"
control"
{14} "Remote {50} "F Arr B0" {51} "F Arr B1" {52} "F Arr B2"
on on on {07} "Error" {18} "Standby" "DigIn1" "DigIn2"
control" =5Hz (P465[01]) =10Hz (P465[02]) =20Hz (P465[03])
Explanation: See table above
Note:
The functions of potentiometers P1 and P2 correspond to those of devices without an AS interface (see table above).
With DIP switches 5 and 4 in the OFF position (default setting), the digital inputs are also active. The functions then correspond to those of devices
without an AS interface (table above). In all other DIP switch combinations the functions of the digital inputs are deactivated.
ASi OUT1 and ASi OUT2 loop the signal level (High / Low) of digital inputs 1 and 2.
152 Subject to technical alterations BU 0200 GB-4411
370
5 Commissioning
5.2.2.3 DIP switch configuration, analog input (only SK 2x0E)
The analog inputs in the SK 2x0E are suitable for current and voltage set-
points. For correct processing of current setpoints (0-20mA / 4-20mA) the
relevant DIP switch must be set for current signals ("ON").
Adjustment (to fail-safe signals in case of cable breaks (2-10V / 4-20mA) is
made via parameters (P402) and (P403).
Access to DIP switches
SK 2x0E Access Detail
6« «IURPRXWVLGHPLGGOH
diagnostic opening
Similar to illustration
Size 4 ... from inside
BU 0200 GB-4411 Subject to technical alterations 153
371
SK 200E Manual for frequency inverters
5.2.2.4 Details of the potentiometers P1 and P2 (SK 2x0E S 4 and SK 2x5E)
The setpoint can be adjusted to a fixed value with the integrated potentiometer P1. Adjustment of the start-
up and braking ramps can be made via potentiometer P2.
Potentiometer
P2
P1
Potentiometer
P1 (continuous) P2 (stepped)
0% P102/103 P105 - - -
10% 0.2s 10Hz 1 P102/103 P104
20% 0.3s 20Hz 2 0.2s 2Hz
30% 0.5s 30Hz 3 0.3s 5Hz
40% 0.7s 40Hz 4 0.5s 10Hz
50% 1.0s 50Hz 5 0.7s 15Hz
60% 2.0s 60Hz 6 1.0s 20Hz
70% 3.0s 70Hz 7 2.0s 25Hz
80% 5.0s 80Hz 8 3.0s 30Hz
90% 7.0s 90Hz 9 5.0s 35Hz
100% 10.0s 100Hz 10 7.0s 40Hz
The function of P1 and P2 depends on DIP 4/5. The meaning
changes according to the setting.
As standard, P1 sets the setpoint value of 0-100% and P2 sets the
ramp from 0.2-7sec.
154 Subject to technical alterations BU 0200 GB-4411
372
5 Commissioning
5.2.3 Commissioning examples
All SK 2xxE models can be operated as delivered.
Standard motor data for a 4-pole standard asynchronous motor of the same power is parameterised.
The PTC input must be bypassed, if a motor with PTC is not available.
Parameter (P428) must be changed if an automatic startup with "Mains On" is required.
5.2.3.1 SK 2x0E - Minimal Configuration
The frequency inverter provides all the necessary low voltages (24VDC / 10V DC).
1/3~ 230/400V + PE
Function Setting
L1 - L2/N - L3 Setpoint External 10kOhm potentiometer
230/400V
Controller External switch S1
Frequency inverter 12* enable
SK 2x0E-... 14**
11 Potentiometer
Control terminal bar
. 10kOhm
43
.
21
Switch S1
22
.
38
39
Motor PTC
*with SK 220E and SK230E: use GND (Terminal 40)
**with SK 220E and SK230E: use Analog In 2 (Terminal 16) and paramterise P400[02] to {1}
5.2.3.2 SK 2x5E - Minimal Configuration
Minimal configuration without options
The frequency inverter must be provided with a 24V control voltage.
1/3~ 115/230/400V + PE
Function Setting
L1 - L2/N - L3 Setpoint Integrated potentiometer P1
115/230/400V
Frequency ramp Integrated potentiometer P2
Frequency inverter
SK 2x5E-... Controller enable External switch S1
24V=
44
GND
40
Control terminal bar
.
.
21
22 Switch S1
.
38
39
Motor PTC
BU 0200 GB-4411 Subject to technical alterations 155
373
374
375
376
377
SK 200E Manual for frequency inverters
5.4 AS Interface
5.4.1 The bus system
The Actuator -Sensor Interface (AS Interface) is a bus system for the lower field bus level. The transfer
principle is a single-master system with cyclical polling. Up to 31 standard slaves (or 62 A/B slaves in the
extended address range) can be operated on an unshielded two-wire cable up to 100m long and in any
network structure (tree / linear / star). For the AS Interface, since the Complete Specification V2.1 a
differentiation is made between standard and A/B slaves. Version V2.1 includes implements a doubling of
the number of slaves to 62. This is implemented by the double assignment of addresses 1-31 and the
designation "A slave" and "B slave". A/B slaves are labelled via the ID code A and can therefore be uniquely
identified by the master.
SK 225E and SK 235E frequency inverters are standard slaves and correspond to the slave profile S-7.0.
They can be administered by masters whose profile at least corresponds to class M4 (in some cases M3 is
sufficient).
SK 220E and SK 230E frequency inverters are A/B slaves and correspond to the slave profile S-7.A. They
can be administered by masters whose profile at least corresponds to class M4.
In contrast to devices with the profile S-7.0 devices with the profile S-7.A use the extended address range.
Devices with slave profiles S-7.0 and S-7.A can be jointly operated within an ASi network as of version 2.1
(Master profile M4) with observance of the allocation of addresses (see example).
Permissible Not permissible
Standard slave 1 (Address 6) Standard slave 1 (Address 6)
A/B-Slave 1: (Address 7A) Standard slave 2: (Address 7)
A/B-Slave 2: (Address 7B) A/B-Slave 1: (Address 7B)
Standard slave 2 (Address 8) Standard slave 3 (Address 8)
The yellow AS interface cable supplies data and energy. Addressing is implemented via the master, which
can also provide other management functions, or via a separate addressing device. The transfer of the 4 Bit
reference data (in each direction) is performed with effective error protection for standard slaves with a
maximum cycle time of 5ms. Due to the the correspondingly higher number of participants, for A/B slaves
the cycle time (max. 10ms) is doubled for data which is sent from the slave to the master. Extended
addressing procedures for the transmission of data to the slave also cause an additional doubling of the
cycle time to max. 21ms.
The bus system is completely defined in the AS-Interface Complete Specification and is standardised as per
EN 50295, IEC62026.
160 Subject to technical alterations BU 0200 GB-4411
378
5 Commissioning
5.4.2 Features
The SK 22xE and SK 23xE frequency inverter versions provide an integrated AS interface as standard.
Therefore, these devices can be directly integrated into an AS interface network. Only the adaptation of
various frequency inverter functions (Dip switches or parameters), addressing and the correct connection of
the power supply, BUS, sensor and actuator cables needs to be carried out.
Features
x Electrically isolated bus interface
x Status display (1 LED) (SK 225E and SK 235E only)
x Configuration optionally via the integrated potentiometer (SK 225E and SK 235E only) and DIP
switches or by parameterisation of
x SK 225E and SK 235E: Slave profile S-7.0 (4I / 4O)
x SK 220E and SK 230E: Slave profile S-7.A (4I / 4O), (A/B Slave)
x 24V supply of the frequency inverter (SK 225E and SK 235E only) and the integrated ASi module
and via the yellow ASi cable.
x Connection to the frequency inverter via the terminal block.
x Optional connection via M12 flange plug connector
x Up to 31 frequency inverters on one bus conductor (standard slave (A-slave) technology)
x &\FOHWLPHPV
x Address as delivered = 0
x Max. current consumption SK 220E and SK 230E: 25mA
x Max. current consumption SK 225E and SK 235E: 290mA,
of which max. 60mA are available for peripherals (initiators, connected parameterisation tool,
actuators)
The factory setting of the frequency inverter enables the immediate availability of common AS-i basic
functions. These functions can be adapted by parameterisation. For most common applications, DIP
switches are alternatively available of the frequency inverter for the selection of functions.
BU 0200 GB-4411 Subject to technical alterations 161
379
380
381
382
383
384
5 Commissioning
5.4.6 Certificate
BU 0200 GB-4411 Subject to technical alterations 167
385
386
6 Parameterisation
Availability of the parameters
Due to certain configurations, the parameters are subject to certain conditions. The following tables
(from Section 6.1 onwards) list all parameters together with the relevant information.
Parameter
Example illustration
Set value / Description / Note Device Supervisor Parameter set
{Factory setting}
P000 [-01]
Operating para. disp.
... SK 205E S P
(Operating parameter display)
[-04]
0.01 ... 9999 In the display of the SimpleBox (SK CSX-0) or the ControlBox (SK TU3-CTR, the operating
{0} value selected in parameter P001 is displayed online.
Information about the operating status of the drive can be read out as required.
Description
Parameter text
Top: P-Box display
Bottom: Meaning
Array value
Parameter number
Parameter value range
Factory settings of parameter
Only available with types SK 2xxE
Supervisor parameters (S)
Depend on the setting in P003
Parameters dependant on parameter set (P)
Selection in P100
Array parameter display
Some parameters have the option of displaying settings and views in several levels (arrays). After the
parameter is selected, the array level is displayed and must then also be selected.
If the SimpleBox SK CSX-3H is used, the array level is shown by _ - 0 1 . With the ParameterBox
SK PAR-3H (picture on right) the selection options for the array level appear at the top right of the display.
SimpleBox SK CSX-3H
ParameterBox SK PAR-3H
Setting:
P50 2 ENTER
P_ 0 1 ENTER
OFF Value of master function 1
VALUE
Setting:
P_ 0 2 ENTER
OFF Value of master function 2
BU 0200 GB-4411 Subject to technical alterations 169
387
388
6 Parameterisation
Parameter list - inverter functions (selection)
Factory
Parameter Description Settings / functions (selection)
setting
Start-up time (acceleration ramp) is the
P102 time corresponding to the linear
[2.00] Note: Values < 0.1 must be avoided
Start-up time frequency rise from 0Hz to the set
maximum frequency (P105).
The braking time (braking ramp) is the
P103 time corresponding to the linear
[2.00] Note: Values < 0.1 must be avoided
Braking time frequency reduction from the set
maximum frequency (P105) to 0Hz.
The minimum frequency is the
P104
frequency supplied by the FI as soon as
Minimum [0]
it is enabled and no additional setpoint
frequency
is set.
P105 Is the frequency provided by the FI after
Maximum it has been enabled and the maximum [50]
frequency setpoint value is available.
P200 If a 4-pole NORD motor is used, the
[0] Select appropriate motor power
motor list preset motor data can be called up.
P201 ± P208 If a 4-pole NORD motor is not used, the
motor data on the name plate must be [xxx] Data according to name plate
Motor data entered here.
P220 The motor data is automatically
01= only stator resistance
Parameter- determined by the FI with this [0]
02= motor identification
identification parameter.
Definition of the functions of the various
setpoint inputs
Selection input:
P400 Poti P1 (P400, [-01]) - SK 2x5E 00= No function
Setpoint input Poti P2 (P400, [-02]) - SK 2x5E [xxx] 01= Setpoint frequency
function AIN1 (P400, [-01]) - SK 2x0E 15= Ramp time (only P1 / P2)
AIN2 (P400, [-02]) - SK 2x0E
DIN 2 (P400, [-06])
DIN 3 (P400, [-07])
Definition of the functions of the various
digital inputs 00= No function
01= Enable right
P420 Selection input: 02= Enable left
Digital input DIN 1 (P420, [-01]) [xxx]
04= Fixed frequency
functions DIN 2 (P420, [-02]) 05= Fixed frequency
DIN 3 (P420, [-03]) 26= Analog function (only DIN2/3)
DIN 4 (P420, [-04])
0= Off (enable with flank)
P428 1= On (enable with level)
Inverter enable with "Mains On" [0]
Automatic start Note: one digital input must be
programmed and set to enable.
P465 Definition of fixed frequency values
Fixed frequency / Selection: [xxx]
Fixed frequency Fixed frequency 1 (P465, [-01])
array Fixed frequency 2 (P465, [-02])
P509 00= Control terminals or keyboard
Selection of the interface via which the
Control word [0] 01= Only control terminals
FI is controlled.
source 03= System bus
P523 Frequency inverter is restored to the 00= No change
[0]
Factory setting factory setting 01= Load factory setting
BU 0200 GB-4411 Subject to technical alterations 171
389
SK 200E Manual for frequency inverters
Parameter list - inverter information (selection)
Parameter Description Settings / functions (selection)
Display of current messages for the actual operating Error group:
status of the frequency inverter such as errors, 1 / 2 = Overtemperature of inverter /
P700 warnings or the cause of a switch-on block. motor
Actual operating Selection: 3 / 4 = Overcurrent error
status Actual error (P700, [-01] 5 = Overvoltage error
Actual warning (P700, [-02] 16 = Motor phase monitoring
Reason for switch-on block (P700, [-03]) « 3DUDPHWHULGHQWLILFDWLRQHUURU
Displays the last 5 frequency inverter errors.
P701 Selection: See P700
Last error Last error (P701, [ -01])
Second to last error (P701, [-02])
Displays the firmware version / Inverter revision
P707 Selection:
Software version Software version (P707, [-01])
Revision (P707, [-02])
P708 Bit 0 = DIN 1
Digital input Shows the switching status of the digital inputs. Bit 1 = DIN 2
status «
Displays the measured analog input value.
Selection input:
P709 Poti P1 (P400, [-01]) - SK 2x5E
Analog input Poti P2 (P400, [-02]) - SK 2x5E
voltage AIN1 (P400, [-01]) - SK 2x0E
AIN2 (P400, [-02]) - SK 2x0E
DIN 2 (P400, [-06])
DIN 3 (P400, [-07])
P719
Displays the actual output current.
Actual current
P740 [-01] = STW (Source P509)
Process data Displays the actual control word and the setpoints. [-«-@6:« 6RXUFH3>-01]
Bus In [-«-@6:« 6RXUFH3>-02]
Bit 0 = DIP switch 1
P749
Displays the actual DIP switch setting (S1). Bit 1 = DIP switch 2
DIP switch status
«
172 Subject to technical alterations BU 0200 GB-4411
390
6 Parameterisation
6.1.1 Operating displays
The abbreviations used are described in Section 9.13 ³$EEUHYLDWLRQVLQWKLV0DQXDO
Parameter Parameter
Setting value / Description / Note Device Supervisor
{Factory setting} set
P000 Operating para. disp.
(Operating parameter display)
0.01 ... 9999 In the SimpleBox (SK CSX-3H) display, the parameter value online selected in P100 is
displayed.
P001 Select of disp. value
(Selection of display value)
0 ... 63 0 = Actual frequency [Hz]: the current output frequency being supplied by the FI.
{0} 1 = Speed [1/min]: the current rotation speed as calculated by the FI.
2 = Setpoint frequency [Hz]: the output frequency equivalent to the actual setpoint. This
need not match the actual output frequency.
3 = Current [A]: the actual output current measured by the FI.
4 = Torque current [A]: the torque developing output current of the FI.
5 = Voltage [Vac]: the actual alternating voltage being output by the FI.
6 = DC link voltage [V DC], "Link circuit voltage": is the internal DC voltage of the FI.
Amongst other things, this depends on the level of the mains voltage.
7 = cos phi, "cos M": is the actual calculated value of the power factor.
8 = Apparent power [kVA]: the current apparent power calculated by the FI.
9 = Real power [kW]: the current effective power calculated by the FI.
10 = Torque [%]: the current torque calculated by the FI.
11 = Field [%]: the current field in the motor calculated by the FI.
12 = On-time [h], "Operating hours": time that voltage is applied to the FI network.
13 = Run-time [h], "Operating hours enabled": is the time that the FI is enabled.
14 = Analog input 1 [%]: actual value AIN1 of the first I/O extension SK xU4-IOE.
15 = Analog input 2 [%]: actual value AIN2 of the second I/O extension SK xU4-IOE.
16 = « reserved Æ Posicon, BU 0210
19 = Temp. of heat sink [°C], "Heat sink temperature": current temperature of the FI heat sink.
20 = Usage rate motor [%]: average motor load, based on the known motor data
(P201...P209).
21 = Usage rate brakeres. [%], "Brake resistor load": is the average braking resistor load,
based on the known resistance data (P556...P557).
22 = Internal temperature [°C ]: current temperature in FI housing.
23 = Motor temperature [°C ]: only in combination with the analog input and appropriate
wiring (KTY84).
30 = Cur. set value MP-S [Hz], "Actual setpoint value of the motor potentiometer function
with saving": display of the setpoint which can be set in advance (without the drive unit
running) via the motor potentiometer function 71 / 72 (See parameter P420).
50 = « reserved Æ Posicon, BU 0210
60 = R Stator Ident: stator resistance, automatic determination of motor data, P220
61 = R Rotor Ident: rotor resistance, automatic determination of motor data, P220
62 = L Scat Stator Ident, "L Scatter Stator Ident": stator leakage inductance, from automatic
determination of motor data, P220
63 = L Stator Ident: stator inductance, from automatic determination of motor data, P220
BU 0200 GB-4411 Subject to technical alterations 173
391
SK 200E Manual for frequency inverters
Parameter Parameter
Setting value / Description / Note Device Supervisor
{Factory setting} set
P002 Display factor S
(Display factor)
0.01 ... 999.99
The selected operating value in parameter P001 >Select of display< is multiplied with the
{ 1.00 }
scaling factor in P000 and displayed in >Operating parameter display<.
It is therefore possible to display system-specific operating such as e.g. the throughput quantity
P003 Supervisor-Code
(Supervisor code)
0 ... 9999 0 = All parameters are visible except for the Supervisor parameters and the group P3xx/
P6xx
{1}
1 = All parameters are visible except for the group P3xx and P6xx.
2 = All parameters are visible except for the group P6xx.
3 = All parameters are visible.
4 = ... 9999, (except 65) only parameters P001 and P003 are visible.
174 Subject to technical alterations BU 0200 GB-4411
392
6 Parameterisation
6.1.2 Basic parameters (Frequency inverter)
Parameter Parameter
Setting value / Description / Note Device Supervisor
{Factory setting} set
P100 Parameter set S
(Parameter set)
0 ... 3 Selection of the parameters sets to be parameterised. 4 parameter sets are available. All
parameter set-dependent parameters are identified by P.
{0}
The selection of the operating parameter set is performed via a digital input or the Bus control.
Switching can take place during operation (online).
Digital input Digital input LEDs
Setting
function [8] function [17] SimpleBox
1
0 = Parameter set 1 Low Low
2
1
1 = Parameter set 2 High Low
2
1
2 = Parameter set 3 Low High 2
1
3 = Parameter set 4 High High
2
If enabled via the keyboard (SimpleBox, PotentiometerBox or ParameterBox), the operating
parameter set will match the settings in P100.
P101 Copy parameter set S
(Copy parameter set)
0 ... 4 After confirmation with the OK key, a copy of the parameter set selected in P100 >Parameter
set< is written to the parameter set dependent on the value selected here.
{0}
0 = Do not copy
1 = Copy actual to P1: copies the active parameter set to parameter set 1
2 = Copy actual to P2: copies the active parameter set to parameter set 2
3 = Copy actual to P3: copies the active parameter set to parameter set 3
4 = Copy actual to P4: copies the active parameter set to parameter set 4
P102 Acceleration time P
(Acceleration time)
0 ... 320.00 s Acceleration time (acceleration ramp) is the time corresponding to the linear frequency rise from
0Hz to the set maximum frequency (P105). If an actual setpoint of <100% is being used, the
{ 2.00 } acceleration time is reduced linearly according to the setpoint set.
The acceleration time can be extended by certain circumstances, e.g. FI overload, setpoint lag,
smoothing, or if the current limit is reached.
Notes on ramp gradient:
Amongst other things, the ramp gradient is governed by the inertia of the rotor.
A ramp with a gradient which is too steep may result in the "inversion" of the motor.
In general, extremely steep ramps (e.g.: 0 - 50Hz in < 0.1 s) should be avoided, as may cause
damage to the frequency inverter.
BU 0200 GB-4411 Subject to technical alterations 175
393
SK 200E Manual for frequency inverters
Parameter Parameter
Setting value / Description / Note Device Supervisor
{Factory setting} set
P103 Deceleration time P
(Deceleration time)
0 ... 320.00 s Deceleration time (braking ramp) is the time corresponding to the linear frequency reduction from
the set maximum frequency (P105) to 0Hz. If an actual setpoint <100% is used, the deceleration
{ 2.00 } time reduces accordingly.
The deceleration time can be extended by certain circumstances, e.g. by the selected >Switch-off
mode< (P108) or >Ramp smoothing< (P106).
Notes on ramp gradient: See parameter (P102)
P104 Minimum frequency P
(Minimum frequency)
0.0 ... 400.0 Hz The minimum frequency is the frequency supplied by the FI as soon as it is enabled and no
additional setpoint is set.
{ 0.0 }
In combination with other setpoints (e.g. analog setpoint of fixed frequencies) these are added to
the set minimum frequency.
This frequency is undershot when
a) The drive is accelerated from standstill.
b) The FI is blocked. The frequency then reduces to the absolute minimum (P505)
before it is blocked.
c) The FI is reversing. The reverse in the rotation field takes place at the absolute
minimum frequency (P505).
This frequency can be continuously undershot if, during acceleration or braking, the function
"Maintain frequency" (Function Digital input = 9) is executed.
P105 Maximum frequency P
(Maximum frequency)
0.1 ... 400.0 Hz The frequency supplied by the FI after being enabled and once the maximum setpoint is present,
e.g. analog setpoint corresponding to P403, a correspondingly fixed frequency or maximum via
{ 50.0 } DIP7 = off the SimpleBox / ParameterBox.
{ 60.0 } DIP7 = on This frequency can only be overshot by the slip compensation (P212), the function "Maintain
Section 5.2.2.2 frequency" (function digital input = 9) or a change to another parameter set with lower maximum
frequency.
176 Subject to technical alterations BU 0200 GB-4411
394
6 Parameterisation
Parameter Parameter
Setting value / Description / Note Device Supervisor
{Factory setting} set
P106 Ramp smoothing S P
(Ramp smoothing)
0 ... 100 % This parameter enables a smoothing of the acceleration and deceleration ramps. This is
necessary for applications where gentle, but dynamic speed change is important.
{0}
Ramp smoothing is carried out for every setpoint change. The value to be set is based on the set
acceleration and deceleration time, however values <10% have no effect.
The following then applies for the entire acceleration or deceleration time, including rounding:
t tot tP102 tP102
> @
P106 %
ACCELERATION TIME
100%
t tot tP103 tP103
> @
P106 %
DECELERATION TIME
100%
each each
Output 10 ± 100% of P103
10 ± 100% of P102
frequency
Desired
frequency
P102 P103 Time
BU 0200 GB-4411 Subject to technical alterations 177
395
SK 200E Manual for frequency inverters
Parameter Parameter
Setting value / Description / Note Device Supervisor
{Factory setting} set
P107 Brake reaction time P
(Brake reaction time)
0 ... 2.50 s Electromagnetic brakes have a physically-dependent delayed reaction time when actuated. This
can cause a dropping of the load for lifting applications, as the brake only takes over the load
{ 0.00 } after a delay.
This reaction time can be taken into account under parameter P107 (Braking control).
Within the adjustable application time, the FI supplies the set absolute minimum frequency (P505)
and so prevents movement against the brake and load drop when stopping.
See also the parameter >Release time< (P114)
NOTE: The relevant connection on the frequency inverter should be used to control
electromagnetic brakes (especially for lifting devices) (Section 2.7.4) (applies to
SK 2x5E). The minimum absolute frequency (P505) should never be less than
2.0Hz.
NOTE: If a time > 0 is set in (P107) or (P114), at the moment the FI is switched on, the level
of the excitation current (field current) is checked. If no magnetising current is
present, the FI remains in magnetising mode and the motor brake is not released.
NOTE: If brake control is used, care must be taken that parameter (P107) is not set to 0
(see also Section 2.7.4).
Recommendation for applications:
Lifting equipment with brake, without speed feedback
P114 = 0.2...0.3sec.
P107 = 0.2...0.3sec.
Output
3«3 0RWRUGDWD frequency
P434 = 1 (ext. brake) ON signal OFF signal
P505 = 2...4Hz
for safe start-up
P112 = 401 (off)
P505
P536 = 2.1 (off)
P537 = 150%
P539 = 2/3 (ISD monitoring) Brake released Time
against load drops P114 P107
or
P214 = 50...100% (precontrol) P107, when P114 = 0
178 Subject to technical alterations BU 0200 GB-4411
396
6 Parameterisation
Parameter Parameter
Setting value / Description / Note Device Supervisor
{Factory setting} set
P108 Disconnection mode S P
(Disconnection mode)
0 ... 13 This parameter determines the manner in which the output frequency is reduced after "Blocking"
(controller enableÆ Low).
{1}
0 = Voltage disable:The output signal is switched off immediately. The FI no longer supplies
an output frequency. In this case, the motor is braked only by mechanical friction.
Immediately switching the FI on again can lead to an error message.
1 = Ramp down: The current output frequency is reduced in proportion to the remaining
deceleration time, from P103/P105.
2 = Delayed ramping: as with ramp, however for generational operation the brake ramp is
extended, or for static operation the output frequency is increased. Under certain
conditions, this function can prevent overload switch off or reduce brake resistance
power dissipation.
NOTE: This function must not be programmed if defined deceleration is required, e.g.
with lifting mechanisms.
3 = Instant DC braking: The FI switches to the preselected DC current (P109) immediately.
This DC current is supplied for the remaining proportion of the >DC brake time< (P110).
Depending on the relationship of the actual output frequency to the max. frequency
(P105), the >DC braking time< is shortened. The time taken for the motor to stop
depends on the application. This depends on the inertia of the load, the friction and the
DC current which is set (P109).
With this type of braking, no energy is fed back to the FI. Heat losses occur primarily in
the rotor of the motor.
4 = Const. brake distance, "Constant brake distance": The brake ramp is delayed in starting
if the equipment is not being driven at the maximum output frequency (P105). This
results in an approximately similar braking distance for different frequencies.
NOTE: This function cannot be used as a positioning function. This function should not
be combined with ramp smoothing (P106).
5 = Combi. braking, "Combined braking": Dependent on the actual link voltage (UZW), a high
frequency voltage is switched to the basic frequency (only for linear characteristic curves,
P211 = 0 and P212 = 0). The deceleration time is retained where possible (P103). Æ
additional motor warming!
6 = Quadratic ramp: The brake ramp does not follow a linear path, but rather a decreasing
quadratic one.
7 = Quad. ramp with delay, "Quadratic ramp with delay": Combination of functions 2 and 6
8 = Quad. ramp w. braking, "Quadratic combined braking": Combination of functions 5 and 6
9 = Constant accn., "Constant acceleration power": Only applies in field weakening range!
The drive is accelerated or braked using constant electrical power. The course of the
ramps depends on the load.
10 = Distance calculator: Constant distance between current frequency / speed and the set
minimum output frequency (P104).
11 = Const. accn. delay, "Constant acceleration power with delay": Combination of functions 2
and 9.
12 = Const. accn. mode 3, "Constant acceleration power mode 3": as for 11, however with
additional chopper relief.
13 = Switch off delay, "Ramp with switch-off delay": As for 1 "Ramp", however, before the
brake is applied, the drive unit remains at the absolute minimum frequency set in
parameter (P505) for the time specified in parameter (P110).
BU 0200 GB-4411 Subject to technical alterations 179
397
SK 200E Manual for frequency inverters
Parameter Parameter
Setting value / Description / Note Device Supervisor
{Factory setting} set
P109 DC brake current S P
(DC brake current)
0 ... 250 % Current setting for the functions of DC current braking (P108 = 3) and combined braking (P108 = 5).
{ 100 } The correct setting value depends on the mechanical load and the required deceleration time. A
higher setting brings large loads to a standstill more quickly.
The 100% setting relates to a current value as stored in the >Nominal current< parameter P203.
NOTE: The amount of DC current (0Hz) which the FI can supply is limited. For this value,
please refer to the table in Section 9.5.3, column: 0Hz. In the basic setting this
limiting value is about 110%.
P110 Time DC-brake on S P
(DC braking time on)
0.00 ... 60.00 s The time during which the motor has the current selected in parameter >DC brake current<
applied to it during the DC braking functions (P108 = 3).
{ 2.00 }
Depending on the relationship, actual output frequency to max. frequency (P105), the >Time DC
brake on< is shortened.
The time starts running with the removal of the enable and can be interrupted by fresh enabling.
P111 P factor torque limit S P
(P factor torque limit)
25 ... 400 % Directly affects the behaviour of the drive at torque limit. The basic setting of 100% is sufficient for
most drive tasks.
{ 100 }
If this value is too high, the drive unit will tend to oscillate when the torque limit is reached.
If the value is too low, the programmed torque limit may be exceeded.
P112 Torque current limit S P
(Torque current limit)
25 ... 400 % / 401 With this parameter, a limit value for the torque-generating current can be set. This can prevent
mechanical overloading of the drive. It cannot provide any protection against mechanical
{ 401 } blockages (movement to stops). A slipping clutch which acts as a safety device must be provided.
The torque current limit can also be set over an infinite range of settings using an analog input.
The maximum setpoint (compare adjustment 100%, P403[-01] . .[-06]) then corresponds to the
value set in P112.
The limit value 20% of current torque cannot be undershot by a smaller analog setpoint
(P400[-@«>-09] = 11 or 12) . In contrast, in servo mode ((P300) = "1") as of firmware version
V 1.3 a limiting value of 0% is possible (older firmware versions: min. 10%)!
401 = OFF means that the torque current limit is switched off! This is also the basic setting for
the FI.
180 Subject to technical alterations BU 0200 GB-4411
398
6 Parameterisation
Parameter Parameter
Setting value / Description / Note Device Supervisor
{Factory setting} set
P113 Jog frequency S P
(Jog frequency)
-400.0 ... 400.0 Hz When using the SimpleBox or ParameterBox to control the FI, the jog frequency is the initial
value following enabling.
{ 0.0 }
Alternatively, when control is via the control terminals, the jog frequency can be activated via one
of the digital inputs.
The setting of the jog frequency can be carried out directly via this parameter or, if the FI is
enabled via the keyboard, by pressing the OK key. In this case, the actual output frequency is set
in parameter P113 and is then available for the next start.
NOTE: Specified setpoints via the control terminals, e.g. jog frequency, fixed frequencies or
analog setpoints, are generally added with the correct sign. The set maximum
frequency (P105) cannot be exceeded and the minimum frequency (P104) cannot be
undershot.
P114 Brake delay off S P
(Brake release time)
0 ... 2.50 s Electromagnetic brakes have a delayed reaction time during release, which depends on physical
factors. This can lead to the motor starting while the brake is still applied, which will cause the
{ 0.00 } inverter to switch off with an overcurrent report.
This release time can be taken into account in parameter P114 (Braking control).
During the adjustable release time, the FI supplies the set absolute minimum frequency (P505)
thus preventing movement against the brake.
See also the parameter >Brake reaction time< P107 (setting example).
NOTE: If the brake release time is set to "0", then P107 is the brake release and reaction
time.
P120 [-01]
Option monitoring
... S
(Option monitoring)
[-04]
0 ... 2 Monitoring of communication at system bus level (in case of error: error message 10.9)
{1}
Array levels: Setting values, for each array:
0 = Monitoring off
1 = Auto: communications are only monitored if
an existing communication is interrupted. If
after switching on the mains a module which
was previously present is not detected, this
[-01] = Extension 1 (BUS TB) does not result in an error.
The monitoring only becomes active when
[-02] = Extension 2 (second I/O TB) one of the extensions commences
[-03] = Extension 3 (first I/O TB) communication with the FI.
2 = Monitoring active immediately, the FI starts
[-04] = Extension 4 (reserved)
monitoring the corresponding module
immediately after it is switched on. If the
module is not detected after the mains have
been switched on, the FI remains in the
VWDWH³1RWRQVWDQGE\´IRUVHFRQGVDQG
then triggers an error message.
Note: If error messages which are detected by the optional module (e.g. errors at field bus
level) are not to result in a shut-down of the frequency inverter, parameter (P513) must
also be set to the value {-0,1}.
BU 0200 GB-4411 Subject to technical alterations 181
399
400
6 Parameterisation
Parameter Parameter
Setting value / Description / Note Device Supervisor
{Factory setting} set
P203 Nominal current S P
(Nominal motor current)
0.1 ... 300.0 A
***
The nominal motor current is a decisive parameter for the current vector control.
{ }
P204 Nominal voltage S P
(Nominal motor voltage)
100 ... 800 V The >Nominal voltage< matches the mains voltage to the motor voltage. In combination with the
{ ] nominal frequency, the voltage/frequency characteristic curve is produced.
P205 Nominal power P
(Nominal motor power output)
0.00 ... 150.00 kW
***
The motor nominal power controls the motor set via P200.
{ }
Cos phi
P206 S P
(Motor cos M)
0.50 ... 0.90
***
The motor cosM is a decisive parameter for the current vector control.
{ }
P207 Star Delta con. S P
(Star Delta connection)
0 ... 1 0 = Star 1 = Delta
*** The motor circuit is decisive for stator resistance measurement (P220) and therefore for current
{ }
vector control.
Stator resistance
P208 S P
(Stator resistance))
0.00 ... 300.00 : Motor stator resistance : resistance of a phase winding with a DC motor.
***
{ } Has a direct influence on the current control of the FI. Too high a value will result in a possible
overcurrent, on the other hand a value which is too low will result in a motor torque which is too
low.
The parameter P220 can be used for simple measurement. Parameter P208 can be used for
manual setting or as information about the result of an automatic measurement.
NOTE: For optimum functioning of the current vector control, the stator resistance should
be automatically measured by the FI.
P209 No load current S P
(No load current)
0.1 ... 300.0 A This value is always calculated automatically from the motor data if there is a change in the
*** parameter >cos M< P206 and the parameter >Nominal current< P203.
{ }
NOTE: If the value is to be entered directly, then it must be set as the last motor data. This
is the only way to ensure that the value will not be overwritten.
P210 Static boost S P
(Static boost)
0 ... 400 % The static boost affects the current that generates the magnetic field. This is equivalent to the
no load current of the respective motor and is therefore independent of the load. The no load
{ 100 } current is calculated using the motor data. The factory setting of 100% is sufficient for normal
applications.
These settings are dependent on the nominal power of the FI or the selection in parameter P200.
BU 0200 GB-4411 Subject to technical alterations 183
401
SK 200E Manual for frequency inverters
Parameter Parameter
Setting value / Description / Note Device Supervisor
{Factory setting} set
P211 7 Dynamic boost S P
(Dynamic boost)
0 ... 150 % The dynamic boost affects the torque generating current and is therefore a load-dependent
parameter. The factory 100% setting is also sufficient for typical applications.
{ 100 }
Too high a value can lead to overcurrent in the FI. Under load therefore, the output voltage will
be raised too sharply. Too low a value will lead to insufficient torque.
P212 8 Slip compensation S P
(Slip compensation)
0 ... 150 % The slip compensation increases the output frequency, dependent on load, to keep the DC
asynchronous motor speed approximately constant.
{ 100 }
The factory setting of 100% is optimal when using DC asynchronous motors and correct motor
data has been set.
If several motors (different loads or outputs) are operated with one FI, the slip compensation
P212 must be set to 0%. This rules out a negative influence. This also applies to synchronous
motors that do not have slip due to their design.
P213 ISD ctrl. loop gain S P
(Amplification of ISD control )
25 ... 400 % This parameter influences the control dynamics of the FI current vector control (ISD control).
Higher settings make the controller faster, lower settings slower.
{ 100 }
Depending on the type of application, this parameter can be altered, e.g. to avoid unstable
operation.
P214 Torque precontrol S P
(Torque precontrol)
-200 ... 200 % This function allows a value for the expected torque requirement to be set in the controller. This
function can be used in lifting applications for a better load transfer during start-up.
{0}
NOTE: with rotation field to the right, motor torques are entered with a positive sign,
generator torques are entered with a negative sign. The reverse applies for the counter
clockwise rotation.
P215 Boost precontrol S P
(Boost precontrol)
0 ... 200 % Only with linear characteristic curve (P211 = 0% and P212 = 0%).
{0} For drives that require a high starting torque, this parameter provides an option for switching in
an additional current during the start phase. The application time is limited and can be selected
at parameter >Time boost precontrol< P216.
All current and torque current limits that may have been set (P112 and P536, P537) are
deactivated during the boost lead time.
7
Note: P211 and P212 can be deactivated with the DIP switches, see Section 5.2.2.2
8
Note: P211 and P212 can be deactivated with the DIP switches, see Section 5.2.2.2
184 Subject to technical alterations BU 0200 GB-4411
402
6 Parameterisation
Parameter Parameter
Setting value / Description / Note Device Supervisor
{Factory setting} set
P216 Time boost prectrl. S P
(Time boost precontrol)
0.0 ... 10.0 s This parameter is used for 3 functionalities
{ 0.0 }
Time limit for the boost lead: Effective time for the increased starting current.
Only with linear characteristic curve (P211 = 0% and P212 = 0%).
Time limit for suppression of pulse switch-off (P537): enables start-up under heavy load.
Time limit for suppression of switch-off on error in parameter (P401), setting { 05 `Ä0 - 10V
with switch-RIIRQHUURU³
P217 Oscillation damping S P
(Oscillation damping)
0 ... 400 % With the oscillation damping, idling current harmonics can be damped. Parameter 217 is a
measure of the damping power.
{ 10 }
For oscillation damping, the oscillation component is filtered out of the torque current by means
of a high pass filter. This is amplified by P217, inverted and switched to the output frequency.
The limit for the switched value is also proportional to P217. The time constant for the high pass
filter depends on P213. For higher values of P213 the time constant is lower.
With a set value of 10% for P217, a maximum of ± 0.045Hz are switched in. At 400% in P217,
this corresponds to ± 1.8Hz
7KHIXQFWLRQLVQRWDFWLYHLQ³6HUYRPRGH3´
P218 Modulation depth S
(Modulation depth)
50 ... 110 % This setting influences the maximum possible output voltage of the FI in relation to the mains
voltage. Values <100% reduce the voltage to values below that of the mains voltage if this is
{ 100 } required for motors. Values >100% increase the output voltage to the motor increased the
harmonics in the current, which may cause oscillation in some motors.
Normally, 100% should be set.
BU 0200 GB-4411 Subject to technical alterations 185
403
SK 200E Manual for frequency inverters
Parameter Parameter
Setting value / Description / Note Device Supervisor
{Factory setting} set
P219 Auto. magn. adjustment S
(Automatic magnetisation adjustment)
25 ... 100 % / 101 With this parameter, an automatic adjustment of the magnetic flux to the motor load can be
made. P219 is a limiting value, to which the field in the motor can be reduced.
{ 100 }
As standard, the value is set to 100%, and therefore no reduction is possible. As minimum, 25%
can be set.
The reduction of the field is performed with a time constant of approx. 7.5 sec. On increase of
load the field is built up again with a time constant of approx. 300 ms. The reduction of the field
is carried out so that the magnetisation current and the torque current are approximately equal,
so tKDW WKH PRWRU LV RSHUDWHG ZLWK ³RSWLPXP HIILFLHQF\´ $Q LQFUHDVH RI WKH ILHOG DERYH WKH
setpoint value is not intended.
This function is intended for applications in which the required torque only changes slowly (e.g.
pumps and fans). Its effect therefore replaces a quadratic curve, as it adapts the voltage to the
load.
NOTE: This must not be used for lifting or applications where a more rapid build-up of the
torque is required, as otherwise there would be overcurrent switch-offs or inversion
of the motor on sudden changes of load, because the missing field would need to
be compensated by a disproportionate torque current.
101 = automatic, with the setting P219=101 an automatic magnetisation current controller is
activated. The ISD controller then operates with a subordinate magnetizing controller,
which improves the slippage calculation, especially at higher loads. The control times
are considerably faster compared to the Normal ISD control (P219 = 100)
P2xx Control/characteristic curve parameters
Output
voltage
P204
P211
P215
P210
Output frequency
P201
P216 Time
NOTE: "typical"
settings for the... Current vector control (factory setting) Linear V/f characteristic curve
P201 to P209 = Motor data P201 to P209 = Motor data
P210 = 100% P210 = 100% (static boost)
P211 = 100% P211 = 0%
P212 = 100% P212 = 0%
P213 = 100% P213 = no significance
P214 = 0% P214 = no significance
P215 = no significance P215 = 0% (dynamic boost)
P216 = no significance P216 = 0s (time dyn. boost)
186 Subject to technical alterations BU 0200 GB-4411
404
6 Parameterisation
Parameter Parameter
Setting value / Description / Note Device Supervisor
{Factory setting} set
P220 Par.-identification P
(Parameter identification)
... up to 240s The motor data is automatically determined by the FI with this parameter. In most cases this
leads to considerably better drive characteristics, as DC asynchronous motors are subject to
{0} manufacturing tolerances which are not documented on the name plate.
The identification of all parameters takes some time. Do not switch off the mains voltage during
WKLV WLPH 7KH LGHQWLILFDWLRQ FDQ RQO\ EH FDUULHG RXW LQ DQ ³RSHUDWLYH´ FRQGLWLRQ 7KLV PXVW EH
particularly taken into account in BUS operation.
If unfavourable operating characteristics result, select a suitable motor in P200 or set the
SDUDPHWHUV3«3PDQXDOO\
0 = No identification
1 = Identification RS: only the stator resistance (display in P208) is determined by multiple
measurements.
2 = Identification motor: all motor parameters (P202, P203, P206, P208, P209) are
determined.
Procedure: a) The identification should be made with the motor cold. Warming up of the motor during
operation is automatically taken into account.
b) 7KH),PXVWEHLQDQ³RSHUDWLYHFRQGLWLRQ´)RUEXVoperation, the bus must be operating
without error. The FI must not be in a state of switch-on block.
c) The motor power may only be one power level greater or 3 power levels lower than the
nominal power of the FI.
d) The motor data should be set according to the name plate or P200. However, at least
the nominal frequency (P201), the nominal speed (P202), the voltage (P204), the power
(P205) and the motor circuit (P207) should be known.
e) If the identification cannot be concluded successfully, the error message E019 is
generated. See also Section 6, Error messages.
f) Reliable identification can be made with motor cables up 20m in length.
NOTE: After identification of parameters, P220 is again = 0.
Care must be taken that the connection to the motor is not interrupted during the
entire measuring process.
BU 0200 GB-4411 Subject to technical alterations 187
405
SK 200E Manual for frequency inverters
6.1.4 Speed control
In combination with an HTL incremental encoder, a closed speed control loop can be set up via digital inputs
2 and 3 of the FI.
Alternatively, the incremental encoder signal can be used for other purposes. For this, the required function
must be selected in parameter 325.
In order for this parameter to be visible, the supervisor parameter P003 = 2/3 must be set.
Parameter
Setting value / Description / Note Device Supervisor Parameter set
{Factory setting}
P300 Servo mode S P
(Servo mode)
0 ... 1 This parameter activates speed control with speed measurement via an incremental encoder.
This leads to a very stable speed behaviour down to motor standstill.
{0}
0 = Off
1 = On
NOTE: for correct function, an HTL incremental encoder must be connected to digital
inputs DIN 2 and DIN 3 (See Section 2.8.5 "Colour and contact assignments for
incremental encoders (HTL)") and the correct pulse number must be entered in
parameter (P301).
ATTENTION: the functions of digital inputs DIN 2 and DIN 3 must be deactivated
((P420 [-02], [-03]) to "no function").
P301 Incremental encoder S
(Encoder resolution)
0 ... 17 Input of the pulse-count per rotation of the connected incremental encoder.
{6} If the encoder rotation direction is not the same as the motor driven by the FI, (depending on
installation and wiring), this can be compensated for by selecting the corresponding negative
increment numbers 8...16.
0 = 500 pulses 8 = -500 pulses
1 = 512 pulses 9 = -512 pulses
2 = 1000 pulses 10 = -1000 pulses
3 = 1024 pulses 11 = -1024 pulses
4 = 2000 pulses 12 = -2000 pulses
5 = 2048 pulses 13 = -2048 pulses
6 = 4096 pulses 14 = -4096 pulses
7 = 5000 pulses 15 = -5000 pulses
16 = -8192 pulses
17 = + 8192 pulses
NOTE: (P301) is important for the positioning control in SK 200E. If an incremental
encoder is used for positioning (P604=1), the setting of the pulse number is
made here. (see Manual BU 0210)
P310 Speed Ctrl P S P
(Speed controller P)
0 ... 3200 % P-component of the encoder (proportional amplification).
{ 100 } Amplification factor, with which the speed difference is multiplied from the setpoint and actual
frequency. A value of 100% means that a speed difference of 10% produces a setpoint of 10%.
Values that are too high can cause the output speed to oscillate.
188 Subject to technical alterations BU 0200 GB-4411
406
6 Parameterisation
Parameter
Setting value / Description / Note Device Supervisor Parameter set
{Factory setting}
P311 Speed Ctrl I S P
(Speed controller I)
0 ... 800 % / ms I-component of the encoder (Integration component).
{ 20 } The integration component of the controller completely eliminates any control deviation. The
value indicates how large the setpoint change is per ms. Values that are too small cause the
controller to slow down (reset time is too long).
P312 Torque curr. ctrl. P S P
(Torque current controller P)
0 ... 800 % Current controller for the torque current. The higher the current controller parameters are set,
the more precisely the current setpoint is maintained. Excessively high values in P312 generally
{ 200 } lead to high-frequency oscillations at low speeds; on the other hand, excessively high values in
P313 generally produce low frequency oscillations across the whole speed range.
If the value "Zero" is entered in P312 and P313, then the torque current control is switched off.
In this case, only the motor model precontrol is used.
P313 Torque curr. ctrl. I S P
(Torque current controller I)
0 ... 800 % / ms
I-component of the torque current controller. (See also P312 >Torque current controller P<)
{ 125 }
P314 Torq. curr. ctrl. limit S P
(Torque current controller limit)
0 ... 400 V Determines the maximum voltage increase of the torque current controller. The higher the
value, the greater the maximum effect that can be exercised by the torque current controller.
{ 400 } Excessive values in P314 can specifically lead to instability during transition to the field
weakening zone (see P320). The values for P314 and P317 should always be set roughly the
same, so that the field and torque current controllers are balanced.
P315 Field curr. ctrl. P S P
(Field current controller P)
0 ... 800 % Current controller for the field current. The higher the current controller parameters are set, the
more precisely the current setpoint is maintained. Excessively high values for P315 generally
{ 200 } lead to high frequency vibrations at low speeds. On the other hand, excessively high values in
P316 generally produce low frequency vibrations across the whole speed range If the value
"Zero" is entered in P315 and P316, then the field current controller is switched off. In this case,
only the motor model precontrol is used.
P316 Field curr. ctrl. I S P
(Field current controller I)
0 ... 800 % / ms
I-component of the field current controller. See also P315 >Field current controller P<
{ 125 }
P317 Field curr. ctrl. lim. S P
(Field current controller limit)
0 ... 400 V Determines the maximum voltage increase of the torque current controller. The higher the
value, the greater is the maximum effect that can be exercised by the field current controller.
{ 400 } Excessive values in P317 can specifically lead to instability during transition to the field
reduction range (see P320). The values for P314 and P317 should always be set roughly the
same, so that the field and torque current controllers are balanced.
BU 0200 GB-4411 Subject to technical alterations 189
407
SK 200E Manual for frequency inverters
Parameter
Setting value / Description / Note Device Supervisor Parameter set
{Factory setting}
P318 P-Weak S P
(Field weakening controller P)
0 ... 800 % The field weakening controller reduces the field setpoint when the synchronous speed is
exceeded. Generally, the field weakening controller has no function; for this reason, the field
{ 150 } weakening controller only needs to be set if speeds are set above the nominal motor speed.
Excessive values for P318 / P319 will lead to controller oscillations. The field is not weakened
sufficiently if the values are too small or during dynamic acceleration and/or delay times. The
downstream current controller can no longer read the current setpoint.
P319 I-Weak S P
(Field weakening controller I)
0 ... 800 % / ms
{ 20 } Affects only the field weakening range, see P318 >Field weakening controller P<
P320 Weak border S P
(Field weakening controller border)
0 ... 110 % The field weakening limit determines at which speed / current the controller will begin to weaken
the field. At a set value of 100% the controller will begin to weaken the field at approximately the
{ 100 } synchronous speed.
If values much larger than the standard values have been set in P314 and/or P317, then the
field weakening limit should be correspondingly reduced, so that the control range is actually
available to the current controller.
P321 Speedctr.I brake off S P
(Speed control I brake delay off)
0 ... 4 During the brake release time (P107/P114), the I-component of the rotation speed control is
increased. This leads to better load take-up, especially with vertical movements.
{0}
0 = P311 speed ctrl I x 1
1 = P311 speed ctrl I x 2 3 = P311 speed ctrl I x 8
2 = P311 speed ctrl I x 4 4 = P311 speed ctrl I x 16
P325 Function encoder S
(Function encoder)
0 ... 4 The actual speed list value supplied by an incremental encoder to the FI can be used for various
functions in the FI.
{0}
0 = Speed meas servo mode, "Speed measurement, servo mode": The actual motor speed
list value is used for the FI servo mode. The ISD control cannot be switched off in this
function.
1 = PID actual frequency, "PID actual frequency value": The actual speed of a system is
used for speed control. This function can also be used for controlling a motor with a
linear characteristic curve. It is also possible to use an incremental encoder for speed
control that is not mounted directly onto the motor. P413 ± P416 determine the control.
2 = Frequency addition: The speed determined is added to the actual setpoint value.
3 = Freq subtraction, "Frequency subtraction": The speed determined is subtracted from
the actual setpoint.
4 = Maximum frequency: The maximum possible output frequency / speed is limited by the
speed of the encoder.
190 Subject to technical alterations BU 0200 GB-4411
408
6 Parameterisation
Parameter
Setting value / Description / Note Device Supervisor Parameter set
{Factory setting}
P326 Ratio encoder S
(Encoder transformation ratio)
0.01 ... 100.00 If the incremental encoder is not mounted directly onto the motor shaft, then the respectively
correct transformation ratio of motor speed to encoder speed must be set.
{ 1.00 }
Motor speed
P326
Encoder speed
Only when P325 = 1, 2, 3 or 4, therefore not in Servo mode (motor speed control)
P327 Speed slip error S P
(Speed slip error, speed control)
0 ... 3000 rpm The limit value for a permitted maximum slip error can be set. If this value is reached, the FI
switches off and indicates error E013.1.
{0}
0 = OFF
Only when P325 = 0, therefore in Servo mode (motor speed control)
P328 Speed slip delay S P
(Speed slip error delay)
0.0 ... 10.0 s In case the permissible slip error defined in (P327) is exceeded, the display of the error
message E013.1 is suppressed within the limits which can be set here.
{ 0.0 }
0 = OFF
BU 0200 GB-4411 Subject to technical alterations 191
409
SK 200E Manual for frequency inverters
6.1.5 Control clamps
Parameter Parameter
Setting value / Description / Note Device Supervisor
{Factory setting} set
P400 [-01]
Fnct. setpoint inputs
... SK 2x0E P
(Function of setpoint inputs)
[-09]
a) b)
0 ... 33 SK [(6« SK2x0E S 4
{ [-01] = 1 } [-01] = Analog input 1, Function of analog input 1 integrated into the FI
{ [-02] = 0 } [-02] = Analog input 2, Function of analog input 2 integrated into the FI
{ [-03] = 0 } [-03] = Ext. analog input 1, AIN1 of the first I/O extension (SK xU4-IOE)
{ [-04] = 0 } [-04] = Ext. analog input 2, AIN2 of the first I/O extension (SK xU4-IOE)
{ [-05] = 1 } [-05] = Setpoint module, in preparation
a)
{ [-06] = 0 } [-06] = Digital input 2, can be set to pulse signal [-06] = Potentiometer 1, Function of
b) evaluation via P420 [-02] =26 or 27. The the potentiometer P1 integrated
{ [-06] = 1 }
pulses are then evaluated in the FI as an into the FI (Section 5.2.2). DIP
a)
{ [-07] = 1 } analog signal according to the function switches 4/5 must be "Off"
b) which is set here. (Section 5.2.2), in order that the
{ [-07] = 15 } function can be influenced by
[-07] = Digital input 3, can be set to pulse signal
{ [-08] = 0 } this parameter setting
evaluation via P420 [-03] =26 or 27. The
{ [-09] = 0 } pulses are then evaluated in the FI as an [-07] = Potentiometer 2, as for
analog signal according to the function potentiometer 1.
which is set here.
[-08] = Ext. A.in 1 2nd IOE, "External analog input 1 2nd IOE", AIN1 of the second I/O
extension (SK xU4-IOE) (= Analog input 3)
[-09] = Ext. A.in 2 2nd IOE, "External analog input 2 2nd IOE", AIN2 of the second I/O
extension (SK xU4-IOE) (= Analog input 4)
... setting values below.
P400 [-01]
Fnct. setpoint inputs
... SK 2x5E P
(Function of setpoint inputs)
[-09]
0 ... 33 [-01] = Potentiometer 1, Function of the potentiometer P1 integrated into the FI (Section
5.2.2). DIP switches 4/5 must be "Off" (Section 5.2.2), in order that the function can be
{ [-01] = 1 } influenced by this parameter setting
{ [-02] = 15 } [-02] = Potentiometer 2, as for potentiometer 1
{ [-03] = 0 } [-03] = Ext. analog input 1, AIN1 of the first I/O extension (SK xU4-IOE)
{ [-04] = 0 } [-04] = Ext. analog input 2, AIN2 of the first I/O extension (SK xU4-IOE)
{ [-05] = 1 } [-05] = Setpoint module, in preparation
{ [-06] = 0 } [-06] = Digital input 2, can be set to pulse signal evaluation via parameter P420 [-02] =26 or
{ [-07] = 1 } 27. The pulses are then evaluated in the FI as an analog signal according to the
function which is set here.
{ [-08] = 0 }
[-07] = Digital input 3, can be set to pulse signal evaluation via parameter P420 [-03] =26 or
{ [-09] = 0 } 27. The pulses are then evaluated in the FI as an analog signal according to the
function which is set here.
[-08] = Ext. A.in 1 2nd IOE, "External analog input 1 2nd IOE", AIN1 of the second I/O
extension (SK xU4-IOE) (= Analog input 3)
[-09] = Ext. A.in 2 2nd IOE, "External analog input 2 2nd IOE", AIN2 of the second I/O
extension (SK xU4-IOE) (=Analog input 4)
192 Subject to technical alterations BU 0200 GB-4411
410
6 Parameterisation
Parameter Parameter
Setting value / Description / Note Device Supervisor
{Factory setting} set
The basic equipment of SK 2x5E devices does not include an analog input. An analog function
can only be implemented by the use of options (Array [-01]...[-05] and [-@«>-09]) or by use of
the digital input 2 or 3 (Array [-06]...[-07]). The following settings are then possible:
For standardisation of actual values: See also (Section 9.10).
0 = Off, the analog input has no function. After the FI has been enabled via the control
terminals, it will supply the set minimum frequency (P104).
1 = Set point frequency, the specified analog range (P402/P403) varies the output
frequency between the set minimum and maximum frequencies (P104/P105).
2 = Frequency addition **, the supplied frequency value is added to the setpoint.
3 = Frequency subtract, "Frequency subtraction" **, the supplied frequency value is
subtracted from the setpoint.
4 = Minimum frequency, is a typical setting value for the function of the potentiometers P1
or P2 (P400 [01] or [02]), which are integrated in the cover of the FI (Section 5.2.2).
Standardisation: T_Min.-frequency= 50Hz*U[V]/10V (U=voltage potentiometer (P1 or P2))
5 = Maximum frequency, is a typical setting value for the function of the potentiometers P1
or P2 (P400 [01] or [02]), which are integrated in the cover of the FI (Section 5.2.2).
Standardisation: T_Max.-frequency= 100Hz*U[V]/10V (U=voltage potentiometer (P1 or P2))
6 = Cur val process ctrl, "Current value process controller" *, activates the process
controller analog input is connected to the actual value sensor (compensator, air can,
flow volume meter, etc.). The mode is set via the DIP switches of the I/O extension or in
(P401).
7 = Nom val process ctrl, "Nominal value process controller" *, as function 6, however the
setpoint is specified (e.g. by a potentiometer). The actual value must be specified using
another input.
8 = Actual PI frequency *, is required to build up a control loop. The analog input (actual
value) is compared with the setpoint (e.g. fixed frequency). The output frequency is
adjusted as far as possible until the actual value equals the setpoint. (see control
variables P413...P414)
9 = Actual freq. PI limited *, "Actual frequency PI limited, as for function 8 "Actual frequency
PI", however the output frequency cannot fall below the programmed minimum
frequency value in Parameter P104. (no change to rotation direction)
10 = Actual freq. PI monitored *, "Actual frequency PI monitored", as for function 8 "Actual
frequency PI", however the FI switches the output frequency off when the minimum
frequency P104 is reached
11 = Torque current limit, "Torque current limited" depends on parameter (P112). This value
corresponds to 100% of the setpoint value. When the set limit value is reached, there is
a reduction of the output frequency at the torque current limit.
12 = Torque current limit switch-off, "Torque current limit switch-off" depends on parameter
(P112). This value corresponds to 100% of the setpoint value. When the set limit value
is reached, the device switches off with error code E12.3.
13 = Current limit, "Current limited" depends on parameter (P536). This value corresponds to
100% of the setpoint value. When the set limit value is reached, the output voltage is
reduced in order to limit the output current.
14 = Current switch-off, "Current limit switch-off", depends on parameter (P536), this value
corresponds to 100% of the setpoint value. When the set limit value is reached, the
device switches off with error code E12.4.
15 = Ramp time, (only SK 2x0E S 4 and SK 2x5E) is a typical setting value for the function of
potentiometer P1 or P2 (P400 [01] or [02]), which are integrated into the cover of the FI
(Section 5.2.2). Standardisation: T_Ramp time= 10s*U[V]/10V (U=Voltage of
potentiometer (P1 or P2))
16 = Pre-tension Torque, function which enables a value for the anticipated torque
requirement to be entered in the controller (interference factor switching). This function
can be used to improve the load take-up of lift equipment with separate load detection.
17 = Multiplication, the setpoint is multiplied with the specified analog value. The analog
value adjusted to 100% then corresponds to a multiplication factor of 1.
18 = Curve control, "Curve travel calculator", via the external analog input (P400 [-03] or
P400 [-04]) or via the BUS (P546 [-01 .. -03]) the master receives the actual speed from
the slave. From its own speed, the slave speed and the guide speed, the master
BU 0200 GB-4411 Subject to technical alterations 193
411
SK 200E Manual for frequency inverters
Parameter Parameter
Setting value / Description / Note Device Supervisor
{Factory setting} set
calculates the actual setpoint speed, so that neither of the two drives travels faster than
the guide speed in the curve.
19 = Servo mode torque, in servo mode, the motor torque can be set or limited using this
function. As of firmware version V1.3 this function is also without speed feedback,
however it can be used at a lower quality.
25 = Ratio gearing, "Gearing Transfer Factor", is a multiplier to compensate for the variable
transfer of a setpoint value.
30 = Motor temperature: enables measurement of the motor temperature with a
KTY-84 - temperature sensor (Details in Section 5.3)
33 = Set val torque p, "Setpoint torque process controller", for even distribution of the torques
to coupled drive units (e.g.: S-roller drive). This function is also possible with the use of
ISD control.d-corr.F process (Diameter correction frequency for PID process
controller)
35 = d-corr.torque Diameter correction for torque)
36 = d-corr.F + Torque (Diameter correction frequency for PID process controller and torque)
*) For further details of the PI and process controller, please refer to Section 9.2.
**) The limits of these values are formed by the parameters >minimum frequency auxiliary
setpoint values< (P410) and the parameter >maximum frequency auxiliary setpoint values<
(P411), whereby the limits defined by (P104) and (P105) cannot be undershot or overshot.
194 Subject to technical alterations BU 0200 GB-4411
412
6 Parameterisation
Parameter Parameter
Setting value / Description / Note Device Supervisor
{Factory setting} set
P401 [-01]
Mode analog in
... S
(Mode analog input)
[-06]
0 ... 5 [-01] = Ext analog in 1, "External analog input 1", AIN1 of the first I/O extension (SK xU4-IOE).
{ all 0 } [-02] = Ext analog in 2, "External analog input 2", AIN2 of the first I/O extension (SK xU4-IOE).
[-03] = Ext. A.in 1 2nd IOE, "External analog input 1 2nd IOE", AIN1 of the second I/O
extension (SK xU4-IOE) (= analog input 3).
... only with
SK CU4-IOE or [-04] = Ext. A.in 2 2nd IOE, "External analog input 2 2nd IOE", AIN1 of the second I/O
SK TU4-IOE extension (SK xU4-IOE) (= analog input 4).
[-05] = Analog input 1, Analog input1 (only SK 200E, SK 210E)
as of SW 1.2 [-06] = Analog input 2, Analog input 2 (only SK 2x0E)
0 = 0 ± 10V limited: An analog setpoint smaller than the programmed adjustment 0%
(P402), does not result in an undershooting of the programmed minimum frequency
(P104), i.e. does not result in a reversal of the direction of rotation.
1 = 0 ± 10V: If there is a setpoint value which is smaller than the programmed adjustment
0% (P402), this may result in a change in the direction of rotation. Because of this, a
reversal of the direction of rotation may be implemented with a simple voltage source
and a potentiometer.
e.g. internal setpoint with change of direction of rotation: P402 = 5V, P104 = 0Hz,
potentiometer 0±10V Æ change of direction of rotation at 5V in the middle setting of the
potentiometer.
At the moment of reversal (Hysteresis = r P505), the drive unit is at a standstill, if the
minimum frequency (P104) is less than the absolute minimum frequency (P505). A
brake controlled by the FI is applied within the hysteresis range.
If the minimum frequency (P104) is larger than the absolute minimum frequency
(P505), the drive reverses when the minimum frequency is reached. Within the
hysteresis range r P104 provides the FI with the minimum frequency (P104), a brake
controlled by the FI is not applied.
2 = 0 ± 10V controlled: If the minimum f / Hz
adjusted setpoint value (P402) is
undershot by 10% of the difference P105
between (P403) and (P402), the FI (fmax)
output switches off. As soon as the
OFF = 2.0V - 10% * 8.0V = 1.2V
setpoint value is larger than
[P402 - (10% * (P403 - P402))], it
once again provides an output signal.
P403 = 10.0V
P402 = 2.0V
P104
(fmin)
U/V
= 8.0V
E.g.: Setpoint value 4-20mA: P402: Adjustment 0% = 1V; P403: Adjustment 100% = 5V;
-10% corresponds to -0.4V; i.e. 1...5V (4...20mA) normal operating range, 0.6...1V =
minimum frequency setpoint value, below 0.6V (2.4mA) the output is switched off.
BU 0200 GB-4411 Subject to technical alterations 195
413
SK 200E Manual for frequency inverters
Parameter Parameter
Setting value / Description / Note Device Supervisor
{Factory setting} set
NOTE:
The SK xU4-IOE provides the frequency inverter with a value standardised to
« ,Q DGGLWLRQ WKH IUHTXHQF\ LQYHUWHU DOVR UHFHLYHV D ELW ZKLFK FRQILUPV WKDW
the analog input signal is within the defined limits.
Example: 6HWSRLQWYDOXH «P$
«P$ = 0% (0000hex)
20mA = 100% (4000hex)
P$ = Bit "Setpoint value valid"
If the "0-10V monitored" mode is selected, the bit "Setpoint value valid" is evaluated
and if the setpoint value is undershot by a value of 2mA, the inverter output is switched
off.
NOTE:
Settings of parameters (P402) and (P403) are treated in an additive manner, i.e. they
can be used for additional adjustment of the limiting values.
3 = - 10V ± 10V: If there is a setpoint value which is smaller than the programmed
adjustment 0% (P402), this may result in a change in the direction of rotation. Because
of this, a reversal of the direction of rotation may be implemented with a simple voltage
source and a potentiometer.
e.g. internal setpoint with change of direction of rotation: P402 = 5V, P104 = 0Hz,
potentiometer 0±10V Æ change of direction of rotation at 5V in the middle setting of the
potentiometer.
At the moment of reversal (Hysteresis = r P505), the drive unit is at a standstill, if the
minimum frequency (P104) is less than the absolute minimum frequency (P505). A
brake controlled by the FI is not applied within the hysteresis range.
If the minimum frequency (P104) is larger than the absolute minimum frequency
(P505), the drive reverses when the minimum frequency is reached. Within the
hysteresis range r P104 provides the FI with the minimum frequency (P104), a brake
controlled by the FI is not applied.
NOTE: The function -10V ± 10V is a description of the method of function
and not a reference to a bipolar signal (see example above).
4 = 0 ± 10V with error 1, "0 ± 10V with switch-RIIRQHUURU³:
If the 0% adjustment value in (P402) is undershot, the error message 12.8 "Analog In
Min. undershot" is activated.
Overshooting of the 100% adjustment value in (P403) activates the error message 12.9
"Analog In Max. overshot".
Even if the analog value is within the limits defined in (P402) and (P403), the setpoint
value is limited to 0 - 100%.
The monitoring function only becomes active if there is an enable signal and the analog
YDOXHKDVUHDFKHGWKHYDOLGUDQJH 3 RU 3 IRUWKHILUVWWLPH (J%XLOG-up
of pressure after switching on a pump).
5 = 0 ± 10V with error 2, "0 ± 10V with switch-RIIRQHUURU³:
See Setting 4 ("0 - 10V with switch-off on error ³ KRZHYHU
With this setting, the monitoring function is active if there is an enable signal and
suppression time for the error monitoring has expired. This suppression time is set in
parameter (P216).
196 Subject to technical alterations BU 0200 GB-4411
414
6 Parameterisation
Parameter Parameter
Setting value / Description / Note Device Supervisor
{Factory setting} set
P402 [-01]
Adjust: 0%
... S
(Analog input adjustment: 0%)
[-06]
-50.00 ... 50.00 V [-01] = Ext analog in 1, "External analog input 1", AIN1 of the first I/O extension
(SK xU4-IOE).
{ all 0.00 }
[-02] = Ext analog in 2, "External analog input 2", AIN2 of the first I/O extension
(SK xU4-IOE).
[-03] = Ext. A.in 1 2nd IOE, "External analog input 1 2nd IOE", AIN1 of the second I/O
extension (SK xU4-IOE) (= analog input 3).
[-04] = Ext. A.in 2 2nd IOE, "External analog input 2 2nd IOE", AIN1 of the second I/O
extension (SK xU4-IOE) (= analog input 4).
[-05] = Analog input 1, Analog input 1 (only SK 200E, SK 210E)
[-06] = Analog input 2, Analog input 2 (only SK 2x0E)
... only with This parameter sets the voltage which should correspond with the minimum value of the
SK CU4-IOE or selected function for the analog input 1 or 2. In the factory setting (setpoint) this value is
SK TU4-IOE equivalent to the setpoint set via P104 >Minimum frequency<.
Note
SK 2x0E
For the adjustment of the integrated analog inputs of the SK2x0E to the type of analog signals,
the following values must be set:
0 - 10V : 0.00 V
2 - 10V : 2.00 V
0 - 20mA : 0.00 V (Set internal resistance via DIP switch (Section: 5.2.2.2)!)
4 - 20mA : 1.00 V (Set internal resistance via DIP switch (Section: 5.2.2.2)!)
SK xU4-IOE
Standardisation to typical signals, such as 0(2)-10V or 0(4)-20mA is carried out via the
DIP switch on the I/O extension module. In this case, additional adjustment of
parameters (P402) and (P403) must not be carried out.
P403 [- 01]
Adjust: 100%
... S
(Analog input adjustment: 100%)
[- 06]
-50.00 ... 50.00 V [-01] = Ext analog in 1, "External analog input 1", AIN1 of the first I/O extension
(SK xU4-IOE).
{ all 10.00 }
[-02] = Ext analog in 2, "External analog input 2", AIN2 of the first I/O extension
(SK xU4-IOE).
[-03] = Ext. A.in 1 2nd IOE, "External analog input 1 2nd IOE", AIN1 of the second I/O
extension (SK xU4-IOE) (= analog input 3).
[-04] = Ext. A.in 2 2nd IOE, "External analog input 2 2nd IOE", AIN1 of the second I/O
extension (SK xU4-IOE) (= analog input 4).
[-05] = Analog input 1, Analog input 1 (only SK 200E, SK 210E)
[-06] = Analog input 2, Analog input 2 (only SK 2x0E)
... only with This parameter sets the voltage which should correspond with the maximum value of the
SK CU4-IOE or selected function for the analog input 1 or 2. In the factory setting (setpoint) this value is
SK TU4-IOE corresponds with the setpoint set via P105 >Maximum frequency<.
Note
SK 2x0E
For the adjustment of the integrated analog inputs of the SK2x0E to the type of analog signals,
the following values must be set:
0 - 10V : 10.00 V
2 - 10V : 10.00 V
0 - 20mA : 5.00 V (Set internal resistance via DIP switch (Section: 5.2.2.2)!)
4 - 20mA : 5.00 V (Set internal resistance via DIP switch (Section: 5.2.2.2)!)
SK xU4-IOE
BU 0200 GB-4411 Subject to technical alterations 197
415
SK 200E Manual for frequency inverters
Parameter Parameter
Setting value / Description / Note Device Supervisor
{Factory setting} set
Standardisation to typical signals, such as 0(2)-10V or 0(4)-20mA is carried out via the DIP
switch on the I/O extension module. In this case, additional adjustment of parameters (P402)
and (P403) must not be carried out.
P400 ... P403
Output Output
frequency frequency
P105 P105
positive positive
P104 P104
z.B. 0,0 V 2,5 V 5,0 V 10,0 V Setpoint z.B. 0,0 V 2,5 V 5,0 V 10,0 V Setpoint
voltage voltage
P402 P403 P402 P403
negative
P404 [-01] Analog input filter SK 2x0E
[-02] (Analog input filter)
Adjustable digital low-pass filter for the analog signal. Interference peaks are hidden, the
1 ... 400 ms reaction time is extended.
{ all 100 } [-01] = Analog input 1
[-02] = Analog input 2
Min. freq. a-in 1/2
P410 (Minimum frequency a-in 1/2 P
(auxiliary setpoint value))
-400.0 ... 400.0 Hz The minimum frequency that can act on the setpoint via the auxiliary setpoints.
{ 0.0 } Auxiliary setpoints are all frequencies which are additionally supplied for further functions in the
FI:
Frequency addition Frequency subtraction
Auxiliary setpoints via BUS PI process controller
PI controller Multiplication
Max. freq. a-in 1/2
P411 (Maximum frequency a-in 1/2 P
(auxiliary setpoint value))
-400.0 ... 400.0 Hz The maximum frequency that can act on the setpoint via the auxiliary setpoints.
{ 50.0 } Auxiliary setpoints are all frequencies which are additionally delivered for further functions in the
FI:
Frequency addition Frequency subtraction
Auxiliary setpoints via BUS PI process controller
PI controller Multiplication
198 Subject to technical alterations BU 0200 GB-4411
416
6 Parameterisation
Parameter Parameter
Setting value / Description / Note Device Supervisor
{Factory setting} set
P412 Nom. val. process ctrl. S P
(Nominal value process controller)
-10.0 ... 10.0 V Fixed specification of a setpoint for the process controller that will only occasionally be altered.
{ 5.0 } Only with P400 = 6 or 7 (PID process controller). Further technical details can be found in
Section 9.2.
P413 PI control P comp. S P
(P-component of PI controller)
0.0 ... 400.0 % This parameter is only effective when the function PI controller actual frequency is selected.
{ 10.0 } The P-component of the PI controller determines the frequency jump if there is a control
deviation based on the control difference.
For example: At a setting of P413 = 10% and a control difference of 50%, 5% is added to the
actual setpoint.
P414 PI control I comp. S P
(I-component of PI controller)
0.0 ... 3000.0 %/s This parameter is only effective when the function PI controller actual frequency is selected.
{ 10.0 } In case of a control deviation, the I-component of the PI controller determines the frequency
change, dependent on time.
Note: In contrast to other NORD series, parameter P414 is smaller by a factor of 100
(Reason: better setting ability with small I-components).
P415 Process control control limit S P
(Process controller control limit)
0 ... 400.0 % This parameter is only effective when the function PI process controller is selected. This
determines the control limit (%) after the PI controller.
{ 10.0 }
For further details, see Section 9.2.
P416 Ramptime PI setpoint S P
(Ramp time PI setpoint value)
0.00 ... 99.99 s This parameter is only effective when the function PI process controller is selected.
{ 2.00 } Ramp for PI setpoint
P417 [-01] Offset analog output S P
[-02] (Offset analog output)
-10.0 ... 10.0 V [-01] = First IOE, AOUT of the first I/O extension (SK xU4-IOE)
{ all 0.0 } [-02] = Second IOE, AOUT of the second I/O extension (SK xU4-IOE)
... only with In the analog output function an offset can be entered to simplify the processing of the analog
SK CU4-IOE or signal in other equipment.
SK TU4-IOE
If the analog output has been programmed with a digital function, then the difference between
the switch-on point and the switch-off point can be set in this parameter (hysteresis).
P418 [-01] Function Analog out S P
[-02] (Analog output function)
0 ... 33 [-01] = First IOE, AOUT of the first I/O extension (SK xU4-IOE)
{ all 0 } [-02] = Second IOE, AOUT of the second I/O extension (SK xU4-IOE)
BU 0200 GB-4411 Subject to technical alterations 199
417
SK 200E Manual for frequency inverters
Parameter Parameter
Setting value / Description / Note Device Supervisor
{Factory setting} set
... only with Analog functions (max. load: 5mA analog):
SK CU4-IOE or
SK TU4-IOE An analog (0 ...+10 Volt) voltage can be obtained from the control terminals (max. 5mA).
Various functions are available, whereby:
0 Volt analog voltage always corresponds to 0% of the selected value.
10 V always corresponds to the motor nominal values (unless otherwise stated) multiplied by
the P419 standardisation factor, e.g.:
Motor nominalvalue P419
10Volt
100%
For standardisation of actual values: See also (Section 9.10).
0 = No function, no output signal at the terminals.
1 = Actual frequency*, the analog voltage is proportional to the FI output frequency.
(100%=(P201))
2 = Actual speed*, this is the synchronous speed calculated by the FI based on the existing
setpoint. Load-dependent speed fluctuations are not taken into account.
If Servo mode is being used, the measured speed will be output via this function.
(100%=(P202))
3 = Current*, the effective value of the output current supplied by the FI. (100%=(P203))
4 = Torque current*, displays the motor load torque calculated by the FI. (100% = (P112))
5 = Voltage*, the output voltage supplied by the FI. (100%=(P204))
6 = Link voltage, "Link circuit voltage", is the DC voltage in the FI. This is not based on the
nominal motor data. 10V Volt, standardised at 100%, is equivalent to 450V DC (230V
mains) or 850 Volt DC (480V mains)!
7 = Value of P542, the analog output can be set using parameter P542 independently of the
actual operating status of the FI. For example, with Bus switching (parameter
command) this function can supply an analog value from the FI, which is triggered by
the control unit.
8 = Apparent power*, the actual apparent power calculated by the FI.
(10 3 3 UHVSHFWLYHO\ 3 3 ¥
9 = Real power *, the actual effective power calculated by the FI.
3 3 3 UHVSHFWLYHO\ 3 3 3 ¥
10 = Torque [%]: the actual torque calculated by the FI (100%=Nominal motor torque).
11 = Field [%]*, the actual field in the motor calculated by the FI.
12 = Actual frequency ±*, the analog voltage is proportional to the output frequency of the FI,
whereby the zero point is shifted to 5V. For rotation to the right, values between 5V and
10V are output, and for rotation to the left values between 5V and 0V.
13 = Speed ±*, "Actual motor speed", is the synchronic speed calculated by the FI, based on
the current setpoint, where the null point is shifted to 5V. For clockwise directions of
rotation, values from 5 - 10V are output. For anticlockwise rotation, values from 5V - 0V.
If servo mode is used, the measured speed is output via this function.
14 = Torque [%] ±*, is the actual torque calculated by the FI, whereby the zero point is shifted
to 5V. For drive torques, values between 5V and 10V are output, and for generator
torque, values between 5V and 0V.
30 = Set freq befor ramp, "Setpoint frequency before frequency ramp", displays the
frequency produced by any upstream controllers (ISD, PID, etc.). This is then the
setpoint frequency for the power stage after it has been adjusted by the acceleration or
braking ramp (P102, P103).
31 = Output via BUS PZD, the analog output is controlled via a bus system. The process
data is directly transferred (P546, P547, P548).
32 = Setpoint freq. Motor poti., "Setpoint frequency of motor potentiometer"
9DOXHVEDVHGRQWKHPRWRUGDWD 3« RUZKLFKDUHFDOFXODWHGIURPWKLV
200 Subject to technical alterations BU 0200 GB-4411
418
6 Parameterisation
Parameter Parameter
Setting value / Description / Note Device Supervisor
{Factory setting} set
P419 [-01] Standard. Analog out S P
[-02] (Scaling of analog output)
-500 ... 500 % [-01] = First IOE, AOUT of the first I/O extension (SK xU4-IOE)
{ all 100 } [-02] = Second IOE, AOUT of the second I/O extension (SK xU4-IOE)
... only with Using this parameter an adjustment can be made to the analog output for the selected operating
SK CU4-IOE or zone. The maximum analog output (10V) corresponds to the standardisation value of the
SK TU4-IOE appropriate selection.
If therefore, at a constant working point, this parameter is raised from 100% to 200%, the analog
output voltage is halved. 10 Volt output signal then corresponds to twice the nominal value.
For negative values the logic is reversed. An actual value of 0% will then produce 10V at the
output and -100% will produce 0V.
P420 [-01]
Digit inputs
...
(Digital input functions)
[-04]
0 ... 72 In the SK 2xxE, up to 4 freely programmable digital inputs are available. The only restriction is
with the versions SK 21xE and SK 23xE. Here, the fourth digital input is always the input for the
{ [-01]= 1 } function "Safe Stop".
{ [-02] = 2 } [-01] = Digital input 1 (DIN1), Enable right as factory setting,
{ [-03] = 4 } control terminal 21
{ [-04] = 5 } [-02] = Digital input 2 (DIN2), Enable left as factory setting,
control terminal 22
[-03] = Digital input 3 (DIN3), Fixed frequency 1 (P465 [-01]) as factory setting,
control terminal 23
[-04] = Digital input 4 (DIN4), Fixed frequency 2 (P465 [-02]) as factory setting, not with SK
215/235E Æ"Safe Stop", control terminal 24
Various functions can be programmed. These can be seen in the following table.
By means of an OR link of the parameterised functions and the rotary encoder evaluation, which is
always active in the inverter, it is essential to switch off the functions of the digital inputs DIN 2 and
DIN 3 for the use of a rotary encoder (Parameter (P420 [-02, -03])).
The additional digital inputs of the I/O- extensions (SK xU4-IOE) are administered via the
parameter "Bus I/O In Bit (« ³- (P480 [-@«>-08]) for the first I/O extension, and via the
SDUDPHWHU%XV,2,Q%LW « - (P480 [-@«>-04]) for the second I/O extension.
List of the possible functions of the digital inputs P420 [01]... [-04]
Value Function Description Signal
00 No function Input switched off. ---
01 Enabled right The FI delivers an output signal with the rotation field right if a High
positive setSRLQWLVSUHVHQW:)ODQN 3
02 Enable left The FI delivers an output signal with the rotation field left if a High
SRVLWLYHVHWSRLQWLVSUHVHQW:)ODQN 3
If the drive is to start up automatically when the mains is switched on (P428 = 1) a permanent High level for
enabling must be provided (supply terminal 21 with 24V).
If the functions "Enable right" and "Enable left" are actuated simultaneously, the FI is blocked.
If the frequency inverter is in fault status but the cause of the fault no longer exists, the error message is
acknowledged with a :IODQN.
03 Phase seq. reversal Causes the rotation field to change direction in combination with High
(Change rotation direction) Enable right or left.
...continued on the next page
1
04 Fixed frequency 1 The frequency from P465 [01] is added to the actual setpoint value. High
BU 0200 GB-4411 Subject to technical alterations 201
419
SK 200E Manual for frequency inverters
Value Function Description Signal
1
05 Fixed frequency 2 The frequency from P465 [02] is added to the actual setpoint value. High
1
06 Fixed frequency 3 The frequency from P465 [03] is added to the actual setpoint value. High
1
07 Fixed frequency 4 The frequency from P465 [04] is added to the actual setpoint value. High
If several fixed frequencies are actuated simultaneously, then they are added with the correct sign. In addition,
the analog setpoint (P400) and if required, the minimum frequency (P104) are added.
08 Param set switching 6HOHFWLRQRIWKHDFWLYHSDUDPHWHUVHW« 3 High
"Parameter set switchover 1"
09 Maintain the freq During the acceleration or deceleration phase, a Low level will
"Maintain the frequency" cause the actual output frequency to be "held". A High level allows Low
the ramp to proceed.
2
10 Voltage disable The FI output voltage is switched off; the motor runs down freely. Low
2
11 Quick stop The FI reduces the frequency according to the programmed quick
Low
stop time (P426).
2
12 Fault acknowledgem Error acknowledgement with an external signal. If this function is
"Fault acknowledgement" 0Æ1
not programmed, a fault can also be acknowledged by a low
Flank
enable setting (P506).
2
13 PTC resistor input Only with the use of a temperature monitor (bimetal switching
High
contact). Switch-off delay = 2sec, warning after 1 sec.
2
14 Remote control With bus system control, low level switches the control to control
High
via control terminals.
1
15 Jog frequency The fixed frequency value can be adjusted using the
HIGHER/LOWER and OK keys (P113), if control is via the High
SimpleBox or ParameterBox.
16 Motor potentiometer As in setting 09, however, the frequency is not maintained below
the minimum frequency P104 and above the maximum frequency Low
P105.
17 ParaSetSwitching 2
6HOHFWLRQRIWKHDFWLYHSDUDPHWHUVHW« 3 High
"Parameter set switchover 2"
2
18 Watchdog Input must see a high flank cyclically (P460), otherwise error E012 0Æ1
will cause a shutdown. Function starts with the 1st High flank. Flank
19 Setpoint 1 on/off Analog input switch-on and switch-off 1/2 (high = ON) of the first High
I/O extension. The low signal sets the analog input to 0% which
20 Setpoint 2 on/off does not lead to shutdown when the minimum frequency (P104) >
High
than the absolute minimum frequency (P505).
21 ...25 reserved for Posicon
26
(P420 [-02]) and 3 (P420 [-03])
Analog function
These functions can only be
Via DIN 2 and DIN 3impulses which are proportional to an analog
used for the digital inputs 2
and not with SK 2x0E S 4!
Dig2+3
("0-10V") signal can be evaluated with this setting. The function of this
signal is determined in parameter P400 R [-06] or [-07].
27 The conversion 0-10V to impulses can be carried out via the Impulses
Analog function Customer Unit SK CU/TU4-24V-... This module includes an
2-10V Dig2+3 analog input and an impulse output (ADC). §-
16kHz
In setting { 28 } a reversal of the direction of rotation takes place
28 with an analog value <5V.
Analog function
5-10V Dig2+3 An application example is described in Section 3.4.2.
30 Inhibit PID Switching the PID controller / process controller function on and
High
off (High = ON)
2
31 Inhibit turn right Blocks the >Enable right/left< via a digital input or Bus control. Low
2
Does not depend on the actual direction of rotation of the motor
32 Inhibit turn left (e.g. following negated setpoint). Low
33 ... 44 reserved
...continued on the next page
202 Subject to technical alterations BU 0200 GB-4411
420
6 Parameterisation
Value Function Description Signal
45 3-W-Ctrl. Start-Right
0Æ1
³-Wire-Control Start-5LJKW´
(Closing button) Flank
This control function provides an alternative to enable R/L (01/ 02),
46 3-W-Ctrl Start-Left in which a permanently applied level is required. 0Æ1
³-Wire-Control Start-/HIW´
(Closing button) Here, only a control impulse is required to trigger the function. The Flank
control of the FI can therefore be performed entirely with buttons.
49 3-Wire-Ctrl. Stop
1Æ0
³-Wire-&RQWURO6WRS´
Flank
(Opening button)
47 Motorpot. Freq. + In combination with enable R/L the output frequency can be
"Motor potentiometer frequency +" continuously varied. To save a current value in P113, both inputs High
must be at a High voltage for 0.5s. This value then applies as the
48 Motorpot. Freq. - next starting value for the same direction of rotation (Enable R/L)
High
"Motor potentiometer frequency -" otherwise start at fMIN.
50 Bit 0 Fixed frequency array High
51 Bit 1 Fixed frequency array Binary coded digital inputs to generate up to 15 fixed frequencies. High
52 Bit 2 Fixed frequency array (P465: [-01] ... [-15]) High
53 Bit 3 Fixed frequency array High
55 «UHVHUYHGIRU3RVLFRQÆBU 0210
2
65 Man/auto release brake The brake is automatically released by the frequency inverter
"Release brake manually/ (automatic brake control) if this digital input has been set. High
automatically"
2
66 Man. release brake The brake is only released of the digital input is set.
High
"Release brake manually"
67 Dig.out. man/auto set Set digital output 1 manually, or via the function set in (P434)
"Set digital output manually / High
automatically"
68 Dig.out. man. set Set digital output 1 manually
High
"Set digital output manually"
69 Speed meas. with ini. Simple speed measurement (impulse measurement) with initiator
"Speed measurement with Impulses
initiator"
70 Evacuation run This also provides the possibility of operation with a very low link
"Activate evacuation run" circuit voltage (e.g. using batteries). With this function the charging
relay is activated and the undervoltage and phase error detection High
are deactivated.
ATTENTION! There is no overload monitoring! (e.g. lifting gear)
71 Motorpot.F+ and Save With this motor potentiometer function, a setpoint value is set and
"Motor potentiometer function saved via the digital inputs. With control enabling R/L this is then
Frequency + with automatic started up in the correspondingly enabled direction. On change of
saving" direction the frequency is retained. High
Simultaneous activation of the +/- function causes the frequency
setpoint value to be set to zero.
The frequency setpoint value can also be displayed or set in the
Motorpot.F- and Save operating value display (P001=30, current setpoint MP-S) or in P718.
72
Any minimum frequency set (P104) is still effective. Other setpoint
"Motor potentiometer function
Frequency - with automatic values, e.g. analog or fixed frequencies can be added or subtracted. High
saving" The adjustment of the frequency setpoint value is performed with
the ramps from P102/103.
73 ² Inhibit right+ Quick
As for setting 31, but coupled to the "Quick Stop" function. Low
"Inhibit turn right+ Quick Stop"
74 ² Inhibit left+ Quick
As for setting 32, but coupled to the "Quick Stop" function. Low
"Inhibit turn left+ Quick Stop"
...continued on the next page
BU 0200 GB-4411 Subject to technical alterations 203
421
SK 200E Manual for frequency inverters
Value Function Description Signal
75 Dig.out. 2 man/auto set
"Set digital output 2 manually / au- As for function 67, however for digital output 2 (only SK 2x0E) High
tomatically"
76 Dig.out. 2 man. set
As for function 68, however for digital output 2 (only SK 2x0E) High
"Set digital output 2 manually"
1
If neither of the digital inputs is programmed for left or right enable, then the actuation of a fixed frequency or jog frequency will
enable the frequency inverter. The rotation field direction depends on the sign of the setpoint.
2
Also effective for Bus control (RS232, RS485, CANbus, CANopen, DeviceNet, Profibus, InterBus, AS-Interface)
3
With SK 2x5 devices the frequency inverter control unit must be supplied with power for a further 5 minutes after the last change
to the motor potentiometer in order to permanently save the data.
4
Function cannot be selected via BUS IO In Bits
Parameter Parameter
Setting value / Description / Note Device Supervisor
{Factory setting} set
P426 Quick stop time S P
(Quick stop time)
0 ... 320.00 s Setting of the stop time for the quick stop function that can be triggered either via a digital input,
the bus control, the keyboard or automatically in case of a fault.
{ 0.10 }
Quick stop time is the time for the linear frequency decrease from the set maximum frequency
(P105) to 0Hz. If an actual setpoint <100% is being used, the quick stop time is reduced
correspondingly.
P427 Quick stop on error S
(Emergency stop on error)
0 ... 2 Activation of automatic emergency stop following error
{0} 0 = Disabled: Automatic quick stop following error is deactivated
1 = reserved
2 = Enabled: Automatic quick stop following fault
P428 Automatic starting S
(Automatic starting)
0 ... 1 In the standard setting (P428 = 0 Æ Off) the inverter requires a flank for enable (signal change
from "Low Æ High") at the applicable digital input.
{0}
In the setting On Æ 1 the FI reacts to a High level. This function is only possible if the FI is
controlled using the digital inputs. (see P509=0/1)
In certain cases, the FI must start up directly when the mains are switched on. This means that
P428 = 1 Æ On can be set. If the enable signal is permanently switched on, or equipped with a
cable jumper, the FI starts up immediately.
NOTE: The "Automatic start" function can only be used if a digital input of the frequency
inverter (DIN «',1 4) is parameterised to the function "Enable right" or "Enable
left" and this input is permanently set to "High". The digital inputs of the
Technology Unit modules (e.g.: SK CU4 - IOE) do not support this "automatic start"
function.
NOTE: The "Automatic start" can only be activated if the frequency inverter has been
parameterised to local control ((P509) setting { 0 } or { 1} ).
204 Subject to technical alterations BU 0200 GB-4411
422
6 Parameterisation
Parameter Parameter
Setting value / Description / Note Device Supervisor
{Factory setting} set
P434 [-01] Digital output function
[-02] (Function of digital outputs)
0 ... 39 [-01] = Digital output 1, Digital output 1 of the frequency inverter
{7} [-02] = Digital output 2, Digital output 2 of the frequency inverter (only SK 2x0E)
Control terminals 1/40 (Section 2.8.2): The settings 3 to 5 and 11 work with 10% hysteresis,
i.e. the relay contact closes (function 11 does not deliver) on reaching the limiting value 24V and
switches this off again if a 10% lower value is undershot (function 11 on again).
This behaviour can be inverted with a negative value in P435.
Output ...
Setting / Function for limiting value
or function
(see also P435)
0 = No function Low
1 = External brake, to control an external 24V brake relay (max. 200mA).
The relay switches at a programmed absolute minimum frequency
(P505).
For typical brakes a setpoint delay of 0.2-0.3sec should be High
programmed (see also P107/P114).
A typical motor brake (105-180-205V) can be connected directly via
the control terminals 79 MB+/80 MB- (Section 2.8.2).
2 = Inverter is working, the output indicates voltage at the FI output
High
(U - V - W).
3 = Current limit, based on the setting of the motor rated current in (P203).
High
This value can be adjusted with the standardisation (P435).
4 = Torque current limit, based on motor data settings in P203 and P206.
Signals a corresponding torque load on the motor. This value can be High
adjusted with the standardisation (P435).
5 = Frequency limit, based on motor nominal frequency setting in P201.
High
This value can be adjusted with the standardisation (P435).
6 = Level with setpoint (Setpoint reached), indicates that the FI has
completed the frequency increase or decrease. Setpoint frequency =
High
actual frequency! From a difference of 1 Hz Æ Setpoint value not
achieved ± signal Low.
7 = Fault, general error message, error is active or not yet acknowledged.
Low
Æ Error ± Low (Ready ± High)
8 = Warning: general warning, a limit value was reached that could lead to
Low
a later shutdown of the FI.
9 = Overcurrent warning: At least 130% of the nominal FI current was
Low
supplied for 30 seconds.
10 = Overtemp. Warn. Motor, "Motor overtemperature warning": The motor
temperature is evaluated. Æ Motor is too hot. Warning occurs Low
immediately, overheating switch-off after 2 seconds.
11 = Torque curr. lim. active, "Torque current limit / Current limit active
warning": The limiting value in P112 or P536 has been reached. A Low
negative value in P435 inverts the reaction. Hysteresis = 10%.
12 = Value of P541, "Value of P541 - external control": The output can be
controlled with parameter P541 (Bit 0) independent of the actual High
operating status of the FI.
13 = Torq curr limit gen, "Generator torque limit active":
Limit value in P112 has been reached in the generator range. High
Hysteresis = 10%.
BU 0200 GB-4411 Subject to technical alterations 205
423
SK 200E Manual for frequency inverters
Parameter Parameter
Setting value / Description / Note Device Supervisor
{Factory setting} set
16 = Reference value Ain1,
SK 2x0E:
Setpoint AIN1 of the FI is compared with the value in
(P435[-01 or -02]).
SK 2x5E: Setpoint AIN1 of the 1st IO extension is compared with the
value in (P435[-01]).
17 = Reference value Ain2,
SK 2x0E:
Setpoint AIN2 of the FI is compared with the value in
(P435[-01 or -02]).
SK 2x5E: Setpoint AIN2 of the 1st IO extension is compared with the
value in (P435[-01]).
18 = Inverter ready: The FI is in standby state. After being enabled it gives
High
an output signal.
19 = ... 29 reserved For Posicon functions see BU 0210
30 = Status Digital-In 1* High Details for the
use of the bus
31 = Status Digital-In 2* High systems can be
32 = Status Digital-In 3* High found in the
relevant
33 = Status Digital-In 4* High supplementary
bus manual.
39 = STO inactive *
High
*) (P546[-@«>-03]) = 20
P435 [-01] Dig. out. scaling
[-02] (Scaling of digital outputs)
-400 ... 400 % [-01] = Digital output 1, Digital output 1 of the frequency inverter
{ 100 } [-02] = Digital output 2, Digital output 2 of the frequency inverter (only SK 2x0E)
Adjustment of the limit values of the output function. For a negative value, the output function
will be output negative.
Reference to the following values:
Current limit (3) = x [%] P203 >Rated motor current<
Torque current limit (4) = x [%] P203 P206 (calculated rated motor torque)
Frequency limit (5) = x [%] P201 >Rated motor frequency<
P436 [-01] Dig. out. hysteresis S
[-02] (Hysteresis of digital outputs)
0 ... 100 % [-01] = Digital output 1, Digital output 1 of the frequency inverter
{ 10 } [-02] = Digital output 2, Digital output 2 of the frequency inverter (only SK 2x0E)
Difference between switch-on and switch-off point to prevent oscillation of the output signal.
P460 Watchdog time S
(Time watchdog)
0.0 / 0.1 ... 250.0 s 0.1 ... 250.0 = The time interval between the expected watchdog signals (programmable
function of digital inputs P420 ± P425). If this time interval elapses without a
{ 10.0 } pulse being registered, switch off and error message E012 are actuated.
0.0 = Customer error: As soon as a high-low flank or a low signal is detected at a digital
input (function 18) the FI switches off with error message E012.
206 Subject to technical alterations BU 0200 GB-4411
424
6 Parameterisation
Parameter Parameter
Setting value / Description / Note Device Supervisor
{Factory setting} set
P464 Fixed frequency mode S
(Fixed frequency mode)
0 ... 1 This parameter determines the form in which fixed frequencies are to be processed.
{0} 0 = Add main set, "Addition to main setpoint": (Addition of the fixed frequency to the main
setpoint) Fixed frequencies and the fixed frequency array are added to each other. I.e.
they are added together, or added to an analog setpoint to which limits are assigned
according to P104 and P105.
1 = Equal main set value, "Equal to main setpoint value": (No addition / Fixed frequency is
main setpoint) Fixed frequencies are not added - neither to each other nor to the analog
setpoints.
For example, if a fixed frequency is switched to an existing analog setpoint, the analog
setpoint is no longer taken into account.
However, a programmed frequency addition or subtraction to one of the analog inputs
or bus setpoints remains possible and valid.
If several fixed frequencies are selected simultaneously, the frequency with the highest
value applies (e.g.: 20>10 or 20>-30)
P465 [-01]
Fixed freq. Array
...
(Fixed frequency / Array)
[-15]
-400.0 ... 400.0 Hz In the array levels, up to 31 different fixed frequencies can be set, which in turn can be encoded
IRUWKHIXQFWLRQV«LQELQDU\FRGHIRUWKHGLJLWDOLQSXWV
{ [-01] = 5.0 }
[-01] = Fixed frequency 1 / Array 1 [-09] = Fixed frequency / Array 9
{ [-02] = 10.0 }
[-02] = Fixed frequency 2 / Array 2 [-10] = Fixed frequency / Array 10
{ [-03] = 20.0 }
[-03] = Fixed frequency 3 / Array 3 [-11] = Fixed frequency / Array 11
{ [-04] = 35.0 }
[-04] = Fixed frequency 4 / Array 4 [-12] = Fixed frequency / Array 12
{ [-05] = 50.0 }
[-05] = Fixed frequency / Array 5 [-13] = Fixed frequency / Array 13
{ [-06] = 70.0 }
[-06] = Fixed frequency / Array 6 [-14] = Fixed frequency / Array 14
{ [-07] = 100.0 }
[-07] = Fixed frequency / Array 7 [-15] = Fixed frequency / Array 15
{ [-08] = 0.0 }
[-08] = Fixed frequency / Array 8
{ [-09] = -5.0 }
{ [-10] = -10.0 }
{ [-11] = -20.0 }
{ [-12] = -35.0 }
{ [-13] = -50.0 }
{ [-14] = -70.0 }
{ [-15] = -100.0 }
P466 Min. freq. proc. ctrl. S P
(Minimum frequency process controller)
-400.0 ... 400.0 Hz With the aid of the minimum frequency process controller the control ratio can also be kept to a
PLQLPXP UDWLR HYHQ ZLWK D PDVWHU YDOXH RI ³]HUR´ LQ RUGHU WR HQDEOH DGMXVWPHQW RI the
{ 0.0 } compensator. Further details in P400 and Section 9.2.
BU 0200 GB-4411 Subject to technical alterations 207
425
SK 200E Manual for frequency inverters
Parameter Parameter
Setting value / Description / Note Device Supervisor
{Factory setting} set
P475 [-01]
Delay on/off switch
... S
(Digital function switch on/off delay)
[-04]
-30.000 ... 30,000 s Adjustable switch-on/switch-off delay for the digital inputs. Use as a switch-on filter or simple
process control is possible.
{ 0.000 }
[-01] = Digital input 1
[-02] = Digital input 2 Positive values = switch-on delayed
[-03] = Digital input 3 Negative values = switch-off delayed
[-04] = Digital input 4
P480 [-01]
Funct. BusIO In Bits
...
(Function Bus I/O In Bits)
[-12]
0 ... 72 The Bus I/O In Bits are perceived as digital inputs. They can be set to the same functions
(P420).
{ [-01] = 01 }
These I/O bits can also be used in combination with the AS Interface (SK 225E or SK 235E)
{ [-02] = 02 } %LW« or the I/O extension (SK xU4-,2( %LW«DQG%LW«
{ [-03] = 05 } [-01] = Bus / AS-i Dig In1 (Bus IO In Bit 0 + AS-i 1 or DI 1 of the second SK xU4-IOE (DigIn 09))
{ [-04] = 12 } [-02] = Bus / AS-i Dig In2 (Bus IO In Bit 1 + AS-i 2 or DI 2 of the second SK xU4-IOE (DigIn 10))
{ [-05...-12] = 00 } [-03] = Bus / AS-i Dig In3 (Bus IO In Bit 2 + AS-i 3 or DI 3 of the second SK xU4-IOE (DigIn 11))
[-04] = Bus / AS-i Dig In4 (Bus IO In Bit 3 + AS-i 4 or. DI 4 of the second SK xU4-IOE (DigIn 12))
[-05] = Bus / IOE Dig In1 (Bus IO In Bit 4 + DI 1 of the first SK xU4-IOE (DigIn 05))
[-06] = Bus / IOE Dig In2 (Bus IO In Bit 5 + DI 2 of the first SK xU4-IOE (DigIn 06))
[-07] = Bus / IOE Dig In3 (Bus IO In Bit 6 + DI 3 of the first SK xU4-IOE (DigIn 07))
[-08] = Bus / IOE Dig In4 (Bus IO In Bit 7 + DI 4 of the first SK xU4-IOE (DigIN 08))
[-09] = Flag 1
[-10] = Flag 2
[-11] = Bit 8 BUS control word
[-12] = Bit 9 BUS control word
The possible functions for the Bus In Bits can be found in the table of functions for the digital
inputs in parameter (P420). Function {14} "Remote control" is not possible.
208 Subject to technical alterations BU 0200 GB-4411
426
6 Parameterisation
Parameter Parameter
Setting value / Description / Note Device Supervisor
{Factory setting} set
P481 [-01]
Funct Bus I/O Out Bits
...
(Function of Bus I/O Out Bits)
[-10]
0 ... 39 The Bus I/O Out Bits are perceived as multi-function relay outputs. They can be set to the same
functions (P434).
{ [-01] = 18 }
These I/O bits can also be used in combination with the AS Interface (SK 22xE or SK 23xE)
{ [-02] = 08 } %LW« RUWKe I/O extension (SK xU4-,2( %LW«DQGIODJ«
{ [-03] = 30 }
[-01] = Bus / AS-i Dig Out1 (Bus IO Out Bit 0 + AS-i 1)
{ [-04] = 31 }
[-02] = Bus / AS-i Dig Out2 (Bus IO Out Bit 1 + AS-i 2)
{ [-05...-10] = 00 }
[-03] = Bus / AS-i Dig Out3 (Bus IO Out Bit 2 + AS-i 3)
[-04] = Bus / AS-i Dig Out4 (Bus IO Out Bit 3 + AS-i 4)
[-05] = Bus / IOE Dig Out1 (Bus IO In Bit 4 + DO 1 of the first SK xU4-IOE (DigOut 02))
[-06] = Bus / IOE Dig Out2 (Bus IO In Bit 5 + DO 2 of the first SK xU4-IOE (DigOut 03))
[-07] = Bus / 2nd IOE Dig Out1 (Flag 1 + DO 1 of the second SK xU4-IOE (DigOut 04))
[-08] = Bus / 2nd IOE Dig Out2 (Flag 2 + DO 2 of the second SK xU4-IOE (DigOut 05))
[-09] = Bit 10 BUS status word
[-10] = Bit 13 BUS status word
The possible functions for the Bus Out Bits can be found in the table of functions for the digital
outputs (P434).
P482 [-01]
Norm. BusIO Out Bits
...
(Scaling of bus I/O Out bits)
[-10]
-« Adjustment of the limit values of the limit values of the Bus Out bits. For a negative value, the
output function will be output negative.
{ all 100 }
If the limit value is reached and the set values are positive, the output gives a High signal. If the
set values are negative, the signal is Low.
[-01] = Bus / AS-i Dig Out1 (Bus IO Out Bit 0 + AS-i 1)
[-02] = Bus / AS-i Dig Out2 (Bus IO Out Bit 1 + AS-i 2)
[-03] = Bus / AS-i Dig Out3 (Bus IO Out Bit 2 + AS-i 3)
[-04] = Bus / AS-i Dig Out4 (Bus IO Out Bit 3 + AS-i 4)
[-05] = Bus / IOE Dig In1 (Bus IO In Bit 4 + DO 1 of the first SK xU4-IOE (DigOut 02))
[-06] = Bus / IOE Dig Out2 (Bus IO In Bit 5 + DO 2 of the first SK xU4-IOE (DigOut 03))
[-07] = Bus / 2nd IOE Dig Out1 (Flag 1 + DO 1 of the second SK xU4-IOE (DigOut 04))
[-08] = Bus / 2nd IOE Dig Out2 (Flag 2 + DO 2 of the second SK xU4-IOE (DigOut 05))
[-09] = Bit 10 BUS status word
[-10] = Bit 13 BUS status word
BU 0200 GB-4411 Subject to technical alterations 209
427
SK 200E Manual for frequency inverters
Parameter Parameter
Setting value / Description / Note Device Supervisor
{Factory setting} set
P483 [-01]
Hyst. BusIO Out Bits
... S
(Hysteresis of bus I/O Out bits)
[-10]
« Difference between switch-on and switch-off point to prevent oscillation of the output signal.
{ all 10 }
[-01] = Bus / AS-i Dig Out1 (Bus IO Out Bit 0 + AS-i 1)
[-02] = Bus / AS-i Dig Out2 (Bus IO Out Bit 1 + AS-i 2)
[-03] = Bus / AS-i Dig Out3 (Bus IO Out Bit 2 + AS-i 3)
[-04] = Bus / AS-i Dig Out4 (Bus IO Out Bit 3 + AS-i 4)
[-05] = Bus / IOE Dig In1 (Bus IO In Bit 4 + DO 1 of the first SK xU4-IOE (DigOut 02))
[-06] = Bus / IOE Dig Out2 (Bus IO In Bit 5 + DO 2 of the first SK xU4-IOE (DigOut 03))
[-07] = Bus / 2nd IOE Dig Out1 (Flag 1 + DO 1 of the second SK xU4-IOE (DigOut 04))
[-08] = Bus / 2nd IOE Dig Out2 (Flag 2 + DO 2 of the second SK xU4-IOE (DigOut 05))
[-09] = Bit 10 BUS status word
[-10] = Bit 13 BUS status word
NOTE: Details for the use of the bus systems can be found in the relevant supplementary bus manual.
210 Subject to technical alterations BU 0200 GB-4411
428
429
SK 200E Manual for frequency inverters
Parameter Parameter
Setting value / Description / Note Device Supervisor
{Factory setting} set
P503 Leading func. output S
(Master function output)
0 ... 3 For master-slave applications this parameter specifies on which bus system the master trans-
mits the control word and the master values (P502) for the slave. On the slave, parameters
{0} (P509), (P510), (P546 ) define the source from which the slave obtains the control word and
the master values from the master and how these are to be processed by the slave.
Specification of the communication modes on the system bus for ParameterBox and
NORD CON.
The definition of the master value or values is carried out in parameter P502.
0 = Off
No control word and master value
output. 2 = System bus active
If no BUS option (e.g. SK xU4-IOE) No control word and master value
is connected to the system bus, only output.
the device directly connected to the All FIs connected to the system bus
ParameterBox or Nord Con is are visible in the ParameterBox or
visible. Nord Con, even if no bus option is
connected. Prerequisite: all FIs must
1 = CANopen (system bus) be set to this mode.
Control word and master values are
transferred to the system bus. 3 = CANopen + System bus active
If no bus option (e.g. SK xU4-IOE) is Control word and master values are
connected to the system bus, only transferred to the system bus.
the device directly connected to the All FIs connected to the system bus
ParameterBox or Nord Con is are visible in the PameterBox or Nord
visible. Con, even if no bus option is
connected. Prerequisite: all other FIs
must be set to mode { 2 } "System bus
active"
P504 Pulse frequency S
(Pulse frequency)
3.0 ... 16.0 kHz The internal pulse frequency for actuating the power component can be changed with this
parameter. A higher setting reduces motor noise, but leads to increased EMC emissions and
{ 6.0 } reduction of the possible motor nominal torque.
NOTE: The radio interference suppression limiting curve A1 according to EN55011 is
complied with at a setting of 6.0kHz on condition that the wiring guidelines are
complied with. For further details, see Section 9.4 EMC limit value classes.
NOTE: Raising the pulse frequency leads to a reduction of the possible output current,
2
depending on the time (I t curve). For further details, see Section 9.5 Reduced
output power.
P505 Absolute mini. freq. S P
(Absolute minimum frequency)
0.0 ... 10.0 Hz Gives the frequency value that cannot be undershot by the FI. If the setpoint is smaller than the
absolute minimum frequency, the FI switches off or changes to 0.0Hz.
{ 2.0 }
At the absolute minimum frequency, braking control (P434) and the setpoint delay (P107) are
actuated. If a setting value of "Zero" is selected, the brake relay does not switch during
reversing.
When controlling lift equipment without speed feedback, this value should be set at a minimum
of 2Hz. From 2Hz, the current control of the FI operates and a connected motor can supply
sufficient torque.
NOTE: Output frequencies < 4.5Hz result in a reduced current overload capacity. For
further details, see Section 9.5 power derating.
212 Subject to technical alterations BU 0200 GB-4411
430
431
SK 200E Manual for frequency inverters
Parameter Parameter
Setting value / Description / Note Device Supervisor
{Factory setting} set
P511 USS baud rate S
(USS baud rate)
0 ... 3 Setting of the transfer rate (transfer speed) via the RS485 interface. All bus participants must
have the same baud rate setting.
{3}
0 = 4800 baud 2 = 19200 baud
1 = 9600 baud 3 = 38400 baud
P512 USS address
(USS address)
0 ... 30
Setting the FI Bus address.
{0}
P513 Telegram time-out S
(Telegram time out)
-0.1 / 0.0 / If the frequency inverter is directly controlled via the CAN protocol or via RS485, this
0.1 ... 100.0 s communication path can be monitored via parameter (P513). Following receipt of a valid
telegram, the next one must arrive within the set period. Otherwise the FI reports an error and
{ 0.0 } switches off with the error message E010 >Bus Time Out<.
The inverter monitors system bus communication via parameter (P120). Therefore parameter
(P513) must usually be left in the factory setting {0.0}. Parameter (P513) must only be set to {-
,0,1} if faults detected by the optional module (e.g. communication errors on the field bus level)
are not to result in the drive unit being switched off.
0.0 = Off: Monitoring is switched off.
-0.1 = No error: Even if the bus module detects an error, this does
not cause the frequency inverter to be switched off.
« On: Monitoring is activated.
P514 CAN bus baud rate S
(CAN bus baud rate)
0 ... 7 Setting of the transfer rate (transfer speed) via the system bus interface. All bus participants
must have the same baud rate setting.
{5}
Note:
Optional modules (SK xU4-« RQO\ RSHUDWH ZLWK D WUDQVIHU UDWH RI N%DXG 7KHUHIRUH WKH
frequency inverter must remain at the factory setting (250kBaud).
0 = 10kBaud 3 = 100kBaud 6 = 500kBaud
1 = 20kBaud 4 = 125kBaud 7 = 1Mbaud *
2 = 50kBaud 5 = 250kBaud
*) Reliable operation cannot be guaranteed
214 Subject to technical alterations BU 0200 GB-4411
432
6 Parameterisation
Parameter Parameter
Setting value / Description / Note Device Supervisor
{Factory setting} set
P515 [-01]
« CAN bus address S
... (CAN bus address)
[-03]
0 ... 255dec Setting of the system bus address.
{ all 32dec } [-01] = Slave address,system bus reception address
or { all 20hex } [-02] = Broadcast slave address, system bus reception address (slave)
[-03] = Broadcast master address, transmission address for system bus (master)
NOTE: If up to four SK 200E are to be linked via the system bus, the addresses must be set as follows
Æ FI1 = 32, FI2 = 34, FI3 = 36, FI4 = 38.
The system bus addresses should be set via the DIP switches S1:1/2 (Section 5.2.2.2).
P516 Skip frequency 1 S P
(Skip frequency 1)
0.0 ... 400.0 Hz The output frequency around the frequency value (P517) set here is masked.
{ 0.0 } This range is transmitted with the set brake and acceleration ramp; it cannot be continuously
supplied to the output. Frequencies below the absolute minimum frequency should not be set.
0.0 = Off: Masking frequency inactive
P517 Skip freq. area 1 S P
(Skip frequency area 1)
0.0 ... 50.0 Hz Masking range for the >Masking frequency 1< P516. This frequency value is added and
subtracted from the masking frequency.
{ 2.0 }
Masking frequency range 1: P516 - P517 to P516 + P517
P518 Skip frequency 2 S P
(Skip frequency 2)
0.0 ... 400.0 Hz The output frequency around the frequency value (P519) set here is masked.
{ 0.0 } This range is transmitted with the set brake and acceleration ramp; it cannot be continuously
supplied to the output. Frequencies below the absolute minimum frequency should not be set.
0.0 = Off: Masking frequency inactive
P519 Skip freq. area 2 S P
(Skip frequency area 2)
0.0 ... 50.0 Hz Masking range for the >Masking frequency 2< P518. This frequency value is added and
subtracted from the masking frequency.
{ 2.0 }
Masking frequency range 2: P518 - P519 to P518 + P519
BU 0200 GB-4411 Subject to technical alterations 215
433
SK 200E Manual for frequency inverters
Parameter Parameter
Setting value / Description / Note Device Supervisor
{Factory setting} set
P520 Flying start S P
(Flying start)
0 ... 4 This function is required to connect the FI to motors which are already rotating, e.g. in fan
drives. Motor frequencies >100Hz are only picked up in speed controlled mode (Servo mode
{0} P300 = ON).
0 = Switched off, no flying start.
1 = Both directions, the FI looks for a speed in both directions.
2 = Directio of setpoint, "In setpoint value direction", searches only in the direction of the
setpoint value which is present.
3 = Both dir after fault, "Both directions after failure", only after mains failure and fault
4 = Dir of set a fault, "In setpoint direction after fault", only after mains failure and fault
NOTE: For physical reasons, the flying start circuit only operates above 1/10 of the
nominal motor frequency (P201), however, not below 10Hz.
Example 1 Example 2
(P201) 50Hz 200Hz
f=1/10*(P201) f=5Hz f=20Hz
Comparison of f with fmin 5Hz < 10Hz 20Hz > 10Hz
with: fmin =10Hz
The flying start circuit The flying start circuit
Result fFly= functions above functions above
fFly=10Hz. fFly=20Hz.
P521 Fly. start resol. S P
(Flying start resolution)
0.02... 2.50 Hz Using this parameter, the flying start search increment size can be adjusted. Values that are
too large affect accuracy and causes the FI to cut out with an overcurrent report. If the values
{ 0.05 } are too small, the search time is greatly extended.
P522 Fly. start offset S P
(Flying start offset)
-10.0 ... 10.0 Hz A frequency value which is added to the frequency value found, e.g. to remain in the motor
range and so avoid the generator range and therefore the chopper range.
{ 0.0 }
P523 Factory setting
(Factory setting)
0 ... 3 By selecting the appropriate value and confirming it with the OK key, the selected parameter
range is entered in the factory setting. Once the setting has been made, the value of the
{0} parameter automatically returns to 0.
0 = No change:Does not change the parameterisation.
1 = Load factory setting: The complete parameterisation of the FI reverts to the factory
setting. All originally parameterised data is lost.
2 = Fact setng wout bus, "Factory setting without bus": All parameters of the frequency
inverter, but not the bus parameters, are reset to the factory setting.
3 = Factory set wo motor, "Factory setting without motor data": All parameters of the
frequency inverter, but not the motor data, are reset to the factory setting.
Note: ,I DQ H[WHUQDO ((3520 PHPRU\ PRGXOH³ LV SOXJJed in, then a value of ("Factory
VHWWLQJ « RQO\ DIIHFW WKLV ,I QR PHPRU\ PRGXOH LV SUHVHQW WKH VHW FRPPDQG
)DFWRU\VHWWLQJ« LVDSSOLHGWRWKHLQWHUQDO((3520 DVRIILUPZDUHYHUVLRQ9
216 Subject to technical alterations BU 0200 GB-4411
434
6 Parameterisation
Parameter Parameter
Setting value / Description / Note Device Supervisor
{Factory setting} set
P525 [-01]
Load control max
... S P
(Load monitoring maximum value)
[-03]
1 ... 400 % / 401 Selection of up to 3 auxiliary values:
{ all 401 } [-01] = Auxiliary value 1 [-02] = Auxiliary value 2 [-03] = Auxiliary value 3
From Firmware V1.3
Maximum load torque value.
Setting of the upper limit of load monitoring. Up to 3 values can be specified. Prefixes are not
taken into account, only the values are processed (motor / generator torque, right/left rotation).
The array elements [-01], [-02] and [-03] of parameters (3 « 3 RUWKHHQWULHVZKLFK
are made there always belong together.
401 = OFF Means that the function is switched off. No monitoring is performed. This is also
the basic setting for the FI.
P526 [-01]
Load control min
... S P
(Load monitoring, minimum value)
[-03]
0 ... 400 % Selection of up to 3 auxiliary values:
{ all 0 } [-01] = Auxiliary value 1 [-02] = Auxiliary value 2 [-03] = Auxiliary value 3
From Firmware V1.3
Minimum load torque.
Setting of the lower limit of load monitoring. Up to 3 values can be specified. Prefixes are not
taken into account, only the values are processed (motor / generator torque, right/left rotation).
The array elements [-01], [-02] and [-@RISDUDPHWHUV 3 « 3 , or the entries which
are made there always belong together.
0 = OFF Means that the function is switched off. No monitoring is performed. This is also
the basic setting for the FI.
P527 [-01]
Load control freq.
... S P
(Load monitoring frequency)
[-03]
Selection of up to 3 auxiliary values:
[-01] = Auxiliary value 1 [-02] = Auxiliary value 2 [-03] = Auxiliary value 3
0.0 ... 400.0 Hz
{ all 25.0 } Auxiliary frequency values
From Firmware V1.3 Definition of up to 3 frequency points, which define the monitoring range for load monitoring.
The auxiliary frequency values do not need to be entered in order of size. Prefixes are not
taken into account, only the integer values are processed (motor / generator torque, right/left
rotation). The array elements [-01], [-02] and [-@ RI SDUDPHWHUV 3 « 3 RU WKH
entries which are made there always belong together.
BU 0200 GB-4411 Subject to technical alterations 217
435
SK 200E Manual for frequency inverters
Parameter Parameter
Setting value / Description / Note Device Supervisor
{Factory setting} set
P528 Load control delay S P
(Load monitoring delay))
0.1 ... 320.0 s Parameter (P528) defines the delay time for which an error message ("E12.5") is suppressed
RQ LQIULQJHPHQW RI WKH GHILQHG PRQLWRULQJ UDQJH 3 « 3 $ ZDUQLQJ & LV
{ 2.0 } triggered after half of this time has elapsed.
From Firmware V1.3 According to the selected monitoring mode (P529) an error message can also be generally
suppressed.
P529 Mode Load control S P
(Load monitoring mode)
0 ... 3 The reaction of the frequency inverter to an infringement of the defined monitoring range
3 « 3 DIWHUWKHHODSVHRIWKHGHOD\WLPH 3 LVVSHFLILHGE\SDUDPHWHU 3
{0}
0 = Fault and warning, After the elapse of the time defined in (P528), an infringement of
From Firmware V1.3 the monitoring range produces a fault ""E12.5"). A warning ("C12.5") is given after the
elapse of half of this time.
1 = Warning only, After the elapse of half of the time defined in (P528) and infringement of
the monitoring range produces a warning ("C12.5").
2 = F a Warn during const, "Error and warning in constant travel", as for setting "0",
however monitoring is inactive during acceleration phases.
3 = Warning only during const, "Warning only during constant travel"DVIRUVHWWLQJ³
however, monitoring is inactive during acceleration phases.
218 Subject to technical alterations BU 0200 GB-4411
436
6 Parameterisation
Parameter Parameter
Setting value / Description / Note Device Supervisor
{Factory setting} set
3«3 Load monitoring
From Firmware With the load monitoring, a range can be specified within which the load torque may change
V1.3 depending on the output frequency. There are three auxiliary values for the maximum
permissible torque and three auxiliary values for the minimum permissible torque. A frequency
is assigned to each of these auxiliary values. No monitoring is carried out below the first and
above the third frequency. In addition, the monitoring can be deactivated for minimum and
maximum values. As standard, monitoring is deactivated.
Isq
P525 [-01]
P525 [-03]
P526 [-03]
P525 [-02]
P525 [-02]
P525 [-01]
fsoll
P527 [-01] P527 [-02] P527 [-03]
The time after which a fault is triggered can be set with parameter (P528). If the permitted
range is exceeded (Example diagram: Infringement of the area marked in yellow or green), the
error message E12.5 is generated unless parameter (P529) does not suppress the triggering of
an error.
A warning C12.5 is always given after the elapse of half of the set error triggering time (P528).
This also applies if a mode is selected for which no error message is generated. If only a
maximum or minimum value is to be monitored, the other limit must be deactivated or must
remain deactivated. The torque current and no the calculated torque is used as the reference
value. This has the advantage that monitoring in the "non field weakened range" without servo
mode is usually more accurate. Naturally however, it cannot display more than the physical
torque in the weakened field range.
All parameters depend on parameter sets. No differentiation is made between motor and
generator torque, therefore the value of the torque is considered. As well as this, there is no
differentiation between "left" and "right" running. The monitoring is therefore independent of the
prefix of the frequency. There are four different load monitoring modes (P529).
The frequencies, and the minimum and maximum values belong together within the various ar-
ray elements. The frequencies do not need to be sorted according to their magnitude in the el-
ements 0, 1 and 2, as the frequency inverter does this automatically.
BU 0200 GB-4411 Subject to technical alterations 219
437
SK 200E Manual for frequency inverters
Parameter Parameter
Setting value / Description / Note Device Supervisor
{Factory setting} set
P533 Factor I2t Motor S
2
(Factor I t-Motor)
50 ... 150 %
2
The motor current for the I t motor monitoring P535 can be weighted with the parameter P533.
{ 100 }
Larger factors permit larger currents.
P534 [-01] Torque disconn. limit S P
[-02] (Torque disconnection limit)
25 ... 400 % / 401 Via this parameter both the drive [-01] and the generator switch-off value [-02] can be
adjusted.
{ all 401 }
If 80% of the set value is reached, a warning status is set. At 100% switch-off is performed with
an error message.
Error 12.1 is given on exceeding the motor switch-off limit and E12.2 on exceeding the
generator switch-off limit.
[-01] = motor switch-off limit
[-02] = generator switch-off limit
401 = OFF, means that this function has been disabled.
P535 I2t motor
2
(I t motor)
2
« The I t motor function can now be set in a differentiated manner. Up to four curves with three
different triggering times can be set. The trigger times are based on classes 5, 10 and 20 for
{0} semiconductor switching devices.
All curves run from 0Hz to half of the nominal motor frequency (P201). The full nominal current
is available from half of the nominal frequency upwards.
2
0 = I t Motor Off: Monitoring is inactive
Switch-off class 5, Switch-off class 10, Switch-off class 20,
60s at 1.5x IN 120s at 1.5x IN 240s at 1.5x IN
IN at 0Hz P535 = IN at 0Hz P535 = IN at 0Hz P535 =
100% 1 100% 9 100% 17
90% 2 90% 10 90% 18
80% 3 80% 11 80% 19
70% 4 70% 12 70% 20
60% 5 60% 13 60% 21
50% 6 50% 14 50% 22
40% 7 40% 15 40% 23
30% 8 30% 16 30% 24
NOTE: For switch-off classes 10 and 20, care must be taken that the FI has a sufficiently
high overload capacity.
220 Subject to technical alterations BU 0200 GB-4411
438
6 Parameterisation
Parameter Parameter
Setting value / Description / Note Device Supervisor
{Factory setting} set
P536 Current limit S
(Current limit)
0.1 ... 2.0 / 2.1 The inverter output current is limited to the set value. If this limit value is reached, the inverter
(x FI current rating) reduces the actual output frequency.
{ 1.5 } With the analog input function in P400 = 12/13, this limit value can also be varied and cause an
error message (E12.4).
0.1 ... 2.0 = Multiplier with the inverter current rating, gives the limit value
2.1 = OFF means that this limit value is disabled. The FI supplies the maximum possible
current.
P537 Pulse disconnection S
(Pulse disconnection)
10 ... 200 % / 201 This function prevents rapid shutdown of the FI according to the load. With the pulse switch-off
enabled, the output current is limited to the set value. This limitation is implemented by brief
{ 150 } switching off of individual output stage transistors, the actual output frequency remains
unchanged.
10...200% = Limit value related to the FI current rating
201 = The function is so to speak switched off and the FI delivers the maximum possible
current. However, at the current limit the pulse switch off can still be active.
NOTE: The value set here can be undershot with a smaller value in P536.
For smaller output frequencies (<4.5Hz) or higher pulse frequencies (>6kHz or
8kHz, P504) the pulse switch-off by the power reduction (see Section 8.3) can be
undershot.
NOTE: If the pulse switch-off is disabled (P537=201) and a high pulse frequency is
selected in parameter P504, the FI automatically reduces the pulse frequency
when the power limit is reached. If the load on the FI is again reduced, the pulse
frequency increases to the original value again.
P539 Check output voltage S P
(Check output voltage)
0 ... 3 This protective function monitors the output current at the U-V-W terminals and checks for
plausibility. In cases of error, the error message E016 is output.
{0}
0 = Disabled: Monitoring is not active.
1 = Only motor phase, "Only motor phase error": The output current is measured and
checked for symmetry. If an imbalance is present, the FI switches off and outputs the
error message E016.
2 = Only magnetisation, "Only magnetisation monitoring": At the moment the FI is
switched on, the level of the excitation current (field current) is checked. If insufficient
excitation current is present, the FI switches off with the error message E016. A motor
brake is not released in this phase.
3 = Motor phas + magnet., "Monitoring of motor phases + magnetisation": as 1 and 2
combined.
NOTE: This function can also be used as an additional protective function for lifting
applications, but is not permissible on its own as protection for persons.
BU 0200 GB-4411 Subject to technical alterations 221
439
SK 200E Manual for frequency inverters
Parameter Parameter
Setting value / Description / Note Device Supervisor
{Factory setting} set
P540 Mode phase sequence S P
(Rotation direction mode)
0 ... 7 For safety reasons this parameter can be used to prevent a rotation direction reversal and
therefore the incorrect rotation direction.
{0}
7KLVIXQFWLRQGRHVQRWRSHUDWHLIWKHSRVLWLRQFRQWUROLVDFWLYH 3
0 = No limitation, "No restriction of direction of rotation"
1 = Disable phase seq key, "Disable phase sequence key", rotation direction change key
of the SimpleBox is locked
2 = To the right only*, only right-hand field rotation direction is possible. The selection of
the "incorrect" rotation direction leads to the output of the minimum frequency P104
with the field of rotation R.
3 = To the left only*, only a left-hand field rotation direction is possible. The selection of the
"incorrect" rotation direction leads to the output of the minimum frequency P104 with
the field of rotation L.
4 = Enabl direct only, "Enable direction only", rotation direction is only possible according
to the enable signal, otherwise 0Hz is output.
5 = Right Orient. Contr. "Only right-hand running monitored" *, only a right-hand field
rotation is possible. The selection of the "incorrect" rotation direction leads to a switch-
off (control lock) of the FI. If necessary, care should be taken that the setpoint (>fmin) is
sufficiently high.
6 = Left Orient. Contr. "Only left-hand running monitored" *, only a left field rotation is
possible. The selection of the "incorrect" rotation direction leads to a switch-off (control
lock) of the FI. If necessary, care should be taken that the setpoint (>fmin) is sufficiently
high.
7 = Enab direct contr, "Only enabled direction controlled", rotation direction is only
possible according to the enable signal, otherwise the FI is switched off.
*) Applies for control via keyboard and control terminals.
222 Subject to technical alterations BU 0200 GB-4411
440
6 Parameterisation
Parameter Parameter
Setting value / Description / Note Device Supervisor
{Factory setting} set
P541 Set relays S
(Set digital output)
000 ... 1FF(hex) This function provides the opportunity to control the relay and the digital outputs independently
of the frequency inverter status. To do this, the relevant output must be set to the function
{ 000 } "External control".
This function can either be used manually or in combination with a bus control.
Bit 0 = Digital output 1 Bit 6 = Bus/An/Dig Out Bit 5,
"Bus/Analog /Digital Out Bit 5"
Bit 1 = Bus/AS-i Out Bit 0
Bit 7 = Bus dig out 7, "Bus digital output 7"
Bit 2 = Bus/AS-i Out Bit 1
Bit 8 = Bus dig out 8, "Bus digital output 8"
Bit 3 = Bus/AS-i Out Bit 2
Bit 9 = PZD - Bit 10
Bit 4 = Bus/AS-i Out Bit 3
Bit 10 = PZD - Bit 13
Bit 5 = Bus/An/Dig Out Bit 4,
³%XV$QDORJ'LJLWDO2XW%LW´ Bit 11 = Digital output 2
Bit 8 Bits 7 -4 Bits 3 -0
0 0000 0000 Binary
Min. value
0 0 0 hex
1 1111 1111 Binary
Max. value
1 F F hex
Changes which are made to the settings are not saved in the EEPROM. After "Power ON" of
the frequency inverter, the parameter is therefore in the default setting.
Setting RIWKHYDOXHYLD«
BUS: The corresponding hex value is written into the parameter, thereby
setting the relay or digital outputs.
SimpleBox: The hexadecimal code is entered directly if the SimpleBox is used.
ParameterBox: Each individual output can be separately called up in plain text and
activated.
P542 [-01] Set analog out S
[-02] (Set analog output)
0.0 ... 10.0 V [-01] = First IOE, AOUT of the first I/O extension (SK xU4-IOE)
{ all 0.0 } [-02] = Second IOE, AOUT of the second I/O extension (SK xU4-IOE)
... only with The analog output of the FI can be set with this function, independently of the actual operating
SK CU4-IOE or state. To do this, the relevant analog output must be set to the function "External control"
SK TU4-IOE (P418 = 7).
This function can either be used manually or in combination with a bus control. The value set
here will, once confirmed, be produced at the analog output.
Changes which are made to the settings are not saved in the EEPROM. After "Power ON" of
the frequency inverter, the parameter is therefore in the default setting.
BU 0200 GB-4411 Subject to technical alterations 223
441
SK 200E Manual for frequency inverters
Parameter Parameter
Setting value / Description / Note Device Supervisor
{Factory setting} set
P543 [-01]
Bus actual value «
... S P
(Actual bus value 1)
[-03]
0 ... 24 In this parameter the returned value on bus actuation can be selected.
{ [-01] = 1 } NOTE: For further details, please refer to the relevant bus manual or the description for
3 9DOXHV IURP « FRUUHVSRQG WR hex « hex)
{ [-02] = 4 } For standardisation of the actual values: See also (Section 9.10).
{ [-03] = 9 } [-01] = Actual bus value 1
[-02] = Actual bus value 2 (only for PPO type 2 or 4)
[-03] = Actual bus value 3 (only for PPO type 2 or 4)
(Definition of frequencies, see Section. 9.11)
Possible setting values:
0 = Off 17 = Value analog input 1,
SK2x0E: Analog input 1 (P400[-01]),
1 = Actual frequency SK2x5E: AIN1 of the first I/O extension
(x=4000hex*f[Hz]/(P105))
SK xU4-IOE (P400 [-03]))
2 = Actual speed
(x=4000hex*n(rpm]/(P202)) 18 = Value analog input 2,
SK2x0E: Analog input 2 (P400[-02]),
3 = Current SK2x5E: AIN2 of the first I/O extension
(x=4000hex*I[A]/(P203)) SK xU4-IOE (P400 [-04]))
4 = Torque current (100% = P112) 19 = Freq master value (P503)
(x=4000hex*Iq[A]/(P112)*100/
¥ 3 ð 3 )²)
"Setpoint frequency master value"
(x=4000hex*fs[Hz]/(P105))
9
5 = Digital IO status
20 = Set freq after ramp ,
6 = ... 7 reserved "Setpoint frequency from ramp master
8 = Setpoint frequency value"
(x=4000hex*fs[Hz]/(P105)) (x=4000hex*fsnr[Hz]/(P105))
9 = Error code 21 = Act. freq. wo. slip,
"Actual frequency without slip master
10 = ... 11 reserved value"
12 = Bus IO Out Bits 0..-7 (x=4000hex*f-f2[Hz]/(P105))
13 = ... 16 reserved 22 = Speed encoder
"Speed from encoder"
(x=4000hex*n[rpm]/(P201)*(60/p))
p=number of pole pairs
23 = Actual with slip (SW V1.3 and above)
"Actual frequency with slip"
(x=4000hex*f[Hz]/(P105))
24 = Master actual (SW V1.3 and above)
"Actual frequency master value with slip"
(From SW V1.3)
(x=4000hex*f[Hz]/(P105))
9
The assignment of the dig. inputs for P543 = 5
Bit 0 = DigIn 1 (FI) Bit 1 = DigIn 2 (FI) Bit 2 = DigIn 3 (FI) Bit 3 = DigIn 4 (FI)
Bit 4 = PTC input (FI) Bit 5 = DigIn 5 (DI1, 1. 6.«,2( Bit 6 = DigIn 6 ',6.«,2( Bit 7 = DigIn 7 ',6.«,2(
Bit 8 = DigIn 8 (DI4, 1. 6.«,2( Bit 9 = reserved Bit 10 = reserved Bit 11 = reserved
Bit 12 = DigOut 1 (FI) Bit 13 = mech. brake (FI) Bit 14 = DigOut 2(DO1, 1. 6.«,2( Bit 15 = DigOut 3 '26.«,2(
224 Subject to technical alterations BU 0200 GB-4411
442
6 Parameterisation
Parameter Parameter
Setting value / Description / Note Device Supervisor
{Factory setting} set
P546 Func. bus-set point 1 ... 3 S P
(Function of bus - setpoint 1 ... 3)
0 ... 24 In this parameter, a function is assigned to the output setpoint during bus actuation.
{ [-01] = 1 } NOTE: For further details, please refer to the relevant bus manual or the description for
3 9DOXHV IURP « FRUUHVSRQG WR hex « hex,)
{ [-02] = 0 } For standardisation of the setpoint values: see also Section 9.11.
{ [-03] = 0 } [-01] = Bus setpoint value 1
[-02] = Bus setpoint value 2 (only for PPO type 2 or 4)
[-03] = Bus setpoint value 3 (only for PPO type 2 or 4)
Possible setting values:
0 = Off 12 = Torqu curr limit off
1 = Setpoint frequency (16 Bit) "Torque current limitation (switch-off)"
2 = Frequency addition 13 = Current limit "Current limit (limited)"
3 = Frequency subtract 14 = Current limit off "Current limit (switch-off)"
"Frequency subtraction" 15 = Ramp time, (P102/103)
4 = Minimum frequency 16 = Pre-tension torque ((P214) multiplication)
5 = Maximum frequency 17 = Multiplication
6 = Cur val, process ctrl 18 = Curve control
"Current value, process controller" "Curve travel calculator"
7 = Nom val, process ctrl 19 = Servo mode torque
"Nominal value, process controller" 20 = BusIO InBits 0-7
8 = PI current frequency 21 = ..24 reserved for Posicon
9 = PI limited current freq 31 = Digital output IOE, sets the state of DOUT
"PI limited current frequency" of the first IOE
10 = PI suprvsd cur freq 32 = Analog output IOE, sets the value AOUT
"PI supervised current frequency" of the first IOE, condition:
11 = Torque current limit P418 = Function "31"
"Torque current limitation (limited)"
P549 Pot Box function S
(PotentiometerBox function)
0 ... 3 This parameter provides the possibility of adding a correction value (fixed frequency, analog,
bus) to the current setpoint value by means of the SimpleBox/ParameterBox keyboard.
{1}
The adjustment range is determined by the auxiliary setpoint value P410/411.
0 = Off 2 = Frequency addition
1 = Setpoint frequency, with (P509) 1 3 = Frequency subtraction
control via USS is possible
P550 EEPROM copy order S
(EEPROM copy order)
0 ... 3 The frequency inverter is equipped with an internal EEPROM, which is primarily used for the
storage of fault-relevant data and operating hours. If an external EEPROM "Memory Module" is
{0} not plugged in, the parameter settings are also saved in the internal EEPROM. The data sets
saved in the internal EEPROM and in the Memory Module can be copied between the devices.
From Firmware V1.3 0 = No change 2 = Internal : External EEPROM, the
1 = External : Internal EEPROM, the data set is copied from the internal
data set is copied from the Memory EEPROM to the Memory Module
Module (external EEPROM) to the (external EEPROM)
internal EEPROM 3 = Exchange data sets, the data sets are
exchanged between the two EEPROMs
Note: The frequency inverter always uses the data set which is stored in the external
EEPROM (Memory Module). The parameterisation of the internal EEPROM is only used if no
Memory Module is plugged in.
BU 0200 GB-4411 Subject to technical alterations 225
443
SK 200E Manual for frequency inverters
Parameter Parameter
Setting value / Description / Note Device Supervisor
{Factory setting} set
P552 [-01] CAN master circle S
[-02] (CAN master cycle time)
«PV In this parameter, the cycle time for the system bus master mode and the CAN open encoder
is set (see P503/514/515):
{ all 0.0 }
[01] = CAN Master function, cycle time for system bus master functions
[02] = CANopen Abs. encoder, "CANopen absolute encoder", system bus cycle time of
absolute encoder
With the setting ³$XWR´ the default value (see table) is used.
According to the Baud rate set, there are different minimum values for the actual cycle time:
Baud rate Minimum value tZ Default System Bus Master Default System Bus Abs.
10kBaud 10ms 50ms 20ms
20kBaud 10ms 25ms 20ms
50kBaud 5ms 10ms 10ms
100kBaud 2ms 5ms 5ms
125kBaud 2ms 5ms 5ms
250kBaud 1ms 5ms 2ms
500kBaud 1ms 5ms 2ms
1000kBaud: 1ms 5ms 2ms
P555 P - limit chopper S
(Chopper power limit)
5 ... 100 % A power limit for the brake resistor can be programmed with this parameter. The switch-on time
(modulation level) for the brake chopper can only increase to the maximum specified limit.
[ 100 ]
The result would be an overvoltage switch-off of the FI.
R u Pmax BW
The correct percentage value is calculated as follows: k[%] 2
u 100%
U max
R =Brake resistor resistance
PmaxBR = short-term peak power of the brake resistor
Umax = chopper switching wave from the FI
1~ 115/230V 440V=
3~ 230V~ 500V=
3~ 400V~ 1000V=
NOTE: With If the internal brake resistor SK BR14-... is used, a suitable limit must be set.
However, activation of the limit via the DIP switch S1 (Section 5.2.2.2),
DIP8 = "On" is recommended!
P556 Braking resistor S
(Brake resistor)
20 ... 400 : Value of the brake resistance for the calculation of the maximum brake power to protect the
resistor.
{ 120 }
Once the maximum continuous output (P557) including overload (200% for 60s) is reached, an
2
I t limit error (E003.1) is triggered. Further details in P737.
The settings of this parameter have no effect if an internal brake resistor is used and DIP
switch number 8 from block S1 is actuated.
226 Subject to technical alterations BU 0200 GB-4411
444
6 Parameterisation
Parameter Parameter
Setting value / Description / Note Device Supervisor
{Factory setting} set
P557 Brake resistor type S
(Brake resistor power)
0.00 ... 20.00 kW Continuous power (nominal power) of the resistor, to display the actual utilisation in P737. For
a correctly calculated value, the correct value must be entered into P556 and P557.
{ 0.00 }
The settings of this parameter have no effect if an internal brake resistor is used and DIP
switch number 8 from block S1 is actuated.
0.00 = Off, monitoring disabled
P558 Flux delay S P
(Magnetizing time)
0 / 1 / 2 ... 500 ms The ISD control can only function correctly if there is a magnetic field in the motor. For this
reason, a DC current is applied before starting the motor. The duration depends on the size of
{1} the motor and is automatically set in the factory setting of the FI.
For time critical applications, the excitation time can be set or deactivated.
0= switched off
1= automatic calculation
2 ... 500 = according to set time in [ms]
NOTE: Setting values that are too low can reduce the dynamics and starting torque.
P559 DC Run-on time S P
(DC run-on time)
0.00 ... 30.00 s Following a stop signal and the braking ramp, a direct current is briefly applied to the motor to
fully bring the drive to a stop. Depending on the inertia, the time for which the current is applied
{ 0.50 } can be set in this parameter.
The current level depends on the previous braking procedure (current vector control) or the
static boost (linear characteristic).
P560 Mode of param. save S
(Saving mode parameters)
0 ... 2 0 = Only in RAM, changes to the parameter settings are no longer saved on the EEPROM.
All previously saved settings are retained, even if the FI is disconnected from the
{1} mains.
1 = RAM and EEPROM, all parameter changes are automatically written to the EEPROM
and remain stored there even if the FI is disconnected from the mains supply.
2 = Off, no storage in the RAM and EEPROM possible ( No parameter changes are
accepted)
NOTE: If BUS communication is used to implement parameter changes, it must be
ensured that the maximum number of write cycles (100,000 x) in the EEPROM is
not exceeded.
BU 0200 GB-4411 Subject to technical alterations 227
445
SK 200E Manual for frequency inverters
6.1.7 Positioning
The parameter group P600 is used to adjust the positioning control of the SK 2xxE. In order to make this
parameter visible, the supervisor parameter P003 = 3 must be set.
A detailed description of these parameters can be found in Manual BU 0210.(www.nord.com)
228 Subject to technical alterations BU 0200 GB-4411
446
6 Parameterisation
6.1.8 Information (Frequency inverter)
Parameter
Parameter Setting value / Description / Note Device Supervisor
set
P700 [-01]
Present operating status
...
(Present operating status)
[-03]
0.0 ... 21.4 Display of current messages for the actual operating status of the frequency inverter such as
errors, wanings or the cause of a switch-on block. For details of messages see Section 7
[-01] = Current fault, shows the currently active (unacknowledged) error (Section 7.2.1)
[-02] = Actual warning, shows any current warning message (Section 7.3)
[-03] = Reason FI blocked, shows the reason for a currently active switch-on block
(Section 7.4)
Note
SimpleBox:Only warning messages and errors can be displayed with the Simplebox. Display of
the messages is encoded. For the description of the codes (warning/error numbers), please
refer to the tables in Sections 7.2.1 and 7.3.
ParameterBox: the ParameterBox displays the messages in plain text. The reason for any
switch-on block can also be displayed.
Bus: The display of error messages at bus level is in decimal integer format. If the value is
divided by 10, the display corresponds to the description in Section 7.2.
([DPSOH 'LVSOD\ :(UURUQXPEHU
P701 [-01]
Last fault
...
(Last fault 1 ... 5)
[-05]
0.0 ... 21.4 This parameter stores the last 5 faults. (Details Section 7)
With the SimpleBox, the corresponding memory location 1...5- (Array parameter) must be
selected and confirmed using the OK key to read the stored error code.
P702 [-01]
Freq. last error
... S
(Last frequency fault 1 ... 5)
[-05]
-400.0 ... 400.0 Hz This parameter stores the output frequency that was being delivered at the time the fault
occurred. The values of the last 5 errors are stored.
With the SimpleBox, the corresponding memory location 1...5- (Array parameter) must be
selected and confirmed using the OK key to read the stored error code.
P703 [-01]
Current. last error
... S
/DVWFXUUHQWIDXOW«
[-05]
0.0 ... 999.9 A This parameter stores the output current that was being delivered at the time the fault occurred.
The values of the last 5 errors are stored.
With the SimpleBox, the corresponding memory location 1...5- (Array parameter) must be
selected and confirmed using the OK key to read the stored error code.
P704 [-01]
Volt. last error
... S
(Last voltage fault 1 ... 5)
[-05]
0 ... 600 V AC This parameter stores the output voltage that was being delivered at the time the fault occurred.
The values of the last 5 errors are stored.
With the SimpleBox, the corresponding memory location 1...5- (Array parameter) must be
selected and confirmed using the OK key to read the stored error code.
BU 0200 GB-4411 Subject to technical alterations 229
447
SK 200E Manual for frequency inverters
Parameter
Parameter Setting value / Description / Note Device Supervisor
set
P705 [-01]
Dc.lnk volt. last er.
... S
(Last link circuit voltage fault 1...5)
[-05]
0 ... 1000 V DC This parameter stores the link voltage that was being delivered at the time the error occurred.
The values of the last 5 errors are stored.
With the SimpleBox, the corresponding memory location 1...5- (Array parameter) must be
selected and confirmed using the OK key to read the stored error code.
P706 [-01]
P set last error
... S
3DUDPHWHUVHWODVWHUURU«
[-05]
0 ... 3 This parameter stores the parameter set code that was active when the error occurred. Data for
the previous 5 faults are stored.
With the SimpleBox, the corresponding memory location 1...5- (Array parameter) must be
selected and confirmed using the OK key to read the stored error code.
P707 [-01]
Software-Version
...
(Software version/ revision)
[-03]
0.0 ... 9999.9 This parameter shows the software and
revision numbers in the FI. This can be
significant when different FIs are assigned [-01] = Software version, version number (V1.0)
the same settings. [-02] = Software revision, revision number (R1)
Array [-03] provides information about any [-03] = Special version, of the hardware/software
special versions of the hardware or (0.0)
software A zero stands for the standard
version.
P708 State of digital in.
(Status of digital inputs)
00000 ... 11111 (bin) Displays the status of the digital inputs in binary/hexadecimal code. This display can be used to
check the input signals.
or
Bit 0 = Digital input 1 Bit 3 = Digital input 4
00 ... 1F (hex)
Bit 1 = Digital input 2 Bit 4 = PTC resistor input
Bit 2 = Digital input 3 Bit 5 - 7 reserved
First SK xU4-IOE (optional) Second SK xU4-IOE (optional)
Bit 8 = 1st IO extension: Digital input 1 Bit 12 = 2nd IO extension: Digital input 1
Bit 9 = 1st IO extension: Digital input 2 Bit 13 = 2nd IO extension: Digital input 2
Bit 10 = 1st IO extension: Digital input 3 Bit 14 = 2nd IO extension: Digital input 3
Bit 11 = 1st IO extension: Digital input 4 Bit 15 = 2nd IO extension: Digital input 4
Bits 15-12 Bits 11-8 Bits 7-4 Bits 3-0
0000 0000 0000 0000 Binary
Minimum value
0 0 0 0 hex
1111 1111 1111 1111 Binary
Maximum value
F F F F hex
SimpleBox: The binary Bits are converted into a hexadecimal value and displayed.
ParameterBox: The Bits are displayed with increasing values from right to left (binary).
230 Subject to technical alterations BU 0200 GB-4411
448
6 Parameterisation
Parameter
Parameter Setting value / Description / Note Device Supervisor
set
P709 [-01]
Analog input voltage
...
(Voltage of analog inputs)
[-09]
-100.0 ... 100.0 % Displays the measured analog input value.
SK 2x0E* SK2x5E**
[-01] = Analog input 1, function of analog [-01] = Potentiometer 1, Internal potentiometer
input 1 integrated into the FI P1 in the FI (Section 5.2.2), for setting
the maximum frequency, minimum
[-02] = Analog input 2, function of analog
frequency and ramp time
input 2 integrated into the FI.
[-02] = Potentiometer 2, as for potentiometer 1.
[-03] = Ext. analog input 1, AIN 1 of the first I/O extension SK xU4-IOE
[-04] = Ext. analog input 2, AIN 1 of the first I/O extension SK xU4-IOE
[-05] = Setpoint module, in preparation
[-06] = Analog function 2, analog function of the FI digital input 2
[-07] = Analog function 3, analog function of the FI digital input 3
[-08] = Ext. A.in 1 2nd IOE, "External analog input 1 2nd ,2(³,
AIN1 of the second I/O extension
(SK xU4-IOE) (= analog input 3).
[-09] = Ext. A.in 2 2nd IOE, "External analog input 2 2nd IOE",
AIN2 of the second I/O extension
(SK xU4-IOE) (= analog input 4).
P710 [-01] Analog output volta.
[-02] (Analog output voltage)
0.0 ... 10.0 V Displays the delivered value of analog output.
[-01] = First IOE, AOUT of the first I/O extension (SK xU4-IOE)
[-02] = Second IOE, AOUT of the second I/O extension (SK xU4-IOE)
P711 State of relays
(State of digital outputs)
00000 ... 11111 (bin) Indicates the actual status of the digital outputs of the frequency inverter.
or Bit 0 = Digital output 1 Bit 4 = Digital output 1, IO extension 1
Bit 1 = mechanical brake Bit 5 = Digital output 2, IO extension 1
00 ... FF (hex)
Bit 2 = Digital output 2 Bit 6 = Digital output 1, IO extension 2
Bit 3 = reserved Bit 7 = Digital output 2, IO extension 2
Bits 7-4 Bits 3-0
0000 0000 Binary
Minimum value
0 0 hex
1111 1111 Binary
Maximum value
F F hex
SimpleBox: The binary bits are converted to a hexadecimal value and displayed.
ParameterBox: The bits are displayed with increasing values from right to left (binary).
P714 Operating time
(Operating time)
0.00 ... ___ h This parameter shows the time for which the FI was connected to the mains and was ready for
operation.
BU 0200 GB-4411 Subject to technical alterations 231
449
SK 200E Manual for frequency inverters
Parameter
Parameter Setting value / Description / Note Device Supervisor
set
P715 Running time
(Enablement time)
0.00 ... ___ h This parameter shows the time for which the FI was enabled and supplied current to the output.
P716 Current frequency
(Actual frequency)
-400.0 ... 400.0 Hz Displays the actual output frequency.
P717 Current speed
(Actual rotation speed)
-9999 ... 9999 rpm Displays the actual motor speed calculated by the FI.
P718 [-01]
Current set freq.
...
(Actual setpoint frequency)
[-03]
-400.0 ... 400.0 Hz Displays the frequency specified by the setpoint.
[-01] = Actual setpoint frequency from the setpoint source
[-02] = Actual setpoint frequency after processing in the FI status machine
[-03] = Actual setpoint frequency after the frequency ramp
P719 Actual current
(Actual current)
0.0 ... 999.9 A Displays the actual output current.
P720 Act. torque current
(Actual torque current)
-999.9 ... 999.9 A Displays the actual calculated torque-developing output current (active current). Basis for
calculation is the motor data P201...P209 ... .
Ænegative values = generator, Æpositive values = drive
P721 Actual field current
(Actual field current)
-999.9 ... 999.9 A Displays the actual calculated field current (reactive current). Basis for calculation is the motor
data P201...P209 ... .
P722 Current voltage
(Actual voltage)
0 ... 500 V Displays the actual AC voltage supplied by the FI output.
P723 Voltage -d
(Actual voltage component Ud)
0 ... 500 V Displays the actual field voltage component.
P724 Voltage -q
(Actual voltage component Uq)
0 ... 500 V Displays the actual torque voltage component.
P725 Current cos phi
(Actual cos M)
0.00 ... 1.00 Displays the actual calculated cos M of the drive.
P726 Apparent power
(Apparent power)
0.00 ... 99.99 kVA Displays the actual calculated apparent power. Basis for calculation is the motor data
P201...P209 ... .
232 Subject to technical alterations BU 0200 GB-4411
450
6 Parameterisation
Parameter
Parameter Setting value / Description / Note Device Supervisor
set
P727 Mechanical power
(Mechanical power)
-99.99 ... 99.99 kW Displays the actual calculated effective power of the motor. Basis for calculation is the motor
data P201...P209 ... .
P728 Input voltage
(Mains voltage)
0 ... 1000 V Displays the actual mains voltage at the FI input.
P729 Torque
(Torque)
-400 ... 400 % Displays the actual calculated torque. Basis for calculation is the motor data P201...P209 ... .
P730 Field
(Field)
0 ... 250 % Displays the actual field in the motor as calculated by the inverter. Basis for calculation is the
motor data P201...P209 ... .
P731 Parameter set
(Actual parameter set)
0 ... 3 Shows the actual operating parameter set.
0 = Parameter set 1 2 = Parameter set 3
1 = Parameter set 2 3 = Parameter set 4
P732 Phase U current S
(U phase current)
0.0 ... 999.9 A Displays the actual U phase current.
NOTE: This value can deviate from the value in P719, due to the measurement procedure
used, even with symmetrical output currents.
P733 Phase V current S
(V phase current)
0.0 ... 999.9 A Displays the actual V phase current.
NOTE: This value can deviate from the value in P719, due to the measurement procedure
used, even with symmetrical output currents.
P734 Phase W current S
(W phase current)
0.0 ... 999.9 A Displays the actual W phase current.
NOTE: This value can deviate from the value in P719, due to the measurement procedure
used, even with symmetrical output currents.
P735 Speed encoder S
(Encoder speed)
-9999 ... 9999 rpm Displays the actual rotation speed supplied by the incremental encoder. For this, P301 must be
correctly set.
P736 D.c. link voltage
(DC link voltage)
0 ... 1000 V DC Displays the actual link voltage.
BU 0200 GB-4411 Subject to technical alterations 233
451
SK 200E Manual for frequency inverters
Parameter
Parameter Setting value / Description / Note Device Supervisor
set
P737 Usage rate brakeres.
(Actual brake resistor usage rate)
0 ... 1000 % This parameter provides information about the actual degree of modulation of the brake
chopper or the current utilisation of the braking resistor in generator mode.
If parameters P556 and P557 are correctly set, the utilisation related to P557, the resistor
power, is displayed.
If only P556 is correctly set (P557=0), the degree of modulation of the brake chopper is
displayed. Here, 100 means that the brake resistor is fully switched. On the other hand, 0
means that the brake chopper is not active at present.
If P556 = 0 and P557 = 0, this parameter also provides information about the degree of
modulation of the brake chopper in the FI.
P738 [-01] Usage rate motor
[-02] (Actual utilisation of motor)
0 ... 1000 % Shows the actual motor load. Basis for calculation is the motor data P203. The actual recorded
current is related to the nominal motor current.
[-01] = related to IN (P203) of the motor
2
[-02] = related to I t control (P535)
P739 [-01]
Heatsink temperature
...
(Actual heat sink temperature)
[-03]
-40 ... 150 °C [-01] = Heat sink temperature
[-02] = Ambient temperature (Internal temperature of the FI)
[-03] = Temp Motor KTY, motor temperature via KTY, recording only via IO extension, setting
in parameter (P400) to function {30} "Motor temperature"
P740 [-01]
... PZD bus in S
(Process data bus in)
[-13]
0000 ... FFFF (hex) This parameter provides information about the actual control word (STW) and the setpoints
(SW1-3) that are transferred via the bus systems.
For values to be displayed, a bus system must be selected in P509.
For standardisation of actual values: See also (Section 9.10).
[-01] = Control word (P509) Control word, source from (P509).
[-02] = Setpoint 1 (P510-01) / (P546 [-01])
Setpoint data from main setpoint
[-03] = Setpoint 2 (P510-01) / (P546 [-02])
(P510 [-01]).
[-04] = Setpoint 3 (P510-01) / (P546 [-03])
[-05] = Res status In Bit P480 The displayed value depicts all Bus In
"Resulting status of In Bit P480" Bit sources linked with OR.
[-06] = Parameter data In 1
[-07] = Parameter data In 2 Data during parameter transfer:
Order label (AK),
[-08] = Parameter data In 3 Parameter number (PNU),
Index (IND),
[-09] = Parameter data In 4
Parameter value (PWE 1/2)
[-10] = Parameter data In 5
[-11] = Setpoint 1 (P510-01)
Setpoint data from the master function
[-12] = Setpoint 2 (P510-02) value (broadcast), if P509/510 = 4
(P502/P503)
[-13] = Setpoint 3 (P510-03)
234 Subject to technical alterations BU 0200 GB-4411
452
6 Parameterisation
Parameter
Parameter Setting value / Description / Note Device Supervisor
set
P741 [-01]
... PZD bus out S
(Process data bus out)
[-10]
0000 ... FFFF (hex) This parameter provides information about the actual status word and the actual values that are
transferred via the bus systems.
For standardisation of actual values: See also (Section 9.10).
[-01] = Status word Status word
[-02] = Actual value 1 (P543 [-01])
[-03] = Actual value 2 (P543 [-02])
[-04] = Actual value 3 (P543 [-03])
[-05] = Res status Out Bit P481 The displayed value depicts all Bus Out
"Resulting status of Out Bit P481" Bit sources linked with OR.
[-06] = Parameter data Out 1
[-07] = Parameter data Out 2
[-08] = Parameter data Out 3 Data during parameter transfer.
[-09] = Parameter data Out 4
[-10] = Parameter data Out 5
P742 Data base version S
(Database version)
0 ... 9999 Displays the internal database version of the FI.
P743 Inverter ID
(Inverter type)
0.25 ... 11.00 Displays the inverter power in kW, e.g. "1.50" FI with 1.5 kW nominal power.
P744 Configuration
(Configuration level)
0000 ... FFFF (hex) This parameter displays the special devices integrated in the FI. Display is in hexadecimal code
(SimpleBox, Bus system).
The display is in plain text when the ParameterBox is used.
High byte: Low byte:
00hex Standard I/O (SK 205E)
01hex STO (SK 215E)
00hex No extension 02hex AS-I (SK 225E)
01hex Encoder 03hex STO and AS-I (SK 235E)
02hex Posicon 04hex Standard I/O (SK 200E)
03hex --- 05hex STO (SK 210E)
06hex AS-i (SK 220E)
07hex STO and AS-i (SK 230E)
P747 Inverter Volt. Range
(Inverter voltage range)
0 ... 2 Indicates the mains voltage range for which this device is specified.
0 = 100...120V 1 = 200...240V 2 = 380...480V
BU 0200 GB-4411 Subject to technical alterations 235
453
SK 200E Manual for frequency inverters
Parameter
Parameter Setting value / Description / Note Device Supervisor
set
P748 Status CANopen
(CANopen status (system bus status))
0000 ... FFFF (hex) Displays the system bus status.
or Bit 0: 24V Bus supply voltage
0 ... 65535 (dec) Bit 1: CANbus in "Bus Warning" status
Bit 2: CANbus in "Bus Off" status
Bit 3: 6\VWHPEXV:%XVPRGXOHRQOLQH ILHOGEXVPRGXOHHJ 6. xU4-PBR)
Bit 4: 6\VWHPEXV:$GGLWLRQDOPRGXOHRQOLQH ,2- module, e.g.: SK xU4-IOE)
Bit 5: 6\VWHPEXV:$GGLWLRQDOPRGXOHRQOLQH ,2- module, e.g.: SK xU4-IOE)
Bit 6: The protocol of the CAN module is 0 = CAN / 1 = CANopen
Bit 7: vacant
Bit 8: "Bootsup Message" sent
Bit 9: CANopen NMT State
Bit 10: CANopen NMT State
CANopen NMT State Bit 10 Bit 9
Stopped 0 0
Pre-Operational 0 1
Operational 1 0
P749 Status DIP switches
0000 ... 00FF (hex) This parameter shows the actual setting of the FI DIP switch "S1" (See Section 5.2.2.2)
or
0 ... 511 (dec) Bit 0: DIP switch 1
Bit 1: DIP switch 2
Bit 2: DIP switch 3
Bit 3: DIP switch 4
Bit 4: DIP switch 5
Bit 5: DIP switch 6
Bit 6: DIP switch 7
Bit 7: DIP switch 8
Bit 8: from SW1.3 Bit 8: EEPROM (Memory Module) Bit 8 = 0: plugged in / Bit 8 = 1: not plugged in
236 Subject to technical alterations BU 0200 GB-4411
454
6 Parameterisation
Parameter
Parameter Setting value / Description / Note Device Supervisor
set
P750 Stat. overcurrent S
(Overcurrent statistics)
0 ... 9999 Number of overcurrent messages during the operating period P714.
P751 Stat. Overvoltage S
(Overvoltage statistics)
0 ... 9999 Number of overvoltage messages during the operating period P714.
P752 Stat. mains failure S
(Mains failure statistics)
0 ... 9999 Number of mains faults during the operating period P714.
P753 Stat. overtemperature S
(Overheating statistics)
0 ... 9999 Number of overtemperature faults during the operating period P714.
P754 Stat. parameter lost S
(Parameter loss statistics)
0 ... 9999 Number of parameters lost during the operating period P714.
P755 Stat. system error S
(System fault statistics)
0 ... 9999 Number of system faults during the operating period P714.
P756 Stat. Timeout S
(Time out statistics)
0 ... 9999 Number of Time out errors during the operating period P714.
P757 Stat. Customer error S
(Customer fault statistics)
0 ... 9999 Number of Customer Watchdog faults during the operating period P714.
P760 Actual current S
(Actual mains current)
0.0 ... 50( Displays the actual input current.
P799 [-01]
Op.-time last error
...
(Operating time, last fault 1...5)
[-05]
0.00 ... ___ h This parameter shows the operating hours counter status (P714) at the moment of the previous
fault. Array [-01] ... [-05] corresponds to the last fault 1 ... 5.
BU 0200 GB-4411 Subject to technical alterations 237
455
SK 200E Manual for frequency inverters
6.2 Parameterisation of I/O - extension SK xU4-IOE-«
In order to access the parameters of the I/O extension, the parameterisation tool (ParameterBox,
SimpleBox, NordCon) must be connected directly to the device.
If the I/O extension is on an active system bus, it can be accessed with the ParameterBox SK PAR-3H or
the NORD CON software as well as via another device (e.g. frequency inverter SK 2xxE). After the bus
scan, it is only necessary to select the I/O extension (menu item SK PAR-3H: "Object selection").
6.2.1 Basic parameters (I/O - extension)
Parameter Parameter
Setting value / Description / Note Device Supervisor
{Factory setting} set
P150 Set relays SK TU4-IOE
(Set relays)
0 ... 4 The switching statuses of the digital outputs (only SK TU4 IOE) can be changed.
{0} 0 = Via bus: all digital outputs are controlled via the system bus, the functions are defined in
the frequency inverter (P480)
1 = Outputs Off: all digital outputs are off (Low = 0V)
2 = Output 1 on (DO1): digital output DO1 is set to "High" (active), digital output DO2
remains switched off
3 = Output 2 on (DO1): digital output DO2 is set to "High" (active), digital output DO1
remains switched off
4 = Outputs 1 and 2 on: all digital outputs are set to "High" (active)
P152 Factory setting
(Factory setting)
0 ... 2 By selecting the appropriate value and confirming it with the OK key, the selected parameter
range is entered in the factory setting. Once the setting has been made, the value of the
{0} parameter automatically returns to 0.
0 = No change:Does not change the parameterisation.
1 = Load factory setting: The complete parameterisation of the FI reverts to the factory
setting. All originally parameterised data is lost.
2 = Calibration AOUT: The accuracy of the analog output can be improved with a correction
line, however, this is not activated as standard. If factory settings (P152={ 1 }) are
loaded, the correction values are retained. A calibration is carried out if (P152) is set to
{ 2 }, i.e. the line is re-recorded and stored in the EEPROM.
P153 [-01] Minimum system bus cycle
[-02] (Minimum system bus cycle time)
0 ... 250.00 ms To reduce the load on the system bus, the transmission cycle time of the service data objects
and process data objects may be increased.
{ [-01] = 10 }
{ [-02] = 5 }
[-01] = SDO Inhibit Time
[-02] = PDO Inhibit Time
P160 Set analog out
(Set analog output)
-0.1 ... 10.0 V The analog output can output a defined value, which is independent of the system bus.
{ -0.1 } -0.1 = Control voltage via system bus
«10.0 = Voltage value in V
238 Subject to technical alterations BU 0200 GB-4411
456
6 Parameterisation
Parameter Parameter
Setting value / Description / Note Device Supervisor
{Factory setting} set
P161 [-01]
Filter time
...
(Filter time)
[-09]
0 ... 400.00 ms The analog and digital inputs are read cyclically every 250µs, this results in an input uncertainty
of 0.25ms. In order to eliminate bounce and smooth the input signals, the information which is
{ [-01] = 100 } read in is passed through a filter routine. The filter time can be parameterised
{ [-02] = 100 } If, for example, a filter time of 1 ms is parameterised for a digital input, the input signal is
{ [-03] = 0 } delayed by approx. 1...1.25ms.
{ [-04] = 2 } The parameterisation of the filter time for the analog outputs is used to round off signal jumps.
{ [-05] = 2 }
[-01] = AIN1 [-06] = DIN3 (only SK TU4-IOE)
{ [-06] = 2 }
[-02] = AIN2 [-07] = DIN4 (only SK TU4-IOE)
{ [-07] = 2 }
[-03] = AOUT [-08] = DOUT1 (only SK TU4-IOE)
{ [-08] = 0 }
[-04] = DIN1 [-09] = DOUT2 (only SK TU4-IOE)
{ [-09] = 0 }
[-05] = DIN2
P162 Send broadcast
(Send broadcast)
0 ... 1 Activation of this parameter (setting On Æ 1 ) switches the I/O extension module into broadcast
mode and thus enables simultaneous access by up to four frequency inverters. Each frequency
{0} inverter evaluates the information from the I/O extension individually.
The addressing of the module (DIP switches) is no longer taken into account.
0 = Off
1 = On
NOTE: The data received by the I/O module is subject to an OR logic. If several frequency
inverters are linked to the digital outputs of the module, the relevant output is set to
"High" as soon as an inverter accesses it. The analog outputs behave in a similar
manner. Here, the highest value has priority.
P163 AOut Inverse
(Invert analog output)
0 ... 1 The function of the analog output can be inverted
{0} 0 = No inversion
1 = Analog output signal is inverted
BU 0200 GB-4411 Subject to technical alterations 239
457
SK 200E Manual for frequency inverters
6.2.2 Information (I/O - extension)
Parameter
Parameter Setting value / Description / Note Device Supervisor
set
P170 ... [-01] Present errors
... [-02] (Present errors)
0 ... 9999 Actual fault present. Further details in Section 7 "Operating status messages".
«>-01 ] = Actual module fault
«>-02 ] = Last module fault
Possible displayed values:
1000 = EEPROM error
1030 = Systembus Bus Off
2000 = DIP changed
2001 = DIP configuration error / not permissible
2010 = Analog output error
2020 = Inverter does not support SK xU4-IOE (Error not associated with SK 2xxE possible)
P171 ... [-01]
... Software version
(Software Version / Revision)
... [-03]
0.0 ... 9999.9 This parameter shows the software and revision numbers in the module. Array [-03] provides
information about any special versions of the hardware or software A zero stands for the
standard version.
«>-01] = Software Version 1, "Version number": (e.g.: V1.0)
«>-02] = Software Version 2, "Revision number": (e.g.: R1)
«>-03] = Software Version 3, "Special version": (e.g.: 0)
P172 Configuration
(Configuration level)
0 ... 2 This parameter displays the functions or variants integrated into the module.
1 = Internal bus module (SK CU4-«
2 = External bus module (SK CU4-«
3 = BUS Technology Unit via SPI
240 Subject to technical alterations BU 0200 GB-4411
458
6 Parameterisation
Parameter
Parameter Setting value / Description / Note Device Supervisor
set
P173 Module status
(Module status)
0 ... FFFF (hex) Possible displayed values:
Bit 0 = not used
Bit 1 = not used
Bit 2 = not used
Bit 3 = not used
Bit 4 = not used
Bit 5 = not used
%LW 6\VWHPEXV³%86:$51,1*´
Bit 6\VWHPEXV³%862))´
Bit 8 = Status FI1 (Low - Bit)
Bit 9 = Status FI1 (High - Bit)
Bit 10= Status FI2 (Low - Bit)
Bit 11= Status FI2 (High - Bit)
Bit 12= Status FI3 (Low - Bit)
Bit 13= Status FI3 (High - Bit)
Bit 14= Status FI4 (Low - Bit)
Bit 15= Status FI4 (High - Bit)
Status for FIx:
BIT High BIT Low Meaning
0 0 FI is offline
0 1 unknown FI
1 0 FI is online
1 1 FI lost (switched off)
P174 State of digital in.
(Status of digital inputs)
0 ... 15 Instantaneous image of input level logic of the digital inputs.
Possible displayed values:
Bit 0= Input 1 ((DIN1) (of the BUS module))
Bit 1= Input 2 ((DIN2) (of the BUS module))
Bit 2= Input 3 ((DIN3) (of the BUS module))
Bit 3= Input 4 ((DIN4) (of the BUS module))
P175 State of relays SK TU4-IOE
(State of relays)
0 ... 3 Instantaneous image of output level logic of the digital output.
Possible displayed values:
Bit 1= Output 1 ((DO1) (of the BUS module))
Bit 2= Output 2 ((DO2) (of the BUS module))
P176 ... [-01]
... Current voltage
(Actual voltage)
... [-03]
0.0 ... 10.0 V Displays the voltage level of the signals at the analog inputs/outputs of the I/O extension
module.
«>-01] = Actual voltage (AIN1)
«>-02] = Actual voltage (AIN2)
«>-03] = Actual voltage (AOUT)
BU 0200 GB-4411 Subject to technical alterations 241
459
SK 200E Manual for frequency inverters
6.3 Parameter overview, User settings
(P) Depends on parameter set. These parameters can be set in various ways in the four parameter
sets.
[- xx] Array parameter. A parameter can be set in various sub-groups.
S Supervisor parameter, visibility depends on P003.
6.3.1 Overview of frequency inverter parameters
Parameter Factory Super Setting after commissioning
Name
No. [Array] setting visor P1 P2 P3 P4
OPERATING DISPLAYS (Section 6.1.1)
P000 Operating para. display
P001 Selection of display value 0
P002 Display factor 1.00 S
1 = All parameters visible except P3xx/P6xx
P003 Supervisor code 1
3 = all parameters visible
BASIC PARAMETERS (Section 6.1.2)
P100 Parameter set 0 S
P101 Copy parameter set 0 S
P102 (P) Acceleration time [s] 2.0
P103 (P) Deceleration time [s] 2.0
P104 (P) Minimum frequency [Hz] 0.0
50.0
P105 (P) Maximum frequency [Hz]
(60.0)
P106 (P) Ramp smoothing [%] 0 S
P107 (P) Brake reaction time [s] 0.00
P108 (P) Disconnection mode 1 S
P109 (P) DC brake current [%] 100 S
P110 (P) Time DC brake on [s] 2.0 S
P111 (P) P factor torque limit [%] 100 S
P112 (P) Torque current limit [%] 401 (off) S
P113 (P) Jog frequency [Hz] 0.0 S
P114 (P) Brake delay off [s] 0.00 S
External Control Units
P120 [-01] 1 (auto) S
BUS TB (Extension1)
External Control Units
P120 [-02] 1 (auto) S
BUS TB (Extension 2)
External Control Units
P120 [-03] 1 (auto) S
Setpoint TB (Extension 3)
External Control Units
P120 [-04] 1 (auto) S
Extension 4
242 Subject to technical alterations BU 0200 GB-4411
460
6 Parameterisation
Parameter Factory Super Setting after commissioning
Name
No. [Array] setting visor P1 P2 P3 P4
MOTOR DATA / CHARACTERISTIC CURVE PARAMETERS (Section 6.1.3)
P200 (P) Motor list 0
P201 (P) Nominal frequency [Hz] 50.0 * S
P202 (P) Nominal speed [rpm] 1385 * S
P203 (P) Nominal current [A] 4.8 * S
P204 (P) Nominal voltage [V] 230 * S
P205 (P) Nominal power [kW] 1.10 *
P206 (P) cos phi 0.78 * S
Star Delta con.
P207 (P) 1* S
[star=0/delta=1]
P208 (P) Stator resistance [:] 6.28* S
P209 (P) No-load current [A] 3.0 * S
P210 (P) Static boost [%] 100 S
P211 (P) Dynamic boost [%] 100 S
P212 (P) Slip compensation [%] 100 S
P213 (P) ISD control loop gain [%] 100 S
P214 (P) Torque precontrol [%] 0 S
P215 (P) Boost precontrol [%] 0 S
P216 (P) Time boost precontrol [s] 0.0 S
P217 (P) Oscillation damping [%] 10 S
P218 Modulation depth [%] 100 S
P219 Auto. magn. adjustment [%] 100 S
P220 (P) Parameter identification 0
*) dependent on FI power or P200/P220
SPEED CONTROL (Section 6.1.4)
0
P300 (P) Servo Mode [On / Off] S
(Off)
P301 Incremental encoder 6 S
P310 (P) Speed controller P [%] 100 S
P311 (P) Speed controller I [%/ms] 20 S
P312 (P) Torque current controller P [%] 200 S
Torque current controller I
P313 (P) 125 S
[%/ms]
Torque current controller limit
P314 (P) 400 S
[V]
P315 (P) Field current controller P [%] 200 S
P316 (P) Field current controller I [%/ms] 125 S
P317 (P) Field current controller limit [V] 400 S
Field weakening controller P
P318 (P) 150 S
[%]
BU 0200 GB-4411 Subject to technical alterations 243
461
SK 200E Manual for frequency inverters
Parameter Factory Super Setting after commissioning
Name
No. [Array] setting visor P1 P2 P3 P4
Field weakening controller I
P319 (P) 20 S
[%/ms]
P320 (P) Field weakening border [%] 100 S
P321 (P) Speed control I brake off 0 S
P325 Function encoder 0 S
P326 Encoder ratio 1.00 S
0
P327 (P) Speed slip error [rpm] S
(Off)
P328 (P) Speed slip delay [s] 0.0 S
CONTROL CLAMPS (Section 6.1.5)
Function, setpoint inputs
P400 [-01] (P) 1
Potentiometer 1
Function, setpoint inputs
P400 [-02] (P) 15
Potentiometer 2
Function, setpoint inputs
P400 [-03] (P) 0
Ext. analog input 1
Function, setpoint inputs
P400 [-04] (P) 0
Ext. analog input 2
Setpoint input function
P400 [-05] (P) 1
Setpoint module
Function, setpoint inputs
P400 [-06] (P) 0
Digital inpput 2
Function, setpoint inputs
P400 [-07] (P) 1
Digital inpput 3
Function, setpoint inputs
P400 [-08] (P) 0
Ext. analog input1 2nd IOE
Function, setpoint inputs
P400 [-09] (P) 0
Ext. analog input 2 2nd IOE
Analog input mode
P401 [-01] 0
Ext. analog input 1
Analog input mode
P401 [-02] 0
Ext. analog input 2
Function, analog input
P401 [-03] 0
Ext. analog input1 2nd IOE
Function, analog input
P401 [-04] 0
Ext. analog input 2 2nd IOE
Analog input mode
P401 [-05] 0
reserved
Analog input mode
P401 [-05] 0
reserved
Adjustment: 0% [V]
P402 [-01] 0.0 S
Ext. analog input 1
Adjustment: 0% [V]
P402 [-02] 0.0 S
Ext. analog input 2
Adjustment: 0% [V]
P402 [-03] 0.0 S
Ext. analog input 1 2nd IOE
244 Subject to technical alterations BU 0200 GB-4411
462
6 Parameterisation
Parameter Factory Super Setting after commissioning
Name
No. [Array] setting visor P1 P2 P3 P4
Adjustment: 0% [V]
P402 [-04] 0.0 S
Ext. analog input 2 2nd IOE
Adjustment: 0% [V]
P402 [-05] 0.0 S
reserved
Adjustment: 0% [V]
P402 [-06] 0.0 S
reserved
Adjustment: 100% [V]
P403 [-01] 10.0 S
Ext. analog input 1
Adjustment: 100% [V]
P403 [-02] 10.0 S
Ext. analog input 2
Adjustment: 100% [V]
P403 [-03] 10.0 S
Ext. analog input 1 2nd IOE
Adjustment: 100% [V]
P403 [-04] 10.0 S
Ext. analog input 2 2nd IOE
Adjustment: 100% [V]
P403 [-05] 0.0 S
reserved
Adjustment: 100% [V]
P403 [-06] 0.0 S
reserved
P404 [-01] reserved
P404 [-02] reserved
P410 (P) Min. freq. a-in 1/2 [Hz] 0.0
P411 (P) Max. freq. a-in 1/2 [Hz] 50.0
P412 (P) Setpoint, process ctrl. [V] 5.0 S
P413 (P) P-component PI control [%] 10.0 S
P414 (P) I-component PI control [%/s] 10.0 S
P415 (P) Process controller limit [%] 10.0 S
P416 (P) Ramp time PI setpoint. [s] 2.00 S
Analog output offset [V]
P417 [-01] (P) 0.0 S
first IOE
Analog output offset [V]
P417 [-02] (P) 0.0 S
second IOE
Analog output function
P418 [-01] (P) 0 S
first IOE
Analog output function
P418 [-02] (P) 0 S
second IOE
Analog output scaling [%]
P419 [-01] (P) 100 S
first IOE
Analog output scaling [%]
P419 [-02] (P) 100 S
second IOE
P420 [-01] Digital inputs (DIN 1) 1
P420 [-02] Digital inputs (DIN2) 2
P420 [-03] Digital inputs (DIN3) 4
P420 [-04] Digital inputs (DIN4) 5
P426 (P) Quick stop time [s] 0.10 S
P427 Quick stop on Error 0 S
BU 0200 GB-4411 Subject to technical alterations 245
463
SK 200E Manual for frequency inverters
Parameter Factory Super Setting after commissioning
Name
No. [Array] setting visor P1 P2 P3 P4
0
P428 Automatic starting S
(Off)
P434 [-01] Digital output 1 function 1
P434 [-02] Digital output 2 function 1
P435 [-01] Digital output 1 scaling [%] 100
P435 [-02] Digital output 2 scaling [%] 100
Digital output 1 hysteresis
P436 [-01] 10 S
[%]
Digital output 2 hysteresis
P436 [-02] 10 S
[%]
P460 Watchdog time [s] 10.0 S
P464 Fixed frequency mode 0 S
P465 [-01] Fixed frequency field [Hz] 5
P465 [-02] Fixed frequency field [Hz] 10
P465 [-03] Fixed frequency field [Hz] 20
P465 [-04] Fixed frequency field [Hz] 35
P465 [-05] Fixed frequency field [Hz] 50
P465 [-06] Fixed frequency field [Hz] 70
P465 [-07] Fixed frequency field [Hz] 100
P465 [-08] Fixed frequency field [Hz] 0
P465 [-09] Fixed frequency field [Hz] -5
P465 [-10] Fixed frequency field [Hz] -10
P465 [-11] Fixed frequency field [Hz] -20
P465 [-12] Fixed frequency field [Hz] -35
P465 [-13] Fixed frequency field [Hz] -50
P465 [-14] Fixed frequency field [Hz] -70
P465 [-15] Fixed frequency field [Hz] -100
P466 (P) Min. freq .process controller 0.0 S
On/Off switching delay [s]
P475 [-01] 0.000 S
Digital input 1
On/Off switching delay [s]
P475 [-02] 0.000 S
Digital input 2
On/Off switching delay [s]
P475 [-03] 0.000 S
Digital input 3
On/Off switching delay [s]
P475 [-04] 0.000 S
Digital input 4
Function, Bus I/O In Bits
P480 [-01] 1
Bus / AS-i Dig In1
Function, Bus I/O In Bits
P480 [-02] 2
Bus / AS-i Dig In2
Function, Bus I/O In Bits
P480 [-03] 5
Bus / AS-i Dig In3
Function, Bus I/O In Bits
P480 [-04] 12
Bus / AS-i Dig In4
246 Subject to technical alterations BU 0200 GB-4411
464
6 Parameterisation
Parameter Factory Super Setting after commissioning
Name
No. [Array] setting visor P1 P2 P3 P4
Function, Bus I/O In Bits
P480 [-05] 0
Bus / IOE Dig In1
Function, Bus I/O In Bits
P480 [-06] 0
Bus / IOE Dig In2
Function, Bus I/O In Bits
P480 [-07] 0
Bus / IOE Dig In3
Function, Bus I/O In Bits
P480 [-08] 0
Bus / IOE Dig In4
Function, Bus I/O In Bits
P480 [-09] 0
Flag 1
Function, Bus I/O In Bits
P480 [-10] 0
Flag 2
Function, Bus I/O In Bits
P480 [-11] 0
Bit 8 Bus control word
Function, Bus I/O In Bits
P480 [-12] 0
Bit 9 Bus control word
Function, Bus I/O Out Bits
P481 [-01] 18
Bus / AS-i Dig Out1
Function, Bus I/O Out Bits
P481 [-02] 8
Bus / AS-i Dig Out2
Function, Bus I/O Out Bits
P481 [-03] 30
Bus / AS-i Dig Out3
Function, Bus I/O Out Bits
P481 [-04] 31
Bus / AS-i Dig Out4
Function, Bus I/O In Bits
P481 [-05] 0
Bus / IOE Dig Out1
Function, Bus I/O In Bits
P481 [-06] 0
Bus / IOE Dig Out2
Function, Bus I/O In Bits
P481 [-07] 0
Bus / 2nd IOE Dig Out1
Function, Bus I/O In Bits
P481 [-08] 0
Bus / 2nd IOE Dig Out2
Function, Bus I/O In Bits
P481 [-09] 0
Bit10 Bus status word
Function, Bus I/O In Bits
P481 [-10] 0
Bit13 Bus status word
Norm. Bus IO Out Bits [%]
P482 [-01] 100
Bus / AS-i Dig Out1
Norm. Bus IO Out Bits [%]
P482 [-02] 100
Bus / AS-i Dig Out2
Norm. Bus IO Out Bits [%]
P482 [-03] 100
Bus / AS-i Dig Out3
Norm. Bus IO Out Bits [%]
P482 [-04] 100
Bus / AS-i Dig Out4
Norm. Bus IO Out Bits [%]
P482 [-05] 100
Bus / IOE Dig Out1
Norm. Bus IO Out Bits [%]
P482 [-06] 100
Bus / IOE Dig Out2
Norm. Bus IO Out Bits [%]
P482 [-07] 100
Bus / 2nd IOE Dig Out1
BU 0200 GB-4411 Subject to technical alterations 247
465
SK 200E Manual for frequency inverters
Parameter Factory Super Setting after commissioning
Name
No. [Array] setting visor P1 P2 P3 P4
Norm. Bus IO Out Bits [%]
P482 [-08] 100
Bus / 2nd IOE Dig Out2
Norm. Bus IO Out Bits [%]
P482 [-09] 100
Bit10 Bus status word
Norm. Bus IO Out Bits [%]
P482 [-10] 100
Bit13 Bus status word
Hysteresis, Bus IO Out Bits [%]
P483 [-01] 10 S
Bus / AS-i Dig Out1
Hysteresis, Bus IO Out Bits [%]
P483 [-02] 10 S
Bus / AS-i Dig Out2
Hysteresis, Bus IO Out Bits [%]
P483 [-03] 10 S
Bus / AS-i Dig Out3
Hysteresis, Bus IO Out Bits [%]
P483 [-04] 10 S
Bus / AS-i Dig Out4
Hysteresis Bus IO Out Bits [%]
P483 [-05] 10 S
Bus / IOE Dig Out1
Hysteresis Bus IO Out Bits [%]
P483 [-06] 10 S
Bus / IOE Dig Out2
Hysteresis, Bus IO Out Bits [%]
P483 [-07] 10 S
Bus / 2nd IOE Dig Out1
Hysteresis, Bus IO Out Bits [%]
P483 [-08] 10 S
Bus / 2nd IOE Dig Out2
Hysteresis, Bus IO Out Bits [%]
P483 [-09] 10 S
Bit10 Bus status word
Hysteresis, Bus IO Out Bits [%]
P483 [-10] 10 S
Bit13 Bus status word
EXTRA FUNCTIONS (Section Fehler! Verweisquelle konnte nicht gefunden werden.)
P501 Inverter name 0
P502 [-01] (P) Value of master function 1 0 S
P502 [-02] (P) Value of master function 2 0 S
P502 [-03] (P) Value of master function 3 0 S
P503 Leading function output 0 S
P504 Pulse frequency [kHz] 6.0 S
P505 (P) Abs. minimum frequency [Hz] 2.0 S
P506 Auto. Error acknowledgement 0 S
P509 Source control word 0 S
Source setpoints 0
P510 [-01] S
Main setpoint source (auto)
Source setpoints 0
P510 [-02] S
Auxiliary setpoint source (auto)
P511 USS baud rate 3 S
P512 USS address 0
P513 Telegram time-out [s] 0.0 S
P514 CAN baud rate * [kBaud] 5 S
248 Subject to technical alterations BU 0200 GB-4411
466
6 Parameterisation
Parameter Factory Super Setting after commissioning
Name
No. [Array] setting visor P1 P2 P3 P4
CAN address
P515 [-01] 32(dec) S
slave address
CAN address
P515 [-02] 32(dec) S
broadcast slave address
CAN address *
P515 [-03] 32(dec) S
Master address
*) System bus
P516 (P) Skip frequency 1 [Hz] 0.0 S
P517 (P) Skip frequency area 1 [Hz] 2.0 S
P518 (P) Skip frequency 2 [Hz] 0.0 S
P519 (P) Skip frequency area 2 [Hz] 2.0 S
P520 (P) Flying start 0 S
P521 (P) Flying st. resolution [Hz] 0.05 S
P522 (P) Flying st. offset [Hz] 0.0 S
P523 Factory setting 0
P525 [-01] (P) Max. load monitoring 1 401 S
P525 [-02] (P) Max. load monitoring 2 401 S
P525 [-03] (P) Max. load monitoring 3 401 S
P526 [-01] (P) Min. load monitoring 1 0 S
P526 [-02] (P) Min. load monitoring 2 0 S
P526 [-03] (P) Min. load monitoring 3 0 S
P527 [-01] (P) Load monitoring, frequency 1 25 S
P527 [-02] (P) Load monitoring, frequency 2 25 S
P527 [-03] (P) Load monitoring, frequency 3 25 S
P528 (P) Load monitoring delay 2.0 S
P529 (P) Load monitoring mode 0 S
2
P533 Factor I t motor [%] 100 S
Torque disconnection limit [%]
P534 [-01] (P) 401 (off) S
Motor limit
Torque disconnection limit [%]
P534 [-02] (P) 401 (off) S
Generator limit
2
P535 I t motor 0
P536 Current limit 1.5 S
P537 Pulse disconnection [%] 150 S
P539 (P) Check output voltage 0 S
P540 (P) Mode phase sequence 0 S
P541 Set relay [hex] 0000 S
Set analog output [V]
P542 [-01] 0.0 S
first IOE
Set analog output [V]
P542 [-02] 0.0 S
second IOE
P543 [-01] (P) Actual bus value 1 1 S
P543 [-02] (P) Actual bus value 2 4 S
BU 0200 GB-4411 Subject to technical alterations 249
467
SK 200E Manual for frequency inverters
Parameter Factory Super Setting after commissioning
Name
No. [Array] setting visor P1 P2 P3 P4
P543 [-03] (P) Actual bus value 3 9 S
P546 [-01] (P) Function Bus setpoint 1 1 S
P546 [-02] (P) Function Bus setpoint 2 0 S
P546 [-03] (P) Function Bus setpoint 3 0 S
P549 PotentiometerBox function 1 S
P550 EEPROM copy order 0
CAN master cycle [ms]
P552 [-01] 0 S
CAN Master function
CAN master cycle [ms]
P552 [-02] 0 S
CANopen abs. encoder
P555 P chopper limit [%] 100 S
P556 Braking resistor >@ 120 S
P557 Brake resistor type [kW] 0 S
P558 (P) Flux delay [ms] 1 S
P559 (P) DC run-on time [s] 0.50 S
P560 Mode of parameter save 1 S
POSITIONING (Section 6.1.7) NOTE: Further details are listed and described in Manual BU 0210. (www.nord.com)
P600 (P) Position control 0 (off) S
P601 Actual position [rev] --- S
P602 Actual setpoint pos. [rev] --- S
P603 Current position diff. [rev] --- S
P604 Encoder type 0 S
Absolute value encoder
P605 [-01] 10 S
(multi)
Absolute value encoder
P605 [-02] 10 S
(single)
P607 [-01] Ratio (increment) 1 S
P607 [-02] Ratio (absolute) 1 S
P607 [-03] Ratio (setpoint/actual) 1 S
P608 [-01] Reduction ratio (increment) 1 S
P608 [-02] Reduction ratio (absolute) 1 S
Reduction ratio
P608 [-03] 1 S
(setpoint/actual)
P609 [-01] Offset position (incr.) [rev] 0 S
P609 [-02] Offset position (abs.) [rev] 0 S
P610 Setpoint mode 0 S
P611 Position controller P [%] 5 S
P612 Pos. Window [rev] 0 S
P613 [-01] Position 1 [rev] 0 S
P613 [-02] Position 2 [rev] 0 S
P613 [-03] Position 3 [rev] 0 S
250 Subject to technical alterations BU 0200 GB-4411
468
6 Parameterisation
Parameter Factory Super Setting after commissioning
Name
No. [Array] setting visor P1 P2 P3 P4
P613 [-04] Position 4 [rev] 0 S
P613 [-05] Position 5 [rev] 0 S
P613 [-06] Position 6 [rev] 0 S
P613 [-07] Position 7 [rev] 0 S
P613 [-08] Position 8 [rev] 0 S
P613 [-09] Position 9 [rev] 0 S
P613 [-10] Position 10 [rev] 0 S
P613 [-11] Position 11 [rev] 0 S
P613 [-12] Position 12 [rev] 0 S
P613 [-13] Position 13 [rev] 0 S
P613 [-14] Position 14 [rev] 0 S
P613 [-15] Position 15 [rev] 0 S
P613 [-16] Position 16 [rev] 0 S
P613 [-17] Position 17 [rev] 0 S
P613 [-18] Position 18 [rev] 0 S
P613 [-19] Position 19 [rev] 0 S
P613 [-20] Position 20 [rev] 0 S
P613 [-21] Position 21 [rev] 0 S
P613 [-22] Position 22 [rev] 0 S
P613 [-23] Position 23 [rev] 0 S
P613 [-24] Position 24 [rev] 0 S
P613 [-25] Position 25 [rev] 0 S
P613 [-26] Position 26 [rev] 0 S
P613 [-27] Position 27 [rev] 0 S
P613 [-28] Position 28 [rev] 0 S
P613 [-29] Position 29 [rev] 0 S
P613 [-30] Position 30 [rev] 0 S
P613 [-31] Position 31 [rev] 0 S
P613 [-32] Position 32 [rev] 0 S
P613 [-33] Position 33 [rev] 0 S
P613 [-34] Position 34 [rev] 0 S
P613 [-35] Position 35 [rev] 0 S
P613 [-36] Position 36 [rev] 0 S
P613 [-37] Position 37 [rev] 0 S
P613 [-38] Position 38 [rev] 0 S
P613 [-39] Position 39 [rev] 0 S
P613 [-40] Position 40 [rev] 0 S
P613 [-41] Position 41 [rev] 0 S
P613 [-42] Position 42 [rev] 0 S
P613 [-43] Position 43 [rev] 0 S
BU 0200 GB-4411 Subject to technical alterations 251
469
SK 200E Manual for frequency inverters
Parameter Factory Super Setting after commissioning
Name
No. [Array] setting visor P1 P2 P3 P4
P613 [-44] Position 44 [rev] 0 S
P613 [-45] Position 45 [rev] 0 S
P613 [-46] Position 46 [rev] 0 S
P613 [-47] Position 47 [rev] 0 S
P613 [-48] Position 48 [rev] 0 S
P613 [-49] Position 49 [rev] 0 S
P613 [-50] Position 50 [rev] 0 S
P613 [-51] Position 51 [rev] 0 S
P613 [-52] Position 52 [rev] 0 S
P613 [-53] Position 53 [rev] 0 S
P613 [-54] Position 54 [rev] 0 S
P613 [-55] Position 55 [rev] 0 S
P613 [-56] Position 56 [rev] 0 S
P613 [-57] Position 57 [rev] 0 S
P613 [-58] Position 58 [rev] 0 S
P613 [-59] Position 59 [rev] 0 S
P613 [-60] Position 60 [rev] 0 S
P613 [-61] Position 61 [rev] 0 S
P613 [-62] Position 62 [rev] 0 S
P613 [-63] Position 63 [rev] 0 S
P615 Maximum position [rev] 0 S
P616 Minimum position [rev] 0 S
P625 Hysteresis output [rev] 1 S
P626 Relay position [rev] 0 S
P630 Position slip error [rev] 0 S
P631 Abs/Inc slip error [rev] 0 S
P640 Unit of pos. value 0 S
Parameter No. Superv
Name Actual status and displayed values
[Array] isor
INFORMATION (6.1.8), read only
Current fault
P700 [-01]
Current fault
Current fault
P700 [-02]
Current warning
Current fault
P700 [-03]
Reason FI blocked
P701 [-«-05] Last fault 1...5
P702 [-«-05] Freq. Last error 1...5 S
P703 [-«-05] Current, last error 1...5 S
252 Subject to technical alterations BU 0200 GB-4411
470
6 Parameterisation
Parameter No. Superv
Name Actual status and displayed values
[Array] isor
INFORMATION (6.1.8), read only
P704 [-«-05] Voltage, last error 1...5 S
P705 [-«-05] VDC last error 1...5 S
P706 [-«-05] P-set, last error 1...5 S
Software version
P707 [-«-03]
Version / Revision / Special
P708 State of digital inputs (bin/hex)
P709 [-«-09] Analog input voltage [V]
P1/P2/AI1/AI2/SW/DI2/DI3/AI1 2nd/AI2 2nd
Analog output voltage [V]
P710 [-«-02]
first IOE / second IOE
P711 State of relays [hex]
P714 Operating time [h]
P715 Running time [h]
P716 Current frequency [Hz]
P717 Current speed [rpm]
Current setpoint frequency 1..3
P718 [-«-03]
[Hz]
P719 Actual current [A]
P720 Actual torque current [A]
P721 Actual field current [A]
P722 Current voltage [V]
P723 Voltage-d [V] S
P724 Voltage-q [V] S
P725 Current cos phi
P726 Apparent power [kVA]
P727 Mechanical power [kW]
P728 Input voltage [V]
P729 Torque [%]
P730 Field [%]
P731 Parameter set
P732 Phase U current [A] S
P733 Phase V current [A] S
P734 Phase W current [A] S
P735 Speed encoder [rpm] S
P736 D.c. link voltage [V]
P737 Usage rate brake resistor [%]
P738 [-«-02] Usage rate motor [%]
P739 [-«-03] Heat sink temperature [°C]
P740 [-«-13] Process data Bus In [hex] S
P741 [-«-10] Process data Bus Out [hex] S
P742 Database version S
P743 Inverter ID [kW]
BU 0200 GB-4411 Subject to technical alterations 253
471
SK 200E Manual for frequency inverters
Parameter No. Superv
Name Actual status and displayed values
[Array] isor
INFORMATION (6.1.8), read only
P744 Configuration [hex]
Inverter voltage range
P747
230/400V
P748 Status CANopen * [hex]
*) System bus
P749 Status DIP switches [hex]
P750 Stat. overcurrent S
P751 Stat. overvoltage S
P752 Stat. mains failure S
P753 Stat. overtemperature S
P754 Stat. parameter loss S
P755 Stat. system error S
P756 Stat. timeout S
P757 Stat. customer error S
P760 Actual current S
P799 [-«-05] Op. hrs. last fault 1...5 [h]
254 Subject to technical alterations BU 0200 GB-4411
472
6 Parameterisation
6.3.2 Parameter overview, I/O extension
Parameter Factory Super Setting after commissioning
Name
No. [Array] setting visor
BASIC PARAMETERS (Section 6.2.1)
P150 Set relays 0
P152 Factory setting 0
Min. system bus cycle time
P153 [-01] 10
(SDO)
Min. system bus cycle time
P153 [-02] 5
(PDO)
P160 Set analog output -0.1
P161 [-01] Filter time 100
P161 [-02] Filter time 100
P161 [-03] Filter time 0
P161 [-04] Filter time 2
P161 [-05] Filter time 2
P161 [-06] Filter time 2
P161 [-07] Filter time 2
P161 [-08] Filter time 0
P161 [-09] Filter time 0
P162 Send broadcast 0
P163 Inversion of Analog Out 0
INFORMATION (Section 6.2.2)
P170 ... Actual error 1
[-01] (actual present fault)
P170 ... Actual error 2
[-02] (Last fault)
Software version
P171 [-01]
(Version number)
Software version 2
P171 [-02]
(Revision number)
Software version 3
P171 [-03]
(Special version)
P172 Configuration
P173 Option status
P174 State of digital inputs
P175 State of relays
P176 [-01] Current voltage (AIN1)
P176 [-02] Current voltage (AIN2)
P176 [-03] Current voltage (AOUT)
BU 0200 GB-4411 Subject to technical alterations 255
473
474
475
476
7 Status messages
7 Operating status messages
In case of deviation from the normal operating state, frequency inverters and Technology Units generate a
message according to the cause. A differentiation is made between warnings and error messages. If the
frequency inverter is in a "switch-on block" status, the cause of this can also be displayed.
Display of the Technology Unit messages is carried out via parameter (P170). The messages generated for
the freqency inverter are displayed in the relevant array of the parameter (P700).
Frequency inverter switch-on block
If the frequency inverter is in the status "Not ready" or "Switch-on block", the cause is displayed in the third
array element of parameter (P700) (as of software version V1.2 R0)
Display is only possible with the NordCon software or the ParameterBox (SK PAR-3H).
Warning messages
Warning messages are generated (as of software version V1.2 R0) as soon as a defined limit is reached,
which does not however result in the frequency inverter being switched off. These messages can be
displayed via array element [-02] in parameter (P700) until either the cause of the warning is no longer
present or the frequency inverter has gone into fault status with an error message.
Error messages
Errors cause the frequency inverters to switch off, in order to prevent a device fault.
The following options are available to reset a fault (acknowledge):
1. Switching the mains off and on again,
2. By an appropriately programmed digital input (P420 = Function 12),
3. E\VZLWFKLQJRIWKH³HQDEOH´RQWKHIUHTXHQF\LQYHUWHU to Low (if no digital input is programmed for
acknowledgement),
4. by a Bus acknowledgement or
5. by P506, the automatic error acknowledgement.
An error message can only be acknowledged if its direct cause is no longer present.
Device LEDs: As supplied, various LEDs (green/red/yellow) are externally visible. These indicate the
actual status of the device (Section 4.1)
FI / DS LED: This LED (Section 4.1) is dual-colour and can therefore indicate both a ready or an error
status of the FI.
Green indicates the standby status and the presence of mains voltage. During operation
an increasingly rapid flashing code indicates the degree of overload of the FI output.
Red indicates the presence of an error by flashing with a frequency which corresponds to
the number code of the fault (Section 7.2).
BU 0200 GB-4411 Subject to technical alterations 259
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
SK 200E Manual for frequency inverters
8 Technical data
8.1 General data for frequency inverter series SK 2xxE
Function Specification
Output frequency «+]
Pulse frequency «kHz, standard setting = 6kHz
Power reduction > 8kHz for 115/230V device, >6kHz for 400V device.
Typical overload capacity 150% for 60s, 200% for 3.5s
Protective measures against Overtemperature of the frequency inverter, Short-circuit, earthing fault,
overvoltage and undervoltage overload, idling
Regulation and control Sensorless current vector control (ISD), linear V/f characteristic curve,
automatic flux adaptation (energy-saving function)
2
Motor temperature monitoring I t motor, PTC / Bimetal switch
Digital input 3 or 4x, Low 0-5V, High 14-30V, Ri = 9.5k:, Ci = 10nF, cycle time = 4ms
Electrical isolation Control terminals
Control outputs Digital output: 18-30V DC (according to VI 24V), max. 200mA, max. 100k: load
Brake rectifier: max. 0.5A choke current, voltage according to mains
Interfaces Standard: RS 485 (USS) Option: Profibus, CANopen,
RS 232 (Single Slave) DeviceNet, AS-Interface,
System bus EtherCAT, PROFINET
Efficiency of frequency inverter approx. 95% according to size
Storage and transport temperature -&«°C
Operating / ambient temperature -&«&DFFRUGLQJWRRSHUDWLQJPRGH 'HWDLOV 6HFWLRQ8.3)
ATEX: -«& 'HWDLOV 6HFWLRQ2.10)
Long-term storage See Section 9.12.1
Protection class IP55, optionally IP66 (S 4 only IP55 without or with IP66 special measures
according to Section 1.7)
Max. Installation altitude above sea Up to 1000m: No power reduction
level
1000...4000m: 1%/ 100m power reduction (up to 2000m overvoltage cat. 3)
2000...4000m: Only overvoltage category 2 is complied with, external
overvoltage protection at the mains input is necessary
Ambient conditions Transport (IEC 60721-3-2): Vibration: 2M2
Operation (IEC 60721-3-3): Vibration: 3M7;
Climate: 3K3 (IP55) / 3K4 (IP66)
Waiting period between
60 sec for all devices in normal operating cycle
two power-up cycles
2 2
Mains/motor/brake 4mm flexible with wiring sleeves, 6mm with rigid cable Terminal screw
resistance tightening
Connection 2 2 torque
terminals Control unit /System bus 2.5mm , with wiring sleeves 1.5mm 1.2...1.5Nm
RS485 / RS232 1x RJ12 (6-pin)
24V - Output
24V DC ±25%, max. 200mA
SK 2x0E: (Terminal 43)
Digital outputs 24V DC ±25%, max. 20mA
SK 2x5E: 24V supply - input
«9'&DWOHDVW0mA according to load
(Terminal 44)
Digital output «9'&DFFRUGLQJWRVXSSO\YROWDJH 7HUPLQDO PD[P$
270 Subject to technical alterations BU 0200 GB-4411
488
8 Technical data
8.2 General data for mains/setpoint modules
Mains/setpoint modules (SK CU4/TU4-24V-..., SK TU4-POT-...)
Function Specification
Analog setpoint input / PI input 9P$ LIQHFHVVDU\ZLWKEXUGHQ VFDODEOH
Analog setpoint resolution 10 bit based on measurement range
Analog output 0/2 ... 10V, 0/4 ... 20mA scalable
Setpoint consistency Analog < 1% Digital < 0.02%
Level of radio interference suppression B
Input voltage 1~ 100V -«9 6. xU4-«-123-B)
1~ 380V -«9 6. xU4-«-140-B)
Output voltage 24V DC ± 10%
Max. permissible continuous output 420 mA
current
Protective measures against Short circuit Overtemperature, overload
(limited monitoring)
Long-term storage See Section 9.12.1
BU 0200 GB-4411 Subject to technical alterations 271
489
490
8 Technical data
8.3.1 Electrical data 1~115V
Size 1 Size 2
Device type: 6.[(« -250-112-O -370-112-O -550-112-O -750-112-O
Nominal motor power 230V 0.25 kW 0.37 kW 0.55 kW 0.75 kW
1
(4-pole standard motor) 240V /3 hp ½ hp ¾ hp 1 hp
Mains voltage 1~ 115V 1 AC «9r «+]
Typical input current 1~ rms 8.9 A 11 A 13.1 A 20.1 A
at 115V 1~ FLA 8.9 A 10.8 A 13.1 A 20.1 A
1 AC
Rec. mains fuse 16 A 16 A 16 A 25 A
Input
slow-acting [A]
RK5 or faster
30 A 30 A 30 A 30 A
fuses, min. 115V
Permissible
Bussmann FRS-R-30 FRS-R-30 FRS-R-30 FRS-R-30
mains fuses (UL)
Circuit breaker*
25 A 25 A 25 A 25 A
min. 115V
Output voltage 3~ 230V 3 AC 0 ± 2x mains voltage
rms 1.7 A 2.2 A 3.0 A 4.0 A
Output
Nominal output Motor
1.7 A 1.7 A 3.0 A 3.0 A
current at 230V Assembly**
Wall-mounted** 1.7 A 2.2 A 3.0 A 4.0 A
Min. braking resistor 75 : 75 : 75 : 75 :
Recommended braking
Section 2.3 100 : 100 : 100 : 100 :
resistor
Motor-mounted (ventilated)
Max. continuous power / max. continuous current:
S1-50°C 0.25kW / 1.6A 0.25kW / 1.6A 0.37kW / 2.6A 0.37kW / 2.6A
S1-40°C 0.25kW / 1.7A 0.25kW / 1.8A 0.55kW / 3.0A 0.55kW / 3.0A
S1-30°C 0.25kW / 1.7A 0.37kW / 2.0A 0.55kW / 3.0A 0.55kW / 3.4A
Max. permissible ambient temp. with nominal output current
S1 47°C 23°C 40°C 11°C
S3 70%ED 10min 50°C 35°C 50°C 25°C
S6 70%ED 10min (100% / 20%Mn) 50°C 30°C 45°C 20°C
Wall mounting (ventilated / unventilated)
Max. continuous power / max. continuous current:
S1-50°C 0.25kW / 1.6A 0.25kW / 1.6A 0.55kW / 3.0A 0.55kW / 3.0A
S1-40°C 0.25kW / 1.7A 0.37kW / 2.0A 0.55kW / 3.0A 0.55kW / 3.3A
S1-30°C 0.25kW / 1.7A 0.37kW / 2.1A 0.55kW / 3.0A 0.55kW / 3.6A
Max. permissible ambient temp. with nominal output current
S1 48°C 36°C 50°C 16°C
S3 70%ED 10min 50°C 40°C 50°C 30°C
S6 70%ED 10min (100% / 20%Mn) 50°C 40°C 50°C 25°C
* Circuit Breaker (inverse time trip type) as per UL489
** FLA (S1-40 °C)
BU 0200 GB-4411 Subject to technical alterations 273
491
SK 200E Manual for frequency inverters
8.3.2 Electrical data 1~230V
Size 1 Size 2 (only SK 2x5E...)
Device type: 6.[[(« -250-123-A -370-123-A -550-123-A -750-123-A -111-123-A
Nominal motor power 230V 0.25 kW 0.37 kW 0.55 kW 0.75 kW 1.1 kW
1
(4-pole standard motor) 240V /3 hp ½ hp ¾ hp 1 hp 1½ hp
Mains voltage 1~ 230V 1 AC 200 ... 240V, r 10%, 47 ... 63 Hz
Typical input current 1~ rms 3.9 A 5.8 A 7.3 A 10.2 A 14.7 A
at 230V 1~ FLA 3.9 A 5.8 A 7.3 A 10.1 A 14.6 A
1 AC
Rec. mains fuse 10 A 10 A 16 A 16 A 16 A
slow-acting [A]
Input
RK5 or faster
fuses, 10 A 10 A 10 A 30 A 30 A
min 230V
Permissible
mains fuses (UL) Bussmann FRS-R-10 FRS-R-10 FRS-R-10 FRS-R-30 FRS-R-30
Circuit breaker*
10 A 10 A 10 A 25 A 25 A
min. 230V
Output voltage 3~ 230V 3 AC 0 - Mains voltage
rms 1.7 A 2.2 A 2.9 A 4.0 A 5.5 A
Output
Nominal output Motor
1.7 A 2.2 A 2.6 A 4.0 A 5.5 A
current at 230V Assembly**
Wall-mounted** 1.7 A 2.2 A 2.9 A 4.0 A 4.4 A
Min. braking resistor 75 : 75 : 75 : 75 : 75 :
Recommended braking
Section 2.3 100 : 100 : 100 : 100 : 100
resistor
Motor-mounted (ventilated)
Max. continuous power / max. continuous current:
S1-50°C 0.25kW / 1.6A 0.25kW / 1.8A 0.37kW / 2.5A 0.55kW / 3.4A 0.75kW 4.3A
S1-40°C 0.25kW / 1.7A 0.37kW / 2.0A 0.55kW / 2.8A 0.55kW / 3.7A 0.75kW 4.8A
S1-30°C 0.25kW / 1.7A 0.37kW / 2.2A 0.55kW / 2.9A 0.75kW 4.0A 1.10kW / 5.4A
Max. permissible ambient temp. with nominal output current
S1 49°C 33°C 36°C 35°C 29°C
S3 70%ED 10min 50°C 45°C 45°C 45°C 40°C
S6 70%ED 10min (100% / 20%Mn) 50°C 40°C 40°C 40°C 35°C
Wall mounting (ventilated / unventilated)
Max. continuous power / max. continuous current:
S1-50°C 0.25kW / 1.5A 0.37kW / 2.2A 0.37kW / 2.7A 0.75kW / 4.0A 0.75kW / 4.3A
S1-40°C 0.25kW / 1.7A 0.37kW / 2.2A 0.55kW / 2.9A 0.75kW / 4.0A 0.75kW / 4.8A
S1-30°C 0.25kW / 1.7A 0.37kW / 2.2A 0.55kW / 2.9A 0.75kW / 4.0A 1.10kW / 5.3A
Max. permissible ambient temp. with nominal output current
S1 44°C 50°C 42°C 50°C 27°C
S3 70%ED 10min 50°C 50°C 45°C 50°C 40°C
S6 70%ED 10min (100% / 20%Mn) 45°C 50°C 45°C 50°C 35°C
* Circuit Breaker (inverse time trip type) as per UL489
** FLA (S1-40 °C)
274 Subject to technical alterations BU 0200 GB-4411
492
8 Technical data
8.3.3 Electrical data 3~230V
Size 1
Device type: 6.[[(« -250-323-A -370-323-A -550-323-A -750-323-A -111-323-A
Nominal motor power 230V 0.25 kW 0.37 kW 0.55 kW 0.75 kW 1.1 kW
1
(4-pole standard motor) 240V /3 hp ½ hp ¾ hp 1 hp 1½ hp
Mains voltage 3~ 230V 3 AC 200 ... 240V, r 10%, 47 ... 63 Hz
Typical input current 3~ rms 1.4 A 1.9 A 2.6 A 3.5 A 5.1 A
at 230V 3~ FLA 1.4 A 1.9 A 2.6 A 3.5 A 5.1 A
1 AC
Rec. mains fuse 10 A 10 A 10 A 10 A 16 A
slow-acting [A]
Input
RK5 or faster
fuses, 5.0 A 5.0 A 10 A 10 A 10 A
min 230V
Permissible
mains fuses (UL) Bussmann FRS-R-5 FRS-R-5 FRS-R-10 FRS-R-10 FRS-R-10
Circuit breaker*
5.0 A 5.0 A 10 A 10 A 10 A
min. 230V
Output voltage 3~ 230V 3 AC 0 - Mains voltage
rms 1.7 A 2.2 A 3.0 A 4.0 A 5.5 A
Output
Nominal output Motor
1.7A (45°C) 2.2A (45°C) 3.0A (45°C) 4.0A (45°C) 5.5A (45°C)
current at 230V Assembly**
Wall-mounted** 1.7A (45°C) 2.2A (45°C) 3.0A (45°C) 4.0A 4.0A
Min. braking resistor 100 : 100 : 100 : 100 : 100 :
Recommended braking
Section 2.3 200 : 200 : 200 : 200 : 200 :
resistor
Motor-mounting (ventilated), or wall mounting with SK TIE4-WMK-L-1 (ventilated)
Max. continuous power / max. continuous current:
S1-50°C 0.25kW / 1.7A 0.37kW / 2.2A 0.55kW / 3.0A 0.75kW / 4.0A 1.10kW / 5.5A
Max. permissible ambient temp. with nominal output current
S1 50°C 50°C 50°C 50°C 50°C
S3 70%ED 10min 50°C 50°C 50°C 50°C 50°C
S6 70%ED 10min (100% / 20%Mn) 50°C 50°C 50°C 50°C 50°C
Wall mounting (unventilated)
Max. continuous power / max. continuous current:
S1-50°C 0.25kW / 1.7A 0.37kW / 2.2A 0.55kW / 2.8A 0.55kW / 2.8A 0.55kW / 3.4A
S1-40°C 0.25kW / 1.7A 0.37kW / 2.2A 0.55kW / 3.0A 0.55kW / 3.5A 0.75kW / 4.2A
S1-30°C 0.25kW / 1.7A 0.37kW / 2.2A 0.55kW / 3.0A 0.75kW / 4.0A 0.75kW / 4.8A
Max. permissible ambient temp. with nominal output current
S1 50°C 50°C 48°C 32°C 20°C
S3 70%ED 10min 50°C 50°C 50°C 40°C 30°C
S6 70%ED 10min (100% / 20%Mn) 50°C 50°C 50°C 35°C 25°C
* Circuit Breaker (inverse time trip type) as per UL489
** FLA (S1-40 °C)
BU 0200 GB-4411 Subject to technical alterations 275
493
SK 200E Manual for frequency inverters
Size 2 Size 3
Device type: 6.[[(« -151-323-A -221-323-A -301-323-A -401-323-A
Nominal motor power 230V 1.5 kW 2.2 kW 3.0 kW 4.0 kW
(4-pole standard motor) 240V 2 hp 3 hp 4 hp 5 hp
Mains voltage 3~ 230V 3 AC 200 ... 240V, r 10%, 47 ... 63 Hz
Typical input current 3~ rms 6.6 A 9.1 A 11.8 A 15.1 A
at 230V 3~ FLA 6.6 A 9.1 A 11.7 A 14.9 A
1 AC
Rec. mains fuse 16 A 20 A 20 A 25 A
Input
slow-acting [A]
RK5 or faster
10 A 30 A 30 A 30 A
fuses, min. 230V
Permissible
Bussmann FRS-R-10 FRS-R-30 FRS-R-30 FRS-R-30
mains fuses (UL)
Circuit breaker*
10 A 25 A 25 A 25 A
min. 230V
Output voltage 3~ 230V 3 AC 0 - Mains voltage
rms 7.0 A 9.5 A 12.5 A 16.0 A
Output
Nominal output Motor
7.0A (45°C) 9.5A (45°C) 12.5A (45°C) 16.0A (45°C)
current at 230V Assembly**
Wall-mounted** 5.5 A 5.5 A 8.0 A 8.0A
Min. braking resistor 62 : 62 : 33 : 33 :
Recommended braking
Section 2.3 200 : 200 : 100 : 100
resistor
Motor-mounting (ventilated), or wall mounting with SK TIE4-WMK-L-1 (or -2) (ventilated)
Max. continuous power / max. continuous current:
S1-50°C 1.10kW / 7.0A 1.10kW / 9.2A 3.0kW / 12.5A 3.0kW / 14.5A
S1-40°C 1.10kW / 7.0A 2.20kW / 9.5A 3.0kW / 12.5A 4.0kW / 16.0A
Max. permissible ambient temp. with nominal output current
S1 50°C 49°C 50°C 46°C
S3 70%ED 10min 50°C 50°C 50°C 47°C
S6 70%ED 10min (100% / 20%Mn) 50°C 50°C 50°C 47°C
Wall mounting (unventilated)
Max. continuous power / max. continuous current:
S1-50°C 0.55kW / 3.8A 0.75kW / 4.7A 1.1kW / 6.8A 1.1kW / 6.8A
S1-40°C 0.75kW / 4.8A 1.10kW / 5.8A 1.5kW / 8.7A 1.5kW / 8.7A
S1-30°C 1.10kW / 5.7A 1.10kW / 6.7A 2.2kW / 10.4A 2.2kW / 10.4A
Max. permissible ambient temp. with nominal output current
S1 15°C 6°C 18°C -4°C
S3 70%ED 10min 25°C 20°C 30°C 0°C
S6 70%ED 10min (100% / 20%Mn) 20°C 10°C 25°C 0°C
* Circuit Breaker (inverse time trip type) as per UL489
** FLA (S1-40 °C)
276 Subject to technical alterations BU 0200 GB-4411
494
8 Technical data
Size 4
Device type: 6.[(« -551-323-A -751-323-A -112-323-A
Nominal motor power 230V 5.5 kW 7.5 kW 11.0 kW
(4-pole standard motor) 240V 7½ hp 10 hp 15 hp
Mains voltage 3~ 230V 3 AC 200 ... 240V, r 10%, 47 ... 63 Hz
Typical input current 3~ rms 23.5 A 29.5 A 40.5 A
at 230V 3~ FLA 22.5 A 28.5 A 39.0 A
1 AC
Rec. mains fuse 35 A 50 A 50 A
Input
slow-acting [A]
RK5 or faster
30 A 40 A 60 A
fuses, min. 230V
Permissible
Bussmann FRS-R-30 FRS-R-40 FRS-R-60
mains fuses (UL)
Circuit breaker*
30 A 40 A 60 A
min. 230V
Output voltage 3~ 230V 3 AC 0 - Mains voltage
rms 23.0 A 29.0 A 40.0 A
Output
Nominal output cur- Motor Assem-
23.0 A 29.0 A 40.0 A
rent at 230V bly**
Wall-mounted** 23.0 A 29.0 A 40.0 A
Min. braking resistor 30 : 20 : 15 :
Recommended braking
Sec. 2.3 47 : 47 : 23 :
resistor
Motor Assembly
Max. continuous power / max. continuous current:
S1-50¥ 5.5 kW / 23 A 7.5 kW / 29 A 7.5 kW / 29 A
S1-40°C 5.5 kW / 23 A 7.5 kW / 29 A 11.0 kW / 40A
Max. permissible ambient temp. with nominal output current
S1 50°C 50°C 42°C
S3 70%ED 10min 50°C 50°C 44°C
S6 70%ED 10min (100% / 20%Mn) 50°C 50°C 44°C
Wall-mounting
Max. continuous power / max. continuous current:
S1-50°C 5.5 kW / 23 A 7.5 kW / 29 A 7.5 kW / 29 A
S1-40°C 5.5 kW / 23 A 7.5 kW / 29 A 11.0 kW / 40A
Max. permissible ambient temp. with nominal output current
S1 50°C 50°C 42°C
S3 70%ED 10min 50°C 50°C 44°C
S6 70%ED 10min (100% / 20%Mn) 50°C 50°C 44°C
* Circuit Breaker (inverse time trip type) as per UL489
** FLA (S1-40 °C)
BU 0200 GB-4411 Subject to technical alterations 277
495
SK 200E Manual for frequency inverters
8.3.4 Electrical data 3~400V
Size 1
Device type: 6.[[(« -550-340-A -750-340-A -111-340-A -151-340-A -221-340-A
Nominal motor power 400V 0.55 kW 0.75 kW 1.1 kW 1.5 kW 2.2 kW
(4-pole standard motor) 480V ¾ hp 1 hp 1½ hp 2 hp 3 hp
Mains voltage 3~ 400V 3 AC 380 ... 500V, -20% / +10%, 47 ... 63 Hz
Typical input current 3~ rms 1.6 A 2.2 A 2.9 A 3.7 A 5.2 A
at 400V 3~ FLA 1.4 A 2.0 A 2.7 A 3.4 A 4.7 A
1 AC
Rec. mains fuse 10 A 10 A 10 A 10 A 10 A
slow-acting [A]
Input
RK5 or faster
fuses, 5.0 A 5.0 A 10 A 10 A 10 A
min 230V/400V
Permissible
mains fuses (UL) Bussmann FRS-R-5 FRS-R-5 FRS-R-10 FRS-R-10 FRS-R-10
Circuit breaker*
5.0 A 5.0 A 10 A 10 A 10 A
min. 230V/400V
Output voltage 3~ 400V 3 AC 0 - Mains voltage
rms 1.7 A 2.3 A 3.1 A 4.0 A 5.5 A
Output
Nominal output Motor
1.7A (45°C) 2.3A (45°C) 3.1A (45°C) 4.0A (45°C) 5.5A (45°C)
current at 400V Assembly**
Wall-mounted** 1.7A (45°C) 2.3A (45°C) 3.1A (45°C) 4.0A 4.0A
Min. braking resistor 200 : 200 : 200 : 200 : 200 :
Recommended braking
Section 2.3 400 : 400 : 400 : 400 : 400
resistor
Motor-mounting (ventilated), or wall mounting with SK TIE4-WMK-L-1 (ventilated)
Max. continuous power / max. continuous current:
S1-50°C 0.55kW / 1.7A 0.75kW / 2.3A 1.10kW / 3.1A 1.10kW / 4.0A 2.20kW / 5.5A
Max. permissible ambient temp. with nominal output current
S1 50°C 50°C 50°C 50°C 50°C
S3 70%ED 10min 50°C 50°C 50°C 50°C 50°C
S6 70%ED 10min (100% / 20%Mn) 50°C 50°C 50°C 50°C 50°C
Wall mounting (unventilated)
Max. continuous power / max. continuous current:
S1-50°C 0.55kW / 1.7A 0.75kW / 2.3A 0.75kW / 2.8A 0.75kW / 2.8A 0.75kW / 2.8A
S1-40°C 0.55kW / 1.7A 0.75kW / 2.3A 1.10kW / 3.1A 1.10kW / 3.3A 1.10kW / 3.3A
S1-30°C 0.55kW / 1.7A 0.75kW / 2.3A 1.10kW / 3.1A 1.10kW / 3.9A 1.10kW / 3.9A
Max. permissible ambient temp. with nominal output current
S1 50°C 50°C 45°C 29°C 1°C
S3 70%ED 10min 50°C 50°C 50°C 40°C 15°C
S6 70%ED 10min (100% / 20%Mn) 50°C 50°C 50°C 35°C 5° C
* Circuit Breaker (inverse time trip type) as per UL489
** FLA (S1-40 °C)
278 Subject to technical alterations BU 0200 GB-4411
496
8 Technical data
Size 2 Size 3
Device type: 6.[[(« -301-340-A -401-340-A -551-340-A -751-340-A
Nominal motor power 400V 3.0 kW 4.0 kW 5.5 kW 7.5 kW
(4-pole standard motor) 480V 4 hp 5 hp 7½ hp 10 hp
Mains voltage 3~ 400V 3 AC 380 ... 500V, -20% / +10%, 47 ... 63 Hz
Typical input current 3~ rms 7.0 A 8.9 A 11.7 A 15.0 A
at 400V 3~ FLA 6.3 A 8.0 A 10.3 A 13.1 A
1 AC
Rec. mains fuse 16 A 16 A 20 A 25 A
slow-acting [A]
Input
RK5 or faster
fuses, 10 A 30 A 30 A 30 A
min 230V/400V
Permissible
mains fuses (UL) Bussmann FRS-R-10 FRS-R-30 FRS-R-30 FRS-R-30
Circuit breaker*
10 A 25 A 25 A 25 A
min. 230V/400V
Output voltage 3~ 400V 3 AC 0 - Mains voltage
rms 7.5 A 9.5 A 12.5 A 16.0 A
Output
Nominal output Motor
7.5A (45°C) 9.5A (45°C) 12.5A (45°C) 16.0A (45°C)
current at 400V Assembly**
Wall-mounted** 5.5 A 5.5 A 8.0 A 8.0A
Min. braking resistor 110 : 110 : 68 : 68 :
Recommended braking
Section 2.3 200 : 200 : 200 : 200
resistor
Motor-mounting (ventilated), or wall mounting with SK TIE4-WMK-L-1 (or -2) (ventilated)
Max. continuous power / max. continuous current:
S1-50°C 2.2kW / 5.5A 3.0kW / 8.0A 4.0kW / 11.8A 5.5kW / 13.8A
S1-40°C 3.0kW / 7.5A 4.0kW / 9.5A 5.5kW / 12.5A 7.5kW / 16.0A
Max. permissible ambient temp. with nominal output current
S1 43°C 41°C 48°C 43°C
S3 70%ED 10min 45°C 45°C 50°C 45°C
S6 70%ED 10min (100% / 20%Mn) 45°C 41°C 50°C 45°C
Wall mounting (unventilated)
Max. continuous power / max. continuous current:
S1-50°C 1.1kW / 3.1A 1.5kW / 4.0A 1.5kW / 5.3A 2.2kW / 6.3A
S1-40°C 1.5kW / 4.0A 1.5kW / 4.9A 2.2kW / 6.9A 3.0kW / 7.9A
S1-30°C 1.5kW / 4.8A 2.2kW / 5.7A 3.0kW / 8.4A 4.0kW / 9.4A
Max. permissible ambient temp. with nominal output current
S1 -3°C -20°C 1°C -18°C
S3 70%ED 10min 0°C -5°C 15°C -5°C
S6 70%ED 10min (100% / 20%Mn) 0°C -15°C 5°C -10°C
* Circuit Breaker (inverse time trip type) as per UL489
** FLA (S1-40 °C)
BU 0200 GB-4411 Subject to technical alterations 279
497
SK 200E Manual for frequency inverters
Size 4
Device type: 6.[(« -112-340-A -152-340-A -182-340-A -222-340-A
Nominal motor power 400V 11.0 kW 15.0 kW 18.0 kW 22.0 kW
(4-pole standard motor) 480V 15 hp 20 hp 25 hp 30 hp
Mains voltage 3~ 400V 3 AC 380 ... 500V, -20 / + 10%, 47 ... 63 Hz
Typical input current 3~ rms 23.6 A 32.0 A 40.5 A 46.5 A
at 400V 3~ FLA 20.5 A 28.0 A 35.5 A 42.5 A
1 AC
Rec. mains fuse 35 A 50 A 50 A 63 A
slow-acting [A]
Input
RK5 or faster
fuses, 30 A 40 A 60 A 60 A
min 230V/400V
Permissible
mains fuses (UL) Bussmann FRS-R-30 FRS-R-40 FRS-R-60 FRS-R-60
Circuit breaker*
30 A 40 A 60 A 60 A
min. 230V/400V
Output voltage 3~ 400V 3 AC 0 - Mains voltage
rms 23.0 A 32.0 A 40.0 A 46.0 A
Output
Nominal output cur- Motor Assem-
23.0 A 32.0 A 40.0 A 46.0 A
rent at 400V bly**
Wall-mounted** 23.0 A 29.0 A 40.0 A 46.0 A
Min. braking resistor 47 : 33 : 27 : 24 :
Recommended braking
Sec. 2.3 100 : 100 : 50 : 50 :
resistor
Motor Assembly
Max. continuous power / max. continuous current:
S1-50¥ 11.0 kW / 23 A 15.0 kW / 32 A 15.0 kW / 29 A 15.0 kW / 29 A
S1-40°C 11.0 kW / 23 A 15.0 kW / 32 A 18.5 kW / 40 A 22.0 kW / 40 A
Max. permissible ambient temp. with nominal output current
S1 50°C 50°C 45°C 40°C
S3 70%ED 10min 50°C 50°C 46°C 42°C
S6 70%ED 10min (100% / 20%Mn) 50°C 50°C 46°C 42°C
Wall-mounting
Max. continuous power / max. continuous current:
S1-50°C 11.0 kW / 23 A 15.0 kW / 32 A 15.0 kW / 29 A 15.0 kW / 29 A
S1-40°C 11.0 kW / 23 A 15.0 kW / 32 A 18.5 kW / 40 A 22.0 kW / 40 A
Max. permissible ambient temp. with nominal output current
S1 50°C 50°C 45°C 40°C
S3 70%ED 10min 50°C 50°C 46°C 42°C
S6 70%ED 10min (100% / 20%Mn) 50°C 50°C 47°C 42°C
* Circuit Breaker (inverse time trip type) as per UL489
** FLA (S1-40 °C)
280 Subject to technical alterations BU 0200 GB-4411
498
9 Additional Information
9 Additional information
9.1 Setpoint processing in the SK 2xxE
BU 0200 GB-4411 Subject to technical alterations 281
499
SK 200E Manual for frequency inverters
9.2 Process controller
The process controller is a PI controller, with which it is possible to limit the controller output. In addition, the
output is standardised to a percentage of a master setpoint value. This provides the possibility of controlling
an upstream drive unit with the master setpoint value and adjusting it with the PI controller.
Ramp time PI setpoint P416
Master set-
point value
a) Analog input 1
(P400[-03]=2)
Min. limit
b) or
P466
c) Analog Input 2
Setpoint
a) P412 = 0.0-10.0V
P-Factor P413 Start-up time P102
I-Factor P414
x1
X + +
+ x2 y
x1*x2
y=
Actual val- - PI controller
100 % Setpoint ramp
ue max. limit
Analog input 1 P415 Lead value
(P400[-03]=6)
Analog input
or
Analog Input 2 (P400[..] = 16)
Fig.: Process controller flow-chart
9.2.1 Process controller application example
Controlled drive via CR Compensating roller = CR (dancer roller) Pilot machine
0V
M M
M M
Centre 5V
nominal
Actual position
position
of CR via
10V
potentiometer
0-10V
Frequency inverter f
Setpoint of pilot machine AIN 1 Controller lim-
it P415 in %
of setpoint
Enabled right DIN 1
Controller
limit P415
Actual position CR AIN 2 Setpoint of
pilot machine
Nominal position CR
t
via parameter P412
282 Subject to technical alterations BU 0200 GB-4411
500
9 Additional Information
9.2.2 Process controller parameter settings
(Example: Setpoint frequency: 50 Hz, control limits: +/- 25%)
§ Setpointfr q.>Hz@u P415>%@ ·
P105 (Maximum frequency) [Hz] > @
: t Setpointfr q. Hz ¨ ¸
© 100% ¹
50 Hz u 25%
Example: t 50 Hz 62,5Hz
100%
P400 [-01] (Funct. Analog input1) : ³ (frequency addition)
P411 (Setpoint frequency) [Hz] : Setpoint frequency with 10V at analog input 1
Example: 50 Hz
P412 (Process controller setpoint) : Central setting of compensating roller / factory setting 5V (adjust if
necessary)
P413 (P-controller) [%] : factory setting 10% (adjust if necessary)
P414 (I-controller) [%/ms] : recommended 100%/s
P415 (Limit +/-) [%] : Control limit (see above)
Note: Parameter P415 is used as a control limit after the PI controller.
Example: 25% of setpoint
P416 (Ramp time PI setpoint) [s] : factory setting 2s (if necessary match to controller characteristics)
P420 [-01] (Funct. Digital input 1) : "1"Enable right
P400 [-02] (Funct. Analog input 2) : "6"PI process controller actual value
BU 0200 GB-4411 Subject to technical alterations 283
501
502
9 Additional Information
9.4 EMC limit value classes
Please note that these limit value classes are only reached if the standard pulse frequency (6kHz) is being
used and the length of the shielded motor cable does not exceed the permissible limits.
In addition, it is essential to use wiring suitable for EMC. The motor cable shielding must be applied on both
sides (frequency inverter shield angle and the metal motor terminal box).
Jumper position Cable emissions 150kHz - 30 MHz
Device type
Max. motor cable, shielded See Section
2.7.5 Class A 1 C2 Class B 1 C1
Jumper set 5m -
SK 2xxE motor-mounted
Jumper set 5m -
SK 2xxE wall-mounted
Overview of the standards, which according to product standard EN 61800-3 are applicable as
testing and measuring methods for electric drives whose speed can be altered:
Emission of interference
Emission from cables A 1 or C2
EN 55011
(interference voltage) -
Radiated emissions A 1 or C2
EN 55011
(Interference field strength) -
Interference immunity EN 61000-6-1, EN 61000-6-2
ESD, discharge of static electricity EN 61000-4-2 6kV (CD), 8kV (AD)
EMF, high frequency electro-magnetic
EN 61000-4-3 10V/m; 80 - 1000MHz
fields
Burst on control cables EN 61000-4-4 1kV
Burst on mains and motor cables EN 61000-4-4 2kV
Surge (phase-phase / phase-ground) EN 61000-4-5 1kV / 2kV
Cable-led interference due to high
EN 61000-4-6 10V, 0.15 - 80MHz
frequency fields
Voltage fluctuations and drops EN 61000-2-1 +10%, -15%; 90%
Voltage asymmetries and frequency
EN 61000-2-4 3%; 2%
changes
Wiring recommendations for mounting near to motor
Brake resistor
(Accessories)
EMC screw connector
B+ B-
L1 U
L1 U
M
110-120V
200-240V L2/N L2 V
380-480V V
50-60Hz L3 L3
W
W
3~
PE PE PE
SK 2xxE
BU 0200 GB-4411 Subject to technical alterations 285
503
SK 200E Manual for frequency inverters
9.5 Reduced output power
The SK 2xxE frequency inverter series is designed to handle certain overload situations. For example, 1.5x
overcurrent can be used for 60 sec. For approx. 3.5 sec a 2x overcurrent is possible. A reduction of the
overload capacity or its time must be taken into account in the following circumstances:
o Output frequencies < 2Hz and constant voltages (needle stationary)
o Pulse frequencies greater than the rated pulse frequency (P504)
o Increased mains voltage > 400V
o Increased heat sink temperature
On the basis of the following characteristic curves, the particular current / power limitation can be read off.
9.5.1 Increased heat dissipation due to pulse frequency
This illustration shows how the output current must be reduced, depending on the pulse frequency for 230V
and 400V devices, in order to avoid excessive heat dissipation in the frequency inverter.
For 400V devices, the reduction begins at a pulse frequency above 6kHz. For 230V devices, the reduction
begins at a pulse frequency above 8kHz.
Even with increased pulse frequencies the frequency inverter is capable of supplying its maximum peak
current, however only for a reduced period of time. The diagram shows the possible current load capacity
for continuous operation.
I / IN 1.2
1.2
1.1
0.9
k 400V f puls
0.8
k 230V f puls
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4 0.4
4 6 8 10 12 14 16
3 f puls Pulse frequency 16
[kHz]
286 Subject to technical alterations BU 0200 GB-4411
504
9 Additional Information
9.5.2 Reduced overcurrent due to time
The possible overload capacity changes depending on the duration of an overload. Several values are cited
in this table. If one of these limiting values is reached, the frequency inverter must have sufficient time (with
low utilisation or without load) in order to regenerate itself.
If operated repeatedly in the overload region at short intervals, the limiting values stated in the tables are
reduced.
230V devices: Reduced overload capacity (approx.) due to pulse frequency (P504) and time
Time [s]
Pulse frequency [kHz]
> 600 60 30 20 10 3.5
3...8 110% 150% 170% 180% 180% 200%
10 103% 140% 155% 165% 165% 180%
12 96% 130% 145% 155% 155% 160%
14 90% 120% 135% 145% 145% 150%
16 82% 110% 125% 135% 135% 140%
400V devices: Reduced overload capacity (approx.) due to pulse frequency (P504) and time
Time [s]
Pulse frequency [kHz]
> 600 60 30 20 10 3.5
3...6 110% 150% 170% 180% 180% 200%
8 100% 135% 150% 160% 160% 165%
10 90% 120% 135% 145% 145% 150%
12 78% 105% 120% 125% 125% 130%
14 67% 92% 104% 110% 110% 115%
16 57% 77% 87% 92% 92% 100%
BU 0200 GB-4411 Subject to technical alterations 287
505
SK 200E Manual for frequency inverters
9.5.3 Reduced overcurrent due to output frequency
To protect the power unit at low output frequencies (<4.5Hz) a monitoring system is provided, with which the
temperature of the IGBTs (integrated gate bipolar transistor) due to high current is determined. In order to
prevent current being taken off above the limit shown in the diagram, a pulse switch-off (P537) with a
variable limit is introduced. At a standstill, with 6kHz pulse frequency, current above 1.1x the nominal
current cannot be taken off.
I / IN 2.5 xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Proh b ted reg on
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
2
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
ax( f )
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
1.5
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
.5In_60sec( f )
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
.0In_1sec( f ) 1
0.5
0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
f
Output frequency [Hz]
The upper m ng va ues or he var ous pu se requenc es can be ob a ned rom he o ow ng ab es n a
cases he vD XH « ZK FK FDQ EH VH Q SDUDPH HU 3 V P HG R KH YD XH V D HG Q KH DE HV
accord ng o he pu se requency Va ues be ow he m can be se as requ red
230V dev ces Reduced ove oad capac y app ox due o pu se equency P504 and ou pu equency
Ou pu equency Hz
Pu se equency kHz
45 30 20 15 10 05 0
3 8 200% 170% 150% 140% 130% 120% 110%
10 180% 153% 135% 126% 117% 108% 100%
12 160% 136% 120% 112% 104% 96% 95%
14 150% 127% 112% 105% 97% 90% 90%
16 140% 119% 105% 98% 91% 84% 85%
400V dev ces Reduced ove oad capac y app ox due o pu se equency P504 and ou pu equency
Ou pu equency Hz
Pu se equency kHz
45 30 20 15 10 05 0
3 6 200% 170% 150% 140% 130% 120% 110%
8 165% 140% 123% 115% 107% 99% 90%
10 150% 127% 112% 105% 97% 90% 82%
12 130% 110% 97% 91% 84% 78% 71%
14 115% 97% 86% 80% 74% 69% 63%
16 100% 85% 75% 70% 65% 60% 55%
288 Subject to technical alterations BU 0200 GB-4411
506
9 Additional Information
9.5.4 Reduced output current due to mains voltage
The devices are designed with thermal characteristics according to the rated output currents. Accordingly,
for lower mains voltages, higher currents cannot be taken off in order to maintain the stated power constant.
For mains voltages above 400v there is a reduction of the permissible continuous output current, which is
inversely proportional to the mains voltage, in order to compensate for the increased switching losses.
I / IN 1.2
1.2
1.1
0.9
k Unetz( Unetz ) 0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4 0.4
320 340 360 380 400 420 440 460 480
320 Unetz 480
Mains voltage [V]
9.5.5 Reduced output current due to the heat sink temperature
The temperature of the heat sink in included in the calculation of the reduction of output current, so that at
low heat sink temperatures, a higher load capacity can be permitted, especially for higher pulse frequencies.
At high heat sink temperatures, the reduction is increased correspondingly. The ambient temperature and
the ventilation conditions for the device can therefore be optimally exploited.
BU 0200 GB-4411 Subject to technical alterations 289
507
SK 200E Manual for frequency inverters
9.6 Operation with FI circuit breakers
With SK 2xxE frequency inverters (except 115V devices), leakage currents of > 40mA are to be expected if
the mains filter is active. If possible, an FI circuit breaker for the protection of personnel should not be used.
If the frequency inverter is to be used with an FI circuit breaker for the protection of personnel, the leakage
currents to earth must be reduced to 10 - 20 mA by means of jumpers. However, with "operation on an IT
network" the FI loses its specified degree of interference protection.
Further details can be found in Section 2.7.5.
9.7 System bus
SK 2xxE series frequency inverters and components communicate with each other via the system bus. This
bus system is a CAN bus with a Canopen protocol. Up to four frequency inverters and their associated
components (field bus module, absolute encoder, I/O modules etc.) can be connected to the system bus.
Integration of the components into the bus does not require any BUS-specific knowledge on the part of the
user.
It is only necessary to take care that the correct physical structure of the bus system and the correct
addressing of the participants are complied with.
SYSTEM BUS
Configuration Example
1. FI 2. FI 3. FI 4. FI
Field Bus 1. I/O 8. I/O
Option Extension Extension
Note:
Terminal77 = System bus + (CAN H)
additional participants Terminal78 = System bus - (CAN L)
(I/O extensions, CANopen encoder Terminal numbers may differ
The connection of the individual NORD components is described in this manual
(See Section 2.8, 3.4 and 3.5).
Physical structure
Standard CAN
Bus length 20m with a wire cross section of 0.25mm² (AWG23)
Structure preferably linear
Spur cables possible, (max. 6m)
Termination resistors
P:DWERWKHQGVRIDV\VWHPEXV
(with SK 2xxE-«RU6. xU4-«YLD',3VZLWFKHV
Baud rate 250kBaud - preset
290 Subject to technical alterations BU 0200 GB-4411
508
509
510
9 Additional Information
9.9 Motor data - characteristic curves
9.9.1 50Hz characteristic curve
(Æ Adjustment range 01:10:00)
a) 115V / 230V frequency inverter
For 50Hz operation, the motor can be used at the
M/MN 50 Hz characteristic curve (4-pole motor)
rated torque up to its rating point of 50Hz/230V. M/Mn
P/PN
In spite of this, operation above 50Hz is possible,
1,2
however the output torque reduces in a non-linear
manner (see following diagram). Above the rating 1
point the motor enters its field reduction range, as 0,8
with an increase of frequency above 50Hz, the
0,6
voltage can not be increased above 230V. Due to
the mains voltage, only max. 230V are available. 0,4
Up to a power of 4 kW, the following data refer to 0,2
a 230/400V motor winding.
0
Frequency
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
[Hz]
Frequenz / Hz Speed
0 1445
Drehzahl / 1/min 2890
[1/min]
Parameterisation data for frequency inverter
Frequency inverter type nN RSt
FN [Hz] -1 IN [A] UN [V] PN [kW] cos M Circuit
[min ] [:]
6.«6 TI 4 - SK 2xxE-250-x23-A* 50 1380 1,4 230 0,25 0,77 Delta 36,50
6.«/ TI 4 - SK 2xxE-370-x23-A* 50 1360 1,9 230 0,37 0,77 Delta 23,80
6.«6 TI 4 - SK 2xxE-550-x23-A* 50 1375 2,63 230 0,55 0,73 Delta 15,10
6.«/ TI 4 - SK 2xxE-750-x23-A* 50 1375 3,63 230 0,75 0,74 Delta 10,20
6.« 6 TI 4 - SK 2xxE-111-x23-A 50 1385 4,81 230 1,1 0,78 Delta 6,28
6.« / TI 4 - SK 2xxE-151-323-A 50 1385 6,3 230 1,5 0,80 Delta 4,37
6.«/ TI 4 - SK 2xxE-221-323-A 50 1440 9,03 230 2,2 0,74 Delta 2,43
6.«/$ TI 4 - SK 2xxE-301-323-A 50 1410 12 230 3,0 0,8 Delta 1,81
6.«0 TI 4 - SK 2xxE-401-323-A 50 1445 14,4 230 4,0 0,8 Delta 1,14
* the same data apply for the use of the 115V version of the SK2xxE
Power data at rating point
Frequency inverter type
-1P
PB [kW] nB [minP ] MB [Nm]
6.«6 TI 4 - SK 2xxE-250-x23-A* 0,25 1380 1,73
6.«/ TI 4 - SK 2xxE-370-x23-A* 0,37 1360 2,6
6.«6 TI 4 - SK 2xxE-550-x23-A* 0,55 1375 3,82
6.«/ TI 4 - SK 2xxE-750-x23-A* 0,75 1375 5,21
6.« 6 TI 4 - SK 2xxE-111-x23-A 1,1 1385 7,58
6.« / TI 4 - SK 2xxE-151-323-A 1,5 1385 10,34
6.«/ TI 4 - SK 2xxE-221-323-A 2,2 1440 14,59
6.«/$ TI 4 - SK 2xxE-301-323-A 3,0 1410 20,32
6.«0 TI 4 - SK 2xxE-401-323-A 4,0 1445 26,44
* the same data apply for the use of the 115V version of the SK2xxE
BU 0200 GB-4411 Subject to technical alterations 293
511
SK 200E Manual for frequency inverters
b) 400V frequency inverter
For 50Hz operation, the motor can be used at the rated torque up to its rating point of 50Hz/400V. In spite of
this, operation above 50Hz is possible, however the output torque reduces in a non-linear manner (see
following diagram). Above the rating point the motor enters its field reduction range, as with an increase of
frequency above 50Hz, the voltage can not be increased above 400V. Due to the mains voltage, only max.
400V are available.
Up to a power of 2.2W, the following data refer to a 230/400V motor winding. Above 3kW the data is based
in 400/690V windings.
Parameterisation data for frequency inverter
Frequency inverter type nN RSt
FN [Hz] -1 IN [A] UN [V] PN [kW] cos M Circuit
[min ] [:]
6.«6 TI 4 - SK 2xxE-550-340-A 50 1375 1,52 400 0,55 0,73 Star 15,10
6.«/ TI 4 - SK 2xxE-750-340-A 50 1375 2,10 400 0,75 0,74 Star 10,20
6.« 6 TI 4 - SK 2xxE-111-340-A 50 1385 2,78 400 1,1 0,78 Star 6,28
6.« / TI 4 - SK 2xxE-151-340-A 50 1385 3,64 400 1,5 0,80 Star 4,37
6.«100L/4 TI 4 - SK 2xxE-221-340-A 50 1440 5,22 400 2,2 0,74 Star 2,43
6.«/$ TI 4 - SK 2xxE-301-340-A 50 1410 6,9 400 3,0 0,8 Delta 5,45
6.«0 TI 4 - SK 2xxE-401-340-A 50 1445 8,3 400 4,0 0,8 Delta 3,44
6.«6 TI 4 - SK 2xxE-551-340-A 50 1445 11,4 400 5,5 0,81 Delta 2,27
6.«0 TI 4 - SK 2xxE-751-340-A 50 1445 14,8 400 7,5 0,84 Delta 1,45
Power data at rating point
Frequency inverter type
-1P
PB [kW] nB [minP ] MB [Nm]
6.«6 TI 4 - SK 2xxE-550-340-A 0,55 1375 3,82
SK«/ TI 4 - SK 2xxE-750-340-A 0,75 1375 5,21
6.« 6 TI 4 - SK 2xxE-111-340-A 1,1 1385 7,58
6.« / TI 4 - SK 2xxE-151-340-A 1,5 1385 10,34
6.«/ TI 4 - SK 2xxE-221-340-A 2,2 1440 14,59
6.«/$ TI 4 - SK 2xxE-301-340-A 3,0 1410 20,32
6.«0 TI 4 - SK 2xxE-401-340-A 4,0 1445 26,44
6.«6 TI 4 - SK 2xxE-551-340-A 5,5 1445 36,5
6.«0 TI 4 - SK 2xxE-751-340-A 7,5 1445 49,6
294 Subject to technical alterations BU 0200 GB-4411
512
9 Additional Information
9.9.2 87Hz characteristic curve (only 400V devices)
(Æ Adjustment range 01:17:00)
The 87Hz characteristic curve is an extension of the
M/MN 87 Hz characteristic curve (4-pole motor)
speed adjustment range with a constant rated M/Mn
P/PN
torque for the motor. In order to implement this, the 1,2
following points must be fulfilled:
1
0,8
x Delta motor circuit with 230/400V motor
0,6
windings
0,4
x Frequency inverter with an operating voltage
0,2
of 3~400V
0
x The output current of the frequency inverter 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 Frequency
must be greater than the delta current of the [Hz]
Frequenz / Hz Speed
0 1445 2890
motor used (Guide value Æ frequency inverter [1/min]
power t 3 x motor power)
In this configuration the motor has a rated operating point at 230V/50Hz and an extended operating point at
400V/87Hz. This increases the power of the drive unit by a factor of 3. The rated torque of the motor
remains constant up to a frequency of 87Hz. Operation of the 230V winding with 400V is not critical, as the
insulation is designed for a test voltage of >1000V.
NOTE: The following motor data applies for standard motors with 230/400V windings.
Parameterisation data for frequency inverter
Frequency inverter type RSt
-1
FN [Hz] nN[min ] IN [A] UN [V] PN [kW] cos M Circuit
[:]
6.«6 TI 4 - SK 2xxE-550-340-A 50 1380 1,32 230 0,25 0,77 Delta 36,50
6.«/ TI 4 - SK 2xxE-750-340-A 50 1360 1,91 230 0,37 0,75 Delta 23,80
6.«6 TI 4 - SK 2xxE-111-340-A 50 1375 2,63 230 0,55 0,73 Delta 15,10
6.«/ TI 4 - SK 2xxE-151-340-A 50 1375 3,64 230 0,75 0,74 Delta 10,20
6.« 6 TI 4 - SK 2xxE-221-340-A 50 1385 4,81 230 1,1 0,78 Delta 6,28
6.« / TI 4 - SK 2xxE-301-340-A 50 1385 6,30 230 1,5 0,80 Delta 4,37
6.«/ TI 4 - SK 2xxE-401-340-A 50 1440 9,03 230 2,2 0,74 Delta 2,43
6.«/$ TI 4 - SK 2xxE-551-340-A 50 1410 12 230 3,0 0,8 Delta 1,81
6.«0 TI 4 - SK 2xxE-751-340-A 50 1445 14,4 230 4,0 0,8 Delta 1,14
Power data at rating point
Frequency inverter type
-1
PB [kW] nB [min ] MB [Nm]
6.«6 TI 4 - SK 2xxE-550-340-A 0,43 2475 1,65
6.«/ TI 4 - SK 2xxE-750-340-A 0,64 2455 2,49
6.«6 TI 4 - SK 2xxE-111-340-A 0,95 2470 3,67
6.«/ TI 4 - SK 2xxE-151-340-A 1,3 2470 5,01
SK« 6 TI 4 - SK 2xxE-221-340-A 1,9 2480 7,32
6.« / TI 4 - SK 2xxE-301-340-A 2,6 2480 10,01
6.«/ TI 4 - SK 2xxE-401-340-A 3,8 2535 14,32
6.«/$ TI 4 - SK 2xxE-551-340-A 5,2 2505 20,1
6.«0 TI 4 - SK 2xxE-751-340-A 6,9 2540 26,1
BU 0200 GB-4411 Subject to technical alterations 295
513
SK 200E Manual for frequency inverters
9.9.3 100Hz characteristic curve (only 400V devices)
(Æ Adjustment range 1:20)
For a large speed adjustment range up to a ratio of 1:20 M/MN Kennlinie 100 Hz (4-poliger
100 Hz characteristic Motor)
curve (4-pole motor)
an operating point of 100Hz/400V may be selected. For M/Mn
P/PN
this, special motor data is necessary (see below), which
1,2
deviates from the normal 50Hz data. Care must be
taken that a constant torque is produced over the entire 1
adjustment range, however this is smaller than the rated 0,8
torque for 50Hz operation.
0,6
In addition to the large speed adjustment range, a 0,4
further benefit is the better temperature characteristic of
0,2
the motor. In the low output speed range an external
fan is not strictly necessary. 0
Frequency
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
[Hz]
NOTE: The following motor data applies for Speed
0 Frequenz
1445 / Hz 2890
standard motors with 230/400V windings. [1/min]
Parameterisation data for frequency inverter
Frequency inverter type nN
FN [Hz] -1 IN [A] UN [V] PN [kW] cos M Circuit RSt [:]
[min ]
6.«6 TI 4 - SK 2xxE-550-340-A 100 2855 1,2 400 0,37 0,79 Delta 40,60
6.«/ TI 4 - SK 2xxE-550-340-A 100 2860 1,8 400 0,55 0,75 Delta 22,70
6.«6 TI 4 - SK 2xxE-750-340-A 100 2885 2,4 400 0,75 0,77 Delta 16,20
6.«/ TI 4 - SK 2xxE-111-340-A 100 2900 3,0 400 1,1 0,75 Delta 10,80
6.« 6 TI 4 - SK 2xxE-151-340-A 100 2925 3,6 400 1,5 0,74 Delta 6,40
6.«90L/4 TI 4 - SK 2xxE-221-340-A 100 2920 4,9 400 2,2 0,79 Delta 4,67
6.«/ TI 4 - SK 2xxE-301-340-A 100 2940 6,7 400 3 0,77 Delta 2,43
6.«/$ TI 4 - SK 2xxE-401-340-A 100 2935 8,7 400 4 0,8 Delta 1,96
6.«0 TI 4 - SK 2xxE-551-340-A 100 2945 11,4 400 5,5 0,82 Delta 1,2
6.«6 TI 4 - SK 2xxE-751-340-A 100 2955 15,6 400 7,5 0,82 Delta 0,74
Power data at rating point
Frequency inverter type
-1
PB [kW] nB [min ] MB [Nm]
6.«6 TI 4 - SK 2xxE-550-340-A 0,37 2855 1,23
6.«/ TI 4 - SK 2xxE-550-340-A 0,55 2860 1,83
6.«6 TI 4 - SK 2xxE-750-340-A 0,75 2885 2,48
6.«/ TI 4 - SK 2xxE-111-340-A 1,1 2900 3,62
6.« 6 TI 4 - SK 2xxE-151-340-A 1,5 2925 4,90
6.« / TI 4 - SK 2xxE-221-340-A 2,2 2920 7,20
6.«/ TI 4 - SK 2xxE-301-340-A 3,0 2940 9,75
6.«/$ TI 4 - SK 2xxE-401-340-A 4,0 2935 13,0
6.«0 TI 4 - SK 2xxE-551-340-A 5,5 2945 18,0
6.«6 TI 4 - SK 2xxE-751-340-A 7,5 2955 24,3
296 Subject to technical alterations BU 0200 GB-4411
514
9 Additional Information
9.10 Standardisation of setpoint/actual values
The following table contains details for the standardisation of typical setpoint and actual values. This
information relates to the parameters (P400), (P418), (P543), (P546), (P740) or (P741).
Name Analog signal Bus signal
Setpoint Value Standardisation Value Max. Type 100% = -100% = Standardisation Limit
{Function} range range value absolute
Setpoint frequency 0-10V 3«3 ±100% 16384 INT 4000hex C000hex 4000hex * P105
{01} (10V=100%) (min - max) 16384dec -16385dec setpoint[Hz]/P105
Frequency 0-10V 3«3 ±200% 32767 INT 4000hex C000hex 4000hex * P105
addition (10V=100%) (min - max) 16384dec -16385dec setpoint[Hz]/P411
{02}
Frequency 0-10V 3«3 ±200% 32767 INT 4000hex C000hex 4000hex * P105
subtraction (10V=100%) (min - max) 16384dec -16385dec setpoint[Hz]/P411
{03}
Minimum 0-10V 50Hz* « 32767 INT 4000hex / 50Hz* P105
frequency (10V=100%) UAIN(V)/10V 16384dec Bus setpoint/4000hex
{04}
Maximum 0-10V 100Hz* « 32767 INT 4000hex / 100Hz* P105
frequency (10V=100%) UAIN(V)/10V 16384dec Bus setpoint/4000hex
{05}
Actual value 0-10V P105* ±100% 16384 INT 4000hex C000hex 4000hex * P105
Process controller (10V=100%) UAIN(V)/10V 16384dec -16385dec setpoint[Hz]/P105
{06}
Setpoint 0-10V P105* ±100% 16384 INT 4000hex C000hex 4000hex * P105
Process controller (10V=100%) UAIN(V)/10V 16384dec -16385dec setpoint[Hz]/P105
{07}
Torque current 0-10V P112* « 16384 INT 4000hex / 4000hex * I[A]/P112 P112
limit (10V=100%) UAIN(V)/10V 16384dec
{11}, {12}
Current limit 0-10V P536* « 16384 INT 4000hex / 4000hex * I[A]/P536 P536
{13}, {14} (10V=100%) UAIN(V)/10V 16384dec
Ramp time 0-10V 10s* « 32767 INT 4000hex / 10s * 20s
{15} (10V=100%) UAIN(V)/10V 16384dec Bus setpoint/4000hex
Actual values
{Function}
Actual frequency 0-10V P201* ±100% 16384 INT 4000hex C000hex 4000hex *
{01} (10V=100%) UAOut(V)/10V 16384dec -16385dec f[Hz]/P201
Speed 0-10V P202* ±200% 32767 INT 4000hex C000hex 4000hex *
{02} (10V=100%) UAOut(V)/10V 16384dec -16385dec n[rpm]/P202
Current 0-10V P203* ±200% 32767 INT 4000hex C000hex 4000hex *
{03} (10V=100%) UAOut(V)/10V 16384dec -16385dec f[Hz]/P105
Torque current 0-10V P112* 100/ ±200% 32767 INT 4000hex C000hex 4000hex *
{04} (10V=100%) ¥ 3 ð 3 ð
16384dec -16385dec Iq[A]/(P112)*100/
UAOut(V)/10V ¥ 3 ð 3 ð
Master value 0-10V P105* ±100% 16384 INT 4000hex C000hex 4000hex * f[Hz]/P105
setpoint frequency (10V=100%) UAOut(V)/10V 16384dec -16385dec
^ `«^4}
Speed from ±200% 32767 INT 4000hex C000hex 4000hex * n[rpm]/
speed encoder / / 16384dec -16385dec P201 * (60/number
{22} of pole pairs)
BU 0200 GB-4411 Subject to technical alterations 297
515
516
517
518
9 Additional Information
9.13 Abbreviations in this manual
AS (AS1) AS interface LED .......Light-emitting diode
AIN ...... Analog input P1 ..........Potentiometer 1 (QRW6.[(6«)
AOUT .. Analog output P2 ..........Potentiometer 2 (QRW6.[(6«)
BW ...... Brake resistor S ...........Supervisor Parameter, P003
DI (DIN) Digital input S1 ..........DIP switch FI (8-pole)
DO (DOUT) Digital output S2 ..........DIP switch FI (1-pole)
EEPROM Non-volatile memory SH ........."Safe stop" function
EMC ..... Electromagnetic compatibility SW .......Software version, P707
FI-(Switch) Leakage current circuit breaker TI ...........Technical information / Data sheet
FI ......... Frequency inverter ..............(Data sheet for NORD accessories)
I/O ........ In-/ Out (Input / Output)
ISD ....... Field current (Current vector control)
BU 0200 GB-4411 Subject to technical alterations 301
519
SK 200E Manual for frequency inverters
10 Keyword index
Array parameters .... 135, 142, 169, Bus baud rate (P514) ........... 214
3 170
Master cycle time (P552) ...... 226
3-Wire-Control...........................203 AS Interface ..........49, 52, 130, 160
CE ...................................... 15, 284
AS Interface structure .............. 162
A Characteristic curve setting ..... 183,
ATEX 186
Absolute minimum frequency ATEX Zone 22, Cat. 3D.......... 59 Charging error .......................... 269
(P505) ................................... 212
Optional ATEX modules ......... 60 Commissioning ......................... 149
Acceleration time (P102) ..........175
Auto. magn. adjustment (P219) 186 Configuration ........................ 76, 84
Accessories.................................12
Automatic error acknowledgement Configuration level (P172) ........ 240
Actual (P506) .................................. 213
Configuration level (P744) ........ 235
cos phi (P725) .......................232 Automatic flux optimisation (P219)
............................................. 292 Connection cross-section ..... 41, 45
Current (P719) ......................232
Automatic starting (P428) ......... 204 Connection unit .................... 74, 99
Field current (P721) ..............232
Control ...................................... 134
Frequency (P716) .................232 B Control clamps ......................... 192
Mains current (P760) ............237 Basic parameters Control connection
Operating status (P700) ........229 Frequency inverter ............... 175 Extension SK xU4-« .............. 76
Setpoint frequency (P718) .... 232 SK xU4 -IOE......................... 238 SK CU4-«.............................. 77
Speed (P717) ........................232 Boost precontrol (P215) ........... 184 SK CU4-24V-« ................ 94, 96
Torque current (P720) ...........232 Brake chopper ...................... 33, 42 SK CU4-CAO ................... 90, 92
Voltage (P722) ......................232 Brake coil voltage ........... 50, 52, 95 SK CU4-DEV .......................... 92
Voltage Ud (P723) ................232 Brake reaction time (P107)....... 178
SK CU4-ECT ........................ 122
Brake release time (P114)........ 181
Voltage Uq (P724) ................232 SK CU4-IOE ........................... 82
Brake resistor ............... 33, 42, 273
Actual frequency processing ..... 298 SK CU4-PBR .......................... 88
Brake resistor (P556) ............... 226
Actual values.............................297 SK CU4-POT .......................... 80
Brake resistor type (P557)........ 227
Actual voltage (P176)................241 SK TI4-TU-MSW .................. 102
Braking control ......................... 181
Adapter cable RJ12 ....................53
Braking distance....................... 179 SK TI4-TU-NET .................... 100
Address ..................................... 299
Broadcast ................................... 87 SK TIE4-POT ......................... 98
Addressing ..................................86
Bus actual value 1 ... 3 (P543) . 224 SK TIE4-SWT ......................... 98
Adjustment range 1/10 ..............293
BUS connection unit SK TI4-TU-... SK TU4-CAO ........................ 114
Adjustment range 1/17 ..............295 ............................................... 99
Adjustment range 1/20 ..............296 Bus I/O In Bits .......................... 208 SK TU4-DEV ........................ 118
Analog input adjustment 0% (P402) Bus I/O Out Bits ....................... 209 SK TU4-IOE ......................... 105
..............................................197
Bus setpoints............................ 225 SK TU4-PBR ........................ 110
Analog input adjustment 100%
(P403) ................................... 197 SK TU-PBR .......................... 122
C
Analog input filter (P404) ..........198 Control terminals ........................ 46
Cable cross-section.............. 41, 42
Analog OUT inversion (P163) ... 239 Control voltages ......................... 45
Cable gland ................................ 74
Analog output Convection ................................. 25
Calibration AOUT ..................... 238
Scaling (P419) ......................201 Copy parameter set (P101) ...... 175
CAN
Analog output function (P418)... 199 C-Tick ......................................... 16
Bus address (P515) ............. 215
Apparent power (P726) .............232 cUL ..................................... 15, 272
302 BU 0200 GB-4411
520
10 Keyword index
Current Electrical data Flying start resolution (P521) .... 216
Last error (P703) .................. 229 1~115V ................................. 273 Frequency inverter control
connection .............................. 45
Phase U (P732).................... 233 1~230V ................................. 274
Function
Phase V (P733) .................... 233 3~230V ................................. 275
Bus I/O In Bits (P480) ........... 208
Phase W (P734) ................... 233 3~400V ................................. 278
Bus I/O Out Bits (P481) ........ 209
Current limit (P536) .................. 221 Electromechanical brake 43, 94, 96
Bus setpoint 1 ... 3 (P546) .... 225
Current vector control ............... 186 Electronic brake rectifier ....... 94, 96
Encoder (P325)..................... 190
Customer Unit ................ 67, 68, 77 EMC ................................... 15, 284
PotentiometerBox (P549) ..... 225
EMC standard .......................... 284
D Functional earth .......................... 76
Emission of interference ........... 285
Database version (P742).......... 235 EN 61000 ................................. 285 Functional Safety ........................ 46
DC brake .................................. 179 EN 61800-3 .............................. 285
H
DC brake current (P109) .......... 180 Enable period (P715)................ 232
DC braking time on (P110) ....... 180 Heat sink temperature (P739) ... 234
Encoder
DC link voltage. (P736) ............ 233 HTL encoder ............................... 54
Connection ............................. 54
DC run-on time (P559) ............. 227 Hysteresis Bus I/O Out bits (P483)
Transformation ratio (P326) .. 191 .............................................. 210
Deceleration time (P103).......... 176
Energy Efficiency ...................... 292
Delay on/off switch (P475) ....... 208 I
Energy saving function ............. 186
Derating.................................... 286 I/O extension ...................... 82, 238
Error messages ........ 127, 259, 260
Diagnostic LEDs ....... 129, 153, 154 2
I t limit ............................... 261, 267
Excitation .................................. 186
Digital functions ........................ 201 2
I t-Motor (P535) ........................ 220
Expansion module ...................... 12
Digital inputs (P420) ................. 201 I-component of PI controller (P414)
Extra functions .......................... 211
Digital output .............................................. 199
Function (P434).................... 205 F Identification plate ..................... 148
IEC 61800-3 ............................... 14
Hysteresis (P436) ................. 206 Factor I²t motor (P533) ............. 220
Immunity from interference ....... 285
Scaling (P435)...................... 206 Factory setting .......................... 148
Incremental encoder ................... 54
Dimensions .................... 29, 30, 74 Factory setting (P523) .............. 216
Incremental encoder (P301) ..... 188
DIP switch .................................. 76 Factory settings (P152) ............ 238
Information
DIP switches ............................ 151 Faults........................ 127, 259, 260
Frequency inverter ................ 229
Direct current braking ............... 179 Features ..................................... 11
SK xU4-IOE .......................... 240
Disconnection mode (P108) ..... 179 FI circuit breaker ................. 13, 290
Field Input voltage (P728) ................. 233
Display ..................................... 127
Current controller I (P316) .... 189 Installation .................................. 22
Display and control ................... 259
Installation altitude .................... 270
Display factor (P002) ................ 174 Current controller P (P315)... 189
Installation notes ......................... 13
Distance calculator ................... 179 Field (P730) .......................... 233
Installation of optional modules .. 73
DS standard motor ................... 182 Weakening controller I (P319)
......................................... 190 Internal EEPROM ..................... 170
Dynamic boost (P211) .............. 184
Internet ..................................... 300
Dynamic braking ........................ 33 Weakening controller P (P318)
......................................... 190 Inverter name (P501) ................ 211
E Filter time (P161) ...................... 239 Inverter type (P743) .................. 235
EC declaration of conformity .... 284 Fixed frequency array (P465) ... 207 Inverter voltage range (P747) ... 235
EEPROM.................. 127, 225, 227 Flux delay (P558) ..................... 227 IP protection class ...................... 21
EEPROM copy order (P550) .... 225 Flying start (P520) .................... 216 ISD control ................................ 186
Electrical connection .................. 38 Flying start offset (P522) .......... 216 ISD control loop gain (P213) ..... 184
BU 0200 GB-4411 303
521
SK 200E Manual for frequency inverters
IT network .............................41, 44 Maximum frequency auxiliary Operating status ............... 127, 259
setpoint (P411) ..................... 198
Operating time (P714) .............. 231
J Mechanical power (P727)......... 233
Operating time, last fault (P799)237
Jog frequency (P113)................181 Memory Module 127, 225, 227, 256
Operation.................................. 127
Jumper ........................................44 Menu group .............................. 170
Option (mounting) locations........ 26
Messages ......................... 127, 259
Option monitoring (P120) ......... 181
K Min. system bus cycle time (P153)
............................................. 238 Options ....................................... 67
KTY84 ....................................... 158
Minimum frequency (P104) ...... 176 Oscillation damping (P217) ...... 185
L Minimum frequency auxiliary Outdoor installation .................... 66
setpoint (P410) ..................... 198 Output voltage monitoring (P539)
Language selection ...................140 ............................................. 221
Minimum frequency process
Last fault (P701)........................229 controller (P466) ................... 207 Overcurrent ...................... 261, 267
Last frequency error (P702) ...... 229 Mode Overtemperature .............. 260, 267
Leakage current ........................290 Analog input (P401) ............. 195 Overvoltage .............................. 261
LEDs ................................... 85, 109 Fixed frequency (P464) ........ 207 Overvoltage switch-off ................ 33
Lifting equipment with brake ..... 178
Modulation depth (P218) .......... 185
Limit P
Motor
Field current controller (P317) P - limit chopper (P555) ............ 226
cos phi (P206) ...................... 183
..........................................189
P factor torque limit (P111) ....... 180
Torque current controller (P314) Nominal current (P203) ........ 183
Parameter identification (P220) 187
..........................................189 Nominal frequency (P201).... 182
Parameter loss ......................... 262
Linear V/f characteristic curve ... 186 Nominal power (P205).......... 183
Parameter overview ................. 242
Link circuit last error (P705) ...... 230
Nominal speed (P202).......... 182 Parameter set
Load dropping ...........................178
Nominal voltage (P204) ........ 183 Last error (P706) .................. 230
Load factory setting........... 216, 238
Star Delta connection(P207) 183 Parameter set (P731) ........... 233
Load monitoring ........................219
Motor cable length...................... 42 Parameter set (P100) ............... 175
Load monitoring delay (P528) ... 218
Motor data ................ 148, 182, 293 Parameter storage mode (P560)
Load monitoring frequency (P527)
..............................................217 ............................................. 227
Motor list (P200) ....................... 182
Load monitoring Max. (P525) .... 217 ParameterBox
Motor mounted ........................... 29
Load monitoring Min. (P526) ..... 217 Error messages .................... 145
Motor Temperature .................. 158
Load monitoring mode (P529)... 218 Motor type .................................. 10 Operation.............................. 137
Low Voltage Directive ...................3 Mounting the SK 2xxE ................ 23 Parameters ........................... 143
Multiple motor operation ............. 42 Parameterisation .............. 135, 168
M
Frequency inverter................ 170
M12 flanged connector ...............57 N
I/O extension ........................ 238
M12-Connections ......................106 No load current (P209) ............. 183
ParameterBox ...................... 141
Mains connection ........................41 Nominal value process controller
(P412) .................................. 199 Parameterisation adapter ......... 256
Mains filter ..................................44
NORD CON.............................. 256 P-component of PI controller
Mains unit .................................103
(P413)................................... 199
Maintenance .............................299
O PI process controller................. 282
Maintenance switch ..................126
Offset analog output (P417) ..... 199 Plug connectors for control
Master function output (P503) ... 212 connection .............................. 57
Operating display (P000) ......... 173
Master function value (P502) .... 211 Plug connectors for power
Operating displays ................... 173 connections ............................ 55
Master-Slave .............................211
Operating mode ....................... 273 Plug connectors:......................... 55
Maximum frequency (P105) ...... 176
304 BU 0200 GB-4411
522
10 Keyword index
Posicon .................................... 228 Selection display (P001) ........... 173 Speed of rotation ...................... 233
Positioning................................ 228 Send broadcast (P162)............. 239 Speed slip delay (P328)............ 191
Potentiometer ............................. 45 Service ..................................... 299 Speed slip error (P327)............. 191
Potentiometers P1 and P2 ...... 129, Servo mode (P300) .................. 188 Standard version......................... 12
153, 154
Set Standardisation of setpoint/actual
Powder coating .......................... 21 values ................................... 297
Digital outputs (P541) ........... 223
Power limit................................ 286 Static boost (P210) ................... 183
Relays (P541) ....................... 223
Power rating / Motor size............ 28 Statistics
Set analog output (P160).......... 238
Power-up cycles ....................... 270 Customer error (P757) .......... 237
Set analog output (P542).......... 223
Present error (P170) ................ 240 Mains failure (P752).............. 237
Set relay (P150) ....................... 238
Process controller .... 193, 207, 282 Overcurrent (P750) ............... 237
Setpoint frequency processing . 298
Process controller control limit
(P415) .................................. 199 Setpoint inputs function (P400) 192 Overheating (P753) .............. 237
Process data Setpoint processing .................. 281 Overvoltage (P751)............... 237
Bus In (P740) ....................... 234 Setpoint values ......................... 297 Parameter loss (P754) .......... 237
Bus Out (P741) .................... 235 Signal status LEDs ..................... 85 System faults (P755) ............ 237
Protection class .......................... 24 SimpleBox ................................ 132 Time out (P756) .................... 237
Pulse disconnection (P537)...... 221 SK ATX-POT .............................. 61
Stator resistance (P208) ........... 183
Pulse frequency (P504) ............ 212 SK BRE4- ............................. 34, 35
Status
SK BRI4- ............................... 33, 35
Digital input (P174) ............... 241
Q SK CSX-3H .............................. 132
Digital input (P708) ............... 230
Queries..................................... 300 SK CU4-«.................................. 77
DIP switches (P749) ............. 236
Quick stop on error (P427) ....... 204 SK CU4-IOE ............................... 82
SK EPG-3H .............................. 256 Relays (P175) ....................... 241
Quick stop time (P426) ............. 204
SK PAR-3H .............................. 137 Relays (P711) ....................... 231
R SK TIE4-WMK- ........................... 30 Status CANopen (P748) ........... 236
Ramp smoothing (P106) .......... 177 SK TU4-« .................................. 99 Status LED ............................... 130
Ramp time PI setpoint (P416) .. 199 SK TU4-IOE ............................. 105 Status Module (P173) ............... 241
Rating point 100Hz ................... 296 Skip frequency 1 (P516) ........... 215 Storage ..................... 270, 271, 299
Rating point 50Hz..................... 293 Skip frequency 2 (P518) ........... 215 Supervisor code (P003) ............ 174
Rating point 87Hz..................... 295 Skip frequency area 1 (P517) ... 215 Synchronous machines .............. 40
Reduced output power ............. 286 Skip frequency area 2 (P519) ... 215 System bus .. 49, 52, 105, 213, 215,
Reference voltage ...................... 45 290
Slip compensation (P212) ........ 184
Repairs ..................................... 299 System error ............................. 265
Software version (P171) ........... 240
RJ12 ........................................... 53 Software version (P707) ........... 230 T
RoHS compliance ...................... 16 Source
Technical data
Rotation direction ..................... 222 Control word (P509) ............. 213
Frequency inverter ................ 270
Rotation direction mode (P540) 222 Setpoint (P510)..................... 213
Frequency inverter ................ 272
Rounding .................................. 177
Speed
Mains unit ............................. 271
Controller I (P311) ................ 189
S Technical data for AS interface . 166
Encoder (P735) .................... 233
Safe stop .................................... 46 Technology Unit .............. 67, 70, 99
Safety information ........................ 3 Speed control ........................... 188
Telegram time out (P513) ......... 214
Scaling Speed control I brake delay off
Terminal cross-section.... 41, 42, 45
(P321) ................................... 190
Bus I/O In Bits (P482)........... 209 Termination resistor .................... 86
Speed controller P (P310) ........ 188
BU 0200 GB-4411 305
523
SK 200E Manual for frequency inverters
Time boost precontrol (P216).... 185 Usage rate Analog input (P709) .............. 231
Torque Brake resistor (P737) ........... 234 Analog output (P710)............ 231
Current controller I (P313)..... 189 Motor (P738) ........................ 234 Last error (P704) .................. 229
Current controller P (P312) ... 189 USB device driver .................... 256
Current limit (P112) ...............180 USB driver ................................ 256 W
Disconnection limit (P534) .... 220 USS address (P512) ................ 214 Wall-mounting ............................ 30
USS baud rate (P511) .............. 214 Warning messages ................... 267
Torque (P729) ...........................233
USS Time Out .......................... 263 Warnings .................. 127, 259, 267
Torque precontrol (P214) ..........184
Watchdog ................................. 206
Type code ...................................17
V Watchdog time (P460) .............. 206
U Vector control ........................... 186 Weak border (P320) ................. 190
UL/cUL Approval ................. 15, 272 Ventilation .................................. 22 Weight ........................................ 29
Upgrading the SK 2xxE ...............24 Voltage Wiring guidelines ........................ 37
306 BU 0200 GB-4411
524
10 Keyword index
BU 0200 GB-4411 307
525
SK 200E Manual for frequency inverters
Part No. 607 2002 / 4411
308 BU 0200 GB-4411
526
Bei der Lehmkuhle 4
D-21279 Hollenstedt - Germany
Tel: +49-(0)4165 / 2211-0
E-Mail: [email protected]
www.HamannAG.com
Dosing peristaltic pump
Type: Kronos 50; 230 V
Part No.: 013882
Operating- and Maintenance Instruction
This instruction includes important safety information and instructions for commission-
ing, operation and maintenance of the HAMANN plant and its components. It is essential
therefore, that the responsible specialist refers to it before starting any work on the ma-
chinery as well as prior to commissioning. Furthermore, this instruction must always be
available on site.
With reservation of technical modification
BA 0085 e 1 (22)
Reference: 0000137311; Rev. 3.0
CONTENT
SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
LABELLING OF ADVICE IN THE OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
CORRECT AND PROPER USE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
TECHNICAL PERSONNEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
ELECTRICIAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
INSTRUCTED PERSONNEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
INFORMATION IN THE EVENT OF AN EMERGENCY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
ABOUT THIS PRODUCT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
OVERVIEW OF THE MOST IMPORTANT FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
DIMENSIONS AND DEVICE OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
DESIGN AND FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
OPERATING UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
HYDRAULIC INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
OPERATING UNIT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
CONTROL KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
PROGRAMMING MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
TUBING CHANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
LCD CONTRAST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
DISPLAY VIEW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
DURING THE DOSAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
DURING THE STOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
QUICK PARAMETER SETTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
PARAMETER LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
DOSING PARAMETER TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
ALARMS TABLE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
SPARE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Dosing peristaltic pump Kronos 50; 230 V 3 (22)
Safety information
1. SAFETY INFORMATION
1.1 LABELLING OF ADVICE IN THE OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
Non-observance of these instructions could lead to danger of life or limb. Therefore,
important safety advice in these instructions are marked with the following general
hazard symbol:
Warnings regarding electric power are labelled with:
Safety instructions whose non-observance could jeopardize the machine and its
functions are labelled with
Important additional informations are labelled with
Always comply with instructions mounted directly on the machine, e.g.
• rotational direction arrow
• fluid connection indicators
1.2 CORRECT AND PROPER USE
• The pump may only be used to meter liquid feed chemicals.
• The system may only be used in accordance with the technical data and specifi-
cations outlined in the Operating Manual.
• The pump may only be used if it has been correctly installed and commissioned
for use.
• Any other uses or modifications are prohibited.
• The pump is not intended to meter gaseous media or solids.
• The pump may not be used outdoors without additional protection (covering,
weather protection roof).
• The pump should only be operated by trained and authorized personnel, see the
Kronos_50-65_e3.fm / 23.2.17
following table.
• You are obliged to observe the information contained in the operating instruc-
tions at the different phases of the system's service life.
4 (22) Dosing peristaltic pump Kronos 50; 230 V
About this product
1.3 TECHNICAL PERSONNEL
A qualified employee is deemed to be a person who is able to assess the tasks as-
signed to him and recognize possible hazards based on his/ her technical training,
knowledge and experience, as well as knowledge of pertinent regulations.
1.4 ELECTRICIAN
Electricians are deemed to be people, who are able to complete work on electrical
systems and recognize and avoid possible hazards independently based on their
technical training and experience, as well as knowledge of pertinent standards and
regulations. Electricians should be specifically trained for the working environment in
which the are employed and know the relevant standards and regulations. Electri-
cians must comply with the provisions of the applicable statutory directives on acci-
dent prevention.
1.5 INSTRUCTED PERSONNEL
An instructed person is deemed to be a person who has been instructed and, if re-
quired, trained in the tasks assigned to him/her and possible dangers that could re-
sult from improper behavior, as well as having been instructed in the required
protective equipment and protective measures.
1.6 PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT
The transparent cover on the liquid end serves to prevent persons touching the mov-
ing rotor and prevents metering medium leakage in the event of a hose fracture.
1.7 INFORMATION IN THE EVENT OF AN EMERGENCY
Remove the mains plug or press one of the emergency stop buttons, if fitted, in the
event of an emergency. If feed chemical escapes, also depressurize the hydraulic
system around the pump. Observe the safety data sheet for the feed chemical.
2. ABOUT THIS PRODUCT
The pump is a peristaltic metering pump drive by a stepper motor. The feed chemical
is conveyed by means of the rotor squeezing on the hose. No valves are needed for
this. This ensures gentle handling of the metered media.
Typical applications are in processes where only a low discharge pressure is re-
quired, such as in the metering of chemicals into galvanic baths, in clarification tanks
or for metering conditioning agents into swimming pools (flocculant, activated carbon
and chemicals).
The housing is made from shock-proof and chemical resistant PPE with IP65 protec-
Kronos_50-65_e3.fm / 23.2.17
tion degree.
It is equipped with several inputs for metering configuration. The stepper motor
means that metering is infinitely adjustable.
OVERVIEW OF THE MOST IMPORTANT FEATURES
• Power supply 100-240 V AC 50/60 Hz
• Output range: see label in the pump.
Dosing peristaltic pump Kronos 50; 230 V 5 (22)
Dimensions and device overview
• Powerful stepper motor, speed configurable
• Infinite adjustment of the metering output either manually or externally via 0/4-20
mA signals
• Priming function (high-speed run)
• Display of metering output on display in l/h, ml/m, G/h or %
• Reversible direction
• Housing protection class IP 65
• Tube breaking system
• Fuse 1,6A (20W)
3. DIMENSIONS AND DEVICE OVERVIEW
1 Housing: upper section 9 Cable glands 7
2 Housing: central section 10 Discharge connector
3 Housing: bottom section 11 Suction connector
4 Control keys 12 Cable gland 9
5 LCD display 13 Hose rupture monitoring
6 Ball bearing 14 Pump hose
7 Transparent cover 15 Rotor
Kronos_50-65_e3.fm / 23.2.17
8 Cable gland 11
6 (22) Dosing peristaltic pump Kronos 50; 230 V
Design and functional description
4. DESIGN AND FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
The pump is comprised of two main components:
• Driver unit (stepper motor)
• Liquid end (rotor, rollers and pump hose)
OPERATING UNIT
The device is housed in a robust plastic housing. The plastic housing is comprised
of upper and lower sections, which are screwed together. The lower section contains
the cable glands for power supply and connectors.
The upper section of the housing accommodates the CPU, motor and display PCB
with display and buttons.
The liquid end is mounted at the front and is closed off by means of a screwed trans-
parent cover to protect against injuries. The pump hose can easily be exchanged af-
ter the transparent cover has been removed.
The rotary movement of the rotors alternately press and relax pump hose by three
rollers. As a result, the liquid is sucked in and transported through the pressure hose.
The pump is operated by means of the operating unit. The desired metering level and
mode are configured with this. The metering operation is controlled with the operat-
ing unit or via and external contact, level input.
5. INSTALLATION
1. Mark the bore holes (if not existing)
2. Drill the holes (if not existing)
3. Fix the bracket to the wall
4. Hook the device at the top
Fixing template
Kronos_50-65_e3.fm / 23.2.17
Dosing peristaltic pump Kronos 50; 230 V 7 (22)
Hydraulic installation
6. HYDRAULIC INSTALLATION
Mount the suction and discharge lines:
1. Cut off the ends of the hoses so that they are straight.
2. Screw on the cap nut and slide over the hose.
3. Screw in the hose end until it stops over the nozzle.
4. Connect the discharge line to the right- hand hose connection.
5. Connect the suction line to the left-hand hose connection.
6. Tighten up the cap nuts.
7. To do this, shorten the free end of the suction line so that the end hangs just
above the container bottom.
8. If necessary, feed a hose line from the leakage fitting to the container.
7. ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
1. Lay a power cable with short-circuit protection and mains switch - if necessary,
with emergency stop switch.
Connection according to electrical diagram of the plant!
2. Ensure that the mains power cable is dead and remains so!
3. Break out the small bore hole at the far right on the lower side of the back sec-
tion by means of a screwdriver.
4. Screw in the corresponding screw and tighten up - not the scalping screw.
5. Insert the reducing inserts depending on the cable diameter being used and
insert the threaded assembly.
6. Feed the mains cable into the threaded assembly.
7. Connect the mains cable to terminal block.
8. Tighten up the clamping screw so that the threaded assembly is moisture-proof.
Kronos_50-65_e3.fm / 23.2.17
8 (22) Dosing peristaltic pump Kronos 50; 230 V
Electrical installation
7.1 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
Terminal number Description Electrical features
1-2 Power supply 100-240 VAC (50–60Hz)
3-4 Trigger 1 input signal 24-240 VAC oder VDC
5-6 Trigger 2 input signal 24-240 VAC oder VDC
7-8 Alarm relay output 250VAC 8A
9-10 9 Pol + (mA) Input mA 0/4-20 mA (Input impedance: 200
10 Pol - (GND) ohm)
10-11 10 Pol - (GND) Pulses input Pulses free from voltage (pulse emis-
11 Pol + (Pulse) sion meter; dry contact: on-off, maxi-
mum frequency 1KHz)
12-13 Level control probe input Dry contact (on-off)
14-15-16-17 Not used Not used
Kronos_50-65_e3.fm / 23.2.17
Dosing peristaltic pump Kronos 50; 230 V 9 (22)
Operating unit
8. OPERATING UNIT
8.1 CONTROL KEYS
The control keys are designated as follows:
Key Description
Starts and stops the pump. In the event of a level alarm (alarm function only), flow
alarm and active memory alarm, it deactivates the signal on the display.
Used to “exit” the various menu levels. Before definitively exiting the programming
phase, you will be asked if you wish to save any changes.
When pressed during the pump operation phase, it cyclically displays the
programmed values on the display.
When pressed at the same time or keys, it increases or decreases a
value dependent on the selected operating mode. During programming it carries out
an “enter” function, meaning that it confirms entry to the various menu levels and
modifications within the same.
Used to run upwards through the menu
Used to run downwards through the menu or for the priming, keeping it there for at
least 3 seconds, pump start running at 100% until the key is pressed.
Used to increase the numerical values to be changed. Can be used to start dosage
in Batch mode.
Used to decrease the numerical values to be changed.
Kronos_50-65_e3.fm / 23.2.17
10 (22) Dosing peristaltic pump Kronos 50; 230 V
Operating unit
8.2 PROGRAMMING MENU
You can access the programming menu by pressing the key.
The keys can be used to run through the menu items, with the key being used to access changes.
The pump is programmed in constant mode in the factory. The pump automatically returns to the operating mode
after 1 minute of no activity. Any data entered in these circumstances will not be saved.
The key can be used to exit the various programming levels.
Upon exiting programming, the display will show:
Save changes? Save changes?
Yes No
to confirm the selection.
Password
****
Language
English Paragraph 1
PROG Statistics
Configuration Paragraph 2
Main Hour
MODE
Param n
Menu Mod. Password
****
Paragraph 3
Paragraph 5
MODE Pump Calibration Paragraph 4
Param 1 2000 ml/h
Pump functions Paragraph 6
Manual Mode
Max Flow Rate Density
Paragraph 13 Paragraph 7
100% 2.000 L 1.00 Kg/l
Alarm Relay
Setting Triggers
Paragraph 8
Paragraph 12 N. open Menu No Trg
Level Alarm Units Paragraph 9
Paragraph 11 Stop L/h
Kronos_50-65_e3.fm / 23.2.17
Buzzer
Off Paragraph 10
Dosing peristaltic pump Kronos 50; 230 V 11 (22)
Operating unit
Paragraph 1
Programming Operation
Makes it possible to select the language.
The pump is set in English in the factory.
Changes can be made by pressing the key, then
Language
English
using the keys to set the new value.
Press to confirm and return to the main menu.
Paragraph 2
Programming Operation
The main menu displays the pump operation times.
By pressing the key you can access other statistics:
Statistics
Hour - Tubing hours = tubing operation times.
- Q.ty (liters) = quantity dosed by the pump in liters.
- Reset = use the to reset the counters (YES) or
otherwise (NO), then confirm by pressing the key.
Pressing the key will take you back to the main menu.
Paragraph 3
Programming Operation
Makes it possible to change the access password.
Changes can be made by pressing the key, then
Mod. Password
**** using the keys to set the new value.
To disable the password, enter the value 0000.
Pressing the key will take you back to the main menu.
Paragraph 4
Programming Operation
The pump can be calibrated as follow:
the pump run at the maximum speed for 36 sec (version 10
l/h) or 180 sec (version 2 l/h) , which is started by pressing
Calibration the key.
2000 ml/h
At the end of this time, enter the quantity sucked up by the
Kronos_50-65_e3.fm / 23.2.17
pump using the keys and confirm by pressing
the key.
The entered figure will be used in flow calculations.
12 (22) Dosing peristaltic pump Kronos 50; 230 V
Operating unit
Paragraph 5
PROG Pump function
Configuration Manual Mode
These items menu are different depending on the menu
settings:
• Manual Mode
• mA Mode
• PPM Mode
• 1:N Mode
• N:1 Mode
• Batch Mode
Case Manual Mode:
Pump doses at selected flow rate. If OFF Time is set to 0sec, pump runs continuously.
Pump start dosing after a selectable Delay time.
Ex. Manual Dosing with trigger:
Trigger
Dosing
Delay ON OFF
If no trigger is selected, pump start delay counting after power-on.
Programming Operation
The pump operates in constant mode. The flow can only be
Manual MODE
ON Time sec manually regulated by pressing the keys at the
same time to increase the flow, or the keys to
decrease it.
Manual MODE
Makes it possible to set:
OFF Time sec
• ON Time= Time for which the pump runs.
• OFF Time= Time for which the pump is stopped.
Manual MODE
DELAY Time sec •
DELAY Time= time delay after which the pump
starts to run.
Kronos_50-65_e3.fm / 23.2.17
Dosing peristaltic pump Kronos 50; 230 V 13 (22)
Operating unit
Case mA Mode:
The pump proportionally doses to a signal of (0)4-20 mA or 20-4(0) mA. Is possible to set the mA input value
corresponding to 0% dosing and the mA input value corresponding to the pump maximum flow rate. The minimum
settable mA value is 0.2mA: if the mA signal input is lower than 0,2mA the display shows “NO INPUT” and the
pump does not run. If the input value is outside the set range, the display shows flashing dosing percentage (0 or
100%).
Ex. Direct mA dosing:
mA input for 0% = 5mA
mA input for MAX FLOW RATE = 10mA
Max flow rate = 80%
80%
Dosing
0%
0.2mA 5mA 10mA
Ex. Invers mA dosing:
mA input for 0% = 10mA
mA input for MAX FLOW RATE = 5mA
Max flow rate = 80%
Dosing
0%
0.2mA 5mA 10mA
Programming Operation
The pump proportionally doses at a signal of 0/4-20 mA. On
the basis of the factory settings, the pump interrupts
mA MODE
MAX DOS @ 20.0mA dosage at 0mA and doses at the maximum set frequency
when it receives 20 mA. These two values can be modified
during programming. The maximum and the minimum
frequency can be modified during operation, by pressing
mA MODE
Kronos_50-65_e3.fm / 23.2.17
0% DOS @ 04.0mA the keys at the same time to increase the flow,
or the keys to decrease it.
14 (22) Dosing peristaltic pump Kronos 50; 230 V
Operating unit
Case PPM Mode:
In order to maintain the selected ppm of chemical, The pump calculates the right dosing rate starting from the
following parameters:
• Pulse per minute on pulse input
• Flowmeter factor (pulse/liter)
• Density of chemical
• Concentration of chemical
If calculated flow rate is bigger than maximum, the pump goes in MEM function (if selected) and doses the lasting
quantity when possible.
Programming Operation
The pump doses in proportion to an external signal (i.e.:
impulse launch counter), automatically calculating the
PPM MODE
Conc.(%) 100% relationship between incoming signals and pump speed on
the basis of the programmed ppm value.
The dosage frequency can be modified during operation, by
PPM MODE pressing the keys at the same time to increase
Memory Off
the flow, or the keys to decrease it.
Makes it possible to set:
PPM MODE
1/1 p/L • Conc.(%)= product concentration.
• Memory= The pump has a memory function, which
signals the reception of a signal during dosage. If
PPM MODE set to Off, it merely sends a signal, if set to On it
Set P. 100.0ppm
sends a signal and memorizes the impulses, then
executes them when it has finished receiving
signals
• 1/1= number of impulses per liters (1/1-999/999)
and consequently the system will dose according to
the values set.
• Set P.= ppm value that the system will dose.
Case 1:N Mode:
Pump doses following pulses number to the related input.
One input pulse generate 1 second of dosing at set speed (N)
e.g.
• If N is set to 1 (N=1), pump doses for one second at speed=1% of Max speed
• If N is set to 100 (N=100), pump doses for one second at speed=100% (Max speed)
version Average Dosing @ 1%* Average Dosing @ 100%*
10000ml/h 0.027ml 2.77ml
2000ml/h 0.0055ml 0.55ml
* quantity dosed in 1 second
If calculated flow rate is bigger than maximum, the pump goes in MEM function (if selected) and doses the lasting
quantity when possible.
Kronos_50-65_e3.fm / 23.2.17
Dosing peristaltic pump Kronos 50; 230 V 15 (22)
Operating unit
Programming Operation
The pump doses in proportion to an external signal (i.e.:
impulse launch counter). With every signal received, the
1:N MODE pump makes 1 second at the programmed “N” (i.e.: 20%)
Memory Off
speed.
The value of “N” can be modified during operation, by
pressing the keys at the same time to increase
1:N MODE
1:1 the flow, or the keys to decrease it.
Makes it possible to set:
• Memory= The pump has a memory function, which
signals the reception of a signal during dosage. If
set to Off, it merely sends a signal, if set to On it
sends a signal and memorizes the impulses, then
executes them when it has finished receiving
signals
• 1:N= With every signal received, the pump makes 1
second at the programmed “N” (i.e.: 20%) speed.
Case N:1 Mode:
Pump doses following pulses number to the related input.
N input pulses generate 1 second of dosing at 1%
e.g.
• If N is set to 1 (N=1), pump doses for one second at speed=1% of Max speed
• If N is set to 100 (N=100), pump waits for 100 pulses than doses for one second at speed=1% of Max
speed
version Average Dosing @ 1%* Average Dosing @ 100%*
10000ml/h 0.027ml 2.77ml
2000ml/h 0.0055ml 0.55ml
* quantity dosed in 1 second
If calculated flow rate is bigger than maximum, the pump goes in MEM function (if selected) and doses the lasting
quantity when possible.
Programming Operation
The pump doses in proportion to an external signal (i.e.:
impulse launch counter). With every programmed “N” signal
N:1 MODE received, the pump makes 1 second at the 1% of max
Memory Off
speed.
The value of “N” can be modified during operation, by
pressing the keys at the same time to increase
N:1 MODE
1:1 the flow, or the keys to decrease it.
Makes it possible to set:
• Memory= The pump has a memory function, which
signals the reception of a signal during dosage. If
set to Off, it merely sends a signal, if set to On it
sends a signal and memorizes the impulses, then
executes them when it has finished receiving
signals
Kronos_50-65_e3.fm / 23.2.17
• N:1= With every programmed “N” signal received,
the pump makes 1 second at the 1% of max speed.
16 (22) Dosing peristaltic pump Kronos 50; 230 V
Operating unit
Case Batch Mode:
Pump doses the selected quantity when UP button is pressed or when a pulse is read on input (other pulses are
ignored when pump is dosing) or if trigger/s signals are selected, when a valid trigger/s signals is read on input.
If time selected for dosing is too short, pump doses at the maximum flow rate.
Programming Operation
The pump doses in proportion to an external signal (i.e.:
impulse launch counter). In this case, it is possible to set
Batch MODE
Time 1sec the quantity to be dosed in l and the time within which to
complete dosage.
Dosage can be started manually by pressing the key,
Batch MODE
Qty 0.001 L or by using a remote control. The key interrupts
dosage. The dosage already made can be reset by
pressing the key, or started again by pressing the
key again.
The quantity to be dosed can be modified during operation,
by pressing the keys at the same time to
increase the flow, or the keys to decrease.
Makes it possible to set:
• Time= the time within which to complete dosage in
second
• Qty= the quantity to be dosed in liter
Paragraph 6
Makes it possible to set the Pump Functions as follow:
Pump functions
Manual Mode
Pump functions Pump Pump functions
Batch Mode
Functions mA Mode
Setting
Pump functions Menu Pump functions
N:1 Mode
PPM Mode
Pump functions
1:N Mode
Kronos_50-65_e3.fm / 23.2.17
Dosing peristaltic pump Kronos 50; 230 V 17 (22)
Operating unit
Paragraph 7
Programming Operation
Density This makes it possible to set the density of the chemical
1.00 kg/L product.
Paragraph 8
Programming Operation
This makes it possible to set the input triggers.
When the triggers are present, gives consent to the pump
to run, depending the setting pump function:
Triggers
No Trg • No Trg= the triggers are disabled.
• Trg 1= the pump run when only the trigger 1 is
enabled.
• Trg 2= the pump run when only the trigger 2 is
enabled.
• Trg 1&2= the pump run when the both triggers
(1&2) are enabled.
Paragraph 9
Programming Operation
This makes it possible to set unit of measurement, which
can be:
Units • L/h= liter per hour.
L/h
• ml/m= milliliter per minute.
• Gph= Gallon per hour.
• %= the percentage of the maximum flow-rate.
Paragraph 10
Programming Operation
The buzzer is active when there is an alarm condition.
Buzzer This makes it possible to set the buzzer the system to On
Off or Off.
Paragraph 11
Programming Operation
This makes it possible to set the level alarm as follow:
Level Alarm
Stop • Stop= the pump stops.
•
Kronos_50-65_e3.fm / 23.2.17
Run= the pump keeps running.
18 (22) Dosing peristaltic pump Kronos 50; 230 V
Maintenance
Paragraph 12
Programming Operation
This makes it possible to set the alarm relay as follow:
Alarm Relay
N.Open N.Open= normally open.
N.Closed= normally closed.
Paragraph 13
Programming Operation
This makes it possible to set the maximum flow offered by
Max Flow Rate the pump, and the programmed mode (% or frequency) is
100% 10.000 L used as the standard unit of measurement when displaying
the flow.
9. MAINTENANCE
9.1 TUBING CHANGE
With the pump in Stop (press the by pressing the for at least 3 seconds the pump run
anticlockwise at the minimum speed in order to facilitate the removing hose, to terminate the running pump press
the
With the same procedure, by pressing the for at least 3 seconds the pump run clockwise at the minimum
speed in order to facilitate the replacing hose, to terminate the running pump press the
The pump hose has to be replaced yearly before the hose gets porous.
Kronos_50-65_e3.fm / 23.2.17
Dosing peristaltic pump Kronos 50; 230 V 19 (22)
Display view
9.2 LCD CONTRAST
With the pump in Stop (press the pressing the keys to increase or decrease the
contrast.
10. DISPLAY VIEW
10.1 DURING THE DOSAGE
Mode: Memory: Memory Status:
Manual Mode ON mem (memory active)
mA Mode OFF (no memory)
Batch Mode
1:N Mode
N:1 Mode
PPM Mode PPM Mode M mem
0-10V Mode Note: When there is a
Priming P100%
message to show (i.e.
an Alarm Message) the
current flow rate
Message:
information in the
Flow rate
Priming current unit is
Dosing %
LEVEL overwritten. The
MOTOR percentage remains
No Trg
10.2 DURING THE STOP
Pump Stautus (Stop) Contrast adjustment
Stop ˘ contrast^^
<REV TubChange>
Tubing change
Kronos_50-65_e3.fm / 23.2.17
20 (22) Dosing peristaltic pump Kronos 50; 230 V
Quick parameter setting
11. QUICK PARAMETER SETTING
From dosing visualization mode, by pressing for at least 3 seconds the key, the display will show the quick
setting menu:
Manual Mode
15.0 l/h
100%
In this menu you can change the following items:
1) Max Flow Rate in:
o mA Mode
o 0-10V Mode
o Manual Mode
Note: the information is shown both, in the current units (i.e. l/h) and also in percentage of the maximum
2) N in:
o 1:N Mode
o N:1 Mode
3) Quantity in:
o Batch Mode
4) ppm in
o ppm Mode
modify the current value keeping pressed the with
keys.
12. PARAMETER LIST
Parameter Value Value Value Value Value Value Default
1 Language english german italian french spanish english
2 Password 0 - 9999 0 (disabled)
3 Statistics dosing hours tubing hours liters
4 Max flow rate 0.1 – 100.0%
100.0%
5 Pump Function Manual mA Mode Batch Mode 1 :N Mode N :1 Mode Ppm Mode Manual Mode
Mode
6 Alarm Relay N. Open N.Closed N.Open
7 Level Alarm Stop Run Stop
8 Buzzer ON OFF OFF
9 Unit ml/h L/h % ml/h
10 Trigger No Trg Trg 1 Trg 2 Trg 1&2 No Trg
11 Density 0.50-2.00 1.00
12 On Time 0-10000 10
13 Off Time 0-10000 0
14 Delay Time 0-10000 0
15 mA for 0% 0.0-20.0 4.0
16 mA for max 0.0-20.0 20.0
17 N 1-1000 1
18 pulse 1-2000 1
19 liter 1-2000 1
20 Chem. Conc. 1-100 100
21 ppm 0-3000 100.0
22 memory ON OFF OFF
Kronos_50-65_e3.fm / 23.2.17
23 quantity 0-30000 100
24 time 0-10000 100
25 Flow rate Calibr. \
Dosing peristaltic pump Kronos 50; 230 V 21 (22)
Dosing parameter table
13. DOSING PARAMETER TABLE
Max flow
Mode Param 1 Param 2 Param 3 Memory Trigger Density
rate
TRIGGER
OFF Time MAX FLOW
ON Time sec DELAY Time (No Trg/Trg
Manual sec RATE
(0-10000) sec (0-10000) 1/Trg 2/Trg
(0-10000) (0.1 –100%)
1&2)
TRIGGER
mA Input for mA Input for MAX FLOW
Direct or Inverse (No Trg/Trg
min dosing max dosing RATE
mA 1/Trg 2/Trg
(0.0-20.0 mA) (0.0-20.0 mA) (0.1 –100%)
1&2)
Flowmeter TRIGGER DENSITY
CHEM.
Set Point factor MEMORY (No Trg/Trg (0.50 – 2.00
PPM CONC.
(1-3000 ppm) (1-2000 pul / (ON-OFF) 1/Trg 2/Trg kg/L)
(1-100%)
1-2000 Lit) 1&2) 1.00
DENSITY
Quantity Time sec MEMORY (0.50 – 2.00
Batch
(1-30000ml) (1-10000) (ON-OFF) kg/L)
1.00
TRIGGER
N MEMORY (No Trg/Trg
PROP 1:N
(1-1000) (ON-OFF) 1/Trg 2/Trg
1&2)
TRIGGER
N MEMORY (No Trg/Trg
PROP N:1
(1-1000) (ON-OFF) 1/Trg 2/Trg
1&2)
14. ALARMS TABLE
alarm dosing Display buzzer Relay
Tube Break stop TUBE BREAK ON if selected ON if selected
Level Stop if selected LEVEL ON if selected ON if selected
Motor stop MOTOR ON if selected ON if selected
15. SPARE PARTS
Pos. Qty. Designation Part No.
- 1 Dosing peristaltic pump Kronos 50; 230 V 013882
- 1 Pump hose 3x8 mm; connection 4x6 mm 015258
Kronos_50-65_e3.fm / 23.2.17
22 (22) Dosing peristaltic pump Kronos 50; 230 V
HAMANN AG
Bei der Lehmkuhle 4 , D-21279 Hollenstedt
Tel.:+49-(04165)-2211-0 eMail: [email protected]
Datasheet
Description Type Canister size Part-No. Reference code
Suction set with level PPE 6x 4/ 580 mm / 5... 50 L 015499 A-1-A-380
switch d=50mm A-1-CL-360
The suction set is used to deliver the flocculant out of the canister. The integrated level switch monitors the
level inside of the canister.
For connection to disposable container of 5 - 50 litre, consisting of foot valve, level switch with retaining tube,
vertically adjustable screw cap 2 m intake hose and 2 m connection cable with flat connector.
Technical data
Length 580 mm
Screw cap Ø50 mm
Datasheet_SuctionSet_PPE_6x4-580_e1.fm / 18.8.16
Switching mode 1 x NO
Turn on voltage max. 60 V
Peak switching current max. 0,3 A
Rupturing capacity max. 5W / 5VA
Protection IP67
Cable length 2m
Temperature range -25... +65 °C
Material retaining tube and foot valve PP
Material sealing EPDM
Material hose PE
Dimension hose Ø 6x4 mm
Length hose 2m
With reservation of technical modification 1
BD 0136 e
HAMANN AG
Bei der Lehmkuhle 4 , D-21279 Hollenstedt
Tel.:+49-(04165)-2211-0 eMail: [email protected]
Datasheet_SuctionSet_PPE_6x4-580_e1.fm / 18.8.16
2 With reservation of technical modification
Bei der Lehmkuhle 4
D-21279 Hollenstedt - Germany
Tel: +49-(0)4165 / 2211-0
E-Mail: [email protected]
www.HamannAG.com
Screw Pump, self priming
Type: MVI 20...
Type Part No.
MVI 20; 230/400V 50Hz 014554
MVI 20 230V 1PH 50/60Hz 016042
Operating- and Maintenance Instruction
This instruction includes important safety information and instructions for commission-
ing, operation and maintenance of the HAMANN plant and its components. It is essential
therefore, that the responsible specialist refers to it before starting any work on the ma-
chinery as well as prior to commissioning. Furthermore, this instruction must always be
available on site.
With reservation of technical modification
BA 0082 e 1 (18)
CONTENT
GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
LABELLING OF ADVICE IN THE OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
PERSONNEL QUALIFY AND TRAINING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
TRANSPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
INSTALLATION AND START-UP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
RISK IN CASE OF INOBSERVANCE OF SAFETY PRECAUTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
WARNING ABOUT SAFETY DURING THE MAINTENANCE INSPECTION AND MOUNTING PHASES. . . . . . . . 5
TRANSFORMATION AND PRODUCTION OF SPARE PARTS.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
NOT ADMITTED FUNCTIONING MODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
MAINTENANCE AND REPARATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
ORDER INSPECTION AND REPARATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
USE OF DANGEROUS MATERIALS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
PUMP DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
TECHNICAL DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
CHARACTERISTIC CURVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
DIMENSIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
UNPACKING, HANDLING AND STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
UNPACKING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
HANDLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
PUMP INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
ROTATING DIRECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
PRESSURE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
PIPES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
ELECTRIC CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
START-UP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
PRELIMINARY ACTIONS BEFORE RUNNING THE PUMP.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
TEMPORARY STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
STATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
ROTOR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
STAND - BY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
PRELIMINARY OPERATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
MAINTENANCE TYPE MVI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
REMOVING THE STATOR MVI-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
REMOVING THE ROTOR MVI-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
REMOVING THE JOINT MVI - 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
REMOVING MECHANICAL SEAL MVI - 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
-......................................................................... 13
PROBLEMS, CAUSES AND REMEDIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
PUMP DOES NOT START . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
PUMP DOES NOT SUCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
PERFORMANCE UNDER STANDARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
PUMP IS NOISING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
PUMPING ELEMENTS WEAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
SUGGESTED SPARE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
EXPLODED DRAWING AND SPARE PARTS LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
TYPE PLATE EXAMPLE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
EXPLODED DRAWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
SPARE PARTS LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Screw Pump, self priming MVI 20... 3 (18)
General
1. GENERAL
1.1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
The following explanations help to give you all possible information over pump.
The correct selection of the pump is dependent on the correct information received
at the order time.
The selection criteria received initially will be saved as the pump duty criteria. Any
application that deviates from the initial duty criteria will not be considered under any
warranty claim.
Failure to comply with the following instructions can result in personal injury or dam-
age to the pump. Experienced personnel is required for the following phases:
• Always observe the technical information.
• All electrical connections must be carried out by qualified and authorised person-
nel.
• Never start the pump in the wrong direction.
• Never put your fingers inside port connections.
• Never touch the pump or pipe-work when pumping hot, sterilized or toxic liquids.
• Never run the pump with suction or delivery ports blocked.
• Always disconnect the power supply when servicing the pump.
• Always ensure that the pump has been isolated from the pump piping system
and that there is no pressure contained within the pump before any maintenance
is commenced.
LABELLING OF ADVICE IN THE OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
Non-observance of these instructions could lead to danger of life or limb. Therefore,
important safety advice in these instructions are marked with the following general
hazard symbol:
Warnings regarding electric power are labelled with:
Safety instructions whose non-observance could jeopardize the machine and its
functions are labelled with
ScrewPump_MVI_e4.fm / 11.5.17
Important additional informations are labelled with
4 (18) Screw Pump, self priming MVI 20...
General
1.2 PERSONNEL QUALIFY AND TRAINING
The personnel responsible for maintenance, inspection, mounting of our pumps must
be the qualified for these duties. If the personnel is not adequately experienced, it
must be trained and informed.
1.3 TRANSPORT
The personnel responsible for transport must be informed about the lifting techniques
and tools, in accordance with all national laws and regulations.
1.4 INSTALLATION AND START-UP
The personnel responsible for the installation must be adequately informed and qual-
ified about the functioning of the plant where the pump will be installed.
The personnel responsible for the functioning of the plant must be informed about the
characteristics of our pumps.
1.5 RISK IN CASE OF INOBSERVANCE OF SAFETY PRECAUTION.
The inobservance of safety precaution can cause personnel injury or damage on the
pump and environment where the pump is installed. Moreover the inobservance of
safety precaution can cause the loss of the potential compensation of the damages.
For these reasons the instruction and procedure on this manual, the national law
about against on-the-job injuries and the internal procedures must be followed.
If hot or cold parts can cause risk, they have to be protected against the accidental
contact. The protections against the accidental contact with moving parts must not
be removed when the pump is working.
The loosing of dangerous material must be discharged avoiding damages for people
and environment. Respect the laws and the regulation in force.
1.6 WARNING ABOUT SAFETY DURING THE MAINTENANCE INSPECTION AND MOUNTING PHASES.
The plant manager must ensure that the maintenance inspection and mounting of the
pumps will be carried out by qualified personnel. Moreover the personnel must be ad-
equately informed about the functioning of the pump.
All operation on the pump must be carried out with the stopped pump. The pump
must be depressurized and cooled down before any operation.
1.7 TRANSFORMATION AND PRODUCTION OF SPARE PARTS.
The transformation or alteration of the pump is admitted only in case of previous ac-
cordance with the manufacturer. The original spare parts and manufacturer autho-
ScrewPump_MVI_e4.fm / 11.5.17
rised accessories contribute to a safer functioning and an optimized pump
performance.
The use of unauthorized components cancel manufacturer responsibilities for poten-
tial damages.
1.8 NOT ADMITTED FUNCTIONING MODES
The safe functioning of the pump is warranted only in case of proper use and in ac-
cordance with all national law in force.
Screw Pump, self priming MVI 20... 5 (18)
General
Our pumps are projected for predetermine working condition, in no case the reported
exercise conditions can be passed. Use the pump only for the purpose and condition
as it was sold and projected.
If you have intention to modify these condition, please contact HAMANN AG for any
assistance. Particularly in case of toxic dangerous or aggressive fluids.
General criteria for a correct pump functioning are:
• Compatibility between the pumped fluid and the pump materials.
• The correct retain of seals, particularly the shaft’s seal.
• The pump components resistance related to the pressure and temperature of
the pumped fluid.
This type of pump is volumetric type so theoretically it can produce a infinity
pressure. In case of closed delivery pipe (e.g. for an obstruction or accidental
valve closure) the delivery pressure can reach a multiple of the admitted plant
pressure. It can cause, for example, a delivery pipe explosion. On the plant is
necessary to install adequate safety equipment as pressure switch or safety
disc with return pipes.
1.9 MAINTENANCE AND REPARATION
During any assistance check the motor against an accidental start.
Opening the pump follow all procedure relative to pumped fluid. (do not smoke, use
protective clots). After the maintenance and before the stat ensure that all protection
system are properly applied to the pump.
After any operation keep your safety for first so applies all applicable machinery di-
rectives rules.
1.10 ORDER INSPECTION AND REPARATION
The legislation for the labour protection oblige all industrial factory to protect the per-
sonnel, people and environment against the effects related to managing of danger-
ous materials. The inspection/reparation of machines or their parts can be carried out
only after the following procedure
• Empty the pump before the inspection
• Inform if the pump was used with dangerous substances for health or for water
• Indicate potential safety solution relative to substances dangerous for health or
water which the pump was in contact, in order to have a safe manipulation.
1.11 USE OF DANGEROUS MATERIALS
The section gives information on handling, storage and disposal of materials used in
the pumps which may be considered hazardous to your health.
ScrewPump_MVI_e4.fm / 11.5.17
Keep your Safety Officer informed on any problems encountered.
If accidentally, hazardous substances have been touched or inhaled, then the follow-
ing precautions should be taken immediately:
SKIN: Wash with fresh water and soap
INHALATION: Get out to fresh air immediately
EYES: Flush with fresh water, find a medical centre immediately
6 (18) Screw Pump, self priming MVI 20...
Pump description
Following scheme is indicating you what used inside pump:
WHERE USED LIQUID – PRODUCT DANGER FOR
Bearings Anti-size compounds Releases vapor
Stator-rotor Grease – Vaseline Hands and skin
Oil- general lubrication Seal – gearbox Eyes and skin
Pumps surface Paint Releases dust if
machined.
2. PUMP DESCRIPTION
The pump supplied, is a “VOLUMETRIC PUMP TYPE”.
The MVI pumps can manage suspended solids with approximate dimension less
than 10-12 mm for soft solid and up to 3 mm for crushproof solid.
The main part of pump is the single helix metal rotor which rotates eccentrically within
a double helical resilient stator of twice the pitch length of the rotor.
The rotor of circular cross section forms a cavity as it rotates.
The cavity progresses towards the discharge port carrying the pumped liquid inside
this cavity by the continuously formed of seal line.
The flow is non-pulsating because the stator‘s chamber volume is always constant.
The pump will be considered therefore a positive displacement type with the follow-
ing benefits:
• Self-priming even no liquid contained in the pump chamber (some moisture must
be present).
• Very low damage when handling sensitive products.
• Capacity is directly proportional to the pump speed.
• Will handle viscous and abrasive materials.
• No pulsation.
• There is no major torque increase when high pressures are achieved.
• Low noise and vibrations.
• Self-aligning of the rotor even under pressure.
• Compact style construction.
ScrewPump_MVI_e4.fm / 11.5.17
Screw Pump, self priming MVI 20... 7 (18)
Pump description
2.1 TECHNICAL DATA
Part Number 014554 016042
Type MVI 20 230/400V 50Hz MVI 20 230V 1PH 50/60Hz
Construction type Single Screw Pump
Code 01GMVI2003 01GMVI2002
Motor:
Rated Power 0,37 kW
Speed 1400 1/min
Rated voltage 3~ 230/400 V 1~ 230 V
Frequency 50 Hz 50/60 Hz
Rated current (In) 1,96/1,13 A 3,2 A
Protection IP55
Insulation class F
Starting current 5 x In 3 x In
Materials:
Body pump S.S. AISI 316
Screw rotor S.S. AISI 316
Stator Bunan NBR
Mechanical seal Graf-Allox-NBR
Universal joint S.S. AISI 316
Motor shaft S.S. AISI 316
Weight (Pump with ~ 12 kg
motor)
CHARACTERISTIC CURVE
ScrewPump_MVI_e4.fm / 11.5.17
Testing Fluid: Water - Temperature: 20° C - Density: 1,0282 kg/dm³ - Viscosity: 1,0004 mm²/s
(Testing according to ISO 9906-2A)
8 (18) Screw Pump, self priming MVI 20...
Unpacking, handling and storage
DIMENSIONS
3. UNPACKING, HANDLING AND STORAGE
3.1 UNPACKING
All pumps are sent inside box, pallet or cage in order to avoid any problems.
We consider this procedure important and we suggest you proceed as follows:
• Inspect the packing in case any damage has happened during transit.
• With care, remove the packing from the pump.
• Having a look at the pump and check any visible sign of damage.
• Also check that the drive also in an undamaged condition.
3.2 HANDLING
All pumps weights, allow you to move the pump to the final destination without any
problem.
Take care when the pump is fitted with a heavy drive, we suggest you to use safe
lifting tools.
3.3 STORAGE
ScrewPump_MVI_e4.fm / 11.5.17
When the pump will not be installed immediately, it has to be re-packed and placed
in a suitable storage location.
Points to be followed are:
• Place the pump in a covered, dry location which is free from vibrations.
• If the pump is placed in a dusty atmosphere, a moisture repellent cover is neces-
sary until the pump is installed.
Screw Pump, self priming MVI 20... 9 (18)
Pump installation
• Move the pump weekly by rotating the drive train to prevent seizure and bear-
ings damage.
If the pump is to be stored for excessive time (> 6 months), remove the stator
and protect it
• internally with adequate lubrication.
• Ask to our technical department which lubrication type has to be used.
• Remove also drain plug (located on the suction chamber) to avoid vapor form-
ing.
4. PUMP INSTALLATION
4.1 ROTATING DIRECTION
The rotating direction of the pump is indicated on the pump body and/or the
stator. The rotating direction determine the flow direction, for the floating sta-
tor pump the flow direction is compulsory.
A wrong direction can damage the pump.
Pump must be installed in a horizontal position, leaving a space not less than 30 cm
around all sides of the pump. This will help you in making maintenance process and
also to prevent and motor heating problems.
When the pump is not connected with the ground we suggest to install a vibration
compensator.
4.2 PRESSURE.
Without any different indication on the order the admissible pump pressure is 4 bar.
4.3 PIPES
Arrange the pipes in order to warranty a presence of fluid upstream the pump. In that
way is warranted a suitable quantity of fluid for Lubrication during the start.
Before connecting the pump clean and wash all pipes.
Connect the pipes so that not suitable force are not applied on the pump’s connec-
tions. It is advisable to install between the pump and the pipes compensator in order
to avoid pipes pressurize the pump causing pump damage and to reduce the vibra-
tions transmitted along the pipes.
Pipe works has to be same size of larger than the delivery and discharge pump ports.
To help personnel carry out servicing union joints should be fitted in the suction and
discharge pipe-work close to the pump.
When the static discharge head is > 15 m, a non-return valve should be fitted to avoid
ScrewPump_MVI_e4.fm / 11.5.17
the pump-seal system being over-pressurized by the water column.
If any isolation valves are mounted on discharge pipe-work, a safety relief valve is
suggested to safeguard the pump from running against closed valve.
When pump is not fixed on the ground, a vibration isolators should be fitted.
10 (18) Screw Pump, self priming MVI 20...
Start-up
4.4 ELECTRIC CONNECTIONS
All electrical connections, both for the pump or any other machinery into which the
pump is incorporated must be carried out by experienced and qualified personnel un-
der the respective laws of the country in which the equipment will be installed.
5. START-UP
Dry running of pump is not permitted.
• Important: Just few revolutions will probably cause damage to the pumping
parts, stator and rotor.
• Important: Few revolutions in a wrong direction can damage the pump,
5.1 PRELIMINARY ACTIONS BEFORE RUNNING THE PUMP.
If the pump was stored with the oiled rotor before mounting the stator de-grease and
clean the rotor in order to avoid an incompatibility with the pumped fluid
• Fill up the pump by water or the liquid that will be pumped. This operation has to
be carried out by using, for example, the draining plug
• Connect correctly the pump to the both suction and delivery pipe-works
• Close the port.
Note: The operation has to be done only at the first start. The following time the
pump will prime by itself.
• Before connecting the power supply, check all valves, on the suction and deliv-
ery pipe-works, are opened.
• Start the pump for few seconds and verify that it is operating in the correct direc-
tion of rotation as indicated by the directional arrows.
• In a case of incorrect electrical wiring, contact a qualified electrician to reverse
the power supply connections.
• Now, run the pump.
ScrewPump_MVI_e4.fm / 11.5.17
The pumps are volumetric type so they cannot work against closed valve, in
order to avoid damage on the rotating parts before the start open the valve and
check the rotating direction running briefly the motor.
6. TEMPORARY STORAGE
Empty and clean the pump in case of:
Screw Pump, self priming MVI 20... 11 (18)
Maintenance
• Possible danger of freezing at the environment temperature for the pumped fluid
especially if the pump is installed in harsh clime.
• Possible fluid solidification
• Possible incrustation on the joint.
STATOR
In case of long storage the rotor can alter the stator shape of the contact surfaces in
a permanent way. It needs a greater static torque at the first start.
We suggest to remove the stator and package and store it in an environment dust
free, fresh and ventilate protected by light.
ROTOR
Removed the stator, support the rotor on wooden support and cover it in order to
avoid damages, is case of long storage period grease the rotor.
STAND - BY
The reserve pumps, usually in stand-by state, must be periodically moved. In oppo-
site case the pump can be blocked during the start (for the alteration of stator shape).
7. MAINTENANCE
All maintenance operations must be carried out by qualified and experienced person-
nel pumps are designed with simplicity in mind and this will allow you to do the ser-
vicing and maintenance in a quick time with a professional result. Follow our
instructions to avoid any mistake.
7.1 PRELIMINARY OPERATIONS
• Remove power supply from the pump’s motor.
• Wait until the liquid temperature reduces to a safe level.
• Verify there is no system pressure by checking the suction and discharge
gauges.
• Close all valves on the suction and discharge ports of the pump.
• Remove slowly the pipe work from pump connections.
Wash and clean the pump at regular intervals if the pumped liquid can produce in-
crustation.
If for this purpose the pump needs to be opened, stop the pump and ensure it against
accidental start.
Provide to a regular cleaning program, related to the type of exercise.
ScrewPump_MVI_e4.fm / 11.5.17
7.2 MAINTENANCE TYPE MVI
7.2.1 REMOVING THE STATOR MVI-8.
• Unscrew the 4 screws on the suction port.
• Remove the suction port, the stator MVI-3 will now be free to be removed, also
check that the rotor is not damaged.
• Take the new stator, lubricate it by liquid soap and insert the stator in the pump
casing.
12 (18) Screw Pump, self priming MVI 20...
Maintenance
• Refit the suction port by screwing the 4 screws previously removed.
7.2.2 REMOVING THE ROTOR MVI-7
Follow firstly operations explained before.
• After that, you need to disassemble the casing MVI-2. Remove screws
• Take away delivery chamber MVI-1
Now you can see lantern flange with complete drive train.
• Remove metal protection MVI-17
• Secure the drive shaft MVI-1 by using a suitable spanner.
• Insert a second spanner in the free lantern flange’s space, turn the rotor anti
clockwise with this spanner until it unscrews completely. The joint is free also to
be replaced.
7.2.3 REMOVING THE JOINT MVI - 6
The joint is still connected to the drive shaft on one side; the other side is free be-
cause the rotor has been removed.
Screw a nut and locking nut on the free thread and lock them by rotating in the op-
posite direction to each other.
Now turn in an anti-clockwise direction, the nut and the joint will unscrew from drive
shaft. Clean all parts.
7.2.4 REMOVING MECHANICAL SEAL MVI - 4
Follow firstly operations explained before.
Now that you have removed the delivery chamber you can see the mechanical seal.
The first part you see is rotating face of mechanical seal.
Remove it from the drive shaft with care by using your hands only. No tools are re-
quired for this operation. It is easy to damage the mechanical seal so be careful!
The fixed part of mechanical seal is kept in place by a stainless steel flange.
Removing this flange by unscrewing the four screws, the seal is free to be cleaned
or changed.
Clean it thoroughly using a little warm water.
7.3 -
No relevant content for type MVI
ScrewPump_MVI_e4.fm / 11.5.17
Screw Pump, self priming MVI 20... 13 (18)
Problems, causes and remedies
8. PROBLEMS, CAUSES AND REMEDIES
8.1 PUMP DOES NOT START
Causes Remedies
Type of motor is not correct for the local Check motor and power supply.
power supply
A foreign body could be located inside Open the pump, verify situation and
the pump eventually take away the foreign body.
The stator is not resistant to the pumped Check quotation and relative order.
liquid Replace the stator with the correct type
for the pumped fluid.
Liquid pumped is settling out in the Clean the pump every time you stop it.
pump.
Temperature too high and the stator is Lower the liquid temperature. In case
jamming the rotor. this is not possible, contact our technical
personnel.
8.2 PUMP DOES NOT SUCK
Causes Remedies
Suction pipe work is open to atmo- Check all gaskets and tighten all the
sphere. nuts, screw etc.
Stator is worn. Replace the stator according to this man-
ual.
Rotor is worn. Replace the rotor according to this man-
ual. Verify if it has worn due to abrasion
or corrosion. Change material.
Mechanical seal is leaking. Replace the seal according to this man-
ual.
8.3 PERFORMANCE UNDER STANDARD
Causes Remedies
Electric motor is undersized or the incor- Check that the correct motor has been
rect voltage is being applied. ordered and installation is correct.
Too high pressure on delivery pipe work. Measure by a pressure gauge and
reduce line pressure.
Air in the suction pipe work. Check and tighten all screws in the suc-
tion
ScrewPump_MVI_e4.fm / 11.5.17
Mechanical seal is leaking. Replace mechanical seal.
Sometimes pump is running dry. Fill up the casing, install protective
device against dry running.
Stator is worn. Replace stator.
Rotor is worn. Replace rotor.
Suction lift too big. Reduce pipe loss by increasing the
diameter of the suction pipe work. Move
the suction port closer to the liquid level.
14 (18) Screw Pump, self priming MVI 20...
Suggested spare parts
8.4 PUMP IS NOISING
Causes Remedies
Worn stator Replace the stator.
Worn rotor. Replace the rotor.
Worn joint. Replace the joint.
Air present in the pipe work. Increase liquid level on the suction side.
8.5 PUMPING ELEMENTS WEAR
Causes Remedies
Too high pressure. Use a pressure gauge to check the sys-
tem pressure and reduce the pressure.
The liquid temperature is too high. Reduce liquid temperature. In a case this
is not possible, contact our technical per-
sonnel.
Liquid pumped is clogging the inside of Open and clean the pump every time
the pump. you stop it.
Pump is running dry. Fill up the pump first time you use it.
Install a dry run protective device.
9. SUGGESTED SPARE PARTS
All spare parts are usually available in our warehouse. In particular case, when a de-
livery time, even if brief, cannot be accepted we suggest to provide a small supply of
spare parts for each pump.
• Stator
• Mechanical seal
• Universal joints
• Rotor
• Brushes (for direct current motor)
In order to identify properly the components please use the attached exploded draw-
ings.
10. EXPLODED DRAWING AND SPARE PARTS LIST
When ordering spare parts please specify: quantity, designation, position
ScrewPump_MVI_e4.fm / 11.5.17
number of each spare part in accordance with exploded drawing, type and se-
rial number stamped on rating plate.
Screw Pump, self priming MVI 20... 15 (18)
Exploded drawing and spare parts list
10.1 TYPE PLATE EXAMPLE
Always provide the serial number and the pump type for order new single spare part
or spare part kit.
ScrewPump_MVI_e4.fm / 11.5.17
16 (18) Screw Pump, self priming MVI 20...
Exploded drawing and spare parts list
10.2 EXPLODED DRAWING
10.3 SPARE PARTS LIST
Pos. Quantity Designation Part No.
- 1 Screw Pump, self priming (complete) 014554
MVI 20; 230/400V 50Hz
3-phase drive
- 1 Screw Pump, self priming (complete) 016042
MVI 20 230V 1PH 50/60Hz
1-phase drive
1 1 Nut
2 1 Grower
3 1 Suction flange
4 1 Stator 015043
5 1 Pump body
6 1 Fixing pivot
7 1 Rotor 015044
8 1 Washer
9 1 Joint 015045
10 1 Washer
ScrewPump_MVI_e4.fm / 11.5.17
11 1 Mechanical Seal 015046
12 1 O-Ring 015047
13 1 Mechanical seal plate
14 1 Drive shaft
Screw Pump, self priming MVI 20... 17 (18)
Exploded drawing and spare parts list
Pos. Quantity Designation Part No.
15 1 Grub screw
16 1 Fixing pump nut
17 1 Washer
18 1 Grower
19 1 Block lantern
20 1 Shaft protection
21 1 Screw
22 1 Splash guard ring
ScrewPump_MVI_e4.fm / 11.5.17
18 (18) Screw Pump, self priming MVI 20...
Bei der Lehmkuhle 4
D-21279 Hollenstedt - Germany
Tel: +49-(0)4165 / 2211-0
E-Mail: [email protected]
www.HamannAG.com
Pressure Sensor, Saturator (A-1-CP-062)
Pressure Sensor
Type: PT5404 (0...10 bar)
Part No.: 014562
Operating- and Maintenance Instruction
This instruction includes important safety information and instructions for commission-
ing, operation and maintenance of the HAMANN plant and its components. It is essential
therefore, that the responsible specialist refers to it before starting any work on the ma-
chinery as well as prior to commissioning. Furthermore, this instruction must always be
available on site.
With reservation of technical modification
BA 0083 e 1 (10)
CONTENT
PRELIMINARY NOTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
LABELLING OF ADVICE AND SAFETY ADVICE IN THIS DOCUMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
INTENDED USE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
APPLICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
ELECTRICAL CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
TECHNICAL DATA AND SCALE DRAWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Pressure Sensor PT5404 (0...10 bar) 3 (10)
Preliminary note
1. PRELIMINARY NOTE
LABELLING OF ADVICE AND SAFETY ADVICE IN THIS DOCUMENT
Important safety advice. Non-observance of safety instructions could lead to danger
of life or limb:
Warnings regarding electric power equipment. Non-observance of safety instruc-
tions could lead to danger of life or limb:
Safety instructions whose non-observance could jeopardize the system/machine
and its functions:
Important additional information to ensure optimal function and maximum perfor-
mance:
2. SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
• Please read this document prior to set-up of the unit. Ensure that the product is
suitable for your application without any restrictions.
• If the operating instructions or the technical data are not adhered to, personal
injury and/or damage to property can occur.
• Improper or non-intended use may lead to malfunctions of the unit or to
unwanted effects in your application. That is why installation, electrical connec-
tion, set-up, operation and maintenance of the unit must only be carried out by
PressureSensor_PT5404_e1.fm / 30.10.15
qualified personnel authorised by the machine operator.
• In order to guarantee the correct condition of the device for the operating time it
is necessary to use the device only for media to which the wetted materials are
sufficiently resistant (see Technical data).
• The responsibility whether the measurement devices are suitable for the respec-
tive application lies with the operator. The manufacturer assumes no liability for
consequences of misuse by the operator. Improper installation and use of the
devices result in a loss of the warranty claims.
4 (10) Pressure Sensor PT5404 (0...10 bar)
Intended use
3. INTENDED USE
The pressure sensor detects the system pressure and converts it into an analogue
output signal.
3.1 APPLICATIONS
Type of pressure: relative pressure
Pressure resistance Bursting
Type Measuring range
(max. permissible pressure) pressure
bar psi bar psi bar psi
PT5404 (0...10 bar) 0...10 0...145 25 360 300 4350
Avoid static and dynamic overpressure exceeding the specified overload pres-
sure by taking appropriate measures.
The indicated bursting pressure must not be exceeded.
Even if the bursting pressure is exceeded only for a short time, the unit
may be destroyed. ATTENTION: Risk of injury!
For units with a final value of the measuring range of 600 bar the limits of the
pressure cycles across the lifetime apply. (see Technical data).
Pressure Equipment Directive (PED):
Units with a final value of the measuring range of 6...400 bar comply with the
Pressure Equipment Directive and are designed and manufactured for group 2
fluids in accordance with the sound engineering practice.
Use of group 1 fluids on request!
Pressure Equipment Directive (PED):
The units with a final value of the measuring range of 600 bar comply with the
Pressure Equipment Directive. They are designed for group 2 fluids and man-
ufactured and tested according to Module A.
Use of group 1 fluids on request!
The units are vacuum resistant.
PressureSensor_PT5404_e1.fm / 30.10.15
Pressure Sensor PT5404 (0...10 bar) 5 (10)
Functions
4. FUNCTIONS
&XUUHQWRXWSXWP$ 37[[
0$: 0(:
3 V\VWHPSUHVVXUH
0$: ,QLWLDOYDOXHRIWKHPHDVXULQJUDQJH0(: ILQDOYDOXHRIWKHPHDVXULQJUDQJH
,QWKHPHDVXULQJUDQJHWKHRXWSXWVLJQDOLV
EHWZHHQDQGP$
,IWKHV\VWHPSUHVVXUHLVDERYHRUEHORZ
WKHPHDVXULQJUDQJHWKHDQDORJXHRXWSXW
EHKDYHVZLWKRXWDFKLHYLQJWKHDFFXUDF\
DVIROORZV
6\VWHPSUHVVXUHDERYHWKHPHDVXULQJ
UDQJH P$
6\VWHPSUHVVXUHEHORZWKHPHDVXULQJ
UDQJH P$
5. INSTALLATION
Before installing and removing the unit: make sure that no pressure is applied
to the system.
• Insert the unit in a G ¼ process connection.
• Tighten firmly. Recommended tightening torque:
Pressure range in bar Tightening torque in Nm
6...400 25...35
600 30...50
Depends on lubrication, seal and pressure load!
PressureSensor_PT5404_e1.fm / 30.10.15
6 (10) Pressure Sensor PT5404 (0...10 bar)
Electrical connection
6. ELECTRICAL CONNECTION
The unit must be connected by a qualified electrician.
The national and international regulations for the installation of electrical
equipment must be adhered to.
Voltage supply to EN 50178, SELV, PELV.
• Disconnect power.
• Connect the unit as follows:
PT54xx P$DQDORJXH
Core colours
1 BN
BN brown 2 1 L+
WH white
2 WH
OUT
OUT: analogue output 4...20 mA
Colours to DIN EN 60947-5-2
Example circuit
1 BN L+
2 WH L
PressureSensor_PT5404_e1.fm / 30.10.15
Pressure Sensor PT5404 (0...10 bar) 7 (10)
Technical data and scale drawing
7. TECHNICAL DATA AND SCALE DRAWING
Product characteristics
Electronic pressure sensor
for industrial applications
Process connection: G ¼ A (according to DIN EN ISO 1179-2)
Analogue output
Measuring range: 0...10 bar
Application
Application Type of pressure: relative pressure
Group 2 fluids according to the Pressure Equipment Directive (PED),
group 1 fluids on request
Pressure rating [bar] 25 (static)
Bursting pressure min. [bar] 300
Vacuum resistance [mbar] -1000
Medium temperature [°C] -40...90
Electrical data
Electrical design DC
Operating voltage [V] 8.5...36 DC
Insulation resistance [M] > 100 (500 V DC)
Protection class III
Reverse polarity protection yes
Outputs
Output Analogue output
Output function 4...20 mA analogue
Short-circuit proof yes
Overload protection yes
PressureSensor_PT5404_e1.fm / 30.10.15
Analogue output 4...20 mA
Max. load [ȋ] (Ub - 8.5 V) / 21.5 mA; 720 at Ub = 24 V
Measuring / setting range
Measuring range [bar] 0...10
Accuracy / deviations
Accuracy / deviations
(in % of the span)
Characteristics deviation *) < ± 0.5
Linearity < ± 0.1 (BFSL) / < ± 0.2 (LS)
Hysteresis < ± 0.2
Repeatability **) < ± 0.05
8 (10) Pressure Sensor PT5404 (0...10 bar)
Technical data and scale drawing
Long-term stability ***) < ± 0.1
Temperature coefficients (TEMPCO) in the temperature range -40...90° C (in % of the span per 10 K)
Greatest TEMPCO of the zero point
+ span < 0.1 (-25...90 °C) / < 0.2 (-40...-25 °C)
Reaction times
Step response time analogue
output [ms] 1
Environment
Ambient temperature [°C] -40...90
Storage temperature [°C] -40...100
Protection IP 67 / IP 69K
Tests / approvals
Pressure equipment directive Sound engineering practice
EMC DIN EN 61000-6-2
DIN EN 61000-6-3
Shock resistance DIN EN 60068-2-27 50 g (11 ms)
Vibration resistance DIN EN 60068-2-6 20 g (10...2000 Hz)
MTTF [Years] 686
Mechanical data
Process connection G ¼ A (according to DIN EN ISO 1179-2)
Process connection sealing FKM (nach DIN 3869)
Materials (wetted parts) 1.4542 (17-4 PH / 630)²
Housing materials 1.4542 (17-4 PH / 630)²; stainless steel (316L / 1.4404); PEI
Min. pressure cycles 60 millions in the course of the lifetime (at 1.2 times the nominal pressure)
Tightening torque [Nm] 25...35 (recommended tightening torque¹)
Restrictor element integrated no
Weight [kg] 0.056
Electrical connection
Connection M12 connector
Wiring
Core colours
BN brown
WH white
OUT: 4...20 mA
The following pin connection is available on request:
pin 1: L+, pin 3: OUT
Colours to DIN EN 60947-5-6
Remarks
PressureSensor_PT5404_e1.fm / 30.10.15
Remarks *) incl. drift when overtightened, zero point and span error,
non-linearity, hysteresis
**) with temperature fluctuations < 10 K
***) in% of the span / 6 months
¹) Depends on lubrication, seal and pressure rating
²) Characteristics similar to stainless steel (e.g. 304/1.4301) but higher
strength.
Pressure Sensor PT5404 (0...10 bar) 9 (10)
Technical data and scale drawing
PressureSensor_PT5404_e1.fm / 30.10.15
10 (10) Pressure Sensor PT5404 (0...10 bar)
Bei der Lehmkuhle 4
D-21279 Hollenstedt - Germany
Tel: +49-(0)4165 / 2211-0
E-Mail: [email protected]
www.HamannAG.com
Process pressure transmitter
Type: BAR 14...
Part No.: 000081 (0...10,0 bar)
000071 (0...0,25 bar)
013701 (...X1SA1GPN; 0...0,1 bar)
015316 (...X1SA1G2N; 0...0,1 bar)
Operating- and Maintenance Instruction
This instruction includes important safety information and instructions for commission-
ing, operation and maintenance of the HAMANN components. It is essential therefore, that
the responsible specialist refers to it before starting any work on the machinery as well as
prior to commissioning. Furthermore, this instruction must always be available on site.
With reservation of technical modification.
BA 0056 e 1 (22)
CONTENT
ABOUT THIS DOCUMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
TARGET GROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
SYMBOLS USED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
FOR YOUR SAFETY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
AUTHORISED PERSONNEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
APPROPRIATE USE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
WARNING ABOUT INCORRECT USE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
GENERAL SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
SAFETY LABEL ON THE INSTRUMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
CE CONFORMITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
MEASURING RANGE - PERMISSIBLE PROCESS PRESSURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
FULFILLMENT OF NAMUR RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
ENVIRONMENTAL INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
PACKAGING, TRANSPORT AND STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
MOUNTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
MOUNTING INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
CONNECTING TO POWER SUPPLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
PREPARING THE CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
CONNECTION PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
WIRING PLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
SWITCH ON PHASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
SET UP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
SETUP PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
MAINTENANCE AND FAULT RECTIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
REMOVE INTERFERENCES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
DISMOUNTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
DISMOUNTING STEPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
DISPOSAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
SUPPLEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
TECHNICAL DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
DIMENSIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
SPARE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Process pressure transmitter BAR 14... 3 (22)
About this document
1. ABOUT THIS DOCUMENT
1.1 FUNCTION
This operating instructions manual provides all the information you need for mount-
ing, connection and setup as well as important instructions for maintenance and fault
rectification. Please read this information before putting the instrument into operation
and keep this manual accessible in the immediate vicinity of the device.
1.2 TARGET GROUP
This operating instructions manual is directed to trained specialist personnel. The
contents of this manual should be made available to these personnel and put into
practice by them.
1.3 SYMBOLS USED
Caution: If this warning is ignored, faults or malfunctions can result.
Warning: If this warning is ignored, injury to persons and/or serious damage to the
instrument can result.
Danger: If this warning is ignored, serious injury to persons and/or destruction of the
instrument can result.
Warnings regarding electric power are labelled with:
Safety instructions whose non-observance could jeopardize the machine and its
functions are labelled with
Important additional informations are labelled with
Always comply with instructions mounted directly on the machine, e.g.
• rotational direction arrow
BAR14_e4.fm / 20.3.17
• fluid connection indicators
and ensure that the information remains legible.
4 (22) Process pressure transmitter BAR 14...
For your safety
2. FOR YOUR SAFETY
2.1 AUTHORISED PERSONNEL
All operations described in this operating instructions manual must be carried out
only by trained specialist personnel authorised by the plant operator.
During work on and with the device the required personal protective equipment must
always be worn.
2.2 APPROPRIATE USE
VEGABAR 14 is a pressure transmitter for measurement of gauge pressure, abso-
lute pressure and vacuum.
You can find detailed information about the area of application in chapter "Product
description".
Operational reliability is ensured only if the instrument is properly used according to
the specifications in the operating instructions manual as well as possible supple-
mentary instructions.
For safety and warranty reasons, any invasive work on the device beyond that de-
scribed in the operating instructions manual may be carried out only by personnel au-
thorised by the manufacturer. Arbitrary conversions or modifications are explicitly
forbidden.
2.3 WARNING ABOUT INCORRECT USE
Inappropriate or incorrect use of the instrument can give rise to application-specific
hazards, e.g. vessel overfill or damage to system components through incorrect
mounting or adjustment.
2.4 GENERAL SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
This is a state-of-the-art instrument complying with all prevailing regulations and
guidelines. The instrument must only be operated in a technically flawless and reli-
able condition. The operator is responsible for the trouble-free operation of the instru-
ment.
During the entire duration of use, the user is obliged to determine the compliance of
the necessary occupational safety measures with the current valid rules and regula-
tions and also take note of new regulations.
The safety instructions in this operating instructions manual, the national installation
standards as well as the valid safety regulations and accident prevention rules must
be observed by the user.
For safety and warranty reasons, any invasive work on the device beyond that de-
scribed in the operating instructions manual may be carried out only by personnel au-
thorised by the manufacturer. Arbitrary conversions or modifications are explicitly
BAR14_e4.fm / 20.3.17
forbidden.
The safety approval markings and safety tips on the device must also be observed.
2.5 SAFETY LABEL ON THE INSTRUMENT
The safety approval markings and safety tips on the device must be observed.
Process pressure transmitter BAR 14... 5 (22)
For your safety
2.6 CE CONFORMITY
The device fulfills the legal requirements of the applicable EC guidelines. By affixing
the CE marking, we confirm successful testing of the product.
You can find the CE Certificate of Conformity in the download section of our homep-
age.
2.7 MEASURING RANGE - PERMISSIBLE PROCESS PRESSURE
Due to the application, a measuring cell with a measuring range higher than the per-
missible pressure range of the process fitting may have been integrated. The permis-
sible process pressure is stated with "Process pressure" on the type label, see
chapter 3.1 "Configuration". For safety reasons, this range must not be exceeded.
2.8 FULFILLMENT OF NAMUR RECOMMENDATIONS
With respect to interference resistance and emitted interference, the NAMUR recom-
mendation NE 21 is fulfilled.
2.9 ENVIRONMENTAL INSTRUCTIONS
Protection of the environment is one of our most important duties.
That is why we have introduced an environment management system with the goal
of continuously improving company environmental protection. The environment
management system is certified according to DIN EN ISO 14001.
Please help us fulfill this obligation by observing the environmental instructions in this
manual:
• Chapter "Packaging, transport and storage"
• Chapter "Disposal"
BAR14_e4.fm / 20.3.17
6 (22) Process pressure transmitter BAR 14...
Product description
3. PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
3.1 CONFIGURATION
CONFIGURATION
Figure 1: VEGABAR 14 with plug connector according to ISO 4400
1 Process fitting
2 Housing with electronics
3 Pressure compensation
4 Plug connector
3.2 PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
VEGABAR 14 is a pressure transmitter for measurement of gauge pressure, abso-
lute pressure or vacuum. Measured products are gases, vapours and liquids.
The sensor element is the CERTEC® measuring cell with rugged ceramic dia-
phragm. The process pressure causes a capacitance change in the measuring cell
via the ceramic diaphragm. This change is converted into an appropriate output sig-
nal and outputted as measured value.
BAR14_e4.fm / 20.3.17
The following presentations show the installation of the ceramic measuring cell into
the process fitting and the different seal concepts.
Process pressure transmitter BAR 14... 7 (22)
Product description
3
4
5
6
Figure 2: Recessed installation of the measuring cell
1 Measuring cell
2 Seal for the measuring cell
3 Additional, front seal for measuring cell
4 Diaphragm
5 Process fitting
6 Seal for the process fitting
l
1
2
3
4
5
Figure 3: Front-flush installation of the measuring cell
1 Seal for the process fitting
BAR14_e4.fm / 20.3.17
2 Measuring cell
3 Seal for the measuring cell
4 Process fitting
5 Diaphragm
4 … 20 mA two-wire electronics for voltage supply and measured value transmission
on the same cable.
8 (22) Process pressure transmitter BAR 14...
Mounting
3.3 OPERATION
The instrument offers no adjustment options.
3.4 PACKAGING, TRANSPORT AND STORAGE
Your instrument was protected by packaging during transport. Its capacity to handle
normal loads during transport is assured by a test based on ISO 4180.
The packaging of standard instruments consists of environmentfriendly, recyclable
cardboard. For special versions, PE foam or PE foil is also used. Dispose of the pack-
aging material via specialised recycling companies.
Transport must be carried out in due consideration of the notes on the transport pack-
aging. Nonobservance of these instructions can cause damage to the device.
The delivery must be checked for completeness and possible transit damage imme-
diately at receipt. Ascertained transit damage or concealed defects must be appro-
priately dealt with.
Up to the time of installation, the packages must be left closed and stored according
to the orientation and storage markings on the outside.
Unless otherwise indicated, the packages must be stored only under the following
conditions:
• Not in the open
• Dry and dust free
• Not exposed to corrosive media
• Protected against solar radiation
• Avoiding mechanical shock and vibration
• Storage and transport temperature see chapter „Supplement - Technical data -
Ambient conditions“
• Relative humidity 20 … 85 %
4. MOUNTING
4.1 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
Make sure that all parts of the instrument coming in direct contact with the process,
especially the sensor element, process seal and process fitting, are suitable for the
existing process conditions, such as process pressure, process temperature as well
as the chemical properties of the medium.
You can find the specifications in chapter „Technical data“ and on the nameplate.
4.2 MOUNTING INSTRUCTIONS
VEGABAR 14 functions in any installation position. It is mounted according
BAR14_e4.fm / 20.3.17
to the same directives as a manometer (DIN EN 839-2).
Process pressure transmitter BAR 14... 9 (22)
Connecting to power supply
4.3 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
For mounting VEGABAR 14, a welded socket is required. You can find these com-
ponents in the supplementary instructions manual "Welded socket and seals".
Use the attached sealing (depending on the process fitting) or seal the thread with
resistant seal material.
– Screw VEGABAR 14 into the welded socket. Tighten the hexagon screw on
the process fitting. Wrench size, see chapter "Dimensions", torque see chapter
"Technical data".
Figure 4: Mounting of VEGABAR 14
5. CONNECTING TO POWER SUPPLY
5.1 PREPARING THE CONNECTION
NOTE SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Always keep in mind the following safety instructions:
• Connect only in the complete absence of line voltage
• If overvoltage surges are expected, overvoltage arresters should be installed
SELECT POWER SUPPLY
The supply voltage and the current signal are carried on the same two wire connec-
tion cable.
Provide a reliable separation between the supply circuit and the mains circuits ac-
cording to DIN EN 61140 VDE 0140-1.
Keep in mind the following additional influences on the operating
BAR14_e4.fm / 20.3.17
voltage:
• Output voltage of the power supply unit can be lower under nominal load (with a
sensor current of 20.5 mA or 22 mA in case of fault message)
• Influence of additional instruments in the circuit (see load values in chapter 9.1
"Technical data" on page 17)
10 (22) Process pressure transmitter BAR 14...
Connecting to power supply
SELECTING CONNECTION CABLE
The instrument is connected with standard two-wire cable without screen. If electro-
magnetic interference is expected which is above the test values of EN 61326 for in-
dustrial areas, screened cable should be used.
Use cable with round cross-section. A suitable outer cable diameter of (see chapter
"Technical data") ensures the seal effect of the cable gland..
CABLE SCREENING AND GROUNDING HIER WEITER MACHEN!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
CK27.09.2016
Connect the cable screen on both ends to ground potential.
If potential equalisation currents are expected, the connection on the processing side
must be made via a ceramic capacitor (e.g. 1 nF, 1500 V). The low frequency poten-
tial equalisation currents are thus suppressed, but the protective effect against high
frequency interference signals remains.
5.2 CONNECTION PROCEDURE
CONNECTION VIA ANGLE PLUG CONNECTOR
Proceed as follows:
1. Loosen the screw on the rear of the plug connector
2. Remove the plug connector and seal from BAR 14
3. Remove the plug insert out of the plug housing
3
2
Figure 5: Loosen the plug insert
1 Cable gland
2 Plug insert
3 Plug housing
4. Remove approx. 5 cm of the cable mantle, strip approx. 1 cm insulation from the
individual wires
5. Lead the cable through the cable gland into the plug housing
6. Connect the wire ends to the screw terminals according to the wiring plan
BAR14_e4.fm / 20.3.17
Process pressure transmitter BAR 14... 11 (22)
Connecting to power supply
2
1
3
4
Figure 6: Connection to the screw terminals
1 Cable gland
2 Plug housing
3 Plug insert
4 Plug seal
7. Snap the plug insert into the plug housing and insert the sensor seal
8. Plug the plug insert with seal to BAR 14 and tighten the screw
The electrical connection is finished.
CONNECTION VIA ANGLE PLUG CONNECTOR WITH HINGED COVER
Proceed as follows:
1. Loosen the screw in the cover of the plug connector
2. Open the cover and remove it
3. Press the plug insert downwards
4. Loosen the screws of the strain relief and cable entry
BAR14_e4.fm / 20.3.17
12 (22) Process pressure transmitter BAR 14...
Connecting to power supply
1 2 3
3
2
Figure 7: Loosen the plug insert
1 Plug insert
2 Strain relief
3 Cable gland
4 Plug housing
5. Remove approx. 5 cm of the cable mantle, strip approx. 1 cm insulation from the
individual wires
6. Lead the cable through the cable gland into the plug housing
7. Connect the wire ends to the screw terminals according to the wiring plan
8. Snap the plug insert into the plug housing and insert the sensor seal
2
1
3
5
BAR14_e4.fm / 20.3.17
Figure 8: Connection to the screw terminals
Process pressure transmitter BAR 14... 13 (22)
Connecting to power supply
1 Cable gland
2 Cover
3 Plug housing
4 Plug insert
5 Plug seal
Note the correct arrangement, see illustration
9. Tighten the screws on the strain relief and cable entry
10.Hook in the cover and push onto the plug connection, tighten cover screw
11.Plug the plug insert with seal to BAR 14 and tighten the screw
The electrical connection is finished.
5.3 WIRING PLAN
ANGLE PLUG CONNECTOR ACCORDING TO DIN 43650-A
+
1
3 1
2
Figure 9: Wiring plan plug connector according to DIN 43650-A, view to the
connection on the instrument side
1 = Voltage supply and signal output
ROUND PLUG CONNECTOR M12 X 1
2 1
1
3 3 4
-
BAR14_e4.fm / 20.3.17
Figure 10: Wiring plan round plug connector M12 x 1, view to the connection on the
instrument side
1 = Voltage supply and signal output
14 (22) Process pressure transmitter BAR 14...
Set up
DIRECT CABLE OUTLET
4
1
2
2
3
Figure 11: Wiring plan cable outlet
1 brown (+) power supply and signal output
2 blue (-) power supply and signal output
3 Cable screen
4 Breather capillaries
5.4 SWITCH ON PHASE
After connecting BAR 14 to power supply or after a voltage recurrence, the instru-
ment carries out a self-check:
• Internal check of the electronics
• 4 … 20 mA output jumps to the failure signal 3.6 mA
Then BAR 14 delivers a current of 4 … 20 mA to the cable. The value corresponds
to the actual level as well as to settings already carried out, e.g. the factory setting.
6. SET UP
6.1 SETUP PROCEDURE
After mounting and electrical connection, BAR 14 is ready for operation.
BAR 14 delivers a current of 4 … 20 mA according to the actual process pressure.
Further settings are not necessary.
7. MAINTENANCE AND FAULT RECTIFICATION
7.1 MAINTENANCE
When used in the correct way, no special maintenance is required in normal opera-
BAR14_e4.fm / 20.3.17
tion.
Process pressure transmitter BAR 14... 15 (22)
Maintenance and fault rectification
7.2 REMOVE INTERFERENCES
REACTION WHEN MALFUNCTIONS OCCUR
The operator of the system is responsible for taken suitable measures to remove in-
terferences.
CAUSES OF MALFUNCTION
A maximum of reliability is ensured. Nevertheless, faults can occur during operation.
These may be caused by the following, e.g.:
• Sensor
• Process
• Power supply
• Signal processing
FAULT RECTIFICATION
The first measure to be taken is to check the output signal. In many cases, the
causes can be determined this way and the faults rectified.
CHECKING THE 4 …20 MA SIGNAL
? 4 … 20 mA signal not stable
• no atmospheric pressure compensation
– Check the pressure compensation in the plug or via the capillaries
? No 4 … 20 mA signal
• Connection to voltage supply wrong
– Check connection according to chapter "Connection steps" and if necessary,
correct according to chapter "Wiring plan"
• No voltage supply
– Check cables for breaks; repair if necessary
• supply voltage too low or load resistance too high
– Check, adapt if necessary
? Current signal 22 mA
• electronics module or measuring cell defective
– Exchange instrument or return instrument for repair
REACTION AFTER FAULT RECTIFICATION
Depending on the failure reason and measures taken, the steps described in chapter
6.1 "Setup procedure" on page 15 must be carried out again, if necessary.
BAR14_e4.fm / 20.3.17
16 (22) Process pressure transmitter BAR 14...
Dismounting
8. DISMOUNTING
8.1 DISMOUNTING STEPS
Before dismounting, be aware of dangerous process conditions such as e.g.
pressure in the vessel, high temperatures, corrosive or toxic products etc.
Take note of chapters "Mounting" and "Connecting to power supply" and carry out
the listed steps in reverse order.
8.2 DISPOSAL
The instrument consists of materials which can be recycled by specialized recycling
companies. We use recyclable materials and have designed the electronics to be
easily separable.
WEEE DIRECTIVE 2002/96/EG
This instrument is not subject to the WEEE directive 2002/96/EG and the respective
national laws. Pass the instrument directly on to a specialized recycling company and
do not use the municipal collecting points. These may be used only for privately used
products according to the WEEE directive.
Correct disposal avoids negative effects to persons and environment and ensures re-
cycling of useful raw materials.
Materials: see chapter "Technical data"
If you have no possibility to dispose of the old instrument professionally, please con-
tact us concerning return and disposal.
9. SUPPLEMENT
9.1 TECHNICAL DATA
GENERAL DATA
Parameter, pressure Gauge pressure, absolute pressure, vacuum
Measuring principle Ceramic-capacitive, dry measuring cell
Communication interface None
MATERIALS AND WEIGHTS
Materials, wetted parts
• Process fitting 316L, PVDF
BAR14_e4.fm / 20.3.17
• Diaphragm sapphire ceramic® (99.9% oxide ceramic)
• Measuring cell seal FKM (VP2/A), EPDM (A+P 75.5/KW75F)
Materials, non-wetted parts
• Electronics housing brass, nickel-plated
Process pressure transmitter BAR 14... 17 (22)
Supplement
Materials, non-wetted parts,
plug connector DIN 43650-A
• Contact, housing plug PA
• Cover screw StSt
• Contact surface Sn
• Plug seal NBR
Materials, non-wetted parts,
plug connector M12 x 1
• Contact support PA
• Contact CuZn, nickel layer + 0.8 µm gold-plated
• Plug seal FKM
Materials, non-wetted parts, cable outlet
9. Cable gland PA
10.Cable PE
Torque (with material process fitting 316L) 50 Nm (36.88 lbf ft)
Weight approx. 0.25 kg (0.55 lbs)
OUTPUT VARIABLE
Output signal 4 … 20 mA
Range 3.8 … 20.5 mA
Failure signal 3.6 mA
Max. output current 22 mA
Run-up time 2s
Step response time 20 ms (0 … 63%)
INPUT VARIABLE
Nominal range Overload, max. pressure Overload, min. pressure
Gauge pressure
0 … 0.1 bar/0 … 10 kPa 15 bar/1500 kPa -0.2 bar/-20 kPa
0 … 0.25 bar/0 … 25 kPa 30 bar/3000 kPa -0.8 bar/-80 kPa
0 … 10 bar/0 … 1000 kPa 90 bar/9000 kPa -1 bar/-100 kPa
Absolute pressure
0 … 1 bar/0 … 100 kPa 35 bar/3500 kPa
0 … 10 bar/0 … 1 MPa 90 bar/9 MPa
REFERENCE CONDITIONS AND ACTUATING VARIABLES (SIMILAR TO DIN EN
60770-1)
BAR14_e4.fm / 20.3.17
Reference conditions according to DIN EN 61298-1
• Temperature +15 … +25 °C (+59 … +77 °F)
• Relative humidity 45 … 75%
• Air pressure 860…1060 mbar/86…106 kPa
(12.5…15.4 psig)
18 (22) Process pressure transmitter BAR 14...
Supplement
Determination of characteristics Limit point adjustment according to
IEC 61298-2
Characteristics curve linear
Reference installation position upright, diaphragm points downward
Influence of the installation position < 0.2 mbar/20 Pa (0.003 psig)
DEVIATION DETERMINED ACCORDING TO THE LIMIT POINT METHOD ACCORDING
TO IEC 60770 (RELATING TO THE NOMINAL MEASURING RANGE, INCL. NON-LIN-
EARITY, HYSTERESIS AND NON-REPRODUCIBILITY)
Deviation < 0.5%
INFLUENCE OF THE AMBIENT TEMPERATURE (RELATING TO THE NOMINAL MEA-
SURING RANGE)
Average temperature coefficient of
the zero signal (In the compensated
temperature range of 0 … +80 °C
(+32 … +176 °F), reference
temperature 20 °C (68 °F). < 0.15%/10 K
Long-term stability (similar to
DIN 16086, DINV 19259-1 and
IEC 60770-1)Long-term drift of the
zero signal (Relating to the nominal
measuring range) < 0.1%/year
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Ambient temperature
• Version with plug connector -20 … +85 °C (-4 … +185 °F)
• Version with cable outlet -20 … +60 °C (-4 … +140 °F)
Storage and transport temperature
• Version with plug connector -40 … +100 °C (-40 … +212 °F)
• Version with cable outlet -40 … +60 °C (-40 … +140 °F)
PROCESS CONDITIONS
Product temperature depending on the measuring cell seal
• FKM (VP2/A) -20 … +100 °C (-4 … +212 °F)
• EPDM (A+P 75.5/KW75F) - 40 … +100 °C (-40 … +212 °F)
Vibration resistance mechanical vibrations with 4 g and
5 … 100 Hz (tested according to the
regulations of German Lloyd, GL directive 2)
ELECTROMECHANICAL DATA
BAR14_e4.fm / 20.3.17
Angled plug connector
• Version 4-pole according to DIN 43560-A
• Screw terminals for cable
cross-section up to 2.5 mm² (AWG 14)
• Cable gland M16 (for cable: ø 4.5 … 10 mm)
Process pressure transmitter BAR 14... 19 (22)
Supplement
Circular plug connector 4-pole with screwed connection M12 x 1
Cable outlet
• Length 5 m (16.4 ft.)
• Min. bending radius 25 mm (with 25 °C/77 °F)
• Diameter approx. 6 mm
POWER SUPPLY
Operating voltage 8 … 30 V DC
Permissible residual ripple Uss < 1 V
Load see diagram
Ω
3
1000
750
1
500
250
2
8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 V
Figure 12: Voltage diagram
1 Voltage limit
2 Operating voltage
3 Max. load
ELECTRICAL PROTECTIVE MEASURES
Protection (according to EN 60529/IEC 529)
• with plug M12 x 1 or according to
DIN 43650-A IP 65
• with direct cable outlet IP 67
Protection class III
Overvoltage category III
BAR14_e4.fm / 20.3.17
20 (22) Process pressure transmitter BAR 14...
Dimensions
10. DIMENSIONS
36 mm
(1 27/64")
49,5 mm
(1 61/64")
151 mm (5 15/16")
ø 38 mm
(1 1/2")
SW27
23 mm (29/32") (1 11/32")
G½A
34 mm
ø 3 mm (1/8")
3 mm (1/8")
ø 6 mm (1/4")
Figure 13: Dimensions BAR 14
11. SPARE PARTS
Name Range Part number
0 - 10 bar 000081
Process pressure transmitter 0 - 0.25 bar 000071
BAR14_e4.fm / 20.3.17
0 - 0.1 bar 013701
For placing a spare parts order, it is absolutely necessary to give the following details:
• Quantity
• Designation
Process pressure transmitter BAR 14... 21 (22)
Spare parts
• Part number
Technical Support [email protected]
Spare Parts [email protected]
BAR14_e4.fm / 20.3.17
22 (22) Process pressure transmitter BAR 14...
Bei der Lehmkuhle 4
D-21279 Hollenstedt - Germany
Tel: +49-(0)4165 / 2211-0
E-Mail: [email protected]
www.HamannAG.com
Diaphragm valve
Type: 695 DN...
Type Part No.
695 DN20 (PP) 015346
695 DN25 (PP) 015418
695 DN40 (PP) 015878
695 DN50 (PP) 015879
Operating- and Maintenance Instruction
This instruction includes important safety information and instructions for commission-
ing, operation and maintenance of the HAMANN components. It is essential therefore, that
the responsible specialist refers to it before starting any work on the machinery as well as
prior to commissioning. Furthermore, this instruction must always be available on site.
With reservation of technical modification.
BA 0057 e 1 (14)
CONTENT
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
CONSTRUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
SAFETY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
LABELLING OF ADVICE IN THE OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
WARNING ABOUT MISUSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
GENERAL SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
TECHNICAL DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
ASSEMBLY / DISASSEMBLY OF SPARE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
VALVE DISASSEMBLY (REMOVING ACTUATOR FROM BODY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
REMOVING THE DIAPHRAGM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
MOUNTING THE DIAPHRAGM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
ACTUATOR MOUNTING ON THE VALVE BODY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
COMMISSIONING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
DISASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
DISPOSAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
INSPECTION AND SERVICING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
SECTIONAL DRAWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
SPARE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Diaphragm valve 695 DN... 3 (14)
Introduction
1. INTRODUCTION
1.1 FUNCTION
The diaphragm valve is a metal diaphragm valve with a 2/2-way body. It has a low
maintenance membrane actuator which can be controlled by inert gaseous media.
1.2 CONSTRUCTION
1 Valve body
2 Actuator
3 Diaphragm
4 Control medium connector
DiaphragmValve695_e8.fm / 1.6.17
4 (14) Diaphragm valve 695 DN...
Safety
2. SAFETY
2.1 LABELLING OF ADVICE IN THE OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
Non-observance of these instructions could lead to danger of life or limb. Therefore,
important safety advice in these instructions are marked with the following general
hazard symbol:
Warnings regarding electric power are labelled with:
Safety instructions whose non-observance could jeopardize the machine and its
functions are labelled with
Important additional informations are labelled with
Always comply with instructions mounted directly on the machine, e.g.
• rotational direction arrow
• fluid connection indicators
and ensure that the information remains legible.
2.2 AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL
All operations described in this operating instructions manual must be carried out
only by trained and authorized personnel. For safety and warranty reasons, any in-
ternal work on the instruments must be carried out only by qualified HAMANN AG
personnel.
2.3 WARNING ABOUT MISUSE
Inappropriate or incorrect use of the instrument can give rise to application-specific
hazards, e.g. vessel overfill or damage to system components through wrong mount-
ing or setting.
2.4 GENERAL SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
DiaphragmValve695_e8.fm / 1.6.17
Diaphragm valve is a high-tech instrument requiring the strict observance of standard
regulations and guidelines. The user must take note of the safety instructions in this
operating instructions manual, the country-specific installation standards (e.g. the
VDE regulations in Germany) as well as all prevailing safety regulations and accident
prevention rules.
Diaphragm valve 695 DN... 5 (14)
Technical Data
3. TECHNICAL DATA
Operating temperature max. 80° C
Filling volume 0.15 dm³ (695 DN20 / DN 25)
0.35 dm³ (695 DN32 / DN 40)
1.10 dm³ (695 DN 50)
Max. ambient temperature max. 60° C
Max. perm. temperature of control medium 40° C
Operating pressure 0 - 10 bar
Control pressure 5.5 - 7.0 bar
Thread size of control medium connector G1/4"
Weight 2.4 kg (695 DN20)
2.7 kg (695 DN25)
5.9 kg (695 DN32)
6.3 kg (695 DN40)
10.1 kg (695 DN 50)
Kv-value (DIN11850) 7.0 m³/h (695 DN20)
15 m³/h (695 DN 25)
27 m³/h (695 DN 32)
30.9 m³/h (695 DN 40)
48.4 m³/h (695 DN 50)
Diaphragm material PP
Valve body material 1.4408
Control function Normally closed (NC)
4. ASSEMBLY / DISASSEMBLY OF SPARE PARTS
2
DiaphragmValve695_e8.fm / 1.6.17
19
1
18
4.1 VALVE DISASSEMBLY (REMOVING ACTUATOR FROM BODY)
1. Move actuator A to the open position.
6 (14) Diaphragm valve 695 DN...
Assembly / disassembly of spare parts
2. Remove actuator A from valve body 1.
3. Move actuator A to the closed position.
After disassembly, clean all parts of contamination (do not damage parts).
Check parts for potential damage, replace if necessary.
4.2 REMOVING THE DIAPHRAGM
Before removing the diaphragm, please remove the actuator, see "Valve disas-
sembly (removing actuator from body)" above.
1. Unscrew the diaphragm.
2. Clean all parts of the remains of product and contamination. Do not scratch or
damage parts during cleaning!
3. Check all parts for potential damage.
4. Replace damaged parts
4.3 MOUNTING THE DIAPHRAGM
GENERAL NOTES
Mount the correct diaphragm that suits the valve (suitable for medium, medium con-
centration, temperature and pressure). The diaphragm is a wearing part. Check the
technical condition and function of the diaphragm valve before commissioning and
during the whole term of use. Carry out checks regularly and determine the check
intervals in accordance with the conditions of use and / or the regulatory codes and
provisions applicable for this application.
If the diaphragm is not screwed into the adapter far enough, the closing force is trans-
mitted directly onto the threaded pin and not via the compressor. This will cause dam-
age and early failure of the diaphragm and thus leakage of the valve. If the diaphragm
is screwed in too far no perfect sealing at the valve seat will be achieved. The func-
tion of the valve is no longer ensured.
Incorrectly mounted diaphragm may cause valve leakage / emission of medium. In
this case remove the diaphragm, check the complete valve and diaphragm and re-
assemble again proceeding as described above.
The compressor is loose for all diaphragm sizes.
Compressor and actuator flange seen from below:
DiaphragmValve695_e8.fm / 1.6.17
Diaphragm valve 695 DN... 7 (14)
Assembly / disassembly of spare parts
• Place the washer (arrow) loosely on the valve spindle.
• Place the compressor loosely on the washer, fi t the wings into the guides
(arrows).
DiaphragmValve695_e8.fm / 1.6.17
8 (14) Diaphragm valve 695 DN...
Assembly / disassembly of spare parts
4.3.1 MOUNTING A CONCAVE DIAPHRAGM
Recess of compressor
Threaded pin
Diaphragm boss
1. Move actuator A to the closed position.
2. Place the washer loosely on the valve spindle. Place the compressor loosely on
the washer, fit the wings into the guides
3. Check if the compressor fits closely in the guides.
4. Screw new diaphragm tightly into the compressor manually.
5. Check if the diaphragm boss fits closely in the recess of the compressor.
6. If it is difficult to screw it in, check the thread, replace damaged parts.
7. When clear resistance is felt turn back the diaphragm anticlockwise until its bolt
holes are in correct alignment with the bolt holes of the actuator.
4.3.2 MOUNTING A CONVEX DIAPHRAGM
1. Move actuator A to the closed position.
2. Place the washer loosely on the valve spindle. Place the compressor loosely on
the washer, fit the wings into the guides
3. Check if the compressor fits closely in the guides.
4. Invert the new diaphragm face manually; use a clean, padded mat with bigger
nominal sizes.
Diaphragm
DiaphragmValve695_e8.fm / 1.6.17
face Threaded
pin
Diaphragm valve 695 DN... 9 (14)
Assembly / disassembly of spare parts
5. Position the new backing diaphragm onto the compressor.
6. Position the diaphragm face onto the backing diaphragm.
7. Screw diaphragm face tightly into the compressor manually. The diaphragm
boss must fit closely in the recess of the compressor.
Recess of compressor
Adapter
Com-
pressor
Threaded
Backing
pin
diaphragm
Diaphragm boss
8. If it is difficult to screw it in, check the thread, replace damaged parts.
9. When clear resistance is felt turn back the diaphragm anticlockwise until its bolt
holes are in correct alignment with the bolt holes of the actuator.
10.Press the diaphragm face tightly onto the backing diaphragm manually so that it
returns to its original shape and fits closely on the backing diaphragm.
4.4 ACTUATOR MOUNTING ON THE VALVE BODY
1. Move actuator A to the open position.
2. Position actuator A with the mounted diaphragm 2 on the valve body 1, aligning
the diaphragm weir and valve body weir.
3. Insert and tighten the bolts 18 with washers 19 by hand (hand tight only).
4. Move actuator A to the closed position.
5. Fully tighten the bolts 18 diagonally.
6. Ensure that the diaphragm 2 is compressed evenly (approx. 10-15%, visible by
an even bulge to the outside).
7. Check tightness of completely assembled valve.
Diaphragms degrade in the course of time. After valve installation and com-
DiaphragmValve695_e8.fm / 1.6.17
missioning you must retighten the bolts.
10 (14) Diaphragm valve 695 DN...
Commissioning
5. COMMISSIONING
PRIOR TO CLEANING OR COMMISSIONING THE PLANT:
• Check the tightness and the function of the diaphragm valve (close and reopen
the diaphragm valve).
• If the plant is new and after repairs rinse the piping system with a fully opened
diaphragm valve (to remove any harmful foreign matter).
6. DISASSEMBLY
Disassembly is performed observing the same precautionary measures as for as-
sembly.
• Disassemble the diaphragm valve (see chapter "Valve disassembly (removing
actuator from body)" on page 6.
7. DISPOSAL
• All valve parts must be disposed of according to relevant local or national dis-
posal regulations / environmental protection laws.
• Pay attention to adhered residual material and gas diffusion from penetrated
media.
8. INSPECTION AND SERVICING
Only work on depressurized plant and secure against re-commissioning.
The Diaphragm valve requires no maintenance or cleaning.
DiaphragmValve695_e8.fm / 1.6.17
Diaphragm valve 695 DN... 11 (14)
Inspection and servicing
9. TROUBLESHOOTING / FAULT CLEARANCE
Fault Possible cause Fault clearance
Control medium Actuator membrane faulty Replace actuator
escapes from vent hole
in the actuator cover
Control medium Spindle seal leaking Replace actuator and check control medium for
escapes from leak impurities
detection hole
Working medium Valve diaphragm faulty Check valve diaphragm for damage, replace dia-
escapes from leak phragm if necessary
detection hole
Control medium Connecting bolts between Retighten bolts professionally diagonally
escapes at the actuator actuator cover and base
membrane are loose
Valve doesn't open or Control pressure too low Operate valve with control pressure specified in
doesn't open fully data sheet
Pilot valve faulty Check and replace pilot valve
Control medium not con- Connect control medium
nected
Valve diaphragm incor- Remove actuator, check diaphragm mounting,
rectly mounted replace if necessary
Actuator spring faulty Replace actuator
Valve leaks down- Operating pressure too Operate valve with operating pressure specified
stream (doesn't close or high in data sheet
doesn't close fully) Control pressure too low Operate valve with control pressure specified in
data sheet
Foreign matter between Remove actuator, remove foreign matter, check
valve diaphragm and valve diaphragm and valve body weir for dam-
valve body weir age and replace if necessary
Valve body weir leaking or Check valve body weir for damage, if necessary
damaged replace valve body
Valve diaphragm faulty Check valve diaphragm for damage, replace dia-
phragm if necessary
Actuator spring faulty Replace actuator
Valve leaks between Valve diaphragm incor- Remove actuator, check diaphragm mounting,
actuator and valve body rectly mounted replace if necessary
Bolting between valve Retighten bolting between valve body and actu-
body and actuator loose ator
Valve diaphragm faulty Check valve diaphragm for damage, replace dia-
phragm if necessary
DiaphragmValve695_e8.fm / 1.6.17
Valve body damaged Replace valve body
Valve body connection Incorrect installation Check installation of valve body in piping
to piping leaks Bolting loose Tighten bolting
Sealing material faulty Replace sealing material
Valve body leaks Valve body faulty or cor- Check valve body for damage, replace valve
roded body if necessary
12 (14) Diaphragm valve 695 DN...
Sectional drawing
10. SECTIONAL DRAWING
Vent hole
A
Actuator
membrane
Connector
2
Leak detection hole
2
19
1
18
1 Valve body
2 Diaphragm
18 Bolt
19 Washer
A Actuator
11. SPARE PARTS
Name Type Part number
Diaphragm valve 695 DN20 (PP) 015346
695 DN25 (PP) 015418
695 DN40 (PP) 015878
695 DN50 (PP) 015879
For placing a spare parts order, it is absolutely necessary to give quantity, name and
part number
DiaphragmValve695_e8.fm / 1.6.17
Technical Support [email protected]
Spare Parts [email protected]
Diaphragm valve 695 DN... 13 (14)
Spare parts
DiaphragmValve695_e8.fm / 1.6.17
14 (14) Diaphragm valve 695 DN...
Bei der Lehmkuhle 4
D-21279 Hollenstedt - Germany
Tel: +49-(0)4165 / 2211-0
E-Mail: [email protected]
www.HamannAG.com
Positioner
Type: 1434
Part No.: 008896
Operating- and Maintenance Instruction
This instruction includes important safety information and instructions for commission-
ing, operation and maintenance of the HAMANN components. It is essential therefore, that
the responsible specialist refers to it before starting any work on the machinery as well as
prior to commissioning. Furthermore, this instruction must always be available on site.
BA 0044 e 1 (12)
CONTENT
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
SAFETY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
LABELLING OF ADVICE IN THE OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
WARNING ABOUT MISUSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
GENERAL SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
MECHANICAL MOUNTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
PNEUMATIC CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
COMMISSIONING AND INITIALISATION – ELECTRICAL AND PNEUMATICAL CONNECTION . . . . . . . 9
COMMISSIONING AND INITIALISATION – AUTOMATIC INITIALISATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
COMMISSIONING AND INITIALISATION – COMMISSIONING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
OPTICAL INDICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
ERROR MESSAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
SPARE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Positioner 1434 3 (12)
Introduction
1. INTRODUCTION
The positioner is an intelligent electropneumatic positioner that can be attached to
pneumatic actuators. Normally the positioner is attached directly to the actuator. The
travel sensor is already integrated in the positioner. The travel sensor measures the
current valve position and registers it to positioner electronics. It compares the actual
valve value with the preset set value and readjusts it if it varies too much from the
standard tolerance.
Positioner 1434_e2.fm / 1.6.17
4 (12) Positioner 1434
Safety
2. SAFETY
2.1 LABELLING OF ADVICE IN THE OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
Non-observance of these instructions could lead to danger of life or limb. Therefore,
important safety advice in these instructions are marked with the following general
hazard symbol:
Warnings regarding electric power are labelled with:
Safety instructions whose non-observance could jeopardize the machine and its
functions are labelled with
Important additional informations are labelled with
Always comply with instructions mounted directly on the machine, e.g.
• rotational direction arrow
• fluid connection indicators
and ensure that the information remains legible.
2.2 AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL
All operations described in this operating instructions manual must be carried out
only by trained and authorized personnel. For safety and warranty reasons, any in-
ternal work on the instruments must be carried out only by qualified HAMANN AG
personnel.
2.3 WARNING ABOUT MISUSE
Inappropriate or incorrect use of the instrument can give rise to application-specific
hazards, e.g. vessel overfill or damage to system components through wrong mount-
ing or setting.
Positioner 1434_e2.fm / 1.6.17
Positioner 1434 5 (12)
Safety
2.4 GENERAL SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Positioner is a high-tech instrument requiring the strict observance of standard reg-
ulations and guidelines. The user must take note of the safety instructions in this op-
erating instructions manual, the country-specific installation standards (e.g. the VDE
regulations in Germany) as well as all prevailing safety regulations and accident pre-
vention rules.
Positioner 1434_e2.fm / 1.6.17
6 (12) Positioner 1434
Mechanical mounting
3. MECHANICAL MOUNTING
6.
1.
7.
2.
8.
3.
9.
4.
10.
Fix the spindle and screw the operating
bush strongly onto the spindle.
5.
Damage to the spindle surface may lead to failure of the travel sensor!
Positioner 1434_e2.fm / 1.6.17
Positioner 1434 7 (12)
Pneumatic connections
4. PNEUMATIC CONNECTIONS
Connection Description
1 Air supply connection P
2 Working connection
process valve A
3 Venting connection R
max . air supply
8/10 bar!
M16 x 1 - SW 24 2
1 3
M12 x 1 - SW 20
5. ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
Connection - X1 (M12 A-coding, plug)
Pin Signal name
1 Uv, 24V DC (± 10%) Supply voltage
2 Set value input 4-20mA (0-20mA, 0-10V)
3 GND
4 Actual value output (optional) (0/4-20mA, 0-10V)
5 Initialisation 24V DC (± 10%) Ityp 2,5 mA
Connection - X3 (M12 A-coding, socket)
version with external potentiometer
Pin Signal name
1 U+, Potentiometer, signal voltage Plus
2 Usig, Potentiometer signal output
3 U-, Potentiometer, signal voltage Minus
X3
X1
Positioner 1434_e2.fm / 1.6.17
8 (12) Positioner 1434
Commissioning and initialisation – electrical and pneumatical connection
6. COMMISSIONING AND INITIALISATION – 3. Automatic initialisation runs.
ELECTRICAL AND PNEUMATICAL CON-
LED Symbol
NECTION
OPEN $ Initialisation
1. Turn on pneumatic air supply (max. 8/10 ERROR H
bar). CLOSED $
Legend
POWER G
LED Symbol
OFF H
ON G 8. COMMISSIONING AND INITIALISATION
Flashes fast = – COMMISSIONING
Flashes slow $
2. Switch on 24V DC power supply. 1. Specify an analogue set value 4-20 mA
POWER LED on. (0-20 mA/ 0-10 V).
LED Symbol LED Symbol
OPEN $ OPEN H
ERROR = ERROR H
CLOSED $ CLOSED H
POWER G POWER G
2. After nishing the automatic initialisation
the process valve is regulated according
to the set value signal.
7. COMMISSIONING AND INITIALISATION – Set value min
LED Symbol
AUTOMATIC INITIALISATION
OPEN H
1. Connect and activate initialisation power ERROR H
supply 24V DC on Pin 5 (t > 100ms). CLOSED G
LED Symbol POWER G
OPEN $ Set value max
LED Symbol
ERROR =
OPEN G
CLOSED $
ERROR H
POWER G
CLOSED H
2. Disactivate initialisation power supply. POWER G
LED Symbol
OPEN $
ERROR H
CLOSED $
POWER G
Positioner 1434_e2.fm / 1.6.17
Positioner 1434 9 (12)
Optical indication
9. OPTICAL INDICATION
LED 1 – OPEN (yellow)
LED 2 – ERROR (red)
LED 3 – CLOSED (orange)
LED 4 – POWER (yellow)
LED 1 LED 2 LED 3 LED 4
Meaning Error number
OPEN ERROR CLOSED POWER
Position reached - H H H G
Valve OPEN - G H H G
Valve CLOSED - H H G G
Valve moved OPEN direction - $ H H G
Valve moved CLOSED direction - H H $ G
Positioner in initialisation mode - $ H $ G
Set value signal > 20.5 mA / 10.25 V Error No. 1 $ = H G
Set value signal < 3.5 mA Error No. 2 H = $ G
Positioner is not initialized Error No. 3 $ = $ G
Regler is not calibrated Error No. 4 G G G $
Device error Error No. 5 H = H G
Positioner works with lower quality Warning No. 1 5 G
Legend LED condition Flashing frequency
H LED o
G LED on
5 LED ashes short f = 1.66 Hz
= LED ashes fast f = 3.33 Hz
$ LED ashes slow f = 1.66 Hz
Positioner 1434_e2.fm / 1.6.17
10 (12) Positioner 1434
Error messages
10. ERROR MESSAGES
Error Error message Error cause Error eect Error clearance
Set value signal Set value signal Process valve
No. 1 Check the set value signal
> 20.5 mA / 10,25 V > 20.5 mA / 10.25 V vented
Set value signal Process valve
No. 2 Set value signal < 3.5 mA Check the set value signal
< 3.5 mA vented
No. 3 Positioner is not initialized Positioner is not initialized No function Start the initialisation
Positioner is not
No. 4 Device defect No function Send to GEMÜ for repair
calibrated
a) Missing pneumatic a) Check pneumatic
air supply Initialisation air supply
No. 5 Device error
b) Leakage in failure b) Check pneumatic
pneumatic system connections
Warning Error message Error cause Error eect Error clearance
During initialisation, the Check process valve for
Positioner works but at Control is not
No. 1 internal valves could not a) leakage
lower accuracy optimized
be measured exactly b) correct function
11. SPARE PARTS
Designation Type Part number
Positioner 1434 008896
For placing a spare parts order, it is absolutely necessary to give the following details:
• Quantity
• Designation
• Part number
Technical Support [email protected]
Spare Parts [email protected]
Positioner 1434_e2.fm / 1.6.17
Positioner 1434 11 (12)
Spare parts
Positioner 1434_e2.fm / 1.6.17
12 (12) Positioner 1434
HAMANN AG
Bei der Lehmkuhle 4 , D-21279 Hollenstedt
Tel.:+49-(04165)-2211-0 eMail: [email protected]
Datasheet
Designation Type Part No. Reference code
Distance transmitter Weg4232 005250 A-1-H-004
The Distance transmitter is a linear travel sensor for detecting the valve
stroke position of globe and diaphragm valves. It is a potentiometer with
a passive resistant coating and a passive wiper tap.
It serves as a position sensor for the intelligent positioner 1434
1. TECHNICAL DATA
Part number 005250
Housing material Aluminium, black anodized
Protection class IP 65
Mounting position optional
Temperature range -10…+80°C
Defined electrical range 30 mm
Ferrule resistor (Ohm) 3k
Max. voltage 42 V
2. ELECTRICAL CONNECTION
Datasheet_Weg4232_e1.fm / 23.10.12
With reservation of technical modification 1
BD 0045 e
HAMANN AG
Bei der Lehmkuhle 4 , D-21279 Hollenstedt
Tel.:+49-(04165)-2211-0 eMail: [email protected]
3. DIMENSIONS
PP 30% GF/ABS
AlMgSi 0,5 F34
62,2
10
M16 x1
Datasheet_Weg4232_e1.fm / 23.10.12
2 With reservation of technical modification
Hamann AG
Bei der Lehmkuhle 4 , D-21279 Hollenstedt
Tel.:+49-(04165)-2211-0 eMail: [email protected]
Datasheet
Designation Type Connection Part No.
ZK311003 Flange DN20 008039
ZK311004 Flange DN25 010460
ZK311005 Flange DN32 001360
Ball valve, 2-way
ZK311006 Flange DN40 000531
ZK311007 Flange DN50 000845
ZK311008 Flange DN 65 000395
Design
1-piece designed wafer-type ball valve, full bore, mounting pad for actuator according to ISO 5211, Anti
Static Device.
Technical Data
Connection Flange, dimensions and threaded holes according to PN 40
Operation Rotation of the handle through 90° (Handle is reversible
through 180°).
Pressure range Almost vacuum up to nominal pressure (max. +80°C).
Temperature, medium 80° C
Temperature range -30 … +180° C
Body Stainless steel 1.4408
Ball Stainless steel 1.4408
Ball seal PTFE glassfiber reinforced
Spindle seal PTFE / FKM
Datasheet_ZK311xxx_e6.fm / 9.3.17
Handle Stainless steel, Plastic coated
With reservation of technical modification 1
BD 0009 e
Dimensions
W
T
C
nxZ
A
P
M
D X
K L
F DN20
DN25 - DN65
All dimensions in mm
DN ØD L X M F K A P T C ØK nxZ W
20 20 40 36 52.5 105 75 90.5 56 8 5 75 4x M12 115,5
25 25 46 16 57,5 115 85 102,5 62,5 12 7 85 4x M12 188,5
32 32 54 16 70 140 100 113.5 72 12 7 100 4x M16 188,5
40 40 63.5 15 75 150 110 119.5 78 14.8 7 110 4x M16 223.5
50 50 82 17 82.5 165 125 126.5 87.2 14.8 7 125 4x M16 223.5
65 65 103 17 92.5 185 145 155.5 107 17.1 11.5 145 4x M16 351,5
Datasheet_ZK311xxx_e6.fm / 9.3.17
2 With reservation of technical modification
HAMANN AG
Bei der Lehmkuhle 4 , D-21279 Hollenstedt
Tel.:+49-(04165)-2211-0 eMail: [email protected]
Datasheet
Designation Type Connection Part Number
ZD311404 (L-configuration) Flange DN25 007779
ZD311504 (T-configuration) Flange DN25 011902
ZD311406 (L-configuration) Flange DN40 011071
ZD311407 (L-configuration) Flange DN50 012216
ZD311505 (T-configuration) Flange DN32 011564
3-way ball valve
ZD311506 (T-configuration) Flange DN40 005228
ZD311507 (T-configuration) Flange DN50 009526
ZD311408 (L-configuration) Flange DN65 011892
ZD311508 (T-configuration) Flange DN65 009527
ZD311509 (T-configuration) Flange DN80 010032
1. DESIGN
3-Way Ball-valve, sealed on all ports, not overlap-free, blow out proof stem design with anti-static device,
with mounting pad for actuator acc. to ISO 5211.
2. TECHNICAL DATA
Pressure range PN 16
Temperature range -20°C up to +150°C
Materials
Body Stainless steel 1.4408
Datasheet_ZD311xxx_e5.fm / 23.3.17
Ball Stainless steel 1.4401
Ball seal PTFE
Spindle seal PTFE/FKM
With reservation of technical modification 1
BD 0007 e
HAMANN AG
Bei der Lehmkuhle 4 , D-21279 Hollenstedt
Tel.:+49-(04165)-2211-0 eMail: [email protected]
3. DIMENSIONS
W
B
MA
D
L L/2
Ød2 H
Ød1
L(1) M A B W Ød1 Ød2 H Weight
DN ØD
[mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [kg]
25 190 57.5 55 14 163 50 42 11 25 7.2
32 208 70 63 18 205 70 50 14 32 10.4
40 234 75 74 18 205 70 50 14 38 14.5
Datasheet_ZD311xxx_e5.fm / 23.3.17
50 273 82.5 93 23 325 102 70 17 50 23.4
65 300 92.5 119 25 400 102 - 22 62 28
80 305 100 157 25 500 102 - 22 76 35.22
2 With reservation of technical modification
Bei der Lehmkuhle 4
D-21279 Hollenstedt - Germany
Tel: +49-(0)4165 / 2211-0
E-Mail: [email protected]
Drive for:
Ball valve, inlet sewage (A-1-B-002)
Ball valve, outlet sludge (A-1-B-202)
3-way valve overboard/circulation (A-1-V-100)
3-way valve, sludge (A-1-V-201)
3-way valve, discharge (A-1-V-204)
Swivel drive, pneumatic single acting
Type: EE(HE) …
Part No.: 007780 Type EE(HE) 620852 (LEFT)
014455 Type EE(HE) 620852 (RIGHT)
005229 Type EE(HE) 621002 (RIGHT)
009528 Type EE(HE) 621252
009529 Type EE(HE) 621432
011495 Type EE(HE) 621632
014454 Type EE(HE) 620702
Operating- and Maintenance Instruction
This instruction includes important safety information and instructions for commission-
ing, operation and maintenance of the HAMANN components. It is essential therefore, that
the responsible specialist refers to it before starting any work on the machinery as well as
prior to commissioning. Furthermore, this instruction must always be available on site.
With reservation of technical modification.
BA 0059 e 1 (24)
CONTENT
SAFETY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
LABELLING OF ADVICE IN THE OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
SAFETY ADVICE FOR MOUNTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
SAFETY ADVICE FOR ADJUSTMENT/STARTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
DEVICE SAFETY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
DEVICE DESCRIPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
DESCRIPTION OF FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
ROTATION DIRECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
CHANGE OF THE ROTATION DIRECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
AMBIENT CONDITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
MOUNTING / DISASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
MECHANICAL MOUNTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
PNEUMATIC INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
DISASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
ADJUSTMENT/STARTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
ADJUSTMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
STARTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
EMERGENCY OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
FAILURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
FAILURE CAUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
MAINTENANCE/CLEANING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
MOUNTING OF THE SPARE PART KIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
CLEANING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
TECHNICAL DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
DIMENSIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
SPARE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Swivel drive, pneumatic single acting 3 (24)
Safety
1. SAFETY
1.1 LABELLING OF ADVICE IN THE OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
Non-observance of these instructions could lead to danger of life or limb. Therefore,
important safety advice in these instructions are marked with the following general
hazard symbol:
Warnings regarding electric power are labelled with:
Safety instructions whose non-observance could jeopardize the machine and its
functions are labelled with
Important additional informations are labelled with
Always comply with instructions mounted directly on the machine, e.g.
• rotational direction arrow
• fluid connection indicators
and ensure that the information remains legible.
1.2 SAFETY ADVICE FOR MOUNTING
We wish to point you expressly that mounting, the pneumatic (with accessories also
the electrical) installation and the adjustment of the ED/EE must be carried out by
trained specialist personnel having mechanical (and electrical) knowledge!
After mounting the actuator on a device and/or in a machine/plant, take care, that the
machine/plant completely complies with the Machinery Directive 89/392/EEC Annex
II B.
Switch off all the devices / machines / plant affected by mounting or repair.
If appropriate, isolate the devices / machines / plant from the mains.
Pneumatic drive EE_e3.fm / 27.5.15
Check (for example in chemical plants) whether the switching off of devices / ma-
chines / plant will cause potential danger.
If appropriate, in the event of a fault in the actuator (in a plant which is in operation)
inform the shift foreman / safety engineer or the works manager without delay about
the fault, in order, for example, to avoid an outflow / overflow of chemicals or the dis-
charge of gases in good time by means of suitable measures!
Before mounting/dismounting or repairing, remove the pressure from pneumatic / hy-
draulic devices / machines / plant.
4 (24) Swivel drive, pneumatic single acting
Safety
If necessary, set up warning signs in order to prevent the inadvertent starting up of
the devices / machines / plant.
Observe the respective relevant professional safety and accident prevention regula-
tions when carrying out the mounting / repair work.
Check the correct functioning of the safety equipment (for example the emergency
push off buttons/ safety valves, etc.)!
Before mounting check the rotation direction and the position of the actuator.
1.3 SAFETY ADVICE FOR ADJUSTMENT/STARTING
As a result of the starting (pneumatic or by hand) of a pneumatic actuator the position
of a flanged slide/valve/flap will be changed!
Therefore the flow of gases, steam, liquids, etc. may be enabled or interrupted!
Satisfy yourself that, as a result of the starting or the test adjustment no potential haz-
ards will be produced for the personnel or the environment!
If necessary, set up warning signs in order to prevent the inadvertent starting up or
shutting down of the device/machine/plant.!
By ending the adjustment check the correct function and should the occasion arise
the position of the slide/valve/flap.
Check the function of the limit switches (option)!
Check, whether the slide/valve/flap will be closed totally, if the control signals the ap-
propriate limit stop!
Through suitable measures, prevent actuating links being trapped by moving actuat-
ing elements!
Check the right function of all safety devices (for example emergency push off but-
tons / safety valves)!
Carry out the starting and the adjustments only in accordance with the instructions
described in this documentation!
When adjustments are being carried out on an switched on actuator with options
(e.g. solenoid valves, limit switches) there is the risk that life parts (230 V AC~) can
be touched!
Therefore the adjustments must be carried out only by the electrician or a person
having adequate training, who is aware of the potential hazard!
1.4 DEVICE SAFETY
The pneumatic actuator EE/ED
• is a quality product which is produced in accordance with the recognized indus-
trial regulations.
• left the manufacturer´s work in a perfect safety condition!
In order to maintain this conditions, as installer/user you must carry out your task in
accordance with the description in these instructions, technically correctly and with
Pneumatic drive EE_e3.fm / 27.5.15
the greatest possible precision.
We assume, as trained specialist you are having mechanical and electrical knowl-
edge!
The pneumatic actuator must be used only for a purpose corresponding to its con-
struction!
Swivel drive, pneumatic single acting 5 (24)
Safety
The pneumatic actuator must be used within the actuator specified in the technical
data!
The operation of the pneumatic actuator beyond the admissible temperature range
will overburden or damage the sealings and bearing.
The operation of the pneumatic actuator beyond the admissible working pressure will
damages the internal parts and the body.
Never remove or loosen the caps or accessories, if the actuator will be under pres-
sure or will be connected with a supply voltage (option).
Satisfy yourself that, as a result of the mounting, the starting or as a result of the test
adjustment on the pneumatic actuator, no potential hazards will be produced for de-
vice/machine/plant!
Do not mount the actuator, start the actuator or carry out any adjustments on it, if the
actuator, the supply lines or the part of the plant on which it is mounted is damaged!
Before mounting the actuator check the smooth movement of the slide/valve/flap on
which it will be mounted.
By ending mounting check the correct function and adjustment of the actuator and
check the correct function of the options (e.g. solenoid valve, limit switch).
Pneumatic drive EE_e3.fm / 27.5.15
6 (24) Swivel drive, pneumatic single acting
Device descriptions
2. DEVICE DESCRIPTIONS
6
2
7
1
3
10
9
8
4, 5
14
11
13
12
1 body 8 pilot port P1
2 cap 9 pilot port P2
3 cap bolt 10 fastening thread for control devices (M5 x 8)
4 limit stop bolt 11 fastening thread for slide/valve flap
5 nut 12 shaft for slide/valve flap
6 shaft for signal devices 13 name-plate
7 fastening thread for signal 14 warning notice (only for single acting actua-
devices (M5 x 7) tors)
2.1 DESCRIPTION OF FUNCTION
The actuator is a pneumatic twin-piston drive, designed primarily for operating ball
Pneumatic drive EE_e3.fm / 27.5.15
valves and butterfly valves. A double-action and a spring-return (single-action) type
is available. The twin piston system affords a high torque with minimum overall di-
mensions. The rotation angle is adjustable with the standard settings by ± 6 degrees.
Swivel drive, pneumatic single acting 7 (24)
Rotation Direction
DESIGN
Due the twin-piston system the force developed by the counter-running pistons is
transmitted to one common pinion via two racks solidly connected with the piston.
This principle ensures a linear torque transmission along the entire stroke.
FUNCTION "SINGLE-ACTING"
Pressure is given through port "P1" into the actuator between the two piston surfac-
es. The pistons expand against the spring force. The pistons force will be transfer to
the pinion by racks. The pinion turns round anticlockwise about 90° ->the actuator
moves into the position "OPEN". Exhausting the port "P1" the pistons will be re-
placed by the spring force.
Therefore the pinion turns clockwise about 90° -> the actuator moves into the posi-
tion "CLOSE". The springs will be able to adjust to the working conditions.
P1
3. ROTATION DIRECTION
The pneumatic actuators ED/EE are available as "right revolving" or "left revolving"
actuators.
Pneumatic drive EE_e3.fm / 27.5.15
The standard rotation direction is to turn left. The rotation direction of the pinion of
the pneumatic actuator will be anticlockwise to be open and clockwise to be close.
The rotation direction refers to a view on the top of the actuator (see figure below).
Before mounting the pneumatic actuator on a slide/valve/flap, take care that the ro-
tation direction will be practicable in your case. If appropriate, you have to change
the rotation direction by reconstructing the pistons of the actuator.
8 (24) Swivel drive, pneumatic single acting
Rotation Direction
CLOSE
OPEN
3.1 CHANGE OF THE ROTATION DIRECTION
Do not open the pneumatic actuator with the function "single acting" on no ac-
count!
Pneumatic drive EE_e3.fm / 27.5.15
Swivel drive, pneumatic single acting 9 (24)
Ambient conditions
4. AMBIENT CONDITIONS
The pneumatic actuator ED/EE is designed for industrial operating conditions!
However, some special conditions are to be observed for its mounting and subse-
quent operation!
Take care that
• the actuator is mounted in accordance with the mounting advice listed below.
• the actuator is used in accordance with the characteristic values specified in the
technical data.
The non-observance of the mounting advice or the use outside the specified
characteristic values can have a negative influence on the functional reliability
of the actuator.
Pneumatic drive EE_e3.fm / 27.5.15
10 (24) Swivel drive, pneumatic single acting
Mounting / disassembly
5. MOUNTING / DISASSEMBLY
The mounting of the pneumatic actuator ED/EE is restricted to:
• the mechanical mounting of the actuator on a slide/valve/flap,
• the pneumatic installation of the actuator with the pilot air lead, and
• if need be the mounting and connection of options and accessories.
The mounting position of the actuator ED/EE is arbitrary.
In the following description we assume, that you have read the former chapters
attentive!
We also assume that you will observe the safety advice and warnings from
chapter "Safety" on page 4 during the mounting / disassembly.
If you have not read chapter "Safety" on page 4 until now, read this important advice
now and turn back to this page!
The mounting and the pneumatic (electrical) installation must be carried out only by
trained specialist personnel having mechanical (and electrical) knowledge.
Which variant of the device you have will be seen on the name-plate on the back of
the pneumatic actuator ED/EE.
5.1 MECHANICAL MOUNTING
Two mounting variants are available:
• directly mounting, or
• mounting with a bracket and a stem
Before mounting you have to fix a qualified mounting variant for your application.
Directly mounting will be able, if the dimensions of the shafts and the ISO - flanges
of the actuator and the slide/valve/flap are the same. Differences of the dimension
for the stem of the slide/valve/flap will be able to be equalized by available bushings
(option) in some cases.
A mounting with bracket and stem will be necessary, if the differences of the dimen-
sions between the shaft of the actuator and the stem of the slide/valve/flap are not
able to be equalized by a bushing or the ISO-flanges did not match.
This mounting variant will also be used by high/low medium temperatures or volumi-
nous isolated pipes.
By mounting with bracket and stem observe also the mounting device of the supplier
of these parts.
Do not drill any holes into the body of the actuator- the damage of the actuator
or a insufficient fastening of the actuator will be the result.
5.1.1 DIRECTLY MOUNTING
Ensure that the actuator and the slide/valve/flap will be in position "CLOSE".
Pneumatic drive EE_e3.fm / 27.5.15
Put the bottom side of the actuator to the slide/valve/flap that the stem will enter into
the octagonal boring of the shaft of the actuator. If necessary use a appropriate bush-
ing (options), to equalize differences of the dimension between the stem and the
shaft.
Align the actuator to the slide/valve/flap.
Swivel drive, pneumatic single acting 11 (24)
Mounting / disassembly
Put the actuator onto the stem of the slide/valve/flap until the surface of the actuator
cling to the ISO - flange of the slide/valve/flap. If this operation will be ponderous the
shaft of the actuator will be driven onto the stem of the slide/valve/flap by slightly
strokes with a plastic hammer.
Fasten the actuator with fit bolts. Observe the maximum depth of the threaded holes
of the actuator. Would there be two sizes of hole circles to fasten the actuator, you
have always to use the greater one.
Tighten the screws. Therefore observe the maximum torque of the choice screws.
o.k.
o.k.
5.1.2 MOUNTING BY BRACKET AND STEM
Ensure that the actuator and the slide/valve/flap will be in position "CLOSE".
Put the stem onto the stem of the slide/valve/flap. Therefore observe the position of
possibly position indicators.
Put the bracket onto the slide/valve/flap and align them.
Fasten the bracket with fit bolts. Observe the maximum depth of the threaded holes
of the actuator.
Would there be two sizes of hole circles to fasten the actuator, you have always to
use the greater one. Tighten the screws. Therefore observe the maximum torque of
Pneumatic drive EE_e3.fm / 27.5.15
the choice screws.
12 (24) Swivel drive, pneumatic single acting
Mounting / disassembly
o.k.
Put the bottom side of the actuator to the slide/valve/flap that the stem will enter into
the octagonal boring of the shaft of the actuator.
Align the actuator to the slide/valve/flap resp. to the console.
Put the actuator onto the stem of the slide/valve/flap until the surface of the actuator
cling to the ISO - flange of the bracket. If this operation will be ponderous the shaft
of the actuator will be driven onto the stem of the slide/valve/flap by slightly strokes
with a plastic hammer.
Fasten the actuator with fit bolts. Observe the maximum depth of the threaded holes
of the actuator. Would there be two sizes of hole circles to fasten the actuator, you
have always to use the greater one.
Tighten the screws. Therefore observe the maximum torque of the choice screws.
Pneumatic drive EE_e3.fm / 27.5.15
Swivel drive, pneumatic single acting 13 (24)
Mounting / disassembly
o.k.
5.2 PNEUMATIC INSTALLATION
The installation of the air supply have to take place with great care. Especially
the threaded connection, fittings and sealings have to been clean and free of
pollution. Pollution which attains inside the actuator, will causes hasten wear
and the damage of the sealings and the treads.
Use only the correct hose and hose connectors for your application.
By laying the hose take care, that the hose will not be creased, squeezed or
sheared or that the hose will be laid over edges. Also take care that there will
be no pressure or traction in the hose.
If appropriate lay the hoses in conduits or cable ducts.
As a alternative to the shown variant the control of the actuator could take place by
a directly mounted pilot valve. In this case see the enclosed operation and installa-
tion manual of the pilot valve.
Pneumatic drive EE_e3.fm / 27.5.15
At first you have to remove the protection caps from the ports "P1" and "P2".
Screw in a suitable pneumatic fitting into the port "P1" by using a fit sealing com-
pound and tighten the fitting.
Insert a hose into the fitting at port "P1" which will feed the actuator with compressed
air during the opening operation.
Screw in a throttle valve with silencer into the port "P2" by using a fit sealing com-
pound and tighten the throttle valve.
Tighten the hose in the fitting at port "P1".
14 (24) Swivel drive, pneumatic single acting
Mounting / disassembly
Check the tightness of all connections.
This completes the mounting and the pneumatic installation of the actuator.
P2
P1
5.3 DISASSEMBLY
Although the disassembly of an actuator in principle proceeds in the reverse se-
quence to the mounting, some essential points should be clarified!
In order, for example, for the operational chemical plant which was mentioned at the
beginning to remain in operation:
• Will the actuator to be disassembled be replaced immediately by another (or
equal valve)? If not, in which position should the actuator be, following the disas-
sembly?
• Must the actuator be fixed in its intended position?
• If appropriate, does the production process of the plant need to be stopped?
• Is it necessary to inform specific personnel about the disassembly? etc.
Never remove an armature under pressure.
Ball valves are able to enclose the pressurize medium. Release the pressure in the
pipes, to relieve the pressure at the armature.
Pneumatic drive EE_e3.fm / 27.5.15
5.3.1 PNEUMATIC DISASSEMBLY
Turn the actuator with the slide/valve/flap into its fix position!
Swivel drive, pneumatic single acting 15 (24)
Mounting / disassembly
Switch off the compressed air supply and the control of the actuator!
If necessary, set up warning signs in order to prevent the inadvertent starting
up of the devices / machines / plants, or the switching on of power supply of
the control of the actuator.
Loosen the fitting of the pilot medium and take away the pipe of the pilot medium.
Close the pipe of the pilot medium if the pipe is not also being disassembled or is not
to be immediately reconnected to another pneumatic actuator.
5.3.2 MECHANICAL DISASSEMBLY
Unscrew the four fastening screws of the actuator and pull the actuator from mount-
ing position.
This completes the disassembly of the actuator.
Pneumatic drive EE_e3.fm / 27.5.15
16 (24) Swivel drive, pneumatic single acting
Adjustment/Starting
6. ADJUSTMENT/STARTING
Before you open the actuator, undertake adjustments by hand or start the ac-
tuator, you have to read chapter "Safety" on page 4. If you have not read chap-
ter "Safety" on page 4 until now, read these important advice now and turn
back to this page.
The following descriptions are based on the assumption
• the actuator is installed on a slide/valve/flap.
• the function of the actuator in conjunction with the slide/valve/flap has been
check.
• the limit position of the slide/valve/flap is visible.
If appropriate, take note of chapter "Mounting / disassembly" on page 11.
6.1 ADJUSTMENTS
The pneumatic actuator ED/EE will be adjusted exactly by the manufacturer after
mounting on a slide/valve/flap. Perhaps a new adjustment of the actuator will be nec-
essary after disassembling and mounting on a new slide/valve/flap.
Before you undertake adjustments on actuators which are installed in operational
plant, find out whether feeding control leads with pressure (e.g. by "OPEN" or
"CLOSE" operation) will have influence on further actuators or whether the closing/
opening of limit switches (options) will trigger (mal)functioning of other devices.
If appropriate, disconnect these leads from the actuator to be adjusted!
Never put any limbs and never insert any thing into the slide/valve/flap. Heavy
injuries or damages will be the consequence.
Never adjust the adjusting screws against the efficacy of pressure.
Put the pistons of the actuator together by feeding the port P1.
Loosen the nuts (1) in both caps.
Turn one of the adjustment screws (2) into the cap (3), until the screw aligns with the
cap or the screw will be deeper about max. 2 mm.
Separate the pistons by feeding the port P1 with compressed air.
Turn out the adjustment screw (2), until the rotation angel of 90° or the desired rota-
tion angle will be reached.
Screw the adjustment screw of the second cap against the piston, until you will feel
the increase of the necessary torque moment.
Secure the adjustment screws by tighten the nuts (1). Take care that the adjustment
screw will not turn.
Check the adjustment and if necessary correct it.
By this the adjustment of the pneumatic actuator will be finished.
Pneumatic drive EE_e3.fm / 27.5.15
Swivel drive, pneumatic single acting 17 (24)
Adjustment/Starting
P2
P1
1
2
6.2 STARTING
Before starting the pneumatic actuator EE/ED, you have to read chapter "Safe-
ty" on page 4.
If you have not read chapter "Safety" on page 4 this until now read these im-
portant advice now and turn back to this page.
The starting of a pneumatic actuator which is mounted in a plant (e.g. in a refinery or
in a chemical plant) should only happen in accordance with
• the instructions of the hole plant!
• after carrying-out the adjustments described in chapter "Adjustment/Starting" on
page 17.
Switch on the power supply of the control.
Switch on the compressed air supply.
Actuate the pneumatic actuator by hand with the control and check the correct func-
tion of the actuator and the mounted slide/valve/flap.
Pneumatic drive EE_e3.fm / 27.5.15
Check all pipe connections for tightness.
Check all the pilot leads for tightness.
Check the function of the accessory units.
18 (24) Swivel drive, pneumatic single acting
Emergency operation
7. EMERGENCY OPERATION
In case of a breakdown of the supplying with compressed air or the power supply or
in case of trouble with the pneumatic actuator you can actuate the slide/valve/flap
with the pneumatic actuator by hand.
Caution, relieve the actuator of pressure.
Take care in order to prevent the inadvertent starting.
Before actuating the pneumatic actuator by hand, take care that this operation
will not affected other pneumatic actuators in the plant. Also take care that the
shifting of the limit switches (option) will not produce (wrong) function in other
devices!
Put a appropriate spanner onto the flanks on the top of the shaft of the actuator.
Turn the shaft in the direction as desired. At this do not turn the pistons forcible
against the limit stops, because such action would destroy the actuator.
Observe at single acting actuators you will need a higher torque moment and the ac-
tuator turns back into limit position by spring force immediately.
Caution! At single acting actuators there will be a risk of violation by jerking
shafts.
Remove the spanner from the shaft.
If necessary, inform the shift foreman/ safety engineer or the manager about the dis-
turbance without delay in order, for example, to avoid an outflow/ overflow of chem-
icals or a discharge of gases in good time by means of suitable measures!
Do not fasten any tools or handles at the shaft. By switching on the com-
pressed air supply or the power supply these tools and handles will be turn
around rapidly and entail destruction and violations!
Pneumatic drive EE_e3.fm / 27.5.15
Swivel drive, pneumatic single acting 19 (24)
Failure
8. FAILURE
If, during the test run or during operation, a functional fault of the pneumatic actuator
should occur, you are requested to carry out the adjustment of the slide/valve/flap (in
an emergency) by hand.
See also chapter "Emergency operation" on page 19.
If necessary, inform the shift manager/safety engineer or the manager about the dis-
turbance without delay in order, for example, to avoid an outflow/overflow of chemi-
cals or a discharge of gases in good time by means of suitable measures.
Next, using the following list, attempt to find the reason for the causes of the failure
and, if it lies within your capabilities, to correct this.
Do not try to repair the pneumatic actuator!
Isolate the failed pneumatic actuator from the power supply disconnect the providing
with compressed air!
In case of defect in the pneumatic actuator make contact with HAMANN AG.
8.1 FAILURE CAUSES
• Is the power supply to the control switched on?
• Is the device for the compressed air switched on?
• Are the leads from the controller to the pressure actuated valve undamaged?
• Is the actuator mounted correctly on the slide/valve/flap?
• Is the slide/valve/flap able to move smooth?
Pneumatic drive EE_e3.fm / 27.5.15
20 (24) Swivel drive, pneumatic single acting
Maintenance/Cleaning
9. MAINTENANCE/CLEANING
9.1 MAINTENANCE
On normal accounts the pneumatic actuator EE/ED is maintenance free.
In regular turns check the tightness of the pneumatic actuator.
• Is the cap seals tight?
• Is the pinion seal on the top and on the bottom of the actuator tight?
• Are the hose fittings tight?
• Is the body or the caps cracked?
• Is the seal of the limit stop adjusting screw tight
• Is the counter nuts have got loose?
If you determinate that there is a damage to the actuator, isolate it from the pilot pres-
sure and the power supply. However, before doing this, it is essential to refer to the
"Safety" on page 4.
In dependence of the environment the replacement of the sealings and guide rings
will be necessary at ca. 500.000 up to 1.000.000 shifting.
In the following description we assume, that you have read the former chapters at-
tentive. We also assume that you will observe the safety advice and warning notes
from chapter "Safety" on page 4 during the mounting/disassembly!
If you have not read chapter "Safety" on page 4 until now, read these important ad-
vice now and turn back to this page!
9.2 MOUNTING OF THE SPARE PART KIT
At single-acting pneumatic actuators the replacement of the spare part kit will
be permitted only by the manufacturer.
Do not loosen or screw out the cap bolts on no account. There will be a high
tension at the caps causes by the resilience.
9.3 CLEANING
Clean the body of the pneumatic actuator as required using a slightly moistened, soft
cloth and a normal household cleaner.
Do not use any abrasive, corrosive or flammable cleaning agents!
Do not use any high pressure cleaning devices!
Prevent moisture or liquid penetrating into the interior of the actuator!
Pneumatic drive EE_e3.fm / 27.5.15
Swivel drive, pneumatic single acting 21 (24)
Technical Data
10. TECHNICAL DATA
DESIGN
Two piston pneumatic actuator, maintenance free, pneumatic actuator single acting
with spring return.
FASTENING AND STEM
Four or eight female thread acc. to DIN ISO 5211 at the bottom side (see measure
table), pinion acc. to DIN 3337. Interface for solenoid valves and signal generator
acc. to Namur.
MATERIALS
Body: Aluminium alloy (silver anodized)
Cap: Plastic, reinforced (red coloured)
Aluminium (Sk 143, Sk 163)
Piston: Special plastics, reinforced
Aluminium (Sk 143, Sk 163)
Pinion: Stainless steel
steel zinc-plated (Sk 143, Sk 163)
Guides: Special low friction plastic
Sealings: NBR
Screws and nuts: Stainless steel
PILOT MEDIUM
Filtered air subject to remaining oil, dust and water. According at least to PNEUROP
/ ISO-class 4.
TEMPERATURE RANGE
Ambient temperature: -20°C up to +95°C
ROTATION
90° (adjustment ± 6°)
TORQUE MOMENT RANGE
5 - 300 Nm
PILOT PRESSURE
Pneumatic drive EE_e3.fm / 27.5.15
2 - 10 bar
22 (24) Swivel drive, pneumatic single acting
Dimensions
11. DIMENSIONS
Type
A
EE(HE) L B C D E F ØJ ØK M N Q P SW kg
(H11)
62...
070 193 100 45 55 97 127 50 70 M6x9 M8x12 17 G1/4 80 10 3,1
(F05) (F07)
085 231 115 52.5 62.5 112 142 50 70 M6 x 9 M8 x 12 17 G1/4 80 10 4.32
(F05) (F07)
100 266 143 68 75 140 170 70 102 M8 x 12 M10 x 13 17 G1/4 80 19 7
(F07) (F10)
125 340 174 86,8 87,5 170 200 70 102 M8x10 M10x13 22 G1/4 80 20 10,7
Pneumatic drive EE_e3.fm / 27.5.15
(F07) (F10)
143 337 172 86 86 198 228 102 125 M10x15 M12x18 27 G1/4 130 20 18,1
(F10) (F12)
163 377 172 86 86 198 228 102 125 M10x15 M12x18 27 G1/4 130 28 20,1
(F10) (F12)
Swivel drive, pneumatic single acting 23 (24)
Spare parts
12. SPARE PARTS
For placing a spare parts order, it is absolutely necessary to give the following de-
tails:
• Quantity
• Designation
• Part number (see cover page)
Technical Support [email protected]
Spare Parts [email protected]
Pneumatic drive EE_e3.fm / 27.5.15
24 (24) Swivel drive, pneumatic single acting
HAMANN AG
Bei der Lehmkuhle 4 , D-21279 Hollenstedt
Tel.:+49-(04165)-2211-0 eMail: [email protected]
Datasheet
Designation Type Part Number
PE080303 005230
Position limit switches
PE130303 009206
1. DESIGN
2 electric/mechanic micro-switches build in a aluminium detector housing with crystal-clear cap, o-ring
sealed. Optical position indicator for 2-ways valves.
2. TECHNICAL DATA
Connection Cable gland M20 x 1.5
Temperature -20°C up to +150°C
Protection IP67
Indication and switching range 0° to 90° rotation angle
Microswitches 1 N/C / 1N/O 3A - 250 VAC
Switching current 4A - 30 VDC
Material
Housing Aluminium, epoxy coated
Stern Stainless steel
Seals NBR
Datasheet_PE080303_e3.fm / 13.3.17
Screws Stainless steel
Cams Poly carbonate
Bushings Bronze
With reservation of technical modification 1
BD 0008 e
HAMANN AG
Bei der Lehmkuhle 4 , D-21279 Hollenstedt
Tel.:+49-(04165)-2211-0 eMail: [email protected]
3. WIRING
SOLENOID
OPEN CLOSE EXT
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
VALVE
NO Brown / Braun
Black / Schwarz
C Blue / Blau
NO NC Brown / Braun
Black / Schwarz
C Blue / Blau
NC
GROUND
4. DIMENSIONS
98
144
2x M20x1,5 120
80 30
130
Datasheet_PE080303_e3.fm / 13.3.17
Hole spacing Type Part No
80x30 mm PE080303 005230
130x30 mm PE130303 009206
2 With reservation of technical modification
HAMANN AG
Bei der Lehmkuhle 4 , D-21279 Hollenstedt
Tel.:+49-(04165)-2211-0 eMail: [email protected]
5. ARRANGEMENT OF THE SWITCHING CAMS
Endschalter AUF /
OPEN switch
Endschalter ZU /
CLOSE switch
Adjustment of the switching cam OPEN
Pull up the upper (green) switching cam against the
spring force, until the cam has detach the cogging.
Now the cam should be able to turn left or right. After
reaching the right setting the cam resets by spring
force.
Adjustment of the switching cam CLOSE
Push down the lower (red) switching cam against
the spring force, until the cam has detach the cog-
ging.
Now the cam should be able to turn left or right. Af-
ter reaching the right setting the cam resets by
Datasheet_PE080303_e3.fm / 13.3.17
spring force.
With reservation of technical modification 3
BD 0008 e
HAMANN AG
Bei der Lehmkuhle 4 , D-21279 Hollenstedt
Tel.:+49-(04165)-2211-0 eMail: [email protected]
Datasheet_PE080303_e3.fm / 13.3.17
4 With reservation of technical modification
Bei der Lehmkuhle 4
D-21279 Hollenstedt - Germany
Tel: +49-(0)4165 / 2211-0
E-Mail: [email protected]
www.HamannAG.com
UV set
Type: 2500 230E 90W...
Type Part No.
2500 230E 90W 011095
2500 230E 90W M + 1/2" 011096
Operating- and Maintenance Instruction
This instruction includes important safety information and instructions for commission-
ing, operation and maintenance of the HAMANN components. It is essential therefore, that
the responsible specialist refers to it before starting any work on the machinery as well as
prior to commissioning. Furthermore, this instruction must always be available on site.
With reservation of technical modification.
BA 0060 e 1 (10)
CONTENT
GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
SAFETY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
LABELLING OF ADVICE IN THE OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
TECHNICAL DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
SCOPE OF DELIVERY: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
INSTALLATION AND OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
DESCRIPTION OF FAILURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
CLEANING THE QUARTZ TUBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
DISMANTLING OF THE UV-LAMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
CHANGING LAMPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
SPARE PART LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
UV set 2500 230E 90W... 3 (10)
General
1. GENERAL
Disinfection by means of ultraviolet light (UV) is an efficient, economic and particu-
larly environmentally friendly process.
UV light kills pathogen microorganisms within a few seconds without leaving any res-
idues, harmful by-products or affecting the sense of smell or of taste.
Thanks to this the operators‘ exposure to danger by handling harmful chemicals is
excluded.
The effect of the UV light is used by very effective UVC radiation (254 nm). Within a
few seconds this brings about a photochemical reaction in DNA (desoxyribonucleic
acid) which is vital for all microorganisms. By this microorganisms are either killed or
their ability to increase is destroyed.
The rate of kill depends on minimum UV radiation (UV dose), i.e. the time that a mi-
croorganism is exposed to a certain intensity of UV radiation (W/m²). At a UV dose
of 400 J/m² the most important human pathogen bacteria and virus are reduced by
4 logs (decimal exponents), which corresponds to international requirements and en-
sures safe disinfection.
The disinfection performance of a UV system is essentially based on the fact that
each volume element obtains the necessary UV dose when it passes through the UV
reactor. To ensure this the radiation field and hydraulic properties in the UV system
have been optimally adapted to each other.
UV radiation of drinking water does not cause any undesired secondary reactions
based on the UV doses we use for disinfection.
As we do not add efficient disinfective substances to the water by UV radiation, there
are no deposit effects when the volume element has passed through the UV reactor.
2. SAFETY
2.1 LABELLING OF ADVICE IN THE OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
Non-observance of these instructions could lead to danger of life or limb. Therefore,
important safety advice in these instructions are marked with the following general
hazard symbol:
Warnings regarding electric power are labelled with:
Purion2500_e4.fm / 11.5.17
4 (10) UV set 2500 230E 90W...
Safety
Safety instructions whose non-observance could jeopardize the machine and its
functions are labelled with
Important additional informations are labelled with
2.2 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
UV-C-radiation is harmful to the eyes and skin! UV lamps should be used only
in the irradiation chamber if suitable protection caps have been fitted. Persons
should never be exposed to UV-C-radiation.
• Make sure this disinfection unit is only used for the intended purpose as
described in the operating instructions.
• This disinfection unit is to be installed properly before use according to the oper-
ating instructions.
• Do not use a unit with damaged electrical lead or plug, or a unit with faulty func-
tions, or a unit, which has been dropped or has been damaged in some way.
• Make sure the unit is unplugged when it is not being used before fitting, or
removing any parts, or before cleaning the unit. Do not remove the plug from the
socket by pulling the electrical lead, but take the plug directly out of the socket.
• Ensure the disinfection unit is electrically isolated before:
– Carrying out repairs.
REMARK: We recommend that any maintenance is carried out by qualified
persons.
– Cleaning.
– Replacement of the UV lamp.
• The unit is to be depressurized before maintenance.
• Do not use the UV lamp outside of the UV disinfection reactor.
UV lamps have been designed for permanent operation to reach their best dis-
infection capacity. Frequent switching on and off reduces the life of the UV
lamp.
Purion2500_e4.fm / 11.5.17
UV set 2500 230E 90W... 5 (10)
Technical Data
3. TECHNICAL DATA
flow rate 2.5 m³/h water
UVC-transmission 90% T1 cm
temperature of water 2° C to 40° C
reactor stl. steel 1.4571
flanges external thread R 1“
seal FPM
dimensions (L x Ø in mm) 928 x 42
distance flanges 850 mm
weight 3.4 kg
life time of lamps 10000 h
number of lamps 1
doses 400 J/m²
temperature max. 40° C
max. working pressure 10 bar
protective system IP 65
electrical connection 230 V/50 Hz
total power 90 W
over current protection 10 A
4. SCOPE OF DELIVERY:
• Quartz flow reactor in stainless steel casing; flanges: R 1" external thread; max.
working pressure 10 bar
• Power supply unit with 230V/50Hz
• UV-lamp
5. INSTALLATION AND OPERATION
The flow reactor may be installed vertically or horizontally.
To guarantee steady venting of the reactor it is necessary to ensure inflow
from the lower side and outflow on the upper side of the reactor.
SWITCHING ON THE UV-SYSTEM
Purion2500_e4.fm / 11.5.17
The UV-sterilizer will be switched on and off exclusively by Automatic-Mode of the
sewage treatment plant. Switching off manually is not possible.
6 (10) UV set 2500 230E 90W...
Description of failure
6. DESCRIPTION OF FAILURE
The system has to be checked in case of insufficient disinfection.
possible reasons action needed
soiling of the quartz pipe clean
overheating of the plant in case of check water flow
interrupted water flow
early aging of the UV-lamps change lamps
air has collected in the system de-aerate system
7. MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR
7.1 CLEANING THE QUARTZ TUBE
Cleaning of quartz tube is required, when an warning indication appears on the MFD
(Multi Function Display in front of the switch cabinet) and an collected alarm on the
control desk.
Coatings of hardening constituents in the quartz tube through which the water flows
must be removed.
7.2 DISMANTLING OF THE UV-LAMP
• Switch off the system.
• Discharge the reactor by using the sample cock
• Unlock the cable connection
• Retract the PE-protection cap to ensure access
• Dismantle cable from UV-lamp
• Dismantle quartz pipe (unlock groove nut)
• Completely place the quartz pipe in a vessel filled with an acid cleaning agent.
• Allow the cleaning agent to work for about 30 minutes and swill the pipe with
clear water afterward.
Alternatively the quartz pipe can be cleaned with a cleaning cloth soaked with
cleaning agent.
Important, always wear protective gloves!
• Remove any coatings on the inside of the quartz pipe using a commercial win-
dow cleaner.
• Assemble the quartz pipe. Attention, ensure the quartz pipe is inserted in the clip
on the bottom of the reactor.
Purion2500_e4.fm / 11.5.17
• Return the system into operation
It is basically possible to use any approved commercial acid cleaning agent.
UV set 2500 230E 90W... 7 (10)
Maintenance and repair
7.3 CHANGING LAMPS
Lamps have to be replaced after 10000 operating hours.
When 10000 operating hours are reached, an alarm indication appears on the MFD
(Multi Function Display in front of the switch cabinet) and, if available, an collected
alarm on the control desk.
DISMANTLING OF THE UV-LAMP
• Switch off the system
• Unlock the cable connection
• Retract the PE-protection cap to ensure
• Pull out the UV-lamp with the cable
• Remove the lamp off the 4-contact socket (Attention: possibly hot!). Don’t touch
the UV-lamp except for the socket (Danger of breakage the glass!)
Please take note that the defective UV-lamp has to be discharged by a compe-
tent recycling company.
CLEANING
Remove any finger prints from the lamp using a cloth moistened with alcohol. Re-
move any coatings on the inside of the quartz tube.
REASSEMBLY
• Plug the UV-lamp into the 4-contact socket (Remove any finger prints from the
lamp using a cloth moistened with alcohol).
• Insert the UV-lamp into the quartz tube (passing the head of stainless steel).
• Push up the transparent PE-protection cap against the limit (across the seal).
• Fix the cable of the lamp through cable connection and realize cord grip.
• Return the system into operation
Irrespective of the lamp aging, the socket of the UV-lamp turns brown through
the influence of the UV-light. This does not effect the functioning of the system
in any way.
Purion2500_e4.fm / 11.5.17
8 (10) UV set 2500 230E 90W...
Spare part list
8. SPARE PART LIST
Part No. Designation
011095 UV set (without sensor muffle, without el. Ballast)
- without valve muffle 1/2“
- with cable
- with UV lamp
011096 UV set (without sensor muffle, without el. Ballast)
- with valve muffle 1/2“
- with cable
- with UV lamp
005218 Immersion pipe system
005214 UV lamp 90W GPH 8...
005322 Electronic Ballast EB 1
Valve muffle
1/2“
UV lamp
Immersion pipe
system
Electronic ballast (mounted inside switch cabinet)
For placing a spare parts order, it is absolutely necessary to give the following
details:
Purion2500_e4.fm / 11.5.17
• Quantity
• Designation
• Spare Part Number
Technical Support [email protected]
Spare Parts [email protected]
UV set 2500 230E 90W... 9 (10)
Spare part list
Purion2500_e4.fm / 11.5.17
10 (10) UV set 2500 230E 90W...
HAMANN AG
Bei der Lehmkuhle 4 , D-21279 Hollenstedt
Tel.:+49-(04165)-2211-0 eMail: [email protected]
Datasheet
Pos. Designation Type Part-No. Reference code
Compressed air distribution KCFXZS.11 G HA3 015088 A-1-A-580
unit, complete
1. OVERVIEW OF THE COMPONENTS
5
4
2 Legend:
6 7
1 Ball valve
2 Filter regulator
3 Fine filter
1
4 Distributor
5 3/2- way valve G1/4
electrical driven
6 Fastening angle
7 Fastening angle
Pos. 1: Ball valve K.11
Datasheet_Druckluftverteileinheit_KCFXZS11GHA3_e3.fm / 8.12.16
With reservation of technical modification 1
BD 0116 e
HAMANN AG
Bei der Lehmkuhle 4 , D-21279 Hollenstedt
Tel.:+49-(04165)-2211-0 eMail: [email protected]
Pos. 2: Filter regulator C.11 G H HA3
Pos. 3: Fine Filter FX.11 H HA3
Pos. 4: Distributor Z.11 U10
Datasheet_Druckluftverteileinheit_KCFXZS11GHA3_e3.fm / 8.12.16
Pos. 5: 3/2-way valve G1/4 electrical driven S.11
2 With reservation of technical modification
HAMANN AG
Bei der Lehmkuhle 4 , D-21279 Hollenstedt
Tel.:+49-(04165)-2211-0 eMail: [email protected]
2. SPARE PARTS
Name Type Part number
Ball valve K.11 G1/4 with silencer 015786
Filter regulator C.11HHA3 G1/4 0,5-10 5µm 015787
Pressure switch PE.10 flange version 0.5-10 bar 015789
3/2-way valve S.11 G1/4 electrically operated 24V 015788
coupling package KP.11 BG1 (2x C.11-47; 2x screw C.11-46; 1x O- 015792
ring 15.6x1.78 C11-92; 1 O-ring 19.22x1.78 C.11-
53)
coupling package KP.11Z for distributor BG1 015793
Manometer G50.16R G1/4 Knocks instrument dial light grey 015794
Recommended spare parts
Name Type Part number
fine filter element X23/70 0,01µm compl. (M18x1) w. O-ring 14x2 015791
Spare parts package C.00-26 filter element 5µm 015790
Datasheet_Druckluftverteileinheit_KCFXZS11GHA3_e3.fm / 8.12.16
With reservation of technical modification 3
BD 0116 e
HAMANN AG
Bei der Lehmkuhle 4 , D-21279 Hollenstedt
Tel.:+49-(04165)-2211-0 eMail: [email protected]
Datasheet_Druckluftverteileinheit_KCFXZS11GHA3_e3.fm / 8.12.16
4 With reservation of technical modification
HAMANN AG
Bei der Lehmkuhle 4, D-21279 Hollenstedt
Tel.:+49-(04165)-2211-0, E-Mail: [email protected]
Datasheet
Designation Type Part-No. Reference code(s)
3/2-Way solenoid valve VT307K-5D1-01F-Q 013917 A-1-V-401/402
3/2-Way solenoid valve VT307K-5DO1-01F-Q 015274 A-1-V-401/402
This item is used as electro-pneumatic control valve in Sewage Treatment Plants.
(A)2
(R)3 1(P)
with connector without connector
1. SPECIFICATIONS/TECHNICAL DATA
Version according to type code:
Body type BT = body ported
Valve option _ = Standard type
Operating pressure K = High pressure type (1 MPa)
Rated voltage 5 = 24V DC
Electrical entry D = with DIN terminal
DO = without connector
Light / surge voltage suppressor _ = without
Port size 01 = 1/8 (6A)
Thread type _ = Rc
Option F = with foot bracket
Technical data:
Type of actuator Direct operated type 2 position single solenoid; normally
closed (N.C.)
Medium Air
Operating pressure range 0 to 1 MPa
Ambient and fluid temperature –10 to 50°C (no freezing)
Response time1) 20 ms or less (at the pressure of 0.5 MPa)
Max. operating frequency 10 Hz
Lubrication Not required (Use turbine oil Class 1 ISO VG32, if lubri-
Datasheet_VT307K_e2.fm / 22.8.16
cated.)
With reservation of technical modification 1
BD 0115 e
HAMANN AG
Bei der Lehmkuhle 4, D-21279 Hollenstedt
Tel.:+49-(04165)-2211-0, E-Mail: [email protected]
manual override non-locking push type
Mounting orientation unrestricted
Shock/Vibration resistance 2) 150 / 50 m/s2
Enclosure Dust proof
Electrical entry DIN-Terminal
Coil rated voltage [V] 24V DC
Allowable voltage fluctuation -15 to +10% of rated voltage
Power consumption3) without indicator light: 4 W, with indicator light: 4.2 W
1)
Based on dynamic performance test, JIS B 8374-1981. (Coil temperature: 20°C, at rated voltage, without
surge suppressor)
2)
Impact resistance: No malfunction occurred when it is tested with a drop tester in the axial direction and
at the right angles to the main valve and armature in both energized and de-energized states every once
for each condition. (Values at the initial period)
Vibration resistance: No malfunction occurred in a one-sweep test between 45 and 1000 Hz. Test was per-
formed at both energized and de-energized states in the axial direction and at the right angles to the main
valve and armature. (Values at the initial period)
3)
At rated voltage
Datasheet_VT307K_e2.fm / 22.8.16
2 With reservation of technical modification
HAMANN AG
Bei der Lehmkuhle 4, D-21279 Hollenstedt
Tel.:+49-(04165)-2211-0, E-Mail: [email protected]
2. CONSTRUCTION
De-energized
unbetätigt Energized
betätigt
Manual override
Handhilfsbetätigung
r t
r
y
u
q q
( A )2 1(P ) ( A )2 1(P )
w w
e e
3 (R) 3(R)
No. Description Material
1 Body Aluminium die-cated
2 Spool valve Aluminium, HNBR
3 Return spring stainless steel
4 Molded coil resin
3. HOW TO USE DIN TERMINAL
Datasheet_VT307K_e2.fm / 22.8.16
Disassembly
1. After loosening the thread (1), then if the housing (2) is pulled in the direction of the thread (1), the con-
nector will be removed from the body of equipment (solenoid, etc.).
2. Pull the thread (1) out of the housing (2).
3. On the bottom part of the terminal block (3), there’s a cut-off part (9). If a small flat head screwdriver is
inserted between the opening in the bottom, terminal block (3) will be removed from the housing (2).
(Refer to “Figure 1”.)
With reservation of technical modification 3
BD 0115 e
HAMANN AG
Bei der Lehmkuhle 4, D-21279 Hollenstedt
Tel.:+49-(04165)-2211-0, E-Mail: [email protected]
4. Remove the cable gland (4) and plain washer (5) and rubber seal (6).
Wiring
1. Passing through the cable (7), cable gland (4), plain washer (5), rubber seal (6) in this order, and then
insert into the housing (2).
2. From the terminal block (3), loosen the screw (11), then pass the lead wire (10) through, then again
tighten the screw (11).
Note 1) Tighten within the tightening torque of 0.5 Nm ±15%.
Note 2) Cable (7) external: ø6 to ø8 mm
Note 3) Crimped terminal like round-shape or Y shape cannot be used.
Lead wire color DC: Red (+); Black (-)
Assembly
1. Passing cable gland (4), washer (5), rubber seal (6), housing (2) in this order through cable (7) and
connect to terminal block (3) and then set the terminal block (3) to the housing (2). (Push it down until you
hear the click sound.)
2. Putting rubber seal (6), plain washer (5), in this order into the cable introducing slit on the housing (2),
then further tighten the cable gland (4) securely.
3. Insert the gasket (8) between the bottom part of terminal block (3) and a plug attached to equipment,
and then screw (1) in from the top of the housing (2) to tighten it.
Note 1) Tighten within the tightening torque of 0.5 N·m ±20%.
Note 2) Connector orientation can be changed by 180 degrees depending on how to assemble the hous-
ing (2) and the terminal block (3).
q
w
y
t
r
e
u
i
!1 o !0
Datasheet_VT307K_e2.fm / 22.8.16
4 With reservation of technical modification
HAMANN AG
Bei der Lehmkuhle 4, D-21279 Hollenstedt
Tel.:+49-(04165)-2211-0, E-Mail: [email protected]
4. DIMENSIONS
Datasheet_VT307K_e2.fm / 22.8.16
With reservation of technical modification 5
BD 0115 e
HAMANN AG
Bei der Lehmkuhle 4, D-21279 Hollenstedt
Tel.:+49-(04165)-2211-0, E-Mail: [email protected]
Datasheet_VT307K_e2.fm / 22.8.16
6 With reservation of technical modification
HAMANN AG
Bei der Lehmkuhle 4, D-21279 Hollenstedt
Tel.:+49-(04165)-2211-0, E-Mail: [email protected]
Datasheet
Designation Type Part-No.
3/2-Way solenoid valve VFN212N-5YO-02F-Q 014709
This item is used as electro-pneumatic control valve in Sewage Treatment Plants.
monostabil
Single solenoid
1. SPECIFICATIONS/TECHNICAL DATA
Fluid Air, Inert gas; lubricated2) or not lubricated
Valve type N.C. (normally closed)
Max. operating pressure [MPa] 0,9
Min. operating pressure [MPa] 0,15
Ambient and fluid temperature [°C] -10 to +60 1)
Pilot valve manual override Non-locking push type (Flush)
Switch time [ms] < 20
Switch frequency [Hz] 10
Port size G1/4
Capacity [Nl/min] 1370
Weight [kg] 0,24
Coil rated voltage 24 V DC
Allowable voltage fluctuation -15 to +10%
Isolation class Class B or equivalent
Power consumption [W DC] 1,8
Electrical entry DIN terminal acc. DIN 43650B
Protection IP65
1) Use dry-air at low temperature.
2) Use turbine oil No.1 (ISO VG32), if lubricated.
Datasheet_VFN212N_e2.fm / 22.3.17
With reservation of technical modification 1
BD 0114 e
HAMANN AG
Bei der Lehmkuhle 4, D-21279 Hollenstedt
Tel.:+49-(04165)-2211-0, E-Mail: [email protected]
2. DIMENSIONS
VFN212N ⵧⵧ 02F
2-1/4
Handhilfsbetätigung
Geeignet für Kabeldurchmesser
9 23
O.D. Ø6 ~ Ø8
Pg9
36.5
24
66.5
57
32
40
14
Pilotentlüftung
2-Ø5.5 Befestigungsbohrung
136.5
19
23
NAMUR Mounting Pattern
Datasheet_VFN212N_e2.fm / 22.3.17
2 With reservation of technical modification
Hamann AG
Bei der Lehmkuhle 4 , D-21279 Hollenstedt
Tel.:+49-(04165)-2211-0 eMail: [email protected]
Datasheet
Designation Type Connection Part No. Reference code
DG2D3 3/4“ Thread G 3/4“, DN20 008336 A-1-B-401
A-1-B-402
A-1-B-403
A-1-B-405
2/2-way valve, DG2D3 1“ Thread G 1, DN25 008753 A-1-B-402
direct acting A-1-B-403
DG2D3 1 1/4“ Thread G 1 1/4“, DN32 008805 A-1-B-401
A-1-B-405
DG2D3 2“ Thread G 2“, DN50 011185 A-1-B-405
1. DESIGN
Seat valve with disk sealing.
Single acting to close against flow direction, opened by pilot pressure.
2. TECHNICAL DATA
Pilot Pressure 2 … 10 bar
Temperature Range -30°C … +180°C
Temperature of the environment max. +80°C
DG2D3 3/4“: 6 Bar
Max. medium pressure [bar] at 6bar pilot DG2D3 1“: 8 Bar
pressure DG2D3 1 1/4“: 10 Bar
DG2D3 2“: 8 Bar
DG2D3 3/4“: 6.4
DG2D3 1“: 10.5
Flow rate [m³/h] at p = 1bar
Datasheet_DG2D3_e4.fm / 27.9.12
DG2D3 1 1/4“: 24
DG2D3 2“: 49
Material
Body Stainless steel
Internal parts Stainless steel
Spindle seal PTFE
With reservation of technical modification 1
BD 0006 e
HAMANN AG
Bei der Lehmkuhle 4 , D-21279 Hollenstedt
Tel.:+49-(04165)-2211-0 eMail: [email protected]
3. DIMENSIONS
8"
1/
G
H
1.4
40
8
G
M
L
A
L M A H Weight
G DN
[mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [kg]
3/4“ 20 75 16 102 92 0.75
1“ 25 90 20.5 145 136 1.4
1 1/4“ 32 110 25 191 179 1.8
2“ 50 150 35 225 205 5
Datasheet_DG2D3_e4.fm / 27.9.12
2 With reservation of technical modification
HAMANN AG
Bei der Lehmkuhle 4 , D-21279 Hollenstedt
Tel.:+49-(04165)-2211-0 eMail: [email protected]
Datasheet
Designation Type Part No. Reference code
Level sensor LMT102 010536 A-1-CL-060
1. TECHNICAL DATA
Operating voltage [V] 18...30 DC
Current rating [mA] < 50
Voltage drop [V] < 2,5
Maximum vessel pressure [bar] -1…40
Medium temperature [°C] -20…85
Ambient temperature [°C] -20…60
Protection IP 68 / IP 69K
Housing materials stainless steel (316L / 1.4404); PEEK; PEI;
FKM
Display Switching status LEDs yellow
Operating status LEDs green
Connection M12 connector; gold-plated contacts
Weight [kg] 0,238
Output function 2 x normally open / closed programmable
Connector, process connection G½A
2. WIRING
Wiring
Core colours
BK black
BN brown
BU blue
WH white
Datasheet_LMT102_e1.fm / 16.11.16
OUT1: Switching output / IO-Link / Teach
OUT2: Switching output
Colours to DIN EN 60947-5-2
With reservation of technical modification 1
BD 0139 e
Operation indication by LED and output signals
3. OPERATION INDICATION BY LED AND OUTPUT SIGNALS
LED OUT1 OUT2
unit ready for operation, no medium detected lights (green) OFF ON
unit ready for operation, medium detected lights (yellow) ON OFF
no operating voltage OFF OFF OFF
error / failure flashes OFF OFF
4. DIMENSIONS
Tightening torque 20…25 NM
Datasheet_LMT102_e1.fm / 16.11.16
2 With reservation of technical modification
HAMANN AG
Bei der Lehmkuhle 4 , D-21279 Hollenstedt
Tel.:+49-(04165)-2211-0 eMail: [email protected]
Datasheet
Designation Type Part No.
Level sensor LMT100 010536
1. TECHNICAL DATA
Operating voltage [V] 18...30 DC
Current rating [mA] < 50
Voltage drop [V] < 2,5
Maximum vessel pressure [bar] -1…40
Medium temperature [°C] -40…85
Ambient temperature [°C] -40…60
Protection IP 68 / IP 69K
Housing materials stainless steel (316L / 1.4404); PEEK; PEI;
FKM
Display Switching status LEDs yellow
Operating status LEDs green
Connection M12 connector; gold-plated contacts
Weight [kg] 0.209
Output function 2 x normally open / closed programmable
Connector, process connection G½A
2. WIRING
Wiring
Core colours
BK black
BN brown
BU blue
WH white
Datasheet_LMT100_e3.fm / 20.3.17
OUT1: Switching output / IO-Link / Teach
OUT2: Switching output
Colours to DIN EN 60947-5-2
With reservation of technical modification 1
BD 0015 e
HAMANN AG
Bei der Lehmkuhle 4 , D-21279 Hollenstedt
Tel.:+49-(04165)-2211-0 eMail: [email protected]
3. OPERATION INDICATION BY LED AND OUTPUT SIGNALS
LED OUT1 OUT2
unit ready for operation, no medium detected lights (green) OFF ON
unit ready for operation, medium detected lights (yellow) ON OFF
no operating voltage OFF OFF OFF
error / failure flashes OFF OFF
4. DIMENSIONS
Tightening torque 20…25 NM
Datasheet_LMT100_e3.fm / 20.3.17
2 With reservation of technical modification
Bei der Lehmkuhle 4
D-21279 Hollenstedt - Germany
Tel: +49-(0)4165 / 2211-0
E-Mail: [email protected]
www.HamannAG.com
Swing check valve
Type: RSK 920-DN ...
Part No.: 003595 (DN032)
000477 (DN040)
000738 (DN050)
000479 (DN065)
000478 (DN080)
000476 (DN100)
Operating- and Maintenance Instruction
This instruction includes important safety information and instructions for commission-
ing, operation and maintenance of the HAMANN components. It is essential therefore, that
the responsible specialist refers to it before starting any work on the machinery as well as
prior to commissioning. Furthermore, this instruction must always be available on site.
With reservation of technical modification.
BA 0062 e 1 (8)
CONTENT
DESIGN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
DESCRIPTION, FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
TECHNICAL DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
APPROPRIATE USE IN ACCORDANCE TO DESIGNED CAPABILITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
SAFETY ADVICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
STORAGE AND TRANSPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS, START-UP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
ASSISTANCE IN CASE OF MALFUNCTIONS, REPAIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
TEILENUMMERN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Swing check valve RSK 920-DN ... 3 (8)
Design
1. DESIGN
• Case: PP
• Maximum working pressure: 6 bar
• Seals: FPM (Viton)
• Disc: PP
• Screws: PP
• Spring: Stainless steel 1.4571, Hastelloy C4
2. DESCRIPTION, FUNCTION
Easy structures and short dimensions are the remarkable features of swing check
valves. They are to be directly mounted between DIN flanges (PN 10). The swing
check valves are automatically held in a central position by the flange connection
screws (pos. 6). An O-ring (pos.5) seals the equipment and protects it from external
effects. Therefore, we recommend to use union liners with clean sealing surfaces.
Swing check valves require a low opening pressure. The resulting opening power di-
rects the valve against the spring (optional, pos. 7) and the valve's weight power
(pos. 2), so that the media is released. If the initial pressure is higher than the en-
trance pressure, the valve closes and is sealed by the O-ring (pos. 4) to protect it
from the media.
Swing check valves do not require maintenance.
The swing check valves should only be used for HAMANN AG sewage treatment
plant!
RSK_920-32-40-65-80-100_PP_e8.fm / 2.5.17
4 (8) Swing check valve RSK 920-DN ...
Technical data
3. TECHNICAL DATA
PARTS LIST
1: case 4: ring screw 7: spring
2: disc 5: o-ring 8: pivot
3: screw 6: o-ring 9: jig
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHT
DN A B C D E F [kg]
32 85 15 18 59 22 25 0.09
40 95 16 22 72 25 28 0.1
50 109 17 32 86 37 29 0.18
65 129 20 40 105 50 31 0.23
80 144 20 54 119 61 32 0.27
100 164 23 70 146 77 31 0.38
MAXIMUM OPENING PRESSURE WITH SPRING (VERTICAL THROUGHPUT)
DN kv
[mbar]
[mm] [m³/h]
RSK_920-32-40-65-80-100_PP_e8.fm / 2.5.17
32 16.2 21
40 22.2 21
50 54 21
65 75 21
80 112 21
100 172 21
Swing check valve RSK 920-DN ... 5 (8)
Operating instructions
FLANGE SCREW TORQUES (POS. A)
Torque
Thread M12 M16 M20 M24 M27
Torque [Nm] 20 35 60 100 165
MATERIAL
Case: PP-H
Seals: FPM (Viton)
Reset spring: 1.4571, 2.4610 (Hastelloy)
Operating temperature: max. 150 °C
TIGHTNESS
A minimum back pressure of 0,3 bar is required to keep the swing check valves tight.
4. OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
4.1 APPROPRIATE USE IN ACCORDANCE TO DESIGNED CAPABILITIES
Swing check valves are designed to block media on one side of the pipe within al-
RSK_920-32-40-65-80-100_PP_e8.fm / 2.5.17
lowable pressure and temperature limits and to be installed in a pipe system only.
They are only to be used with media, which the material and the seals are resistant
to. The maximum life cycle of plastics swing check valves is 25 years.
4.2 SAFETY ADVICES
GENERAL SAFETY ADVICES
The safety advices for the pipe system, in which the valves are to be mounted, are
to be followed. The same applies to the swing check valves.
6 (8) Swing check valve RSK 920-DN ...
Operating instructions
DEMANDS ON THE USER
In pipe systems, where our swing check valves are to be used, the planning/installing
person and the operator are responsible for the following issues:
• The swing check valves is to be used according to the regulation in p.1
• The pipe system is to be installed correctly and its operation is to be checked
regularly
• The swing check valves is to be mounted, removed and repaired by qualified
personnel only. The staff is to be regularly instructed according to all relevant
regulations concerning working safety and environmental protection, especially
in the field of pipes under pressure.
• These staff members have to be informed about the manual and the advices
included.
SPECIAL RISKS
Before the swing check valve is being removed, pressure has to be completely taken
off the plant to avoid media escaping from the pipe. Fluid being left in the pipe must
be drained off. Fluid, which has remained in the valve and comes out during removal,
is to be collected.
4.3 STORAGE AND TRANSPORT
STORAGE
• Swing check valves are to be transported in their original packaging and to be
stored in a clean location.
• Swing check valves include sealing elements consisting of organic material, that
reacts to environmental effects. Therefore, they are to be stored in a place,
which is also to be kept as cool, dry and dark as possible.
• The front and back sides of the swing check valves must not be mechanically
damaged.
TRANSPORT
The personnel must pay special attention, when big swing check valves (DN 100) are
unpacked and transported. The valve is to be held in a horizontal position in a way,
that it can open at the top only. This is to avoid, that the valve unintentionally drops
down and is damaged.
RSK_920-32-40-65-80-100_PP_e8.fm / 2.5.17
Swing check valve RSK 920-DN ... 7 (8)
Operating instructions
4.4 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS, START-UP
The following aspects are to be considered during the installation of swing check
valves:
• Possible damages to the swing check valves and O-rings are to be checked
prior to installation. Check if the valve can be moved. Damaged parts must not
be installed.
• Make sure that only those swing check valves are being installed, that meet the
operational requirements regarding pressure category, chemical resistance, con-
nection and dimensions.
• Exit supports allow a greater opening angle and higher throughput values.
• Do not install the valves directly onto a pump flange.
• Avoid pulsation and pressure impact.
• Vertical throughput is allowable only if the valve can open at the top.
• In case of horizontal throughput, the ring screw must be at the top.
• Watch throughput direction (see arrow on the plate) !
• The swing check valves are placed between the flanges by means of a ring
screw. They are put in their central position according to the outer diameter of
the case and the flange screw inner side.
• Tighten the flange screws crosswise regarding the torque required (see data
sheet).
After the installation is finished, check the tightness of the connections by a pressure
check.
4.5 ASSISTANCE IN CASE OF MALFUNCTIONS, REPAIR
It is absolutely necessary to read and follow the safety advices before removing the
valves!
Loosen the flange screws and pull out the swing check valve by means of the ring
screw.
Take off the spring (option) and unscrew the 2 screws. Then, the O-ring or the valve
can be replaced. To install the valve, follow the instructions in reversed order.
4.6 PART NUMBERS
Type RSK 920 Part No.
DN 32, Material: PP 003595
DN 40, Material: PP 000477
DN 50, Material: PP 000738
RSK_920-32-40-65-80-100_PP_e8.fm / 2.5.17
DN 65, Material: PP 000479
DN 80, Material: PP 000478
DN 100, Material: PP 000476
For placing a spare parts order, it is absolutely necessary to give the quantity, des-
ignation and part number
Technical Support [email protected]
Spare Parts [email protected]
8 (8) Swing check valve RSK 920-DN ...
HAMANN AG
Bei der Lehmkuhle 4 , D-21279 Hollenstedt
Tel.:+49-(04165)-2211-0 eMail: [email protected]
Datasheet
Designation Type Part Number
RV508 DN25 1" PN10 007947
Back flow protection
RV508 DN40 1 1/2" PN10 011381
1. TECHNICAL DATA
Type RV508 DN25 1" PN10 RV508 DN40 1 1/2" PN10
Size DN 25 DN 40
Temperature range up to 80°C up to 80°C
Valve housing EN-GJL-250 EN-GJL-250
Connection G 1“ (BSP) G 1 1/2“ (BSP)
Opening pressure 25 mm/Ws 160 mm/Ws
Seal NBR NBR
Weight 1.35 kg 2.45 kg
Datasheet_Back flow protection_ 508_e3.fm / 2.3.17
The back flow protection is maintenance-free.
With reservation of technical modification 1
BD 0067 e
HAMANN AG
Bei der Lehmkuhle 4 , D-21279 Hollenstedt
Tel.:+49-(04165)-2211-0 eMail: [email protected]
2. CHARACTERISTIC CURVE
Directions for use :
• Solid line: Valve completely open
• Dotted line: opening stage of valve
3. DIMENSIONS
D
A
C Datasheet_Back flow protection_ 508_e3.fm / 2.3.17
A
RB
DN [mm] A RB C D Weight [kg]
25 (1“) 26/34 mm 76 mm 114 mm 95 mm 1.35
40 (1 1/2“) 40/49 mm 93 mm 145 mm 121 mm 2.45
2 With reservation of technical modification
HAMANN AG
Bei der Lehmkuhle 4, D-21279 Hollenstedt
Tel.:+49-(04165)-2211-0, E-Mail: [email protected]
Datasheet
Designation Type Part-No.
Safety valve 06011; Za G1/2_Mu Rc3/8 7,5bar 014510
This item is used for example as safety valve in Sewage Treatment Plants of type HL-CONT Plus 0125 and
025.
Cryogenic Safety Valve, angle type, stainless steel, PN63, type tested TÜV-SV.1048. S/G/L
Standard safety valve, complete with carbon filled PTFE valve seal, closed bonnet Outlet: female thread Rc
3/8 acc. to ISO 7/1 "cleaned and de-greased for oxygen service"
Inlet: male thread type G (BSPP) acc. to ISO 228/1
Applications:
Provided as safety device for protection against thermal expansion in pipe works and parts of facilities. Ap-
proved for air gases, vapors and cryogenic liquefied gases incl. LNG.
Working temperature: -196°C / -321°F (77K) up to +65°C / +149°F (338K), suitable for horizontal installa-
tion.
Legend and material
1 Body 1.4408
2 Disc PTFE / Carbon
filled (25%)
3 Guide plate 1.4301
4 Stem 1.4301
5 Spring 1.4571
6 Bonnet 1.4301
7 Spring clamp 1.4305
8 Thread ring 1.4305
9 Cap 1.4301
Datasheet_06011_e2.fm / 13.3.17
Essential: Valves are delivered at a set pressure, therefore when ordering please
confirm set pressure, medium and temperature.
With reservation of technical modification 1
BD 0113 e
HAMANN AG
Bei der Lehmkuhle 4, D-21279 Hollenstedt
Tel.:+49-(04165)-2211-0, E-Mail: [email protected]
Specifications/Technical data
Type 06011; Za G1/2_Mu Rc3/8 7,5bar
Nominal size GW 1/2 (Inlet G1/2 outer; Outlet Rc3/8 inner)
Orifice d0 6,0 mm
Dimension code 0400
Set pressure range 7,5 bar
Height H 70 mm
Length L1 17 mm
Length L2 13 mm
Wrench size across flats S1 19 mm
Wrench size across flats S2 19 mm
Weight ~ 0,21 kg
Coefficient of discharge αw 0,09
Discharge capacities
Calculation of mass flow acc. to AD2000-Merkblatt A2 / DIN EN ISO 4126-1
Medium:
• Air in m³/h at 0°C and 1013.25 mbar
• Water in kg/h
The capacity indicated below is for a fully opened valve.
d0 - orifice
A0 - flow area
GW 1/4, 3/8, 1/2 1/4, 3/8, 1/2
Set pressure in d0 (mm) 6,0 6,0
bar (g) A0 (mm²) 28,3 28,3
Medium Air Water
5,0 11,3 304
6,0 13,2 333
7,0 15,1 359
7,5* 16,0 371
8,0 17,0 384
9,0 18,9 407
10,0 20,8 429
12,0 24,6 470
14,0 28,4 508
16,0 32,2 543
18,0 36,0 576
Datasheet_06011_e2.fm / 13.3.17
20,0 39,9 607
* Type 06011; Za G1/2_Mu Rc3/8 7,5bar
2 With reservation of technical modification
HAMANN AG
Bei der Lehmkuhle 4 , D-21279 Hollenstedt
Tel.:+49-(04165)-2211-0 eMail: [email protected]
Datasheet
Designation Type Part No.
2-way Ball valve with sealed elbow ZG311023-PROBE 001783
DESIGN
Body consists of 1 part, reduced bore. Stamped to AD-approval A4.
Technical Data
Connection 1/2“, female threaded acc. to DIN 2999
Operation Rotation of the handle through 90°
Pressure range Almost vacuum up to nominal pressure (max. +80° C)
Pressure range PN64
Temperature, medium 80° C
Temperature range -30 … +180° C
Body Stainless steel 1.4408
Ball Stainless steel 1.4401
Ball seal PTFE glassfiber reinforced
Handle Stainless steel, plastic coated
Datasheet_ZG311023-PROBE_e2.fm / 13.3.17
With reservation of technical modification 1
BD 0018 e
Dimensions
H
M
t D
L A
All dimensions in mm
A ØD L H t M W kg
Rp 1/2 9 55.6 34.4 11 12.5 95 0.3
Datasheet_ZG311023-PROBE_e2.fm / 13.3.17
2 With reservation of technical modification
HAMANN AG
Bei der Lehmkuhle 4 , D-21279 Hollenstedt
Tel.:+49-(04165)-2211-0 eMail: [email protected]
Datasheet
Designation Type Part-No.
Non return valve INA-14-47-02 015122
Specification/Technical data
Connection size Rc 1/4
Sealing material NBR
Medium Druckluft/Wasser
Operating temperature -5... 60 °C
min. operating pressure 0,05 MPa
Housing material Messing / rostfreier Stahl
Critical pressure rate 0,45
Construction / Dimensions
Datasheet_NonReturnValve_INA-14-47-02_e2.fm / 13.3.17
Parts list
Pos. Description Material
1 Housing A rostfreier Stahl 303
2 Housing B rostfreier Stahl 303
3 Non return valve spring rostfreier Stahl 304
4 Stopper rostfreier Stahl 304
5 Valve rostfreier Stahl 303, NBR
With reservation of technical modification 1
BD 0131 e
HAMANN AG
Bei der Lehmkuhle 4 , D-21279 Hollenstedt
Tel.:+49-(04165)-2211-0 eMail: [email protected]
Datasheet_NonReturnValve_INA-14-47-02_e2.fm / 13.3.17
2 With reservation of technical modification
Bei der Lehmkuhle 4
D-21279 Hollenstedt - Germany
Tel: +49-(0)4165 / 2211-0
E-Mail: [email protected]
Discharge pump (A-1-P-100/251/252)
Sludge pump (A-1-P-250)
Transfer Pump (A-1-P-700/701)
Rotary Lobe Pump
Type: AL 25 (4 m³, DN40)
AL 25 (4 m³, 3 bar DN40)
Part No.: 010348 (4 m³, DN40, horizontal)
013898 (4 m³, DN40, vertical)
014070 (4 m³, 3 bar DN40, horizontal)
Operating- and Maintenance Instruction
This instruction includes important safety information and instructions for commission-
ing, operation and maintenance of the HAMANN components. It is essential therefore, that
the responsible specialist refers to it before starting any work on the machinery as well as
prior to commissioning. Furthermore, this instruction must always be available on site.
With reservation of technical modification.
BA 0053 e 1 (32)
CONTENT
DESCRIPTION AND GENERAL DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
AREAS OF APPLICATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
CONSTRUCTION OF THE ROTARY LOBE PUMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
TECHNICAL DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
CHARACTERISTIC CURVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
SAFETY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
LABELLING OF ADVICE IN THE OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
PERSONNEL QUALIFICATIONS AND TRAINING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
DANGERS RESULTING FROM FAILURE TO OBSERVE SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
SAFETY-CONSCIOUS WORKING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE USER/MACHINE OPERATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE, INSPECTION AND ASSEMBLY WORK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
UNAUTHORIZED MODIFICATIONS, MANUFACTURING OF REPLACEMENT PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
IMPERMISSIBLE MODES OF OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
STANDARD DESIGN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
ELECTRICAL CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
START UP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
MAINTENANCE AND CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
DISASSEMBLY OF QUICK RELEASE COVER AND FLANGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
CLEANING OF THE ROTARY LOBE PUMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
DANGER OF FROST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
STORAGE FOR A LONG TERM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
LUBRICANT LEVEL AND CHANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
PROBLEM / HELP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
CHANGING THE PISTONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
EXCHANGE OF MECHANICAL SEAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
ADJUSTMENT OF THE AXIAL TOLERANCE OF THE ROTORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
DIMENSIONAL DRAWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
SPARE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
SPARE PART LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
EXPLOSION DRAWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
PARTS LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
APPENDIX DRIVE TYPE R37 DRE 90 L4 TF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
SHAFT COUPLING TYPE WITH CLAMPING SLEEVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
HELICAL GEAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
NAMEPLATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
E-MOTOR STRUCTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
NAMEPLATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
CONNECTING THE MOTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
MOTOR CONNECTION TERMINAL BOX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Rotary Lobe Pump AL 25 (4 m³, DN40) AL 25 (4 m³, 3 bar DN40) 3 (32)
AL25-DN40_e3.fm / 3.3.15
4 (32) Rotary Lobe Pump AL 25 (4 m³, DN40) AL 25 (4 m³, 3 bar DN40)
Description And General Data
1. DESCRIPTION AND GENERAL DATA
1.1 AREAS OF APPLICATION
The pump will be used with HAMANN Sewage Treatment plants as a Sludge Pump,
Discharge Pump or Transfer Pump.
1.2 CONSTRUCTION OF THE ROTARY LOBE PUMP
The material of the fluid wetted parts of the pump unit should be adapted to the chem-
ical and physical conditions of the fluid. The code number represents the parts used
in the pump unit.
Safety Opening
do not close
Oil Gauge Oil Fill Breather Oil Fill UP
Timing Gear Intermediate Chamber
Driving Shaft
(top or bottom)
Oil Drain R 3/8" Oil Drain R 3/8" Quick Release Cover
Timing Gear Intermediate Chamber
Intermediate Chamber
AL25-DN40_e3.fm / 3.3.15
Timing Gear Pump Chamber
Rotary Lobe Pump AL 25 (4 m³, DN40) AL 25 (4 m³, 3 bar DN40) 5 (32)
Description And General Data
1.3 TECHNICAL DATA
Pump housing EN-GJL-250 (GG25)
House sealing NBR
Shaft sealing SiSiC/SiSiC, NBR
O-rings NBR
Rotor NBR
Rotor design Dual-lobe linear
Medium Sewage, sludge
Temperature ~ 10 - 30°C
Flow rate 4 m³/h
Discharge pressure:
Part-no. 010348 and 013898 2 bar
Part-no. 014070 3 bar
Suction pressure down to –0.2 bar
Connections (flange) DIN 2633 PN10/16 DN40
Drive R37 DRE90 L4 TF
Operating voltage 3~ 230/400 V / 440 V
Power consumption 1.5 kW
Frequency 50/60 Hz
Rated speed 1465 1/min (50Hz)
Gear side 346 1/min (50Hz)
Isolation class F
Protection IP55
Design M1 (horizontal)
M4 (vertical)
Total weight ca. 80 kg
AL25-DN40_e3.fm / 3.3.15
6 (32) Rotary Lobe Pump AL 25 (4 m³, DN40) AL 25 (4 m³, 3 bar DN40)
Description And General Data
1.4 CHARACTERISTIC CURVE
14
0 Bar
13
2 Bar
12
4 Bar
11
6 Bar
8 Bar
10 10 Bar
Q [m³/h]
12 Bar
9
Fördermenge / Capacity / Quantité
0
0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600 650 700 750 800 850 900
7 12 Bar
6 10 Bar
5 8 Bar
6 Bar
P [kW]
3 4 Bar
2 Bar
2
0 Bar
AL25-DN40_e3.fm / 3.3.15
0
0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600 650 700 750 800 850 900
V.-2303-10 Medium: Wasser / Water / l`Eau (15°C) n [minʚ¹]
Rotary Lobe Pump AL 25 (4 m³, DN40) AL 25 (4 m³, 3 bar DN40) 7 (32)
Safety
2. SAFETY
This operating and maintenance instruction includes important safety information
and instructions for installation, commissioning, operation and maintenance of rotary
lobe pumps. It is essential therefore, that the responsible specialist refers to it before
starting any work on the machinery as well as prior to commissioning. Furthermore,
this instruction must always be available on site.
Corresponding safety equipment must therefore be installed, for example an emer-
gency stop button, a pressure relief valve with return pipe or a bursting disc.
During maintenance and repair work on the pump please note the following:
• Ensure that the pump drive can not be turned on without authorization.
• When opening the pump follow the instructions for handling the medium (e.g.
protective clothing etc.).
• Before putting the pump back into operation ensure that all guards and other
safety devices (e.g. Drive belt protection, coupling protection) are properly re-
installed.
2.1 LABELLING OF ADVICE IN THE OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
Non-observance of these instructions could lead to danger of life or limb. Therefore,
important safety advice in these instructions are marked with the following general
hazard symbol:
Warnings regarding electric power are labelled with:
Safety instructions whose non-observance could jeopardize the machine and its
functions are labelled with
Important additional informations are labelled with
Always comply with instructions mounted directly on the machine, e.g.
AL25-DN40_e3.fm / 3.3.15
• rotational direction arrow
• fluid connection indicators
and ensure that the information remains legible.
8 (32) Rotary Lobe Pump AL 25 (4 m³, DN40) AL 25 (4 m³, 3 bar DN40)
Safety
2.2 PERSONNEL QUALIFICATIONS AND TRAINING
Personnel charged with operation, maintenance, inspection and assembly must be
in possession of the appropriate qualifications. The company operating the machine
must define exact areas of responsibility, accountabilities and personnel supervision
schemes.
Personnel lacking the required skills and knowledge must receive training and in-
struction. If necessary, the operating company may commission the manufacturer or
supplier to conduct training courses.
Furthermore, the operating company must ensure that the personnel fully under-
stand the contents of the operating instructions.
2.3 DANGERS RESULTING FROM FAILURE TO OBSERVE SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Failure to comply with safety instructions may lead to danger of life or limb as well as
environmental hazards or system/device malfunctions. Non-observance of Safety In-
structions may invalidate the right of claim to damages. Some examples of danger
resulting from failure to comply are as follows:
• Failure of important machine/plant functions.
• Failure to follow prescribed methods of service and maintenance.
• Danger to life and limb due to electrical, mechanical or chemical influences.
• Danger to the environment due to leakage of hazardous substances.
2.4 SAFETY-CONSCIOUS WORKING
Always comply with the safety instructions listed in this document, the existing na-
tional accident prevention regulations and any operating and safety rules relative to
a ship's internal work.
2.5 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE USER/MACHINE OPERATOR
• Any potentially hazardous hot or cold machine parts must be provided with pro-
tection against accidental contact.
• Protective guards for moving parts (e.g. coupling) must never be removed while
the system is in operation.
• Leakage's (e.g. in the shaft seal) of hazardous conveying liquids (e.g. toxic) must
be drained in such a way that no danger arises for persons or the environment.
Always observe the relevant statutory requirements.
• The risk of exposure to electrical power must be eliminated. For details see the
electrical installation regulations of your classification society (e.g. GL) and/or
national regulations (e.g. the VDE).
2.6 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE, INSPECTION AND ASSEMBLY WORK
AL25-DN40_e3.fm / 3.3.15
• The operator must ensure that all tasks relative to maintenance, inspection and
assembly are carried out by authorized and qualified personnel who have stud-
ied the operating instructions closely and become sufficiently familiar with the
machine.
• As a basic rule, the machine must be brought to a standstill before work is car-
ried out; and the risk of exposure to electrical power must be eliminated.
Rotary Lobe Pump AL 25 (4 m³, DN40) AL 25 (4 m³, 3 bar DN40) 9 (32)
Safety
• Always comply with the de-commissioning procedures described in this docu-
ment.
• Any pumps or assemblies conveying media that are detrimental to health must
be decontaminated.
• Immediately following completion of work, all safety and protective devices must
be replaced to their proper position and, where applicable, re-activated.
• Before re-starting the machine, observe the points listed under section "Start Up"
on page 13.
2.7 UNAUTHORIZED MODIFICATIONS, MANUFACTURING OF REPLACEMENT PARTS
Conversions or modifications of or for the machine are permissible only after consul-
tation with the manufacturers. Original manufacturer replacement parts and manu-
facturer-approved accessories enhance the operational safety of the machine. Using
unauthorized parts may lead to the nullification of the manufacturer's liability of any
resultant damages.
2.8 IMPERMISSIBLE MODES OF OPERATION
The operational safety of the treatment system and its devices are under warranty
only when being operated as defined in the operating instruction. Never allow the
threshold values specified in the "Technical Data" on page 6 to be exceeded.
AL25-DN40_e3.fm / 3.3.15
10 (32) Rotary Lobe Pump AL 25 (4 m³, DN40) AL 25 (4 m³, 3 bar DN40)
Standard Design
3. STANDARD DESIGN
Rotary Lobe Pump and drive (standard: helical geared motor) fitted on common base
(twist-free), made from galvanized steel, incl. elastic coupling and coupling guard.
Also possible is an overhead mounted drive and a mechanically adjustable variable
speed drive (VSD) for operation in a wide range of flow. The base of the aggregate
has to be fastened on an even foundation.
1. Rotary Lobe Pump
2. Elastic coupling
3. Coupling Guard
7. Motor
8. Gear Reduction Unit
10. Base
11. Flanges
AL25-DN40_e3.fm / 3.3.15
Rotary Lobe Pump AL 25 (4 m³, DN40) AL 25 (4 m³, 3 bar DN40) 11 (32)
Installation
4. INSTALLATION
The Rotary Lobe Pumps are self-priming under certain conditions.
To prevent cavitation install the pump with flooded suction or only with a small suc-
tion lift. With larger suction lifts and/or long suction pipes, control that the NPSH
available of the system is higher in comparison to the required NPSH of the pump.
The required NSPH value must be at least a 0,5 m under the NPSH available to pre-
vent cavitation. With suction lifts over 2 m it is required to install a check valve at a
suitable position in the pipe system.
Especially in pump installations with gaseous fluids it is important to prevent air bub-
bles on the suction side of the pump. If this is not practicable, install an air release
valve close to the pump at a suitable position in the pipe system. This ensures a trou-
ble free start up of the pump aggregate.
Install compensators (follow the mounting instruction of the compensator manufac-
turer) between pump flanges and system especially with thin-walled pipes. Also con-
sider loads caused by changing physical conditions (i.e. temperature).
Connection flanges or valves are not allowed to load the pump unit.
Before start up check and if needed correct the alignment of the coupling. Uneven
foundation surfaces have to be corrected.
Recommended maintenance space
4.1 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION
All work relating to electricity shall only be made by authorized and qualified
personnel and it should be in compliance with the requirements of the relevant
national regulations!
AL25-DN40_e3.fm / 3.3.15
12 (32) Rotary Lobe Pump AL 25 (4 m³, DN40) AL 25 (4 m³, 3 bar DN40)
Start Up
5. START UP
• Check the lubricant Levels
• Check that the flange and pipe connections are sealed and not leaking.
• At pumps with infinite variable rotating flanges (i.e. mobile pumps) check the
tightness of the clamps. Also check the quick connection flanges.
• Check all installed appurtenances in addition to the pump aggregate (i.e. VFDs,
dry running protection, pressure gauges etc.).
• Check the rotation direction of the drive.
Prevent longer dry running in the start up phase.
Fluid is needed for cooling of the pump.
Do not operate pump in hose systems without supervision!
• The Rotary Lobe Pump can operate in either direction. Check if rotation direction
fits your needs.
Top shaft rotates counterclockwise. Top shaft rotates clockwise.
Fluid flows in direction of arrow. Fluid flows in direction of arrow.
Change rotation direction of the drive or change to the other driving shaft of the pump
(if suitable) to reverse flow.
• Opening of valves.
• After a short time the Rotary Lobe Pump is displacing the nominal capacity. The
pressure is not allowed to rise over the permissible pressure of the pipe system
and of the Rotary Lobe Pump and shall not overload the drive unit.
The top opening of the intermediate chamber must remain open to the environ-
ment and must be closed for dirt protection with our plastic stopper. The clos-
ing oft he top opening cause damages on the gear wheels and the bearings.
AL25-DN40_e3.fm / 3.3.15
Rotary Lobe Pump AL 25 (4 m³, DN40) AL 25 (4 m³, 3 bar DN40) 13 (32)
Maintenance and Control
6. MAINTENANCE AND CONTROL
Before every start up check lubricant levels. In addition to, the Lubricant has to be
changed in the named periods. (see section 6.5 for more information).
6.1 DISASSEMBLY OF QUICK RELEASE COVER AND FLANGES
Following are precautions before disassembly of quick release cover and flanges:
• Disconnect motor from power or remove drive from pump unit.
• Close suction and discharge valves.
• Loosen ring nuts of the quick release cover equally appr. 1/5” and move the
cover slowly of the pump casing. Pressure may still exist inside the pump.
Remaining pressure in the pump can splash fluid out of the gap between pump
casing and cover. Cover gap with suitable rag.
6.2 CLEANING OF THE ROTARY LOBE PUMP
Remove quick release cover of the pump (see section 6.1). Clean pump and flanges
with suitable cleaning agent. Let the pump casing dry and use metal surface protec-
tion (i.e. grease) suitable for the rubber material of the rotors.
Do not use grease with EPDM or SBR rotors.
6.3 DANGER OF FROST
The pump and pipe system must be secured against frost. As a supplement HA-
MANN AG can deliver both a heated quick release cover and a heated intermediate
chamber.
Frozen fluid pieces from the pipe system can cause wear inside the pump, es-
pecially at the rubber-coating of the rotors.
6.4 STORAGE FOR A LONG TERM
If the aggregate is stored for long term or taken out of order the driving shaft should
be rotated some revolutions in regular intervals.
Depending on the conveying liquid the pump should also be emptied and flushed.
6.5 LUBRICANT LEVEL AND CHANGE
Before start up of the pump unit check oil level of timing gear at the oil gauge. The
AL25-DN40_e3.fm / 3.3.15
oil level must be at the middle of the oil gauge. The oil of the timing gear and the fluid
of the of intermediate chamber has to be exchanged every two years or after 10.000
hours of operation.
The fluid level in the intermediate chamber must be at the level of the top shaft. The
top opening of the intermediate chamber must remain open to the environment and
must be protected against dirt with our plastic stopper. Submersible units must be
equipped with a sensor for monitoring of the mechanical seal.
14 (32) Rotary Lobe Pump AL 25 (4 m³, DN40) AL 25 (4 m³, 3 bar DN40)
Maintenance and Control
The functions of the intermediate chamber are
• 1. Lubrication and cooling of the mechanical seals and rotor/shaft connection
• 2. Detection of seal failures
• 3. Buffer zone to the sealed timing gear
Check fluid of intermediate chamber with every rotor change. When changing me-
chanical seals the intermediate chamber has to be flushed and cleaned with water
before fill up of new fluid.
Change the hydraulic oil at least every two years or after 10,000 operation hours.
Consider that atmospheric conditions (temperature, humidity, aggressiveness etc.)
can change the interval of oil-changes.
Please check if the factory site filled lubricant types and/or listed oil types of
the pump unit are allowable with the environmental regulations at the applica-
tion site. If need please consult HAMANN AG.
Timing gear oil quantity: ca. 0.37 liter
Intermediate chamber lubricant quantity: ca. 0.22 liter
Factory site used oil types:
Timing Gear: Mobilgear 630 Intermediate
Chamber: Mobil Ambrex 68
Attached is a list of factory approved lubricant types for Rotary Lobe Pumps:
OIL TYPES TIMING GEAR
Type of Ambient Viscosity ARAL BP CASTROL DEA ESSO Klüber MOBIL SHELL TRIPOL
Lubricant Tempera-
ture
Mineral -5…40 °C ISO VG 220 Degol BG Energol Alpha SP Deagear DX Spartan EP Klüberoil Mobilgear Shell Omala Tripol
oil 220 GRXP220 220 Alpha SAE 85 W 220 GEM 1-220 630 Oel 220 1100/220
MW 220 90 Falcon
CLP 150
-15…25 °C ISO VG 100 100 Degol GRXP 100 Alpha MW SAE 80 W Spartan EP 1-100 Mobilgear Omala Oel
BG Energol 100 Alpha Falcon CLP 100 Klüberoil 629 100 Shell
SP 100 150 Deagear GEM
DX
-15…-50 °C ISO VG 15 1010 HV15 Bar- Hyspin SP Hydraulic Oil Univis J13 Isoflex MT Mobil DTE Tellus Oel
Vitamol tran 15 Hyspin 15 Airkraft 30 rot 11 M T15 Shell
AWS 15
LUBRICANT TYPES INTERMEDIATE CHAMBER
Type of Ambient Viscosity ARAL BP CASTROL DEA ESSO Klüber MOBIL SHELL TRIPOL
Lubricant Tempera-
ture
Mineral oil -15…+40 °C ISO VG 68 Motanol HE BP Ener- Magna 68 Renolin NURAY 68 Küberoil Terrestic SHELL Vit- Tripol 943
68 gol CS 68 DTA 68 GIM 1- 68 rea 68 AW 68
AL25-DN40_e3.fm / 3.3.15
Or alternative a mixture of Glysantine and water.
Oil level must be at the middle of the oil gauge!
Oil level and oil change for drive follow instruction of Operation and Mainte-
nance Manual of the drive unit.
Rotary Lobe Pump AL 25 (4 m³, DN40) AL 25 (4 m³, 3 bar DN40) 15 (32)
Troubleshooting
7. TROUBLESHOOTING
7.1 PROBLEM / HELP
PUMP DOES NOT START AFTER SHUT DOWN
Possible problem Help
Solids have settled inside the pump after Cleaning of pump (see section 6.2)
shut down.
Rotors are swollen and are tight to the Check temperature and chemical compounds of fluid.
pump casing. Change rotor to a suitable material.
Long fibers, foil or plastics are blocking the Cleaning of pump and suction flange (see section
pump. 6.1), plan the installation of a Multi- Chopper
Axial rotor tolerance misaligned Adjust axial rotor tolerance (see section 7.4)
Power and/or torque too weak, drive too Change to bigger drive
small.
PUMP DOES NOT SELF PRIME
Possible problem Help
Wrong direction of rotation Change rotation direction of the drive
Suction pipe blocked Clean of suction pipe
Suction connection leaky Check gaskets and tightness of connections
Air bubble inside the pump or pipe system Fill up pump with fluid or release air out of the system
Rubber coating of rotors destroyed Replace rotors; check temperature and chemical
compounds of fluid. Change rotor to a suitable mate-
rial.
PUMP CAVITIES
Possible Problem Help
Rotation speed too high: The cavities Decrease rotation speed and/or increase suction –
inside the pump are not filled (cavitation). pressure
AL25-DN40_e3.fm / 3.3.15
Solid is blocking suction side Remove solid
16 (32) Rotary Lobe Pump AL 25 (4 m³, DN40) AL 25 (4 m³, 3 bar DN40)
Troubleshooting
OIL LEAKAGE AT THE TOP OF THE INTERMEDIATE CHAMBER
Possible Problem Help
O-rings of the mechanical seals are damaged Replace the o-rings of the mechanical seals (see
section 7.2/7.3)
Mechanical seal defect Change of mechanical seal (see section 7.2/7.3)
TECHNICAL INFORMATION MECHANICAL SEAL
The single acting mechanical seals used in Rotary Lobe Pumps consist of each two
seal faces positioned against each other. The mechanical seals are quenched with
the fluid (standard: hydraulic oil) in the intermediate chamber. With capillary and cen-
trifugal force created by the rotation the oil is forced between the seal faces and lu-
bricates the seal gap and removes developing heat from the mechanical seal.
Pumped fluid is not needed to lubricate and/or cool the mechanical seal.
If the mechanical seals had to be opened during maintenance it is recommended to
exchange the mechanical seal, even if the wear limit has not been reached.
AL25-DN40_e3.fm / 3.3.15
Rotary Lobe Pump AL 25 (4 m³, DN40) AL 25 (4 m³, 3 bar DN40) 17 (32)
Troubleshooting
7.2 CHANGING THE PISTONS
1. Switch off the pump and lock the drive unit. Seal off the suction and pressure
pipes using the shut-off valves. (see section 6.1)
2. Uniformly unscrew the four ring nuts (1) by 5 mm and slide the lid (2) back a little
to allow any pressure to get rid of.
Remaining pressure in the pump can splash fluid out of the gap between pump
casing and cover. Cover gap with suitable rag.
3. Unscrew the hexagon socket screws (3) of the two pistons using a 14 mm hexa-
gon socket key.
(Shafts can be retained by clamping with a part which has no sharp edges).
4. Pull off the seal washer (4) in case they are existent.
5. Unscrew the grub screws from the threaded bores (6), screw the piston with-
drawal tool into the threaded bores (6) and pull off the piston.
6. Check (if necessary replace) and oil the O-rings (5) and (7).
7. Oil the shafts and slide on the new pistons. If several pistons have to be pushed
on the shaft the sealing shell with the two o-rings [check damages!] must be pro-
vided. Screw the grub screws back into the threaded bores (6) of the front pis-
tons.
Check the quality symbol on the front sides of the old and new pistons.
8. Unscrew the two screws (3) again and slide on the sealing washer (4).
9. Screw in the cylinder screw (3) and tighten with a torque wrench:
– Torque: 80 Nm for standard screws, 8.8
AL25-DN40_e3.fm / 3.3.15
– Torque: 60 Nm for stainless steel screws, A4
10.Turn the piston by hand and check for easy running.
11.Replace the lid (2) and tighten the ring nuts (1).
12.Before restarting the pump, test it by carefully tipping the motor switch to ensure
the function of the pump.
18 (32) Rotary Lobe Pump AL 25 (4 m³, DN40) AL 25 (4 m³, 3 bar DN40)
Troubleshooting
7.3 EXCHANGE OF MECHANICAL SEAL
10
9
8
7
5
4
5
2
1
11
i di h
1. Drain the fluid from the intermediate chamber through the oil drain screw (11).
2. Remove the piston as described under section 7.2.
3. Remove the feather key (9) from the shaft groove. Unscrew the seal receptacle
(2) on the pump.
4. Remove the mechanical seals (4) and with O-rings (5) from the seal receptacle
(2) and seal receptacle sleeve (8). Clean and oil the O-ring seats.
5. Slide the O-rings (5) onto the new seal rings (5). Press seal ring (4) into the
receptacle (2) and the other seal ring into the receptacle bushing (8).
6. Screw the receptacle part (2) in flush with the wear plate (7). Then turn the
receptacle part (2) back about 1/6 of a turn. The receptacle part now protrudes
approx. 0.3 mm beyond the wear plate. Ensure that the groove of the receptacle
part (2) is aligned flush with the feather key groove (9) (see section 7.4).
7. Place the feather key (9) in the groove of the receptacle element (2) so that it
engages in the shaft groove.
8. Check the O-ring (1) (replace if necessary) and oil. Clean and oil the counter sur-
faces of the piston.
9. Install the piston (see section 7.2/7.3). Note the torque values!
10.Fill fluid into intermediate chamber through the inlet opening (10) (at least to the
upper shaft).
7.4 ADJUSTMENT OF THE AXIAL TOLERANCE OF THE ROTORS
AL25-DN40_e3.fm / 3.3.15
1. Remove the lobes as described under section 7.3.
2. Take the feather key (9) out of the shaft groove.
3. a) The rotors are too tight to the quick release cover:
Rotary Lobe Pump AL 25 (4 m³, DN40) AL 25 (4 m³, 3 bar DN40) 19 (32)
Troubleshooting
Turn the holding bush with thread (2) clockwise 1/6 revolution until the next
groove is aligned with the shaft groove.
b) The rotors are too tight to the rear wear plate (7):
Turn the holding bush with thread (2) counter clockwise 1/6 revolution until
the next groove is aligned with the shaft groove.
Do not unscrew the threaded bush (2) more than 1/6 turn! Danger of fluid leak-
age from the intermediate chamber!
4. Place the feather key (9) into the aligned grooves of the holding bush with thread
(2) and of the shaft.
5. Refit the rotors (see section 7.2).
AL25-DN40_e3.fm / 3.3.15
20 (32) Rotary Lobe Pump AL 25 (4 m³, DN40) AL 25 (4 m³, 3 bar DN40)
Dimensional drawing
8. DIMENSIONAL DRAWING
175
DN40
290
356
260
DN40
ø1
4
707
847
440
535
AL25-DN40_e3.fm / 3.3.15
74
329
Rotary Lobe Pump AL 25 (4 m³, DN40) AL 25 (4 m³, 3 bar DN40) 21 (32)
Spare Parts
9. SPARE PARTS
The Spare Parts List contains position numbers referring to the explosion drawing,
the name of the part, material, article number (important for spare part orders) and
quantity per pump.
9.1 SPARE PART LIST
Exchange of Rotary Lobes
2 x rotor Pos. No.: 9
3 x O-ring 31 x 3 Pos. No.: 31
3 x O-ring 34 x 2,5 Pos. No.: 32
Exchange of Mechanical Seal
2 x mechanical seal Pos. No.: 15
2 x O–ring 31 x 3 Pos. No.: 31
2 x O–ring 34 x 2,5 Pos. No.: 32
Exchange of wear plates
1 x front wear plate Pos. No.: 10
1 x rear wear plate Pos. No.: 11
1 x O–ring 155 x 3 Pos. No.: 30
2 x O–ring 31 x 3 Pos. No.: 31
2 x O–ring 34 x 2,5 Pos. No.: 32
2 x countersunk screw M8 x 16 Pos. No.: 52
Exchange of fluid wetted parts
1 x pump casing Pos. No.: 5
1 x front wear plate Pos. No.: 10
1 x rear wear plate Pos. No.: 11
2 x stationary holding bush Pos. No.: 13
2 x holding bush with thread Pos. No.: 14
2 x mechanical seal Pos. No.: 15
2x cover disk Pos. No.: 24
2x gasket Pos. No.: 25
1 x O–ring 155 x 3 Pos. No.: 30
2 x O–ring 31 x 3 Pos. No.: 31
2 x O–ring 34 x 2,5 Pos. No.: 32
AL25-DN40_e3.fm / 3.3.15
2 x O–ring 55 x 3 Pos. No.: 33
2 x countersunk screw M8 x 16 Pos. No.: 52
2x socket head cap screw M12 x 25 Pos. No.: 64
2x sealing washer A 12 x 18 Pos. No.: 74
22 (32) Rotary Lobe Pump AL 25 (4 m³, DN40) AL 25 (4 m³, 3 bar DN40)
AL25-DN40_e3.fm / 3.3.15
69
7
1 3 33 53
52 11
Spare Parts
15.1 25
14
32
64 9.1 56
30
8 10
50
9.2 EXPLOSION DRAWING
97
73 67
63
96
46
70
65
55
Rotary Lobe Pump AL 25 (4 m³, DN40) AL 25 (4 m³, 3 bar DN40)
71
66
58
37 1
4 14 2
77
17
16
19
2 43 40
36 98
59
23 (32)
Spare Parts
9.3 PARTS LIST
Pos. Part-No. Designation Material Qty.
- 010348 Pump, complete (horizontal version) - 1
AL 25 (4 m³ DN 40)
- 013898 Pump, complete (vertical version) - 1
AL 25 (4 m³ DN 40) vertical
- 014070 Pump, complete (horizontal version with direct start - 1
reversing switch
AL 25 (4 m³,3 bar DN40)
1 012710 Gear Case 0.6020 1
2 012711 Gear Case Cover 0.6020 1
7 012712 Pump Casing 0.6030 1
8 012713 Lid For Pump Casing 0.7040 1
9.1 010647 Rotor, Dual-lobe, Linear NBR 2
10 B51015 Cover Protection Plate, Hardened Steel 1.8714 1
11 B51055 Axial Casing Protection Plate, Hardened Steel 1.7225 1
13 011091 Stationary Holding Bush 1.4571 2
14 011092 Holding Bush 1.4571 2
15.1 010648 Mechanical Seal SISIC/NBR 2
15.1 012329 O-Ring, 38x4 NBR 4
16 W51115 Driving Shaft 1.7225 1
17 W51125 Short Shaft 1.7225 1
19 012716 Gear Wheel, Z=37, M=2, Linear Gear Design 1.7225 2
20 012717 Distance Bushing, 3-lobe, rotor/rotor 1.4571 2
24 012718 Cover Disc, Stainless Steel 1.4571 2
25 F92015 Flat seal, Al 75 NBR 2
30 010649 O-ring, 155x3 NBR 1
31 012330 O-ring, 31x3 NBR 2
32 010650 O-ring, 34x2,5 NBR 2
33 011093 O-ring, 55x3 NBR 2
36 012332 Oil Seal, Shaft End, 30 X 40 X 7 NBR 1
37 012333 Double-lip Oil Seal, 40 X 62 X 10 Duo NBR 2
40 012251 Cylinder Rolling Bearing NJ 2206 2
41 012335 Self-aligning Roller Bearing 22207 2
42 012337 Sleeve, 35 X 40 X 20,5 1.3505 2
AL25-DN40_e3.fm / 3.3.15
43 012338 Sleeve, Shaft End, 25 X 30 X 17 1.3505 1
46 012719 Parallel Key, Driving Shaft, A 8 X 7 X 45 DIN 6885-1 1
50 012720 Cover Nut M 12 DIN 582 4
52 012709 Countersunk Screw, M8 X 16 DIN 6912/10.9 2
53 012721 Screw Stud, M12 X 35 DIN 939 4
24 (32) Rotary Lobe Pump AL 25 (4 m³, DN40) AL 25 (4 m³, 3 bar DN40)
Spare Parts
(continued)
Pos. Part-No. Designation Material Qty.
55 012722 Dowel Pin, M12x6 X 24 EN ISO 8734 4
56 012723 Socket Head Cap Screw, M8 X 25 EN ISO 4762/8.8 8
58 012725 Socket Head Cap Screw, M12 X 140 EN ISO 4762/8.8 4
59 Z49405 Socket Head Cap Screw, M10 X 25 DIN 6912/8.8 8
63 Z49025 Parallel Key 8 X 7 X 18.5 DIN 6885-1 2
64 012727 Socket Head Cap Screw M12 X 25 DIN 6912/10.9 2
65 012339 Oil Sight Glass, Brass, R1" Messing 1
66 012728 Oil Drain Plug, G3/8" DIN 908 2
67 012340 Breather B 1/2" 1
69 012729 Stopper B 146 PE 1
70 012730 Sealing Washer, A 33 X 39 X 2 Klingerit 1
71 012731 Sealing Washer, Copper, A 17 X 23 DIN 7603/Cu 2
73 012732 Sealing Washer, Copper, A 21 X 26 DIN 7603/Cu 1
74 012733 Sealing Washer, Copper, A 12 X 18 DIN 7603/Cu 2
77 012341 Circlip 72 X 2,5 DIN 472 2
96 012734 Parallel Key, Gear, A 10 X 8 X 28 DIN 6885-1 2
97 012735 Lifting Eye Bolt, M 12 DIN 580 1
To avoid mistakes in delivery, please identify the parts by their position num-
ber shown in the spare part list or on the sectional drawing.
For placing a spare parts order, it is absolutely necessary to give the quantity, des-
ignation and part number.
Technical Support [email protected]
Spare Parts [email protected]
AL25-DN40_e3.fm / 3.3.15
Rotary Lobe Pump AL 25 (4 m³, DN40) AL 25 (4 m³, 3 bar DN40) 25 (32)
Appendix drive type R37 DRE 90 L4 TF
10. APPENDIX DRIVE TYPE R37 DRE 90 L4 TF
10.1 SHAFT COUPLING TYPE WITH CLAMPING SLEEVE
Pos. Quantity Designation
TB1/TB2 2 Hub for taper clamping sleeve
1 W 2 Taper clamping sleeve
2 W 1 Spider
3 W 4 Setscrew DIN ISO 4029
W = Wearing part
ASSEMBLY
The taper clamping sleeve has cylindrical and even pocket holes parallel to the axis.
Only half to these holes are in the material of the sleeve. The other half located at
the hub has convolutions.
Push the coupling part and the taper clamping sleeve into each other, make holes
onto the cover and tighten the grub screws slightly. Push the coupling part with taper
clamping sleeve onto the shaft and tighten the grub screws until reaching the tight-
ening torque of 5.7 Nm.
During the screwing process the hub is pushed onto the conical sleeve and thus the
sleeve is pressed onto the shaft. With light hammer strokes the taper clamping
sleeve must be further pushed into the taper bore with a suitable sleeve. Afterwards
please tighten the grub screws again with the tightening torque of 5.7 Nm.
This must be made once at least.
After the drive has operated under load for a short time please check if the grub
screws have untightened.
An axial fixing of the taper lock hub (coupling hub with taper clamping sleeve) is only
possible by a correct assembly.
AL25-DN40_e3.fm / 3.3.15
DISASSEMBLY
By removing the grub screws you can detach the taper clamping sleeve. Afterwards,
one of the grub screws is screwed into the thread of the sleeve as forcing screw and
tightened.
The detached coupling hub can be manually taken off the shaft with the taper clamp-
ing sleeve.
26 (32) Rotary Lobe Pump AL 25 (4 m³, DN40) AL 25 (4 m³, 3 bar DN40)
Appendix drive type R37 DRE 90 L4 TF
10.2 HELICAL GEAR
Oil filling quantity: 1.05 L (horizontal version)
THE LUBRICANTS CAN BE USED:
• Shell Omala 220
• Klüberoil GEM 1.220 N
AL25-DN40_e3.fm / 3.3.15
• Mobil Mobilgear 600 XP 220
• Texaco Meropa 220
• Total Carter EP220
• BP Energol GR-XP 220
Rotary Lobe Pump AL 25 (4 m³, DN40) AL 25 (4 m³, 3 bar DN40) 27 (32)
Appendix drive type R37 DRE 90 L4 TF
10.3 NAMEPLATE
AL25-DN40_e3.fm / 3.3.15
28 (32) Rotary Lobe Pump AL 25 (4 m³, DN40) AL 25 (4 m³, 3 bar DN40)
Appendix drive type R37 DRE 90 L4 TF
10.4 E-MOTOR STRUCTURE
AL25-DN40_e3.fm / 3.3.15
Rotary Lobe Pump AL 25 (4 m³, DN40) AL 25 (4 m³, 3 bar DN40) 29 (32)
Appendix drive type R37 DRE 90 L4 TF
10.5 NAMEPLATE
AL25-DN40_e3.fm / 3.3.15
30 (32) Rotary Lobe Pump AL 25 (4 m³, DN40) AL 25 (4 m³, 3 bar DN40)
Appendix drive type R37 DRE 90 L4 TF
10.6 CONNECTING THE MOTOR
AL25-DN40_e3.fm / 3.3.15
Rotary Lobe Pump AL 25 (4 m³, DN40) AL 25 (4 m³, 3 bar DN40) 31 (32)
Appendix drive type R37 DRE 90 L4 TF
10.7 MOTOR CONNECTION TERMINAL BOX
AL25-DN40_e3.fm / 3.3.15
10.8 MAINTENANCE
The motor bearings come with lubrication for life and are maintenace-free.
32 (32) Rotary Lobe Pump AL 25 (4 m³, DN40) AL 25 (4 m³, 3 bar DN40)
Bei der Lehmkuhle 4
D-21279 Hollenstedt - Germany
Tel: +49-(0)4165 / 2211-0
E-Mail: [email protected]
Level sensor (A-1-CL-006/A-1-CL-034/
A-1-CL-063/A-1-CL-261/
A-1-CP-160/A-1-CP-260)
Process pressure transmitter
Type: BAR 17
Part No.: 0...0,1 bar: 014311
0…0.16 bar: 008323
0…0.25 bar: 001363
0…0.4 bar: 008324
Operating- and Maintenance Instruction
This instruction includes important safety information and instructions for commission-
ing, operation and maintenance of the HAMANN components. It is essential therefore, that
the responsible specialist refers to it before starting any work on the machinery as well as
prior to commissioning. Furthermore, this instruction must always be available on site.
With reservation of technical modification.
BA 0055 e 1 (26)
CONTENT
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
SAFETY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
APPROPRIATE USE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
WARNING ABOUT MISUSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
GENERAL SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
ENVIRONMENTAL INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
PACKAGING, TRANSPORT AND STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
MOUNTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
MOUNTING INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
MOUNTING STEPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
CONNECTING TO POWER SUPPLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
PREPARING THE CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
CONNECTION PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
WIRING PLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
SET UP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
SETUP PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
RECALIBRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
MAINTENANCE AND FAULT RECTIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
REMOVE INTERFERENCES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
DISMOUNTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
DISMOUNTING STEPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
DISPOSAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
SUPPLEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
TECHNICAL DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
DIMENSIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
SPARE PART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Process pressure transmitter BAR 17 3 (26)
Introduction
1. INTRODUCTION
APPLICATION AREA
BAR 17 is a pressure transmitter for measurement of gauge pressure, absolute pres-
sure or vacuum. Measured products are gases, vapours and liquids.
FUNCTIONAL PRINCIPLE
The process pressure acts on the sensor element via the stainless steel diaphragm.
The process pressure causes a resistance change which is converted into a corre-
sponding output signal and outputted as measured value.
POWER SUPPLY
Two-wire electronics 4 … 20 mA for power supply and measured value transmission
on the same cable.
CONFIGURATION
Figure 1: BAR 17 with plug connector
1 Process fitting
2 Housing with electronics
BAR17_e3.fm / 27.8.15
3 Pressure compensantion (beneath the knurled nut)
4 Plug connector
4 (26) Process pressure transmitter BAR 17
Safety
2. SAFETY
2.1 LABELLING OF ADVICE IN THE OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
Non-observance of these instructions could lead to danger of life or limb. Therefore,
important safety advice in these instructions are marked with the following general
hazard symbol:
Warnings regarding electric power are labelled with:
Safety instructions whose non-observance could jeopardize the machine and its
functions are labelled with
Important additional informations are labelled with
Always comply with instructions mounted directly on the machine, e.g.
• rotational direction arrow
• fluid connection indicators
and ensure that the information remains legible.
2.2 AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL
All operations described in this operating instructions manual must be carried out
only by trained and authorized personnel. For safety and warranty reasons, any in-
ternal work on the instruments must be carried out only by qualified HAMANN AG
personnel.
2.3 APPROPRIATE USE
BAR 17 is a pressure transmitter for measurement of gauge pressure, absolute pres-
sure and vacuum.
BAR17_e3.fm / 27.8.15
2.4 WARNING ABOUT MISUSE
Inappropriate or incorrect use of the instrument can give rise to application-specific
hazards, e.g. vessel overfill or damage to system components through incorrect
mounting or adjustment.
Process pressure transmitter BAR 17 5 (26)
Safety
2.5 GENERAL SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
BAR 17 is a high-tech instrument requiring the strict observance of standard regula-
tions and guidelines. The user must take note of the safety instructions in this oper-
ating instructions manual, the country-specific installation standards (e.g. the VDE
regulations in Germany) as well as all prevailing safety regulations and accident pre-
vention rules.
2.6 ENVIRONMENTAL INSTRUCTIONS
Protection of the environment is one of our most important duties. That is why we
have introduced an environmental management system that focuses on continuous
improvement of company environmental protection. The environmental manage-
ment system is certified acc. to DIN EN 14001.
Please help us fulfil this obligation by observing the environmental instructions in this
manual.
BAR17_e3.fm / 27.8.15
6 (26) Process pressure transmitter BAR 17
Operation
3. OPERATION
BAR 17 has no adjustment options. However, two potentiometers are integrated for
the recalibration of zero and span.
3.1 PACKAGING, TRANSPORT AND STORAGE
Your instrument was protected by packaging during transport. Its capacity to handle
normal loads during transport is assured by a test according to DIN EN 24180.
The packaging of standard instruments consists of environment friendly, recyclable
cardboard. For special versions, PE foam or PE foil is also used. Dispose of the pack-
aging material via specialized recycling companies.
TRANSPORT
Transport must be carried out under consideration of the notes on the transport pack-
aging. Nonobservance of these instructions can cause damage to the device.
TRANSPORT INSPECTION
The delivery must be checked for completeness and possible transit damage imme-
diately at receipt. Ascertained transit damage or concealed defects must be appro-
priately dealt with.
STORAGE
Up to the time of installation, the packages must be left closed and stored according
to the orientation and storage markings on the outside.
Unless otherwise indicated, the packages must be stored only under the following
conditions:
• Not in the open
• Dry and dust free
• Not exposed to corrosive media
• Protected against solar radiation
• Avoiding mechanical shock and vibration
STORAGE AND TRANSPORT TEMPERATURE
• Storage and transport temperature see chapter "Supplement - Technical data -
Ambient conditions"
• Relative humidity 20 … 85%
BAR17_e3.fm / 27.8.15
Process pressure transmitter BAR 17 7 (26)
Mounting
4. MOUNTING
4.1 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
SUITABILITY FOR PROCESS CONDITIONS
Make sure that all parts of the instrument in contact with the measured product, es-
pecially the sensor element, process seal and process fitting, are suitable for the ex-
isting process conditions such as process pressure, process temperature as well as
the chemical properties of the medium.
You can find the specifications in chapter "Technical data" in the or on the type label.
After removal of the diaphragm protective cover, the diaphragm must not be
pressed.
4.2 MOUNTING INSTRUCTIONS
MOUNTING POSITION
BAR 17 functions in any installation position. It is mounted according to the same di-
rectives as a manometer (DIN EN 839-2).
4.3 MOUNTING STEPS
WELDING THE SOCKET
For mounting BAR 17, a welded socket as shown in drawing is absolute required.
This welded socket is optional available from HAMANN AG.
G1
21 mm
(0.83")
10,5 mm
(0.41")
ø 30,1 mm
(1.19")
ø 50 mm
(1.97")
BAR17_e3.fm / 27.8.15
Figure 2: Welded socket
8 (26) Process pressure transmitter BAR 17
Mounting
SEALING/SCREWING IN
For the following process fittings use the O-ring seal that belongs to the respective
instrument.
- or -
With the following process fittings, seal the thread with teflon, hemp or a similar seal
material.
– Screw BAR 17 into the welded socket. Tighten the hexagon screw on the pro-
cess fitting.
Figure 3: Installation of BAR 17
BAR17_e3.fm / 27.8.15
Process pressure transmitter BAR 17 9 (26)
Connecting to power supply
5. CONNECTING TO POWER SUPPLY
5.1 PREPARING THE CONNECTION
NOTE SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Always keep in mind the following safety instructions:
• Connect only in the complete absence of line voltage
• If overvoltage surges are expected, overvoltage arresters should be installed.
SELECT POWER SUPPLY
The supply voltage and the current signal are carried on the same two wire connec-
tion cable.
Provide a reliable separation between the supply circuit and the mains circuits ac-
cording to DIN VDE 0106 part 101.
Bear in mind the following factors regarding supply voltage:
• Output voltage of the power supply unit can be lower under nominal load (with a
sensor current of 20.5 mA or 22 mA in case of fault message)
• Influence of additional instruments in the circuit (see load values in chapter
"Technical data")
SELECTING CONNECTION CABLE
The instrument is connected with standard two-wire cable without screen. If electro-
magnetic interference is expected which is above the test values of EN 61326 for in-
dustrial areas, screened cable should be used.
Use cable with round cross-section. A cable outer diameter of 5…9mm (0.2 …
0.35 in) ensures the seal effect of the cable gland. If you are using cable with other
diameter or cross-section, you have to exchange the seal or use a suitable cable
gland.
CABLE SCREENING AND GROUNDING
Connect the cable screen on both ends to ground potential.
If potential equalisation currents are expected, the connection on the processing side
must be made via a ceramic capacitor (e. g. 1 nF, 1500 V). The low frequency po-
tential equalisation currents are thus suppressed, but the protective effect against
high frequency interference signals remains.
5.2 CONNECTION PROCEDURE
CONNECTION VIA ANGLE PLUG CONNECTOR
Proceed as follows:
BAR17_e3.fm / 27.8.15
1. Loosen the screw on the rear of the plug connector
2. Remove the plug connector and seal from BAR 17
3. Remove the plug insert out of the plug housing
10 (26) Process pressure transmitter BAR 17
Connecting to power supply
3
2
Figure 4: Loosen the plug insert
1 Cable gland
2 Plug insert
3 Plug housing
4. Remove approx. 5 cm of the cable mantle, strip approx. 1 cm insulation from the
individual wires
5. Lead the cable through the cable gland into the plug housing
6. Connect the wire ends to the screw terminals according to the wiring plan
2
1
3
4
Figure 5: Connection to the screw terminals
1 Cable gland
2 Plug housing
3 Plug insert
4 Plug seal
BAR17_e3.fm / 27.8.15
7. Snap the plug insert into the plug housing and insert the sensor seal
8. Plug the plug insert with seal to BAR 17 and tighten the screw
The electrical connection is finished.
Process pressure transmitter BAR 17 11 (26)
Connecting to power supply
CONNECTION VIA ANGLE PLUG CONNECTOR WITH HINGED COVER
Proceed as follows:
1. Loosen the screw in the cover of the plug connector
2. Open the cover and remove it
3. Press the plug insert downwards
4. Loosen the screws of the strain relief and cable entry
1 2 3
3
2
Figure 6: Loosen the plug insert
1 Plug insert
2 Strain relief
3 Cable gland
4 Plug housing
5. Remove approx. 5 cm of the cable mantle, strip approx. 1 cm insulation from the
individual wires
6. Lead the cable through the cable gland into the plug housing
7. Connect the wire ends to the screw terminals according to the wiring plan
8. Snap the plug insert into the plug housing and insert the sensor seal
BAR17_e3.fm / 27.8.15
12 (26) Process pressure transmitter BAR 17
Connecting to power supply
2
1
3
Figure 7: Connection to the screw terminals
1 Cable gland
2 Cover
3 Plug housing
4 Plug insert
5 Plug seal
Note the correct arrangement, see illustration
9. Tighten the screws on the strain relief and cable entry
10.Hook in the cover and push onto the plug connection, tighten cover screw
11.Plug the plug insert with seal to BAR 17 and tighten the screw
The electrical connection is finished.
BAR17_e3.fm / 27.8.15
Process pressure transmitter BAR 17 13 (26)
Connecting to power supply
5.3 WIRING PLAN
ANGLE PLUG CONNECTOR ACCORDING TO ISO 4400
+
1
3 1
2
-
Figure 8: Wiring plan plug connector according to ISO 4400, top view to BAR 17
1 = Voltage supply and signal output
ROUND PLUG CONNECTOR M12 X 1
2 1
1
3 3 4
-
Figure 9: Wiring plan round plug connector M12 x 1, top view to BAR 17
1 = Voltage supply and signal output
CONNECTION VIA CONFECTIONED CABLE WITH 4-POLE SOCKET M12X1
Wire colour Connector
Brown 1
White 2
Blue 3
Black 4
BAR17_e3.fm / 27.8.15
14 (26) Process pressure transmitter BAR 17
Connecting to power supply
CABLE OUTLET
1
2
3
Figure 10: Wiring plan cable outlet
1 = brown(+) power supply and signal output
2 = green(-) power supply and signal output
3 = blue = cable screen
TERMINAL HOUSING
1 2 3 4 5
+
– 1
–
+ 2
Figure 11: Wiring plan, terminal housing
1 = To power supply or the processing system
2 = Control instrument (4 … 20 mA measurement)
BAR17_e3.fm / 27.8.15
Process pressure transmitter BAR 17 15 (26)
Set up
6. SET UP
6.1 SETUP PROCEDURE
After mounting and electrical connection, BAR 17 is ready for operation.
BAR 17 delivers a current of 4 … 20 mA according to the actual process pressure.
Further settings are not necessary.
6.2 RECALIBRATION
On instruments with screwed ring or field housing, the zero and span can be read-
justed via the integrated potentiometers. An installation position deviating from the
reference installation position can thus be compensated for.
A shifting of zero shifts span also respectively.
The potentiometer for span should only be used if you have adequate calibra-
tion equipment (at least 3 times more precise than the deviation of BAR 17).
Recommended recalibration cycle: 1 year.
ANGLED AND ROUND PLUG CONNECTOR, CABLE OUTLET
Figure 12: Open the instrument
BAR17_e3.fm / 27.8.15
1 Plug connector
2 Plug seal
3 Screwed ring
4 Instrument plug
5 Plug seal
6 Housing
16 (26) Process pressure transmitter BAR 17
Set up
Proceed as follows:
1. Loosen the plug connector and screw the screwed ring in connected status.
2. Place the plug connector onto the instrument place and pull both carefully out of
the instrument.
3. Set zero in unpressurized status, check 4 mA signal in the circuit
4. Set span with exact reference pressure
5. Check zero
6. Assemble the instrument and connect it.
Figure 13: Adjustment zero and span
Z = zero
S = span
INSTRUMENTS WITH TERMINAL HOUSING
BAR17_e3.fm / 27.8.15
Figure 14: Adjustment zero and span
Z = zero
S = span
Process pressure transmitter BAR 17 17 (26)
Set up
Proceed as follows:
1. Screw on the housing cover in connected status
2. Set zero in unpressurized status, check 4 mA signal in the circuit
3. Set a span with a sufficiently precise reference pressure.
4. Check zero.
5. Screw the housing cover on.
BAR17_e3.fm / 27.8.15
18 (26) Process pressure transmitter BAR 17
Maintenance and fault rectification
7. MAINTENANCE AND FAULT RECTIFICATION
7.1 MAINTENANCE
When used in the correct way, no special maintenance is required in normal opera-
tion.
7.2 REMOVE INTERFERENCES
REACTION WHEN MALFUNCTIONS OCCUR
The operator of the system is responsible for taken suitable measures to remove in-
terferences.
CAUSES OF MALFUNCTION
A maximum of reliability is ensured. Nevertheless, faults can occur during operation.
These may be caused by the following, e.g.:
• Sensor
• Process
• Power supply
• Signal processing
FAULT RECTIFICATION
The first measure to be taken is to check the output signal. In many cases, the
causes can be determined this way and the faults rectified.
CHECKING THE 4 …20 MA SIGNAL
? No 4 … 20 mA signal
• Connection to voltage supply wrong
– Check connection according to chapter "Connection steps" and if necessary,
correct according to chapter "Wiring plan"
• No voltage supply
– Check cables for breaks; repair if necessary
• supply voltage too low or load resistance too high
– Check, adapt if necessary
? Steady output signal with pressure change
• electronics module or measuring cell defective
– Exchange instrument or return instrument for repair
REACTION AFTER FAULT RECTIFICATION
Depending on the failure reason and measures taken, the steps described in chapter
BAR17_e3.fm / 27.8.15
"Set up" must be carried out again, if necessary.
Process pressure transmitter BAR 17 19 (26)
Dismounting
8. DISMOUNTING
8.1 DISMOUNTING STEPS
Before dismounting, be aware of dangerous process conditions such as e.g.
pressure in the vessel, high temperatures, corrosive or toxic products etc.
Take note of chapters "Mounting" and "Connecting to power supply" and carry out
the listed steps in reverse order.
8.2 DISPOSAL
The instrument consists of materials which can be recycled by specialized recycling
companies. We use recyclable materials and have designed the electronics to be
easily separable.
WEEE DIRECTIVE 2002/96/EG
This instrument is not subject to the WEEE directive 2002/96/EG and the respective
national laws. Pass the instrument directly on to a specialized recycling company
and do not use the municipal collecting points. These may be used only for privately
used products according to the WEEE directive.
Correct disposal avoids negative effects to persons and environment and ensures
recycling of useful raw materials.
Materials: see chapter "Technical data"
If you have no possibility to dispose of the old instrument professionally, please con-
tact us concerning return and disposal.
BAR17_e3.fm / 27.8.15
20 (26) Process pressure transmitter BAR 17
Supplement
9. SUPPLEMENT
9.1 TECHNICAL DATA
GENERAL DATA
Materials, wetted parts
• Process fitting 316Ti
• Diaphragm 316Ti
• Diaphragm with front flush version 316Ti, Hastelloy C4
Materials, non-wetted parts
• Internal transmission liquid Synthetic oil, Halocarbon oil
• Housing 316Ti
• Terminal housing 316Ti
• Ground terminal 316Ti
• Plug PA
• Cable gland PA, 316Ti
• Plug seal Silicone
• Connection cable PUR
Weight approx.
• Version with plug connector,
cable outlet 0.2 kg (0.441 lbs)
• Version with terminal housing 0.35 kg (0.772 lbs)
OUTPUT VARIABLE
Output signal 4 … 20 mA
Zero and span adjustable via
potentiometer ±5%
Step response time (10 … 90 %)
• Standard version 1 ms
• Version for medium temperature
< -30 °C (-22 °F) 10 ms
• Version for measuring ranges
< 25 bar 10 ms
• Version with front-flush
diaphragm 10 ms
BAR17_e3.fm / 27.8.15
Process pressure transmitter BAR 17 21 (26)
Supplement
INPUT VARIABLE
Nominal range Overload, max. pressure Overload, min. pressure
Gauge pressure
0 … 0,1 bar/0 … 10 kPa 1 bar/100 kPa -1 bar/-100 kPa
0 … 0.16 bar/0 … 16 kPa 1.5 bar/150 kPa -1 bar/-100 kPa
0 … 0.25 bar/0 … 25 kPa 2 bar/200 kPa -1 bar/-100 kPa
0 … 0.4 bar/0 … 40 kPa 2 bar/200 kPa -1 bar/-100 kPa
Absolute pressure
0 … 0.25 bar/0 … 25 kPa 2 bar/200 kPa
0 … 0.4 bar/0 … 40 kPa 2 bar/200 kPa
DEVIATION
Deviation < 0.5%
INFLUENCE OF THE PRODUCT OR AMBIENT TEMPERATURE
The following specifications apply to values within the compensated temperature
range, i.e. 0 … 80 °C (176 °F), reference temperature 20 °C (68 °F).
Average temperature coefficient of the zero signal
• Standard < 0.2%/10 K
• Meas. ranges 0 … 0.1 und 0 … 0.16 bar < 0.4%/10 K
Average temperature coefficient of the span < 0.2%/10 K
The following specifications are valid for values not within the compensated temper-
ature range.
Average temperature coefficient of the zero signal
• Standard < 0.2%/10 K
• Meas. ranges 0 … 0.1 und 0 … 0.16 bar < 0.4%/10 K
Average temperature coefficient of the span < 0.2%/10 K
LONG-TERM STABILITY (SIMILAR TO DIN 16086, DINV 19259-1 AND IEC
60770-1)
Long-term drift of the zero signal < 0.2%/year
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Ambient temperature (note temperature
derating!) -20 … +80 °C (-4 … +176 °F)
BAR17_e3.fm / 27.8.15
22 (26) Process pressure transmitter BAR 17
Supplement
u
80°C
(176°F)
55°C
(131°F)
130°C 150°C TProz
(266°F) (302°F)
Figure 15: Temperature derating BAR 17
Storage and transport temperature -30 … +105 °C (-22 … +221 °F)
PROCESS CONDITIONS
Product temperature
• Standard -30 … +100 °C (-22 … +212 °F)
• additional -40 … +125 °C (-40 … +257 °F)
• with cooling element -20 … +150 °C (-4 … +302 °F)
Shock resistance
• Version with terminal housing 600 g according to IEC 60068-2-27
(mechanical shock)
• Version with plug connector or cable 1000 g according to IEC 60068-2-27
outlet (mechanical shock)
Vibration resistance
• Version with terminal housing 600 g according to IEC 60068-2-27
(mechanical shock)
• Version with plug connector or cable 1000 g according to IEC 60068-2-27
outlet (mechanical shock)
ELECTROMECHANICAL DATA
Angled plug connector
• Version 4-pole according to ISO 4400
• Outer cable diameter 6 … 8 mm
Circular plug connector
• Version 4-polig M12 x 1
Cable outlet
• Diameter 6.8 mm
Terminal housing
BAR17_e3.fm / 27.8.15
• Cable entry for cable outer
diameter 6 … 8 mm
• Spring-loaded terminals for wire
crosssection up to 2.5 mm² (AWG 14)
Process pressure transmitter BAR 17 23 (26)
Supplement
VOLTAGE SUPPLY
• Version with plug or cable outlet 10 … 30 V DC
• Version with terminal housing 11 … 30 V DC
Load
• Version with cable outlet RA (U-10V)/0,02 A- (length of the
cable version in m x 0.14 )
• Version with plug see diagram
• Version with terminal housing see diagram
Ω
3
950
750
1
500
250
2
10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 V
Figure 16: Voltage diagram
1 Voltage limit
2 Operating voltage
3 Max. load
ELEKTRISCHE SCHUTZMAßNAHMEN
Protection
• with angled plug connector IP 65
• with round plug connection IP 65
• with cable outlet IP 67, IP 68, 0.5 bar
• with terminal housing IP 67
Voltage resistance Insulation according to EN 50020, 6.4, 12
Interference resistance
• HF 10 V/m
• Burst 2 kV
Other protective measures Interpolation and shortcircuit protection
BAR17_e3.fm / 27.8.15
24 (26) Process pressure transmitter BAR 17
Dimensions
10. DIMENSIONS
~126mm (4 61/64")
20,5mm
(13/16")
G1B
(25/64")
10mm
ø 30mm
(1 3/16")
Figure 17: Dimensions BAR 17
11. SPARE PART
Name Type Part number
BAR 17 (0...0,1 bar) 014311
BAR 17 (0...0.16 bar) 008323
Process pressure transmitter
BAR 17 (0...0.25 bar) 001363
BAR 17 (0...0.4 bar) 008324
For placing a spare parts order, it is absolutely necessary to give the following details:
• Quantity
• Designation
• Part number
Technical Support [email protected]
BAR17_e3.fm / 27.8.15
Spare Parts [email protected]
Process pressure transmitter BAR 17 25 (26)
Spare part
BAR17_e3.fm / 27.8.15
26 (26) Process pressure transmitter BAR 17
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
HAMANN AG
B e i d e r L e h m k u h le 4 , 2 1 2 7 9 H o lle n s te d t, D e u ts c h la n d
Te l . + 4 9 ( 0 ) 4 1 6 5 2 2 1 1 0 , E -M ail: in fo @ H a m a n n A G .c o m
plant identification : electric cabinet HLCP 025
add. specif. plant identification :
serial number ship no. : 10884
drawing number : Z-HA1000001-025-V8.j
cabinet number : C0196
producer order number : HA1000001S
lettering : english
Consider the protective note according to DIN ISO 16016!
date of delivery : 05/2017
created : 26.05.2017 by : Hennel
edited : 26.05.2017 by : Hennel No. of pages: 52
print version : 170526_HAMANN_SN10884_P1.2
2
C:\WSCAD55\PROJEKTE\HAMANN_SN10884\
Date 26.05.2017 standard electric cabinet HLCP 025 cover sheet draw. no. Z-HA1000001-025-V8.j =
created Hennel HAMANN AG com. no. HA1000001S +
Bei der Lehmkuhle 4
checked 21279 Hollenstedt Project pages: Blatt 1
state change date name norm DIN61346 root HAMANN_HLCP025_V8 created for created by 10884 overall WSCAD 5.5 von 3 sh
Current: 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
technical_specifications_of_switching_system
Conversions or modifications of the control cabinet are permissible
only after consultation with HAMANN AG.
switch cabinet: cablingcolours:
product : Rittal
type : AE 1076.500 main circuit : black
material : sheet steel neutral line : light blue
colour : RAL 9010 protective conductor : green/yellow
dimensions (h/w/d) : 760/600/210mm control voltage AC : red
base : without control voltage DC : dark blue
cable lead in : bottom analogue signals : white
number of doors : 1 measuring lines : white
door stop : right hingend thermistor protection : brown
closing : dual-bit lock potential-free contactors: orange
marking : label printer
protection class : IP 54
classification class : GL power rating plate
Voltages/ electricalpower:
Consider the protective note according to DIN ISO 16016!
feed-in of : main grid electric cabinet HLCP 025
supply cable : cables Ship 4x2,5mm€ dwg.no Z-HA1000001-025-V8.j year 05/2017
power supply voltage : 440V com.no.HA1000001S cab.no. C0196
back-up fuse : max. 20A 4,8 kW 10A
connection power : 4,8 kW 440V 60Hz
control voltage AC : 230V 50Hz SN: 10884 IP 55
control voltage DC : 24 VDC
1 3
C:\WSCAD55\PROJEKTE\HAMANN_SN10884\
Date 26.05.2017 standard electric cabinet HLCP 025 cover sheet draw. no. Z-HA1000001-025-V8.j =
created Hennel HAMANN AG com. no. HA1000001S +
Bei der Lehmkuhle 4
checked Hennel 21279 Hollenstedt Project pages: Blatt 2
state change date name norm DIN61346 root HAMANN_HLCP025_V8 created for created by 10884 overall 52 WSCAD 5.5 von 3 sh
Current: 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
schematic diagram general information
component identification as per IEC 61346 minimum cross
A assemblies generally M drives power section : 1,50 mm€
engines
B signal conversion control voltage AC230V : 1,00 mm€
external contacts P signalling unit control voltage DC24V : 0,75 mm€
sensors
display devices
C buffer battery printer
potential-free contacts : 1,00 mm€
memory
capacitors Q circuit breaker
soft starter
compensationsplants
E ligthing R resistors
delimiter, diode
heating and cooling appliance
S switcher universal graphical symbols as per EN 60617
F savety device
lightning arrester T power pack, transformer busbar as per EN 13601
motor circuit breaker energy converter
isolation amplifier
G electricity producer frequency converter
UPS- unit U switch cabinet
K signal processing
PLC- devices W cabels and lines
auxilary contactor, relay busbar
magnetic valves
time switch, controller X terminals and ledges
plug and sockets
circuit identifications labeling
L1-L2-L3 main conductor PE protective conductor -P2.1
N neutral conductor PE & N ground wire with N-function
component
component number
St.L1 control voltage AC 230V UPS-L1 UPS-voltage AC 230V
page in wiring diagramm
St.L0 reference potential AC 230V UPS-L0 reference potential AC 230V
component identification
St.+24V control voltage DC 24V UPS+24V UPS-voltage DC 24V
unit
St.-0V reference potential DC 24V UPS-0V reference potential DC 24V
field
2
xSt.L1 control voltage (x) AC 230V
C:\WSCAD55\PROJEKTE\HAMANN_SN10884\
Date 26.05.2017 standard electric cabinet HLCP 025 cover sheet draw. no. Z-HA1000001-025-V8.j =
created Hennel HAMANN AG com. no. HA1000001S +
Bei der Lehmkuhle 4
checked Hennel 21279 Hollenstedt Project pages: Blatt 3
state change date name norm DIN61346 root HAMANN_HLCP025_V8 created for created by 10884 overall 52 WSCAD 5.5 von 3 sh
Current: 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
content
of: standard electric cabinet HLCP 025 page: 1
No. file Project pages comment Date
1 HAMANN_SN10884_Deck.0001 1 cover sheet 26.05.2017
2 HAMANN_SN10884_Deck.0002 2 cover sheet 26.05.2017
3 HAMANN_SN10884_Deck.0003 3 cover sheet 26.05.2017
4 HAMANN_SN10884_I.0001 4 summary 26.05.2017
5 HAMANN_SN10884_I.0002 5 summary 26.05.2017
6 HAMANN_SN10884.0001 6 power supply + power feeder 26.05.2017
7 HAMANN_SN10884.0002 7 power output 26.05.2017
8 HAMANN_SN10884.0003 8 power output 26.05.2017
9 HAMANN_SN10884.0004 9 control voltage 24VDC 26.05.2017
10 HAMANN_SN10884.0005 10 dosing pump 26.05.2017
11 HAMANN_SN10884.0006 11 uv-system 26.05.2017
12 HAMANN_SN10884.0007 12 PLC-touch display i/o expansion modules 26.05.2017
13 HAMANN_SN10884.0008 13 PLC-i/o expansion modules, contactor module 26.05.2017
14 HAMANN_SN10884.0009 14 contactor module 26.05.2017
15 HAMANN_SN10884.0010 15 PLC-input digital 26.05.2017
16 HAMANN_SN10884.0011 16 PLC-input digital 26.05.2017
17 HAMANN_SN10884.0012 17 PLC-input digital 26.05.2017
18 HAMANN_SN10884.0013 18 PLC-output digital 26.05.2017
19 HAMANN_SN10884.0014 19 PLC-output digital 26.05.2017
20 HAMANN_SN10884.0015 20 option circulation A-1-V-205, A-1-V-206 26.05.2017
21 HAMANN_SN10884.0016 21 PLC-input analog 26.05.2017
22 HAMANN_SN10884.0017 22 PLC-input analog PLC-output analog 26.05.2017
23 HAMANN_SN10884.0018 23 potential-free contacts 26.05.2017
24 HAMANN_SN10884_SCH.0001 24 assembly plan control cabinet 26.05.2017
25 HAMANN_SN10884_SCH.0002 25 breakout door control cabinet 26.05.2017
26 HAMANN_SN10884_SCH.0003 26 breakout flange + bottom control cabinet 26.05.2017
27 HAMANN_SN10884_SCH.0004 27 dimensional drawing switch cabinet,view from aft 26.05.2017
28 HAMANN_SN10884_SCH.0005 28 assembly plan terminal box 26.05.2017
29 HAMANN_SN10884_SCH.0006 29 breakout flange + side panel terminal box 26.05.2017
30 HAMANN_SN10884_SCH.0007 30 dimensional drawing terminal box,view from aft 26.05.2017
31 HAMANN_SN10884_K.0001 31 terminal diagram =A+1-1X1 26.05.2017
32 HAMANN_SN10884_K.0002 32 terminal diagram =A+1-1X3 26.05.2017
Consider the protective note according to DIN ISO 16016!
33 HAMANN_SN10884_K.0003 33 terminal diagram =A+1-1X4 26.05.2017
34 HAMANN_SN10884_K.0004 34 terminal diagram =A+1-1X4 26.05.2017
35 HAMANN_SN10884_K.0005 35 terminal diagram =A+1-1X7 26.05.2017
36 HAMANN_SN10884_K.0006 36 terminal diagram =A+1-1X8 26.05.2017
37 HAMANN_SN10884_K.0007 37 terminal diagram =A+1-1X9 26.05.2017
38 HAMANN_SN10884_K.0008 38 terminal diagram =A+1-1X11 26.05.2017
39 HAMANN_SN10884_K.0009 39 terminal diagram =A+1-1X24 26.05.2017
40 HAMANN_SN10884_K.0010 40 terminal diagram =A+1-1X81 26.05.2017
41 HAMANN_SN10884_K.0011 41 terminal diagram =A+1-1X89 26.05.2017
42 HAMANN_SN10884_K.0012 42 terminal diagram =A+1-1X230 26.05.2017
2
C:\WSCAD55\PROJEKTE\HAMANN_SN10884\
Date 26.05.2017 standard electric cabinet HLCP 025 summary draw. no. Z-HA1000001-025-V8.j =
created Hennel HAMANN AG com. no. HA1000001S +
Bei der Lehmkuhle 4
checked Hennel 21279 Hollenstedt Project pages: Blatt 1
state change date name norm DIN61346 root HAMANN_HLCP025_V8 created for created by 10884 overall 52 WSCAD 5.5 von 2 sh
Current: 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
content
of: standard electric cabinet HLCP 025 page: 2
No. file Project pages comment Date
43 HAMANN_SN10884_K.0013 43 terminal diagram =A+1K1-1X1 26.05.2017
44 HAMANN_SN10884_K.0014 44 terminal diagram =A+1K1-1X4 26.05.2017
45 HAMANN_SN10884_K.0015 45 terminal diagram =A+1K1-1X7 26.05.2017
46 HAMANN_SN10884_K.0016 46 terminal diagram =A+1K1-1X8 26.05.2017
47 HAMANN_SN10884_K.0017 47 terminal diagram =A+1K1-1X11 26.05.2017
48 HAMANN_SN10884_K.0018 48 terminal diagram =A+1K1-1X81 26.05.2017
49 HAMANN_SN10884_Klist.0001 49 list of cables 26.05.2017
50 HAMANN_SN10884_MAT.0001 50 List of materials 26.05.2017
51 HAMANN_SN10884_MAT.0002 51 List of materials 26.05.2017
52 HAMANN_SN10884_MAT.0003 52 List of materials 26.05.2017
Consider the protective note according to DIN ISO 16016!
1
C:\WSCAD55\PROJEKTE\HAMANN_SN10884\
Date 26.05.2017 standard electric cabinet HLCP 025 summary draw. no. Z-HA1000001-025-V8.j =
created Hennel HAMANN AG com. no. HA1000001S +
Bei der Lehmkuhle 4
checked Hennel 21279 Hollenstedt Project pages: Blatt 2
state change date name norm DIN61346 root HAMANN_HLCP025_V8 created for created by 10884 overall 52 WSCAD 5.5 von 2 sh
Current: 5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
L1
2.1
L2
2.1
L3 2.1
1 3 5 53 53 1 3 5 53 53
2 4 6 13 21
-Q1.1 -F1.1 -F1.2
-F1.1 I >I >I > 54 1.3 54 -F1.2 I >I >I > 54 1.5 54
25A 1 3 5 14 22 1,6-2,5A 1,0-1,6A
2 4 6 2 4 6
1.4
1.6
18.2
IX24.2 X2 X1 IX25.2 X2 X1
9.1 15VDC 9.3 15VDC
A-1-Z-080 A-1-P-050
motor protection motor protection
digital input digital input
-K9.1 -K9.2
-R1.1 L1' L2' L3' PE -K9.1 -K9.2
OUT
digital output contactor module digital output contactor module
A-1-Z-080 start 24VDC A-1-P-050 start 24VDC
9.1 9.3
QX13.0 QX14.0
X3 X4 A1 A2 X3 X4 A1 A2
in
L1 L2 L3 PE
1 3 5 A1 1 3 5 A1
-Q1.2 -Q1.2 -Q1.3 -Q1.3
1.4 2 4 6 A2 1.7 2 4 6 A2
3kW 3kW
PE
2.1
1)
-1X1
2 2
-1X1
PE 1 2 3 PE 1.3 1 4 5 6 PE 1.5 1
6€ 1.3 3 4 1.5 3 4
M25 M20 1.3 5 6 M20 1.5 5 6
13 14 13 14
-W1 * -W1101 * -W1104 *
. MPRXCX BN BK GY GNYE MPRXCX BN BK GY GNYE MPRXCX BN BK GY GNYE * items delivered
4x2,5mm€ 4G1,5mm€ 4G1,5mm€ by shipyard
earthing PE
bolt
M8x35
Consider the protective note according to DIN ISO 16016!
L1 L2 L3 PE U V W PE U V W PE
+MSB
-X1.1 power supply M M
-M1.1 3 -M1.2 3
0,66KW 0,45KW
I=1,66A I=1,24A
macerator feeding pump
440V, 60Hz A-1-Z-080 A-1-P-050
2
C:\WSCAD55\PROJEKTE\HAMANN_SN10884\
Date 26.05.2017 standard electric cabinet HLCP 025 power supply + power feeder draw. no. Z-HA1000001-025-V8.j =A
created Hennel HAMANN AG com. no. HA1000001S +1
Bei der Lehmkuhle 4
checked Hennel 21279 Hollenstedt Project pages: Blatt 1
state change date name norm DIN61346 root HAMANN_HLCP025_V8 created for created by 10884 overall 52 WSCAD 5.5 von 18 sh
Current: 6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
L1
1.8 3.1
L2
1.8 3.1
1.8 L3 3.1
1 3 5 53 53 1 3 5 53 53 1 3 5 53 53
-F2.1 -F2.2 -F2.3
-F2.1 I >I >I > 54 2.2 54 -F2.2 I >I >I > 54 2.4 54 -F2.3 I >I >I > 54 2.6 54
1,0-1,6A 2,5-4,0A 2,5-4,0A
2 4 6 2 4 6 2 4 6
2.3
2.5
2.7
IX26.2 X2 X1 IX27.2 X2 X1 IX28.2 X2 X1
9.4 15VDC 9.5 15VDC 9.7 15VDC
A-1-P-250 A-1-P-450 A-1-P-251
motor protection motor protection motor protection
digital input digital input digital input
-K9.3 -K9.4 -K9.5
-K9.3 -K9.4 -K9.5
digital output contactor module digital output contactor module digital output contactor module
A-1-P-250 start 24VDC A-1-P-450 start 24VDC A-1-P-251 start 24VDC
9.4 9.5 9.7
QX15.0 QX16.0 QX17.0
X3 X4 A1 A2 X3 X4 A1 A2 X3 X4 A1 A2
1 3 5 A1 1 3 5 A1 1 3 5 A1
-Q2.1 -Q2.1 -Q2.2 -Q2.2 -Q2.3 -Q2.3
2.3 2 4 6 A2 2.5 2 4 6 A2 2.7 2 4 6 A2
3kW 3kW 4kW
PE
1.8 3.1
-1X1
7 8 9 PE 2.2 1 2 10 11 12 PE 2.4 1 2 13 14 15 PE 2.6 1 2
2.2 3 4 2.4 3 4 2.6 3 4
M20 2.2 5 6 M20 2.4 5 6 M20 2.6 5 6
13 14 18.5 13 14 18.6 13 14
-W1107 * -W1113
MPRXCX BN BK GY GNYE MPRXCX BN BK GY GNYE * items delivered
4G1,5mm€ 4G1,5mm€ by shipyard
+1K1 M20
2.2 PE1 3.1
Consider the protective note according to DIN ISO 16016!
-1X1 1) 2)
7 8 9 PE
M20
-W1107_K
MPRXCX BN BK GY GNYE
4G1,5mm€
production notes:
U V W PE U V W PE
1) terminal labelling
M M ZDK starting above
-M2.1 3 -M2.2 3
0,45KW 1,5KW
I=1,24A I=2,85A 2) terminal labelling
ZDK input/output
sludge pump discharge pump
A-1-P-250 A-1-P-251
1 3
C:\WSCAD55\PROJEKTE\HAMANN_SN10884\
Date 26.05.2017 standard electric cabinet HLCP 025 power output draw. no. Z-HA1000001-025-V8.j =A
created Hennel HAMANN AG com. no. HA1000001S +1
Bei der Lehmkuhle 4
checked Hennel 21279 Hollenstedt Project pages: Blatt 2
state change date name norm DIN61346 root HAMANN_HLCP025_V8 created for created by 10884 overall 52 WSCAD 5.5 von 18 sh
Current: 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
L1
2.8 4.1
L2
2.8 4.1
2.8 L3 4.1
1 3 5 53 11 11 53
-K3.2 -K3.1 -F3.1
-F3.1 I >I >I > 54 3.7 12 14 3.6 12 14 3.2 54
6,3-10A
2 4 6
3.6
-K8.4 I0
-K7.2
IX3.0 digital output
analog output
7.5
A-1-P-150 set value A-1-P-150 start
A-1-P-150 motor protection
8.5 7.5
QW8 digital input QX0.0
St.+24V.3
Q0+ Q0-
Q0
-K7.2
4.4
-W1401_I
LIYCY ws br
2x0,75mm€
St.-0V.4 4.6
A1 A1
-K3.1 -K3.2
A2 A2
St.-0V.4.
5.1
PE
2.8 4.1
1)
-1X1 -1X4
16 17 18 PE 1 2 3 4 5 6 3.6 14 3.5 14
3.6 12 11 3.5 12 11
M20 M32
-W1116 * -W1401 *
MPRXCX BN BK GY GNYE FMGCH BU1 WH1 BU2 WH2 BU3 * items delivered
4G1,5mm€ 7x2x0,75mm€ by shipyard
terminal box +1K1
M20 M32
+1K1 2.2 PE1 6.3
Consider the protective note according to DIN ISO 16016!
-1X1 1) 2) -1X4
16 17 18 PE 1 2 3 4 5 6
M20 M20
-W1116_K -W1401_K
MPRXCX BN BK GY GNYE FMGCH BU1 WH1 BU2 WH2 BU3
4G1,5mm€ 4x2x0,75mm€
production notes:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
L1 L2 L3 PE
43 14 16 12 21 22 23 24 40 1 40 77 78 11 3 40 38 39
1) terminal labelling
ZDK starting above
T F+
TF-
M
D IN1
DIN2
DIN3
DIN4
G ND
G ND
10V
G ND
24 V
A G ND
D O U T1
A I N1+
A IN2+
SYS H
S YS L
D O U T2
-M3.1 3 -M3.1 2) terminal labelling
0,43KW 3.2 ZDK input/output
1,05A
clear phase pump NORD SK200E
A-1-P-150 clear phase pump
2 4
C:\WSCAD55\PROJEKTE\HAMANN_SN10884\
Date 26.05.2017 standard electric cabinet HLCP 025 power output draw. no. Z-HA1000001-025-V8.j =A
created Hennel HAMANN AG com. no. HA1000001S +1
Bei der Lehmkuhle 4
checked Hennel 21279 Hollenstedt Project pages: Blatt 3
state change date name norm DIN61346 root HAMANN_HLCP025_V8 created for created by 10884 overall 52 WSCAD 5.5 von 18 sh
Current: 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
L1
3.8 6.1
L2
3.8 6.1
3.8 L3 6.1
St.+24V.7 5.1
1 3 5 13
1 13 21 1
-F4.2
-F4.1 I >I >I > -F4.2 14 22
-F4.3 4.4 14
0,63-1,0A 2 4 6 2 2
B2A S3A
4.7
I2
L1 L2 L3 PE 13 IX9.2
-T4.1 3 8.3
DC I< 14
24VDC/ + + + ok In - - - fuse 24VDC o.k.
10A
1,5mm€ 1,5mm€
DBU DBU digital input
3.6
16.5
13.2
17.6
16.4
17.3
7.1
-K8.2
PE.1
St.-0V.3 10.4
St.-0V.5
St.-0V.7
St.-0V.9
St.+24V.3
St.+24V.5
St.-0V.21
St.-0V.23
-1X24
ZDK2.5/V
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 PE PE
St.+24V.1
St.+24V.2
St.+24V.4
St.+24V.6
St.+24V.8
St.24V-F4.3
St.-0V.1
St.-0V.2
St.-0V.4
St.-0V.6
St.-0V.8
St.-0V.20
St.-0V.22
7.1
7.1
3.7
10.2
16.2
17.5
15.4
16.6
16.4
17.2
PE
3.8 5.1
Consider the protective note according to DIN ISO 16016!
production notes:
cables without cross-
section information
in 0.75mm2 dbl
fixing power supply
unit with
2 terminal angle
3 5
C:\WSCAD55\PROJEKTE\HAMANN_SN10884\
Date 26.05.2017 standard electric cabinet HLCP 025 control voltage 24VDC draw. no. Z-HA1000001-025-V8.j =A
created Hennel HAMANN AG com. no. HA1000001S +1
Bei der Lehmkuhle 4
checked Hennel 21279 Hollenstedt Project pages: Blatt 4
state change date name norm DIN61346 root HAMANN_HLCP025_V8 created for created by 10884 overall 52 WSCAD 5.5 von 18 sh
Current: 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
St.+24V.7
4.8 6.1
6.3
2) 2)
St.L1
St.L0 6.3
1,5mm€
BK
1
-F5.1
B6A 2
11 21
-K5.1
5.4 12 14 22 24
-K7.2
digital output
A-1-P-350 start
7.5
QX0.1
Q1
A1
-K5.1
A2
St.-0V.4.
3.8 6.1
PE
4.8 6.1
1)
-1X3
1 2 5.2 14
5.2 12 11
M20 5.2 24
5.2 22 21
24V-1X4.41 12.3
* items delivered
24V-1X4.42
by shipyard
12.3
Consider the protective note according to DIN ISO 16016!
-W1301 * -W1443_K
Spezialkabel BU BN special wireBN WH
2x2,5mm€ 3x0.75mm€
production notes:
1 2 7 8 12 13 -B5.1
RELAY LEVEL C 1) terminal labelling
-M5.1 M ZDK starting above
17W NC NO
1,4A 2) line with 500mm
reserve
5.2 5.2
dosing pump level flocculant low
A-1-P-350 A-1-CL-360
4 6
C:\WSCAD55\PROJEKTE\HAMANN_SN10884\
Date 26.05.2017 standard electric cabinet HLCP 025 dosing pump draw. no. Z-HA1000001-025-V8.j =A
created Hennel HAMANN AG com. no. HA1000001S +1
Bei der Lehmkuhle 4
checked Hennel 21279 Hollenstedt Project pages: Blatt 5
state change date name norm DIN61346 root HAMANN_HLCP025_V8 created for created by 10884 overall 52 WSCAD 5.5 von 18 sh
Current: 10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
L1
4.8
L2
4.8
4.8 L3
5.8 St.+24V.7
1 3 5
-F6.1 I >I >I >
2 4 6
0,63-1,0A
I2
IX3.2
7.5
1.1 1.2
-T6.1 A-1-C-180 operation
0,315kVA
(1)/ 2.1 2.2
230VAC digital input
link
2.3-2.4
1,0mm€ -1X230 -K7.2
RD ZDK2.5/V 1 2 3 4
-K7.2
digital output
(1)
St.L1
St.L0
380V 0,96A link 1.3-1.0 A-1-C-180 start
400V 0,92A link 1.4-1.0
415V 0,88A link 1.3-1.9
5.2
5.2
> 440V 0,83A link 1.4-1.9 7.5
460V 0,80A link 1.4-1.8 QX0.2
480V 0,76A link 1.5-1.8
Q2
11 21
-K6.1
6.7 12 14 22 24
A1
-K6.1
A2
St.-0V.4.
5.8 11.1
PE
5.8 7.1
1)
-1X11 3)
1 2 PE PE 3 4 6.3 14
6.3 12 11
M20 6.3 24
6.3 22 21
-W11101* -W1401 * -W11105_K
MPRXCX BN BU GNYE BU4 WH4 FMGCH Spezialkabel GN YE WH BN * items delivered
3x1,5mm€ 7x2x0,75mm€ 4x0,5mm€ by shipyard
M20 M20
+1K1 3.2 PE1
Consider the protective note according to DIN ISO 16016!
-1X11
1 2 PE PE 3 4 1) 2) 5 6 7 8
1,0mm€ 0,75mm€ 1,0mm€
RD dbl BK 1 2 3 4
L N PE
-T6.1 LTW 5 -7H1
230V/ 90VA production notes:
1 2 3 4 6
1) terminal labelling
ZDK starting above
2) terminal labelling
ZDK input/output
uv-desinfection plant
3) freespace 10mm
A-1-C-180
5 7
C:\WSCAD55\PROJEKTE\HAMANN_SN10884\
Date 26.05.2017 standard electric cabinet HLCP 025 uv-system draw. no. Z-HA1000001-025-V8.j =A
created Hennel HAMANN AG com. no. HA1000001S +1
Bei der Lehmkuhle 4
checked Hennel 21279 Hollenstedt Project pages: Blatt 6
state change date name norm DIN61346 root HAMANN_HLCP025_V8 created for created by 10884 overall 52 WSCAD 5.5 von 18 sh
Current: 11
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
-P7.1
SWD 8.1
50mm 50mm
13.2
13.3
13.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
address address address
1 2 3
PE.1
-K7.1 -K7.2 -K7.3
St.-0V.12
St.-0V.13
0V
0V St.-0V.11
0V
0V
St.-0V.2
digital input bus- digital in-/ output bus- digital in-/ output bus-
24V St.+24V.12 10.2
24V St.+24V.13 10.3
St.24V-F4.3
DI 8xDC 24V SWD DIO 4xDC 24V, 0,5A SWD DIO 4xDC 24V, 0,5A SWD
SWD-8DX SWD-4D4D SWD-4D4D
24V I0 IX1.0 10.2 A-1-CL-063 stop I0 IX3.0 3.6 A-1-P-150 motor protection I0 IX5.0 11.2 A-1-V-201 open
PE I1 IX1.1 10.3 A-1-CL-063 start I1 IX3.1 reserved I1 IX5.1 11.3 A-1-V-201 closed
XV-102 5,7" SD-SLOT
0V I2 IX1.2 10.3 A-1-CL-063 alarm I2 IX3.2 6.7 A-1-C-180 operation I2 IX5.2 11.4 A-1-V-100 overbord
I3 IX1.3 10.4 A-1-CL-260 I3 IX3.3 reserved I3 IX5.3 11.5 A-1-V-100 circulation
24V I4 IX1.4 10.5 A-1-CP-560 Q0 QX0.0 3.7 A-1-P-150 start Q0 QX1.0 13.2 A-1-V-201
RS
485
CAN
POW
USB-
0V I5 IX1.5 10.6 A-1-CL-261 stop Q1 QX0.1 5.4 A-1-P-350 start Q1 QX1.1 13.2 A-1-V-100
Device
I6 IX1.6 10.7 A-1-CL-261 warning Q2 QX0.2 6.7 A-1-C-180 start Q2 QX1.2 13.3 A-1-B-401
ETHERNET
24V
SWD-BUS
USB-Host
AUX
0V I7 IX1.7 10.7 A-1-CL-261 alarm Q3 QX0.3 reserved Q3 QX1.3 13.4 spare
SWD-DT SWD-DT
1800mm
PE
6.8 8.1
legend
A-1-CL-063 : level holding tank ship
A-1-CL-260 : level sludge tank flotation tank
Consider the protective note according to DIN ISO 16016!
A-1-CP-560 : compressed air ok
A-1-CL-261 : level sludge tank ship
A-1-P-150 : clear phase pump
A-1-P-350 : dosing pump
A-1-C-180 : uv-system 1
A-1-V-201 : 3-way valve, sludge
A-1-V-100 : 3-way valve, overboard/ circulation
A-1-B-401 : pneumatic valve dry-run protection
6 8
C:\WSCAD55\PROJEKTE\HAMANN_SN10884\
Date 26.05.2017 standard electric cabinet HLCP 025 PLC-touch display draw. no. Z-HA1000001-025-V8.j =A
created Hennel HAMANN AG i/o expansion modules com. no. HA1000001S +1
Bei der Lehmkuhle 4
checked Hennel 21279 Hollenstedt Project pages: Blatt 7
state change date name norm DIN61346 root HAMANN_HLCP025_V8 created for created by 10884 overall 52 WSCAD 5.5 von 18 sh
Current: 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
7.8 SWD SWD 9.1
50mm 50mm 50mm 50mm 130mm
10.4
13.5
13.5
13.6
13.7
address address address address
-K8.5 address
4 5 6 7 8
-K8.1 -K8.2 -K8.3 -K8.4
St.+24V.14
0V St.-0V.14
0V St.-0V.15
0V St.-0V.16
0V St.-0V.17
digital in-/ output bus- digital in-/ output bus- analog in-/ output bus- analog in-/ output bus- M22-
24V
24V St.+24V.15 10.5
24V St.+24V.16 10.6
24V St.+24V.17 10.6
DIO 4xDC 24V, 0,5A SWD DIO 4xDC 24V, 0,5A SWD 4x12 Bit 0-20mA/0-10V SWD 4x12 Bit 0-20mA/0-10V SWD SWD-
SWD-4D4D SWD-4D4D SWD-2A2A SWD-2A2A NOP
I0 IX7.0 11.6 spare I0 IX9.0 12.4 A-1-CL-360 low I0+ IW12 17.2 A-1-CP-160 level I0+ IW18 16.3 A-1-CL-063 level
I1 IX7.1 11.7 spare I1 IX9.1 12.7 A-1-CL-060 high I0- I0-
I2 IX7.2 12.2 A-1-B-202 open I2 IX9.2 4.7 fuse 24VDC o.k. I1+ IW14 17.3 A-1-CP-062 pressure I1+ IW20 16.4 A-1-CL-261 level
I3 IX7.3 12.3 A-1-B-202 closed I3 IX9.3 reserved I1- I1-
Q0 QX2.0 13.4 A-1-B-402 Q0 QX3.0 14.2 warning Q0+ QW4 17.6 A-1-H-004 set value Q0+ QW8 3.4 A-1-P-150 set value
Q1 QX2.1 13.5 spare Q1 QX3.1 14.2 common alarm Q0- Q0-
Q2 QX2.2 13.6 A-1-R-501 Q2 QX3.2 14.3 release signal Q1+ QW6 spare Q1+ QW10 spare
Q3 QX2.3 13.7 A-1-B-202 Q3 QX3.3 reserved Q1- Q1-
PE
7.8 9.1
legend legend
A-1-V-204 : 3-way valve, discharge (option) A-1-CL-063 : level holding tank ship
A-1-B-202 : ball valve outlet sludge A-1-CL-261 : level sludge tank ship
Consider the protective note according to DIN ISO 16016!
A-1-B-402 : pneumatic valve purification flotation tank A-1-P-150 : clear phase pump
A-1-R-501 : check valve saturator
A-1-CL-360 : level flocculant
A-1-CL-060 : level saturator
A-1-CL-260 : filling level slugde tank flotation tank
A-1-CP-062 : saturator
A-1-H-004 : pressure release valve
7 9
C:\WSCAD55\PROJEKTE\HAMANN_SN10884\
Date 26.05.2017 standard electric cabinet HLCP 025 PLC-i/o expansion modules, draw. no. Z-HA1000001-025-V8.j =A
created Hennel HAMANN AG contactor module com. no. HA1000001S +1
Bei der Lehmkuhle 4
checked Hennel 21279 Hollenstedt Project pages: Blatt 8
state change date name norm DIN61346 root HAMANN_HLCP025_V8 created for created by 10884 overall 52 WSCAD 5.5 von 18 sh
Current: 13
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
8.8 SWD
1000mm 70mm 70mm 70mm 70mm
address address address address address
9 10 11 12 13
-K9.1 -K9.2 -K9.3 -K9.4 -K9.5
digitalcontactor module H0A bus- digitalcontactor module H0A bus- digitalcontactor module H0A bus- digitalcontactor module H0A bus- digitalcontactor module H0A bus-
DI 2xDC 15V, DO 24V 0,5A SWD DI 2xDC 15V, DO 24V 0,5A SWD DI 2xDC 15V, DO 24V 0,5A SWD DI 2xDC 15V, DO 24V 0,5A SWD DI 2xDC 15V, DO 24V 0,5A SWD
1 0 A SWD-032-002 1 0 A SWD-032-002 1 0 A SWD-032-002 1 0 A SWD-032-002 1 0 A SWD-032-002
X0 IX24.1 reserved X0 IX25.1 reserved X0 IX26.1 reserved X0 IX27.1 reserved X0 IX28.1 reserved
X1 X1 X1 X1 X1
X2 X1 1.4 A-1-Z-080 X2 X1 1.6 A-1-P-050 X2 X1 2.3 A-1-P-250 X2 X1 2.5 A-1-P-450 X2 X1 2.7 A-1-P-251
IX24.2 motor protection IX25.2 motor protection IX26.2 motor protection IX27.2 motor protection IX28.2 motor protection
X3 external stud X3 external stud X3 external stud X3 external stud X3 external stud
X4 X4 X4 X4 X4
A1 QX13.0 1.4 A-1-Z-080 start A1 QX14.0 1.7 A-1-P-050 start A1 QX15.0 2.3 A-1-P-250 start A1 QX16.0 2.5 A-1-P-450 start A1 QX17.0 2.7 A-1-P-251 start
A2 A2 A2 A2 A2
1490mm
-K9.6
R
PE
8.8 10.1
legend
A-1-Z-080 : macerator
A-1-P-050 : feeding pump
Consider the protective note according to DIN ISO 16016!
A-1-P-250 : sludge pump
A-1-P-450 : dry running protection & cleaning pump
A-1-P-251 : discharge pump
production instruction
digital input SWD-32-002
clamp X1-X2 = input IX_.1
clamp X1-X0 = input IX_.2
8 10
C:\WSCAD55\PROJEKTE\HAMANN_SN10884\
Date 26.05.2017 standard electric cabinet HLCP 025 contactor module draw. no. Z-HA1000001-025-V8.j =A
created Hennel HAMANN AG com. no. HA1000001S +1
Bei der Lehmkuhle 4
checked Hennel 21279 Hollenstedt Project pages: Blatt 9
state change date name norm DIN61346 root HAMANN_HLCP025_V8 created for created by 10884 overall 52 WSCAD 5.5 von 18 sh
Current: 14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
-K7.1 -K7.1 -K7.1 -K7.1 -K7.1 -K7.1 -K7.1 -K7.1
digital input digital input digital input digital input digital input digital input digital input digital input
A-1-CL-063 stop A-1-CL-063 start A-1-CL-063 alarm A-1-CL-260 A-1-CP-560 A-1-CL-261 stop A-1-CL-261 warning A-1-CL-261 alarm
7.4 7.4 7.4 7.4 7.4 7.4 7.4 7.4
IX1.0 IX1.1 IX1.2 IX1.3 IX1.4 IX1.5 IX1.6 IX1.7
I0 I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 I6 I7
4.4
4.6
8.3
St.-0V.3
St.+24V.2
St.+24V.12 7.5
St.+24V.13 7.7
St.+24V.14 8.1
St.+24V.15
St.+24V.16 8.4
St.+24V.17 8.5
St.+24V.18
PE
9.8 11.1
0V-1X4
11.1
24V-1X4
11.1
-1X4
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
M25 M16 M16 M16
-W1401 *
FMGCH BU5 WH5 BU6 WH6 BU7 WH7
7x2x0,75mm€
+1K1 * items delivered
by shipyard
Consider the protective note according to DIN ISO 16016!
-1X4 1) 2)
13 14 15 16 17 18
M32
-W1415_K -W1419_K
SpezialkabelBN WH BU BK Spezialkabel BU WH
4x0,5mm€ 2x0,25mm€
production notes:
1 2 3 13
-B10.1 -B10.2 1) terminal labelling
P ZDK starting above
14
4 2) terminal labelling
ZDK input/output
level sludge flotation tank compressed air ok
9 A-1-CL-260 A-1-CP-560 11
C:\WSCAD55\PROJEKTE\HAMANN_SN10884\
Date 26.05.2017 standard electric cabinet HLCP 025 PLC-input digital draw. no. Z-HA1000001-025-V8.j =A
created Hennel HAMANN AG com. no. HA1000001S +1
Bei der Lehmkuhle 4
checked Hennel 21279 Hollenstedt Project pages: Blatt 10
state change date name norm DIN61346 root HAMANN_HLCP025_V8 created for created by 10884 overall 52 WSCAD 5.5 von 18 sh
Current: 15
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
-K7.3 -K7.3 -K7.3 -K7.3 -K8.1 -K8.1
digital input digital input digital input digital input digital input digital input
A-1-V-201 open A-1-V-201 closed A-1-V-100 overbord A-1-V-100 circulation spare spare
7.7 7.7 7.7 7.7 8.1 8.1
IX5.0 IX5.1 IX5.2 IX5.3 IX7.0 IX7.1
I0 I1 I2 I3 I0 I1
A1
-K11.1
A2
St.-0V.4.
6.8 14.1
PE
10.8 12.1
0V-1X4 0V-1X4
10.8 12.1
24V-1X4 24V-1X4
10.8 12.1
-1X4
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 18.4 14 33 34 35 36
18.4 12 11
M32 M20
-W1425 *
FMGCH BU1 WH1 BU2 WH2 BU3 WH3
7x2x0,75mm€
M32
+1K1 * items delivered
by shipyard
Consider the protective note according to DIN ISO 16016!
-1X4 1) 2)
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
M32
-W1427_K -W1431_K
FMGCH BU1 WH1 WH2 FMGCH BU1 WH1 WH2
2x2x0,75mm€ 2x2x0,75mm€
production notes:
-Y13.1 2 PE 5 -Y13.2 2 PE 5
13.2 13.2 1) terminal labelling
ZDK starting above
1 3 4 6 1 3 4 6
open closed open closed 2) terminal labelling
ZDK input/output
3-way valve, sludge 3-way valve, overboard/ circulation
10 A-1-V-201 A-1-V-100 12
C:\WSCAD55\PROJEKTE\HAMANN_SN10884\
Date 26.05.2017 standard electric cabinet HLCP 025 PLC-input digital draw. no. Z-HA1000001-025-V8.j =A
created Hennel HAMANN AG com. no. HA1000001S +1
Bei der Lehmkuhle 4
checked Hennel 21279 Hollenstedt Project pages: Blatt 11
state change date name norm DIN61346 root HAMANN_HLCP025_V8 created for created by 10884 overall 52 WSCAD 5.5 von 18 sh
Current: 16
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
-K8.1 -K8.1 -K8.2 -K8.2
digital input digital input digital input digital input
A-1-B-202 open A-1-B-202 closed A-1-CL-360 low A-1-CL-060 high
8.1 8.1 8.3 8.3
IX7.2 IX7.3 IX9.0 IX9.1
I2 I3 I0 I1
PE
11.8 13.1
0V-1X4
11.8
24V-1X4
11.8
-1X4
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46
-W1425 * -W1441 * -W1425 *
FMGCH BU4 WH4 BU5 TCX(C) BU1 WH1 FMGCH WH5 BU6 WH6 BU7 * items delivered
7x2x0,75mm€ 1x2x0,75mm€ 7x2x0,75mm€ by shipyard
+1K1 +1K1
Consider the protective note according to DIN ISO 16016!
-1X4 -1X4 1) 2)
37 38 39 40 43 44 45 46 PE
5.3 24V-1X4.41
5.3 24V-1X4.42
-W1439_K -W1445_K
FMGCH BU1 WH2 WH1 Spezialkabel BN WH BU BK
2x2x0,75mm€ 4x0,5mm€
production notes:
-Y13.7 2 PE 5 1 2 3
13.7 -B12.1 1) terminal labelling
ZDK starting above
1 3 4 6
open closed 2) terminal labelling
4
ZDK input/output
ball valve outlet sludge level saturator high
11 A-1-B-202 A-1-CL-060 13
C:\WSCAD55\PROJEKTE\HAMANN_SN10884\
Date 26.05.2017 standard electric cabinet HLCP 025 PLC-input digital draw. no. Z-HA1000001-025-V8.j =A
created Hennel HAMANN AG com. no. HA1000001S +1
Bei der Lehmkuhle 4
checked Hennel 21279 Hollenstedt Project pages: Blatt 12
state change date name norm DIN61346 root HAMANN_HLCP025_V8 created for created by 10884 overall 52 WSCAD 5.5 von 18 sh
Current: 17
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
-K7.3 -K7.3 -K7.3 -K7.3 -K8.1 -K8.1 -K8.1 -K8.1
digital output digital output digital output digital output digital output digital output digital output digital output
A-1-V-201 A-1-V-100 A-1-B-401 spare A-1-B-402 spare A-1-R-501 A-1-B-202
7.7 7.7 7.7 7.7 8.1 8.1 8.1 8.1
QX1.0 QX1.1 QX1.2 QX1.3 QX2.0 QX2.1 QX2.2 QX2.3
Q0 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q0 Q1 Q2 Q3
7.4
7.5
7.7
8.1
8.3
8.4
8.5
St.-0V.5 4.6
St.-0V.11
St.-0V.12
St.-0V.13
St.-0V.14
St.-0V.15
St.-0V.16
St.-0V.17
PE
12.8 14.1
0V-1X7
1) 15.1
-1X7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 * items delivered
M32 by shipyard
-W1701* -W1701
FMGCH BU1 WH1 FMGCH WH2 BU3 WH3 BU4 WH4
7x2x0,75mm€ 7x2x0,75mm€
+1K1 M32 +1K1
0V_1X7 15.2
-1X7 1) 2)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
M32 M32
Consider the protective note according to DIN ISO 16016!
-W1701_K -W1703_K -W1705_K -W1709_K -W1711_K -W1713_K -W1715_K
TCX(C) BU1 WH1 TCX(C) BU1 WH1 TCX(C) BU1 WH1 TCX(C) BU1 WH1 TCX(C) BU1 WH1 TCX(C) BU1 WH1 TCX(C) BU1 WH1
1x2x0,75mm€ 1x2x0,75mm€ 1x2x0,75mm€ 1x2x0,75mm€ 1x2x0,75mm€ 1x2x0,75mm€ 1x2x0,75mm€
production notes:
1) terminal labelling
-Y13.1 + - -Y13.2 + - -Y13.3 + - -Y13.4 + - -Y13.5 + - -Y13.6 + - -Y13.7 + - ZDK starting beneath
11.2 11.4 12.2
A-1-V-405 A-1-V-404 A-1-V-401 A-1-V-402 spare A-1-R-501 A-1-V-403 2) terminal labelling
M3(2) M4(4) ZDK input/output
3-way valve, sludge valve dry-run protection valve cleaning flotation tank check valve saturator
12 3-way valve, overboard/ circulation spare ball valve outlet sludge 14
C:\WSCAD55\PROJEKTE\HAMANN_SN10884\
Date 26.05.2017 standard electric cabinet HLCP 025 PLC-output digital draw. no. Z-HA1000001-025-V8.j =A
created Hennel HAMANN AG com. no. HA1000001S +1
Bei der Lehmkuhle 4
checked Hennel 21279 Hollenstedt Project pages: Blatt 13
state change date name norm DIN61346 root HAMANN_HLCP025_V8 created for created by 10884 overall 52 WSCAD 5.5 von 18 sh
Current: 18
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
-K8.2 -K8.2 -K8.2
digital output digital output digital output
warning common alarm release signal
8.3 8.3 8.3
QX3.0 QX3.1 QX3.2
Q0 Q1 Q2
A1 A1 A1
-K14.1 -K14.2 -K14.3
A2 A2 A2
St.-0V.4.
11.8
PE
13.8 15.1
18.7 14 18.2 14 18.3 14
18.7 12 11 18.2 12 11 18.3 12 11
Consider the protective note according to DIN ISO 16016!
13 15
C:\WSCAD55\PROJEKTE\HAMANN_SN10884\
Date 26.05.2017 standard electric cabinet HLCP 025 PLC-output digital draw. no. Z-HA1000001-025-V8.j =A
created Hennel HAMANN AG com. no. HA1000001S +1
Bei der Lehmkuhle 4
checked Hennel 21279 Hollenstedt Project pages: Blatt 14
state change date name norm DIN61346 root HAMANN_HLCP025_V8 created for created by 10884 overall 52 WSCAD 5.5 von 18 sh
Current: 19
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
4.5
St.-0V.18
St.+24V.8
PE
14.8 16.1
0V-1X7
13.7
-1X7 -1X4
17 18 19 20 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
M20 M20
-W1701 *
FMGCH BU5 WH5 BU6 WH6
7x2x0,75mm€
* items delivered
+1K1 0V_1X7
by shipyard
13.7
-1X7 1)2)
17 18 19 20
M32
Consider the protective note according to DIN ISO 16016!
production notes:
1) terminal labelling
ZDK starting above
2) terminal labelling
ZDK input/output
14 16
C:\WSCAD55\PROJEKTE\HAMANN_SN10884\
Date 26.05.2017 standard electric cabinet HLCP 025 option circulation A-1-V-205, draw. no.
A-1-V-206 Z-HA1000001-025-V8.j =A
created Hennel HAMANN AG com. no. HA1000001S +1
Bei der Lehmkuhle 4
checked Hennel 21279 Hollenstedt Project pages: Blatt 15
state change date name norm DIN61346 root HAMANN_HLCP025_V8 created for created by 10884 overall 52 WSCAD 5.5 von 18 sh
Current: 20
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
-T16.1 12 11 10 9 8 7 -K8.4 -K8.4
4-20 4-20
mA 1 4 . . . 3 0 V D C mA 14...30VDC
O U T O U T
analog input analog input
CH1 CH2
A-1-CL-063 level A-1-CL-261 level
8.5 8.5
IW18 I0+ I0- IW20 I1+ I1-
in in
V mA - V mA -
1 2 3 4 5 6
-W18101_I -W18902_I
LIYCY ws br LIYCY ws br gn ge
St.-0V.20
St.-0V.21
2x0,75mm€ 4x0,75mm€
4.6
4.6
4.4
4.4
St.-0V.6 4.6
St.+24V.4
St.+24V.5
15.8 PE 17.1
1) 24V-1X81 17.1
1)
-1X81 -1X89
1 2 PE PE 3 4 PE PE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
M20
Consider the protective note according to DIN ISO 16016!
-W18101* -W18103*
FMGCH BU1 WH1 FMGCH BU1 WH1
1x2x0,75mm€ 1x2x0,75mm€ * items delivered
by shipyard
1 2 PE 1 2 PE
-B16.1 + - -B16.2 + -
4-20mA 4-20mA
production notes:
1) terminal labelling
ZDK starting above
level holding tank level sludge tank ship
15 A-1-CL-063 A-1-CL-261 17
C:\WSCAD55\PROJEKTE\HAMANN_SN10884\
Date 26.05.2017 standard electric cabinet HLCP 025 PLC-input analog draw. no. Z-HA1000001-025-V8.j =A
created Hennel HAMANN AG com. no. HA1000001S +1
Bei der Lehmkuhle 4
checked Hennel 21279 Hollenstedt Project pages: Blatt 16
state change date name norm DIN61346 root HAMANN_HLCP025_V8 created for created by 10884 overall 52 WSCAD 5.5 von 18 sh
Current: 21
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
-K8.3 -K8.3 -K8.3
analog input analog input analog output
A-1-H-004 set value
A-1-CP-160 level A-1-CP-062 pressure
8.4 8.4 8.4
IW12 IW14 QW4
I0+ I0- I1+ I1- Q0+ Q0-
-W1803_I
LIYCY ws br
2x0,75mm€
St.-0V.22
St.-0V.23
4.4
4.6
4.6
4.6
-W18107_I
LIYCY ws br
2x0,75mm€
St.-0V.7
St.+24V.6
PE
16.8 18.1
24V-1X81 1)
16.4
-1X81 -1X8
7 8 PE PE 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 PE PE
M20 M20
-W18107 * -W1801 *
FMGCH BU1 WH1 BU2 WH2 FMGCH BU1 WH1 BU2 WH2 BU3
4x2x0,75mm€ 4x2x0,75mm€
* items delivered
by shipyard
M20 M20
+1K1 1) 2)
-1X81 -1X8
7 8 9 10 PE 1 2 3 4 5 6 PE
M16 M16 M20
Consider the protective note according to DIN ISO 16016!
-W18107_K -W18109_K -W1801_K
FMGCH BU1 WH1 FMGCH BU1 WH1 Spezialkabel WH GN BN YE GY
1x2x0,75mm€ 1x2x0,75mm€ 5x0,5mm€
1 2 PE 1 2 PE 1 3 2 4 5
-B17.1 + - -B17.2 + - -Y17.1 24V 0V 0-10V
4-20mA 4-20mA production notes:
1) terminal labelling
ZDK starting above
2) terminal labelling
ZDK input/output
level flotation tank pressure saturator pressure release valve
A-1-CP-160 A-1-CP-062 A-1-H-004
16 18
C:\WSCAD55\PROJEKTE\HAMANN_SN10884\
Date 26.05.2017 standard electric cabinet HLCP 025 PLC-input analog PLC-output draw. no.
analog Z-HA1000001-025-V8.j =A
created Hennel HAMANN AG com. no. HA1000001S +1
Bei der Lehmkuhle 4
checked Hennel 21279 Hollenstedt Project pages: Blatt 17
state change date name norm DIN61346 root HAMANN_HLCP025_V8 created for created by 10884 overall 52 WSCAD 5.5 von 18 sh
Current: 22
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
13 11 11 11 13 13 11
-Q1.1 -K14.2 -K14.3 -K11.1 -Q2.2 -Q2.3 -K14.1
1.2 14 14.2 12 14 14.3 12 14 11.5 12 14 2.5 14 2.7 14 14.2 12 14
17.8 PE
1)
-1X9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 PE PE
M25
Consider the protective note according to DIN ISO 16016!
production notes:
1) terminal labelling
ZDK starting above
main switch on release signal dry running protection & cleaning pump warning
common alarm drain valve open discharge pump
17
C:\WSCAD55\PROJEKTE\HAMANN_SN10884\
Date 26.05.2017 standard electric cabinet HLCP 025 potential-free contacts draw. no. Z-HA1000001-025-V8.j =A
created Hennel HAMANN AG com. no. HA1000001S +1
Bei der Lehmkuhle 4
checked Hennel 21279 Hollenstedt Project pages: Blatt 18
state change date name norm DIN61346 root HAMANN_HLCP025_V8 created for created by 10884 overall 52 WSCAD 5.5 von 18 sh
Current: 23
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
switch cabinet AE 1076.500
760x600x210mm (HxWxD)
RAL 9010
-25 x 75
-25 x 75
-1X230
-1X24
-25 x 75
-25 x 75
-25 x 75
-25 x 75
empty space cut-in unit HxB 45x230mm
empty space cut-in unit HxB 45x230mm
-37,5 x 75
-1X1 -1X3 -1X4 -1X7 -1X8 -1X9 -1X11 -1X81 -1X89
50 x 75
Consider the protective note according to DIN ISO 16016!
subplate HxW
730 x 549 mm
2
C:\WSCAD55\PROJEKTE\HAMANN_SN10884\
Date 26.05.2017 standard electric cabinet HLCP 025 assembly plan control cabinet draw. no. Z-HA1000001-025-V8.j =A
created Hennel HAMANN AG com. no. HA1000001S +1
Bei der Lehmkuhle 4
checked Hennel 21279 Hollenstedt Project pages: Blatt 1
state change date name norm DIN61346 root HAMANN_HLCP025_V8 created for created by 10884 overall 52 WSCAD 5.5 von 7 sh
Current: 24
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12,2 mm
switch cabinet AE 1076.500
760x600x210mm (HxWxD)
RAL 9010
70 mm
detail A
42 mm
bore
4,2mm
30 mm
11 mm
bore
3,5mm
117 mm
157 mm
detail B
4 mm
6x3, 2mm
580 mm
detail A
87 mm
detail B
HAMANN
137 mm
signs
130 mm
4 mm
Consider the protective note according to DIN ISO 16016!
41 mm
reference point 10 mm
102 mm
36 mm
30 mm
30 mm
1 3
C:\WSCAD55\PROJEKTE\HAMANN_SN10884\
Date 26.05.2017 standard electric cabinet HLCP 025 breakout door control cabinet draw. no. Z-HA1000001-025-V8.j =A
created Hennel HAMANN AG com. no. HA1000001S +1
Bei der Lehmkuhle 4
checked Hennel 21279 Hollenstedt Project pages: Blatt 2
state change date name norm DIN61346 root HAMANN_HLCP025_V8 created for created by 10884 overall 52 WSCAD 5.5 von 7 sh
Current: 25
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
3xbore 3xbore 14xbore 3xbore
32,5mm 25,5mm 20,5mm 16,5mm
40 mm 35 mm 25 mm 20 mm 18 mm 18 mm 18 mm 18 mm 18 mm 18 mm 18 mm 18 mm 18 mm 18 mm 50 mm
40 mm 16 mm
30 mm
210 mm
1xbor
8,5mm
30 mm
1xbor
8,5mm
600 mm
Consider the protective note according to DIN ISO 16016!
2 4
C:\WSCAD55\PROJEKTE\HAMANN_SN10884\
Date 26.05.2017 standard electric cabinet HLCP 025 breakout flange + bottom draw. no. Z-HA1000001-025-V8.j =A
created Hennel HAMANN AG control cabinet com. no. HA1000001S +1
Bei der Lehmkuhle 4
checked Hennel 21279 Hollenstedt Project pages: Blatt 3
state change date name norm DIN61346 root HAMANN_HLCP025_V8 created for created by 10884 overall 52 WSCAD 5.5 von 7 sh
Current: 26
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
switch cabinet AE 1076.500
760 x 600 x 210mm (HxWxD) detail A
detail A
20
8,7
20
Consider the protective note according to DIN ISO 16016!
3 5
C:\WSCAD55\PROJEKTE\HAMANN_SN10884\
Date 26.05.2017 standard electric cabinet HLCP 025 dimensional drawing switch draw. no. Z-HA1000001-025-V8.j =A
created Hennel HAMANN AG cabinet,view from aft com. no. HA1000001S +1
Bei der Lehmkuhle 4
checked Hennel 21279 Hollenstedt Project pages: Blatt 4
state change date name norm DIN61346 root HAMANN_HLCP025_V8 created for created by 10884 overall 52 WSCAD 5.5 von 7 sh
Current: 27
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
switch cabinet AE 1031.500
300 x 380 x 155 mm (HxWxD)
witch door check
cable entry
control cabinet
-37,5 x 75
-1X1 -1X4 -1X7 -1X8 -1X11-1X81
-37,5 x 75
detail A
HAMANN
sign -37,5 x 75
subplate HxW
275 x 334 mm
detail A
cable outlet / compound
Consider the protective note according to DIN ISO 16016!
10 mm
2x3, 2mm
102 mm
36 mm
30 mm
30 mm
4 6
C:\WSCAD55\PROJEKTE\HAMANN_SN10884\
Date 26.05.2017 standard electric cabinet HLCP 025 assembly plan terminal box draw. no. =A
created Hennel HAMANN AG com. no. +1K1
Bei der Lehmkuhle 4
checked Hennel 21279 Hollenstedt Project pages: Blatt 5
state change date name norm DIN61346 root HAMANN_HLCP025_V8 created for created by 10884 overall 52 WSCAD 5.5 von 7 sh
Current: 28
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
30 mm 35 mm 35 mm
75 mm
25 mm
door
25 mm
25 mm
door
300 mm
25 mm
35 mm 39 mm 39 mm 39 mm 39 mm 30 mm 30 mm
25 mm
2xbore 5xbore
16,5mm 20,5mm
210 mm
30 mm
35 mm
7xbore 3xbore 22 mm 12 mm
20,5mm 32,5mm
1xbor
Consider the protective note according to DIN ISO 16016!
6,5mm 1xbor
9,0mm
5xbore
35 mm
32,5mm
30 mm
64 mm
30 mm 30 mm 30 mm 30 mm
155 mm 380 mm
view right side view from the bottom
5 7
C:\WSCAD55\PROJEKTE\HAMANN_SN10884\
Date 26.05.2017 standard electric cabinet HLCP 025 breakout flange + side panel draw. no. Z-HA1000001-025-V8.j =A
created Hennel HAMANN AG terminal box com. no. HA1000001S +1K1
Bei der Lehmkuhle 4
checked Hennel 21279 Hollenstedt Project pages: Blatt 6
state change date name norm DIN61346 root HAMANN_HLCP025_V8 created for created by 10884 overall 52 WSCAD 5.5 von 7 sh
Current: 29
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
detail A
switch cabinet AE 1031.500
300 x 380 x 210 mm (HxWxD)
20
detail A
8,7
20
Consider the protective note according to DIN ISO 16016!
6
C:\WSCAD55\PROJEKTE\HAMANN_SN10884\
Date 26.05.2017 standard electric cabinet HLCP 025 dimensional drawing terminal draw. no. Z-HA1000001-025-V8.j =A
created Hennel HAMANN AG box,view from aft com. no. HA1000001S +1K1
Bei der Lehmkuhle 4
checked Hennel 21279 Hollenstedt Project pages: Blatt 7
state change date name norm DIN61346 root HAMANN_HLCP025_V8 created for created by 10884 overall 52 WSCAD 5.5 von 7 sh
Current: 30
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
c a b l ei d e n t i f i c a t i o n page
c a b l ei d e n t i f i cation
stripterminal:
= A + 1 -1X 1 inside
e xternal 1
e x ternal target internal
t a rget
4G1,5mmÄ
4G1,5mmÄ
4G1,5mmÄ
4G1,5mmÄ
4G1,5mmÄ
4 x 2, 5mmÄ
page/path
web strap
wire strap
=A+1-W1 MPRXCX
function text
connection
connection
=A+1-W1101 MPRXCX
=A+1-W1116 MPRXCX
=A+1-W1113 MPRXCX
=A+1-W1104 MPRXCX
=A+1-W1107 MPRXCX
terminalnumbers
identification
identification
GNYE power supply =A+MSB-X1.1 PE PE -1X1 . 1.2
BN macerator -M1.1 U 1 -Q1.2 2 1.3
BK macerator -M1.1 V 2 -Q1.2 4 1.3
GY macerator -M1.1 W 3 -Q1.2 6 1.3
GNYE macerator -M1.1 PE PE -1X1 . 1.3
BN feeding pump -M1.2 U 4 -Q1.3 2 1.5
BK feeding pump -M1.2 V 5 -Q1.3 4 1.5
GY feeding pump -M1.2 W 6 -Q1.3 6 1.5
GNYE feeding pump -M1.2 PE PE -1X1 . 1.6
BN terminal box +1K1 =A+1K1-1X1 7 7 -Q2.1 2 2.2
BK terminal box +1K1 =A+1K1-1X1 8 8 -Q2.1 4 2.2
GY terminal box +1K1 =A+1K1-1X1 9 9 -Q2.1 6 2.2
GNYE terminal box +1K1 =A+1K1-1X1 PE PE -1X1 . 2.2
10 -Q2.2 2 2.4
11 -Q2.2 4 2.4
12 -Q2.2 6 2.4
PE -1X1 . 2.4
BN discharge pump -M2.2 U 13 -Q2.3 2 2.6
BK discharge pump -M2.2 V 14 -Q2.3 4 2.6
GY discharge pump -M2.2 W 15 -Q2.3 6 2.6
GNYE discharge pump -M2.2 PE PE -1X1 . 2.6
BN terminal box +1K1 =A+1K1-1X1 16 16 -F3.1 2 3.2
BK terminal box +1K1 =A+1K1-1X1 17 17 -F3.1 4 3.2
GY terminal box +1K1 =A+1K1-1X1 18 18 -F3.1 6 3.2
GNYE terminal box +1K1 =A+1K1-1X1 PE PE -1X1 . 3.2
Consider the protective note according to DIN ISO 16016!
2
C:\WSCAD55\PROJEKTE\HAMANN_SN10884\
Date 26.05.2017 standard electric cabinet HLCP 025 terminal diagram =A+1-1X1 draw. no. Z-HA1000001-025-V8.j =
created Hennel HAMANN AG com. no. HA1000001S +
Bei der Lehmkuhle 4
checked Hennel 21279 Hollenstedt Project pages: Blatt 1
state change date name norm DIN61346 root HAMANN_HLCP025_V8 created for created by 10884 overall 52 WSCAD 5.5 von 18 sh
Current: 31
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
c a b l ei d e n t i f i c a t i o n page
c a b l ei d e n t i f i cation
stripterminal:
=A +1-1X 3 inside
e xternal 2
e x ternal target internal
t a rget
2 x 2, 5mmÄ
page/path
web strap
wire strap
function text
connection
connection
terminalnumbers
identification
identification
= A+ 1 - W1 3 0 1 Sp e z i alkabel
BU dosing pump -M5.1 1 1 -K5.1 14 5.2
BN dosing pump -M5.1 2 2 -K5.1 24 5.2
Consider the protective note according to DIN ISO 16016!
1 3
C:\WSCAD55\PROJEKTE\HAMANN_SN10884\
Date 26.05.2017 standard electric cabinet HLCP 025 terminal diagram =A+1-1X3 draw. no. Z-HA1000001-025-V8.j =
created Hennel HAMANN AG com. no. HA1000001S +
Bei der Lehmkuhle 4
checked Hennel 21279 Hollenstedt Project pages: Blatt 2
state change date name norm DIN61346 root HAMANN_HLCP025_V8 created for created by 10884 overall 52 WSCAD 5.5 von 18 sh
Current: 32
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
c a b l ei d e n t i f i c a t i o n page
c a b l ei d e n t i f i cation
stripterminal:
=A +1-1X 4 inside
e xternal 3
e x ternal target internal
t a rget
2 x 0 , 75mmÄ
7 x 2 x 0, 75mmÄ
7 x 2 x 0, 75mmÄ
page/path
web strap
wire strap
function text
=A+1-W1401 FMGCH
=A+1-W1425 FMGCH
connection
connection
= A+ 1 -W1401_I LI YCY
terminalnumbers
identification
identification
BU1 terminal box +1K1 =A+1K1-1X4 1 1 -K3.2 11 3.5
WH1 terminal box +1K1 =A+1K1-1X4 2 2 -K8.4 Q0+ wh 3.5
BU2 terminal box +1K1 =A+1K1-1X4 3 3 -K8.4 Q0- bn 3.5
WH2 terminal box +1K1 =A+1K1-1X4 4 4 -K3.2 14 3.5
5 -K3.1 A2 3.6
BU3 terminal box +1K1 =A+1K1-1X4 6 6 -K3.1 A1 3.6
7 -1X24 2 10.2
8 -K7.1 I0 10.2
9 -K7.2 24V 10.2
10 -K7.1 I1 10.3
11 -K7.3 24V 10.3
12 -K7.1 I2 10.3
BU5 terminal box +1K1 =A+1K1-1X4 13 13 -K8.1 24V 10.4
WH5 terminal box +1K1 =A+1K1-1X4 14 14 -1X24 8 10.4
BU6 terminal box +1K1 =A+1K1-1X4 15 15 10.4
WH6 terminal box +1K1 =A+1K1-1X4 16 16 -K7.1 I3 10.4
BU7 terminal box +1K1 =A+1K1-1X4 17 17 -K8.2 24V 10.5
WH7 terminal box +1K1 =A+1K1-1X4 18 18 -K7.1 I4 10.5
19 -K8.3 24V 10.6
20 -K7.1 I5 10.6
21 -K8.4 24V 10.6
22 -K7.1 I6 10.7
23 10.7
24 -K7.1 I7 10.7
BU1 terminal box +1K1 =A+1K1-1X4 25 25 11.2
WH1 terminal box +1K1 =A+1K1-1X4 26 26 -K7.3 I0 11.2
BU2 terminal box +1K1 =A+1K1-1X4 27 27 -K7.3 I1 11.3
Consider the protective note according to DIN ISO 16016!
28 11.3
WH2 terminal box +1K1 =A+1K1-1X4 29 29 11.4
BU3 terminal box +1K1 =A+1K1-1X4 30 30 -K7.3 I2 11.4
WH3 terminal box +1K1 =A+1K1-1X4 31 31 -K7.3 I3 11.5
32 11.5
33 11.6
34 -K11.1 A1 11.6
35 -K8.1 I1 11.7
36 11.7
BU4 terminal box +1K1 =A+1K1-1X4 37 37 12.2
WH4 terminal box +1K1 =A+1K1-1X4 38 38 -K8.1 I2 12.2
BU5 terminal box +1K1 =A+1K1-1X4 39 39 -K8.1 I3 12.3
40 12.3
2 4
C:\WSCAD55\PROJEKTE\HAMANN_SN10884\
Date 26.05.2017 standard electric cabinet HLCP 025 terminal diagram =A+1-1X4 draw. no. Z-HA1000001-025-V8.j =
created Hennel HAMANN AG com. no. HA1000001S +
Bei der Lehmkuhle 4
checked Hennel 21279 Hollenstedt Project pages: Blatt 3
state change date name norm DIN61346 root HAMANN_HLCP025_V8 created for created by 10884 overall 52 WSCAD 5.5 von 18 sh
Current: 33
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
c a b l ei d e n t i f i c a t i o n page
c a b l ei d e n t i f i cation
stripterminal:
=A +1-1X 4 inside
e xternal 4
e x ternal target internal
t a rget
1x2x0, 75mmÄ
7 x 2 x 0, 75mmÄ
page/path
web strap
wire strap
function text
=A+1-W1425 FMGCH
connection
connection
= A+ 1 -W1441 TCX(C)
terminalnumbers
identification
identification
BU1 dosing pump -M5.1 7 41 12.4
WH1 dosing pump -M5.1 8 42 -K8.2 I0 12.4
WH5 terminal box +1K1 =A+1K1-1X4 43 43 12.6
BU6 terminal box +1K1 =A+1K1-1X4 44 44 12.6
WH6 terminal box +1K1 =A+1K1-1X4 45 45 12.7
BU7 terminal box +1K1 =A+1K1-1X4 46 46 -K8.2 I1 12.7
47 -1X24 5 15.4
48 15.4
49 15.5
50 15.5
51 15.6
52 15.6
53 15.7
54 15.7
Consider the protective note according to DIN ISO 16016!
3 5
C:\WSCAD55\PROJEKTE\HAMANN_SN10884\
Date 26.05.2017 standard electric cabinet HLCP 025 terminal diagram =A+1-1X4 draw. no. Z-HA1000001-025-V8.j =
created Hennel HAMANN AG com. no. HA1000001S +
Bei der Lehmkuhle 4
checked Hennel 21279 Hollenstedt Project pages: Blatt 4
state change date name norm DIN61346 root HAMANN_HLCP025_V8 created for created by 10884 overall 52 WSCAD 5.5 von 18 sh
Current: 34
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
c a b l ei d e n t i f i c a t i o n page
c a b l ei d e n t i f i cation
stripterminal:
=A +1-1X 7 inside
e xternal 5
e x ternal target internal
t a rget
1x2x0, 75mmÄ
7 x 2 x 0, 75mmÄ
page/path
web strap
wire strap
function text
=A+1-W1701 FMGCH
connection
connection
terminalnumbers
= A+ 1 - W1 7 0 5_K TCX(C)
identification
identification
BU1 terminal box +1K1 =A+1K1-1X7 1 1 -K7.3 Q0 13.2
2 -1X24 9 13.2
WH1 terminal box +1K1 =A+1K1-1X7 3 3 -K7.3 Q1 13.2
4 -K7.1 0V 13.2
BU1 valve dry-run protection -Y13.3 + 5 -K7.3 Q2 13.3
WH1 valve dry-run protection -Y13.3 - 6 -K7.2 0V 13.3
WH2 terminal box +1K1 =A+1K1-1X7 7 7 -K7.3 Q3 13.4
8 -K7.3 0V 13.4
BU3 terminal box +1K1 =A+1K1-1X7 9 9 -K8.1 Q0 13.4
10 -K8.1 0V 13.5
WH3 terminal box +1K1 =A+1K1-1X7 11 11 -K8.1 Q1 13.5
12 -K8.2 0V 13.5
BU4 terminal box +1K1 =A+1K1-1X7 13 13 -K8.1 Q2 13.6
14 -K8.3 0V 13.6
WH4 terminal box +1K1 =A+1K1-1X7 15 15 -K8.1 Q3 13.7
16 -K8.4 0V 13.7
BU5 terminal box +1K1 =A+1K1-1X7 17 17 15.2
WH5 terminal box +1K1 =A+1K1-1X7 18 18 15.2
BU6 terminal box +1K1 =A+1K1-1X7 19 19 15.3
WH6 terminal box +1K1 =A+1K1-1X7 20 20 15.3
Consider the protective note according to DIN ISO 16016!
4 6
C:\WSCAD55\PROJEKTE\HAMANN_SN10884\
Date 26.05.2017 standard electric cabinet HLCP 025 terminal diagram =A+1-1X7 draw. no. Z-HA1000001-025-V8.j =
created Hennel HAMANN AG com. no. HA1000001S +
Bei der Lehmkuhle 4
checked Hennel 21279 Hollenstedt Project pages: Blatt 5
state change date name norm DIN61346 root HAMANN_HLCP025_V8 created for created by 10884 overall 52 WSCAD 5.5 von 18 sh
Current: 35
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
c a b l ei d e n t i f i c a t i o n page
c a b l ei d e n t i f i cation
stripterminal:
=A +1-1X 8 inside
e xternal 6
e x ternal target internal
t a rget
2 x 0 , 75mmÄ
4 x 2 x 0, 75mmÄ
page/path
web strap
wire strap
function text
=A+1-W1801 FMGCH
connection
connection
= A+ 1 - W1 8 03_I LI YCY
terminalnumbers
identification
identification
BU1 terminal box +1K1 =A+1K1-1X8 1 1 -1X24 4 17.5
WH1 terminal box +1K1 =A+1K1-1X8 2 2 -1X24 10 17.6
3 -K8.3 Q0- bn 17.6
BU2 terminal box +1K1 =A+1K1-1X8 4 4 -K8.3 Q0+ wh 17.6
WH2 terminal box +1K1 =A+1K1-1X8 5 5 17.6
BU3 terminal box +1K1 =A+1K1-1X8 6 6 17.6
sreen -W1801 scr PE 17.6
PE -W18103_17.1 scr 17.6
Consider the protective note according to DIN ISO 16016!
5 7
C:\WSCAD55\PROJEKTE\HAMANN_SN10884\
Date 26.05.2017 standard electric cabinet HLCP 025 terminal diagram =A+1-1X8 draw. no. Z-HA1000001-025-V8.j =
created Hennel HAMANN AG com. no. HA1000001S +
Bei der Lehmkuhle 4
checked Hennel 21279 Hollenstedt Project pages: Blatt 6
state change date name norm DIN61346 root HAMANN_HLCP025_V8 created for created by 10884 overall 52 WSCAD 5.5 von 18 sh
Current: 36
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
c a b l ei d e n t i f i c a t i o n page
c a b l ei d e n t i f i cation
stripterminal:
=A +1-1X9 inside
e xternal 7
e x ternal target internal
t a rget
page/path
web strap
wire strap
function text
connection
connection
terminalnumbers
identification
identification
1 -Q1.1 14 18.2
2 -Q1.1 13 18.2
3 -K14.2 12 18.2
4 -K14.2 14 18.3
5 -K14.2 11 18.3
6 -K14.3 12 18.3
7 -K14.3 14 18.3
8 -K14.3 11 18.4
9 -K11.1 12 18.4
10 -K11.1 14 18.4
11 -K11.1 11 18.5
12 -Q2.2 14 18.5
13 -Q2.2 13 18.5
14 -Q2.3 14 18.6
15 -Q2.3 13 18.6
16 -K14.1 12 18.7
17 -K14.1 14 18.7
18 -K14.1 11 18.7
PE 18.7
PE 18.7
Consider the protective note according to DIN ISO 16016!
6 8
C:\WSCAD55\PROJEKTE\HAMANN_SN10884\
Date 26.05.2017 standard electric cabinet HLCP 025 terminal diagram =A+1-1X9 draw. no. Z-HA1000001-025-V8.j =
created Hennel HAMANN AG com. no. HA1000001S +
Bei der Lehmkuhle 4
checked Hennel 21279 Hollenstedt Project pages: Blatt 7
state change date name norm DIN61346 root HAMANN_HLCP025_V8 created for created by 10884 overall 52 WSCAD 5.5 von 18 sh
Current: 37
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
c a b l ei d e n t i f i c a t i o n page
c a b l ei d e n t i f i cation
stripterminal:
= A + 1-1X 1 1 inside
e xternal 8
e x ternal target internal
t a rget
3x1, 5mmÄ
7 x 2 x 0, 75mmÄ
page/path
web strap
wire strap
function text
=A+1-W1401 FMGCH
connection
connection
=A+1-W11101 MPRXCX
terminalnumbers
identification
identification
BN terminal box +1K1 =A+1K1-1X11 1 1 -K6.1 14 6.3
BU terminal box +1K1 =A+1K1-1X11 2 2 -K6.1 24 6.3
GNYE terminal box +1K1 =A+1K1-1X11 PE PE -1X1 . 6.3
PE 6.3
BU4 terminal box +1K1 =A+1K1-1X11 3 3 -1X24 4 6.4
WH4 terminal box +1K1 =A+1K1-1X11 4 4 -K7.2 I2 6.4
Consider the protective note according to DIN ISO 16016!
7 9
C:\WSCAD55\PROJEKTE\HAMANN_SN10884\
Date 26.05.2017 standard electric cabinet HLCP 025 terminal diagram =A+1-1X11 draw. no. Z-HA1000001-025-V8.j =
created Hennel HAMANN AG com. no. HA1000001S +
Bei der Lehmkuhle 4
checked Hennel 21279 Hollenstedt Project pages: Blatt 8
state change date name norm DIN61346 root HAMANN_HLCP025_V8 created for created by 10884 overall 52 WSCAD 5.5 von 18 sh
Current: 38
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
c a b l ei d e n t i f i c a t i o n page
c a b l ei d e n t i f i cation
stripterminal:
=A +1-1X 24 inside
e xternal 9
e x ternal target internal
t a rget
page/path
web strap
wire strap
function text
connection
connection
terminalnumbers
identification
identification
1 -F4.2 2 4.4
-1X4 7 2 -F3.1 54 4.4
-1X81 1 3 -1X89 1 4.4
terminal box +1K1 -1X8 1 4 -F4.2 13 4.4
-1X4 47 5 4.5
6 4.5
7 -T4.1 - 4.6
-P7.1 0V 8 -1X4 14 4.6
-K3.2 A2 9 -1X7 2 4.6
-1X89 4 10 -1X8 2 4.6
11 4.6
-K8.4 I0- 12 -K8.4 I1- 4.6
inside -K8.3 I0- 13 -K8.3 I1- 4.6
14 4.6
PE -T4.1 PE 4.6
earthing bolt M8x35 -1X1 . PE -P7.1 PE 4.7
Consider the protective note according to DIN ISO 16016!
8 10
C:\WSCAD55\PROJEKTE\HAMANN_SN10884\
Date 26.05.2017 standard electric cabinet HLCP 025 terminal diagram =A+1-1X24 draw. no. Z-HA1000001-025-V8.j =
created Hennel HAMANN AG com. no. HA1000001S +
Bei der Lehmkuhle 4
checked Hennel 21279 Hollenstedt Project pages: Blatt 9
state change date name norm DIN61346 root HAMANN_HLCP025_V8 created for created by 10884 overall 52 WSCAD 5.5 von 18 sh
Current: 39
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
c a b l ei d e n t i f i c a t i o n page
c a b l ei d e n t i f i cation
stripterminal:
= A + 1 -1 X 81 inside
e xternal 10
e x ternal target internal
t a rget
2 x 0 , 75mmÄ
2 x 0 , 75mmÄ
1x2x0, 75mmÄ
1x2x0, 75mmÄ
4 x 2 x 0, 75mmÄ
page/path
web strap
wire strap
function text
connection
connection
=A+1-W18101 FMGCH
=A+1-W18107 FMGCH
=A+1-W18103 FMGCH
=A+1-W18101_I LI YCY
= A+ 1 - W18107_I LI YCY
terminalnumbers
identification
identification
BU1 level holding tank -B16.1 1 1 -1X24 3 16.2
WH1 level holding tank -B16.1 2 2 -T16.1 2 wh 16.2
sreen -W18101 scr PE -W18101_I scr 16.2
sreen -W18103 scr PE 16.2
BU1 level sludge tank ship -B16.2 1 3 16.3
WH1 level sludge tank ship -B16.2 2 4 -T16.1 5 bn 16.3
BU1 terminal box +1K1 =A+1K1-1X81 7 7 17.2
WH1 terminal box +1K1 =A+1K1-1X81 8 8 -K8.3 I0+ wh 17.2
PE -W18107_I scr 17.2
sreen -W18107 scr PE 17.2
BU2 terminal box +1K1 =A+1K1-1X81 9 9 17.3
WH2 terminal box +1K1 =A+1K1-1X81 10 10 -K8.3 I1+ bn 17.3
Consider the protective note according to DIN ISO 16016!
9 11
C:\WSCAD55\PROJEKTE\HAMANN_SN10884\
Date 26.05.2017 standard electric cabinet HLCP 025 terminal diagram =A+1-1X81 draw. no. Z-HA1000001-025-V8.j =
created Hennel HAMANN AG com. no. HA1000001S +
Bei der Lehmkuhle 4
checked Hennel 21279 Hollenstedt Project pages: Blatt 10
state change date name norm DIN61346 root HAMANN_HLCP025_V8 created for created by 10884 overall 52 WSCAD 5.5 von 18 sh
Current: 40
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
c a b l ei d e n t i f i c a t i o n page
c a b l ei d e n t i f i cation
stripterminal:
=A +1-1X 89 inside
e xternal 11
e x ternal target internal
t a rget
4 x 0 , 75mmÄ
page/path
web strap
wire strap
function text
connection
connection
terminalnumbers
= A+ 1 - W1 8 9 02_I LI YCY
identification
identification
PE 16.5
PE -W18902_I scr 16.5
1 -1X24 3 16.5
2 -T16.1 10 wh 16.6
3 -T16.1 12 bn 16.6
4 -1X24 10 16.6
5 16.6
6 -T16.1 7 GN 16.6
7 -T16.1 9 ye 16.7
8 16.7
Consider the protective note according to DIN ISO 16016!
10 12
C:\WSCAD55\PROJEKTE\HAMANN_SN10884\
Date 26.05.2017 standard electric cabinet HLCP 025 terminal diagram =A+1-1X89 draw. no. Z-HA1000001-025-V8.j =
created Hennel HAMANN AG com. no. HA1000001S +
Bei der Lehmkuhle 4
checked Hennel 21279 Hollenstedt Project pages: Blatt 11
state change date name norm DIN61346 root HAMANN_HLCP025_V8 created for created by 10884 overall 52 WSCAD 5.5 von 18 sh
Current: 41
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
c a b l ei d e n t i f i c a t i o n page
c a b l ei d e n t i f i cation
stripterminal:
=A +1-1X230 inside
e xternal 12
e x ternal target internal
t a rget
page/path
web strap
wire strap
function text
connection
connection
terminalnumbers
identification
identification
-K6.1 11 1 -T6.1 2.1 6.3
-F5.1 1 2 6.3
-K6.1 21 3 -T6.1 2.2 6.3
-K5.1 21 4 -1X1 . 6.3
Consider the protective note according to DIN ISO 16016!
11 13
C:\WSCAD55\PROJEKTE\HAMANN_SN10884\
Date 26.05.2017 standard electric cabinet HLCP 025 terminal diagram =A+1-1X230 draw. no. Z-HA1000001-025-V8.j =
created Hennel HAMANN AG com. no. HA1000001S +
Bei der Lehmkuhle 4
checked Hennel 21279 Hollenstedt Project pages: Blatt 12
state change date name norm DIN61346 root HAMANN_HLCP025_V8 created for created by 10884 overall 52 WSCAD 5.5 von 18 sh
Current: 42
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
c a b l ei d e n t i f i c a t i o n page
c a b l ei d e n t i f i cation
stripterminal:
=A +1K 1- 1X1 inside
e xternal 13
e x ternal target internal
t a rget
4G1,5mmÄ
4G1,5mmÄ
4G1,5mmÄ
4G1,5mmÄ
page/path
web strap
wire strap
function text
connection
connection
=A+1-W1116 MPRXCX
=A+1-W1107 MPRXCX
terminalnumbers
=A+1-W1116_K MPRXCX
=A+1-W1107_K MPRXCX
identification
identification
BN sludge pump =A+1-M2.1 U 7 =A+1-1X1 7 BN 2.2
BK sludge pump =A+1-M2.1 V 8 =A+1-1X1 8 BK 2.2
GY sludge pump =A+1-M2.1 W 9 =A+1-1X1 9 GY 2.2
GNYE sludge pump =A+1-M2.1 PE PE =A+1-1X1 PE GNYE 2.2
BN clear phase pump =A+1-M3.1 L1 16 =A+1-1X1 16 BN 3.2
BK clear phase pump =A+1-M3.1 L2 17 =A+1-1X1 17 BK 3.2
GY clear phase pump =A+1-M3.1 L3 18 =A+1-1X1 18 GY 3.2
GNYE clear phase pump =A+1-M3.1 PE PE =A+1-1X1 PE GNYE 3.2
Consider the protective note according to DIN ISO 16016!
12 14
C:\WSCAD55\PROJEKTE\HAMANN_SN10884\
Date 26.05.2017 standard electric cabinet HLCP 025 terminal diagram =A+1K1-1X1 draw. no. Z-HA1000001-025-V8.j =
created Hennel HAMANN AG com. no. HA1000001S +
Bei der Lehmkuhle 4
checked Hennel 21279 Hollenstedt Project pages: Blatt 13
state change date name norm DIN61346 root HAMANN_HLCP025_V8 created for created by 10884 overall 52 WSCAD 5.5 von 18 sh
Current: 43
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
c a b l ei d e n t i f i c a t i o n page
c a b l ei d e n t i f i cation
stripterminal:
= A + 1 K 1-1X 4 inside
e xternal 14
e x ternal target internal
t a rget
4 x 0, 5mmÄ
4 x 0, 5mmÄ
2 x 0 , 25mmÄ
2 x 2 x 0, 75mmÄ
2 x 2 x 0, 75mmÄ
2 x 2 x 0, 75mmÄ
4 x 2 x 0, 75mmÄ
7 x 2 x 0, 75mmÄ
7 x 2 x 0, 75mmÄ
page/path
web strap
wire strap
function text
=A+1-W1401 FMGCH
=A+1-W1425 FMGCH
connection
connection
=A+1-W1431_K FMGCH
=A+1-W1401_K FMGCH
terminalnumbers
=A+1-W1439_K FMGCH
=A+1-W1427_K FMGCH
identification
identification
= A+ 1 - W1 4 1 9 _ K Sp e zialkabel
= A+ 1 - W1 4 1 5 _ K Sp e zialkabel
= A+ 1 - W1 4 4 5 _ K Sp e z i a l k a b el
BU1 clear phase pump =A+1-M3.1 1 1 =A+1-1X4 1 BU1 3.5
WH1 clear phase pump =A+1-M3.1 3 2 =A+1-1X4 2 WH1 3.5
BU2 clear phase pump =A+1-M3.1 4 3 =A+1-1X4 3 BU2 3.5
WH2 clear phase pump =A+1-M3.1 5 4 =A+1-1X4 4 WH2 3.5
5 3.6
BU3 clear phase pump =A+1-M3.1 10 6 =A+1-1X4 6 BU3 3.6
BN level sludge flotation tank =A+1-B10.1 1 13 =A+1-1X4 13 BU5 10.4
BU level sludge flotation tank =A+1-B10.1 3 14 =A+1-1X4 14 WH5 10.4
WH level sludge flotation tank =A+1-B10.1 2 15 =A+1-1X4 15 BU6 10.4
BK level sludge flotation tank =A+1-B10.1 4 16 =A+1-1X4 16 WH6 10.4
BU compressed air ok =A+1-B10.2 13 17 =A+1-1X4 17 BU7 10.5
WH compressed air ok =A+1-B10.2 14 18 =A+1-1X4 18 WH7 10.5
BU1 3-way valve, sludge =A+1-Y13.1 2 25 =A+1-1X4 25 BU1 11.2
WH1 3-way valve, sludge =A+1-Y13.1 3 26 =A+1-1X4 26 WH1 11.2
WH2 3-way valve, sludge =A+1-Y13.1 6 27 =A+1-1X4 27 BU2 11.3
28 11.3
BU1 3-way valve, overboard/ circulation =A+1-Y13.2 2 29 =A+1-1X4 29 WH2 11.4
WH1 3-way valve, overboard/ circulation =A+1-Y13.2 3 30 =A+1-1X4 30 BU3 11.4
WH2 3-way valve, overboard/ circulation =A+1-Y13.2 6 31 =A+1-1X4 31 WH3 11.5
32 11.5
BU1 ball valve outlet sludge =A+1-Y13.7 2 37 =A+1-1X4 37 BU4 12.2
WH2 ball valve outlet sludge =A+1-Y13.7 3 38 =A+1-1X4 38 WH4 12.2
WH1 ball valve outlet sludge =A+1-Y13.7 6 39 =A+1-1X4 39 BU5 12.3
40 12.3
BN level saturator high =A+1-B12.1 1 43 =A+1-1X4 43 WH5 12.6
BU level saturator high =A+1-B12.1 3 44 =A+1-1X4 44 BU6 12.6
WH level saturator high =A+1-B12.1 2 45 =A+1-1X4 45 WH6 12.7
Consider the protective note according to DIN ISO 16016!
BK level saturator high =A+1-B12.1 4 46 =A+1-1X4 46 BU7 12.7
sreen =A+1-W1445_K scr PE =A+1-W1425 scr 12.7
13 15
C:\WSCAD55\PROJEKTE\HAMANN_SN10884\
Date 26.05.2017 standard electric cabinet HLCP 025 terminal diagram =A+1K1-1X4 draw. no. Z-HA1000001-025-V8.j =
created Hennel HAMANN AG com. no. HA1000001S +
Bei der Lehmkuhle 4
checked Hennel 21279 Hollenstedt Project pages: Blatt 14
state change date name norm DIN61346 root HAMANN_HLCP025_V8 created for created by 10884 overall 52 WSCAD 5.5 von 18 sh
Current: 44
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
c a b l ei d e n t i f i c a t i o n page
c a b l ei d e n t i f i cation
stripterminal:
= A + 1 K 1-1X 7 inside
e xternal 15
e x ternal target internal
t a rget
1x2x0, 75mmÄ
1x2x0, 75mmÄ
1x2x0, 75mmÄ
1x2x0, 75mmÄ
1x2x0, 75mmÄ
1x2x0, 75mmÄ
7 x 2 x 0, 75mmÄ
page/path
web strap
wire strap
function text
=A+1-W1701 FMGCH
connection
connection
terminalnumbers
= A+1-W1711_K TCX(C)
= A+ 1 -W1715_K TCX(C)
= A+ 1 -W1713_K TCX(C)
= A+ 1 -W1701_K TCX(C)
= A+ 1 - W1 7 0 9_K TCX(C)
= A+ 1 - W1 7 0 3_K TCX(C)
identification
identification
BU1 3-way valve, sludge =A+1-Y13.1 + 1 =A+1-1X7 1 BU1 13.2
WH1 3-way valve, sludge =A+1-Y13.1 - 2 13.2
BU1 3-way valve, overboard/ circulation =A+1-Y13.2 + 3 =A+1-1X7 3 WH1 13.2
WH1 3-way valve, overboard/ circulation =A+1-Y13.2 - 4 13.2
5 13.3
6 13.3
7 =A+1-1X7 7 WH2 13.4
8 13.4
BU1 valve cleaning flotation tank =A+1-Y13.4 + 9 =A+1-1X7 9 BU3 13.4
WH1 valve cleaning flotation tank =A+1-Y13.4 - 10 13.5
BU1 spare =A+1-Y13.5 + 11 =A+1-1X7 11 WH3 13.5
WH1 spare =A+1-Y13.5 - 12 13.5
BU1 check valve saturator =A+1-Y13.6 + 13 =A+1-1X7 13 BU4 13.6
WH1 check valve saturator =A+1-Y13.6 - 14 13.6
BU1 ball valve outlet sludge =A+1-Y13.7 + 15 =A+1-1X7 15 WH4 13.7
WH1 ball valve outlet sludge =A+1-Y13.7 - 16 13.7
17 =A+1-1X7 17 BU5 15.2
18 =A+1-1X7 18 WH5 15.2
19 =A+1-1X7 19 BU6 15.3
20 =A+1-1X7 20 WH6 15.3
Consider the protective note according to DIN ISO 16016!
14 16
C:\WSCAD55\PROJEKTE\HAMANN_SN10884\
Date 26.05.2017 standard electric cabinet HLCP 025 terminal diagram =A+1K1-1X7 draw. no. Z-HA1000001-025-V8.j =
created Hennel HAMANN AG com. no. HA1000001S +
Bei der Lehmkuhle 4
checked Hennel 21279 Hollenstedt Project pages: Blatt 15
state change date name norm DIN61346 root HAMANN_HLCP025_V8 created for created by 10884 overall 52 WSCAD 5.5 von 18 sh
Current: 45
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
c a b l ei d e n t i f i c a t i o n page
c a b l ei d e n t i f i cation
stripterminal:
= A + 1 K 1-1X 8 inside
e xternal 16
e x ternal target internal
t a rget
5 x 0, 5mmÄ
4 x 2 x 0, 75mmÄ
page/path
web strap
wire strap
function text
=A+1-W1801 FMGCH
connection
connection
terminalnumbers
identification
identification
= A+ 1 - W1 8 0 1 _ K Sp e zialkabel
WH pressure release valve =A+1-Y17.1 1 1 =A+1-1X8 1 BU1 17.5
GN pressure release valve =A+1-Y17.1 3 2 =A+1-1X8 2 WH1 17.6
3 17.6
BN pressure release valve =A+1-Y17.1 2 4 =A+1-1X8 4 BU2 17.6
YE pressure release valve =A+1-Y17.1 4 5 =A+1-1X8 5 WH2 17.6
GY pressure release valve =A+1-Y17.1 5 6 =A+1-1X8 6 BU3 17.6
sreen =A+1-W1801_K scr PE =A+1-W1801 scr 17.6
Consider the protective note according to DIN ISO 16016!
15 17
C:\WSCAD55\PROJEKTE\HAMANN_SN10884\
Date 26.05.2017 standard electric cabinet HLCP 025 terminal diagram =A+1K1-1X8 draw. no. Z-HA1000001-025-V8.j =
created Hennel HAMANN AG com. no. HA1000001S +
Bei der Lehmkuhle 4
checked Hennel 21279 Hollenstedt Project pages: Blatt 16
state change date name norm DIN61346 root HAMANN_HLCP025_V8 created for created by 10884 overall 52 WSCAD 5.5 von 18 sh
Current: 46
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
c a b l ei d e n t i f i c a t i o n page
c a b l ei d e n t i f i cation
stripterminal:
=A +1K1- 1X11 inside
e xternal 17
e x ternal target internal
t a rget
3x1, 5mmÄ
4 x 0, 5mmÄ
7 x 2 x 0, 75mmÄ
page/path
web strap
wire strap
function text
=A+1-W1401 FMGCH
connection
connection
=A+1-W11101 MPRXCX
terminalnumbers
identification
identification
= A+ 1 - W111 0 5 _ K Sp e zialkabel
-T6.1 L 1 =A+1-1X11 1 BN 6.3
-T6.1 N 2 =A+1-1X11 2 BU 6.3
-T6.1 PE PE =A+1-1X11 PE GNYE 6.3
PE 6.3
-T6.1 5 3 =A+1-1X11 3 BU4 6.4
-T6.1 6 4 =A+1-1X11 4 WH4 6.4
GN uv-desinfection plant =A+1-7H1 1 5 -T6.1 1 6.5
YE uv-desinfection plant =A+1-7H1 2 6 -T6.1 2 6.5
WH uv-desinfection plant =A+1-7H1 3 7 -T6.1 3 6.5
BN uv-desinfection plant =A+1-7H1 4 8 -T6.1 4 6.5
Consider the protective note according to DIN ISO 16016!
16 18
C:\WSCAD55\PROJEKTE\HAMANN_SN10884\
Date 26.05.2017 standard electric cabinet HLCP 025 terminal diagram =A+1K1-1X11 draw. no. Z-HA1000001-025-V8.j =
created Hennel HAMANN AG com. no. HA1000001S +
Bei der Lehmkuhle 4
checked Hennel 21279 Hollenstedt Project pages: Blatt 17
state change date name norm DIN61346 root HAMANN_HLCP025_V8 created for created by 10884 overall 52 WSCAD 5.5 von 18 sh
Current: 47
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
c a b l ei d e n t i f i c a t i o n page
c a b l ei d e n t i f i cation
stripterminal:
=A +1K 1-1X 81 inside
e xternal 18
e x ternal target internal
t a rget
1x2x0, 75mmÄ
1x2x0, 75mmÄ
4 x 2 x 0, 75mmÄ
page/path
web strap
wire strap
function text
connection
connection
=A+1-W18107 FMGCH
terminalnumbers
=A+1-W18109_K FMGCH
=A+1-W18107_K FMGCH
identification
identification
BU1 level flotation tank =A+1-B17.1 1 7 =A+1-1X81 7 BU1 17.2
WH1 level flotation tank =A+1-B17.1 2 8 =A+1-1X81 8 WH1 17.2
BU1 pressure saturator =A+1-B17.2 1 9 =A+1-1X81 9 BU2 17.3
WH1 pressure saturator =A+1-B17.2 2 10 =A+1-1X81 10 WH2 17.3
sreen =A+1-W18109_K scr PE =A+1-W18107 scr 17.3
Consider the protective note according to DIN ISO 16016!
17
C:\WSCAD55\PROJEKTE\HAMANN_SN10884\
Date 26.05.2017 standard electric cabinet HLCP 025 terminal diagram =A+1K1-1X81 draw. no. Z-HA1000001-025-V8.j =
created Hennel HAMANN AG com. no. HA1000001S +
Bei der Lehmkuhle 4
checked Hennel 21279 Hollenstedt Project pages: Blatt 18
state change date name norm DIN61346 root HAMANN_HLCP025_V8 created for created by 10884 overall 52 WSCAD 5.5 von 18 sh
Current: 48
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
l i s to f c a b l e s H A M A N N _ S N 1 0 8 8 4 page:1
c a be
l l e as
d
No. circuit
identification f i e l dd e v i c e target
identification typeo f c i r c u i t
d iameter
o c c u ped
i
1 -W1 MPRXCX 4x2,5mm€ =A+1-R1.1 power supply MPRXCX 4x2,5mm€ * outside 12,1mm 4
2 -W1101 MPRXCX 4G1,5mm€ =A+1-M1.1 macerator MPRXCX 4G1,5mm€ * outside 11,0mm 4
3 -W1104 MPRXCX 4G1,5mm€ =A+1-M1.2 feeding pump MPRXCX 4G1,5mm€ * outside 11,0mm 4
4 -W1107 MPRXCX 4G1,5mm€ =A+1-1X1 terminal box +1K1 MPRXCX 4G1,5mm€ * outside 11,0mm 4
5 -W1107_K MPRXCX 4G1,5mm€ =A+1-M2.1 sludge pump MPRXCX 4G1,5mm€ outside 11,0mm 4
6 -W1113 MPRXCX 4G1,5mm€ =A+1-M2.2 discharge pump MPRXCX 4G1,5mm€ outside 11,0mm 4
7 -W1116 MPRXCX 4G1,5mm€ =A+1-1X1 terminal box +1K1 MPRXCX 4G1,5mm€ * outside 11,0mm 4
8 -W1116_K MPRXCX 4G1,5mm€ =A+1-M3.1 clear phase pump MPRXCX 4G1,5mm€ outside 11,0mm 4
9 -W1301 special wire 2x2.5mm€ =A+1-M5.1 dosing pump special wire 2x2.5mm€ * outside 11,0mm 2
10 -W1401 FMGCH 7x2x0,75mm€ =A+1-1X4 terminal box +1K1 FMGCH 7x2x0,75 mm€ * outside 15,5mm 13
11 -W1401_I LIYCY 2x0,75mm€ =A+1-K8.4 inside LIYCY 2x0,75mm€ outside 6,6mm 2
12 -W1401_K FMGCH 4x2x0,75 mm€ =A+1-M3.1 clear phase pump FMGCH 4x2x0,75 mm€ outside 13,0mm 5
13 -W1415_K special wire 4x0.5mm€ =A+1-B10.1 level sludge flotation tank special wire 4x0.5mm€ outside 8,0mm 4
14 -W1419_K special wire 2x0.25mm€ =A+1-B10.2 compressed air ok special wire 2x0.25mm€ outside 5,0mm 2
15 -W1425 FMGCH 7x2x0,75mm€ =A+1-1X4 terminal box +1K1 FMGCH 7x2x0,75 mm€ * outside 15,5mm 13
16 -W1427_K FMGCH 2x2x0,75 mm€ =A+1-Y13.1 3-way valve, sludge FMGCH 2x2x0,75 mm€ outside 9,0mm 3
17 -W1431_K FMGCH 2x2x0,75 mm€ =A+1-Y13.2 3-way valve, overboard/ circulation FMGCH 2x2x0,75 mm€ outside 9,0mm 3
18 -W1439_K FMGCH 2x2x0,75 mm€ =A+1-Y13.7 ball valve outlet sludge FMGCH 2x2x0,75 mm€ outside 9,0mm 3
19 -W1441 TCX(C) 1x2x0,75mm€ =A+1-M5.1 dosing pump TCX(C) 1x2x0,75mm€ * outside 6,1mm 2
20 -W1443_K special wire 3x0.75mm€ =A+1-M5.1 level flocculant low special wire 3x0.75mm€ outside 7,0mm 2
21 -W1445_K special wire 4x0.5mm€ =A+1-B12.1 level saturator high special wire 4x0.5mm€ outside 8,0mm 4
22 -W1701 FMGCH 7x2x0,75mm€ =A+1-1X7 terminal box +1K1 FMGCH 7x2x0,75 mm€ * outside 15,5mm 11
23 -W1701_K TCX(C) 1x2x0,75mm€ =A+1-Y13.1 3-way valve, sludge TCX(C) 1x2x0,75mm€ outside 6,1mm 2
24 -W1703_K TCX(C) 1x2x0,75mm€ =A+1-Y13.2 3-way valve, overboard/ circulation TCX(C) 1x2x0,75mm€ outside 6,1mm 2
25 -W1705_K TCX(C) 1x2x0,75mm€ =A+1-Y13.3 valve dry-run protection TCX(C) 1x2x0,75mm€ outside 6,1mm 2
26 -W1709_K TCX(C) 1x2x0,75mm€ =A+1-Y13.4 valve cleaning flotation tank TCX(C) 1x2x0,75mm€ outside 6,1mm 2
27 -W1711_K TCX(C) 1x2x0,75mm€ =A+1-Y13.5 spare TCX(C) 1x2x0,75mm€ outside 6,1mm 2
28 -W1713_K TCX(C) 1x2x0,75mm€ =A+1-Y13.6 check valve saturator TCX(C) 1x2x0,75mm€ outside 6,1mm 2
29 -W1715_K TCX(C) 1x2x0,75mm€ =A+1-Y13.7 ball valve outlet sludge TCX(C) 1x2x0,75mm€ outside 6,1mm 2
30 -W1801 FMGCH 4x2x0,75 mm€ =A+1-1X8 terminal box +1K1 FMGCH 4x2x0,75 mm€ * outside 13,0mm 5
31 -W1801_K special wire 5x0.5mm€ =A+1-Y17.1 pressure release valve special wire 5x0.5mm€ outside 8,5mm 5
32 -W1803_I LIYCY 2x0,75mm€ =A+1-K8.3 inside LIYCY 2x0,75mm€ outside 6,6mm 2
33 -W11101 MPRXCX 3x1,5mm€ =A+1-1X11 terminal box +1K1 MPRXCX 3x1,5mm€ * outside 8,8mm 3
34 -W11105_K special wire 4x0.5mm€ =A+1-7H1 uv-desinfection plant special wire 4x0.5mm€ outside 10,0mm 4
35 -W18101 FMGCH 1x2x0,75 mm€ =A+1-B16.1 level holding tank FMGCH 1x2x0,75 mm€ * outside 8,5mm 2
36 -W18101_I LIYCY 2x0,75mm€ =A+1-T16.1 inside LIYCY 2x0,75mm€ outside 6,6mm 2
37 -W18103 FMGCH 1x2x0,75 mm€ =A+1-B16.2 level sludge tank ship FMGCH 1x2x0,75 mm€ * outside 8,5mm 2
Consider the protective note according to DIN ISO 16016!
38 -W18107 FMGCH 4x2x0,75 mm€ =A+1-1X81 terminal box +1K1 FMGCH 4x2x0,75 mm€ * outside 13,0mm 4
39 -W18107_I LIYCY 2x0,75mm€ =A+1-K8.3 inside LIYCY 2x0,75mm€ outside 6,6mm 2
40 -W18107_K FMGCH 1x2x0,75 mm€ =A+1-B17.1 level flotation tank FMGCH 1x2x0,75 mm€ outside 8,5mm 2
41 -W18109_K FMGCH 1x2x0,75 mm€ =A+1-B17.2 pressure saturator FMGCH 1x2x0,75 mm€ outside 8,5mm 2
42 -W18902_I LIYCY 4x0,75mm€ =A+1-T16.1 inside LIYCY 4x0,75mm€ outside 6,72mm 4
* items delivered
by shipyard
C:\WSCAD55\PROJEKTE\HAMANN_SN10884\
Date 26.05.2017 standard electric cabinet HLCP 025 list of cables draw. no. Z-HA1000001-025-V8.j =
created Hennel HAMANN AG com. no. HA1000001S +
Bei der Lehmkuhle 4
checked Hennel 21279 Hollenstedt Project pages: Blatt 1
state change date name norm DIN61346 root HAMANN_HLCP025_V8 created for created by 10884 overall 52 WSCAD 5.5 von 1 sh
Current: 49
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
L i s to f m a t e r i a l s page:1
No. No. name material number manufacturer
quotation
1 4 power contactor 3kW/400V, DC-energised DILM7-10(24VDC) Eaton =A+1-Q1.2, =A+1-Q1.3, =A+1-Q2.1, =A+1-Q2.2
2 1 power contactor 4kW/400V, DC-energised DILM9-10(24VDC) Eaton =A+1-Q2.3
3 5 SWD-contactor module DILA, DILM… 38, 2 Ein-/1 Ausgang DIL-SWD-32-002 Eaton =A+1-K9.1, =A+1-K9.2, =A+1-K9.3, =A+1-K9.4, =A+1-K9.5
5 connector SWD-DT ribbon cable SWD4-8SF2-5 Eaton
4 2 analogue module 2 inputs / 2 outputs, 0-10V/0-20mA EU5E-SWD-2A2A Eaton =A+1-K8.3, =A+1-K8.4
2 connector SWD-DT ribbon cable SWD4-8SF2-5 Eaton
5 4 digital module, 4 in-/outputs EU5E-SWD-4D4D Eaton =A+1-K7.2, =A+1-K7.3, =A+1-K8.1, =A+1-K8.2
4 connector SWD-DT ribbon cable SWD4-8SF2-5 Eaton
6 1 digital module, 8 inputs EU5E-SWD-8DX Eaton =A+1-K7.1
1 connector SWD-DT ribbon cable SWD4-8SF2-5 Eaton
7 1 circuit breaker S-characteristic, 1-pole, 3A FAZ-S3/1 Eaton =A+1-F4.3
8 1 universal peer, SWD-DT, front-fixation M22-SWD-NOP Eaton =A+1-K8.5
1 connector SWD-DT ribbon cable SWD4-8SF2-5 Eaton
9 1 main switch as emergency switching, 3-pole, 25A P1-25/EA/SVB Eaton =A+1-Q1.1
1 standard auxiliary contact 1N/O, 1NC for P1-P3 HI11-P1/P3E Eaton
1 add-on front plate main switch de/en T0,T3,P1 ZFS61/62-T0 Eaton
10 2 motor protection switch, 3-pole, manually operated PKZM0-1,6 Eaton =A+1-F1.2, =A+1-F2.1
2 standard auxiliary contact 1N/O NHI-E-10-PKZ0 Eaton
2 assembly+adapter for PKZM0+DILM7-15 PKZM0-XDM12 Eaton
11 1 motor protection switch, 3-pole, manually operated PKZM0-10 Eaton =A+1-F3.1
1 standard auxiliary contact 1N/O NHI-E-10-PKZ0 Eaton
1 assembly+adapter for PKZM0+DILM7-15 PKZM0-XDM12 Eaton
12 2 transformer protection switch, 3-pole, manually operated PKZM0-1-T Eaton =A+1-F4.1, =A+1-F6.1
13 1 motor protection switch, 3-pole, manually operated PKZM0-2,5 Eaton =A+1-F1.1
1 standard auxiliary contact 1N/O NHI-E-10-PKZ0 Eaton
1 assembly+adapter for PKZM0+DILM7-15 PKZM0-XDM12 Eaton
2 Three-phase commoning link for 4 PKZ0 w/o NHI, 63A B3.0/4-PKZM0 Eaton
14 2 motor protection switch, 3-pole, manually operated PKZM0-4 Eaton =A+1-F2.2, =A+1-F2.3
2 standard auxiliary contact 1N/O NHI-E-10-PKZ0 Eaton
2 assembly+adapter for PKZM0+DILM7-15 PKZM0-XDM12 Eaton
15 1 circuit breaker, fuses,char.-B, 1-pole, 2A PXL-B2/1 Eaton =A+1-F4.2
1 auxiliary switch for FAZ 1 shutter, 1 opener FAZ-XHIN11 Eaton
16 1 circuit breaker, fuses,char.-B, 1-pole, 6A PXL-B6/1 Eaton =A+1-F5.1
17 1 network closer SWD-DT ribbon cable SWD4-RC8-10 Eaton =A+1-K9.6
18 1 SmartWire-DT Touch Display with controll system, 5.7" XV-102-E6-57TVRC-10 Eaton =A+1-P7.1
1 ribbon cable, SWD-DT, 8-pole, 5m SWD4-5LF8-24-2S Eaton
1 SDHC-memory card, 4GB, Class 10 15-020-228 Verbatim
Consider the protective note according to DIN ISO 16016!
19 1 electronic ballast UV-lamps 80W 84…264V LTW-UVC75-F/M Elekt.Gera =A+1K1-T6.1
20 6 coupler relay EMR, 1W, 24VDC complete 38.51.7.024.0050 Finder =A+1-K3.1, =A+1-K3.2, =A+1-K11.1, =A+1-K14.1, =A+1-K14.2, =A+1-K14.3
21 2 coupler relay 2W, 24VDC incl. LED 48.52.9.024.0050 Finder =A+1-K5.1, =A+1-K6.1
22 2.15m VKW 75x25 cable duct 097387525 OEM =A+1-25 x 75, =A+1-25 x 75, =A+1-25 x 75, =A+1-25 x 75, =A+1-25 x 75, =A+1-25 x 75
23 0.65m VKW 75x37,5 cable duct 097387537 OEM =A+1-37,5 x 75, =A+1K1-37,5 x 75, =A+1K1-37,5 x 75, =A+1K1-37,5 x 75
24 0.55m VKW 75x50 cable duct 097387550 OEM =A+1-50 x 75
25 0.35m mounting rail, galvanised, perforated, 2000mm, 35x7.5mm 0975490101 OEM =A+1-U, =A+1-U
26 1.24m mounting rail, galvanised, perforated, 2000mm, 35x15mm 0975490103 OEM =A+1-U, =A+1-U, =A+1-U, =A+1K1-U
27 1 2 channel isolatron amplifier TV500P, passive TV500P-2-100-0 Martens =A+1-T16.1
28 1 power supply unit QUINT-PS/3AC/24DC/10 2866705 Phoenix =A+1-T4.1
29 1 non-standard cabinet 300x380x155mm,1d 1030000 Rittal =A+1K1-U
1 SZ door lock for AE cabinets 2519000 Rittal
30 1 cabinet 760x600x210mm, 1d 1076500 Rittal =A+1-U
2
C:\WSCAD55\PROJEKTE\HAMANN_SN10884\
Date 26.05.2017 standard electric cabinet HLCP 025 List of materials draw. no. Z-HA1000001-025-V8.j =
created Hennel HAMANN AG com. no. HA1000001S +
Bei der Lehmkuhle 4
checked Hennel 21279 Hollenstedt Project pages: Blatt 1
state change date name norm DIN61346 root HAMANN_HLCP025_V8 created for created by 10884 overall 52 WSCAD 5.5 von 3 sh
Current: 50
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
L i s to f m a t e r i a l s page:2
No. No. name material number manufacturer
quotation
1 SZ assembly rack for AE cabinets 600mm 2326000 Rittal
2 SZ wire conduit bracket, diam. 29mm 2591000 Rittal
1 SZ wire conduit, diam. 29mm 2589000 Rittal
1 SZ door lock for AE cabinets 2519000 Rittal
31 1 three-phase EMC-filter, 16A FN 3258-16-44 Schaffner =A+1-R1.1
32 1 single-ph. multi-winding transform. 0,315kVA, 208-600V/2x115VAC UTI0,315-115 Trafomodern =A+1-T6.1
33 1 terminal accessores in general ..... Weidm‚ller =A+1-1X1
1 ZEW 35/2 terminal angle 8630740000 Weidm‚ller
1 EM 8/30 end bracket marker 1806120000 Weidm‚ller
1 ZAP/TW ZDK 2.5 end plate/dividing plate beige 1674730000 Weidm‚ller
3 SZ assembly frame, flat 2365000 Rittal
34 1 terminal accessores in general ..... Weidm‚ller =A+1-1X4
1 ZEW 35/2 terminal angle 8630740000 Weidm‚ller
1 EM 8/30 end bracket marker 1806120000 Weidm‚ller
1 ZAP/TW ZDK 2.5 end plate/dividing plate beige 1674730000 Weidm‚ller
2 ZQV 2.5/20 cross connector pluggable 20-pole 1908960000 Weidm‚ller
1 ZQV 2.5/3 cross connector pluggable 3-pole 1608870000 Weidm‚ller
1 ZQV 2.5/3 cross connector pluggable 2-pole 1608860000 Weidm‚ller
35 9 terminal accessores in general ..... Weidm‚ller =A+1-1X3, =A+1-1X8, =A+1-1X9, =A+1-1X11, =A+1-1X230, =A+1K1-1X4, =A+1K1-1X8
=A+1K1-1X11, =A+1K1-1X81
13 ZEW 35/2 terminal angle 8630740000 Weidm‚ller
9 EM 8/30 end bracket marker 1806120000 Weidm‚ller
9 ZAP/TW ZDK 2.5 end plate/dividing plate beige 1674730000 Weidm‚ller
36 1 terminal accessores in general ..... Weidm‚ller =A+1-1X24
1 ZEW 35/2 terminal angle 8630740000 Weidm‚ller
1 EM 8/30 end bracket marker 1806120000 Weidm‚ller
1 ZAP/TW ZDK 2.5 end plate/dividing plate beige 1674730000 Weidm‚ller
1 ZQV 2.5/3 cross connector pluggable 3-pole 1608870000 Weidm‚ller
1 ZQV 2.5/4 cross connector pluggable 4-pole 1608880000 Weidm‚ller
37 2 terminal accessores in general ..... Weidm‚ller =A+1-1X7, =A+1K1-1X7
2 ZEW 35/2 terminal angle 8630740000 Weidm‚ller
2 EM 8/30 end bracket marker 1806120000 Weidm‚ller
2 ZAP/TW ZDK 2.5 end plate/dividing plate beige 1674730000 Weidm‚ller
2 ZQV 2.5/10 cross connector pluggable 10-pole 1608940000 Weidm‚ller
38 1 terminal accessores in general ..... Weidm‚ller =A+1-1X81
1 ZEW 35/2 terminal angle 8630740000 Weidm‚ller
1 EM 8/30 end bracket marker 1806120000 Weidm‚ller
Consider the protective note according to DIN ISO 16016!
1 ZAP/TW ZDK 2.5 end plate/dividing plate beige 1674730000 Weidm‚ller
1 ZQV 2.5/5 cross connector pluggable 5-pole 1608890000 Weidm‚ller
39 1 terminal accessores in general ..... Weidm‚ller =A+1-1X89
2 ZEW 35/2 terminal angle 8630740000 Weidm‚ller
1 EM 8/30 end bracket marker 1806120000 Weidm‚ller
1 ZAP/TW ZDK 2.5 end plate/dividing plate beige 1674730000 Weidm‚ller
2 ZQV 2.5/3 cross connector pluggable 3-pole 1608870000 Weidm‚ller
40 1 PE terminal, Screw connection, 6 mm€, green/yellow, WPE 6 1010200000 Weidm‚ller =A+1-1X1
41 91 double-tier tension terminal ZDK 2,5 1674300000 Weidm‚ller =A+1-1X1, =A+1-1X3, =A+1-1X4, =A+1-1X8, =A+1-1X9, =A+1-1X11, =A+1-1X81, =A+1-1X89
=A+1K1-1X1, =A+1K1-1X4, =A+1K1-1X7, =A+1K1-1X8, =A+1K1-1X11, =A+1K1-1X81
42 8 double-tier tension terminal ZDK 2,5 1689970000 Weidm‚ller =A+1-1X1, =A+1K1-1X1
43 9 double-tier tension terminal jumpered ZDK 2.5/V 1689990000 Weidm‚ller =A+1-1X24, =A+1-1X230
44 11 double-tier tension protective conductor terminal ZDK 2,5PE 1690000000 Weidm‚ller =A+1-1X8, =A+1-1X9, =A+1-1X11, =A+1-1X24, =A+1-1X81, =A+1-1X89, =A+1K1-1X4
1 3
C:\WSCAD55\PROJEKTE\HAMANN_SN10884\
Date 26.05.2017 standard electric cabinet HLCP 025 List of materials draw. no. Z-HA1000001-025-V8.j =
created Hennel HAMANN AG com. no. HA1000001S +
Bei der Lehmkuhle 4
checked Hennel 21279 Hollenstedt Project pages: Blatt 2
state change date name norm DIN61346 root HAMANN_HLCP025_V8 created for created by 10884 overall 52 WSCAD 5.5 von 3 sh
Current: 51
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
L i s to f m a t e r i a l s page:3
No. No. name material number manufacturer
quotation
=A+1K1-1X8, =A+1K1-1X11, =A+1K1-1X81
45 10 double-tier diode terminal 1690020000 Weidm‚ller =A+1-1X7
46 2 EMSKV 32, brass cable gland, IP68 10065004 WISKA =A+1K1-U10.1, =A+1K1-U11.2
2 EMMU-EMV M32x1,5, EMV locknut brass 10063214 WISKA
2 MFD 32/03/090 multiple sealing insert, M32, 3x7-9mm 10102170 WISKA
47 2 EMSKV 32, brass cable gland, IP68 10065004 WISKA =A+1K1-U13.2, =A+1K1-U13.3
2 EMMU-EMV M32x1,5, EMV locknut brass 10063214 WISKA
2 MFD 32/05/070 multiple sealing insert, M32, 5x5-7mm 10101140 WISKA
48 1 EMSKV 32, brass cable gland, IP68 10065004 WISKA =A+1K1-U15.1
1 EMMU-EMV M32x1,5, EMV locknut brass 10063214 WISKA
1 MFD 32/03/090 multiple sealing insert, M32, 3x7-9mm 10102170 WISKA
3 BS7 SPRINT blind plug, polyamide, 7mm 10064005 WISKA
49 5 EMSKV 16 EMV-Z, brass cable gland, IP68 10065017 WISKA =A+1-U10.2, =A+1-U10.3, =A+1-U10.4, =A+1K1-U17.2, =A+1K1-U17.3
5 EMMU-EMV M16x1,5, EMV locknut brass 10063211 WISKA
50 24 EMSKV 20 EMV-Z, brass cable gland, IP68 10065018 WISKA =A+1-U1.2, =A+1-U1.3, =A+1-U2.1, =A+1-U2.2, =A+1-U2.3, =A+1-U3.1, =A+1-U5.1
=A+1-U6.1, =A+1-U11.2, =A+1-U15.1, =A+1-U15.2, =A+1-U16.1, =A+1-U17.1, =A+1-U17.2
=A+1K1-U2.1, =A+1K1-U2.2, =A+1K1-U3.1, =A+1K1-U3.2, =A+1K1-U3.4, =A+1K1-U6.1
=A+1K1-U6.2, =A+1K1-U17.1, =A+1K1-U17.4, =A+1K1-U17.5
24 EMMU-EMV M20x1,5, EMV locknut brass 10063212 WISKA
51 3 EMSKV 25 EMV-Z, brass cable gland, IP68 10065019 WISKA =A+1-U1.1, =A+1-U10.1, =A+1-U18.1
3 EMMU-EMV M25x1,5, EMV locknut brass 10063213 WISKA
52 6 EMSKV 32 EMV-Z, brass cable gland, IP68 10065020 WISKA =A+1-U3.2, =A+1-U11.1, =A+1-U13.1, =A+1K1-U3.3, =A+1K1-U11.1, =A+1K1-U13.1
6 EMMU-EMV M32x1,5, EMV locknut brass 10063214 WISKA
Consider the protective note according to DIN ISO 16016!
2
C:\WSCAD55\PROJEKTE\HAMANN_SN10884\
Date 26.05.2017 standard electric cabinet HLCP 025 List of materials draw. no. Z-HA1000001-025-V8.j =
created Hennel HAMANN AG com. no. HA1000001S +
Bei der Lehmkuhle 4
checked Hennel 21279 Hollenstedt Project pages: Blatt 3
state change date name norm DIN61346 root HAMANN_HLCP025_V8 created for created by 10884 overall 52 WSCAD 5.5 von 3 sh
Current: 52
You might also like
- Technical Manual: For Installation, Operation and Maintenance of100% (1)Technical Manual: For Installation, Operation and Maintenance of129 pages
- Sewage Traetment Plant WCMBR-20 (U) Instruction Book PDF67% (3)Sewage Traetment Plant WCMBR-20 (U) Instruction Book PDF19 pages
- M-55-1 Sewage New Manual 003079 - MBR8-32 Users ManualNo ratings yetM-55-1 Sewage New Manual 003079 - MBR8-32 Users Manual55 pages
- Hull 1157 GO 98739 STC02-13 Final Drawing Iss1L100% (1)Hull 1157 GO 98739 STC02-13 Final Drawing Iss1L247 pages
- Operation Principal of Sewage Treatmentplant and Point of MNo ratings yetOperation Principal of Sewage Treatmentplant and Point of M12 pages
- Thruster Oil Filter Compendium CJC 120713UKNo ratings yetThruster Oil Filter Compendium CJC 120713UK18 pages
- V1 - User Manual - TLC-BWM - 14.12.2019 - Dual Languages100% (1)V1 - User Manual - TLC-BWM - 14.12.2019 - Dual Languages160 pages
- Sewage Treatment Plant - Super Trident STA-C and ST-CNo ratings yetSewage Treatment Plant - Super Trident STA-C and ST-C4 pages
- MF38B Instruction Book For Oil Purifier (FO)No ratings yetMF38B Instruction Book For Oil Purifier (FO)271 pages
- Ballast Water Treatment Ocean Saver TechnologyNo ratings yetBallast Water Treatment Ocean Saver Technology5 pages
- I NST Al L at I On, Operat I NG and Mai NT Enance Manual Ows-Com100% (4)I NST Al L at I On, Operat I NG and Mai NT Enance Manual Ows-Com74 pages
- V 10 WCMBR Sewage Treatment Unit CatalougeSILI PUMPNo ratings yetV 10 WCMBR Sewage Treatment Unit CatalougeSILI PUMP4 pages
- EVAC Advanced Wastewater Treatment Plant: Membrane Bio Reactor (MBR) 40-360100% (1)EVAC Advanced Wastewater Treatment Plant: Membrane Bio Reactor (MBR) 40-3602 pages
- JOWA - UV Sterilizer and Rehardening FilterNo ratings yetJOWA - UV Sterilizer and Rehardening Filter16 pages
- Desmi Operations and Maintenance Instructions100% (2)Desmi Operations and Maintenance Instructions29 pages
- NORWATER NWE2-40 Installation, Operation & Maintenance ManualNo ratings yetNORWATER NWE2-40 Installation, Operation & Maintenance Manual228 pages
- DPU, Two-Stage Titanium Plate Type Fresh Water GeneratorNo ratings yetDPU, Two-Stage Titanium Plate Type Fresh Water Generator4 pages
- Tm-A550-13 (15) - So49223 - C3 3800 Tech Manual Rev100% (2)Tm-A550-13 (15) - So49223 - C3 3800 Tech Manual Rev304 pages
- NTS0311120 Navig8 110K COT BWMS OPERATION MANUAL PDFNo ratings yetNTS0311120 Navig8 110K COT BWMS OPERATION MANUAL PDF104 pages
- STP COMMISSIONING and O&M MANUAL - AGILE VENTURESNo ratings yetSTP COMMISSIONING and O&M MANUAL - AGILE VENTURES35 pages
- Temperature Effects On Groundnut Shell Ash Concrete: Richie I. UmasaborNo ratings yetTemperature Effects On Groundnut Shell Ash Concrete: Richie I. Umasabor4 pages
- Đề Cương Môn Tiếng Anh Lớp 6 -2021-2022No ratings yetĐề Cương Môn Tiếng Anh Lớp 6 -2021-202216 pages
- Human Excretory System: Excretion in Human BeingsNo ratings yetHuman Excretory System: Excretion in Human Beings2 pages
- Urban Solid Waste Management in Dili Community IJERTV7IS050040No ratings yetUrban Solid Waste Management in Dili Community IJERTV7IS0500405 pages
- SITXINV002 Maintain The Quality of Perishable Items Answers PDFNo ratings yetSITXINV002 Maintain The Quality of Perishable Items Answers PDF6 pages
- Waste Management Among Households in Manarcad PachayathNo ratings yetWaste Management Among Households in Manarcad Pachayath4 pages
- Feasibility Study On The Production of Bioethanol From Tapioca Solid Waste To Meet The National Demand of BiofuelNo ratings yetFeasibility Study On The Production of Bioethanol From Tapioca Solid Waste To Meet The National Demand of Biofuel7 pages
- Case Study Cambridge City Council: BackgroundNo ratings yetCase Study Cambridge City Council: Background2 pages
